CE-01 Electrical LSS Telecom IFC Specs

Micron Technology, Inc.
Blue Ridge
Manassas, VA
Seal Applies to Civil Design Seal Applies to Process Design

Specifications for the
Construction of
L TH OF V
EA I
W
RG
N
MO
Package CE-01
IN
C OM
IA
SCOTT R. HORTON
Lic. No. 59318
Digital Signature
R
PR
EE
OF
ES
N
S IO GI
NA L E N
2019.04.25 12:02:40-04'00'
Seal Applies to Structural Design Electrical, Life Safety Seal Applies to Mechanical Design
Security, and
EA
L TH O F V Telecommunications
W I
N
RG
MO
IN
*****
C OM
KRISTEN A. LEIBELT
IA
Lic. No. 18256

Digital Signature
AR T
CH I TEC
2019.04.25 09:47:31-07'00' Jacobs

Seal Applies to Architectural Design Portland, Oregon 97201 Seal Applies to I&C Design
L TH OF V
April 25, 2019 L TH OF V
EA I EA I
W W
N
RG
N
RG
MO
MO
IN
IN
C OM
C OM
IA
JOHN B. SCHURING
IA
Lic. No. 32531 DONALD EDWARD MARTENS

Digital Signature No. 59929
R
PR
R
PR
25-April-2019
EE
EE
FE
O
IN
OF
ES
N
GI SS
S IO I ONA L E NG
NA L E N
2019.04.25 09:39:57-07'00' Expires: 12-31-2020

Seal Applies to Electrical Design Seal Applies to LSS & Telecom Design
April 25, 2019
Blue Ridge Package CE-01
Rev. 0
Title Page 1 Micron Confidential
Package Number: CE‐01
Package Title: Electrical, LSS, Telecommunications
Section 00 01 10
Table of Contents
Spec Number Specification Discipline Rev Date
Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements
00 01 10.CE-01 Table of Contents - CE-01 Administrative 0 4/25/2019
Division 01 - General Requirements
01 10 00.CE-01 Summary Package CE-01 Electrical, LSS, Telecommunications Administrative 0 4/25/2019
01 30 00 Administrative Requirements Administrative 1 12/4/2018
01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Administrative 1 12/4/2018
01 35 13.46 Clean Zone General Requirements Administrative 0 9/20/2018
01 35 13.49 Clean Zone Construction Management Administrative 0 9/20/2018
01 40 00 Quality Requirements Administrative 0 6/15/2018
01 43 45 Outgassing Criteria for Clean Zone Products Administrative 0 9/20/2018
01 45 19 Site Vibration Control Requirements Administrative 0 6/15/2018
01 60 00 Product Requirements Administrative 0 6/15/2018
01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements Administrative 0 6/15/2018
01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal Administrative 1 12/4/2018
01 80 13 Project Site Design Criteria Administrative 0 6/15/2018
01 81 13 Sustainable Design Requirements Administrative 2 2/19/2019
01 91 00 Commissioning Administrative 1 12/4/2018
Division 03 - Concrete
03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete Structural 1 3/28/2019
Division 05 - Metals
05 43 00 Slotted Channel Framing Structural 2 2/7/2019
Division 07 - Thermal and Moisture Protection
07 84 00 Firestopping Architectural 0 3/28/2019
07 90 00 Joint Protection Architectural 2 3/14/2019
Division 08 - Openings
08 31 13 Access Doors and Frames Architectural 0 3/28/2019
Division 26 - Electrical
26 05 01 Basic Electrical Requirements Electrical 1 9/19/2018
26 05 05 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Electrical 0 9/19/2018
26 05 13 Medium-Voltage Cables Electrical 0 4/25/2019
26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Electrical 0 3/14/2019
26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Electrical 0 10/25/2018
26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Electrical 0 4/9/2019
26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Electrical 1 3/14/2019
26 05 34 Surface Raceways Electrical 0 4/25/2019
26 05 36 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems Electrical 1 4/25/2019
26 05 49 Vibration Isolation for Electrical Systems Electrical 0 4/9/2019
26 05 53 Identification of Electrical Systems Electrical 0 10/25/2018
26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems Electrical 0 4/25/2019
26 09 13 Electrical Power Monitoring System Electrical 0 9/19/2018
26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices Electrical 0 4/4/2019
26 11 16 Secondary Unit Substations Electrical 0 9/19/2018
26 12 13 Liquid-Filled, Medium-Voltage Transformers Electrical 0 9/19/2018
26 12 16 Dry-Type, Medium-Voltage Transformers Electrical 0 9/19/2018
26 13 13 Medium-Voltage Circuit Breaker Switchgear Electrical 0 9/19/2018
26 13 16 Medium-Voltage Fusible Interrupter Switchgear Electrical 0 9/19/2018
26 13 44 Medium-Voltage Gas-Insulated Circuit Breaker Switchgear Electrical 0 9/19/2018
26 18 39 Medium-Voltage Motor Controllers Electrical 0 9/19/2018
26 22 00 Low-Voltage Transformers Electrical 0 4/25/2019
26 23 00 Low-Voltage Switchgear Electrical 2 4/25/2019
26 24 16 Panelboards Electrical 0 4/25/2019
704618 Electrical/LSS/Telecom
25 April 2019 ‐ Rev. 0 00 01 10.CE‐01 ‐ 1
Section 00 01 10
Table of Contents
Spec Number Specification Discipline Rev Date
26 25 00 Enclosed Bus Assemblies Electrical 0 4/25/2019
26 27 26 Wiring Devices Electrical 0 4/23/2019
26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Electrical 0 4/25/2019
26 29 13 Enclosed Controllers Electrical 0 4/9/2019
26 29 16 Contactors Electrical 0 4/25/2019
26 29 23 Variable Frequency Motor Controllers Electrical 0 6/15/2018
26 32 13 Engine Generators Electrical 0 1/10/2019
26 32 14 Engine Generator Control Panel Electrical 0 1/10/2019
26 33 46 Battery Monitoring Electrical 0 4/25/2019
26 33 53 Static Uninterruptible Power Supply Electrical 0 4/25/2019
26 35 53 Dynamic Voltage Regulator Electrical 0 11/1/2018
26 36 23 Automatic Transfer Switches Electrical 0 1/10/2019
26 41 00 Facility Lightning Protection Electrical 0 4/25/2019
26 50 00 Lighting Electrical 1 3/14/2019
26 60 10 Heat Tracing System - Electric Electrical 1 4/25/2019
26 60 20 OEM Electric Motors Electrical 1 12/20/2018
Division 27 - Communications
27 00 10 General Communications Requirements Telecommunications 0 10/25/2018
27 05 28 Communications Innerduct Telecommunications 0 4/9/2019
27 05 53 Communications Identification Telecommunications 0 10/25/2018
27 10 10 Basic Communications Materials and Methods Telecommunications 3 4/25/2019
27 10 20 Communications Systems Testing Telecommunications 0 4/25/2019
27 13 00 Backbone Communications Cabling Telecommunications 0 4/25/2019
27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling Telecommunications 1 4/25/2019
27 15 00 - 300.11 Communications Horizontal Cabling - 300.11 CUP SCC Telecommunications 0 4/25/2019
27 15 00 - 300.21 Communications Horizontal Cabling - 300.21 CUP SCR Telecommunications 0 4/25/2019
27 15 00 - 300.22 Communications Horizontal Cabling - 300.22 CUP SCC Telecommunications 0 4/25/2019
27 15 00 - 301.11 Communications Horizontal Cabling - 301.11 FAB SE SCR Telecommunications 0 4/25/2019
27 15 00 - 301.12 Communications Horizontal Cabling - 301.12 FAB NE SCR Telecommunications 0 4/25/2019
27 15 00 - 301.13 Communications Horizontal Cabling - 301.13 FAB SW SCR Telecommunications 0 4/25/2019
27 15 00 - 301.14 Communications Horizontal Cabling - 301.14 FAB NW SCR Telecommunications 0 4/25/2019
Communications Horizontal Cabling - 301.21 FAB Data Center SCR Telecommunications 0 4/25/2019
27 15 00 - 301.21
27 15 00 - 301.23 Communications Horizontal Cabling - 301.23 FAB SCR Telecommunications 0 4/25/2019
27 15 00 - 301.41 Communications Horizontal Cabling - 301.41 FAB SCC Telecommunications 0 4/25/2019
Communications Horizontal Cabling - CP Utilization Cable Schedule Telecommunications 0 4/25/2019

27 15 00 - 301.CP
27 16 19 Communications Cross-Connections Telecommunications
Division 28 - Electronic Safety Security
28 13 70 Security Access and Surveillance Life Safety Security 0 4/25/2019
28 13 71 Closed Circuit Television Systems Life Safety Security 0 4/25/2019
28 31 50 Life Safety Systems Life Safety Security 0 4/9/2019
28 31 51 Fire Alarm System Life Safety Security 0 4/9/2019
28 31 52 Early Warning Smoke Detection Life Safety Security 0 4/23/2019
704618 Electrical/LSS/Telecom
25 April 2019 ‐ Rev. 0 00 01 10.CE‐01 ‐ 2
SECTION 01 10 00
SUMMARY – CE-01 Electrical, LSS, Telecommunications
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Contract description.
2. Specification conventions.
3. Specifications not included.
1.2 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION
A. Micron Technology, Inc. plans to build a new semiconductor fabrication facility (Fab
Building 301) on their existing manufacturing campus located in Manassas, Virginia.
The new fabrication facility will require a new Central Utility Plant (CUP Building 300)
and additional site development in support of this campus expansion. The campus is
expected to be developed over several years, through multiple project phases. Work of
“Project Blue Ridge” includes initial site preparations, infrastructure development,
retrofit of existing facilities, and construction of the Fab and CUP buildings required in
early development phases.
B. The Project Work has been divided into numerous packages. Each package may include
some or all of the following: Procurement of turnkey systems, purchase-only of
equipment and materials, installation of Owner-furnished material and equipment, and/or
procurement and installation of equipment and systems.
C. Package CE-01 Electrical, LSS, Telecommunications for the Project includes, but is not
limited to, the following listed items per discipline which are more specifically defined
on the Project Drawings and Specifications:
1. Civil:
a. Not applicable.
2. Structural:
a. Not applicable.
3. Architecture:
a. Not applicable.
4. Mechanical:
a. Not applicable.
5. Process:
a. Not applicable.
6. Electrical:
a. Basebuild of electrical systems in the FAB B301, CUP B300, tunnel, and
links, including:
1) Utility interface.
2) 35kV electrical main switchgear.
3) 35kV distribution switchgear to the FAB B301, CUP B300.
Summary – CE-01 Electrical, LSS,

704618 Telecommunications
25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 01 10 00 - 1
4) 125V DC system.
5) Cable tray system.
6) Equipment, building and system grounding.
7) PLC low impedance grounding system.
8) Lightning protection.
9) DVR system with power factor correction.
10) Emergency generators.
11) Emergency power system; switchgear, and automatic transfer
switches (ATS’s).
12) UPS systems.
13) 4160V switchgear.
14) Motor starters, including variable frequency drives and control.
15) 480V and 208V unit substations and respective distribution and
branch circuit panelboards.
16) Heat trace and control.
17) Power connection to facility, mechanical and process equipment.
18) Lighting and lighting control.
19) Convenience and special purpose electrical outlets.
b. Owner furnished equipment for installation
1) 38kV Gas Insulated Switchgear.
2) 4.16kV Transformers.
3) 5kV Switchgear.
4) 480V Unit Substations.
5) 208V Unit Substations.
6) Emergency generators
7) Emergency power system switchgear and ATS’s
8) DVR system equipment
7. Instrumentation and Controls:
a. Not applicable.
8. Life Safety and Security:
a. Fire Alarm System
1) Provide a fire alarm system with emergency voice
communications.
2) Provide a building fire alarm system that includes the features of
protected premises fire alarm system and that serves the general
fire alarm needs and occupant notification of the building or
buildings.
3) Provide fire alarm network backbone pathways and cabling for
two diverse routes to interconnect between new and existing fire
alarm panels.
4) Alter the existing campus fire alarm system(s) to integrate the
new B300\B301 fire alarm system / emergency voice
communications to provide complete functionality from the
existing fire command center in B130 “Post One” and the
alternate fire command center B201 Facility Operations Center.
5) Provide building fire alarm system emergency control function
interfaces.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 01 10 00 - 2
6) Provide initiating devices where required by governing laws,
codes, or standards and in nonrequired coverage to achieve
specific fire safety objectives.
7) Provide notification appliances where required by enforcing
authority, governing laws, codes, or standards.
b. Early Warning Smoke Detection (EWSD) System
1) Provide an integrated management system and communications
loop which configures, monitors and controls multiple remote
EWSD device networks, displays, programmers, and modules.
2) Provide air sampling-type early warning smoke detector and air
sampling pipe network for protected areas.
3) Provide the manufacturer required engineering calculations,
design, and isometric shop drawings.
c. Security
1) Expand existing network security access control system.
2) Provide card readers, request-to-exit, door status switches,
sounders, and electronic locking systems at access-controlled
doors.
3) Provide network security control panels.
d. Closed-Circuit Television (CCTV) Surveillance System
1) Expand the existing Lenel Video Servers.
2) Provide CCTV surveillance in sensitive areas.
9. Telecommunications:
a. FAB and CUP Buildings including Link and Trestle:
1) Build out of the Data Center, SCR’s and SCC’s with overhead
ladder rack trays, equipment racks/cabinets that will serve
cabling throughout the building
2) Backbone Pathways:
a) From Southern Data Center within FAB building to CUP
building.
b) Extend existing trestle conduits to CUP Building.
c) Within tunnel to connect CUP & FAB buildings.
d) Conduits from Data Center to the SCR’s and SCC’s
noted above.
e) Conduit pathways between Fab 6 building and Data
Center within Fab B301.
3) Horizontal Cabling:
a) Cable trays for distribution of horizontal cabling from all
SCR’s and SCC’s.
b) Cabling to Telecom Outlets (TO’s) & Consolidation
Points (CP’s) from SCR/SCC’s to serve the various
device types within the FAB including the infrastructure
to serve the future tools and SubFab level equipment.
c) Voice connections to serve all phone locations.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 01 10 00 - 3
4) First Responder Radio System:
a) Primary pathways for code required first responder radio
system per section 510 of the 2015 IFC. System devices,
equipment and cabling will follow in subsequent design
package.
1.3 SPECIFICATION CONVENTIONS
A. These specifications are written in imperative mood and streamlined form. This
imperative language is directed to the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise.
The words “shall be” are included by inference where a colon (:) is used within sentences
or phrases.
1.4 SPECIFICATIONS NOT INCLUDED
A. There may be other specification sections referenced in these issued specifications, but
they are not included in the Contract Documents because they do not apply to the Scope
of this Package:
1. Section 07 13 00 – Sheet Waterproofing.
2. Section 07 26 00 – Vapor Retarders.
3. Section 07 27 00 - Air Barriers.
4. Section 07 53 00 – Elastomeric Membrane Roofing – Fully Adhered.
5. Section 08 41 13 – Aluminum-Framed entrances and Storefronts.
6. Section 08 44 13 – Glazed Aluminum Curtainwall.
7. Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware.
8. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies.
9. Section 09 30 00 – Tiling.
10. Section 09 58 13 – Cleanroom Gasketed Ceiling System.
11. Section 09 67 24 – Chemical-Resistant Resinous Flooring.
12. Section 09 91 26 – Painting – Building.
13. Section 14 24 13 - Hydraulic Freight Elevators.
14. Section 14 24 23 - Hydraulic Passenger Elevators.
15. Section 28 31 54 - Hazardous Production Material Monitoring and Control
System.
16. Section 28 31 55 - Liquid Leak Detection System.
17. Section 40 05 15 – Piping Services.
END OF SECTION

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 01 10 00 - 4
SECTION 01 30 00
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Basic definitions.
2. Coordination and project conditions.
3. Surveying and utility location.
4. Geotechnical services.
5. Preconstruction meeting.
6. Site mobilization meeting.
7. Progress meetings.
8. Physical coordination meetings and 3D modeling.
9. Pre-installation meetings.
10. Correspondence.
11. Conflicts with or within the contract documents.
12. Codes and standards.
13. Product requirements and substitutions.
14. Alternates.
15. Warranty.
16. Work limitations.
17. Construction environment, health, and safety.
18. Work site security.
19. Quality control.
20. Coordination.
21. Site investigation and representation.
22. Contractor’s responsibility for utility location.
23. Layout data.
24. Preservation, restoration, and cleanup.
25. Project Photography, Webcams and Video Recording.
26. Cutting and patching.
27. Special procedures.
28. Supporting from building structure.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping
2. Section 07 90 00 – Joint Protection.
704618 Administrative Requirements

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 1
1.2 BASIC DEFINITIONS
A. Owner:
Micron Technology, Inc.
9600 Godwin Drive
Manassas, VA 20110
Contact: John Schafer, PM
Phone: 703-396-1141 Fax: 703-396-1700
Email: JSchafer@Micron.com
B. CH2M:
CH2M
2020 SW Fourth Avenue
Portland, OR 97201
Contact: Bob Savage, PM
Phone: 503-872-4891 Fax: 503-223-1494
Email: Robert.Savage@CH2M.com
C. Contractor:
Hoffman Construction Company

805 SW Broadway, Suite 2100
Portland, OR 97205
Contact: Rick Myers, PM
Phone: 503-221-8811 Fax: 503-221-8934
Email: Bill-Drinkward@Hoffmancorp.com
1. An agreement between the Owner and the above organization has been executed
to provide construction services.
2. Duties and responsibilities of the Contractor regarding the Contract Document

are as follows: The Contractor is appointed as the Owner’s representative for
work performed under this Contract. Where the Specifications require Owner
review, authorization, approval, investigation, concurrence, or other action the
Contractor to provide such action. Where the Specifications require Contractor to
submit to, notify, report to, cooperate with, or otherwise provide information to
the Owner, the Contractor to provide such information. In general, the rights and
obligations of the Owner under this Contract will be administered by the
Contractor.
D. Vendor: The authorized distributor or agent of the manufacturer to make direct sale of the
specified products and entering into an agreement with Owner. Wherever the word
“Contractor” appears in Division 1 through Division 48 of the Specifications as it relates
to the furnishing of items summarized in Section 01 10 00 – Summary, it is synonymous
with “Vendor” unless otherwise defined.

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 2
E. Changes: Modifications to the Contract.
1. Change Orders: Changes to the scope of work which impact the Contract sum or
Contract time require a fully executed change order.
2. Construction Change Directive: Written order prepared by CH2M and signed by
the Owner directing Contractor to make changes to the scope of work which may
or may not impact Contract sum or Contract time, but is evidence that the parties
expect that the construction change directive will be incorporated into a
subsequently issued change order.
3. Field Orders: Changes to the scope of work not requiring change in Contract sum
or Contract time will be made by a field order. If Contractor believes a field order
impacts Contract sum or Contract time, Contractor to notify Owner in writing
within 3 calendar days and before starting the field order change, except in an
emergency.
F. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials to mean hazardous substances as defined in

the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act,
hazardous waste as defined in the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, and similar
terms as used in applicable federal, state, and local statutes, rules, and regulations to
include carcinogenic, acutely toxic, flammable, or explosive materials in any form.
G. Substantial Completion: Project, or a specific portion of Project, is constructed and ready

for startup and/or beneficial use by Owner. Owner and Contractor will develop
Completion List at Substantial Completion.
H. Final Completion: Project, or a specific portion of Project, is constructed, Completion

List action items have been completed and documented, startup and commissioning has
been completed, and other Closeout Requirements have been met in accordance with
Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. Owner and Contractor will
develop the Final Punch List at Final Completion.
I. Other Common Terms:

1. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and
systems forming the Work, but does not include machinery and equipment used
for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may
also include existing materials or components required for reuse.
2. Furnish: To supply and deliver, unload, inspect for damage.
3. Install: To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, finish, cure, protect, clean, and
make ready for use.
4. Provide: To furnish and install.
1.3 COORDINATION AND PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of various sections of Project Manual to

ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction
elements.
B. Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible

with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent
responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service operating equipment.

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 3
C. Coordinate space requirements (with the designated space coordinator if assigned),
supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical and other trade Work indicated
diagrammatically on Drawings and in BIM models. Follow routing shown for pipes,
ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building.
Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for
maintenance, and for repairs.
D. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within
construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
E. Coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate sections in preparation for

Substantial Completion.
F. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective
Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of
Owner’s activities.
1.4 SURVEYING AND UTILITY LOCATION
A. Employ Land Surveyor registered in Manassas, Virginia.
B. Locate and protect survey control and reference points. Promptly notify CH2M of
discrepancies discovered.
C. Control datum for survey is that established by Owner provided survey.
D. Verify set-backs and easements; confirm drawing dimensions and elevations.
E. Provide field engineering services. Establish elevations, lines, and levels, utilizing
recognized engineering survey practices.
F. Prior to excavation, drilling, or driving (piles, ground rods, etc.), perform underground
utility location surveys utilizing appropriate technology as recommended by the
surveying company.
G. Submit copy of site drawing and certificate signed by Land Surveyor certifying
elevations and locations of the Work are in conformance with Contract Documents.
H. Maintain complete and accurate log of control and survey work as Work progresses.
1. Additional surveying scope items include the following: Provide record drawing
information of abandoned underground utilities within the work area including
utility type, size or diameter, with surveyed northing, easting, and elevation.
2. Provide record drawing information of constructed underground utilities. Prior to
backfilling of underground utilities, survey top of utility elevations, northing and
easting of horizontal and vertical bends, and minimum 200 feet intervals along
horizontal runs.
3. Provide record drawing information of constructed above ground site utility
features and appurtenances including but not limited to manholes, cleanouts,
storm drain collection structures, valve boxes, yard hydrants, and utility vaults

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 4
I. On completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare certified survey
illustrating dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work.
J. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference
points during construction.
K. Promptly report to CH2M loss or destruction of reference point or relocation required

because of changes in grades or other reasons.
L. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no
changes without prior written notice to CH2M.
1.5 GEOTECHNICAL SERVICES
A. Employ Geotechnical Engineer registered in Manassas, Virginia.
B. Geotechnical Engineering scope items include the following:

1. Field Observation and Evaluation: provide field observation and evaluation
during construction of mass grading and subgrade preparation for building
foundation systems and pavement support including but not limited to
determining suitability of subgrade soils, inspection and testing of backfill
placement and compaction, and verify work is being performed in accordance to
approved plans and details.
1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Schedule meeting after Notice of Award.
B. Attendance Required: Owner, CH2M, and Contractor.
C. Agenda:
1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.
2. Distribution of Contract Documents.
3. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and
progress schedule.
4. Designation of personnel representing parties in Contract, and CH2M.
5. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions,
applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract
closeout procedures.
6. Procedures for space coordination.
7. Scheduling.
8. Scheduling activities of Land Surveyor and Geotechnical Engineer.
9. Request for information (RFI) process.
10. Quality control.
D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two business days after meeting to
participants, with copies to CH2M, Owner, and those affected by decisions made.

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 5
1.7 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING
A. Schedule meeting at Project site prior to Contractor occupancy.
B. Attendance Required: Owner, CH2M, Special Consultants, Contractor, and Contractor’s

Superintendent, and major Subcontractors.
C. Agenda:
1. Provide evidence of current insurance coverage and current licenses.
2. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor.
3. Owner’s requirements and occupancy.
4. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner.
5. Temporary utilities provided by Owner.
6. Survey and building and utility layouts.
7. Security and housekeeping procedures.
8. Material storage.
9. Schedules.
10. Application for payment procedures.
11. Procedures for testing.
12. Procedures for maintaining record documents.
13. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction
period.
D. Record minutes and distribute copies within 2 business days after meeting to participants,
with copies to CH2M, Owner, and those affected by decisions made.
1.8 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum weekly
intervals.
B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at
meetings.
C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major subcontractors and suppliers, Owner,

CH2M, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.
D. Agenda:
1. Review minutes of previous meetings.
2. Review of Work progress.
3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.
4. Identification of problems impeding planned progress.
5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.
7. Maintenance of progress schedule.
8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
9. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
10. Coordination of projected progress.
11. Maintenance of quality and work standards.

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 6
12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
13. Other business relating to Work.
E. Record minutes and distribute copies within 2 business days after meeting to participants,
with emailed copies to CH2M, Owner, and those affected by decisions made.
1.9 PHYSICAL COORDINATION MEETINGS AND 3D MODELING
A. Develop a 3D model of the building and its utilities, including underground utilities,
utilizing the CH2M electronic files as the starting point for trade contractor development.
Use this model throughout construction as the basis for utility routing, support locations,
and interference checking.
B. CH2M will develop a BIM Project Execution Plan (BIM PEP) that the Contractor shall
comply with.
C. Conduct Contractor coordination meetings during construction, as outlined in the BIM

PEP. Contractors are to review shop drawings and 3D model at this meeting for multiple
trades to discuss physical utility routings, support locations, discuss conflicts, and
propose resolutions. Contractor is responsible for final utility routing and adjustments to
routings may be required.
D. Document the results of this meeting. Include the Owner and CH2M in this meeting.
E. At the completion of construction, turn over the electronic version of the 3D model(s)
and supporting files to the Owner and CH2M.
1.10 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. When required in individual specification sections, convene pre-installation meetings at

Project site prior to commencing work of specific section.
B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, Work of specific section.
C. Notify CH2M four days in advance of meeting date.
D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:

1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures.
2. Review coordination with related sections.
E. Record minutes and distribute copies within 2 business days after meeting to participants,
with emailed copies to CH2M, Owner, and those affected by decisions made.
1.11 CORRESPONDENCE
A. Communications:
1. Direct communications, correspondence, and submittals for the project to the
Owner.
2. Maintain log of communications and correspondence.

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 7
3. Limit letters or faxes to a single subject and identify by a transmittal number
correlated to the correspondence log.
4. Confirm telephone conversations in writing.
5. Progress Reports: Provide monthly report to include, as a minimum, the
following.
a. Activity during past month.
b. Confirmation of schedule.
B. Language: Prepare and submit Contract Documents including but not limited to
submittals, correspondence, RFIs, and O&M manuals in English.
1.12 CONFLICTS WITH OR WITHIN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. If, during the performance of the work, the Contractor discovers conflict, error,
ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract
Documents and provisions of laws or regulations applicable to the performance of the
work, or of standards, specifications, manuals, codes, or of instructions of manufacturers
or vendors, notify the Owner in writing immediately. Do not proceed with the work
affected by the conflict (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to
the Contract Documents has been issued.
1.13 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Comply with the latest codes and other legal requirements applicable to the materials,
equipment, and services provided in accordance with the Contract, even if an applicable
code or legal requirement is not referenced in the project specifications.
B. Promptly submit written notice to CH2M of observed variances between the Contract
Documents and legal requirements.
C. Materials, fasteners, piping systems, and equipment to conform to ANSI and other U.S.
standard dimensional requirements unless otherwise specifically required by the
Specifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.2 ALTERNATES
A. Alternates are defined as alternate products, materials, equipment, or systems for work
that may, at the Owner’s option and under the terms established by the Instructions to
Bidders, be selected and recorded in this Contract to either supplement or displace
corresponding basic requirements of the project specifications. Alternates may or may not
substantially change the scope and general character of work and to not be confused with
allowances, prices, change orders, substitutions, and other similar provisions.

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 8
B. Coordinate alternate work with related sections to ensure that each accepted alternate is
completely integrated and interfaced with related sections.
C. Within 2 weeks of award of Contract, the Owner will prepare and distribute to each
contractor to be involved in the project a notification of status of each alternate. This
notice will indicate which alternates have been accepted, rejected, and deferred for
consideration at a later date. The notice will also include a full description of negotiated
modifications to alternates, if any.
2.3 WARRANTY
A. Warrant to the Owner that materials and equipment furnished will be of good quality and
new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the work
will be free from defects not inherent in quality required or permitted, and that the work
will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to
these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be
considered defective. The warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by
abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient
maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear under normal usage.
B. The warranty period to be for a minimum of 12 months from the date of Substantial
Completion of the work or designated portion thereof.
C. Make repairs and replacements promptly upon receipt of written notification of defect
from CH2M or Owner. If, within a reasonable time, the Contractor has not made the
necessary corrections, Owner may make the corrections or order the work to be done by a
third party, and the cost of the corrections to be paid by the Contractor.
D. See additional product warranty requirements under Section 01 70 00 – Execution and

Closeout Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WORK LIMITATIONS
A. Perform work during normal working hours unless otherwise mutually agreed upon with
the Owner.
B. Provide as little inconvenience as possible to Owner occupants of existing structures.
C. Schedule work in existing facilities and buildings with the Owner sufficiently in advance
to enable Owner to make arrangements as may be required.
D. Perform overtime work when defective work would result if deferred until the next
regular-time work period and when emergency circumstances involving public welfare
and safety or protection of property arise.
E. Cameras or use of cameras on the property without permission of Owner is prohibited.

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 9
F. Public Right-of-Way:
1. No roadway, street, alley, emergency fire lane, or public passageway to be closed
or obstructed except as required by the work and then only after approval of
those having jurisdiction over same.
2. Use of streets and passageways to be in accordance with directives from the
Owner.
3. Private rights-of-way (e.g., Owner traffic patterns) to not be interrupted without
authorization from the Owner.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION ENVIRONMENT, HEALTH, AND SAFETY
A. Construction Safety Program:

1. Provide Contractor’s Construction Safety and Health Program with the Bid
including Contractor’s policies, procedures, and practices that demonstrates:
a. Management commitment and leadership.
b. Assignment of safety responsibility.
c. Identification and control of hazards.
d. Employee education and training.
e. Incident analysis and record keeping.
f. Emergency planning and procedures.
g. Conformance with applicable OSHA regulations (29 CFR Part 1926 or
State program equivalent) including:
1) Subpart A – General.
2) Subpart B – General Interpretations.
3) Subpart C – General Safety and Health Provisions.
4) Subpart D – Occupational Health and Environmental Controls.
5) Subpart E – Personal Protective and Lifesaving Equipment.
6) Subpart F – Fire Protection and Prevention.
7) Subpart G – Signs, Signals and Barricades.
8) Subpart H – Materials Handling, Storage, Use, and Disposal.
9) Subpart I – Tools – Hand and Power.
10) Subpart J – Welding and Cutting.
11) Subpart K – Electrical.
12) Subpart L – Scaffolds.
13) Subpart M – Fall Protection.
14) Subpart N – Cranes, Derricks, Hoists, Elevators, and Conveyors.
15) Subpart O – Motor Vehicles, Mechanized Equipment, and
Marine Operations.
16) Subpart P – Excavations.
17) Subpart Q – Concrete and Masonry Construction.
18) Subpart R – Steel Erection.
19) Subpart S – Tunnels and Shafts, Caissons, Cofferdams, and
Compressed Air.
20) Subpart T – Demolition.
21) Subpart U – Blasting and Use of Explosives.
22) Subpart V – Power Transmission and Distribution.
23) Subpart W – Rollover Protective Structures, Overhead
Protection.

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 10
24) Subpart X – Stairways and Ladders.
25) Subpart Y – Commercial Diving Operations.
26) Subpart Z – Toxic and Hazardous Substances.
B. Project-Specific Safety Plan - Submit to Owner 10 days prior to beginning work, the
Contractor’s project-specific health and safety plan based on the preceding criteria in
paragraphs 1.a through 1.g which coordinates with Owner’s safety program, if any,
addresses the safety criteria applicable to Contractor’s work, and includes provisions for
the following:
1. Contractor’s designated, qualified, and authorized safety representative to
supervise and enforce Contractor’s compliance with the program.
2. Contractor’s Hazard Communication Program, which conforms to OSHA
regulation (29 CFR Part 1910.1200 or State program equivalent).
3. Contractor’s Project Field Instructions including:
a. Project information and description of major work phases.
b. Project site description.
c. Key personnel and emergency response contact information.
d. Emergency response arrangements.
e. Job hazard identification and control measures.
f. Personal protective equipment use specifications.
g. Health hazard identification and control.
h. Safe work procedures.
i. Safe work practices.
j. Employee safety education and training.
k. Employee review and acknowledgement of the health and safety plan.
C. Hazardous Materials Control Plan:

1. Submit to Owner, prior to bringing hazardous materials on the work site but no
later than 30 days after the notice to proceed, Contractor’s Hazardous Materials
Control Plan. This plan to coordinate with Owner’s environmental program, if
any, address the criteria applicable to Contractor’s work, and include provisions
for the following:
a. List of hazardous materials and material safety data sheet for each item
listed.
b. Personnel safety procedures to be instituted for handling hazardous
materials.
c. Measures to be instituted for material storage, labeling, dispensing,
accidental discharge, spill prevention, and containment.
d. Disposal methods for such materials.
e. Cleanup measures, materials, or structures, necessary to prevent
environmental contamination by such material in the event of a spill or
accidental discharge.
Name and contact information for Contractor’s resources responsible for
responding to an emergency involving hazardous material.
2. Hazardous materials include any substances or mixtures which are:
a. Carcinogenic.
b. Toxic.
c. Corrosive.

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 11
d. An irritant.
e. Strong sensitizer.
f. Radioactive.
g. Explosive.
h. Pyrophoric.
i. Flammable.
j. Combustible.
k. Reactive.
l. Generate pressure through decomposition or heat.
D. Project Safety, Health, and Environment Requirements:

1. Contractor to:
a. Perform work in a safe manner, comply with safety, health, and
environmental requirements of the Contract Documents as issued by the
Owner and comply with applicable laws, codes, ordinances, rules,
regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities.
b. Attend, prior to beginning work, a project safety orientation conducted
by Owner.
c. Have and exercise, full legal responsibility for compliance to safety,
health, and environmental rules and regulations by itself, its agents,
employees, material suppliers, vendors, and subcontractors with respect
to its portion of the work on the project; and directly receive and respond
to, defend, and be responsible for any citation, fine, or penalty by reason
of Contractor’s failure or failure of Contractor’s agents, employees,
material suppliers, vendors, and subcontractors to so comply.
d. Have a representative on the work site when a lower tier subcontractor is
performing any work, even if no work is being performed by
Contractor’s direct work forces. This representative to be responsible for
assuring that applicable safety, health, and environmental rules and
regulations are observed and in addition to be responsible for responding
to medical emergencies related to subcontractor’s employees or sub-
subcontractors.
e. Uniformly enforce a policy that states the disciplinary action to be
applied when employees violate safety and environmental rules. This
policy will be consistent with Owner’s safety and environmental
enforcement policy, if any.
f. Provide first aid and medical treatment for its employees.
g. Provide safety and environmental training for its employees at its own
expense, and document such training and provide copies to the Owner.
Safety training to include, but not be limited to:
1) Orientation to the safety and environmental policies and rules
stipulated by the Owner, if any, prior to each employee’s initial
work assignment on the project.
2) Orientation of supervisors to the safety and environmental
policies and rules and their responsibility to enforce them.
3) Weekly toolbox talks on an appropriate safety and environment
subject for all employees.
4) Hazardous materials training.

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 12
5) Special safety training for those affected; such training to include
but not be limited to confined space entry, control of hazardous
energy sources (electrical lockout/tagout), welding and cutting
permit procedures, excavation and shoring, fall protection,
scaffolding, etc.
6) Specific instructions to its employees regarding the use of
personal protective equipment, personal safe work practices, and
employee’s obligations and rights under the Contractor’s safety
and environmental policies. The Contractor will provide at its
own expense, required personal protective equipment for its
employees and required safety equipment and supplies as
needed.
h. Conduct safety meetings with its employees and or supervision as
necessary to ensure that safety and environment is adequately addressed
in its work planning and execution. The Contractor will provide prior
written notification of the time, place, and subject of the meetings and
provide the Owner the opportunity to observe it. The Owner reserves the
right to require changes necessary to comply with the project’s safety
rules and regulations.
i. Provide to the Owner copies of material safety data sheets (MSDS) for
hazardous materials that Contractor brings on the work site, prior to the
arrival of the materials on the work site. When requested by Owner,
provide training to the Owner’s employees and employees of other
parties who may be routinely exposed to the materials used by
Contractor. Such training will be at no additional cost to the Owner.
j. Provide a job safety analysis (JSA) identifying hazards before
commencing each major phase or activity at the work site. The analysis
will describe the plans and assign responsibility for hazard prevention or
control of identified hazards.
k. Provide Contractor’s safety representative to accompany Owner’s safety
representative during periodic inspections of Contractor’s work and
safety activities and take prompt action to correct identified deficiencies.
Satisfactory compliance to be made within a specified time. If Contractor
refuses to correct deficiencies, the Owner to initiate appropriate actions
in accordance with the Contract provisions and may take one or more of
the following steps:
1) Cease the operation or a portion thereof (particularly in the case
of an imminent danger).
2) Correct the situation and back charge the Contractor.
3) Stop or hold up payment for the work being performed.
4) Invoke Contract penalties and/or terminate the Contract.
l. Attend a weekly site safety coordination meeting that will address results
of periodic inspections, the safety or environmental related incidents, or
injuries of the previous week, if any, and the necessary corrective
measures including a plan for upcoming work and the related safety or
environmental considerations.

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 13
m. Provide notification to the Owner as follows:
1) Promptly report injuries or illnesses recorded on its OSHA 200
log, accidents resulting in property damage and environmental
incidents, and follow up in writing within 24 hours. Within 2
working days, provide a written report documenting the
identified cause(s) of the accident or incident and action(s) taken,
or planned to preclude recurrence. A copy of each first report of
injury to be provided.
2) A weekly summary of occupational injuries, illnesses and
environmental incidents including man-hours.
3) Immediately report fatal or serious occupational injuries or
illnesses. Notify the Owner in writing if an injury or illness
results in lost work time and the Contractor desires not to
provide continued employment, on a modified basis, for its
employees who sustain an on-the-job partially disabling injury or
illness. This notification must be provided a minimum of 24
hours prior to the discontinuance of employment. This reporting
is in addition to any reporting responsibilities that the Contractor
may have to OSHA or any other agency. The Owner reserves the
right to conduct an independent investigation at no additional
cost to the Owner.
4) Immediately report OSHA inspections and provide the Owner an
opportunity to observe the inspection. Provide a copy of citations
received and Contractor responses issued as a result of such
inspections within two working days of receipt or issuance.
n. Protect the safety and convenience of the general public including
residents adjacent to the work.
1) Perform work as necessary to protect the general public from
hazards.
2) Construct and maintain satisfactory and substantial barriers with
warning lights, lanterns, and proper signs as necessary or
required for safety.
o. Ensure that these Contractor safety, health, and environment
requirements are passed on to its subcontractors. The Contractor to hold
the subcontractor responsible for compliance with these requirements.
p. Appoint an employee who is qualified and authorized to supervise and
enforce compliance with the safety program.
2. The duties of the Owner or CH2M do not include a review or approval of the
adequacy of the Contractor’s safety supervisor, the safety program, or safety
measures taken in, on, or near the construction site.
3.3 WORK SITE SECURITY
A. Security is the responsibility of the Contractor until acceptance of work by the Owner.
The Owner and CH2M do not assume responsibility at any time for the protection of the
building and premises or for the loss of materials and/or equipment from the time that
Contractor’s operations have commenced until final acceptance of the work. Provide

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 14
necessary security program and facilities to protect work from unauthorized entry,
vandalism, and theft.
B. No employee of Contractor, or of its subcontractors, to go to or be present in an area

where the employee is not actively engaged in work, except when traveling between
work locations. Such travel to be by a direct route. Use of any Owner facilities such as
cafeteria, office space, restrooms is prohibited. Contractor’s employees will not be
permitted to use Owner’s parking facilities and to park in areas designated by the Owner.
C. Workers or visitor identification badges must be prominently displayed by all personnel

when entering, working on, or leaving Owner’s premises. Issue a badge to every
employee or visitor when entering the site and collect the badge upon departure. Badges
for workers will be picture identification badges issued by Owner designating the
employer’s name and the employee’s identification number. Provide a current index
showing each authorized employee when requested by Owner. Advise Owner when an
employee is terminated from the project and no longer has access to the work site.
D. Ensure that employee hard hats clearly identify the employer’s company.
3.4 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Develop and maintain a quality control (QC) manual, as described in Quality Control
Supplement to support compliance with the Contract Documents. Maintain quality
control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, work site conditions, and
workmanship to produce work of specified quality.
3.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordination:
1. Cooperate with the Owner, other contractors, and utility companies on site in
scheduling and coordination of activities in a manner that will provide the least
interference of others’ work and cooperate in the interfacing and connection of
the separate elements of the overall project. The Owner and other contractors
have the same obligation to cooperate and coordinate their work with Contractor.
The Owner will issue such instruction as necessary. Abide and support the
Owner’s decision.
2. Coordinate the planned interruption of any services including, but not limited to,
water, gas, oxygen, electric lights or power, and drainage systems, with the
Owner. Advise Owner of the time, duration, extent, and type of any planned
interruptions. Provide detailed plan in accordance with Owner’s safety and
operation and maintenance procedures. Make such interruption only after Owner
has approved the plan.
3. Coordinate work of the various sections of the Specifications and Drawings to
ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements
with provisions for accommodating items installed later.
4. Locations of existing utility mains, trees, etc. are shown diagrammatically on the
Drawings. Accuracy and completeness of this information is not guaranteed.
Verify the size and location of utility lines, conduit, surface, or subsurface
structures, etc., that may affect the work.

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 15
5. Coordinate work with other contractors and subcontractors and share information
with the other contractors to enable you and them to coordinate openings,
relationship to structure, ducts, pipe, conduit, and other items as required.
6. Coordination meetings are mandatory in laying out pipe and duct runs and
equipment locations. Review these layouts with other contractors, CH2M, and
the Owner prior to installation.
7. Submit proposed method of support for review by CH2M prior to fabrication of
hanging or other support systems not specifically detailed on the Drawings.
8. Verify that characteristics of elements of interrelated operating equipment are
compatible; coordinate work with other contractors having interdependent
responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service such
equipment.
9. Do not endanger the work of other contractors by cutting, excavating, or
otherwise altering their work. Prior to penetrating load-bearing walls or structural
members not detailed in the Contract Documents, submit written notice thereof
and obtain permission from the Owner and CH2M before such work can proceed.
10. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work
that is indicated on the Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and
conduit as closely as practicable; make runs parallel with lines of building.
Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations,
maintenance, and repairs.
11. Provide clear access to equipment spaces. Do not obstruct placement or removal
of equipment with conduit, ducts, utilities, or other facilities.
12. In finished areas, except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in
the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish
elements.
13. During the progress of construction, it is expected that minor field relocations of
the work will be necessary. Such relocations to be made only by direction of the
Owner. If the Contractor to fail to so notify the Owner and proceed without such
direction, Contractor to do so at its own risk.
3.6 SITE INVESTIGATION AND REPRESENTATION
A. Contractor acknowledges satisfaction as to the nature and location of work; the general
and local conditions, particularly those bearing upon availability of transportation, access
to the work site, disposal, handling, and storage of materials, availability of labor, water,
electric power, and roads, telephone communications waste and sewage disposal and
uncertainties of weather or similar physical conditions at the work site; the conformation
and conditions of the ground; the character of equipment and facilities needed
preliminary to and during the prosecution of work; and other matters that can affect work
or the cost thereof under this Contract.
B. Contractor further acknowledges satisfaction as to character, quality, and quantity of

surface and subsurface materials to be encountered from its inspection of the work site
and from reviewing available records of exploratory work furnished by the Owner or
included in the Contract Documents. Failure by Contractor to become acquainted with
the physical conditions of the work site and the available information will not relieve the
Contractor from responsibility for properly estimating the difficulty or cost of
successfully performing work.

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 16
3.7 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR UTILITY LOCATION
A. Known utilities and structures adjacent to or within the limits of work are shown on the
Drawings. The locations shown are taken from existing records and the best information
available from existing utility plans; however, it is expected that there may be some
discrepancies and omissions in the locations and quantities of utilities and structures
shown.
B. Where Contractor’s operations could cause damage or inconvenience to telegraph,

telephone, television, data, power, oil, gas, water, sewer, or irrigation systems, suspend
operations until Contractor has made arrangements necessary for the protection of these
utilities and services. Employ or secure services as necessary to locate or verify the
location of utilities.
C. Notify utility offices that could be affected by work at least 48 hours in advance. Do not
expose utilities without first obtaining permission from the appropriate agency. Once
permission has been granted, locate, expose, and provide temporary support for existing
underground utilities.
D. Neither the Owner nor its officers or agents to be responsible to Contractor for damages
as a result of Contractor’s failure to locate and protect utilities encountered in work.
E. Tag stubouts for underground utilities such as plumbing, mechanical, automatic fire
sprinkler, and water with weatherproof identification tags and provide marker at grade
level indicating the size and nature of the stub-outs below.
3.8 LAYOUT DATA
A. Baselines:
1. The Owner will provide two reference baselines and a single permanent
benchmark to be used by the Contractors for layout work. Verify and agree to the
accuracy of this data prior to commencing any layout work.
2. Notify Owner, in writing, if an apparent error in survey locations furnished by
Owner is discovered. Request resolution. In no case may the Contractor claim
delay due to an apparent error to Owner-furnished locations except for instances
in which the Owner failed to provide prompt direction upon receipt of
Contractor’s notice of an apparent error.
3. The responsibility for the accuracy of the layout of work obtained from these
baselines and benchmarks is solely that of the Contractor.
4. Furnish, at Contractor’s expense, stakes, spikes, steel pins, templates, platforms,
equipment, tools, and materials and labor required to lay out the work from the
benchmark and baselines established by Owner.
5. Maintain and preserve stakes and other markers established by Contractor until
no longer required.
6. Replace, at Contractor’s expense, the control points established at the site by
Owner, if destroyed by or through Contractor’s negligence prior to their
authorized removal. Owner may require work to be suspended when horizontal
or vertical control points established at the work site by Contractor are not

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 17
adequate to permit checking the work. Such suspension will be withdrawn upon
proper replacement of the control points.
B. Record Contractor’s survey data in accordance with standard and approved methods.
Make available field notes, sketches, recordings, and computations made by the
Contractor in establishing horizontal and vertical control points during the progress of
work for ready examination by the Owner.
C. Dimension Verification:
1. Before ordering material or doing work, take or verify measurements as may be
required for the proper fitting of Contractor’s work or other adjoining work. The
Contractor is responsible for the correctness of its figures and to satisfactorily
correct work that does not fit, and furnish new work, if necessary, without charge
to the Owner. Extra charges will not be allowed on account of differences
between actual dimensions and the measurements indicated on the Drawings.
2. In case of a discrepancy or conflict with given data, notify Owner in writing prior
to proceeding with the affected work.
3.9 PRESERVATION, RESTORATION, AND CLEANUP
A. Keep the work site orderly and neat on a daily basis. Maintain a level of cleanliness
acceptable to Owner. Rubbish to not be allowed to accumulate anywhere on the work
site.
B. Provide for regular maintenance of temporary toilets and replacement of waste containers
when full.
C. Keep the paved streets bordering the work site clean from material tracked off site. Wash
and/or sweep the streets daily if material begins to accumulate.
D. Smoking and eating will be allowed on the work site only in designated areas. Owner will
identify the areas after award of the Contract.
E. Remove temporary materials, equipment, services, and construction prior to substantial

completion inspection. Clear areas used by the Contractor for temporary structures,
rubbish, and waste materials and properly grade to drain and blend in with the abutting
property. Finish areas used for the deposit of waste materials to properly drain and blend
with the surrounding terrain. Clear and restore staging areas to the original condition
when the Contractor moved onto the work site. Correct damage, changes, or alterations,
made by the Contractor to storage or laydown areas during construction prior to
demobilization. Areas to be returned to the condition that existed prior to arrival at the
work site.
F. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Remove
temporary underground installations. Grade site to drain.
G. Replace filters and clean system internals if permanent air-handling support equipment is
used prior to acceptance by the Owner.

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 18
H. Thoroughly clean parts of the installation at the completion of work. Clean up and
remove from the premises refuse material, crates, and rubbish arising from work.
I. Remove temporary drainage and erosion protection systems when no longer required.
3.10 PROJECT PHOTOGRAPHY, WEBCAMS, AND VIDEO RECORDING
A. Webcams: Provide specific purpose video cameras to document project construction.

Recording to begin at the start of construction and conclude at final completion. Cameras
to be provided by and connected to a third party, password-protected, web-based service
provider portal. This portal will allow view of cameras over the internet. Cameras to
provide live viewing and photographs every 24 hours. Photographs to be stored in the
third party provider’s servers and turned over to the Owner at the end of construction.
B. Webcam location: Locate cameras in the following locations.

1. As recommended by Contractor and third party supplier. Coordinate camera
locations with Owner.
C. Professional Photography: See Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures for requirements.
D. Furnish an electronic copy of time-lapse video recording and construction phase

photographs to Owner as part of O&M manuals.
3.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching.
B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements affecting:

1. Structural integrity of element.
2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element.
4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.
5. Work of Owner or separate contractor.
C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work,
and to:
1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work.
2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work.
3. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work.
4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing.
5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and
electrical Work.
D. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and to provide proper surfaces
to receive patching and finishing.
E. Coordinate requirements of openings for ducts, piping, conduit, and other penetrations
required by construction with the Owner. Unless otherwise specified, such openings to be
provided by the contractor that performs the initial construction. In the event of the

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 19
Contractor’s failure to supply the Owner with information regarding the size and location
of openings it requires in advance, cutting and patching that may be required to be done
at the expense of the negligent party.
F. Unless otherwise specified by the Owner, each contractor to do cutting, fitting, or

patching of its work that may be necessary to make said work coordinate with the work
of other contractors, as shown or reasonably implied from the Contract Documents. In
cases where the completion of the work of the Contractor is dependent upon work of
various contractors, the timing of the work of each contractor will be determined by the
Owner.
G. Seal penetrations through nonfire-rated construction with permanently flexible material

per Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection. Oversized openings in nonrated construction,
where the annular space around penetrants exceeds 1 foot, to be closed by the contractor
responsible for the initial construction, at the expense of the responsible party.
H. Cut masonry and concrete materials using masonry saw or core drill.
I. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract

Documents.
J. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
K. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids.
L. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely

seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping, to
full thickness of penetrated element.
M. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest
intersection; for assembly, refinish entire unit.
N. Identify hazardous substances or conditions exposed during the Work to CH2M for
decision or remedy.
3.12 SPECIAL PROCEDURES
A. Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing with new products for
patching and extending work.
B. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform alteration work.
C. Cut, move, support, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation
Work. Replace and restore at completion.
D. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, including rotted wood, corroded
metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete. Replace materials as specified for
finished Work.

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 20
E. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces.
F. Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to permit installation of new work and
finishes.
G. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes
of temperature and humidity.
H. Remove, cut, and patch Work in manner to minimize damage and to permit restoring
products and finishes to original, “new” condition.
I. Refinish existing visible surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified
condition for each material, with neat transition to adjacent finishes.
J. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, provide smooth and even transition. Patch
Work to match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance.
K. When finished surfaces are cut so that smooth transition with new Work is not possible,
terminate existing surface along straight line at natural line of division and submit
recommendation to CH2M for review.
L. Where change of plane of ¼-inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing
smooth transition; to CH2M for review.
M. Trim existing doors to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim to original “new” condition.
N. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or
showing other imperfections.
O. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product sections.
3.13 SUPPORTING FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE
A. The following are guidelines for supporting mechanical, electrical, plumbing, or

architectural items from the building structure. Coordinate load requirements from other
contractors so no combination of loads exceeds the limitations provided in subparagraph
G below.
B. At both the floor and the roof, attachments may be at the upper or the lower truss chord
(horizontal members at top and bottom of truss). Do not hang loads from web members
(the diagonal and vertical members between chords), including the end diagonal member
where the lower chord is discontinuous.
C. Make the point of attachment at a panel point of the truss girders and joists. Panel points
are the intersections of the horizontal chords with the diagonal or vertical web members.
D. Attachments to metal decking require written approval from CH2M. If requested, provide
inserts where concrete fill occurs or stiffeners welded where roof insulation occurs.

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 21
E. Do not weld on trusses. Use bolted or clamped-type connections.
F. At floor and roof members (W beams, truss joists, and girders), hang loads greater than
50 pounds in a concentric manner (use concentric clamps or other field fabricated
concentric attachment measures).
G. Comply with the Specifications for support and load requirements and restrictions.
Coordinate and confirm support and load requirements with CH2M. CH2M will
coordinate load requirements submitted by other contractors so combination loads do not
exceed project structural design criteria limitations.
H. Support loads hung from concrete structure with cast-in-place inserts unless drilled-in
anchors are specifically shown or approved by CH2M in writing.
I. The above load restrictions and limitations to apply to the substructure as well.
END OF SECTION

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 30 00 - 22
SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Submittal procedures.
2. Action on submittals.
3. Proposed products list.
4. Product data.
5. Shop drawings.
6. Manufacturer’s record documentation.
7. Samples.
8. Design data.
9. Test reports.
10. Certificates.
11. Manufacturer's instructions.
12. Manufacturer's field reports.
13. Erection drawings.
14. Construction photographs.
1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Conduct a meeting to establish the specific submittal procedures and processes to include
each topic listed below.
B. In advance of this meeting, prepare a submittal log listing each submittal, the submitting
contractor, and the projected submittal date. Maintain this log over the life of the project.
C. Transmit each submittal with CH2M accepted form.
D. Sequentially number transmittal forms. Mark revised submittals with original number and
sequential alphabetic suffix.
E. Tracking Number: Number submittal with a tracking number that utilizes the associated
specification number and a sequence number for the submittal number as well as
resubmittal status. See examples below:
1. 26 11 16 – 001 – 000: This numbering indicates submittal number one for
Secondary Unit Substations.
2. 26 11 16 – 001 – 001: This numbering indicates the first resubmittal to submittal
number one for Secondary Unit Substations (typically a response by Contractor
to CH2M’s review comments on the first submittal).
704618 Submittal Procedures

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 33 00 - 1
3. 26 11 16 – 001 – 002: This numbering indicates the second resubmittal to
submittal number one for Secondary Unit Substations (typically a response by
Contractor to CH2M’s review comments on the resubmittal).
4. 26 11 16 – 002 – 000: This numbering indicates submittal number two for
Secondary Unit Substations (this submittal numbering would reflect
supplementary information not included in submittal number one).
F. Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor, and supplier; pertinent drawing and detail
number, and specification section number, appropriate to submittal.
G. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification
of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of
information is in accordance with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
H. Confirm number of submittals required by CH2M and Owner in the kickoff meeting to
discuss the submittal process.
I. Schedule submittals to expedite Project, and deliver the required number of copies to
CH2M and Owner. Coordinate submission of related items.
J. For each submittal for review, allow 7 business days excluding delivery time to and from
Contractor.
K. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which
may be detrimental to successful performance of completed Work.
L. Allow space on submittals for Contractor and CH2M review stamps.
M. When revised for resubmission, identify changes made since previous submission.
N. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly

report inability to comply with requirements.
O. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.
P. Do not use the submittal procedure for the approval of substituted products, warranties,
technical qualifications, procedures, methods, calculations, details, or shop drawings.
Refer to Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements, for the substitution submittal
procedure.
1.3 ACTION ON SUBMITTALS
A. Review of submittals by CH2M will be for the purpose of checking for conformance with
information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents, and shall
not relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions contained in the
submittals. CH2M may make changes or corrections to the submittals, reproduce copies
for its own use and return a marked up copy to the Contractor. If major revisions are
required, the submittal will be returned to the Contractor to correct and resubmit. If

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 33 00 - 2
Contractor proceeds with ordering materials or equipment without a completed CH2M
review, it does so at its sole risk.
B. CH2M will review each submittal and mark with one “Action”. Action markings shall be
interpreted as follows:
1. “Approved”: Work may proceed, provided it complies with Contract Documents.
It does not take the place of nor supersede government agency or Authority
Having Jurisdiction approvals.
a. “Submit Certified Documents”: Reviewer may select whether or not
certified documents need to be submitted, if required by Client or Owner
Contract.
2. “Approved as Noted”: Work may proceed, provided it complies with notations
and corrections on submittal and with Contract Documents.
a. “Submit Revised Documents”: Reviewer may select whether or not
revised documents need to be submitted.
3. “Not Approved”: Do not proceed with Work. Revise submittal in accordance
with notations thereon, and resubmit without delay to obtain a different action
marking.
4. “Received for Information”: Submittal is not required or contains information
only and will not be reviewed.
C. The practice of submitting incomplete or unchecked submittals is not acceptable.

Submittals which, in the opinion of CH2M, clearly indicate that they have not been
stamped, dated, and checked by Contractor will be considered as not complying with the
intent of the Contract Documents and will be returned to Contractor for resubmission in
the proper form.
1.4 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST
A. After Notice to Proceed, submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of
manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.
B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model
or catalog designation, and reference standards.
1.5 PRODUCT DATA
A. Product Data: Submit to CH2M for review for limited purpose of checking for
conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract
Documents.
B. Submit number of copies Contractor requires, plus copies CH2M will retain and copies
the Owner will retain.
C. Compliance Review:
1. With the initial submittal for each specification item, provide a Compliance
Review of the Specifications, Drawings, and Addenda (if any). The Compliance
Review shall be a paragraph-by-paragraph review of the Specifications and
Drawings with the following information, “C”, “D”, or “E” marked in the margin

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 33 00 - 3
of the original Specifications and any subsequent Addenda. Text shall be
provided accompanying Drawing Compliance review to denote issues on
Drawings.
a. “C” – Comply with no exceptions.
b. “D” – Comply with deviations. Provide a numbered footnote or
annotation with reasons for the proposed deviation and how the intent of
the Specification can be satisfied.
c. “E” – Exception, do not comply. Provide a numbered footnote or
annotation with reasons and possible alternatives.
D. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data.
Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project.
E. Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and
location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
F. After review, produce copies and distribute in accordance with “Submittal Procedures”
article and for record documents described in Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout
Requirements.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit to CH2M for review for limited purpose of checking for
Documents.
B. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and
location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
C. When required by individual specification sections, provide shop drawings signed and
sealed by professional engineer responsible for designing components shown on shop
drawings.
1. Include signed and sealed calculations to support design.
2. Submit drawings and calculations in form suitable for submission to and
approval by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Make revisions and provide additional information when required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
D. Submit in electronic format to CH2M and the Owner.
E. After review, produce copies and distribute in accordance with “Submittal Procedures”
article and for record documents described in Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout
Requirements.
1.7 MANUFACTURER’S RECORD DOCUMENTATION
A. Record Documentation: Equipment and manufacturers and large system suppliers for
major capital equipment and systems shall keep electronic documentation of detailed
shop drawings of such equipment on file for not less than 10 years after substantial

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 33 00 - 4
completion. This documentation shall be provided by the equipment manufacturer to
Owner within 3 business days at no additional cost. This is required for the following
equipment:
1. Ultra Pure Water system turnkey supplier.
2. Waste Water Treatment system turnkey supplier.
1.8 SAMPLES
A. Samples: Submit to CH2M and Owner for review for limited purpose of checking for
Documents.
B. Samples for Selection as Specified in Product Sections:

1. Submit to CH2M and Owner for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.
2. Submit samples of finishes from full range of manufacturers' standard colors,
textures, and patterns for CH2M selection.
C. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of Products, with

integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.
D. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.
E. Submit 4 samples for review when samples are required by individual specification
sections; CH2M will retain two samples and Owner will retain 2 samples.
F. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual
specification sections.
G. Samples will not be used for testing purposes unless specifically stated in specification
section.
H. After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with “Submittal

Procedures” article and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 70 00 –
Execution and Closeout Requirements.
1.9 DESIGN DATA
A. Submit for CH2M's knowledge as Engineer of Record for Owner.
B. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information
given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
1.10 TEST REPORTS
A. Submit for CH2M's knowledge as Engineer of Record for Owner.
B. Submit test reports for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with
information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 33 00 - 5
1.11 CERTIFICATES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer,

installation/application subcontractor, or Contractor to CH2M, in quantities specified for
Product Data.
B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit

supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be
acceptable to CH2M.
1.12 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for

delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to Owner in
quantities specified for Product Data.
B. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special
environmental criteria required for application or installation.
1.13 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD REPORTS
A. Submit report within 5 days of observation to Owner and CH2M for information.
1.14 ERECTION DRAWINGS
A. Submit drawings to Owner.
C. Owner may require the Contractor to postpone fabrication or installation if drawings are
inadequate to provide Owner with a reasonable degree of certainty the Work can be
completed safely within the requirements of the Specifications.
1.15 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Provide photographs of site and construction throughout progress of Work produced by a

commercial photographer, acceptable to Owner and CH2M.
B. Twice monthly on alternating months submit photographs.
C. Photographs: Provide Owner two prints; color, matte; 10 x 12-inch size; mounted on soft
card stock, with left edge binding margin. Provide electronic files of photographs to
Owner and CH2M.

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 33 00 - 6
D. Take site photographs from differing directions, showing each new building side. Take
interior photographs of each new building, at each level and from different angles to
show progression of major elements and areas.
E. See Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements, for webcam requirements.
F. At final completion, document the project with professional photography. Photographs

required as follows:
1. Interior Views: Each new building, at each level and from different angles to
show final state of major elements and areas.
2. Exterior Views: Each new building at angles high and low to show elevations of
each side. Include roof level views.
3. Site Views: Multi-building views and overall views.
4. Provide Owner two prints; color, matte; 10 x 12-inch size; mounted on soft card
stock, with left edge binding margin. Provide electronic files of photographs to
Owner and CH2M.
G. Notify the Owner and CH2M at least 2 weeks prior to conducting professional
photography. Conduct a meeting in advance of photography to confirm scope and
preferences with Owner and CH2M.
H. Identify each print on back. Identify name of Project, phase, building name(s) / level(s),
orientation of view, date and time of view, name and address of photographer, and
photographer's numbered identification of exposure.
I. Deliver electronic photograph files to Owner and CH2M. Catalog and index electronic
photograph files in chronological sequence; include typed table of contents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 33 00 - 7
SECTION 01 35 13.46
CLEAN ZONE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the general requirements for persons who perform work or
function within the Clean Zone.
B. The objective of this Section is to provide a controlled clean environment within which
mechanical, electrical, cleanroom systems, and process piping will be installed:
1. Maintain a clean environment from the initial construction stage through final
cleanroom certification.
2. Clean products brought into the Clean Zone meeting minimum cleanliness
standards on both interior and exterior surfaces.
3. Establish and monitor personnel cleanliness levels and construction protocol
standards for each construction stage.
4. Enforce active contamination controls consistent with each construction stage.
5. Monitor required level of cleanliness using spot checks at prescribed locations.
C. Section Includes:
1. Boundaries.
2. Standards.
3. Definitions.
4. General Clean Zone Procedures.
5. Construction Stage.
6. Training and Security.
7. Garments.
8. Clean Zone Entry Requirements.
9. Delivery, Storage, and Handling.
a. Delivery.
b. Storage.
c. Handling.
1.2 BOUNDARIES
A. The Clean Zone and Cleanrooms are shown on the Drawings.
1.3 STANDARDS
A. ISO 14644-1: Cleanrooms and Associated Controlled Environments – Part 1:

Classification of Air Cleanliness.
704618 Clean Zone General Requirements

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.46 - 1
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to ISO Standard 14644-1 for a complete list of definitions appropriate to

cleanrooms. Specific words and phrases used within these Contract Documents are
defined below for easy reference.
B. As-Built Cleanroom: Cleanroom which is complete and ready for operation with services
connected and functional, but without production equipment or personnel within the
room.
C. At-Rest Cleanroom: Cleanroom which is complete and has production equipment

installed and operating, but without personnel within the room.
D. Test and Balancing Contractor: The air and water systems testing, adjusting, and
balancing contractor (TABC) retained by the Owner to assist and verify completion and
performance of the operating systems.
E. Cleanroom Certification Contractor: The cleanroom testing and certifying contractor

(CCC) retained by Owner to assist and verify final completion and performance of the
cleanroom systems.
F. Classes of Cleanliness: Statistically allowable number of particles of a given size per

cubic meter of air.
G. Cleanroom: A defined clean area or room in which the concentration of airborne particles
is controlled to specified limits. For this project, the cleanroom is the space bounded by
the cleanroom structural floor slab below, the cleanroom filtered ceiling grid above, and
the perimeter cleanroom walls, including spaces, products, and utilities within.
H. Clean Zone: A defined clean area in which the concentration of airborne particles is
controlled to specified limits. The Clean Zone is the building space described above, in
the paragraph Clean Zone Boundaries, bounded by the floor slab below, the deck
membrane above, and the perimeter fire, separation, and boundary walls, which
encompass cleanrooms of any cleanliness classification, as well as any remote special
rooms for cleanroom support equipment, including spaces, products, and utilities within.
I. Clean Zone Construction Stage: See Stage.
J. Clean Zone Director: The person, hereinafter referred to as the Director, vested with
authority by the Contractor to supervise personnel working within the Clean Zone and to
ensure requirements of the Contract Documents are met in completion of the Clean Zone
construction, including spaces, products, and utilities within.
K. Interstitial: A defined clean area bounded by the plane of the cleanroom filtered ceiling
below, the bottom of the building roof membrane above, and the perimeter fire,
separation, and boundary walls, including spaces, products, and utilities within.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.46 - 2
L. Office Clean: A standard of cleanliness commonly maintained in finished commercial
office spaces with no visible residues of dirt, dust, oil, grease, or debris on the floor,
walls, or work stations as normally achieved by cleaning, wiping, and vacuuming.
M. Operating Cleanroom: Cleanroom in normal operation with services functioning and with
production equipment and personnel present and performing their normal work functions
within the room.
N. Penthouse: A defined utility area bounded by the penthouse structural floor slab below,
the bottom of the penthouse roof membrane above, and the perimeter fire, separation, and
boundary walls, including spaces, products, and utilities within.
O. Products: Materials, equipment, physical items, and packaged systems.
P. Quality Assurance Contractor: The quality assurance cleanroom certifying contractor

retained by the Owner to spot check and verify proper cleanroom construction and
performance.
Q. Stage: The phase or degree of construction completion that mandates specific activities,
training, security clearance, dress and work protocol, cleaning procedures, work habits,
and system performance, as defined herein.
R. Subfab: A defined clean area bounded by the building slab-on-grade floor below, the
bottom of the cleanroom structural floor slab above, and the perimeter fire, separation,
and boundary walls, including spaces, products, and utilities within.
1.5 GENERAL CLEAN ZONE CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
A. The following activities are prohibited inside the Clean Zone at any Stage:
1. Eating or drinking foodstuffs.
2. Smoking of cigarettes, cigars, or pipes.
3. Spitting.
4. Standing, walking, or sitting on electrical conduit and bus duct, HVAC ductwork,
fire sprinkler piping, or other building utility piping.
5. Standing, walking, or sitting on process high-purity or double-contained specialty
gas piping.
6. Standing, walking, or sitting on ceiling cleanroom filter modules or packaged
ceiling modules, whether boxed in storage or installed in the ceiling grid.
7. Breaking open any clean products specially sealed and wrapped for protection
until the product is installed.
8. Cutting, threading, soldering, grinding, or welding pipe, conduit, bus duct, or
fittings, after completion of Stage 1 activities.
9. Operating any propane-, acetylene-, diesel-, gas-, or oil-fueled tool, high-lift, or
other construction equipment.
10. Applying or spilling oil, stain, paint, sealant, caulking, or other diffusing product
onto the structural floor before application of specified sealers and paints.
11. Entering or working inside the Clean Zone in garments and footwear that are not
in compliance with written Clean Zone cleanliness protocol posted for the
construction stage.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.46 - 3
12. Entering or working inside the Clean Zone without badge clearance posted for
the construction stage.
B. Mandatory procedures for persons entering and working in the Clean Zone in Stages 3
through 5:
1. Clean footwear with electric foot scrubber at entry to gowning area.
2. Walk on all sections of tacky mat provided at entry to the Clean Zone.
3. Wipe down or vacuum off construction materials, tools, and accessories.
4. Wipe up spills of caulking, sealant, filter gel, paint, and similar products
immediately.
5. Dispose of tie-straps, plastic seal wraps, and other product-protecting devices in
trash receptacles.
6. Enclose and contain bits of construction debris, such as nuts, washers, wire-cut
ends, insulation scraps, metal trimmings, and similar products from falling
beyond the work zone into interstitial or under floor cavities.
7. Wear garments and accessories as instructed and advise any worker who is not
properly attired. Notify the Director of any person improperly attired.
8. Provide continuous 99.99 percent efficient at most penetrating particle size
HEPA-filtered vacuum pickup during drilling, coring, cutting, or similar particle-
generating work activities after construction Stage 2.
9. Provide construction tools that are cleaned, stored, and used only within the
designated Clean Zone after construction Stage 2.
10. Attend jobsite safety training classes conducted by the Contractor.
11. Follow safety rules as taught in the Contractor’s safety class and follow normal
safety discipline enforced by each employer as standard procedure for the trade,
worker experience, and type of work required.
12. Complete the HPM safety training sessions conducted by the Owner.
C. Security Procedures:
1. Display color-coded security badges and company identification inside the site
perimeter boundary as established by the Contractor.
2. Clean Zone Entrance Requirements:
a. Limited to persons with Clean Zone badges.
b. Visitors:
1) Accompanied by an Owner's representative.
2) Check in with the Director prior to entry into the Clean Zone.
3. Respect temporary locks installed at entry points to restrict entry but permit safe
exit.
D. Disciplinary Procedure:
1. The Owner or Director will remove:
a. Persons performing a prohibited activity immediately from the jobsite.
b. Persons not following the mandatory procedures immediately from the
jobsite.
c. Persons without proper badge clearance from a posted controlled area
immediately from the jobsite.
2. Prohibit repeat violators from entering the jobsite.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.46 - 4
1.6 CONSTRUCTION STAGE ACTIVITIES
A. The activities shown in Table 1 – Construction Stage Activities are a listing of major
tasks in construction of the cleanroom. The table is not inclusive of all required activities.
TABLE 1 – Construction Stage Activities

Stage1
Activity 1 2 3 4 5
Initial grading and utility site work. S
Site utility work complete. X
Building structure, shell, and roof complete. X
Concrete floor finished and cured. X
Mechanical, electrical, plumbing and process systems X
involving grinding, welding, cutting or other process of
metallic products including but not limited to piping and duct
systems.
Insulation of mechanical, plumbing and process systems. X
Makeup Air Handlers installed. X
Equipment rooms enclosed with access openings. X
Building structural fireproofing complete. X
Manufacturing building shell enclosed. F S
Concrete floor changes and preparation complete. X
Concrete floor sealed and cured. X
Clean Zone perimeter walls complete. X
Clean Zone perimeter walls sealed, painted, and dried. X
Fire barriers complete. X
Upper zones of fire protection complete. X
Building structure airtight. X
Recirculation Air Handlers installed. X
Mechanical, electrical, plumbing and process systems X
complete, except for ceiling grid, cleanroom walls, and access
flooring.
Clean Zone perimeter boundary enclosed. F S
Raised floor complete and level. X
Laminate floor material laid and sealed. X
Protective temporary floor cover complete. X
Ceiling assembly complete and level. X
Perimeter Clean Zone glazing complete. X

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.46 - 5
TABLE 1 – Construction Stage Activities
Stage1
Activity 1 2 3 4 5
Interior walls erected. X
Doors installed and operable. X
Floor, ceiling, and wall changes complete. X
Fire sprinkler system installed and tested. X
Permanent lighting complete and operable. X
Smoke detectors installed and tested. X
Recirculation ductwork complete and tested. X
Makeup air ductwork complete and tested. X
Control devices complete. X
Housekeeping vacuum system complete, operable, and tested. X
Contamination levels stabilized at ISO Class 3.6. X
Cleanroom walls, floors, and ceiling assembly completed. F S
Fire sprinkler system charged and operable. X
Smoke detectors operable. X
Recirculation air system operable and adjusted. X
Makeup air system operable and adjusted. X
Control devices operable and tested. X
Safety systems installed and tested. X
Protective covers removed from floor, ceiling and walls. X
Ceiling grid filled with gel sealant. X
Contamination levels stabilized at ISO Class 2.5. X
Ceiling cleanroom filters installed. X
Final cleaning finished inside the cleanroom. F S
Control systems tested and calibrated. X
Air systems tested and balanced. X
Certification completed. X
Contamination levels stabilized at levels required by project X
design.
Final cleanroom certification completed. F
1
S – Start activity of construction stage.
F – Finish activity of construction stage.
X – activity occurring during construction stage.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.46 - 6
1.7 TRAINING AND SECURITY
A. Badge Requirements:
1. Employee name.
2. Employee medical information.
3. Employer company name.
4. Color as defined in Table 2.
B. Hazardous Material Safety Training:

1. Special Safety Classes: 2 hours duration, by the Owner to familiarize workers
with hazardous gases, chemicals, products, and fluids referred to as hazardous
production materials (HPM) to be found on the site during this stage of
construction.
2. Testing: Workers to pass the written safety test, which includes emergency alarm
recognition.
3. Evacuation: Workers required to demonstrate safe emergency evacuation.
4. Required: As defined for workers in Table 2.
TABLE 2 – Training and Security Requirements

Stage
Description 1 2 3 4 5
Protocol Training: By None X1, 3 X1,2,3 X1,2,3 X1,2,3
Director6
Construction Safety Training
Safety Classes: By each X X X X X5
employer for safe performance
of work.
Job Site Safety Classes: By the X X X X X5
Contractor
Hazardous Material Safety N/A N/A X1,2 X1,2 X1,2
Training.
Badging
Badge Color – Protocol Black Gray Blue Green Owner4
Badge Color – HPM Safety Yellow Red Owner4
Color Code
1.
Mandatory for workers entering the clean zone.
2.
Workers must pass written test.
3.
Duration of Training: 2 hours, except for Stage 5 that is 1 hour.
4.
Owner standard color.
5.
No additional training required.
6.
Training sessions developed and reviewed with the Owner.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.46 - 7
1.8 GARMENTS
A. Type of garments to be worn is differentiated between what is required inside the

building, inside the clean zone and inside the cleanroom. Table 3 outlines the required
garments for inside the building and Table 4 outlines the required garments for inside the
clean zone and cleanroom.
B. Smocks and Work Suits:

1. Disposable Clean-Work Garments:
a. Furnished by the Owner for persons inside the Clean Zone.
b. Smock: One-piece, smock jacket with full-length sleeves, front closure,
and badge pocket.
c. Work Suit: One-piece, step-in, zip up nonshed Tyvek paper with full-
length legs, full-length sleeves, front zipper, elastic straps at wrist and
ankle, and badge pocket.
2. Cleanroom Garment: One-piece, step-in, zip up work suit of nonshed gabardine,
nylon, or rayon, with full-length legs, full-length sleeves, front zipper, elastic
straps at wrist and ankle, badge pocket, and utility pockets as required for safe
performance of work.
3. Color Choice: By Owner.
4. Outer Garments for Visitors: Furnished by the Owner.
5.
TABLE 3 – Garments Required Inside the Building

Stage
Clothing: Type chosen and furnished by the worker X X X X X
suitable for performance of work.
Headgear: Hardhat furnished by the employer as X X X X X
required to protect workers for overhead hazards.
Footwear: Type chosen and furnished by the worker X X X X X
suitable for safe performance of work.
Change Cycle: Clothing and shoes changed by the X X X X X
worker as required for performance of work free of
mud or other visible contamination.
Laundry Criteria: Laundered by the worker. Clothing X X X X X
must be in a good condition and free of visible
contamination.
Personal Hygiene: Responsibility of the worker. X X X X X

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.46 - 8
TABLE 4 – Garments Required Inside the Clean Zone and Cleanroom
Stage
Description 1 2 3 4 CZ 4 CR 5 CZ 5 CR
Clothing
Normal or Inner if under X X X X X X X
worksuit: type chosen and
furnished by the worker suitable
for performance of work.
Cleanroom Garment: X X
Disposable Outer Work Suit: X X X
Disposable Smock: X X X
Headgear:
Hardhat furnished by the X X X X X
employer.
Non-shed pull-over style with X X
crown, shoulder flaps, and face
mask for full eyes-only face
coverage, furnished by the
Owner.
Hair Cover: Disposable X X X
bouffant style with elastic band
for full hair coverage, furnished
by the Owner for persons inside
the Clean Zone, worn next to
the hair under the hardhat.
Mustache/Beard Covers: X X X
Disposable foam style furnished
by the Owner for workers and
visitors with facial hair.
Mustache/Beard Masks: X X
Disposable pleated polyester
style with elastic straps,
furnished by the Owner for
persons with facial hair.
Full Wrap-Around Safety X X X X X
Goggles: Furnished by the
Owner for visitors only.
Gloves
Non-shed nylon or vinyl, X X X X X
furnished by the Owner.
Footwear

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.46 - 9
Stage
Type chosen and furnished by X X
the worker suitable for safe
performance of work.
Shoes: Soft-soled, nonscuff, X X X X X X
tennis-style sportswear chosen
and furnished by the worker.
Disposable polypropylene slip- X X X X
on shoe covers with elastic top
for persons who wear special
footwear, furnished by the
Owner.
Outer Shoe Covers: Slip-on X X
knee-high shoe covers with
elastic top and ties and
protected static-dissipative
walking sole, furnished by the
Owner.
Change Cycle
Normal or Inner: Clothing and X X X X X X X
shoes changed by the worker as
required for performance of
work.
Cleanroom Garments, X X
Headgear, and Shoe Covers:
Collected by the Owner twice
weekly for laundry and reuse.
Disposable Work Suits: X X X X
Collected by the employer
weekly for disposal.
Disposable Slip-on Shoe X X X X
Covers: Collected by the Owner
weekly for disposal.
Disposable Hair Covers and X X X
Mustache/Beard Covers:
Collected by the Owner weekly
for disposal.
Disposable Mustache/Beard X X
Covers: Collected by the Owner
twice weekly for disposal.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.46 - 10
Stage
Repair or replace immediately, X X X X
work suits, headgear, and shoe
covers with tears or holes.
Laundry Criteria1
Normal or Inner: Laundered by X X X X X X X
the worker.
Cleanroom Garments, X X
Headgear, Shoe Covers, and
Gloves: Replaced and laundered
by the Owner twice weekly,
issued on Monday and
Thursday.
Disposable Work Suits, Hair X X X X
Covers, Mustache/Beard
Covers, Slip-On Shoe Covers,
and Gloves: Replaced by the
Owner weekly, issued on
Monday.
Disposable Mustache/Beard X X
Covers: Replaced by the Owner
twice weekly, issued on
Monday and Thursday.
Personal Hygiene
Responsibility of the worker. X X X X X X X
Wear protective covers over X X X X X
portions of exposed mustaches,
beards, and head hair while
working inside designated
Clean Zones or cleanrooms.
Do not apply aerosol aftershave, X X X X X
perfume, cologne, fragrant
lotions, cosmetics, or other
toiletries to exposed portions of
the face while working inside
the Clean Zones.
Wear cleanroom garments and X X X X X
accessories properly, as well as
advise and assist any others who
are improperly covered.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.46 - 11
Stage
Do not work inside the X X
cleanroom if sick with allergies,
cold or other sneeze-style
maladies.
1. Store clean garments and accessories in sealed plastic bags prior to issue.
2. Stage 4 and 5: include Process Tool Staging Area as part of the Clean Zone.
3. Stage listed as “_CZ” applies to Clean Zone only; Stage listed as “_CR”
applies to Cleanroom only.
1.9 CLEAN ZONE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
TABLE 5 – Clean Zone Entry Requirements

Stage
Personnel (Listed Sequentially)
Utilize temporary gown room. X X
Utilize permanent gown room. X X X
Clean outdoor shoes upon entry to gown room, using automatic shoe X X X X
cleaners.
Remove outdoor shoes on dirty side of gown room bench. Change into X X X X
clean zone shoes on clean side of gown room bench.
Change into clean zone garments; enter clean zone. X X X X
Exit clean zone, remove and store clean zone garments, remove and store X X X X
clean zone shoes, cross gown room bench, change into outdoor shoes,
exit gown room.
Equipment
Utilize temporary equipment staging room. X X
Utilize permanent equipment staging room. X X
Clean equipment prior to entry into clean zone. X X X X
Process Tool Staging Area: Use the permanent equipment staging room X X
for process tool unpacking, cleaning, and run-in testing.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery:
1. Ship Clean Zone components with an approved multi-layered protective
covering, packaged to prevent transit and construction dust from contaminating
the surfaces.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.46 - 12
2. Return material or equipment to the manufacturer for re-cleaning and
repackaging where the original shipping protective wrap was torn or defective.
B. Storage:
1. Materials shall be sealed in their original unopened packages.
2. Seal open ends of ducts and pipes with moisture proof barrier until product is
being connected during installation.
3. Store products and components to prevent damage or intrusion of foreign matter.
Conspicuously mark rejected on any materials that have been damaged and
remove them from the job site.
4. Store products within the building in controlled space designated by the Owner.
5. Do not store products in the staging area in excess of that used in 1 day's work.
6. Do not store contaminated materials in the staging areas or Clean Zone.
C. Handling:
1. Handle components with extreme care to prevent damage.
2. Remove or strip packaging inside the designated equipment staging room outside
the cleanroom per Director’s instructions.
END OF SECTION

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.46 - 13
SECTION 01 35 13.49
CLEAN ZONE CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Requirements for the Clean Zone Contractor: The Clean Zone contractor is
responsible for direction and coordination of Clean Zone construction.
2. Responsibilities and authority for the Clean Zone Director, referred to as
“Director” in this Section. The Director is assigned by the Clean Zone contractor,
after review with the Contractor and Owner.
1. Section 01 35 13.46 – Clean Zone General Requirements.
2. Section 01 43 39 – Mockups.
3. Section 01 43 45 – Outgassing Criteria for Clean Zone Products.
4. Section 01 74 13.13 – Clean Zone Cleaning Procedures.
6. Section 23 05 93 – Air Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
7. Section 40 05 01 – Basic Mechanical Requirements.
8. Section 40 80 02 – Piping Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ISO 14644-1 – Cleanrooms and Associated Controlled Environments – Part 1,

Classification of Air Cleanliness.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Section 01 35 13.46 – Clean Zone General Requirements, for applicable

definitions.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Review the procedures and work performed on a continuous basis to verify compliance
with these requirements.
1. Report deviations from the Contract Documents to the Owner and the Director.
2. Correct deviations to the satisfaction of the Owner prior to further work in the
affected area.
3. Continuously maintain cleanliness levels for each construction stage. Retest and
reclean the area as required until specified cleanliness can be attained.
4. Develop work-around procedures and obtain approval from the Owner and the
Director for unusual work activities required out of protocol sequence or for
freak occurrences that result in excursions from protocol contamination levels.
704618 Clean Zone Construction Management

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.49 - 1
B. Provide training for new construction personnel before they receive badges and clearance
to work inside the building and Clean Zone.
C. Create and maintain weekly activity reports that summarize the following activities:
1. Cleanup crew operations for the previous week.
2. Clean Zone particle counts for the monitoring test stations on each day of the
previous week.
3. List of visitors entering the Clean Zone for the previous week.
4. List of tools, equipment, materials, and other items entering the Clean Zone for
the previous week.
5. List of construction workers authorized to enter the Clean Zone for the upcoming
week.
D. Manufacturer Field Services: Provide a manufacturer’s technical representative for whose

products require field application, assembly, or installation by workers who are not direct
employees of the manufacturer. The technical representative’s duties include:
1. Observing field conditions, dimensional verification, quality of surface finishes,
and other field conditions essential to acceptance and use of the finished product.
2. During subsequent work activities provide periodic, timely inspection and
counseling to ensure system complies with factory requirements.
1.5 CLEAN ZONE DIRECTOR
A. The Clean Zone Director will be assigned for the duration of Clean Zone construction
and startup activities covered by this Section.
B. General Responsibilities:
1. Act in the Owner’s best interests in successful completion of the project.
2. Enforce the clean build policies.
3. Solicit advice from the Owner and CH2M on matters peculiar to the type of
project being built.
4. Supervise receiving, unloading and storage of products used in constructing the
cleanroom, including but not limited to, ceiling grid, raised access floor, wall
system, cleanroom filters, fan filters and recirculation air handlers.
5. Direct testing, adjusting, and balancing contractor (TABC) on retesting,
adjusting, and balancing required during the cleanroom certification process.
6. Verify Cleanroom Certification contractor (CCC) field correlation of
instruments. Readings taken with equipment not qualified by this process will be
considered invalid and unsuitable for test results or verification.
7. Attend construction coordination meetings.
8. Log and document major construction events, as well as decisions made in the
course of their completion.
9. Plan the overall clean build program, organize the training program for workers,
oversee the protocol training sessions required by persons entering the Clean
Zone, and supervise and coordinate the cleaning procedures performed during
construction.
10. Advise the Owner in writing when, in the Director’s judgment, ongoing
construction activities might jeopardize successful startup, operation, or
performance of the cleanroom.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.49 - 2
C. Clean Construction Authority:
1. The Director will be vested by the Owner and the Contractor with authority over
construction operations inside the Clean Zone including workers, the Owner’s
staff, visitors, and service personnel.
2. The Director may be supported by assistants necessary to help with Clean Zone
access, inspections, protocol, training, documentation, and contamination
monitoring.
3. Identify the Director and support staff by special clothing, hardhats, and badges.
4. Provide construction personnel regular training on clean construction protocol,
whether through formal meetings or through on-the-spot counsel.
5. Provide special training on clean protocol for workers, visitors and the Owner’s
personnel prior to their entry into the Clean Zone.
6. Reprimand persons found in violation of posted construction protocol or security
procedures. Reprimand persons who fail to comply with directives issued by the
Director or who disregard the requirements of the clean construction protocol.
Impose the following jobsite restrictions:
a. First Violation: Issue person a verbal warning and place a written notice
in their job record.
b. Second Violation: Order person to leave the jobsite for the remainder of
the work shift, and place a written notice in their job record.
c. Third Violation: Order person to leave the jobsite for the duration of the
project. Place a written notice in their job records. Revoke their jobsite
clearance.
d. Deliberate or Flagrant Violation or Sabotage: Order person to leave the
jobsite immediately for the duration of the project. Place a written notice
in their job records. Revoke their jobsite clearance.
7. The Director shall be the sole judge regarding violations of protocol and security.
Exemptions requested from posted procedures shall be approved in writing by
both the Director and the Owner.
D. Management Responsibilities:
1. Keep written records on file from each contractor listing the jobsite
superintendent and construction personnel approved for Clean Zone work.
2. Maintain documents on record showing each person’s successful completion of
Clean Zone training program. Construction personnel shall be approved by a
company jobsite superintendent. Other persons and site visitors shall be approved
by the Owner and the Director.
3. Keep written requests from contractors for products brought into Clean Zone.
Inspect and approve dedicated clean construction tools appropriate for applicable
construction protocol.
4. Access Clean Zone through designated personnel gowning and material staging
and preclean areas only. Maintain separate Clean Zone log books for each
construction stage beginning with Stage 3. Document timed entries for persons
and materials entering or leaving the various construction areas. Exemptions
requested by the contractors from posted procedures shall be approved in writing
by both the Director and the Owner.
5. Manage the badge system, which identifies a person’s protocol and safety
training completion necessary to enter the Clean Zone.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.49 - 3
6. Maintain project files to document and validate clean construction activities.
Include class presentation materials, test results, photos and videos, particle count
charts and profiles, temperature and humidity charts and profiles, Clean Zone
logs, and personnel violation notices. Deliver clean construction files to Owner
before date of Substantial Completion.
E. Director Qualifications:
1. Minimum of 10 years’ experience constructing, testing, and qualifying
cleanrooms in the electronics industry.
2. Completed at least one project similar in design and arrangement to the type
being constructed to perform submicron wafer technology under ISO Class 4 or
better conditions.
3. Previous projects supervised by the proposed Director shall not have been
involved in litigation for reason of personal integrity, building or utility system
performance, or nonperformance of his employer.
4. Comparable experience in design, construction, or operation of cleanrooms will
be considered by the Owner.
5. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject proposed Director candidate(s).
The Owner also reserves the right to terminate the Director without cost penalty
should it be evident that the Director is no longer acting in the Owner’s best
interests.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of Part 3 for a list of submittal requirements
for this Section.
1.7 MOCK-UPS
A. Provide in accordance with Section 01 43 39 - Mockups.
1.8 PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Fixed-Position Still Photography:

1. Furnish one camera with film for the purpose of taking one still picture each
week of an area selected by the Owner. Final pictures shall be 4-inch by 6-inch
color prints.
2. Mount the camera on a fixed-position, wall-mounted bracket. Camera can have
an automatic timing device to take a picture at the same time each week, or the
picture can be taken manually during regular routines of the photographer
designated by the Director.
3. Duration: Beginning of construction Stage 2 and terminate at completion of
Stage 4 ceiling cleanroom filter installation.
4. Deliver pictures digitally to the Owner for storage, control, and distribution.
B. Mobile Video Camera Photography:

1. Furnish one complete video camera assembly and digital record to document
specific construction activities.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.49 - 4
2. Use to monitor clean construction protocol, to record specific or special
installation procedures, and to create a general log of project construction
completion.
3. Document site and building construction completion once every 2 weeks.
4. Show sections of the video at each protocol training class as examples of good
and bad construction techniques as a means of reinforcing clean construction
practices among the workers.
5. Deliver digital video to the Owner for storage, control, and distribution.
1.9 TRAINING AND BADGE REQUIREMENTS
A. Training Sessions:
1. Monitor the protocol training sessions organized and presented by the Director
for workers who will be assigned tasks within Clean Zone. Workers shall
undergo this training before they are permitted to work inside Clean Zone.
2. Implement a system of Clean Zone identification badges, which permit Director
and Owner to know that workers within Clean Zone have been properly trained
and are authorized to work within the area.
B. Badge Control:
1. Maintain logs of qualified personnel working on the jobsite and those authorized
inside Clean Zone.
2. Issue photo identification badges to personnel on the jobsite.
3. Include a passport-size photograph of individual on the badge, along with name
and company affiliation laminated onto a color-coded background with clip.
Badges shall be worn at all times when personnel are on the jobsite.
4. Apply special color stickers to identify completion of protocol and safety training
sessions required for clearance into Clean Zone.
5. Use separate color coding for each construction stage to identify clearance
authorized for each level. Refer to the program specified in Section 01 35 13.46 -
Clean Zone General Requirements.
1.10 CLEAN BUILD CONSTRUCTION
A. Responsibility:
1. Aspects of clean construction including worker protocol, training, temporary
gowning and staging cleanrooms, and cleanup. Follow Section 01 35 13.46 -
Clean Zone General Requirements, in the performance of this work.
2. Coordinate with the specialty cleaning contractor responsible for overall
cleanliness and contamination control of Clean Zone. Perform continuous and
special cleaning required for construction Stage 1 and 2 by Section 01 74 13.13 –
Clean Zone Cleaning Procedures.
3. Provide enclosed containers with disposable liners placed strategically around
Clean Zone for construction debris.
4. Provide walkway mats and sticky walkoff mats, clean or replace as described for
each construction stage.
5. Arrange walkway to provide separation and identification barricades to achieve
each protocol level.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.49 - 5
6. Provide and maintain clean storage racks and hangers to hang garments when
workers are outside Clean Zone.
7. Provide and maintain shoe lockers to store clean work shoes when workers are
outside Clean Zone.
8. Provide work suits for workers as required by Section 01 35 13.46 - Clean Zone
General Requirements.
9. Provide and maintain temporary personnel cleaning accessories as described,
such as shoe cleaners, hand washers, electric hand dryers, and portable HEPA
vacuum cleaners, until the permanent systems are installed and accepted by the
Owner.
B. Entry/Mud Rooms:
1. Provide, outfit, and maintain entrance mud rooms at each building entry control
point.
2. Install shoe scrapers, grates, and cleanup mats at the mud room to permit removal
of mud and debris from shoes.
C. Pre-enclosure Meeting:
1. Prior to completing enclosure of Clean Zone areas at the end of construction
Stage 2, schedule a meeting to coordinate and explain upcoming cleaning
procedures and construction requirements, as well as review the arrangement of
proposed gowning and preclean areas.
2. Attendees shall include, but not be limited to, representatives from the Owner,
the Contractor, CH2M, superintendents for contractors performing work, and
component manufacturer’s representatives furnishing equipment and materials in
Clean Zone.
3. Schedule the meeting 30 days prior to scheduled completion of Clean Zone
enclosure. Notify attendees’ 14 days prior to meeting.
1.11 TEMPORARY CLEANROOMS
A. Provide, outfit, maintain, and dismantle temporary cleanrooms as required.
B. Maintain continuous environmental control and air supply.
C. Provide scanned cleanroom filters for temporary cleanrooms. Attach air diffuser
plates/blades to the filter face to disperse discharge air laterally.
D. Maintain temporary rooms until permanent rooms have been completed and certified or
until the temporary rooms are no longer required and then dismantle and remove from the
facility.
E. General Temporary Cleanroom Requirements:

1. Gowning:
a. Provide gowning area to serve as contractors’ change area for entering
into Clean Zone. Include benches, shoe lockers, clothing racks, enclosed
garbage containers with disposable liners, vertical laminar flow clean air
hoods, portable drinking water stands and cups, and walkway
identification barricades.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.49 - 6
b. Place semi-permanent barricades to restrict movement of personnel and
materials to controlled entry points into Clean Zone. Separate the
gowning area from other construction site activities by walls and doors.
c. Provide packaged portable electric shoe cleaners at the entry into the
gowning area. Provide and maintain two operable units at each gowning
area.
d. Provide auto-closing doors or strip curtains at the entrance to this area.
e. Provide a multilayer tacky mat immediately inside the entry door.
f. Provide hooks for hanging outdoor protective garments.
g. Provide an area for storage of outdoor shoes.
h. Locate benches in the gowning areas to create a barrier to unobstructed
walk-through traffic. Use the benches to provide a convenient place to
change from outdoor shoes to dedicated cleanroom shoes.
i. Mount hanger or bar rods with hangers and curtains underneath HEPA-
filtered supply air inlets. Provide sufficient storage racks for one
dedicated garment, spaced 2 inches apart, for each worker who has been
trained and authorized to enter Clean Zone, plus a quantity of 25 extra to
be used by inspectors and the Owner’s personnel.
j. Place barriers or markers at the exit from the personnel gowning to
identify separate pathways for people and material throughout the Clean
Zone. Arrange barriers to minimize movement through the Clean Zone
and reduce cross-traffic patterns.
2. Equipment Staging, Preclean, and Storage Areas:
a. Provide temporary equipment and tool staging area, material pre-clean
area and storage areas. Include cleaning supplies, worktables, storage
racks, and enclosed garbage containers with liners.
b. Separate staging, preclean, and storage area from other construction site
activities by walls and doors.
c. Provide a staging area to serve as the staging and unpacking area for
material and equipment entering the pre-clean area. Provide autoclosing
doors or strip curtains at the entrance to this area.
d. Provide a preclean area to serve as cleanup area for material and
equipment entering Clean Zone. Provide auto-closing doors or strip
curtains at the entrance to this area. Provide a multilayer tacky mat
immediately inside the entry door.
e. Provide a clean material storage area, separate from staging and pre-
cleaning work areas to serve as the material/equipment secured and
controlled storage area. Provide double lockable doors at the entrance to
this area.
f. Provide a small gowning room for equipment preclean and storage areas
inaccessible from the main personnel gowning room.
g. Place a packaged portable shoe cleaner at the exit from the staging area
into Clean Zone and also at the entry into the pre-clean area. Provide and
maintain one operable unit at each location.
h. Provide a portable canister HEPA-filtered vacuum cleaner in the staging
and pre-clean area for cleanup of material being moved into Clean Zone.
Provide and maintain one operable unit at each location until the
permanent housekeeping vacuum system is operable in this area.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.49 - 7
i. Place barriers or markers at exit from the staging and pre-clean areas to
identify separate pathways for people and material throughout Clean
Zone.
3. Temporary Clean Pipe Fabrication Shop:
a. Provide cleanrooms used for the receipt, inspection, cutting, facing,
cleaning, welding, and certification of components manufactured for
ultrahigh-purity piping and distribution systems, including cleaning
supplies, worktables, storage racks, and pipe holders.
b. Provide a pipe staging area to serve as a material receiving, initial
packaging inspection, and controlled storage area to enable handling and
storage of 20-foot lengths of tubing. Connect this area to adjacent prefab
area with autoclosing doors and a manual door to the cutting and facing
work area. Provide autoclosing doors at entrance and exit of this staging
area, sized large enough to receive and unpack 20-foot lengths of tubing.
Provide a multilayer tacky mat immediately inside the entry door.
c. Provide a prefab work area for visual inspection, cutting, facing, and
initial cleaning area. Separate inspection area from the cutting, facing,
and cleaning area. Provide autoclosing doors at exit of this area to the
ISO Class 5 inspection area described below. Provide a multilayer tacky
mat immediately inside of entry door.
d. Provide an inspection area for final inspection, final cleaning,
fabrication, welding, and pipe bagging area. Provide a multilayer tacky
mat immediately inside entry door. Provide an emergency exit door in
this area. Isolate this area from the cutting and facing area by self-closing
swing doors and pass-throughs. Limit access to this area to persons
actually involved in the fabrication of the process piping.
e. Incorporate a small gowning room if the pipe shop is separated and
inaccessible from the main personnel gowning room.
f. Place a portable canister HEPA-filtered vacuum cleaner in pipe staging
area for cleanup of material being moved into the pipe shop. Provide and
maintain one operable unit until the permanent housekeeping vacuum
system is operable in this area.
g. Provide makeup ventilation and fume exhaust that meets applicable
safety standards. Provide sensing equipment to give audible alarms in the
event of low oxygen levels.
h. Size clean work areas to accomplish the defined tasks.
F. Room Criteria:
TABLE 1 – Temporary Cleanroom Criteria

Criteria Gowning Material and Equipment Pipe Fabrication
Preclean Staging Storage Staging Prefab Inspect
Construction Stage 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
cleanroom required
Cleanroom classification ISO 6 ISO 6 ISO 7 ISO 7 ISO 7 ISO 6 ISO 5
per ISO 14644-1

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.49 - 8
TABLE 1 – Temporary Cleanroom Criteria
Criteria Gowning Material and Equipment Pipe Fabrication
Preclean Staging Storage Staging Prefab Inspect
Minimum filter coverage 25 25 10 10 10 25 50
(percent)
Nominal filter face 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
velocity (feet per minute)
Minimum filter 99.99 99.99 99.99 99.99 99.99 99.99 99.99
efficiency, at Most
Penetrating Particle Size
(percent)
Average room velocity 20 25 N/A N/A N/A 25 45
(feet per minute)
Minimum air changes per N/A N/A 30 30 30 N/A N/A
hour
Pressurization, relative to 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.05 0.05 0.021
adjacent non-classified
rooms (in. H2O)
Temperature (degrees F) 70  5 70  5 70  5 70  5 70  5 68  5 68  5
Relative humidity 45  15 45  15 45  15 45  15 45  10 45  5 45  5
(percent)
Protocol (per construction 4CR 4CR 3 3 3 4CR 4CR
Stage as identified in
Section 01 35 13.46)2
Table 1 Notes:
1. Relative to adjacent temporary clean areas.
2. Refer to Section 01 35 13.46 - Clean Zone General Requirements for protocol.
Follow requirements for construction stage shown, unless otherwise modified in
Protocol paragraph.
G. Protocol:
1. Keep entry into the cleanroom to a minimum, limited to those persons properly
trained and badged. Entrance to the cleanroom is only through the gowning area.
Maintain a sign-in log of persons entering the cleanroom.
2. Personnel entering the pipe staging area are required to don booties and
cleanroom gloves before stepping off the tacky mat at the area entrance. If the
individual’s work will be confined to this area, no other cleanroom garment is
required.
3. When leaving the cleanroom, store cleanroom apparel with user’s nametag in the
gowning area on racks provided.
4. Attach a pad of tacky mats to the floor just outside the entrance to the cleanroom.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.49 - 9
H. Housekeeping:
1. Locate cabinets, pipe racks, and shelving to optimize safety for both workers and
material.
2. Place only one type and/or size of each material in the storage space,
compartment, shelf, or bin. Provide material label with the part number and
complete description of the material it contains.
3. No material is allowed on the floor.
4. Clean floors, work surfaces, tools, etc., at the end of each shift.
5. Clean walls, ceilings, doors, and shelving weekly. Vacuum floors daily and mop
floors weekly.
6. Maintain adequate stock of gowns to ensure they are readily available.
I. Materials:
1. Walls, ceilings, and floors suitable for the cleanroom classification.
2. Provide work tables of sufficient length to accomplish the anticipated tasks,
constructed of stainless steel surfaces with perforated tops inside the clean
environment work area.
3. Provide unpainted stainless steel shelves, racks, and other accessories approved
for cleanroom use and supplied by a cleanroom supply company.
J. Acceptance and Testing:

1. Certify the temporary cleanrooms per ISO Standard 14644-1 and obtain approval
from the Owner prior to beginning work in the area.
2. Recertify the cleanrooms as required by the Director. Correct cleanrooms not in
compliance.
3. Monitor the static pressure weekly at locations approved by the Director.
4. Monitor particle counts daily in the ISO Class 5 areas and weekly in the ISO
Class 6 and 7 areas at locations approved by the Director.
5. Make documentation available on site.
6. Post particle counts data weekly on an information board in the gowning area.
1.12 TEMPORARY CLEAN ZONE CONDITIONS
A. Climate Control:
1. Provide a prefiltered and pretreated source of outside makeup air for temporary
cleanrooms and for the entire Clean Zone beginning with construction Stage 3.
Maintain a positive pressure of at least 0.05-inch WC in the Clean Zone with
respect to outdoor ambient conditions continuously, beginning with construction
Stage 3.
2. Provide a prefiltered source of recirculation clean air for temporary cleanrooms
and for every cleanroom or clean area under protocol, initiated during
construction Stage 3 after intermediate cleaning procedures have been completed.
3. Provide temporary air-handling systems for makeup and for recirculation until
such time as permanent systems are operable.
4. Provide electric power for fans from two separate power panels, connected in an
alternating pattern so power is available to maintain partial uninterrupted climate
control in the Clean Zone should either panel fail.
5. Fewer fans may be operated during off-peak hours, provided that cleanliness
requirements and environmental conditions are maintained.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.49 - 10
B. Air-Handling Systems:
1. Makeup Air Handlers:
a. Makeup air handlers may be temporary units or the permanent units.
Where permanent units are used, take necessary precautions to protect
against damage or irreparable contamination.
b. Select makeup air quantity to provide proper space pressurization and
environmental conditions, with a minimum quantity of 1 cfm per gross
square foot of conditioned space.
c. Include a 30 percent ASHRAE prefilter, a 95 percent ASHRAE main
filter, and a 99.99 percent scanned HEPA filter rated on 0.3-micron
particle size. Provide a gel-type seal for the HEPA filter.
d. Include heating and cooling coils, humidifier, and controls compatible
with services available in the facility during this phase of construction.
Do not use direct-fired combustion heaters.
2. Recirculation Air Handlers:
a. Recirculation air fans may be temporary units integral with the HEPA
ceiling filter modules or permanent recirculation air-handler units where
precautions are taken to protect against damage or irreparable
contamination.
b. Provide recirculation air fans to provide air change rates specified for
each temporary cleanroom.
c. Include the following components on permanent recirculation air
handlers: two banks of filters consisting of 95 percent ASHRAE
prefilters with a 30 percent ASHRAE prefilter upstream and in series
until the construction has been upgraded to construction Stage 4.
C. Temporary Flooring, Partitions, and Doors:

1. Provide products for temporary protective flooring that are water resistant, sealed
against particle gathering or release, airtight, and suitable to maintain cleanliness
requirements. Refer to requirements in Section 01 43 45 - Outgassing Criteria for
Clean Zone Products.
2. Place one layer of minimum 8-mil-thick Visqueen over floor openings prior to
placement of temporary plywood or metal hole covers.
3. Provide door hardware with automatic closers and self-latching key locks
compatible with door hardware specified in Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
4. Provide 22-gauge steel door and knockdown door frame.
D. Temporary Signage:
1. Post the following signs prominently at every entrance to personnel gowning and
material preclean areas:
a. “Controlled Area”.
b. “Protocol Level by Director”.
c. “Badged Personnel Only”.
2. Post the following signs prominently at every entrance or exit leading to isolated
Clean Zone protocol construction areas:
a. “Clean Area”.
b. “Protocol Level by Director”.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.49 - 11
3. Material:
a. Sign: Painted sheet metal.
b. Sign Background Color: Safety yellow.
c. Lettering: 2 inches high with colors selected by the Director.
4. Mount temporary sign to front of entry doors and to back of exit doors.
E. Construction Filters:
1. Filters Furnished with the Air Handlers:
a. Sets of filters specified with the air handlers are intended for use by the
Owner as operating/replacement sets, not for construction use.
b. Install one set of filters when cleanroom served is upgraded to
construction Stage 4.
2. Construction Filters Provided by the Contractor:
a. Provide filter sets for air handling systems for use during construction to
permit replacement as described below. Replace filters according to
following schedule, beginning with unit startup at beginning of
construction Stage 3.
1) Replace the 30 percent ASHRAE prefilters in makeup and
recirculation air handlers every 30 days during construction
operation.
2) Replace the 95 percent ASHRAE main filters in makeup and
recirculation air handlers every 45 days during construction
operation.
3) Replace the 99.99 percent scanned HEPA filters in makeup air
handlers every 90 days during construction operation.
1.13 CONTAMINATION MONITORING
A. Responsibility:
1. Monitor, record, and publicly display particle counts taken during Clean Zone
construction sequence.
2. Use most current generation measurement and test equipment for field readings,
based on specified particle counters.
3. Calibrate equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements at the
beginning of certification work, traceable by serial number to the National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) within the previous 6 months.
B. Procedures:
1. Take particle counts with the portable counter on a rotating schedule, during
construction Stages 3 and 4. Take readings at 0.3- and 0.5-micron particle sizes at
test stations in Clean Zone at random times and locations while construction
work is in progress.
2. Share instantaneous particle counts with workers in vicinity of the probe whose
activities influence the readings.
3. Take particle counts with the fixed multipoint counter on a continuous basis,
during construction Stages 3 and 4. Locate the counter and multiple sample
probes as selected by the Director to match construction activity. Take readings
at 0.3- and 0.5-micron particle sizes at the test stations.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.49 - 12
4. Take surface particle counts with surface scanner on products and materials, as
identified by Director, entering Clean Zone during construction Stages 3 and 4.
Log particle counts for each product in Clean Zone log. Take readings at 0.1-,
0.3-, and 0.5-micron particle sizes to permit future evaluation.
5. Post recorded particle counts inside the gowning area on an information board,
arranged so that at least 2 weeks of particle count historical data can be
compared.
C. Documentation:
1. Record particle counts for sizes 0.3 and 0.5 micron in each test station mapped on
a cleanroom layout.
2. Create bar chart showing particle counts versus frequency/repeatability count.
3. Copy one representative strip chart from each clean aisle/test grid printed during
the test procedures.
4. Develop a comparative history graph by construction month of target
contamination levels versus actual measured particle counts.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 HOUSEKEEPING EQUIPMENT
A. Cleanroom Filtered Vacuum Cleaners:

1. Individual new canister dry-vacuum units affixed with four-stage filtration,
including 0.12-micron HEPA filter rated at 99.999 percent efficiency on the air
discharge, with wheeled cart, 3-gallon tank, 10-foot hose, and selection of wands.
2. Approved Manufacturers: Nilfisk-Advance Group or Minuteman Industrial, with
tools compatible for the surfaces to be cleaned.
3. Quantity: Provide six new vacuum cleaners for this project. Vacuum cleaners
will become the property of the Owner at completion of the project.
B. Shoe Cleaners:
1. Packaged portable shoe cleaner with integral vacuum cleaner, 0.3-micron HEPA
filter cartridge rated at 99.99 percent efficiency on the air discharge, and five
scrub brushes.
2. Approved Manufacturer: Liberty Industries, Inc.
3. Quantity: Provide six shoe cleaners for this project. Shoe cleaners will become
the property of the Owner at the completion of the project.
C. Walkoff Mats: Removable sticky mats of 2-mil polyethylene, 120 pack, similar to Clean
Line Sticky Matts by Control Environment Equipment Corporation.
2.2 PARTICLE COUNTERS
A. Provide one new particle counter of each type for this project. Counters will become the
property of the Owner at the completion of certification.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.49 - 13
B. Fixed, multipoint particle counter for airborne particle count tests.
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Particle Measuring Systems (PMS), Model Micro
LPC-110 Turbo.
2. Description:
a. Optical laser light-scattering particle counter rated on 0.1- to
5-micrometer particle size sensitivity with equal to or greater than
90 percent counting efficiency and 5 percent maximum sizing error on a
0.1-micrometer range at sample flow rate of 28 liters per minute. Sample
air discharged from the counter through a HEPA filter with minimum
efficiency of 99.97 percent removal efficiency.
b. Counter complete with data storage and statistical calculation capability,
remote data output, front panel control and readout, eight-channel
measurement display for 0.1- to 5.0-micrometer particle size, thermal
tape printer with cleanroom data paper, internal filtered vacuum pump,
isokinetic sample probes, handheld probes, room sample probes,
temperature and humidity environmental sensors, stainless steel cart, and
storage/carrying case.
C. Portable hand-held particle counter for airborne particle count tests

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Met One (Pacific Scientific Instruments),
Model 227B.
2. Description:
a. Portable handheld laser particle counter rated on 0.3- to 5-micrometer
particle size on a sample flow rate of 2.8 liters per minute.
b. Counter complete with rechargeable battery pack and charger, internal
memory to record particle counts and size distribution, compatible
computer taps to print data on remote printer or computer, integral
isokinetic probe, purge filter, and storage/carrying case.
D. Surface particle detector for testing of cleanliness of cleanroom materials

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Pentagon Technologies, Model QIII+ SPD.
2. Description:
a. Surface particle detector rated on 0.1-micrometer and larger particle sizes
on a sample flow rate of 28 liters per minute.
b. Counter complete with external printer, cleanroom printer paper, HEPA
discharge filter, and storage/carrying case.
2.3 SPECIAL ACCESSORIES
A. Plastic Laminating Machine: Provide and maintain one plastic laminator and lamination
stock required to laminate reduced-size construction drawings (up to size 18 by
24 inches) used in the Clean Zone. Use only laminated drawings in cleanroom areas
beginning with construction Stage 4. Laminating machine shall remain the property of
the Contractor.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.49 - 14
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Perform cleanliness reviews as required by Section 01 74 13.13 - Clean Zone Cleaning

Procedures.
B. The nature of the completed facility demands special attention to maintaining an overall
cleanliness in the project area. Methods of construction that minimize the generation of
contaminants are essential to avoid major cleanup problems. The construction of the
cleanroom represents a potential for surface contamination unless careful attention is paid
to the manner in which the erection and placement are handled.
C. Use the latest written recommendations of the component manufacturer in the installation
methods.
D. Installation of cleanroom materials shall be done only by personnel who have

satisfactorily completed the Clean Zone protocol and safety training requirements.
E. Unwrap finished materials which will be directly exposed to cleanroom operating

procedures or to the airstreams serving the cleanrooms in the staging area and installed in
the cleanroom during final clean erection phase.
F. Approved cleanroom gloves shall be worn by workers when handling finished cleanroom
products or any materials installed in the clean airstream.
3.2 ERECTION
A. Verify by field measurements, the dimensions of building shell structure so cleanroom

work will be accurately designed, fabricated, and fitted to the structure.
B. Coordinate cleanroom work with the work of other sections to avoid delays in
completion.
C. Maintain air pressurization regime between areas of different contamination levels or

protocol levels so cleanest areas are at the highest-pressure gradient.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.49 - 15
3.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
WITH BID
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED
13 21 10-01 Clean Zone Director Experience: X With Bid
 List of at least three projects completed
within the last 5 years that involved the
proposed Director.
 The project name, address and phone
number of responsible people from the
previous project for which the proposed
Director served as cleanroom supervisor,
superintendent, or equivalent position.
 The most recent project completed within
the previous 2 years.
13 21 10-02 Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for Per construction schedule.
temporary cleanroom(s). Include the
following as a minimum:
 Product data including catalog cuts on
materials, air handlers, filters, cleanroom
apparel, housekeeping supplies, benches,
etc., purchased by the Contractor.
 A detailed description of the cleanrooms,
including:
 Cleanroom floor plan.
 Filter layout.
 Services required.
 Map of building protocol as it involves
temporary cleanroom areas and access.
13 21 10-03 Proposed protocol for temporary cleanrooms. Per construction schedule.
13 21 10-04 Proposed protocol training program. Per construction schedule.
13 21 10-05 Name of independent certification testing Per construction schedule.
agency for temporary cleanrooms.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.49 - 16
WITH BID
13 21 10-06 Performance and Method Statements: Submit at least 30 days before the
 Written performance and method service is scheduled to
statements by the specialty firms that will commence.
perform tasks and services for this
project, outlining the organization,
manpower, procedures, sequence,
products, and equipment to be used in
performance of the service.
 Prepare method statements for each of the
construction stages for the following
activities and services:
o Monitoring and enforcement of clean
construction protocol and
construction sequence activities
necessary to achieve contamination
performance.
o Construction, monitoring, and
security of personnel gowning room,
equipment and process tool preclean
area, and clean material storage area.
o Placement, use, and monitoring of
temporary wall partitions, walkway
mats and barriers, tacky mats,
particle counters, lighting, and
environmental air handlers.
o Contents, format, and instructor for
each protocol training class.
o Location, schedule, and procedures
to create mock-ups of cleanroom
systems.
o Procedures for continuous and
special cleaning to show compliance
with Section 01 74 13.13 – Clean
Zone Cleaning Procedures.
o Procedures for air and piping system
testing and balancing to show
compliance with Section 40 80 02 -
Piping Systems Testing, Adjusting,
and Balancing, and Section
23 05 93 - Air Systems Testing,
Adjusting, and Balancing.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.49 - 17
WITH BID
13 21 10-07 Submit weekly activity reports. Within 3 days of report
completion.
13 21 10-08 Submit factory test logs for equipment and Include test data logs with each
materials used within the Clean Zone to shipment for every item that is
document the name of the manufacturer’s included in shipment.
quality control inspector, test date, original
performance and test data logs, corrective
action required, and final certified
performance and test data logs.
Enclose test data inside waterproof clear
plastic jackets suitable for placing in a
standard three-ring binder.
Include the final certified performance and
test data information for each product, shown
on a permanent nameplate, decal, or sticker
attached to the product for easy viewing.
13 21 10-09 Submit monthly Contamination Monitoring Within 3 days of report
reports. Build each subsequent month’s report completion.
from the previous report so that the final
submission at the end of construction will
provide a history of the contamination levels
monitored in the facility. See Part 1 Article on
Contamination Monitoring for required
information.
END OF SECTION

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 35 13.49 - 18
SECTION 01 40 00
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Quality control and control of installation.
2. Tolerances.
3. References.
4. Labeling.
5. Mock-up requirements.
6. Testing and inspection services, including special inspection.
7. Manufacturers’ field services.
8. Examination.
9. Preparation.
1.2 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions,
and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply with manufacturers’ instructions for handling, storage, installation, and start-up,
including each step, in sequence.
C. When manufacturers’ instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification

from CH2M before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more
stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more
precise workmanship.
E. Perform and Inspect Work in conformance with Special Inspection requirements of the
Authority Having Jurisdiction and the Contract Documents.
F. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality consistent
with other prominent installers in comparable business.
G. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by

manufacturer.
H. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement.
704618 Quality Requirements

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 40 00 - 1
1.3 TOLERANCES
A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable

Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.
B. Comply with manufacturers’ tolerances. When manufacturers’ tolerances conflict with

Contract Documents, request clarification from CH2M before proceeding.
C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions, position before securing products in place.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trades, or other consensus

standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements
are specified or are required by applicable codes.
B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents,

except where specific date is established by code.
C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.
D. When specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request

clarification from CH2M before proceeding.
E. Neither contractual relationships, duties, nor responsibilities of parties in Contract, nor

those of CH2M shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference
otherwise in reference documents.
1.5 LABELING
A. Attach label from agency approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction for products,
assemblies, and systems required to be labeled by code.
B. Label Information: Include manufacturer’s or fabricator’s identification, approved agency

identification, any safety labels per OSHA requirements and the following information,
as applicable, on each label.
1. Model number.
2. Serial number.
3. Performance characteristics.
1.6 MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS
A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this Section and identified in
respective product specification sections.
B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices,
flashings, seals, and finishes.
C. Document comments at mockup and distribute to Owner and CH2M.

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 40 00 - 2
D. Accepted mock-ups shall be comparison standard for remaining Work.
E. Where mock-up has been accepted by Owner and CH2M and is specified in product
specification sections to be removed; remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do
so by Owner.
F. See Section 01 43 39 – Mockups, for additional mockup requirements.
1.7 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
A. Employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency or laboratory acceptable to
Owner to perform specified testing.
1. Prior to start of Work, submit testing laboratory name, address, and telephone
number, and names of full time specialist and responsible officer.
2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by Materials
Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during most recent
inspection, with memorandum of remedies of deficiencies reported by inspection.
B. Utilize an independent firm, except as allowed by the American Institute of Steel

Construction certification programs for steel fabrication and erection, to perform tests,
inspections and other services specified in individual specification sections and Contract
Documents and as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction and Owner.
1. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in State of Virginia and in conformance with
ASTM E329.
2. Laboratory Staff: Maintain full time specialist on staff to review services.
3. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy
traceable to National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical
constants.
C. Testing, inspections and source quality control may occur on or off project site. Perform
off-site testing as required by CH2M or Owner.
D. Submit test and inspection reports to CH2M, Contractor, and Authority Having
Jurisdiction for record, indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract
Documents within three weeks of completion of the inspection and testing.
1. Submit reports of non-conforming work within 7 days of completion of the
inspection or tests.
2. Submit final report indicating correction of Work previously reported as non-
compliant at the conclusion of the project.
E. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment,
tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested.
1. Notify CH2M and independent firm 24 hours prior to expected time for
operations requiring services.
2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and
tests required for Contractor’s use.
F. Testing and employment of testing agency or laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of
obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 40 00 - 3
G. Re-testing or re-inspection required because of non-conformance to specified
requirements shall be performed by same independent firm per a testing plan developed
by the independent firm coordinated with and approved by the Contractor and CH2M.
Payment for re-testing or re-inspection will be charged to Contractor by deducting testing
charges from Contract Sum/Price.
H. Agency Responsibilities:
1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.
2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with CH2M and Contractor in
performance of services.
3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified
standards.
4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract
Documents.
5. Promptly notify CH2M and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-
conformance of Work or products.
6. Perform additional tests required by CH2M.
7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings.
I. Agency Reports: After each test, promptly submit report to CH2M, Contractor, and
Authority Having Jurisdiction. When requested by CH2M, provide interpretation of test
results. Include the following:
1. Date issued.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name of inspector.
4. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
5. Identification of product and specifications section.
6. Location in Project.
7. Type of inspection or test.
8. Date of test.
9. Results of tests.
10. Conformance with Contract Documents.
J. Limits on Testing Authority:

1. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements
of Contract Documents.
2. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. Agency or laboratory may not assume duties of Contractor.
4. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.
1.8 MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers

or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions,
conditions of equipment, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship,
start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment and training of Owner’s
personnel as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 40 00 - 4
B. Submit qualifications of observer to CH2M 30 days in advance of required observations.
Observer subject to approval of Owner.
C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers

that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers’ written instructions.
D. Refer to Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, Manufacturers’ Field Reports article.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work.
Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Verify existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work

being applied or attached.
C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D. Verify utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct locations.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner

prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond.
END OF SECTION

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 40 00 - 5
SECTION 01 43 45
OUTGASSING CRITERIA FOR CLEAN ZONE PRODUCTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the selection and/or testing of critical products within the Clean Zone
with regard to outgassing molecular contaminates.
B. The purpose of this Section is to control the level of Airborne Molecular Contamination
(AMC) from materials outgassing into the Clean Zone environment.
1. Materials that come into contact with the air in the Clean Zone or with the
airstream from air-handling systems that serve the Clean Zone, to comply with
the material outgassing design criteria specified in this Section.
2. Evaluate critical materials proposed for Clean Zone construction to determine if
the outgassed molecules pose sufficient risk to reject its use in the Clean Zone.
C. Use this Section in conjunction with other applicable sections for the selection of Clean
Zone materials.
D. Related Sections
1. Section 01 35 13.46 – Clean Zone General Requirements.
E. In the event of conflict regarding clean zone product requirements between this Section
and another section, the provisions of this Section govern.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. SEMI F21 - Classification of airborne molecular contaminant levels in clean

environments
B. Organic Outgassing from Cleanroom Materials HEPA/LLPA Filter Components -

Standardized Test Proposal, presented at the IEST Annual Technical Meeting of May
1997.
C. National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST), or Wiley 275,000 Compounds
Mass Spectra Library.
D. EPA Method 524.2.
704618 Outgassing Criteria for Clean Zone Products

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 43 45 - 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Specific terms and phrases specific to outgassing as defined in SEMI standard F21 are
condensed below for reference:
1. AMC Controller: Provided by the Owner and vested with authority by the Owner
to supervise product approval, testing, and application regarding compliance with
AMC criteria. The AMC Controller has the authority to accept or reject materials
proposed for installation in the Clean Zone.
2. Acids: A corrosive material whose chemical reaction characteristic is that of an
electron acceptor; any solution with a chemical pH less than 7.
3. Areal Density: The property of a material as it is installed indicating the mass per
unit surface area (gram per square cm).
4. Bases: A corrosive material whose chemical reaction characteristic is that of an
electron donor; any solution with a chemical pH greater than 7.
5. Boilers: A group of compounds with a range of boiling points. Low boilers are
compounds that are less retained on a gas chromatography column than n-decane.
Medium boilers are defined as compounds that elute from a gas chromatography
column between n-decane and n-eicosane. High boilers are defined as
compounds that elute from a gas chromatography column after n-eicosane. This
method of categorization is typically used to avoid identifying the individual
compounds.
6. Clean Zone: A defined general clean area in which the concentration of airborne
particle contamination is controlled to specified limits as defined in Section 01 35
13.46, Clean Zone General Requirements. The Clean Zone encompasses
cleanrooms of any cleanliness classification, mini-environments, and remote
special rooms for cleanroom support equipment, including spaces, materials, and
utilities within.
7. Condensable: A substance having a boiling point 150 degrees C above room
temperature at atmospheric pressure, capable of condensation on a clean surface.
8. Dopants: A chemical element which modifies the electrical properties of a
semiconductive material.
9. Outgassing (Offgassing): The spontaneous evolution of a gas or vapor from a
material. This includes desorption of gases, evaporation of volatile materials, and
evolution of decomposition products.
10. pptrM: parts per trillion (Molar).
11. Target Compound: A contaminant that is, by itself or in combination with other
compounds, detrimental to the manufacturing process.
12. TD-GC-MS: Industry abbreviation for analytical test procedure using thermal
desorption-gas chromatography-mass spectrometry.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Product manufacturers and contractors have the obligation to furnish and install
materials, finishes, and assembly techniques that achieve the AMC performance criteria
established for this project. The required contamination level will be defined by the
Owner at the initiation of the project according to SEMI F21.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 43 45 - 2
1.5 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Base the project design criteria for the amount of acceptable outgassing upon the
specified molecular contamination level classification as defined in SEMI F21,
Classification of Airborne Molecular Contaminant Levels in Clean Environments.
B. Submit products for use in the Clean Zone which satisfy one of the following criteria:
1. Laboratory tests by an approved, independent laboratory confirming the product
does not outgas within the detection limits of the equipment, the product does not
outgas process critical or target compounds, and the product does not outgas
process critical or target compounds at a sufficient rate to pose a manufacturing
yield risk.
2. Approval by the AMC Controller based on previous experience and listed in
Section 01 35 13.46 – Clean Zone General Requirements.
3. Waiver by the AMC Controller based on exception(s), even when the product
exceeds the outgassing test criteria. Allowable exceptions include, but are not
limited to:
a. The quantity of the product used in the Clean Zone is not sufficient to
pose a contamination risk.
b. The product is sufficiently segregated or remote from the process
affected by the target compound(s).
c. The product areal density is high.
d. The product is not directly in the Clean Zone airstream or is fully
encapsulated.
e. The target compound has a low boiling point and/or is considered low
risk to outgas in cleanroom conditions.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
C. Section 01 80 13 – Sustainable Design Requirements: Requirements for sustainable

design submittals.
D. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of Part 3 for a list of submittal requirements
for this Section.
A. Review this Section with the AMC Controller and incorporate requirements pertaining to
Clean Zone product selection and outgassing test criteria.
B. Utilize a test laboratory having documented experience with TD-GC-MS conducted by

qualified technicians.
C. The AMC Controller to:

1. Review Clean Zone product specifications and material outgassing test results.
2. Maintain a field file documenting products submitted for outgassing tests,
incorporating matched laboratory test results.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 43 45 - 3
3. Maintain an updated field file listing product manufacturer/type approved for use
on this project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 OUTGASSING CRITERIA FOR PRODUCT ACCEPTANCE
A. Acceptable Laboratories for Product Outgassing Testing:

1. ChemTrace Analytical Laboratory, Hayward, California.
2. Balazs Analytical Laboratory, Division of Air Liquide, Electronics, Sunnyvale,
California.
3. TestAmerica, Corvallis, Oregon.
B. Outgassing Test Criteria:

1. The AMC Controller will determine the outgassing test criteria and acceptance of
each Clean Zone product.
2. The outgassing test criteria will contain but is not limited to the following
parameters:
a. Acceptable levels for the target compounds, expressed as ppmw, ppmM,
ppmV, and/or nanograms per square cm.
b. Time and temperature parameters for the sample treatment prior to
TD-GC-MS analysis.
c. Specific target compounds to be identified in the analysis.
d. Details for sample amounts, composition, preparation, and procedures
for submittal to the testing laboratory.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TEST PROCEDURE
A. Analyze products for outgassing by dynamic head-space method as described in the

technical paper Organic Outgassing from Cleanroom Materials HEPA/LLPA Filter
Components - Standardized Test Proposal, presented at the IEST Annual Technical
Meeting of May 1997. Laboratories to employ the procedures described therein. For any
variations in test conditions, submit system description to the AMC Controller for
approval.
B. Perform semi-quantitative analysis of the amounts of each outgassed compound by using

the response factor for n-decane (C10H22). Where possible, identify the hydrocarbons.
Otherwise, divide results into boiling point ranges as follows:
1. Low Boilers: C6H14 to C10H22.
2. Medium Boilers: C11H22 to C20H42.
3. High Boilers: greater than C20H42.
The above categories are defined based on use of a nonpolar poly (dimethysiloxane) GC
column.
C. Use the latest edition of National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST), or
Wiley 275,000 Compounds Mass Spectra Library for identification of each outgassed

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 43 45 - 4
compound. If there is not a match, interpret mass spectra manually to give the best
estimate of the most probable compound or class of compounds.
D. Analyze an empty standard blank container and a hydrocarbon standard mixture per EPA
Method 524.2 containing 500 ng each of a series of n-alkanes from n-hexane to
n-octacosane (C28C58). Use this standard to calibrate instruments, to assess the sensitivity
of the GC-MS, and to determine the boiling point range of compounds that can be
detected by the instrument.
E. Present the chromatograms produced by the individual samples as part of the test data.
Identify the major outgassed compounds on the chromatogram.
F. Measure and document the areal density (grams per square cm) of the product as part of
the test data.
G. Express outgassing test results as ppmw (parts per million by weight, g per gram) and
nanogram per square centimeter.
H. Summarize test results on form Outgassing Materials Test Results Data Sheet.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Perform construction activities regarding Clean Zone product handling in compliance

with the requirements of Section 01 35 13.46 - Clean Zone General Requirements.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 43 45 - 5
WITH BID
01 43 45-01 Test Samples: Prior to providing manufacturers’
1. Provide test samples to the AMC submittals of products for review
Controller for independent testing by and acceptance.
an approved laboratory. If the
manufacturer chooses to conduct
separate tests, they to be performed
by a laboratory approved by the AMC
Controller and conform to the
material outgassing test criteria
specified in Part 3.
2. The AMC Controller determines the
size, shape, weight, quantity, and state
of the sample based on its type and
use. Prepare samples requiring
joining, mixing, curing, or priming
using manufacturer's recommended
methods and specifically document
each preparation step as it occurs.
3. Prepare samples in the same manner
in which they would be applied or
installed in the Clean Zone. If specific
cleaning procedures are required
before the product enters the Clean
Zone, submit these samples in the
cleaned state.
4. Where two or more materials have a
potential for reacting in combination
with one another to outgas, an
additional compatibility test is
required. Prepare the test sample
simulating as close as possible the
Clean Zone installation and
atmosphere, and submit for tests
within 1 week after sample
preparation.
5. For compounds requiring mixing or
air curing, include dates, field
conditions at time samples were taken
(temperature, relative humidity of
both the space and the ambient), and
operators' names in the field file.

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 43 45 - 6
WITH BID
01 43 45-02 Record Documents Within 2 weeks of completion of
1. Assembled in a Standard Three-Ring cleanroom construction Stage 4.
Binder:
a. Field file of products
submitted for outgassing
tests.
b. Field file of products
approved for use on the
project.
c. Field file of products rejected
for use on the project.
d. Laboratory test results.
e. Maintain an updated field file
listing product
manufacturer/type approved
for use on this project.
2. Laboratory test results extracted from
samples submitted directly to the
AMC Controller for independent
testing, to become the property of the
AMC Controller. Product
manufacturers to not use these results
for promotional or financial
advantage without written release by
the AMC Controller.
3. One sample of construction products
sealed in plastic or shrink-wrap, for
storage and future testing by the
AMC Controller. Suitable samples
would include one reasonably-sized
segment of floor, wall, ceiling
components (minimum size 1 square
foot); tube of sealants; sample from
gel pours (1/2 inch deep in a 3/4 inch-
wide track 6 inches in length);
gaskets; cleaning agents; can of paint
and mastic; etc.
4. Electronic files, organized identically
as required hard copy documentation
in format and delivery system
acceptable to the Owner.
END OF SECTION

20 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 01 43 45 - 7
SECTION 01 45 19
SITE VIBRATION CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes guidelines to limit vibration disturbances to existing site operations.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS
A. Observe the following guidelines to limit vibration disturbance to existing sensitive site
operations. During construction, the Owner has contracted for services to physically
monitor the vibration-sensitive areas. On the basis of this monitoring, the Owner may
wish to modify these guidelines as construction proceeds.
B. Submit questions concerning these guidelines, further coordination, or items that, in the
Contractor’s opinion, will preclude Contractor compliance for review by the Owner.
1.3 GENERAL
A. Break hardtop connections between the project site and the operating facility as early as
possible in the demolition phase. Saw concrete and pavement, do not break with
jackhammers and/or remove by bending. Avoid impact forces on the construction side of
the saw-cut joint until the saw cut is complete.
B. Fixed Equipment: Owner will review on a case-by-case basis the use of equipment with
50 hp and greater and with shaft speeds in the range 450 to 900 rpm, such as compressors
and pumps, as well as diesel generators. Unless specified otherwise, do not use such
equipment on the site at distances of less than 250 feet from the operating facility. Do not
locate equipment with less than 50 hp at distances closer than 100 feet.
C. Road Maintenance: Maintain road surfaces within the site smooth and free from potholes
or other irregularities. Surface travel conditions are especially important within a distance
of 200 feet from the operating facility. Ramps shall be as gradual as possible.
D. Speed Limits: Comply with a speed limit of 10 mph or less for vehicles with axle loads in
excess of 5,000 pounds per axle, while on the site or entering and leaving the site. Do not
use speed bumps for speed control.
E. Only use vehicles with axle loads less than or equal to 5,000 pounds per axle to excavate
dirt and soil from the demolition site and load it into the trucks.
F. Dropping Heavy Items: Avoid impact vibration when placing loads weighing more than
100 pounds that must be lifted by crane or other heavy lift devices.
704618 Site Vibration Control Requirements

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 45 19 - 1
G. Forklifts: Keep travel ways for forklifts free of debris and other obstructions. Rubber tires
shall be used, but they need not be pneumatic. Avoid collision with walls, columns, or
other in-place structural members, and avoid dropping of loaded pallets or other loads
from a height of greater than 1 inch.
H. General Impact: Operate equipment lifting or carrying heavy loads in a manner to avoid
dropping.
I. In General: Use rubber-tired vehicles instead of tracked vehicles, at distances closer than
300 feet. Tracked vehicles may be used beyond 300 feet but use rubber-tired vehicles if
practical. Operate vehicles in a manner that limits impact with the road, other vehicles,
and structures.
1.4 VEHICLES AND CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
A. Do not operate vibratory compactors closer than 300 feet to the operating facility.
Compactors with frequencies greater than 25 Hz or 1,500 rpm (some construction
literature uses the equivalent “cpm”, denoting cycles per minute) are preferable to lower-
frequency compactors. Do not operate low-frequency compactors (less than 20 Hz or
1,200 cpm) closer than 1,000 feet.
B. Do not operate tampers equivalent to that on the Caterpillar Model EL 200 excavator
closer than 150 feet to the operating facility.
C. Pogo Compactors: Small hand-held compactors may be used without restriction.
D. Static (non-vibratory) roller compactors may be used without restriction.
E. Do not operate bulldozers equivalent to the Komatsu Model D65E (35,000 pounds
weight) closer than 300 to 500 feet to the operating facility (depending on roughness of
terrain). The restrictions stated earlier as regards to road maintenance and speeds apply.
F. Do not operate excavators equivalent to the John Deere Model 892 (72,000 pounds
weight) excavator closer than 150 feet to the operating facility.
G. Do not operate dump trucks equivalent to the International Model S2500 (22,000 pounds
empty) closer than 100 feet to the operating facility. The restrictions stated earlier as
regards to road maintenance and speeds apply.
H. Do not operate heavy-tracked cranes equivalent to the Manitowoc 4100W closer than
250 feet to the operating facility. The restrictions stated earlier as regards to road
maintenance and speeds apply.
I. Vibratory or impact pile driving must be scheduled with the Owner prior to use. It is
likely that this type of work will be scheduled at hours requiring premium charges for
labor and equipment.

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 45 19 - 2
1.5 SUMMARY GUIDE
A. Categories of Construction Equipment, Minimum Setback From Sensitive Facility:
Minimum Minimum
Distance from Distance from
Operating Office/Support
Category Equipment Examples Facility Buildings
I Static smooth- 70 feet 40 feet
drum rollers
“Pogo”
compactors
Ia Jackhammer or 200 feet 100 feet
hoe-ram without
concrete path to
sensitive areas
II Dump trucks International 100 feet 60 feet
Model S2500
II Graders Caterpillar 14G 150 feet No restriction
Scrapers Caterpillar 623E
Soil Grinders Raygo Gator,
Tampers RS-500B
Rubber-tired Caterpillar El 200
Loader
IV Vibratory rollers 300 feet 150 feet
at frequencies of
1,500 rpm (25Hz)
or higher
V Sheepsfoot Caterpillar 815B 500 feet 250 feet
Compactor Komatsu D65E
Bulldozer Caterpillar 973
Track Loader
VI Vibratory or 1,000 feet 500 feet
impact pile
driving
Vibratory
compactors at
frequencies less
than 1,500 rpm
(25Hz)

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 45 19 - 3
END OF SECTION

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 45 19 - 4
SECTION 01 60 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Products.
2. Product delivery requirements.
3. Product storage and handling requirements.
4. Product options.
5. Substitution procedures.
6. Equipment electrical characteristics and components.
1.2 PRODUCTS
A. Furnish products of qualified manufacturers suitable for intended use. Furnish products of
each type by single manufacturer unless specified to be permitted otherwise.
B. Products to be new and suitable for the intended use.
C. Do not install previously used products, except as specifically required or allowed by

Contract Documents.
D. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as
specifically permitted by Contract Documents.
E. Furnish interchangeable components from same manufacturer for components being

replaced.
1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure products comply with requirements, quantities are
correct, and products are undamaged. Notify the Owner and CH2M of evident
discrepancies or damage.
C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage.
1.4 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS
A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions.
B. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.
704618 Product Requirements

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 60 00 - 1
C. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an
environment favorable to product.
D. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
E. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage
or protection.
F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide

ventilation or temporary heating as recommended by manufacturer to prevent
condensation and degradation of products.
G. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in well-drained area. Prevent mixing
with foreign matter.
H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage. Provide dunnage, or platforms above ground level and
housings as required to protect the equipment and materials from weather.
I. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify
products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
1.5 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting

those standards or description.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of one of

manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed,
unless approved in advance in accordance with the following article.
C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with Provision for

Substitutions: Submit request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in
accordance with the following article.
1.6 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for Substitutions
during bidding period to requirements specified in this Section.
B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed

Substitution with Contract Documents.
C. A request constitutes a representation that Bidder or Contractor:

1. Has investigated proposed item and determined that it meets or exceeds quality
level of specified item.
2. Will provide same warranty for Substitution as for specified product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be
required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 60 00 - 2
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently
become apparent.
5. Will reimburse Owner and CH2M for review or redesign services associated with
re-approval by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Shop Drawing
or Product Data submittals, or other documents, without separate written request, or when
acceptance will require revision to Contract Documents.
E. Substitution Submittal Procedure:

1. Submit three copies of request for Substitution including a completed CSI Form
13.1A for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution.
2. Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and certified test results attesting to
proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.
3. CH2M will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request
within 10 working days of receipt of the written request.
F. The use of substitute materials is not allowed without prior written approval by Owner
and CH2M.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
A. Wiring Terminations: Furnish terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities,
sizes, and materials indicated. Include lugs for terminal box.
END OF SECTION

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 60 00 - 3
SECTION 01 70 00
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Closeout procedures.
2. Final cleaning.
3. Starting of systems.
4. Demonstration and instructions.
5. Testing, adjusting and balancing.
6. Protecting installed construction.
7. Semifinal reviews and completion list.
8. Project record documents.
9. Operation and maintenance data.
10. Manual for materials and finishes.
11. Manual for equipment and systems.
12. Spare parts and maintenance products.
13. Product warranties and product bonds.
14. Final review and punchlist.
15. Maintenance service.
16. Contract closeout checklist.
1. Section 23 05 93 – Air Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
1.2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been
inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready
for CH2M's review.
B. Provide submittals to Owner required by authorities having jurisdiction as outlined in this

section.
C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous
payments, and sum remaining due.
D. Owner will occupy portions of building as specified in Section 01 10 00 - Summary.
1.3 FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment or for each phase or portion of the
work to be turned over to the Owner. Secure Owner acceptance that the cleaning has been
completed per the requirements.
704618 Execution and Closeout Requirements

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 70 00 - 1
B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels,
stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted
and soft surfaces.
C. Clean equipment (interiors and exteriors), floors, and fixtures to sanitary condition with
cleaning materials appropriate to surface and material being cleaned.
D. Replace filters of operating equipment.
E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from site.
1.4 STARTING OF SYSTEMS
A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B. Notify Owner 7 days prior to start-up of each item.
C. Verify each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive
rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage.
D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those
required by equipment or system manufacturer.
E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
F. Verify circuit breakers and overloads have been set in accordance with the CH2M’s short
circuit and coordination study.
G. Verify fuses are installed with ratings as indicated on Drawings and schedules.
H. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative in

accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
I. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide

authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or
system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in
operation.
J. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures that

equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.
1.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks

prior to date of Substantial Completion.

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 70 00 - 2
B. Demonstrate Project equipment and instruct in classroom environment located at site and
instructed by manufacturer's representative who is knowledgeable about the Project.
C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other
season within 6 months.
D. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of
manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain the aspects of operation and
maintenance.
E. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing,

maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at equipment
location.
F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for
additional data becomes apparent during instruction.
G. Required instruction time for each item of equipment and system is specified in
individual sections.
1.6 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
A. Owner will appoint and employ services of independent firm to perform testing,
adjusting, and balancing.
B. Independent firm will perform services specified in Section 23 05 93– Air System
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
C. Reports will be submitted by independent firm to CH2M indicating observations and

results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with requirements of
Contract Documents.
1.7 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual
B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in
immediate work area to prevent damage.
C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or
movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. When traffic or activity
is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing
material manufacturer.

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 70 00 - 3
F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.
1.8 SEMIFINAL REVIEWS AND COMPLETION LISTS
A. Semifinal Reviews: When the Contractor is of the opinion that the entire project, or
portion of project is substantially complete, request a Semifinal Review as required by
the Contract terms. Such notice to be given to Owner and CH2M at least 3 working days
before the requested review date.
B. If because of acts or omissions of the Contractor, Owner is required to conduct more than
one Semifinal Review of the project, or portion of project, CH2M may charge the Owner
for the additional services required, and such costs will be deducted from the money still
due the Contractor.
C. Completion List: items recorded in semifinal reviews will be documented in a

Completion List that will be developed by Owner and Contractor. Contractor to take
action on Completion List items and document resolution prior to requesting a Final
Review.
1.9 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the
Work:
1. Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. RFI and design bulletins.
5. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
6. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
7. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.
B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.
C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
D. Record information concurrent with construction progress, not less than weekly.
E. For Specifications and Equipment submittals: Legibly mark and record at each product
section description of actual products installed. Provide a complete set of equipment
submittal tabulated by specification section, including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual
construction including:
1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor datum.
2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and
appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 70 00 - 4
3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in
construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Details not on original Contract Drawings.
G. Project Photography and Video: turn over electronic files for project photography and
video, including time-lapse video compilation. See requirements of Section 01 30 00 –
Administrative Requirements.
H. 3D Model(s): turn over electronic files, including native models, of 3D model(s) and
supporting files.
I. Submit documents to Owner and CH2M.
1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch (A4) text pages, three D-side ring binders with
durable plastic covers.
B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders
are required.
C. Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as
described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.
D. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger
drawings to size of text pages.
E. Contents: Prepare Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system
description identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows:
1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Owner
representatives, CH2M, Contractor, subcontractors, and major equipment
suppliers.
2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and process
flow and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names,
addresses, and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the
following:
a. Significant design criteria.
b. List of equipment.
c. Parts list for each component.
d. Operating instructions.
e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
f. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning
methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental
agents.
3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
a. Shop drawings and product data.
b. Air and water balance reports.

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 70 00 - 5
c. Test reports.
d. Certificates.
e. Originals and Photocopies of warranties and bonds.
F. Electronic Format: in addition to the format indicated above, provide the Contents above
in electronic format. Provide scanning as required. Include the electronic format on CD
or DVD in each of the volumes.
G. Where a Commissioning Agent (CA) is part of the project, the commissioning agent may
require an alternate organization and Content to the operations and maintenance manuals.
Where this is the case, Contractor to abide by the direction established by the
Commissioning Agent.
H. The Owner will review the operation and maintenance data furnished by Contractor as a
submittal per the process established in Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
1.11 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents
before start of Work. CH2M will review draft and return one copy with comments.
B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and
operated by Owner, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.
C. Submit one copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final inspection. Draft copy be
reviewed and returned after final inspection, with CH2M comments. Revise content of
document sets as required prior to final submission.
D. Submit two sets of revised final volumes in final form within 10 days after final
inspection.
E. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog
number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Include information for
re-ordering custom manufactured products.
F. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for

cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and
recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
G. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Include product data listing
applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Include
recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.
H. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.
I. Include listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for
insertion of data.

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 70 00 - 6
1.12 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents
before start of Work. Owner will review draft and return one copy with comments.
B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and
operated by Owner, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.
C. Submit one copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final inspection. Draft copy will
be reviewed and returned, with Owner comments. Revise content of document sets as
required prior to final submission.
D. Submit two sets of revised final volumes in final form within 10 days after final
inspection.
E. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and
component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting
conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete
nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.
F. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and

communications; by label machine.
G. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed.
H. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating

instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and
emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and special operating instructions.
I. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative

maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and
alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.
J. Include servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
K. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
L. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
M. Include original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams
required for maintenance.
N. Include control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.
O. Include Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as

installed.
P. Include charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to
flow and control diagrams.

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 70 00 - 7
Q. Include list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended
quantities to be maintained in storage.
R. Include test and balancing reports as specified in Section 01 40 00 - Quality

Requirements.
S. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.
T. Include listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for
insertion of data.
1.13 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS
A. Furnish spare parts, maintenance, and extra products in quantities specified in individual
B. At the conclusion of Work, turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipts for keys to
lockable doors, panels, gates, controls, etc., properly identified and tagged.
C. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed by Owner; obtain receipt prior to
final payment.
1.14 PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND PRODUCT BONDS
A. Obtain warranties and bonds executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors,

suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of applicable item of work.
B. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents and bonds from subcontractors,
suppliers, and manufacturers.
C. Verify documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
D. Co-execute submittals when required.
E. Include Table of Contents and assemble in three D side ring binder with durable plastic
cover.
F. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.
G. Time Of Submittals:
1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during
construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after
acceptance.
2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior
to final Application for Payment.
3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial
Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as
beginning of warranty or bond period.

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 70 00 - 8
1.15 FINAL REVIEWS AND FINAL PUNCH LISTS
A. Final Reviews: When the Contractor is of the opinion that the entire project, or portion of
project is complete and that Completion List item resolutions are documented, request a
Final Review as required by the Contract terms. Such notice to be given to Owner at least
5 working days before the requested review date.
B. If because of acts or omissions of the Contractor, Owner is required to conduct more than
one Final Review of the project, or portion of project, Owner may back-charge
Contractor for the additional services required by their staff.
C. Completion List: items recorded in semifinal reviews will be documented in a

Completion List that will be developed by Owner and Contractor. Contractor to take
action on Completion List items and document resolution prior to requesting a final
review.
1.16 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections for 1-

year from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Examine system components at frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean,

adjust, and lubricate as required.
C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or

replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by manufacturer of original
component.
D. Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or subcontractor without prior

written consent of Owner.
1.17 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT CHECKLIST
A. Complete and deliver to the Owner the following items (as applicable) prior to final
payment application:
1. Verification of completion of the Punch List.
2. Fully executed certificate of Substantial Completion.
3. Local, state, or federal inspections and/or certifications.
4. 1-year workmanship and materials guarantee.
5. Roofing guarantee.
6. Wood door guarantee.
7. Commissioning is complete, including action items.
8. Major mechanical/electrical equipment guarantees.
9. Operation and maintenance manuals (six sets).
10. Project as-built documents.
11. Contractor lien release.
12. Consent of surety.
13. Response to field orders.
14. Change orders fully executed.

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 70 00 - 9
15. Spare parts and maintenance materials.
END OF SECTION

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 70 00 - 10
SECTION 01 74 19
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Plan requirements.
2. Submittals.
3. Construction waste management plan.
4. Construction waste recycling.
5. Construction waste adaptive reuse.
B. References:
1. ASTM International:
a. ASTM E1609 - Standard Guide for Development and Implementation of
a Pollution Prevention Program.
2. US Green Building Council:
a. USGBC LEED NC - Green Building Rating System for New
Construction and Major Renovations; Version 4.
b. USGBC LEED NC Letter Template - MR Credit 2.1 - 2.2:
Construction Waste Management. (http://www.usqbc.org./)
1.2 PLAN REQUIREMENTS
A. Develop and implement construction waste management plan in accordance with ASTM
E1609. and as approved by Owner for compliance with the following:
1. USGBC LEED NC Credit MR 2.1; Divert 50 percent from landfill and Credit
MR 2.2; Divert 75 percent from landfill.
B. Intent:
1. Divert construction, demolition, and land clearing debris from landfill disposal.
2. Redirect recyclable material back to manufacturing process.
3. Generate cost savings or increase minimal additional cost to Project for waste
disposal.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
1.4 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. Construction Waste Landfill Diversion: Minimum 50 percent by weight of construction

waste materials for duration of Project through resale, recycling, or adaptive reuse.
704618 Construction Waste Management and Disposal

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 74 19 - 1
B. Implement construction waste management plan at start of construction.
C. Review construction waste management plan at pre-construction meeting and progress

meetings specified in Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements.
D. Distribute approved construction waste management plan to subcontractors and others

affected by Plan Requirements.
E. Oversee plan implementation, instruct construction personnel for plan compliance, and
document plan results.
F. Purchase Products to prevent waste by:

1. Ensuring correct quantity of each material is delivered to site.
2. Choosing products with minimal or no packaging.
3. Requiring suppliers to use returnable pallets or containers.
4. Requiring suppliers to take or buy-back rejected or unused items.
1.5 CONSTRUCTION WASTE RECYCLING
A. Use source separation method or co-mingling method suitable to sorting and processing
method of selected recycling center. Dispose non-recyclable trash separately into landfill.
B. Source Separation Method: Recyclable materials separated from trash and sorted into
separate bins or containers, identified by waste type, prior to transportation to recycling
center.
C. Co-Mingling Method: Recyclable materials separated from trash and placed in unsorted
bins or container for sorting at recycling center.
D. Materials suggested for recycling include:

1. Packing materials including paper, cardboard, foam plastic, and sheeting.
2. Recyclable plastics.
3. Organic plant debris.
4. Earth materials.
5. Native stone and granular fill.
6. Asphalt and concrete paving.
7. Wood with and without embedded nails and staples.
8. Glass, clear and colored types.
9. Metals.
10. Gypsum products.
11. Acoustical ceiling tile.
12. Carpet.
13. Equipment oil.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION WASTE ADAPTIVE RE-USE
A. Arrange with processing facility for salvage of construction material and processing for
reuse. Do not reuse construction materials on site except as accepted by Owner.

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 74 19 - 2
B. Materials suggested for adaptive reuse include:
1. Concrete and crushed concrete.
2. Masonry units.
3. Lumber suitable for re-sawing or refinishing.
4. Casework and millwork.
5. Doors and door frames.
6. Windows.
7. Window glass and insulating glass units.
8. Hardware.
9. Acoustical ceiling tile.
10. Equipment and appliances.
11. Fluorescent light fixtures and lamps.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE COLLECTION
A. Collect construction waste materials in marked bins or containers and arrange for
transportation to recycling centers or adaptive salvage and reuse processing facilities.
B. Maintain recycling and adaptive reuse storage and collection area in orderly arrangement
with materials separated to eliminate co-mingling of materials required to be delivered
separately to waste processing facility.
C. Store construction waste materials to prevent environmental pollution, fire hazards,

hazards to persons and property, and contamination of stored materials.
D. Cover construction waste materials subject to disintegration, evaporation, settling, or

runoff to prevent polluting air, water, and soil.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Deliver construction waste to waste processing facilities. Obtain receipt for deliveries.
B. Dispose construction waste not capable of being recycled or adaptively reused by

delivery to landfill, incinerator, or other legal disposal facility. Obtain receipt for
deliveries.

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 74 19 - 3
WITH BID
01 74 19-01 Construction Plan: Submit construction waste Prior to delivery
management plan describing methods and
procedures for implementation and
monitoring compliance. including the
following:
1. Transportation company hauling
construction waste to waste processing
facilities.
2. Recycling and adaptive reuse
processing facilities and waste type each
facility will accept.
3. Construction waste materials
anticipated for recycling and adaptive reuse.
4. On site sorting and site storage
methods.
01 74 19-02 Submit documentation prior to Substantial Before date of Substantial
Completion substantiating construction waste Completion
management plan was maintained and goals
were achieved.
1. Trash: Quantity by weight deposited
in landfills. Include associated fees,
transportation costs, container rentals, and
taxes for total cost of disposal.
2. Salvaged Material: Quantity by
weight with destination for each type of
material salvaged for resale, recycling, or
adaptive reuse. Include associated fees,
transportation costs, container rentals, and
taxes for total cost of disposal. Also include
reimbursements due to salvage resale.
3. Total Cost: Indicate total cost or
savings for implementation of construction
waste management plan.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 74 19 - 4
WITH BID
01 74 19-03 Project Record Documents: Submit completed With record documents
USGBC LEED NC Letter Template
indicating diverted waste quantity, total waste
quantity and percentage of waste diverted
from landfills
END OF SECTION

04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 74 19 - 5
SECTION 01 80 13
PROJECT SITE DESIGN CRITERIA
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The intent of this Section is to detail project site conditions. This Section establishes the
minimum requirements for equipment, buildings, structures, and components.
B. If additional requirements are specified in other sections or on the Drawings, then follow
the more stringent requirement. Refer to Drawings for building/structure specific
information.
1.2 SITE DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Site Location:
1. Address:
a. Street: 9600 Godwin Drive
b. City: Manassas
c. County: Prince William County
d. State: Virginia
e. Country: USA
2. Altitude: 244 feet MSL.
B. Code Basis:
1. Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code (VUSBC), 2015.
2. International Fire Code (IFC), 2015, with Virginia exceptions.
3. International Mechanical Code (IMC), 2015, with Virginia exceptions.
4. International Fuel Gas Code (IGC), 2015, with Virginia exceptions.
5. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7-10.
6. National Electrical Code (NEC), 2014.
7. ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2013.
8. Americans with Disability Act Accessibility Guidelines, 2002.
9. Insurance Underwriter: Factory Mutual.
C. Weather:
1. Temperature (Outdoors):
a. Summer: 94 degrees F design maximum.
b. Winter: 23 degrees F design minimum.
2. Temperature (Indoors): 72 degrees F maximum and 68 degrees F minimum.
3. Design Temperature and Humidity:
a. Summer: 74.2 degrees F wet bulb and 93.0 degrees F dry bulb.
b. Winter: 5.1 grain-per-pound moisture and 17.3 degrees F dry bulb.
4. Rainfall (Maximum):
704618 Project Site Design Criteria

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 80 13 - 1
a. 25 Years, 24-Hour Duration: 6.0 inches.
b. 100 Years, 1-Hour Duration: 3.25 inches.
D. Wind:
1. Basic Wind Speed, V: 120 mph.
2. Exposure Category: C.
E. Seismic:
1. Mapped Acceleration Parameters:
a. Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods, Ss: 0.126g
b. Spectral Response Acceleration at 1s Period, S1: .053g.
c. Site Class: C (pending ECS Mid-Atlantic geotechnical evaluation)
F. Snow:
1. Ground Snow Loading: 30 psf.
2. Exposure Category: C.
G. Ice:
1. Nominal Ice Thickness: 0.75 inches.
END OF SECTION
704618 Project Site Design Criteria

15 JUNE 2018 – Rev. 0 01 80 13 - 2
SECTION 01 81 13
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Sustainable design Project goals.
2. Quality assurance.
3. Qualifications.
4.3. Submittals.
5. Pre-Installation meetings.
6.4. Delivery, storage, and handling.
7.5. Environmental requirements.
1. Section 01 91 00 – Commissioning.
2. Section 22 08 00 – Commissioning of Plumbing.
3. Section 23 08 05 – Mechanical Systems Startup and Commissioning.
4. Section 26 08 00 – Commissioning of Electrical Systems.
5. Individual specification sections for additional product requirements.
C. References:
1. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:
a. ASHRAE 52.2 – Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning
Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size.
b. ASHRAE 62 – Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
c. ASHRAE 90.1 – Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings Except
Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
2. ASTM International:
a. ASTM C1371 – Standard Test Method for Determination of Emittance
of Materials Near Room Temperature Using Portable Emissometers.
b. ASTM C1549 – Standard Test Method for Determination of Solar
Reflectance Near Ambient Temperature Using a Portable Solar
Reflectometer.
c. ASTM E408 – Standard Test Methods for Total Normal Emittance of
Surfaces Using Inspection-Meter Techniques.
d. ASTM E903 – Standard Test Method for Solar Absorptance,
Reflectance, and Transmittance of Materials Using Integrating Spheres.
e. ASTM E1918 – Standard Test Method for Measuring Solar Reflectance
of Horizontal and Low-Sloped Surfaces in the Field.
f. ASTM E1980 – Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance
Index of Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces.
704618 Sustainable Design Requirements

19 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 01 81 13 - 1
3. Carpet and Rug Institute:
a. CRI Green Label Plus Testing Program.
b. CRI Green Label Testing Program.
4. Forest Stewardship Council (FSC):
a. FSC-STD-40-004 V2-1 EN - Standard for Chain of Custody
Certification.
5.3. Green Seal:
a. GS-03 – Anti-Corrosive Paints.
b. GS-11 – Product Specific Environmental Requirements.
c. GS-36 – Aerosol Adhesives.
6.4. International Standards Organization:
a. ISO 14021 – Environmental Labels and Declarations – Self-Declared
Environmental Claims (Type II Environmental Labeling).
7.5. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors:
a. SMACNA IAQ – IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under
Construction.
8. South Coast Air Quality Management District:
a. SCAQMD Rule 1113 – Architectural Coatings.
b. SCAQMD Rule 1168 – Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
9.6. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency:
a. ENERGY STAR – ENERGY STAR Voluntary Labeling Program.
b. EPA 832-R-92-005 – Storm Water Management for Construction
Activities: Developing Pollution Prevention Plans and Best Management
Practices.
c. EPA Baseline IAQ – Testing for Indoor Air Quality, Baseline IAQ, and
Materials Section 01445.
d. EPA Construction General Permit, 2003.
10. U.S. Green Building Council:
a. LEED-BD+C: Green Building Rating System for New Construction and
Major Renovations, Version 4.0.
1.2 SUSTAINABLE PROJECT GOALS
A. Comply with the following general sustainable Project goals. Refer to specific
specification sections for more detailed requirements.
1. Notify Owner and CH2M when conflicts arise between Work performance and
sustainable Project goals.
B. Sustainable Project Goals: Refer to LEED Rating System Project Checklist attached to
this SectionGood industrial practices that are code compliant and consistent with cost-
effective environmentally sensitive approaches.
A. Perform Work in accordance with LEED Reference Guide to permit application and
certification to achieve Certified Rating under LEED Rating System.
1. Owner and CH2M identified Project sustainable Project goals that are believed to be
attainable.

19 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 01 81 13 - 2
2. Furnish products with materials and properties for entire Project to meet or
exceed specified sustainable Project goals.
3. Perform Work using means and methods for entire Project to meet or exceed
specified sustainable Project goals.
B.A. Perform storm water management and erosion control Work in accordance with EPA
Construction General Permit or local erosion and sedimentation control standards
whichever is more stringent.
C.B. Perform commissioning Work as specified in Sections 01 91 00 Commissioning, 22 08

00 Commissioning of Plumbing, 23 08 05 Mechanical Systems Startup and
Commissioning, 26 08 05 Commissioning of Electrical Systems and individual technical
specification sections for the following:
1. Envelope Commissioning.
2. Building Automation System.
3. Entire building.
D.C. Perform Work to meet or exceed minimum energy efficiency and performance in
accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 or local energy code whichever is more stringent.
E.D. Perform Work without use of CFC based refrigerants in HVAC building systems.
F.E. Perform ventilation Work in accordance with ASHRAE 62.
G.F. Develop and implement construction indoor air quality management plan including the
following:
1. Comply with minimum requirements of SMACNA IAQ.
2. Protect stored and installed absorptive materials from moisture damage.
a. Store materials on elevated platforms under cover, and in dry location.
b. When materials are not stored in enclosed location, cover tops and sides
of material with secured waterproof sheeting.
3. Protect HVAC equipment during construction.
a. Shut down return side of HVAC system whenever possible during heavy
construction or demolition.
b. When HVAC systems are operated during heavy construction, furnish
disposable temporary filters.
4. Replace filtration media immediately before occupancy.
5. Conduct minimum 2-week building flush-out with new filtration media at
100 percent outside air after construction ends and before occupancy.
6. Conduct baseline indoor air quality testing procedure consistent with EPA
Baseline IAQ.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Monitor and manage compliance with this Section under direct supervision of LEED
Accredited Professional.

19 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 01 81 13 - 3
1.51.4 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
B. Reports provided in response to submittal requirements of this Section and that also need
to satisfy LEED reporting requirements shall be in format, arrangement, and organization
required for acceptance by USGBC.
A. Convene minimum four but not less than two weeks prior to commencing work of this
Section.
1. Review submittal and documentation requirements for LEED Rating System
certificate.
2. Review construction procedures and temporary facilities required for LEED
Rating System compliance.
1.71.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept absorptive materials on site in manufacturer's sealed, protective packaging.

Inspect for damage.
B. Store absorptive materials in enclosed, environmentally conditioned space to prevent

moisture absorption.
C. Do not store or install absorptive materials within building until building is enclosed and
materials are protected from exposure to elements.
D. Protect installed absorptive materials from damage with temporary exterior enclosure to
prevent moisture absorption.
1.81.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Limit site disturbance to areas indicated on Drawings.
B. Recycle or salvage minimum of 50 percent by weight of non-hazardous construction,

demolition, and land clearing waste.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PROHIBITED MATERIALS
A. Do not use materials containing asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB) or other

hazardous materials.
B. Do not use plywood or other wood laminate products with added urea formaldehyde for
interior locations.

19 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 01 81 13 - 4
C.B. Do not use HCFC based refrigerants or Halon extinguishing agents.
D.C. Do not use materials containing butyl for interior locations.
2.2 HVAC FILTERS
A. Temporary Return Air Filters: ASHRAE 52.2 minimum efficiency reporting value
(MERV) of 8.
2.3 PAVING MATERIALS
A. Paving Surfaces: Minimum solar reflectance index (SRI) of 29, calculated in accordance
with ASTM E1980.
1. Reflectance: Measured in accordance with ASTM E903, ASTM E1918, or
ASTM C1549.
2. Emittance: Measured in accordance with ASTM E408 or ASTM C1371.
2.4 ROOFING MATERIALS
A. Roof Surface: Minimum solar reflectance index (SRI) of 78 for low slope roofs for
75 percent of roof area, calculated in accordance with ASTM E1980.
1. Reflectance: Measured in accordance with ASTM E903, ASTM E1918, or
ASTM C1549.
2. Emittance: Measured in accordance with ASTM E408 or ASTM C1371.
2.5 RECYCLED CONTENT MATERIALS
A. Materials with recycled content requirements are specified in technical sections.
2.6 LOCAL AND REGIONAL MATERIALS
A. Materials from suppliers that can document materials were extracted, harvested or
recovered, and manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site are specified in
technical sections.
2.7 CERTIFIED WOOD
A. Wood Based Materials: Furnish the following materials with a Forest Stewardship
Council certification and chain of custody number in accordance with FSC STD-40-004
V2-1 EN guidelines as noted in the technical sections associated with this material.
2.82.3 LOW EMITTING MATERIALS – INDOOR APPLICATIONS
A. Adhesives, Sealants, and Sealant Primers: Maximum volatile organic compound content
in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1168.
B.A. Aerosol Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with
GS-36.

19 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 01 81 13 - 5
C.B. Architectural Paints, Coatings, and Primers: Maximum volatile organic compound
content in accordance with GS-11.
D.C. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in
accordance with GS-03.
E. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins.
2.92.4 EQUIPMENT AND APPLIANCES
A. Equipment and Appliances: ENERGY STAR compliant for appliances, office equipment,
electronics, and commercial food service equipment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT WITH BID AS INDICATED

01 81 13-01 Product Data: Submit data for filter media and Prior to delivery
filter efficiency.
01 81 13-02 Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products Within 30 days after award of
meet or exceed specified requirements. Contract
1. Certify roofing materials solar
reflectance index.
a. Indicate roof slope, solar reflectance
index, and percent of total roof surface for
each roofing material.
2. Certify recycled material content for
recycled content products permanently
installed as part of Project.
a. Indicate post-consumer recycled
content percent by weight as defined by
LEED Rating System.
b. Indicate pre-consumer recycled
content percent by weight as defined by
LEED Rating System.
c. Indicate recycled content materials in
accordance with ISO 14021.
3. Certify source for local and regional
materials for products permanently installed
as part of Project.

19 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 01 81 13 - 6
WITH BID
a. Indicate manufacturing or fabrication
location and distance to site in miles
(km).
b. Indicate percent by weight of each
product qualifying as local and
regional material.
4. Certify lumber is harvested from Forest
Stewardship Council Certified well
managed forest.
a. Indicate certifying agency and
agency accreditation by Forest
Stewardship Council.
b. Include chain-of-custody
documentation tracking wood
product from forest to installed
Product.
c. Include description and location of
each certified wood-based Product in
completed construction.
15. Certify volatile organic compound
content for each interior adhesive and
sealant and related primer.
a. Include data sheet indicating volatile
organic compound content, in g/L,
for each Product.
26. Certify volatile organic compound
content for each interior paint and
coating.
a. Include data sheet indicating volatile
organic compound, in g/L, and
chemical component content for each
Product.
7. Certify each composite wood and
agrifiber product contains no added urea-
formaldehyde resins.
a. Include data sheet indicating urea-
formaldehyde resin content for each
Product.

19 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 01 81 13 - 7
WITH BID
01 81 13-03 Construction Photographs: During construction
Submit photographs indicating measures
protecting materials from moisture for the
following:
1. Absorptive materials, including but not
limited to masonry units, lumber,
finished architectural woodwork, flush
wood doors, gypsum board, acoustical
ceiling tiles, and insulation.
2. Ducts and other HVAC equipment.
01 81 13-04 Cost Data: Before date of Substantial
1. Submit cost of products, excluding cost Completion
of labor and equipment for installation,
for the following products installed as
part of permanent construction:
a. Salvaged products.
b. Reused products.
c. Products with recycled material
content.
d. Local or regional products.
e. Rapidly renewable products.
f. Certified wood products.
01 81 13-05 Construction Plans: Within 30 days after award of
1. Construction Waste Management Plan: Contract
Indicate analysis of estimated job site
waste to be generated, including types
and quantities; and proposed alternatives
to use of landfill.
a. Submit monthly reports of actual
recycling rates, salvage rates, and
landfill rates.
2. Construction Indoor Air Quality (IAQ)
Plan: Indicate absorptive material and
HVAC system protection; source control;
pathway interruption; housekeeping and
construction sequencing.

19 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 01 81 13 - 8
3.2 LEED Project Checklist:

19 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 01 81 13 - 9
19 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 01 81 13 - 10
19 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 01 81 13 - 11
19 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 01 81 13 - 12
19 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 01 81 13 - 13
19 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 01 81 13 - 14
END OF SECTION

19 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 01 81 13 - 15
SECTION 01 91 00
COMMISSIONING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. References.
2. Commissioning description.
3. Quality Assurance.
4. Qualifications.
5. Commissioning services.
6. Submittals.
7. Five step commissioning process.
8. Commissioning responsibilities.
9. Commissioning meetings.
10. CxA Commissioning deliverables.
11. Systems to be commissioned.
12. Sequencing.
13. Scheduling.
14. Maintenance Materials.
15. Test Equipment.
16. Examination.
17. Construction verification check and startup procedures.
18. Functional performance test (FPT) procedures.
19. Function performance test methods.
20. Level 5 - Integrated system test (IST).
21. Issues and test approvals.
22. Demonstration.
1. Section 22 08 00 - Commissioning of Plumbing.
2. Section 23 08 05 – Mechanical Systems Startup and Commissioning.
3. Section 26 08 00 – Commissioning of Electrical Systems.
4. Section 28 31 50 – Life Safety Systems.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Associated Air Balance Council:

1. ACG Commissioning Guideline.
B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers:

1. ASHRAE Guideline 1 – The HVAC Commissioning Process.
2. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 202 – Commissioning Process for Buildings and
Systems
704618 Commissioning
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 1
C. National Environmental Balancing Bureau:
1. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Building Systems Commissioning.
1.3 COMMISSIONING DESCRIPTION
A. Commissioning:
1. Definition: Systematic process of ensuring systems perform interactively per
Project design intent and Owner’s performance requirements.
2. Commissioning process encompasses and coordinates:
a. Owner’s performance requirements
b. Basis of design
c. System and/or equipment documentation,
d. System or equipment startup,
e. Control system completeness and calibration,
f. Testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB),
g. Installation verification,
h. Functional performance testing,
i. Training,
j. Operation and maintenance manual completeness,
k. Summary Report including all pertinent documentation of the above.
l. Systems Manual
3. Comply with commissioning requirements set forth for LEED prerequisites and
credits EAp1 Fundamental Commissioning and EAc1 Enhanced Commissioning,
as included in the design goal identified in Section 01 81 13 – Sustainable Design
Requirements and in this Section.
4.3. Verify required operation and maintenance documentation is delivered to Owner.
5.4. Verify required training of Owner’s operating personnel is completed.
6.5. Equipment and Systems to Commission: Refer to Section 23 08 05 – Mechanical
Systems Startup and Commissioning for equipment and system lists.
7.6. Life Safety Systems to Commission: Refer to Section 28 31 50 – Life Safety
Systems.
B. Commissioning does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to provide a finished and

fully functioning project.
C. Commissioning Process Overview and General Order of Construction Phase

Commissioning Tasks:
1. Coordinate and host initial meeting held prior to start of installation work.
2. Conduct progress meetings throughout construction, to plan, scope, coordinate,
schedule future activities and resolve issues identified during the process.
3. Prepare and maintain log of issues identified during the commissioning process
4. Review equipment documentation during normal submittals and prepare written
comments of issues that affect commissioning.
5. Review detailed start-up procedures provided by the contractors or installers.
6. Coordinate with construction team to develop startup plans and startup
documentation formats, including verification or construction checklists
completed prior to equipment/system startup.
7. Develop functional performance test procedures and review with contractors
prior to execution.
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 2
8. Witness and document functional performance tests of equipment/systems from
simple to complex; from equipment component level to complete system
verification.
9. Commissioning Authority (CxA) develops specific equipment and system
functional and operational performance test procedures. Contractor, equipment
and system installers review procedures.
10. Equipment and system installers execute procedures under direction and witness
of CxA.
11. Non-conforming material, installation or setup are corrected at Contractor's
expense and system retested.
12. CxA reviews operation and maintenance documentation for completeness.
13. Complete commissioning before Substantial Completion either in total or in a
phased turnover strategy.
14. CxA reviews, approves and coordinates training provided by equipment and
system installers and verifies training is complete.
15. Deferred testing is conducted, as specified.
A. Perform Work in accordance with:

1. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 202-2013 – Commissioning Process for Buildings
and Systems.
2. NEBB.
B. Perform Work in accordance with Prince William County, City of Manassas, and State of
Virginia standards.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. CxA Firm: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum
10 years’ experience.
1. Responsible for successfully commissioning 2 facilities of similar complexity
and systems in past 10 years.
2. Independent of Owner, CH2M, and Contractor.
B. CxA Leads: Key individuals employed by CxA firm specializing in performing work of
this section with minimum 5 years commissioning experience.
1. Licensed as Professional Engineer, with mechanical, electrical, or chemical
engineering specialty.
2. Experienced in operation and troubleshooting mechanical, electrical, and
chemical systems, as well as energy management control systems and lighting
controls systems.
3. Knowledgeable in test and balance of air and water systems.
4. Experienced in monitoring and analyzing system operation using energy
management control system trending or stand-alone data logging equipment.
5. Excellent verbal and written communication skills, highly organized and able to
work with both management and installers.
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 3
1.6 COMMISSIONING SERVICES
A. Retain and pay for services of an independent firm as CxA acceptable to Owner to
perform specified commissioning.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
1.8 FIVE STEP COMMISSIONING PROCESS
A. Level 1 - Factory Witness Testing: Witnessing tests at the equipment manufacturer’s site
when required by the specifications prior to shipment to the site.
B. Level 2 – Observations: Review equipment and materials when they arrive on site and
during the installation of equipment and materials throughout the construction process;
including: observation of cleaning, flushing, and testing procedures; and review of the
installation immediately prior to startup.
C. Level 3 - Functional Acceptance Testing (FAT):

1. Testing installed equipment or systems to verify that they are performing per the
functional requirements of the Contract Documents.
2. Testing requirements specified at the end of each the technical equipment or
material specification section as supplemented with procedures provided by the
CxA.
3. Testing individual pieces of equipment or systems that may not involve operation
by the building automation and control systems.
4. Testing includes point-to-point wiring checkout for building automation and
control systems and may include control loop, valve, and instrument checkout.
D. Level 4 - Operational Acceptance Testing (OAT):

1. Testing equipment or systems that have completed functional acceptance testing
to verify that they are performing per the operational requirements of the
Contract Documents.
2. Verification that the system operates and is controlled per the sequence of
operation, including failure and maintenance scenarios.
3. Confirmation that the system is fully integrated and operational with other
supporting and complementary systems.
Testing may include an electrical load on the system using load banks.
E. Level 5 - Integrated System Test (IST):

1. Testing how the facility and its system perform at anticipated load, after
operational acceptance testing is completed before integrated system tests can
begin.
2. Testing includes rated load of the system via resistive load banks or other means.
3. Demonstrates how the building’s mechanical, electrical, process, and automation
systems perform together and their automatic response to failure and
maintenance scenarios.
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 4
4. Measurement of performance, energy use, and system efficiencies.
1.9 COMMISSIONING RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Responsibilities indicated for Owner, CH2M, and CxA are provided only to clarify
commissioning process.
B. CH2M Responsibilities:
1. Perform a single site observation of each system just before system startup, or
earlier as required by installation sequencing.
2. Furnish sequence of operation (SOO) documentation requested by CxA.
3. Clarify operation and control of commissioned equipment when specifications,
control drawings, or equipment documentation are not sufficient for writing
detailed testing procedures.
4. Provide consulting to CxA to aid in resolving problems found during
commissioning.
5. Review operation and maintenance manuals for required content.
6. Make high level presentation at one training session per system for Owner’s
personnel.
7. Review verification checklists for major pieces of equipment.
8. Review functional and operational test procedure forms for major pieces of
equipment.
9. Attend factory witness testing (Level 1) (where requested by Owner as an
additional service for specific equipment, per those equipment specifications.)
C. Owner Responsibilities:
1. Coordinate resolution of design issues affecting system performance identified
during commissioning.
2. Coordinate resolution of system deficiencies identified during commissioning,
per Contract Documents.
3. Review verification checklists for major pieces of equipment.
4. Review functional and operational test procedure forms for major pieces of
equipment.
5. Review operation and maintenance manuals.
D. CxA (CA) Responsibilities:

1. Basic Responsibilities:
a. Coordinate, direct, and approve commissioning work for commissioning
Levels 1 through 5.
b. Develop and coordinate execution of commissioning plan for
commissioning Levels 1 through 5. Revise commissioning plan to suit
Project conditions.
c. Perform requirements for the Project to fulfill LEED requirements for
commissioning required by Energy and Atmosphere prerequisite EAp1 –
Fundamental Commissioning and LEED credit EAc1 – Enhanced
Commissioning.
1) EAp1 – Fundamental Commissioning requirements:
a) CxA to lead, review and oversee the commissioning
process activities to fulfill the following:
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 5
(1) Verify experience (minimum of 2
commissioning projects) and independent status
as noted elsewhere in this Section.
(2) Report results, findings, and recommendations
directly to the Owner.
(3) Review the Owner’s project requirements and
the design team’s basis of design for clarity and
completeness for commissioning requirements.
b) Update Owner’s project requirements and the design
team’s basis of design documents per recommendations
by the CxA.
2) EAc1 – Enhanced Commissioning requirements beyond EAp1
requirements:
a) CxA may be an Owner consultant or employee.
b) Designate an independent CxA to lead, review, and
oversee commissioning process activities prior to project
construction document phase, including the following:
(1) Verify independent status from the design firm
and contractor.
(2) Review Owner’s basis of design documentation,
design documents prior to mid-construction
document phase, and back check commissioning
review comments.
(3) Review contractor submittals applicable to
systems being commissioned concurrent with
A/E submittal for compliance with the Owner’s
project requirements and basis of design. Submit
review comments to design team and Owner.
(4) Prepare a systems manual that allows for the
optimal operation of the commissioned systems.
(5) Document training of operating personnel on
commissioned systems is completed.
(6) Warranty Phase Review:
(a) Review commissioned system operation
with Owner’s operations and
maintenance staff and occupants within
10 months of substantial completion.
(b) Prepare report of findings and include
plan for resolving commissioning
related issues.
d.c. Coordinate commissioning work with Contractor for inclusion in Project
schedule.
e.d. Plan, conduct, and document commissioning meetings.
f.e. Review submittals of commissioned equipment or systems as required to
perform commissioning tasks.
2. Attend factory witness testing (Level 1) (where requested by Owner as an
additional service) for specific equipment, per those equipment specifications.
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 6
3. Complete observations and assist with development of startup plan in
cooperation with Contractor, equipment and system installers (Levels 2 & 3).
4. Write functional performance (FPT) Level 3 and 4 test procedures in cooperation
with Owner, Contractor, equipment and system installers.
5. Review test and balance execution plan.
6. Attend Project planning, progress and pre-installation meetings. Review meeting
minutes. Resolve potential conflicts with commissioning activities.
7. Observe equipment and system installations (Level 1) and prepare field
observation reports.
8. Write integrated system test (Level 5) procedures in cooperation with Owner,
Contractor and equipment and system installers.
9. Document equipment and systems are installed and perform in accordance with
design intent and Contract Documents.
10. Notify Owner, Contractor, and CH2M of deficiencies or issues that are not
compliant with design intent and Contract Documents. Maintain a log of issues
until resolved. Log to include items identified by CH2M or the owner as part of
system observations.
a. Verify resolution of identified issues and manage closure of issues.
11. Coordinate and supervise required seasonal or deferred testing and deficiency
corrections.
12. Review and comment on content of Owner’s personnel training per Contract
Documents.
13. Review and comment on content of operation and maintenance manuals per
Contract Documents.
14. Compile commissioning record and testing data information for inclusion in
Commissioning Summary Report.
15. Provide final commissioning summary report.
16. Detailed Responsibilities:
a. Witness and document each piping, ductwork, electrical and control
system testing, cleaning, and flushing. Include documentation in
operation and maintenance manuals.
b. Verify tests and checklist completion by reviewing verification checklist
reports, site observation, and on-site sampling review.
c. Verify systems startup by reviewing startup reports and site observation.
d. Coordinate functional and operational testing of control system and use
for test and balance operations.
e. Verify air and water systems balancing by reviewing completed reports,
site observation, and spot testing.
f. Review functional performance trend logs and monitor data to verify
performance per Contract Documents.
17. LEED requirements are generally outlined in Section 01 81 13 - Sustainable
Design Requirements. Provide commissioning for LEED points that the project is
pursuing in the Water Efficiency, Energy and Atmosphere and Indoor
Environmental Quality Credit areas. Commissioning for LEED includes the
following:
a. Static LEED indoor environmental quality (EQ) features:
1) Ventilation effectiveness.
2) IAQ management during construction and turnover.
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 7
3) CO2 monitoring.
4) HVAC Equipment.
5) Air distribution system.
6) Sensors, monitoring equipment, and their integration into the
Facility Management Control System (FMCS). This includes the
reporting and diagnostic functions of the FMCS, plus the
interaction of the FMCS with other HVAC and Lighting
7) Control systems.
8) Lighting.
b. Develop a draft Measurement and Verification Plan (MVP) using
Owner-approved outline to evaluate building energy systems
performance per USGBC LEED v4 Manual Energy and Atmosphere
Credit 2 (EAc2), Option 1 which is to be consistent with the
requirements of International Performance Measurement & Verification
Protocol (IPMVP) Volume III: Concepts and Options for Determining
Energy Savings in New Construction, April 2003 Option D.
1) The MVP period must cover at least 1 year of post-construction
occupancy.
c. Prepare final MVP for approval and acceptance by Owner. Approved
MVP is to be submitted by CH2M to USGBC as part of LEED project
submission.
d. Return to site 2 months before expiration of warranty period.
1) Review current equipment and system operation and condition of
outstanding issues related to original and seasonal
commissioning with Owner's personnel.
2) Interview Owner's personnel to identify problems or concerns
regarding equipment and system operation.
3) Make suggestions for improvements and for recording changes
in operation and maintenance manuals.
4) Identify deficiencies covered by warranty or original
construction contract.
5) Assist Owner's personnel to develop reports, documents and
requests for services to remedy outstanding problems.
e. Develop systems manual in accordance with ASHRAE and NEBB.
f. Prepare standard trend logging of primary parameters providing
operations staff clear indications of system function to identify proper
system operation and troubleshoot problems. Include information
required to interpret trends.
g. Assist in developing preventative maintenance plan, detailed operating
plan, energy and resource management plan, and Record Documents.
18. Scope Clarification: CxA responsibilities cannot:
a. Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract
Documents.
b. Approve or accept any portion of the Work.
c. Assume duties of Contractor or CH2M.
d. Stop the Work.
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 8
E. Owner Responsibilities:
1. Review verification or construction checklists for major pieces of equipment.
2. Review functional or operational test procedure forms for major pieces of
equipment.
3. Review operation and maintenance manuals.
4. Arrange for Owner's personnel to attend commissioning activities and training
sessions per the commissioning plan.
5. Review commissioning summary report.
6. Review resolution of design issues affecting system performance identified
during commissioning.
7. Review resolution of system deficiencies identified during commissioning per
Contract Documents.
8. Ensure seasonal or deferred testing and deficiency issues are addressed.
F. Contractor Responsibilities:
1. Include requirements for commissioning submittal data, operation and
maintenance data, commissioning tasks and training in each purchase order and
subcontract for equipment and systems indicated to be commissioned.
2. Facilitate coordination of commissioning work by CxA.
3. Attend commissioning meetings.
4. Cooperate with CxA, and provide access to the Work and to Owners facilities.
5. Require equipment and system installers to execute test to review and provide
comments on functional performance test (FPT) procedures.
6. Require manufacturers to review commissioning test procedures for equipment
installed by manufacturer.
7. Furnish proprietary test equipment required by manufacturers to complete
equipment and system tests.
8. Provide temporary facilities as specified in Section 01 50 00 - Temporary
Facilities and Controls for CxA's exclusive use for documentation and instrument
storage and preparation of reports.
9. Furnish qualified personnel to assist in completing commissioning.
10. Furnish manufacturer's qualified field representatives and individual specification
sections to assist in completing commissioning.
11. Ensure equipment and system installers execute commissioning responsibilities
per Contract Documents and schedule.
12. Coordinate Owner's personnel training.
13. Ensure equipment and system installers execute seasonal and deferred functional
and operational performance testing, witnessed by CxA.
14. Ensure equipment and system installers correct deficiencies and make necessary
adjustments to operation and maintenance manuals and Record Documents for
issues identified in seasonal testing.
1.10 COMMISSIONING MEETINGS
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Progress meetings.
B. Meeting Coordination: CxA will plan for, prepare agenda with copies for participants,
and host at meetings.
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 9
C. Initial Commissioning Meeting:
1. Schedule meeting within 30 days after Notice of Award.
2. Attendance Required: CxA, Owner, Owner's facility operating personnel, CH2M,
Contractor, subcontractors, test, adjust and balance agency. Require attendance
by installers of the following equipment and systems indicated to be
commissioned including:
a. Mechanical equipment and systems.
b. Plumbing equipment and systems.
c. Electrical equipment and systems.
d. Temperature controls equipment and systems.
3. Agenda:
a. Designation of personnel representing parties for commissioning
activities.
b. Review commissioning process and responsibilities.
c. Review commissioning plan development procedures.
d. Review required commissioning submittals.
e. Present initial commissioning schedule.
D. Commissioning Progress Meetings:

1. Schedule meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum bi-monthly
intervals.
a. Beginning 4 months before Substantial Completion, meetings will be
scheduled at maximum bi-weekly intervals.
2. Attendance Required: As specified for initial commissioning meeting.
3. Agenda:
a. Coordination of commissioning activities.
b. Commissioning issue resolution.
c. Commissioning schedule.
d. Planning for future commissioning activities.
E. Meeting Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes to participants and others
affected by decisions within 2 days after meeting.
1.11 CxA COMMISSIONING DELIVERABLES
A. Progress Reports: Submit regularly weekly to Owner, CH2M, and Contractor. Include the
following.
1. Progress since last report.
2. Scheduling changes.
3. Observation reports of specific commissioning activities.
4. Testing completed and approvals.
5. Issue log update.
B. Construction Verification Checklists: Prepare checklist form for each equipment/system

included in commissioning scope for completion by installing contractor, including:
1. Equipment, system or component name.
2. Equipment location and identification number shown in the construction
documents.
3. Manufacturer, model and serial number
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 10
4. General capacity information (e.g., CFM, GPM, motor size, voltage, etc.)
5. Party responsible for completing form
6. Date.
7. Project name.
8. General installation parameters.
9. General operational parameters.
10. Compliance with construction documents.
C. Functional Performance Test Procedures: Develop test procedures and forms listed:
1. System and equipment or component names.
2. Equipment location and identification number.
3. Unique test identification number and reference to unique verification checklist
and startup documentation identification numbers for piece of equipment.
4. Date.
5. Project name.
6. Participating parties.
7. Copy of specification section describing test requirements.
8. Copy of specific sequence of operations or other specified parameters being
verified.
9. Formulas used in calculations.
10. Required pre-test field measurements.
11. Instructions for setting up test.
12. Special cautions, alarm limits, and safety concerns.
13. Specific step-by-step procedures to execute test, in clear, sequential and
repeatable format.
14. Acceptance criteria of proper performance with Yes / No check box to allow for
marking whether or not proper performance of each part of test was achieved.
15. Section for comments.
16. Signatures and date block for CxA.
D. Completed Documentation: Include in operation and maintenance manuals.
1.12 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED
A. Project HVAC, mechanical, fire protection, process chemical, process gas, water,
wastewater, process mechanical, power distribution, security access, CCTV surveillance,
life safety systems, lighting and associated instrumentation and controls facility
automation systems.
1.13 SEQUENCING
A. Sequence work to complete commissioning before Substantial Completion.
B. Sequence work to achieve Functional and Operational Completion before Final

Completion. Complete the following for each piece of equipment and system indicated to
be commissioned to achieve Functional and Operational Completion:
1. Startup and verification checklist documentation.
2. Trend log data.
3. Submit final approved test and balance report.
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 11
4. Functional and operational testing.
5. Integrated system testing.
6. Training of Owner personnel.
7. Approved operation and maintenance data manuals.
8. Corrected deficiencies or Owner approval to exclude deficiencies from functional
and operational test completion.
C. Complete opposite season commissioning for equipment or systems requiring seasonal

operation, within six months of Substantial Completion.
D. Complete commissioning specified for seasonal operating equipment, when

commissioning is delayed by Owner occupancy requirements or other unforeseen
conditions.
1.14 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule work to allow adequate time for commissioning activities.
B. Identify commissioning milestones, activities, and durations on Project schedule.

1. Identify the following for each piece of equipment and system:
a. Operation and maintenance manual submittal.
b. Verification check and startup.
c. Functional and operational performance tests.
d. Functional and operational completion.
e. Demonstration and training sessions.
f. Commissioning completion.
1.15 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Furnish one set of manufacturer's proprietary test equipment, tools, and instruments
required to complete commissioning.
1. Deliver test equipment to Owner and obtain signed receipt after completion of
functional and operational performance test.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Testing Equipment:
1. Calibration Required: within last year.
2. Type: quality and accuracy suitable to test and measure system performance
within following tolerances listed below, unless otherwise specified for
individual equipment or systems.
a. Temperature Sensors and Digital Thermometers: 0.5 degrees F (0.25
degrees C) accuracy and plus or minus 0.1 degrees F (0.05 degrees C)
resolution.
b. Pressure Sensors: Accuracy of plus or minus 2.0 percent of measured
value range.
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 12
c. Waveform recording device. Astromed type or approved.
B. Recalibrate test equipment per manufacturer’s recommended intervals and when dropped
or damaged.
1. Affix calibration tags to test equipment or furnish certificates upon request.
C. Equipment Furnished by Contractor and Remaining Property of Contractor:

1. Standard testing equipment required to perform verification check and startup
and required functional and operational performance testing.
2. Two-way communication equipment for personnel performing commissioning.
D. Equipment furnished by CxA and remaining property of CxA:

1. Data logging equipment and software.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Equipment and systems: Verify installation per individual specification sections.
B. Power and Utility Services: Verify connections are complete and operational.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION VERIFICATION CHECK AND STARTUP PROCEDURES
A. Notification of Intent to Test: Notify all parties required to complete verification tests 4
weeks prior to test date.
B. CxA Verification Allowances:

1. Primary Equipment: Witness test procedures for each piece of equipment. For
multiple identical units: CxA witness test procedures on at least 50 percent, but
not less than 4 per unit type.
2. Secondary Equipment: Witness sampling tests for multiple identical units: CxA
witness tests for at least 25 percent, but not less than 4 per unit type.
C. Construction Verification Check and Startup Test Sequence:

1. Contractor test per approved checklist and startup plan.
2. Complete entire plan for each piece of equipment or system indicated to be
commissioned.
3. Complete each procedure in sequence performed by party assigned to each
procedure.
4. Record completion and results of each procedure, signed and dated by individual
performing procedure.
5. Identify failed test procedures or equipment
6. Sign and date when entire plan is complete.
7. Submit CxA completed test results to CxA within 2 days of completion.
D. Deficiencies and Approvals:

1. CxA will review test reports and report issues found or approval.
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 13
2. Correct issues identified and resubmit updated test report indicating corrections
made.
3. Repeat process until test report is complete and approved.
4. Incomplete test results that later cause deficiencies or delays during functional
and operational tests may be charged to party responsible for incomplete item.
3.3 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST (FPT) PROCEDURES
A. Prerequisite to FPT:
1. Fully completed construction verification checklists and startup test and
notification of CxA.
2. Control system testing for test and balance testing.
3. Completed air and water system balancing.
B. FPT Sequence:
1. CxA Responsibilities: Direct, witness, and document test results.
2. Contractor Responsibilities:
a. Conduct functional performance tests as specified in the technical
sections.
b. Demonstrate each piece of equipment and system is operating per design
intent and Contract Documents:
1) Conduct testing proceeding from components to subsystems, to
systems.
2) Bring equipment and systems performance to full dynamic
operation.
3) Verify performance of individual components and systems.
4) Verify performance of interactions between systems.
5) Identify and correct areas of deficient performance.
c. Operate each piece of equipment and system through each specified
mode of operation including: seasonal, occupied, unoccupied, warm up,
cool down, partial load and full load.
1) Verify complete sequence of operation.
2) Include test responses to: power failure, freezing, overheating,
low oil pressure, no flow, equipment failure, and similar
abnormal conditions.
3.4 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST METHODS
A. Allowable Methods for Testing:

1. Manual testing
2. Trend log monitoring and analysis
3. Stand-alone data loggers
B. Alternate Test Methods:

1. CxA may require alternate or additional method, other than methods specified
above.
2. CxA will determine test method when method is not specified.
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 14
C. Simulated Conditions: Permitted but real-time conditions are preferred whenever
possible.
D. Overwritten Values: Avoid when possible, but allowed with caution when necessary.
E. Simulated Signals: Signal generator to create simulated signals to test and calibrate
transducers is recommended over using sensors as signal generators with simulated
conditions or overwritten values.
F. Altering Set points: Allowed to test specific sequence when necessary. Return sensor to
original set point upon test completion.
G. Indirect Indicators: Permitted only after verifying and documenting indirect readings
through control system representing actual conditions and responses over tested
parameter range.
H. Sampling:
1. Where Allowed: Equipment with minor size or capacity differences when
permitted by other sections.
2. Where Not Allowed: Equipment with significant differences in application,
capacity or sequence of operation.
3. See technical sections for equipment sampling and failure rates.
4. Failure Rate Rules: As shown in the following table:
xx percent Sampling - yy percent Failure Rule

xx = percent of group of identical equipment included in each sample.
yy = percent of sample failing, that will require another sample to be tested.
Randomly test at least xx percent, and minimum 3, of each group of identical
equipment. (first sample)
When yy percent of units in first sample fail, test another xx percent of group. (second
sample)
When yy percent of units in second sample fail, test remaining units in group.
5. Frequent Failures: CxA may stop testing and require responsible party to retest
and update pre-test documentation requirements of remaining units prior to
continuing with functional and operational performance testing.
3.5 LEVEL 5 - INTEGRATED SYSTEM TEST (IST)
A. IST Test Requirements:

1. Contractor: Coordinate and ensure manufacturers’ field technicians are present
for the facility system tests.
B. Purpose: Verify installation of equipment and system(s) is complete and complies with
the design intent.
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 15
C. Commissioning Plan Testing Requirements: Dynamic testing of individual and
interdependent systems as delineated in the electrical and mechanical one-line
schematics, plus the following:
1. Load run - dynamic performance testing under pre-defined load conditions.
2. Open and closed transition test; Utility to Generator Plant and return to Utility.
3. Steady-state full load run (generators and UPS systems).
4. Block full load run (generators and UPS systems).
5. Step load run (generators and UPS systems).
6. Failure mode simulation.
7. Unit system failure mode.
8. Facility wide power outage.
9. Partial power outage.
10. UPS battery and utility failure mode.
11. Generator and 15 kV switchgear battery and battery charger failure mode
D. Operating Mode Tests:

1. Loss of utility source.
a. Monitor and record recovery time for chillers, and chilled water system
to return to pre-test conditions.
b. Monitor and record room temperature rise during test.
2. Return of utility source.
3. UPS transfer to static and maintenance bypass.
4. Manual modes.
5. Automatic modes.
6. Verify acceptable operating parameters are maintained during transfer to standby
generator.
7. Multiple Utility Source Test Requirements: Test modes to include loss and return
of each utility source individually and simultaneously.
E. IST Tests: Complete the tests listed below after functional and operational testing is
complete and outstanding deficiencies are resolved:
1. Room Heat Load Tests
2. Infrared Thermographic scans
3. Mechanical System Testing (including HVAC, chilled water, instrument air, fuel,
and makeup water).
4. Electrical system Testing.
5. UPS System Operational Testing.
6. Transformer Inrush Testing.
7. UPS / Generator compatibility testing (including documentation of total
harmonic distortion as seen at emergency generator bus with UPSs operating at
100% load condition utilizing load banks).
8. Control and monitoring systems (including power monitoring system).
9. Miscellaneous System faults.
10. Failure/Redundancy Tests.
11. EPO System Test.
12. Facility Efficiency and Performance Testing.
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 16
F. Static Switch Transfer Test: Use Astromed or equivalent recording device, with and
without LBS (load bus synchronization).
G. Recording Devices: CxA will provide and verify that recording devices (e.g.
temperature/humidity sensors, power recorders) are installed and operating per IST plan.
H. Testing Communication and Protocol: CxA will establish radio communications and
protocol for testing.
I. CxA Test Sequence Following Verification:

1. Room heat load testing.
2. Transient room heat rise testing (coordinate durations of tests with Owner).
3. Mechanical system testing (including HVAC, chilled water, instrument air, fuel,
and makeup water).
4. Electrical system testing.
5. UPS system operational testing.
6. UPS/generator compatibility testing (including documentation of total harmonic
distortion as seen at emergency generator bus with UPSs operating at 100% load
condition utilizing load banks).
7. Monitoring and control system (including power monitoring system).
8. Miscellaneous system faults testing.
9. Failure / redundancy testing.
10. EPO System testing.
11. Facility Energy and Performance Testing
J. Submittal Required with Bid: Provide testing details for IST tests defined above.
K. CxA Deficiency Log: CxA will develop, maintain and submit installation and testing
deficiency log to Owner.
3.6 ISSUES AND TEST APPROVALS
A. Issues:
1. Issues Log: Prepared and updated by CxA, submitted to Owner.
2. Minor Issues: Correct during tests and document on test form at CxA's
discretion.
3. Failure to Attend Test: Considered deficiency and documented on test form.
4. Issues Identified During Test: CxA will discuss issue with party executing test.
a. Acceptance of Responsibility by Test Party:
1) CxA documents issue and executing party's response.
2) CxA submits issue to Owner, Contractor, and party executing
test.
3) Party executing test corrects issue, signs statement of correction
on form stating equipment is ready retesting and submits form to
CxA.
4) CxA reschedules test and test is repeated until satisfactory
performance is achieved.
b. Rejection of Responsibility by Test Party:
1) CxA documents issue and executing party's response.
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 17
2) CxA submits issue to Owner, Contractor, and party executing
test and responsible party for deficiency.
3) CxA negotiates resolution with parties involved and refers
continuing disputes to Owner for resolution per Contract
Documents.
4) CxA documents resolution process.
5) When resolution is determined, responsible party corrects issue,
signs statement of correction on deficiency form stating
equipment is ready for retesting and submits form to CxA.
6) CxA schedules and retests until satisfactory performance is
achieved.
B. Issue Status Reports: Provide written report to CxA before each scheduled
commissioning meeting concerning status and proposed resolution of each issue. CxA
will retain original forms.
C. Failure Rates:
1. Failure Rate: 10 percent, but not less than 3 of identical pieces equipment or
equipment with minor size or capacity differences fail to perform per Contract
Document requirements due to manufacturing defect, all identical units may be
considered defective by Owner.
2. Reporting Requirements:
a. One week After Notice: Examine all other identical units and record
findings.
b. Two Weeks After Notice:
1) Submit findings to Owner Provide written explanation of
problem, cause of defect, and proposed solutions meeting
Contract Document requirements.
2) Include equipment submittals supporting solution.
3. Resolution Procedure:
a. Owner will determine whether replacement or repair of all identical units
is required.
b. Install two examples of proposed solution. Owner will test installations
for up to one week, before deciding solution is acceptable.
c. Upon acceptance, replace or repair all identical items, at Contractor's
expense. Extend warranty accordingly, when original equipment
warranty had begun.
d. Complete repairs or replacements with reasonable speed beginning
within one week from when parts can be obtained.
4. Test Approval: CxA notes each satisfactorily demonstrated function on
functional performance test form.
5. CxA recommends acceptance of each test to Owner using standard form.
6. Owner gives final approval for each test using same form, providing signed copy
to CxA and Contractor.
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 18
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate equipment and systems and train Owner's personnel as specified in

individual equipment and system specifications.
1. CxA will interview Owner's personnel to determine special needs and areas
where training will be most valuable.
2. Owner and CxA will determine type and extent of training for each
commissioned piece of equipment and system.
3. CxA will communicate training requirements to Contractor for benefit of
equipment and system installers and manufacturers with training responsibilities.
B. CxA will develop criteria for determining training was satisfactorily completed, including
attending some training sessions.
1. CxA will make recommendation to Owner regarding approval of training.
C. Initial Equipment Training Session:

1. For each facility mechanical, electrical, control, and chemical system, CH2M
will make 2-hour long presentation of overall system design concept and design
concept of each equipment section.
2. Presentation will include review of each facility system using simplified system
schematics.
D. For primary facility equipment training:

1. Require controls contractor or equipment manufacturer to provide short
discussion of equipment control as part of training session.
E. At one training session, CxA will make 4-hour long presentation discussing use of blank
functional and operational test forms for re-commissioning equipment.
F. CxA will video record training sessions, catalog tapes, and furnish two sets of DVDs for
inclusion with operation and maintenance manuals.
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 19
WITH BID
01 91 00-01 Qualifications Data: Submit the following: X
1. CxA firm name, address, and telephone number, and
name of responsible officer.
2. Name of full time individual assigned to Project and
assuming role as Commission Authority.
3. Overview of project approach.
4. Overview of commissioning plan.
5. Description of tests that will be performed and
information gathered during the integrated system test.
6. Sample commissioning plan from a similar project.
7. Detailed description of 3 commissioning projects
completed by full time individual assigned to Project
within past 5 years. Include names and telephone
numbers of owner’s project manager and general
contractor’s site superintendent.
01 91 00-02 COMMISSIONING SUBMITTALS Per Construction
Furnish an electronic copy of Contract Documents Schedule
including addenda, change orders, requests for
interpretation, and meeting minutes to CxA.
Furnish an electronic copy of submittals directly to CxA for
review and approval in accordance with procedures
specified in Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
Make submittals for each piece of equipment or system
indicated to be commissioned.
Make submittals to CxA concurrent with submittals to
CH2M.
Distribute an electronic copy of approved submittals to
CxA.
Furnish an electronic copy of preliminary operation and
maintenance data manuals to CxA for each piece of
equipment or system indicated to be commissioned.
Make additional submittals requested by CxA for each
piece of equipment or system indicated to be
commissioned. Incorporate requested submittal information
into related operation and maintenance manuals. Include
the following:
1. Manufacturer's printed detailed installation and start-
up, operating, troubleshooting and maintenance
procedures.
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 20
WITH BID
2. Equipment performance curves.
3. Factory test reports.
4. Full sequence of operation and control diagrams.
5. Proposed testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
6. Complete warranty information, with Owner
responsibilities to keep warranty in force identified.
7. Lists of installation and checkout materials shipped
with equipment.
8. Manufacturer's field checkout forms to be used by
factory or field technicians.
Other documentation necessary for commissioning process.
01 91 00–03 LEED Credit EAp1 – Fundamental Commissioning and Prior to
Verification: Statement of CxA (CxA) regarding relevant mobilization
experience, independent from work of design and
construction.
01 91 00–04 LEED Credit EAp1 – Fundamental Commissioning and Prior to Substantial

Verification: CxA written report of commissioning, Completion
results, findings, and recommendations addressed to the
Owner.
01 91 00-03 LEED Credit EAc1 – Enhanced Commissioning Per construction

schedule
Statement of CxA (CxA) regarding relevant experience,
independence from work of design and construction.
01 91 00 - 04 LEED Credit EAc1 – Enhanced Commissioning Per construction
schedule
Provide record of design review of Owner Project
requirements, A/E basis of design document, and review of
Contract Documents prior to mid-construction documents
phase and back-checked commissioning review comments.
01 91 00 – 05 LEED Credit EAc1 – Enhanced Commissioning Per construction
schedule
Record of CxA review of commissioned system project
submittals concurrent with CH2M submittal review and
review submitted to CH2M and Owner.

schedule
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 21
WITH BID
CxA to develop and submit a systems manual that provides
future project operating staff information needed to
understand and optimally operate commissioned systems

schedule
Written verification that the requirements for training
operating personnel and building occupants has been
completed.
01 91 00 - 08 LEED Credit EAc1 – Enhanced Commissioning Within 10 months

after substantial
CxA is to review building operation and maintenance. CxA
completion.
to provide report summarizing review results to CH2M and
Owner. Report to include a plan for resolving outstanding
commissioning related issues.
01 91 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Per Construction

039 Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Schedule
Requirements for submittals.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and
maintenance manuals as specified in individual equipment
and system specifications.
Submittals made to CxA do not constitute compliance with
operation and maintenance manual documentation.
Commissioning Record: CxA will submit an electronic
copy and two hard copies of commissioning record for
inclusion in operation and maintenance manuals. Furnish
records in following format, arranged by system, with each
part separated by tabbed dividers:
Commissioning Plan.
Final Commissioning Report.
1. System 1: Provide the following separated by tabbed
flyleaf’s:
2. Design narrative and criteria, sequences, approvals.
3. Startup plan and report, approvals, corrections, and
blank verification checklists. Separate data for each
equipment type with colored separators.
4. Completed, functional and operational tests, trending
and analysis, approvals and corrections, training plan,
record and approvals, blank functional and operational
test forms, and recommended recommissioning
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 22
WITH BID
schedule.
5. System 2: As specified for System 1.
Final Commissioning Report: CxA will submit an
electronic copy and two hard copies of final commissioning
report including the following:
1. Executive summary with list and roles of participants,
brief Project description, overview of commissioning
and testing scope, and general description of testing and
verification methods.
For Each Piece of Commissioned Equipment: Include
statement regarding compliance with Contract Documents
in the following areas:
1. Equipment specifications.
2. Equipment installation.
3. Functional and operational performance and efficiency.
4. Equipment documentation and design intent.
5. Operator training.
6. Include recommendations for improvement to
equipment or operations, future actions, and
commissioning process changes.
7. List outstanding deficiencies referenced to specific
functional and operational test, inspection, trend log, or
other record where deficiency is documented.
8. Include brief description of verification method used,
observations and conclusions from testing for each
commissioned piece of equipment and system.
END OF SECTION
04 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 01 91 00 - 23
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Concrete.
2. Concrete Forming and Accessories.
3. Concrete Reinforcing.
4. Concrete Finishing.
5. Concrete Curing.
6. Control, expansion and contraction joint devices.
1. Section 01 81 13 – Sustainable Design Requirements.
2. Section 07 13 00 – Sheet Waterproofing
3. Section 07 90 00 – Joint Protection.
4. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations and Acronyms:

1. American Concrete Institute (ACI).
2. Engineered Wood Association, formerly American Plywood Association (APA).
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
4. ASTM International (ASTM).
5. American Welding Society (AWS).
6. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI).
7. Federal Specifications and Standards (FS).
8. High Density Overlay (HDO).
9. International Code Council (ICC).
10. International Building Code (IBC).
11. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA).
12. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
B. Definitions:
1. Mass Concrete: Foundation elements with a depth of 4 feet and greater are
considered mass concrete
C. Reference Standards:
1. ACI 117, Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.
2. ACI 211.1, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,
Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete.
3. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete.
4. ACI 305.1, Specification for Hot Weather Concreting.
5. ACI 306.1, Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting.
6. ACI 308.1, Standard Specification for Curing Concrete.
704618 Cast-In-Place Concrete

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 1
7. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
8. ACI 347, Guide to Formwork for Concrete.
9. ACI SP-66, ACI Detailing Manual.
10. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) A17.1.
11. ASTM A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
12. ASTM A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-
finished.
13. ASTM A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement.
14. ASTM A706, Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain
Bars for Concrete Placement.
15. ASTM A767, Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.
16. ASTM A1035, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain, Low-Carbon,
Chromium, Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
17. ASTM A1064, Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete.
18. ASTM C31/C31M, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Field.
19. ASTM C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
20. ASTM C39/C39M, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
21. ASTM C42/C42M, Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled
Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.
22. ASTM C94/C94M, Standard Specification for Ready-mixed Concrete.
23. ASTM C143/C143M, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement
Concrete.
24. ASTM C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
25. ASTM C171, Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
26. ASTM C172, Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
27. ASTM C231, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete
by the Pressure Method.
28. ASTM C260, Standard Specification for Air-entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
29. ASTM C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds
for Curing Concrete.
30. ASTM C321, Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Chemical-Resistant
Mortars.
31. ASTM C330, Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural
Concrete.
32. ASTM C494/C494M, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for
Concrete.
33. ASTM C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined
Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete.
34. ASTM C803/C803M, Standard Test Method for Penetration Resistance of
Hardened Concrete.
35. ASTM C845, Standard Specification for Expansive Hydraulic Cement.
36. ASTM C989, Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and
Mortars.
37. ASTM C1064/C1064M, Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly
Mixed Hydraulic-cement Concrete.
38. ASTM C1116, Standard Specification for Fiber-reinforced Concrete.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 2
39. ASTM C1240, Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious
Mixtures.
40. ASTM C1315, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-forming
Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete.
41. ASTM C1602/C1602M, Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the
Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
42. ASTM D638, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
43. ASTM D1259, Standard Test Methods for Nonvolatile Content of Resin
Solutions.
44. ASTM D1751, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient
Bituminous Types).
45. ASTM D1785, Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
46. ASTM D2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer
Hardness
47. ASTM D4397, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for
Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications.
48. ASTM D5249, Standard Specification for Backer Material for Use with Cold-
and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants in Portland-Cement Concrete and Asphalt Joints.
49. ASTM E119, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials.
50. ASTM E329, Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction
Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection.
51. ASTM E1155, Standard Specification for Determining FF-Floor Flatness and FL
Floor Levelness Numbers.
52. ASTM E1643, Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation, and
Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill
under Concrete Slabs.
53. ASTM E1745, Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in
Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs.
54. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.4, Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing
Steel.
55. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) MSP-1, Manual of Standard
Practice.
56. Federal Specifications and Standards (FS) TT-S-00230.
1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Formwork and Accessories:

1. Design, engineer, and construct formwork, shoring, and bracing in accordance
with sound engineering principles achieve concrete shape, line and dimension as
indicated on Drawings. Design should consider principles presented in ACI 347.
2. Design forms and shoring to support, properly and safely, vertical and lateral
loads for applicable construction, material, pre-stressing, environmental, impact,
and other anticipated loads until the structure can carry such loads.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 3

1. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 117.
2. Use plywood form panels marked with an APA grade mark.
3. Construct and align formwork for elevator hoistway in accordance with ASME
A17.1.
B. Reinforcing:
1. Perform Work in accordance with CRSI MSP-1.
2. Prepare shop drawings in accordance with ACI SP-66.
3. Utilize testing/inspection agencies in conformance with ASTM E329 and Code
requirements and with experience in special inspection and testing.
C. Concrete:
1. Perform Work in accordance with CRSI MSP-1.
2. Utilize testing/inspection agencies in conformance with ASTM E329 and with
experience in special inspection and testing, with tests performed in accordance
with ACI 301 and Special Inspection requirements.
3. Submit proposed mix design for each class of concrete to appointed testing firm
and Owner for review prior to commencement of work.
4. Acquire cement and aggregate from one source for Work.
5. Fire Rated Construction: Rating as indicated on Drawings.
6. Tested Rating: Determined in accordance with ASTM E119.
D. Finishing and Curing: Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 308.1, and
ACI 318.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Concrete:
1. Conform to ACI 305.1 when concreting during hot weather.
2. Conform to ACI 306.1 when concreting during cold weather.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Reinforcing: Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work.
Do not place reinforcing steel in the forms until form release and bond breaker
application is complete.
B. Concrete: Coordinate placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and
placement of form accessories.
C. Finishing: Coordinate the Work with concrete floor placement and concrete floor curing.
A. Reinforcing:
1. Deliver reinforcing to the site in bundles marked with tags calling out bar size,
length, grade, piece number, and bend diagram.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 4
2. Mark reinforcing and accessories for proper identification and placement
location.
3. Store materials off ground and protect from moisture and contamination.
B. Concrete:
1. Transport ready-mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.
2. Utilize ready-mix trucks in accordance with ASTM C94, NCRMA and the
Department of Transportation in the state where the project is located.
3. Place admixtures into the mix at the batch plant.
4. Dispose of excess concrete offsite.
5. Mark reinforcing, accessories, and embedded items for proper identification and
placement location.
6. Deliver packaged items in manufacturer's container with seals intact.
C. Curing:
1. Deliver curing materials in manufacturer's packaging, including application
instructions.
2. Store curing materials off ground and protect from moisture and contamination;
protect materials from extreme temperature which would adversely affect their
characteristics.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMWORK
A. Plywood for Concrete Surfaces Not Exposed After Construction is Complete:

1. APA B-B Plyform exterior grade or better, Class I, with straight, sealed edges
and 5/8-inch minimum thickness.
2. HDO Plyform is acceptable.
B. Plywood for Concrete Surfaces Exposed after Construction is Complete: APA HDO
Plyform, exterior grade or better, Class I, with straight, sealed edges and 5/8-inch
minimum thickness.
C. Lumber: Dressed, tongue and grooved, free from loose knots.
D. Metal: Smooth, clean, corrosion-free, without dents or holes, with closely-matching

edges.
E. Fiberglass: Smooth, clean, without dents or holes, with closely-matching edges.
F. Laminated Round Fiber Tubes: Spirally laminated paper fiber, wax impregnated on
exterior surfaces, interior ply allowing uniform moisture penetration.
2.2 FORM RELEASE AGENTS
A. Type acceptable to cement manufacturer, will not cause surface imperfections, non-
staining, and compatible with field applied paints, toppings, linings, curing compounds,
and other coatings.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 5
B. For concrete surfaces in water storage or treatment structures use agent that will be
nontoxic within 30 days after use.
C. Use same brand form release agent for forms.
2.3 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Provide form ties, anchors, and hangers of sufficient strength to resist displacement of
forms due to construction loads and depositing of concrete.
B. Provide ties and spreader form ties designed so no metal will be within 1 inch of surface
when forms are removed.
C. Where concrete surfaces are exposed to view, use form ties that will leave a depression
not more than 1 inch in diameter when removed.
D. Use water seal ties in concrete work containing waterstops.
E. Provide form sealants and gaskets as necessary to provide tight forms.
F. Corners: Chamfer, rigid plastic type; 3/4-inch x 3/4-inch size; maximum possible lengths.
G. Bituminous Joint Filler: ASTM D1751.
H. Anchor Bolt Sleeves:

1. Manufacturers:
a. “Wilson Sleeves”, by Wilson Anchor Bolt Sleeve Company.
b. “Anchor Sleeves”, by Portland Bolt & Manufacturing Company.
I. Wall and Slab Sleeves: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40 PVC pipe.
2.4 WATERSTOPS
A. Flexible PVC Waterstops: 3/8-inch x 6-inch polyvinyl chloride, serrated with center bulb
incorporating looped galvanized steel wire along both edges, unless noted otherwise on
Drawings.
1. Acceptable Products:
a. “Wirestop” by Paul Murphy Plastics.
b. “PVC Waterstop” by Greenstreak.
B. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip,

butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding
to concrete 3/4 by 1 inch (19 by 25 mm).
a. “Waterstop-RX”, by Colloid Environmental Technologies Company.
b. “Swellstop”, by Greenstreak.
c. When interacting with the Work of Section 07 13 00 – Sheet
Waterproofing, verify proposed waterstop will provide Sheet
Waterproofing warrantable condition.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 6
C. Chemical Resistant Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl
rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to
concrete 3/4 by 1 inch (19 by 25 mm).
a. Thermoplastic elastomeric rubber, resistant to oils, fuels, acids, bases,
and solvents,
1) “WESTEC TPE-R”, by WESTEC Barrier Technologies, Inc.
2) “Earth Shield Thermoplastic Vulcanizate (TPV/TPER)” by J. P.
Specialties, Inc.
3) “Chemical Resistant (TPER)” by BoMetals, Inc.
4) When interacting with the Work of Section 07 13 00 – Sheet
b. “WESTEC PE”, by WESTEC Barrier Technologies, Inc., - VLDPE
(Very Low Density, Polyethylene), resistant to hydrocarbons like
Benzene, Toluene, Xylene.
c. Stainless steel, resistant to severe chemical application like isopropyl
alcohols, hydrogen peroxide, anhydrous ammonia, deionized (DI) water,
and high temperatures.
1) “WESTEC SS”, by WESTEC Barrier Technologies, Inc.
2) “Greenstreak Stainless Steel Waterstop”, by Greenstreak Group,
Inc.
3) When interacting with the Work of Section 07 13 00 – Sheet
2.5 REINFORCEMENT
A. Deformed Reinforcement: ASTM A615; 60 ksi yield strength, steel bars, unfinished.
B. Deformed Reinforcement: ASTM A706; 60 ksi yield strength, steel bars, unfinished.
C. Deformed Reinforcement: ASTM A1035; 120 ksi yield strength, steel bars, unfinished.
D. Welded Plain Wire Fabric: ASTM A1064; in flat sheets; galvanized finish.
2.6 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, and Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of
reinforcement during concrete placement conditions including load bearing pad on
bottom to prevent vapor retarder puncture.
B. Special Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers Adjacent to Weather Exposed Concrete
Surfaces: Plastic type; size, thermal properties, and shape to meet Project conditions.
Provide supports appropriate for concrete exposure and surface grinding/sandblasting
requirements.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 7
C. Reinforcing Splicing Devices: Mechanical set screw or threaded type; full tension; sized
to fit joined reinforcing and designed to develop 125 percent of the yield strength of the
reinforcing steel.
1. Manufacturers:
a. “Lenton”, by Erico Products, Inc.
b. “Lenton Lock”, by Erico Products, Inc.
c. “C2D Rebar Flange Coupler”, by Williams Form Engineering Corp.
2.7 REINFORCEMENT FABRICATION
A. Fabricate concrete reinforcement in accordance with CRSI MSP-1 and ACI SP-66,
except ensure splice lengths are in accordance with ACI 318.
B. Tie reinforcing bars in bundles and tag with non-rusting tags showing shop drawing
numbers.
C. Form standard hooks as indicated on Drawings with minimum bend diameters in

accordance with ACI 318.
D. Fabricate column reinforcement with offset bends at reinforcement splices.
E. Spiral column reinforcement:

1. Form from minimum 3/8-inch-diameter continuous deformed bar or wire, except
as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Spirals to have 1-1/2 extra finishing turns at top and bottom.
F. Weld reinforcement in accordance with AWS D1.4.
2.8 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I – Normal, Portland type. Cement for concrete placed in
contact with soil to be Type II (MH). Cement for mass concrete to be Type II (MH).
B. Aggregates:
1. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33.
a. Do not exceed 1 ½ in maximum nominal aggregate size.
2. Aggregate should not exceed 1/5 the narrowest dimension between sides of
forms, nor 1/3 the depth of slabs, nor ¾ the minimum clear spacing between
individual reinforcing bars or wires.
3. Do not use manufactured sand for fine aggregate without approval from Owner
4. For slabs, conform to following:
a. Of total combined coarse and fine aggregates per mix design, provide
material gradation such that material retention on any one sieve is
between 8 percent and 24 percent of total by weight, except for largest
sieve and Nos. 30, 50, and 100 sieves.
b. Waive gradation requirement of ASTM C33 as required to meet ranges
specified.
c. Retain 1 percent to 4 percent of total combined aggregates per mix
design on 3/4-inch sieve.
d. Maintain 8 percent to 15 percent of total combined aggregates per mix
design is retained on each of Nos. 30 and 50 sieves.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 8
C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618 Class F or Class C, except loss on ignition is not to exceed
3 percent.
D. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240.
E. Slag: ASTM C989; Grade 120; ground granulated blast furnace slag.
F. Water: ASTM C1602.
2.9 ADMIXTURES
A. General:
1. Avoid using admixtures containing chloride ions except where the content
complies with chloride and calcium chloride limits for the proposed mix designs.
Do not use admixtures with calcium chloride for Exposure Class S2 or S3.
Submit certificate of compliance to this requirement.
2. If slab toppings are bonded to concrete, manufacturer of topping to approve the
type and brand of admixture used.
3. Submit information needed for manufacturer to determine if there is problem
with compatibility.
B. Types:
1. Air-Entraining: ASTM C260.
2. Water-Reducing: ASTM C494, Type A.
3. High-Range Water-Reducing: ASTM C494, Type F or G.
a. Type F Acceptable Products and Manufacturers:
1) “Eucon 37, Eucon 1037, or Plastol 5000” by Euclid Chemical
Corp.
2) “Daracem 100” or "ADVA 190" by W. R. Grace & Co.
b. Type G Acceptable Products and Manufacturers:
1) “Eucon 537” by Euclid Chemical Corp.
2) “Daracem 100” by W. R. Grace & Co.
4. Retarding: ASTM C494, Type B or D.
5. Accelerating:
a. ASTM C494, Type C or E. Non-chloride and non-thiocyanate type.
b. Acceptable Products and Manufacturers:
1) “Accelguard 80” by Euclid Chemical Corp.
2) “Polar Set: by W.R. Grace & Co.
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Retarders – as shown on the Drawings.

1. High demand areas:
a. ASTM E1745, Class A or B. Include manufacturer’s recommended
adhesive or pressure-sensitive joint tape.
b. Acceptable Products and Manufacturers:
1) “Stego Wrap 15 mil” by Stego Industries LLC.
2) “Griffolyn 15 Mil Green” by Reef Industries.
3) “Moistop Ultra 15” by Fortifiber Corporation.
4) “Yellow Guard, 15 mil” by Poly-America.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 9
2.11 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS
A. Expansion Joint Cap:

1. Two-part plastic cap for use over preformed joint filler.
2. Acceptable Product and Manufacturer:
a. “Snap-Cap” by W. R. Meadows, Inc.
B. Preformed Joint Filler:

1. ASTM D5249, Type 2, nonextruding, 3/8-inch wide by full depth of concrete
with top of cap strip at finished surface.
2. Acceptable Product and Manufacturer:
a. “Ceramar” by W. R. Meadows, Inc.
C. Firm Preformed Joint Filler: ASTM D1751, nonextruding, full depth of concrete.
D. Elastomeric Joint Materials:

1. Sealant:
a. FS TT-S-00230, Type I, Class A, single component cold applied,
pourable or gun grade, as applicable, polyurethane base.
b. Closely match color of adjacent exposed surface of concrete slab and
closely match color of epoxy joint sealant.
c. Keep same color throughout project.
d. Utilize sealant compatible with construction material placed against it.
2. Joint Back-Up Material:
a. Polyethylene foam, 60 percent closed cell.
E. Epoxy Joint Filler:

1. 100 percent solids per ASTM D1259, two-part semi-rigid epoxy with
instantaneous Shore A hardness minimum of 80 per ASTM D2240, adhesion to
concrete of 150 to 250 psi per ASTM C321, minimum elongation of 6 percent
per ASTM D638, and a tensile strength of 350 to 600 psi per ASTM D638 at
7 days. Provide filler compatible with construction material placed against it,
such as tile adhesive.
2. Closely match color of adjacent exposed surface of concrete slab. Keep same
color throughout project.
3. Acceptable Products and Manufacturers:
a. “Euco 700” by Euclid Chemical Corp.
b. “MM-80P” by Metzger-McGuire Co.
F. Construction and Control Joint Load transfer accessories: As shown on the Drawings.
1. Slab on Grade Dowels for Construction Joints: Smooth round bar, ASTM A36;
saw cut, not sheared.
2. Slab-on-Grade Dowel System for Construction Joints:
a. Square dowel plate - For 1/4-inch and 3/8-inch thickness, saw cut from
hot rolled plate per ASTM A36.
b. Acceptable Product and Manufacturer: “Diamond Dowel System” by
PNA, Inc.
3. Slab-on-Grade Load Plate Baskets for Control Joints:
a. Load Plate: Saw cut from hot rolled plate per ASTM A36.
b. Load Plate Clip: Clip to contain compressible foam on each vertical side
to allow limited horizontal movement parallel and perpendicular to joint.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 10
c. Side frame supports, 1/4-inch-diameter cold drawn wire, ASTM A108
grade 1010-1020.
d. Acceptable Product and Manufacturer: “Load Plate Basket” by PNA,
Inc.
2.12 CONCRETE MIX
A. General:
1. Use only materials and their proportions included on concrete supplier’s standard
mix design forms for this Project for which Owner has given final review.
2. Measure and mix ingredients in accordance with most stringent requirements of
ACI 211.1, ACI 301, and ASTM C94.
B. Workability: Provide concrete with proper consistency so that the material flows readily
into forms and around reinforcement without segregation, voids or, excessive bleeding.
C. Provide concrete based on the Exposure Categories and Classes, except as noted on the
Drawings:
Durability Exposure Minimum

Type of 28-day Maximum W/C
F S W C Total Air
Construction Compressive Ratio
Strength
Retaining Walls, 1 0 0 1 4,000 psi Optional 0.50
Footings, Grade (8% max)
Beams, Drilled
Piers and Pier
Caps
Interior Slabs on 0 0 0 1 4,000 psi No Air 0.56
Ground and Entraining
Trench Walls
Exterior Slabs on 2 0 0 1 4,500 psi 6% 0.45
Ground
Interior Elevated 0 0 0 0 7,000 psi No Air 0.56
Floor Slabs Entraining
Exterior Elevated 2 0 0 1 4,500 psi 6% 0.45
Floor Slabs
Interior Concrete 0 0 0 0 7,000 psi No Air 0.60
Columns Entraining
Exterior Concrete 1 0 0 1 4,500 psi 6% 0.45
Columns
Other Concrete 2 0 0 1 4,500 psi 6% 0.45
Exposed to
Weather

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 11
D. Slump:
1. Proportion concrete so slump without adding mid-range or high-range water-
reducing admixture or fibers, if used, would be as follows:
Types of Construction Slump (in.)

Mass concrete 2 (1)
Floor Slabs and Pavement 4 (+1/2, -2)
Other Concrete 4 (1)
2. If high-range water-reducing admixture is used, provide a mix with maximum

slump, after adding admixture, of 8 inches at point of delivery.
E. Admixtures:
1. Add water-reducing admixture as needed to improve workability and reduce
water content.
2. Add mid-range or high-range water-reducing admixture as needed to improve
workability or pumpability, to lower water/cement ratio, to increase ultimate and
early strengths, and to increase slump.
3. Provide an air-entraining admixture where air-entrainment is specified. Do not
air-entrain interior floor slabs with troweled finish.
4. Include admixture chemical composition in mix material limit compliance.
5. Other admixtures may be used only with written approval of the Owner.
6. Use admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
F. Supplementary Cementitious Materials:

1. Fly ash
a. Use as partial replacement for Portland cement if approved and other
requirements of this Section are met. However, do not use fly ash in floor
slabs
b. If fly ash is used, ensure weight of fly ash divided by sum of cement and
fly ash weights is at least 15 percent and does not exceed following:
1) Class F Fly Ash: 20 percent.
2) Class C Fly Ash: 25 percent
2. Take special care concerning following:
a. Maintain air-entrainment at specified levels.
b. In cold weather ensure that concrete strength gain is above specified
levels.
G. Average Compressive Strength Reduction: Not permitted.
H. Site Mixed Concrete: Mix concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and 318. Use a central-
mix type batch plant.
2.13 CURING AND SEALING MATERIALS
A. Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete: ASTM C171.

1. Synthetic Fiber/Plastic:
a. White synthetic fiber matting securely attached to white plastic sheet
backing.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 12
b. Acceptable Products and Manufacturer:
1) “Transguard 4000” by Fiber-Tec.
2) “HydraCure” by PNA Construction Technologies.
2. Coated Burlap:
a. ASTM C171, 10-ounce burlap with 4-mil minimum white opaque
polyethylene extruded onto burlap.
b. Acceptable Product and Manufacturer: “Cure Lap” by Midco.
B. Liquid Membrane Curing and Sealing Compound:

1. Conform to ASTM C1315, Type I (VOC compliant, 350 g/l).
2. Styrene-acrylate or methyl-methacrylate type, 25 percent minimum solids
content, clear, non- yellowing, with no styrene-butadiene.
3. Acceptable Product and Manufacturer: “Super Aqua-Clear VOX or Super
Diamond Clear VOX” by Euclid Chemical Corp.
C. Sealer/Densifier:
1. High performance, deeply penetrating concrete densifier; odorless, colorless,
VOC-compliant, non-yellowing siliconate based solution designed to harden, to
dustproof and to protect concrete floors subjected to heavy vehicular traffic, and
to resist black rubber tire marks on concrete surfaces.
2. The compound must contain a minimum solids content of 20 percent, of which
50 percent is siliconate.
3. Acceptable Products and Manufacturers:
a. “Diamond Hard” by Euclid Chemical Company.
b. “Sealhard” by L & M Chemical Corp.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

1. Verify lines, levels, and centers before proceeding with formwork. Verify
dimensions agree with Drawings.
2. Verify that subgrade surfaces and excavations are ready to receive formwork.
B. Concrete:
1. Verify requirements per ACI 301 for concrete cover over reinforcement are met.
2. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other embedded items are
accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with placing
concrete.
3.2 PREPARATION

1. Provide form surfaces free of dirt, mud, mortar, loose or nonadherent rust, and
other foreign material.
2. Apply a form release agent to form and form liner surfaces prior to positioning of
the forms and placement of the reinforcing steel and concrete.
3. For concrete exposed to view, utilize form surfaces free of surface irregularities
and patches and capable of producing the desired finish.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 13
4. For vertical surfaces of footings not exposed to view, earth cuts as forms are
acceptable where the soil is firm and stable.
5. Cut earth form surfaces compact, neat, and accurate in size and shape. Clean top
edges of earth forms of loose material to prevent sloughing.
6. Increase concrete section dimensions to provide reinforcing steel with minimum
specified cover at earth forms.
B. Reinforcement:
1. Place reinforcing steel free from dirt, mud, grease, oil, ice or snow, kinks, loose
or non-adherent rust, loose mill scale, form-release coating/sealer or bond
breaker, and any foreign matter or nonmetallic coating that adversely affects the
bonding capacity of the reinforcing steel with the concrete.
2. Clean bars extending though construction joints of concrete and other
contaminants prior to placement of subsequent concrete.
3. Provide surface preparation for welding in accordance with AWS D1.4.
Removal of loose or non-adherent rust and loose mill scale is acceptable.
4. Turn tie wire ends away from concrete exterior.
C. Concrete:
1. Prior to placement of concrete, complete the formwork, position and secure in
place reinforcing steel and embedded items, clean the space in which the
concrete free of debris and rubbish, spilled concrete, sloughed soil, standing
water, etc., and complete inspection and acceptance of the work.
2. Provide steel floor deck surfaces for contact with concrete that are free from dirt,
mud, dust, grease, oil, wax, ice or snow, frost laitance, and/or unsound material,
and any foreign matter or coating that adversely affects the bonding capacity of
the concrete.
3. Prior to placing of subsequent concrete at construction joints, clean the contact
surface by sandblasting or other approved means to remove laitance, expose the
aggregate, and roughen the surface to a minimum of 1/4-inch amplitude. Clean
contact surfaces to remove loose and/or foreign material. Inspect construction
joints prior to closing forms and the placement of concrete.
4. Treat wall joints, elevated slab joints, and any other joints as shown on the
Drawings with non-reemulsifiable bonding agent in accordance with the
manufacturer’s written instructions and specification prior to subsequent concrete
placement.
5. Prevent damaging waterstops during construction joint preparation.
6. Prevent splattering concrete on exposed/finish surfaces.
7. Provide an operable backup vibrator on site prior to and during concrete
placement.
3.3 FORMWORK INSTALLATION
A. Formwork – General:
1. Provide top form for sloped surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical to
hold shape of concrete during placement, unless it can be demonstrated that top
forms can be omitted.
2. Construct forms to correct shape and dimensions, mortar-tight, braced, and of
sufficient strength to maintain shape and position under imposed loads from
construction operations.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 14
3. Camber shored forms to compensate for form deflection due to placement and
hardening of concrete.
4. Carefully verify horizontal and vertical positions of forms. Correct misaligned or
misplaced forms before placing concrete. Complete wedging and bracing before
placing concrete.
5. Stagger joints in form panels and provide a tight fit. Solidly butt and align joints.
Provide backup at joints as required to prevent leakage.
6. Apply form release agent in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations
prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
7. Install chamfer strips on external corners of beams , slabs, columns and
housekeeping pads.
B. Forms for Smooth Finish Concrete:

1. Use steel, plywood or lined board forms.
2. Use clean and smooth plywood and form liners, uniform in size, and free from
surface and edge damage capable of affecting resulting concrete finish.
3. Install form lining with close-fitting square joints between separate sheets
without springing into place.
4. Use full size sheets of form lines and plywood wherever possible.
5. Tape joints to prevent protrusions in concrete.
6. Use care in forming and stripping wood forms to protect corners and edges.
7. Level and continue horizontal joints.
8. Keep wood forms wet until stripped.
C. Forms for Surfaces to Receive Membrane Waterproofing: Use plywood or steel forms.
After erection of forms, tape form joints to prevent protrusions in concrete.
3.4 INSTALLATION – INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS FOR FORMWORK
A. Install formed openings for items embedded in or passing through concrete work.
B. Coordinate with Work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets,
recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other Work.
C. Embedded Items:
1. Make provisions for pipes, sleeves, anchors, inserts, reglets, anchor slots, nailers,
water stops, and other features.
2. Do not embed wood or uncoated aluminum in concrete.
3. Securely anchor embedded items in correct location and alignment prior to
placing concrete.
4. Verify conduits and pipes, including those made of coated aluminum, meet
requirements of ACI 318 for size and location limitations.
D. Openings for Items Passing Through Concrete:

1. Frame openings in concrete where indicated on Drawings. Establish exact
locations, sizes, and other conditions required for openings and attachment of
work specified under other sections.
2. Coordinate work to avoid cutting and patching of concrete after placement.
3. For pipes and conduit passing through slabs, grade beams, and walls, provide
sleeved holes sized 1 inch in diameter larger than the outside diameter of the
pipe/conduit. Sleeves to extend the full thickness of the section.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 15
E. Form Ties:
1. Use sufficient strength and sufficient quantity to prevent spreading of forms.
2. Place ties at least 1 inch away from finished surface of concrete.
3. Leave inner rods in concrete when forms are stripped.
4. If necessary to grease tie threads, do not allow grease to contact remainder of tie
when wall will be exposed to hydrostatic pressure.
5. Use column clamps in lieu of form ties at square and rectangular columns.
F. Construction Joints:
1. Install surfaced pouring strip where construction joints intersect exposed
surfaces, in order to provide straight line at joints.
2. Show no overlapping of construction joints. Construct joints to present same
appearance as butted plywood joints.
3. Arrange joints in continuous line straight, true and sharp.
G. Screeds:
1. Set screeds and establish levels for tops of concrete slabs and levels for finish on
slabs.
2. Slope slabs to drain where required or as shown on Drawings.
3. For concrete over waterproof membranes and vapor retarder membranes, use
cradle, pad or base type screed supports which will not puncture membrane.
4. Do not stake through or otherwise penetrate the membrane.
3.5 FORM CLEANING
A. Clean forms and formed cavities of debris and rubbish, spilled concrete, sloughed soil,
mud, standing water, ice or snow, tie wire trimmings, etc. prior to placing concrete.
B. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that
water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
C. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts.
Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed
within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.
3.6 FORM REMOVAL
A. Prior to removal of non-weight supporting forms:

1. Allow concrete to harden sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations,
but in no case sooner than 24 hours.
B. Prior to removal of weight supporting forms:

1. Establish that concrete compressive strength has reached at least 80 percent of
compressive strength as determined from field-cured test cylinders.
C. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete
surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.
D. Remove formwork progressively so no unbalanced loads are imposed on structure. Do

not damage concrete surfaces during form removal.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 16
E. Obtain permission for early removal of weight supporting formwork and reshoring.
F. Install reshores snugly enough to hold it in place and so as to remove the normal
deflection of the slab and beams above.
G. Locate reshores in the same position on each floor.
3.7 PLACING REINFORCING
A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from
required position beyond specified tolerance as defined in ACI 301 and CRSI MSP-1. Do
not weld crossing reinforcement bars for assembly except as approved by the Owner.
B. Do not displace or damage vapor retarder.
C. Accommodate placement of formed openings.
D. Provide lap type reinforcing steel splices unless detailed otherwise on the Drawings.
Submit splices not specified in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings for prior
review by the Owner.
E. Install continuous horizontal bars in the longest possible lengths with ACI Class B lap
splices in accordance with ACI 318, unless detailed otherwise on the Drawings.
F. Provide spiral lap splices 48 bar diameters minimum or 12 inches long, whichever is
greater, unless detailed otherwise on the Drawings. Provide spacers in accordance with
CRSI MSP-1 for spiral reinforcing.
G. Support reinforcing steel at 4 feet on center maximum in any direction.
H. Submit field bending of reinforcing steel not shown on the Drawings for approval. Do not
heat reinforcing bars for bending purposes.
I. Welded Wire Fabric: Position fabric by supports spaced such that construction loads,
including workers, do not cause permanent deflection of more than 1/2 inch.
J. Bond and ground reinforcement in accordance with requirements of Section 26 05 26.
3.8 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Notify testing laboratory and Owner minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of

operations.
C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed expansion and contraction joints,
are not disturbed during concrete placement.
D. Install vapor retarder over prepared base material where indicated under interior slabs on
grade in accordance with ASTM E1643. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight
by taping edges and ends. Ensure tape and adhesives are compatible with vapor retarder.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 17
E. Repair vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with
vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.
F. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement
sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
G. Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with Section 07 90 00 – Joint Protection.
H. Water may not be added to the mix at the site unless approved by the Owner. In no case
is the maximum water/cement ratio to be exceeded.
I. Raking or flowing of concrete to move it or re-tempering of concrete is not permitted.
J. Convey and place concrete at a regular rate, as close as possible to final position. Prevent
segregation of mix, and sequence in a manner which minimizes shrinkage. Do not
support concrete conveying equipment on the reinforcing steel or supporting accessories.
K. Do not use aluminum equipment for conveying or finishing concrete.
L. Use tremies or other approved method when drops over 5 feet are required and concrete
will have to pass through obstructions, such as reinforcing.
M. Unless otherwise specified, consolidate concrete by vibration. Consolidate concrete

around reinforcement, embedded items and into corners of forms to eliminate
honeycombing or planes of weakness due to air voids and stone pockets. Unless
otherwise specified, use the largest and most powerful internal vibrators to consolidate
the concrete. Utilize workers experienced in the use of vibrators. Do not use vibrators to
move concrete within the forms.
N. Place concrete in continuous operation for each panel or section determined by joints
shown on the Drawings or as specified in these Specifications. Submit construction joints
not shown on the Drawings or specified in these Specifications for prior review by the
Owner.
O. Do not interrupt successive placement and do not permit cold joints to occur.
P. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature,
and test samples taken.
Q. Place floor slabs in checkerboard saw-cut pattern indicated on drawings.
3.9 SEPARATE FLOOR TOPPINGS
A. Prior to placing floor topping, roughen substrate concrete surface to 1/4-inch amplitude
and remove deleterious material. Broom and vacuum clean.
B. Place required dividers, edge strips, reinforcing, and other embedded items.
C. Apply bonding agent to substrate.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 18
3.10 FLOOR FINISHING
A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Float finish surfaces scheduled to receive roofing, waterproofing membranes, and sand
bed terrazzo.
1. Power float and/or hand float surface.
2. Wood float surfaces receiving quarry tile, ceramic tile, and cementitious terrazzo
with full bed setting system.
C. Trowel finish exposed interior walking surfaces and surfaces to be covered with carpet,
resilient floor, paint and other thin-film finish coating systems.
1. After floating as specified, power trowel or hand trowel surface.
2. Ensure kneeboard impressions, trowel marks or chattered areas are not evident
after floor is finished.
3. Steel trowel exposed surfaces and surfaces receiving carpeting, resilient flooring,
seamless flooring, thin-set terrazzo, thin-set quarry tile, and thin-set ceramic tile.
D. Scratch finish surfaces that are to receive mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement
terrazzo and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring materials, except bonded
concrete floor toppings.
E. Broom finish exposed exterior walking surfaces, ramps and outside paving, unless noted
otherwise on the Drawings.
F. Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining required surface flatness. Wet
screeding and jitterbugging is not permitted.
G. Saw-cut joints for slabs on grade within 12 hours after placing. Use 3/16-inch-thick
blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab thickness.
H. Formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view may have a rough form finish and formed
concrete surfaces exposed to view to have a smooth form finish in accordance with ACI
301.
I. Metallic and Hard Aggregate Finish:

1. Apply metallic or hard aggregate floor surface material, where noted on the
Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Distribute material with a mechanical spreader.
3. Apply material at following minimum rates:
a. Mineral Aggregate: 1.50 pounds per square foot of floor area.
b. Metallic Aggregate: 2.25 pounds per square foot of floor area.
J. Abrasive Aggregate Finish: Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
K. In areas with floor drains, maintain design floor elevation at walls; slope surfaces
uniformly to drains at 1/8 inch per foot nominal.
3.11 FINISHING TOLERANCES
A. Provide final surfaces within tolerances per ACI 117 and as specified below.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 19
B. Floor Finished Surface Flatness and Levelness:
1. Random Traffic Areas:
a. F-Number Requirements: Conform to F-number requirements specified
and as described in ASTM E1155, except as specified or as shown on
Drawings:
1) Interior Slabs on Grade: FF35/FL25 minimum overall for
composite of measured values for entire day's concrete
placement; FF25/FL20 minimum for any individual floor
section.
2) Elevated Slabs Shored Until After Testing: FF25/ FL20
minimum overall for composite of measured values for entire
day's concrete placement; FF20/FL15 minimum for individual
floor section.
3) Unshored Elevated Slabs: FF23 minimum overall for composite
of measured values for entire day's concrete placement FF17
minimum for individual floor section.
2. Boundary Requirements: Bound individual floor sections for testing purposes by
the following that provide the smallest sections: construction joints, control
joints, or column and half-column lines.
3. Additional Requirements:
a. Conform to F-numbers specified for floor areas within 2 feet of
construction and isolation joints, in lieu of ASTM E1155 requirements
excluding these areas.
b. Limit to 1/4-inch maximum elevation change that may occur within
2 feet of vertical elements (such as columns or walls) that pass through
slab surface.
4. Defined Traffic Areas, as Noted on Drawings:
a. Fmin Requirements: Fmin 60, at locations in way of future lift truck wheel
tracks and over truck wheel space dimensions.
5. Remedies for Out-of-Tolerance Work:
a. Grind into tolerance or remove and replace slabs measuring below
specified Fmin number.
b. Filling of low spots is not permitted.
6. Elevation Envelope: Ensure top of entire floor falls within plus or minus 5/16 of
an inch of finished floor elevation indicated on Drawings.
3.12 CURING
A. General:
1. Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 308.1, except as noted.
2. Start curing as soon as concrete surface will not be damaged by curing
operations.
3. Continuously cure concrete, except high early strength concrete, for at least
7 consecutive days.
4. Cure high early strength concrete for at least 5 consecutive days.
5. During curing period, do not allow any part of concrete to become dry.
6. Keep forms in contact with concrete wet during curing period unless type of form
is impervious to water, such as metal or fiberglass.
7. If forms are removed before curing period is complete, continue curing
immediately with one of following methods.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 20
8. For curing floors with colored or metallic hard aggregate floor surface material,
follow material manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet.
C. White Burlap Sheeting:

1. Saturate burlap and place burlap-side down over floor slab areas.
2. Lap ends and sides 6 inches minimum. Seal and secure laps and edges in such a
manner as to prevent moisture escaping from concrete.
D. Polyethylene Film: Spread over floor slab areas, lap edges and sides, seal with pressure
sensitive tape.
E. Liquid Membrane Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply curing compound in two coats
with second coat applied at right angles to first.
1. Apply curing compound at coverage rate of 300 square feet maximum per gallon
for broomed finish and abrasive aggregate finish.
2. For troweled finish, metallic or hard aggregate finish, and other finishes where
curing compound can be used, apply curing and sealing compound at coverage
rate of 400 square feet per gallon, or the strippable curing compound at
300 square feet per gallon.
3. Do not use liquid curing compound on surface against which additional concrete,
other finishing materials, coatings, tank linings or slab toppings are bonded if
their bond will be affected by curing compound.
4. High solids content of curing compound may clog hand sprayers; plan for this by
using power sprayer or other approved means of application if necessary.
5. During the curing period, immediately recoat within 3 hours surfaces subjected to
rainfall or surfaces damaged by subsequent construction operations.
3.13 SEALING
A. On all exposed concrete surfaces, apply a uniform coat of liquid sealing compound in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. This application is not intended for
the purposes of a curing compound. If surfaces were cured with a liquid curing
compound, use the same product for sealing as was used for curing. Commence
application immediately after removing curing fabrics or papers or after liquid curing
compound has thoroughly dried.
B. Floor Sealing
1. Just prior to completion of construction, apply uniform coat of sealer/densifier to
trowel finished interior floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Do not apply sealer if incompatible with planned coating or
surface treatment.
2. Apply compound after slab repairs and sealing of joints is complete.
3. Remove stains and thoroughly clean and dry surfaces immediately prior to
application.
4. Apply sealer/densifier on exposed interior floors subjected to vehicular abrasion
Apply in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer and just prior to
completion of construction.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 21
3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Sampling and Testing:

1. Sampling Procedures: ASTM C172.
a. Cylinder Molding and Curing Procedures: ASTM C31 cylinder
specimens, field cured.
b. Sample concrete and make one set of four standard 6-inch (150mm)
diameter by 12-inch cylinders per 150 cubic yards or less of each class of
concrete placed each day and per 5,000 square feet of surface area for
slabs and walls.
c. Field cure samples using the same procedures as the concrete they
represent.
d. When volume of concrete for any class of concrete would provide less
than five sets of cylinders, take samples from five randomly selected
batches, or from every batch when less than five batches are used.
e. Make one additional cylinder during cold weather concreting, and field
cure.
f. Use standard-cured cylinders for acceptance testing for specified
strength.
g. Provide additional cylinders for substantiation of concrete strength for
other construction purposes.
2. Field Testing:
a. Slump Test Method: ASTM C143.
b. Air Content Test Method: ASTM C231.
c. Temperature Test Method: ASTM C1064.
d. Measure slump and temperature for each compressive strength concrete
sample.
e. Measure air content in air entrained concrete for each compressive
strength concrete sample.
3. Cylinder Compressive Strength Testing:
a. Test Method: ASTM C39.
b. Test Acceptance: In accordance with ACI 318.
c. Test one cylinder at 7 days.
d. Test two cylinders at 28 days.
e. Test one cylinder at 56 days only if 28-day tests are below the specified
strength.
f. Retain one cylinder for 28 days for testing when requested by Owner.
g. Dispose remaining cylinders when testing is not required.
4. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air
temperature and test samples taken.
5. Supplemental testing options for non-compliant strength concrete.
a. Core Compressive Strength Testing:
1) Sampling and Testing Procedures: ASTM C42.
2) Test Acceptance: In accordance with ACI 318.
3) Drill two cores for each failed strength test from concrete
represented by 56-day compressive strength tests that are below
the specified strength, except as authorized by the Owner.
4) Locate reinforcing steel prior to coring. Do not cut reinforcing
steel during coring.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 22
b. Execute penetration resistance tests of concrete for indication of
compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C803.
1) Test concrete where the 56-day compressive strength tests are
below the specified strength.
2) Execute test within 72 hours of the noncomplying cylinder tests.
c. Provide core compressive strength and penetration resistance tests
without additional cost to the Owner.
d. Provide the following within 48 hours after completion of tests and
inspections:
1) Test reports concerning slump, air content, temperature and
compressive strengths of concrete and ambient temperature at
the time of placement.
2) Inspection reports concerning concrete placement and slab
surface flatness.
3.15 PATCHING AND CLEANING
A. Clean honeycomb voids, rock pockets, and form tie holes to sound concrete and fill with
grout or patching mortar mixed with diluted non-reemulsifiable bonding agent. Remove
fins and projections.
B. Patch imperfections in accordance with ACI 301.
C. Provide surface repairs to match the finish of the adjacent concrete surface. Match
adjacent unrepaired surface where exposed to view.
D. Clean concrete splatter from exposed/finish surfaces. Provide cleaned surfaces equal to
the original surface with no visible splatter.
3.16 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions,

tolerances or specified requirements.
B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete as determined by Owner. Provide additional

inspections needed for correction of non-complying surfaces at the Contractor’s expense.
3.17 PROTECTION
A. Barricade concrete surfaces immediately after finishing.
B. Do not permit light traffic, except for curing purposes, over unprotected floor surface
until concrete has obtained 60 percent of its specified compressive strength (7 days
minimum) determined by field-cured test cylinders.
C. Do not permit heavy traffic over unprotected floor surface until concrete has obtained its
specified design strength determined by field-cured test cylinders. Ensure construction
traffic does not exceed floor design loads.
D. If concrete has been cured by water or sheet material, permit concrete to dry minimum of
2 additional days after curing is completed before removing barricades.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 23
E. Protect finished slabs from traffic, mud, dirt, concrete splatter, joint compound, sealants,
paint, oil, grease, etc., during construction by use of a durable waterproof craft paper.
F. Protect mock-up panels from construction operations, soiling, and the weather for a
minimum of 56 days after completion of represented architectural concrete work.
G. Do not place earth backfill behind walls until the concrete has attained 100 percent of its
specified 28-day compressive strength as substantiated by field-cured test cylinders.
H. Brace walls tied to slabs or members as required to resist lateral loads until the slab or
members are complete and have attained 100 percent of its specified 28-day compressive
strength as substantiated by field-cured test cylinders.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 24
WITH BID
03 30 00-01 Reinforcing: Two weeks prior to
Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, fabrication or purchase
locations, splice lengths and locations, bending
diagrams, and supporting and spacing devices.
Submit certified copies of mill test report of

reinforcement materials analysis.
03 30 00-02 Concrete: Two weeks prior to
• Product Data: Submit data on joint devices, fabrication or purchase
attachment accessories, admixtures, and
embedded concrete items.
Design Data:
• Submit concrete mix design for each concrete
strength. Submit separate mix designs when
admixtures are required for the following:
• Hot or cold weather concrete work.
• Air entrained concrete work.
• Identify mix ingredients and proportions,
including admixtures.
• Identify chloride content of admixtures and
whether chloride was added during
manufacture.
03 30 00-03 Finishing: Submit data on concrete hardener, Two weeks prior to
sealer, curing compounds, curing papers, and slip construction
resistant treatment, compatibilities, and
limitations.
03 30 00-04 Curing: Submit data on curing compounds, mats, Two weeks prior to
paper, film, compatibilities, and limitations. construction
03 30 00-05 LEED Credit MRc4 - Recycled Content; Per construction schedule
Materials Resources Certificates: Provide
material resources certificates for the following:
• Certify source and origin for salvaged and
reused products.
• Certify recycled material content for recycled
content products.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 25
WITH BID
03 30 00-06 LEED Credit MRc4 - Recycled Content; Per construction schedule
Materials Resources Labeling: Provide ISO
14021 Type II environmental labeling and self-
declarations for materials installed under this
Section, identified as containing recycled
materials as a proportional portion of total
assembly weight.
03 30 00-07 LEED Credit MRc5 - Regional Materials: Prior to mobilization
Provide manufacturer documentation confirming
materials can be considered “regional” (i.e.
extracted and manufactured from a distance less
than 500 miles (800 km) from the project site).
03 30 00-08 LEED Credit MRc5 - Regional Materials: For On a monthly basis over the
each proposed regional material, provide duration of the construction
documentation showing the cost, location of activities.
extract, harvest, recovery and manufacture, and
country of origin if applicable.
03 30 00-09 LEED Credit MRc5 - Regional Materials: On a monthly basis over the
Provide evidence of purchase and installation of duration of the construction
the proposed regional materials in the form of activities
invoices from suppliers and installers in order to
show how the cost of the regional materials
equaled at least 20 percent of the total materials
cost.
03 30 00-10 LEED Credit IEQc4.2 – Low-VOC Paints and Per construction schedule
Coatings: Provide a list of the paint and coating
products applied to the building interiors. Include
the product type, the manufacturer’s name,
product name, and specific VOC data for each
product, as well as the corresponding allowable
VOC limit from the standard referenced in LEED-
BD+C credit IEQc4.2.
END OF SECTION

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 03 30 00 - 26
SECTION 05 43 00
SLOTTED CHANNEL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. This Section specifies the requirements necessary to furnish and install slotted
channel framing, accessories, and fasteners.
2. System design for equipment support and component support.
1. Section 01 81 13 – Sustainable Design Requirements.
2. Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
3. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).
4. American Welding Society (AWS).
5. International Code Council (ICC).
6. Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (MFMA).
B. Reference Standards:
1. AISI Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
2. ANSI B1.1, Unified Miniature Screw Threads.
3. ASTM A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
4. ASTM A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
5. ASTM A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron
and Steel Hardware.
6. ASTM A240, Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel
Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General
Applications.
7. ASTM A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
8. ASTM A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and
Threaded Rod 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.
9. ASTM A563/A563M, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy-Steel Nuts.
10. ASTM A575, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality,
M-Grades.
11. ASTM A576, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought,
Special Quality.
704618 Slotted Channel Framing

7 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 05 43 00- 1
12. ASTM A588/A588M, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy
Structural Steel with 50ksi (345MPa) Minimum Yield Point, with Atmospheric
Corrosion Resistance.
13. ASTM A635, ASTM A635/A635M – 14 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet
and Strip, Heavy-Thickness Coils, Hot-Rolled, Alloy, Carbon, Structural, High-
Strength Low-Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
General Requirements for.
14. ASTM A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
15. ASTM A1011, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with
Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength.
16. ASTM B633, Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on
Iron and Steel.
17. AWS D1.1 – Structural Welding Code – Steel.
18. AWS D1.3 – Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel.
19. AWS A5.1/A5.1M – Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded
Metal Arc Welding.
20. AWS A5.5/A5.5M – Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded
Metal Arc Welding.
21. ICC International Building Code.
22. MFMA Metal Framing Standards Publication, MFMA-4.
23. MFMA Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing, MFMA-103.
24. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC), Specification for Structural
Joints Using High Strength Bolts.
1.3 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with Section 01 81 13 – Sustainable Design Requirements.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Lateral Design and Deflection Requirements:

1. Minimum Lateral Load:
a. For interior component designs: 5 psf.
b. For exterior component designs: Wind loads per the Virginia Uniform
Statewide Building Code.
2. Deflection: The more stringent of L/175 or compatible with system component
designs.
B. Vertical Loading and Deflection Requirements:

1. Minimum Vertical Load
a. For interior component designs: The more stringent of 10 psf on the plan
footprint or the component and content weight in its intended current and
future use.
b. For exterior component designs: The component and content weight in
its intended current and future combined with the snow, ice, and wind
per the Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code.
2. Dead Load: Component weight.

7 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 05 43 00- 2
3. Deflection: L/360 for snow, ice, and future component content load.
C. Provide system and bracing designs conformance with Virginia Uniform Statewide
Building Code, AISI Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members, AWS D1.1, MFMA-4, and MFMA-103.
D. System design to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural

members, and clearances of intended openings.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
1.6 QUALITY
A. Utilize welding procedures, qualified welders, and qualified welders and tackers for
welding in the field in accordance with AWS D1.1.
B. Utilize welding inspectors with qualifications in accordance with AWS D1.1.
C. Compute slotted channel/strut framing section properties in accordance with AISI

Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
D. Provide equipment support and component support system design calculations and shop
and erection drawings certified by a professional engineer registered in the state of the
project’s location.
E. Maintain one copy of documents on site.
A. Deliver slotted channel/strut framing to the site in bundles marked with tags calling out
manufacturer, material type, section, gauge, and finish.
B. Store slotted channel/strut framing, accessories, and fasteners at the site flat and off the
ground and stored/handled in such a manner as to prevent soiling, corrosion, distortion,
and/or damage.
C. In addition, provide channel for cleanroom or chemical exposure applications conforming

to the following:
1. Provide channels free of scratches or gouges that cut through finish to expose
raw unfinished steel, dirt or rust, and finish blemishes that may cause rust
acceleration.
2. Store channel inside, away from exterior elements.
3. Deliver channel to the site in banded bundles with protective corners between the
channel and banding to prevent scratches and gouges.

7 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 05 43 00- 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SLOTTED CHANNEL FRAMING
A. Manufacturers:
1. B-Line Strut by Cooper B-Line, Highland, IL.
2. Flex-Strut by Flex-Strut, Inc., Warren, OH.
3. H-Strut by Haydon Corporation, Wayne, NJ.
4. Power-strut by Tyco electrical & Metal Products, Harvey, IL.
5. Superstrut by Thomas & Betts Corporation, Memphis, TN.
6. Unistrut by Unistrut Corporation, Atasca, IL.
7. Westrut by Wesanco, Inc., La Mirada, CA.
7.8. Channel framing as fabricated by PHD, Columbiana, OH.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Slotted Channel Framing, Double Channel and Concrete Inserts:

1. Electro-Galvanized, Pre-galvanized, Hot-dipped Galvanized, Zinc Dichromate,
Powder Coated: ASTM A1011, A653.
2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240 (Type 304 or 316).
3. Steel: Minimum yield stress of 33,000 psi.
B. Fittings:
1. Electro-Galvanized, Pre-galvanized, Hot-dipped Galvanized, Zinc Dichromate,
Powder Coated: ASTM A36, A575, A576, A635.
2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240 (Type 304) or ASTM A276 (Type 304).
C. Standard Hex Head Bolts with Hex Nuts: ASTM A307, Grade A.
D. Standard and Jamb Hex Nuts: ASTM A563.
E. Channel Nuts: ASTM A575, Grade M1015.

1. Threads: ANSI B1.1 UNC-2B.
2. Rectangular with rounded ends.
3. Toothed grooves.
4. With springs.
F. Plain Washers: ANSI B18.22.1, Type A-W.
G. Welding Filler Metal: AWS A5.1 or A5.5 E60XX electrodes.
H. Blind Rivets (double back slotted channel): Low Carbon Steel Grade C-1008.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide accessories such as closure strips and end caps by the slotted channel
manufacturer.

7 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 05 43 00- 4
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Channel and Concrete Insert Requirements:

1. Section: C type.
2. Width: 1-5/8 inches.
3. Slot Width: 7/8 inch.
4. Thickness: 12 gauge.
5. Lips/Edges: Inturned.
6. Faces: Unpunched unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
7. Insert Anchor Tabs: 4 inches on center spacing.
8. Insert Depth: 1-3/8-inch minimum unless noted otherwise on Drawings.
9. To prevent concrete seepage through preformed anchor tab holes, tape holes with
liquid-resistant tape and fill embed with styrene. Provide end closures.
B. Minimum Channel Section Properties:

1. 13/16-Inch-Deep Single Channel:
a. Ix = 0.026 inch to the fourth.
b. Sx = 0.054 inch to the third.
c. A = 0.290 inch squared.
d. rx = 0.298 inch.
2. 7/8-Inch-Deep Single Channel:
d. rx = 0.306 inch.
3. 1-3/8-Inch-Deep Single Channel:
d. rx = 0.489 inch.
d. rx = 0.577 inch.
d. rx = 0.848 inch.
d. rx = 1.107 inch.
7. 1-5/8-Inch-Deep Double Channel (2 – 13/16):

7 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 05 43 00- 5
d. rx = 0.449 inch.
8. 1-3/4-Inch-Deep Double Channel (2 – 7/8):
d. rx = 0.472 inch.
9. 2-3/4-Inch-Deep Double Channel (2 – 1-3/8):
d. rx = 0.769 inch
d. rx = 0.914 inch.
d. rx = 1.390 inch.
d. rx = 1.864 inch.
C. Double Channel Requirements:

1. Form double channel by riveting together two pieces of channel into a single
component. Finish individual sections and rivets per this specification prior to
assembly.
2. If riveted channel is not available, individual channels may be welded together
into a single component. Finish individual sections per this specification prior to
assembly.
3. For clean room applications, welds of zinc dichromate strut may be touched up
with Aervoe brand Zinc Rich Low VOC Galvanize coating making sure that the
welds and heat affected areas are completely covered.
4. Provide manufacturer-calculated strength of rivets or welds meeting structural
requirements of equivalent single strut.
D. Fitting Requirements:
1. Width: 1-5/8 inch.
2. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
3. Hole Size: 9/16 inch.
4. Hole Spacing: 1-5/8 inches on center minimum.
5. Hole End Distance: 5/8 inch.

7 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 05 43 00- 6
E. Slotted channel/strut framing to conform accurately to the shape and dimensions as
shown on the Drawings within the allowable tolerances as defined in MFMA-4.
F. Cut edges true to line and free from projections.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Finish channels, struts, fittings, bolts, and nuts as noted in the following schedule using
the finishes listed in the following paragraphs:
Slotted Channel Framing Finish Schedule
Electro-Galvanized
Zinc Dichromate
Pre-Galvanized
Powder Coated
Stainless Steel
Hot-dipped
Galvanized
Building Area
Cleanroom Use
Subfab – Clean X X X
1
Class 1 Cleanroom X X
1
Other Cleanrooms X X X
2
Cleanroom Air Return X X X
Clean Support Interstitial X X X
Fan Attic – Clean Plenum, Chases X X X X
Non-Cleanroom Use
Utility Level X X X X X X
Subfab – Dirty X X X X X
Fab – Support (Dirty) X X X X X
Fan Attic – Support (Dirty) X X X X X

Exterior X X
Exterior – Haz. Mat. X
1
Cleanroom area between top of raised access floor to underside of cleanroom ceiling
excluding return air ducts.
2
Cleanroom area between top of structural waffle slab and underside of raised access
floor, and inside of return air ducts.
B. Metallic Coatings:
1. Electro-Galvanized: Channel, fittings, hardware, and fasteners electro-galvanize
plated in accordance with ASTM B633 (SC3 for fittings and SC1 for threaded
hardware) with minimum coating thickness of 0.2 mils.

7 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 05 43 00- 7
2. Pre-Galvanized: Channel zinc coated by hot-dipped process prior to roll forming.
Use zinc weight G90 conforming to ASTM A653 with minimum coating
thickness of 0.75 mils. Zinc plate fittings, hardware, and fasteners in accordance
with ASTM B633 (SC3 for fittings and SC1 for threaded hardware).
3. Hot-Dip Galvanized: Channel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance
with ASTM A123 with minimum coating thickness of 2.6 mils. Hot-dip
galvanize fittings, hardware, and fasteners after fabrication in accordance with
ASTM A123 or ASTM A153.
4. Zinc Dichromate: Channel, fittings, hardware, and fasteners electro-galvanize
plated in accordance with ASTM B633 (SC3 for fittings and SC1 for threaded
hardware) with minimum coating thickness of 0.5 mils then plated with a layer of
zinc dichromate.
C. Non-Metallic Coatings – Powder Coated: Coat channel, fittings, hardware, and fasteners
with an epoxy paint applied by electro-deposition with a minimum thickness of 1.5 mils
and thoroughly baked in accordance with requirements included in Section 09 90 00 –
Painting and Coating.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces and building framing components are ready to receive
work.
B. Clean materials designated for use in cleanrooms prior to cleanroom entry and
installation per project instructions.
C. Beginning of installation to mean acceptance of existing conditions and substrates.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Provide connections and splices as shown on the Drawings. Submit connections and
splices not shown on the Drawings for prior review by the Owner.
B. Cut slotted channel/strut framing by saw. Flame cutting is not permitted. Clean exposed
cut edges of burrs prior to painting and installation.
C. Saw cut column ends bearing upon baseplates to true surfaces and correct bevels.
D. Cover exposed cut edges of materials designated for use in cleanrooms with plastic caps
or touch up with an approved coating. Touch up scratches, gouges, drilled holes and
blemishes with an approved coating. Touch-up painting is not allowed within clean
envelope after area is designated Op Ready.
E. Submit fabrication items or geometry not required by or shown on the Drawings for prior
review by the Owner.

7 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 05 43 00- 8
F. Draw connection parts properly together and fit tight. Tighten the bolts per torques in
accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and specifications.
G. Provide column baseplates with full contact when assembled.
H. Provide standard bolt heads and nuts with plain washers at slots and slotted holes.
I. Sequence welding and limit weld lengths to minimize distortion and shrinkage.
J. Provide embedded inserts with plastic or metal closure strips and steel end caps.
K. Provide caps on ends of exposed strut, including those below raised access floor.
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Plumbness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
B. Levelness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
C. Spacing: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY
A. Verify installed slotted channel framing to conform to the Drawings within the allowable
tolerances.
B. Install bolts per manufacturer torque requirements using calibrated torque wrenches.
Calibrate the wrenches daily.

7 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 05 43 00- 9
A. Provide submittals listed in Submittal Schedule:
WITH BID
05 43 00-01 Shop Drawings: Shop and erection drawings Two weeks prior to
showing types, profiles, sizes, gauges, finishes, fabrication or purchase.
dimensions, components, fittings, fasteners,
welds, positions, spacing, openings, connections,
welding processes, etc., for the fabrication and
erection of slotted channel framing systems.
05 43 00-02 Product information showing compliance with Two weeks prior to
these Specifications. purchase.
05 43 00-03 Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed Within 4 weeks of
on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within assignment of welder to the
previous 12 months for record purposes only. project.
Note: These items will not be reviewed and
returned.
05 43 00-04 Submit system design calculations and shop and Two weeks prior to
erection drawings to the Owner for review purchase of materials.
2 weeks prior to fabrication and erection. NOTE:
The review of system designs is only for
compliance with the design concept and the
Drawings and Specifications and to not include
checking the complete designs.
END OF SECTION

7 FEBRUARY 2019 – Rev. 2 05 43 00- 10
SECTION 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements to furnish and install firestopping, including:

1. Through-penetration firestops and smoke-stops for fire-rated partition and floor
assemblies, both blank (empty) and those accommodating penetration items such
as, but not necessarily limited to cable, conduit, pipes, and ducts.
2. Firestopping of joints and voids in or between fire barrier elements, such as walls
and floor and roof assemblies.
3. Grease duct/hood fire blanket wrap.
4. Firestop accessories required to complete firestop systems.
5. Preparation of shop drawings for firestop systems, including those for which no
UL-listed system exists.
6. Submission of information and documentation required by the local jurisdiction
and securing prior approval for firestopping assemblies.
7. Label installed firestop assemblies.
8. Operation and maintenance manuals detailing installed firestop assemblies and
providing complete instructions for firestop maintenance and modification.
9. Documentation provided to the local jurisdiction after installation verifying
firestopping is installed as planned and approved by the local jurisdiction
(deferred submittal).
B. Extent of fire barriers is indicated on the Drawings.
C. Where a specific firestop system is not indicated on Drawings for a through-penetration,

the Contractor shall include proposed system designs in submittals. Submittal shall be
based upon inspection and review of the Drawings and Specifications and include
Engineering Judgement by prepared under the supervision of a registered engineer,
acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ), employed by the firestopping
manufacturer.
D. Work Not Included: Repairing penetrations made in error and repairing penetrations
which are too large to be sealed by the methods indicated. These are to be repaired using
the original material of the construction.
E. Products Furnished but Not Installed: Sleeves, which are an integral part of the
firestopping assembly but which, must be set by installer of other construction.
F. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 43 45 – Outgassing Criteria for Clean Zone Products.
2. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.
4. Section 40 05 15 – Piping Services.
704618 Firestopping
28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 0 07 84 00 - 1
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International:
1. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal
Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.
2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction
and Materials.
3. ASTM E814 – Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop
Systems.
B. Directory of Listed Products, Intertek.
C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):

1. Fire Resistance Directory, Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
2. UL 1479 – Standard for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestops.
3. UL 2079 – Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.
D. Approval Guide, FM Global.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Fire Barriers: Walls, floors or roof assembly which is indicated on the Drawings as
having a fire resistance rating.
B. Firestop: A tested and approved assembly installed to resist for a prescribed time period
the passage of flame, heat, and hot gases through openings which penetrate one side
(membrane penetration) or the entire fire-resistive assembly (through penetration) in
order to accommodate cables, cable trays, conduit, tubing, pipes, or similar items.
C. Membrane Penetration: A penetration into a hollow fire barrier system from one side
only.
D. Through Penetration: A penetration completely through the entire fire barrier assembly.
E. Fire Resistive Joint Assembly: A linear opening between or within wall and floor
assemblies that is filled with materials designed to prevent spread of fire through the
linear opening.
F. F Rating: The time period that a through-penetration firestop limits the spread of fire,
flame, and hot gases through the fire-resistive assembly (including penetrating elements)
when tested in accordance with ASTM E814 or UL 1479. The F rating shall apply to
through-penetration firestops and shall not be less than the required fire-resistive rating of
the assembly penetrated except as specified.
G. T Rating: The time period that a through-penetration firestop limits temperature rise
through the fire-resistive assembly (including penetrating elements) to maximum
250 degrees F plus ambient temperature, when tested in accordance with ASTM E814 or
UL 1479.
704618 Firestopping
28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 0 07 84 00 - 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
1.5 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Provide complete firestopping systems which have been tested and approved by
Underwriters Laboratory Inc. (UL), Factory Mutual system (FM), or other testing agency
acceptable to building official, and that are listed under their label service.
B. Firestopping Materials and Systems:

1. Shall be capable of closing or filling through-penetrations created by the
following:
a. The burning or melting of combustible pipes, cable jacketing, or pipe
insulation materials.
b. Deflection of sheet metal electrical and mechanical duct due to thermal
expansion.
2. Shall be asbestos free, lead free. And shall not incorporate nor require the use of
hazardous solvents.
3. Shall not shrink upon drying as evidenced by cracking or pulling back from
contact surfaces.
4. Shall be moisture resistant and may not dissolve in water after curing.
5. Firestopping Product Outgassing: Firestopping installed within areas of
cleanroom air stream shall conform to the requirements of Section 01 43 45 –
Outgassing Criteria for Clean Zone Products.
C. Construction Gap Firestops: Where movement across gap is anticipated, firestopping

system shall comply with ASTM E119 or UL 2079.
D. Membrane Penetrations: Comply with applicable local building code.
E. Piping Compatibility: Firestopping materials for piping shall be compatible with the pipe
materials and shall not leach contaminates into the conveyed fluid. Firestopping materials
shall be reviewed and approved by pipe supplier.
F. Use approved products of one manufacturer throughout project. At a minimum, use

products from one manufacturer for each firestopping system.
A. Testing Requirements: Testing shall have been conducted or witnessed by an independent

testing agency acceptable to governing authorities.
B. Installer Qualifications: Approved by the system manufacturer, with 3 years documented

experience and approved by UL or FM.
704618 Firestopping
28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 0 07 84 00 - 3
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with local codes and regulations, where such codes and regulations are more
stringent than requirements indicated on the Drawings and specified within this Section.
B. The installer shall provide firestopping and smokestopping design documentation for
code official review of fire-resistance tested assemblies, and manufacturer’s engineering
judgements at non-standard conditions for which no approved tests exist for code official
review.
1.8 MOCK-UPS
A. Provide mock-up representative of finished work. Replace unsatisfactory work as

directed. Approved mock-up will be used as standard for judging acceptability of work
on project. Mock-up, if approved, may be incorporated as part of final construction.
1. Provide mock-up for each firestopping system.
2. Install sample installation in the presence of the materials manufacturer and the
Contractor not less than 1 week in advance of start of work. Coordinate the
timing of this sample installation with the pre-installation meeting.
3. Install mock-up in accordance with the Specifications to be representative of the
installations achieved throughout the project. Mock-up not meeting the
performance requirements shall be removed and replaced with one that does.
4. Installations not comparable to the mock-up will be subject to rejection and shall
be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Prior to start of work, conduct a meeting to verify that the
installation instructions and procedures required are understood by installers. The
following shall attend this meeting:
1. The Contractor.
2. Installers of firestopping.
3. Firestopping material manufacturers’ representatives.
4. CH2M.
5. Representative of authority having jurisdiction.
B. Coordination Meeting: Prior to the start of work which involves cutting penetrations,
conduct a meeting with installers of such work to identify:
1. Fire and smoke barrier assemblies.
2. Required configurations of penetrations.
3. Discuss the proper procedures and time schedule for cutting, patching, and
sealing penetrations in such assemblies with emphasis on avoiding unnecessary
or improper cutting and patching.
4. Review accepted mock-up of installed firestopping as a basis of installation
quality.
704618 Firestopping
28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 0 07 84 00 - 4
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers or packages with the

manufacturer’s name, product identification, lot number, fire test agency label, and
applicable mixing and installation instructions.
B. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Install materials before expiration of material shelf life.
D. Conspicuously mark “rejected” on materials that have been damaged or expired and
remove from site.
1.11 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Perform firestopping work after completion of work, which penetrates fire and smoke
barriers, but prior to covering up or eliminating access to the penetration. Coordinate with
installers of such other work.
B. Apply firestopping materials only when substrate and air temperatures comply with the
manufacturer’s printed instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRESTOPPING
A. Manufacturers:
1. Firestop Materials:
a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc./The Carboline Company.
b. Hilti Incorporated.
c. Nelson Thermal Insulation and Firestopping.
d. The RectorSeal Corporation.
e. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI).
f. 3M Fire Protection Products.
g. Tremco Incorporated.
h. Roxtec Inc.
2. Firestop Backing Materials:
a. Johns Manville, Sound & Fire Block Mineral Wool.
b. Nelson Thermal Insulation and Firestopping.
c. Thermafiber, Inc./ an Owens-Corning Company, Model Thermafiber
Safing.
d. Unifrax Corporation.
e. ROCKWOOL Group.
3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements.
704618 Firestopping
28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 0 07 84 00 - 5
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. General:
1. Firestop materials shall be from a single supplier except where specifically
approved by CH2M.
a. At a minimum, firestopping for a given condition shall be from the same
supplier.
2. The components of each system shall be as tested by the approved testing agency
in the configurations planned for use.
3. Systems shall be designed to resist predictable movement, shall be unaffected by
water or moisture when cured, and, where exposed, shall be resistant to
ultraviolet light and frost.
4. Material exposed to cleanroom environments shall meet specified outgassing test
criteria as required by Section 01 43 45 – Outgassing Criteria for Clean Zone
Products.
B. Mortar Seal (FSM-1):

1. Water-based, nonshrink mortar capable of expanding a minimum of 3 percent by
volume.
a. Density: 35 to 38 pounds per cubic foot.
b. Thickness: As required for specified fire rating but not less than 4 inches.
2. Acceptable products:
a. FS 635; Hilti, Inc.
b. FS Mortar Seal; RectorSeal.
c. 3M Fire Barrier Mortar; 3M Fire Protection Products.
3. Accessory materials:
a. Wall Penetration: On side shuttered, using noncombustible damming
material to be removed after drying.
b. Floor Penetration – Retainers: Galvanized steel securing clips, holding
damming board as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Firestop Backing Material (FSM-2):

1. Mineral wool safing, unfaced, used as a backing material for other firestop
sealant materials.
2. ASTM C665, Type 1.
3. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Johns Manville.
b. Nelson Thermal Insulation and Firestopping.
c. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens-Corning Company.
d. ROCKWOOL Group.
D. Latex Intumescent Sealant (FSM-3):

1. Latex-based, high solids intumescent sealant.
a. FS-One Max; Hilti, Inc.
b. SpecSeal Series SSS sealant; Specified Technologies Inc.
c. 3M Fire Barrier CP WB25+ caulk; 3M Fire Protection Products.
d. Tremstop 1A; Tremco.
704618 Firestopping
28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 0 07 84 00 - 6
E. Intumescent Bands or Wrap (FSM-4):
1. Wrap strip nominal ¼-inch-thick intumescent material faced on one side with
aluminum foil or polyethylene supplied in 2-1/2-inch-wide strips.
a. FS 195+; 3M Fire Protection Products.
b. Tremstop SuperStrip; Tremco.
3. Accessory Materials: Aluminum tape, 28-gauge galvanized steel restricting
collar.
F. Firestop Putty (FSM-5):

1. Moldable putty with one part, intumescent elastomer.
a. CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick; Hilti, Inc.
b. Flamesafe FSP1000 putty stick, Rectorseal.
c. Fire barrier moldable putty; 3M Fire Protection Products.
G. Firestop Caulking (FSM-6):

1. Water-based, single-component, nonintumescent, endothermic caulk.
a. CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant; Hilti, Inc.
b. Fire Barrier Sealant FD 150+ caulk; 3M Fire Protection Products.
c. Tremstop Acrylic; Tremco.
H. Heat Expanding Pillows (FSM-7), not for Clean Zone use:

1. Cloth or polyethylene dust-free bags, filled with a combination of mineral fiber
incombustible components, water insoluble expansion agents, and special fire
retardant additives.
a. Flamesafe Bags; RectorSeal.
b. Fire Barrier Pillow; 3M Fire Protection Products.
3. Accessory Materials: Wall and floor penetrations use wire mesh bolted to one
side of wall or underside of floor.
I. Silicone Firestop Sealant (FSM-9), not for Clean Zone use:

1. Silicone-based, single-component sealant.
a. CFS-S SIL GG; Hilti, Inc.
b. CLK Silicone Sealant; Nelson Thermal Insulation and Firestopping
Products.
c. 3M Fire Barrier 2000+, 1000 NS (non-sag) 1003 SL (self-leveling); 3M
Fire Protection Products.
d. Fyre-Sil; Tremco.
J. Pipe Choke Firestop System (FSM-10):

1. Heavy-gauge metal collar, with highly intumescent material.
a. CP 643 Firestop Collars; Hilti, Inc.
b. PCS, Nelson Thermal Insulation and Firestopping Products.
c. Tremstop MCR; Tremco.
704618 Firestopping
28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 0 07 84 00 - 7
K. Composite Board Firestop (FSM-11):
1. Self-supporting rigid, elastomeric, intumescent sheet for firestopping large
openings.
a. Flamesafe Composite Sheet; Rectorseal.
b. Nelson CPS composite sheet; Nelson Thermal Insulation and
Firestopping Products.
c. 3M Fire Barrier CS-195+ composite sheet; 3M Fire Protection Products.
L. Prefabricated Multi-Cable Firestop (FSM-12):

1. Self-supporting, multi-cable transit, elastomer grooved insert modules with
compression frame for firestopping cable and pipe transit systems.
a. Nelson MCT multi-cable transit, Nelson Thermal Insulation and
Firestopping Products.
b. Roxtec BG product family using Multidiameter cable and pipe sealing
solution.
M. Enclosed Fire-Rated Pathway Device (FSM-13):

1. Data, video, and communications cable bundles shall utilize an enclosed fire
rated pathway device wherever cables penetrate rated walls.
2. Built-in fire sealing system sufficient to maintain the hourly fire rating of the
barrier being penetrated.
3. The self-contained sealing system shall automatically adjust to the installed cable
loading and shall permit cables to be installed, removed, or retrofitted without the
need to adjust, remove or reinstall firestop materials.
4. UL® Classified and FM Systems Approved and tested to the requirements of
ASTM E814 (UL1479).
5. Model: Series 22, 33, or 44 as required to suit application.
6. Acceptable Product: EZ-Path; Specified Technologies, Inc.
N. Spray-Applied Caulk (FSM-14), not for Clean Zone use:

1. Flexible, sprayable, water-based coating.
a. CFS-SP WB Fire Stop Joint Spray; Hilti, Inc.
b. 3M Fire Dam Spray 200; 3M Fire Protection Products.
O. Ceramic Blanket (FSM-15):

1. Nominal 1-1/2 inches thick, 6 pounds per cubic foot density ceramic blanket,
encapsulated within foil-scrim facers.
2. Accessories: 1/2-inch wide by 0.015-inch thick carbon steel banding straps and
pressure-sensitive aluminum foil tape.
a. Fire Master Duct Wrap 615+; 3M Fire Protection Products.
b. FyreWrap Elite 1.5 Duct Insulation; Unifrax Corporation.
P. Putty Pads (FSM-16), not for Clean Zone use:

1. Intumescent putty sheet 6 inches by 7 inches or 7 inches by 7 inches for
installation on back side of electrical boxes.
704618 Firestopping
28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 0 07 84 00 - 8
a. CP 617/617L; Hilti, Inc.
b. FSP 1077 Putty Pads; Rectorseal.
Q. Intumescent Bricks (FSM-17), not for Clean Zone use:

1. Soft, flexible blocks for use in large openings or opening with multiple
penetrations.
a. CFS-BL Fire Block; Hilti, Inc.
b. Fire Barrier Block B258; 3M Fire Protection Products.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify environment and adjacent materials are as required for warrantable installation.
B. Inspect fire and smoke barriers for penetrations and construction gaps. Mark or otherwise
identify penetrations indicating action required, “repair” or “firestopping”.
1. Conduct inspection prior to covering up or enclosing walls or ceilings.
2. Conduct inspection jointly with authorized representative of authority having
jurisdiction.
3. Submit a report detailing findings of inspection to CH2M.
C. Accept openings only if they permit installation of an approved firestop assembly.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Openings for penetrating items shall be cut or pre-formed in accordance with the firestop
assembly shop drawing.
B. Clean, prime, or otherwise prepare openings as required by the firestop manufacturer.
C. The following will require prior consultation and submittal documentation with the
manufacturer:
1. Single penetrant openings for insulated or combustible penetrants that are more
than 1 inch larger than the outside diameter of the penetrant.
2. Sleeves which are not flush with the finish surface of the construction.
3. Blockouts larger than 36 inches by 36 inches.
4. Multiple penetrant openings for insulated or nonmetallic penetrants.
5. Penetrations which are not clearly covered by available approved details.
D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. Use
masking tape where required to prevent contact of firestopping materials with adjoining
surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods required to remove smears. Remove tape immediately after
installation without disrupting firestopping system.
704618 Firestopping
28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 0 07 84 00 - 9
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and the conditions of the
testing; provide accessory materials required.
B. Coordinate formwork, pipe sleeves, embeds and coring requirements with the Work of
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete, Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board
Assemblies and Section 40 05 15 – Piping Services.
C. Remove combustible forming materials unless they are a required component of the
tested assembly.
D. Through-Penetrations:
1. Inspect installation including firestopping materials and any damming or support
materials to verify integrity of installation.
2. Where system design permits, remove damming or support materials after
firestopping materials have fully cured. Remove and dispose of any combustible
damming material.
3. Install covering materials or finish as per design requirements and manufacturer’s
instructions.
4. Inspect firestopping for proper installation, drying, curing, and adhesion as
appropriate for the materials and systems being used. Where necessary, repairs
shall be made and the repaired installation shall be reinspected.
E. Construction Gap Firestops:

1. Conform to requirements of tested system to be duplicated.
2. Size firestop backing material (FSM-2) strips 1/2 to 3/4 inch greater than the
measured width of void or cavity.
3. Impale steel-securing clips in safing approximately midway between top and
bottom surface, approximately 8 inches in from each end.
4. Push insulation strips into the void or cavity until the securing clips are in contact
with the top of floor slab. Top of insulation shall be recessed below floor level
thickness of fire sealant.
5. Overlap and but tightly all end joints.
6. Seal holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective smoke barrier.
F. Ceramic Blanket (FSM-15):

1. Install blanket in number of layers required to meet fire rating and in accordance
with UL product approval instructions, as accepted by the AHJ.
2. Overlap edges minimum 3 inches and seal laps and cut edges with pressure-
sensitive tape.
3. Support blanket with steel bands in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.4 PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION OF PENETRATIONS
A. Mark each fire and smoke barrier above lay-in ceilings with phrase “Fire and/or smoke
barrier – protect all openings” identifying it as a fire or smoke barrier at intervals required
by authorities having jurisdiction but not less than 30 feet. Use red letters at least 3 inches
high.
704618 Firestopping
28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 0 07 84 00 - 10
B. Label each firestop assembly with red, permanent marking using the words “Fire
assembly; do not disturb. See maintenance instructions.” Include the following on each
label:
1. System manufacturer.
2. System rating.
3. UL system approval number.
4. Name and phone number of system supplier.
5. System installer and installation date.
6. Inspection date and inspector.
C. AMC producing materials and activities must be approved by the AMC Controller prior
to construction start. Conform to the requirements in Section 01 43 45 – Outgassing
Criteria for Clean Zone Products to create a plan for material use.
1. The AMC Controller may require limited or restricted use of material in specific
areas, additional ventilation, application of filters, use of fans and enclosures,
and/or other mitigation techniques.
2. Engage the AMC Controller early in construction planning to mitigate delays.
A. Inspect complete installations for completeness and correct installation.

1. If installed work is to be covered in completed work, request inspection and
obtain approval prior to covering.
2. Obtain the approval of the authority having jurisdiction.
3. Bid shall allow for repair of destructive testing of 5 percent of installed firestops.
If destructive tests indicate incomplete or defective installation, further testing
and repair will be required at no expense to the Owner. If a majority of those
tested do not comply, all firestops shall be removed and replaced.
4. Submit report of inspection to CH2M.
3.6 REPAIRS AND MODIFICATIONS
A. Identify damaged, improperly installed or reentered seals for repair or modification.
B. Modifications to penetrations shall be accomplished as per the firestop manufacturer’s

recommendations.
C. Only materials used in the original seal and designated by the manufacturer as suitable
for a specific repair shall be used for this purpose.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean excess material from adjacent surfaces promptly. Use methods and materials
approved by the manufacturers of the penetration seals and of surfaces to be cleaned.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed work during curing period.
704618 Firestopping
28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 0 07 84 00 - 11
B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage or discoloration during installation.
C. Protect Work of this Section throughout the construction period so that each firestopping
assembly is without damage at Substantial Completion.
704618 Firestopping
28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 0 07 84 00 - 12
WITH BID
07 84 00-01 Product Data: Per construction schedule.
 SDS sheets and product literature.
 Standard details.
 Installation instructions for fire-rated
firestop assemblies.
 Coordinate product data with material
designations (FSM-XX) provided in this
Section.
07 84 00-02 Shop Drawings: Detail drawings for Per construction schedule.
firestopping applications. Shop drawings shall
give pertinent information of installation
method proposed, together with required
dimensions for the proper fitting around other
work and materials, together with special
conditions as may be required for complete
installation.
07 84 00-03 Approved Installer: Provide document from Per construction schedule.
manufacturer that recognizes the installer as
qualified and approved to install the
manufacturers firestopping materials
07 84 00-04 Documents: Per construction schedule.
 A schedule that indicates the system to
be utilized for each different application.
 Documentation of UL classification
certification acceptable to local
jurisdiction.
 Manufacturer’s engineering and building
official approval for nonstandard firestop
applications for which there is no tested,
rated system. Documentation to include
detail drawings and pertinent information
required for a complete installation.
 Final inspection reports.
704618 Firestopping
28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 0 07 84 00 - 13
WITH BID
07 84 00-05 Documents: Per construction schedule.
 Material as listed above.
 Additional documentation requested by
local officials.
 Maintenance Data: Include detailed
instructions for repair and for
modification due to changes in
penetrating items.
07 84 00-06 Deferred Submittal to AHJ: Per construction schedule.
Provide A/E and Owner copy of deferred
submittals provided to the AHJ. Deferred
submittals are defined as as-built information
and documentation required by the local
jurisdiction to insure installed firestopping
Work matches the proposed firestopping
assemblies submitted prior to the Work
occurring on the Project
END OF SECTION
704618 Firestopping
28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 0 07 84 00 - 14
SECTION 07 90 00
JOINT PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes sealants and joint backing, precompressed foam sealers, and accessories.
1. Section 07 13 00 – Sheet Waterproofing: Sealants required in conjunction with
waterproofing.
2. Section 07 26 00 – Vapor Retarders: Sealants required in conjunction with vapor
retarders.
3. Section 07 27 00 – Air Barriers: Sealants required in conjunction with air
barriers:
4. Section 07 53 00 – Elastomeric Membrane Roofing – Fully Adhered: Sealants
required in conjunction with roofing.
5. Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping: Firestopping sealants.
6. Section 08 41 13 – Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts: Weatherseal
sealants and accessories.
7. Section 08 44 13 – Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall: Weather sealants and
accessories.
8. Section 08 80 00 – Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories.
9. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic sealant.
10. Section 09 30 00 – Tile: Sealant used as tile grout.
11. Section 09 58 13 – Cleanroom Gasketed Ceiling System: Sealant at module
joints.
12. Section 09 67 24 – Chemical-Resistant Resinous Flooring: Chemical-resistant
CRF sealant for substrate joints and base of wall coving.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):

1. AAMA 800: Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants.
B. ASTM International:
1. ASTM C834 – Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.
2. ASTM C919 – Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.
3. ASTM C920 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
4. ASTM C1021 – Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in the Testing of
Building Sealants.
5. ASTM C1193 – Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
6. ASTM C1247 – Standard Test Method for Durability of Sealants Exposed to
Continuous Immersion in Liquids.
704618 Joint Protection

14 MARCH – Rev. 2 07 90 00- 1
7. ASTM C1382 - Standard Test Method for Determining Tensile Adhesion
Properties of Sealants When Used in Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems
(EIFS) Joints.
8. ASTM C1472 – Standard Guide for Calculating Movement and Other Effects
When Establishing Sealant Joint Width.
9. ASTM D1056 – Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials – Sponge
or Expanded Rubber.
10. ASTM D1667 – Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials – Vinyl
Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed-Cell Foam).
11. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer
Hardness.
12. ASTM D2628 – Standard Specification for Preformed Polychloroprene
Elastomeric Joint Seals for Concrete Pavements.
12.13. ASTM D3575 - Standard Test Methods for Flexible Cellular Materials Made
From Olefin Polymers.
C. Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute (SWRI) – Validated Training Program.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Provide 5-year warranty.
B. Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories fail to achieve airtight
and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion of cohesion, or do not cure.
A. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct
the testing indicated.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide exterior joint sealant by a single manufacturer

responsible for testing of Project substrates to verify compatibility and adhesion of joint
sealants.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section

with minimum 3 years’ documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with:

1. Minimum 3 years’ documented experience.
2. Manufacturer approval.
3. SWRI Validated Training Program certification.

14 MARCH – Rev. 2 07 90 00- 2
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store primers and sealants in dry location with ambient temperature range of 60 to 80
degrees Fahrenheit.
1.8 MOCKUP
A. Construct mockup of sealant joints in conjunction with window, wall, ceiling and other
applicable mockups specified in other sections.
B. Construct mockup with specified sealant types and with other components noted.
1. Determine preparation and priming requirements based on manufacturers
recommendations; take action necessary for correction of failure of sealant tests
on mock-up.
2. Verify sealants, primers, and other components do not stain adjacent materials.
C. Locate where directed by CH2M and Owner.
D. Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work.
A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by sealant manufacturer during and

after installation.
B. Ventilate installation of solvent curing sealants in enclosed spaces.
C. Do not install joint protection if joint dimensions are less than or greater than
manufacturer recommendations. Notify CH2M and obtain joint protection manufacturer
recommendations for alternative procedures.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work with Sections referencing this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 JOINT SEALERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. 3M
2. ASTC Polymers, Inc.
2.3. Bostik, Inc.
3.4. Chem Link Inc.
4.5. DAP Products, Inc.
5.6. Dow Corning Corporation.
6.7. Emseal Joint System LTD.
7.8. ExxonMobil Corporation.

14 MARCH – Rev. 2 07 90 00- 3
8.9. Momentive Performance Materials Inc. (GE Sealants).
9.10. Pecora Corporation.
10.11. Pres-On Corporation
11.12. Rogers Corporation
12.13. Saint-Gobain Group
13.14. Scapa Group plc
14.15. Sekisui Chemical Co., LTD.
15.16. Sika Corporation.
16.17. Tremco Incorporated, Commercial Sealants and Waterproofing (CS&W).
B. Sealants:
1. S-1, Acrylic Emulsion Latex (1-part Non-Sag Interior General Purpose); ASTM
C834, Type OP, Grade NS, paintable, not for Clean Zone use.
a. Acceptable Products:
1) DAP: Dynaflex 230.
2) Pecora: AC-20+Silicone.
3) Tremco: Tremflex 834
2. S-3, Butyl Rubber Sealant (1-part Non-Sag); ASTM C1311; Use for secondary
glazing seal, metal panel joining, curtainwall joints, bedding thresholds, seals at
Neoprene and EPDM gaskets and sealing dissimilar materials; VOC ≤250 g/L,
color black; not for Clean Zone use.
1) Pecora: BC-158.
2) Tremco: Butyl Sealant.
b. Interior Sealants and Sealant Primers: Maximum volatile organic
compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1168.
3. S-5, Polysulfide Sealant (2-part Non-Sag; Continuous Immersion); ASTM C920,
Type M, Grade NS, Class 25; Use NT, T, M, G, A; ASTM C1247; color dark
gray; reference chemical resistance chart for exposure. Not for Clean Zone use.
a. Acceptable Product:
1) Pecora: Synthacalk GC2.
4. S-6NS, Polyurethane Sealant (1-part Non-Sag); ASTM C920 Type S, Grade NS,
Class 50; chemical curing. Not for Clean Zone use.
1) Bostik: Chem Calk 900; Class 25; Use NT, M, A.
2) Bostik: Chem Calk 915; Class 25, Use NT, M, A.
3) Pecora: DynaTrol I-XL; Use NT, M, A, G.
4) Sika Sikaflex: 1A; Class 35, Use T, NT, G, M, A.
5) Tremco: Dymonic 100 (suitable for water immersion); Use NT,
T, M, A, O.
5. S-6SL, Polyurethane Sealant (1-part Self-Leveling); ASTM C920 Type S, Grade
P. Not for Clean Zone use.
1) Bostik: Chem Calk 955-SL; Class 35, Use T, NT, M, A.

14 MARCH – Rev. 2 07 90 00- 4
2) Pecora: NR-201 STPU; Class 25, Use M, A, O.
3) Pecora: Urexpan NR-201; Use T, M, A, O.
4) Tremco: Vulkem 45SSL; Use T, M, A, O.
6. S7-NS, Polyurethane Sealant (2-part Non-Sag): ASTM C920 Type M, Grade NS;
chemical-curing. Not for Clean Zone use.
1) Pecora: DynaFlex (tamper-resistant security sealant); Use T, M,
O; ASTM C1247 continuous water immersion.
2) Pecora: DynaTrol II; Class 25, Use NT, G, M, A, O.
3) Tremco: Dymeric 240FC; Class 50, Use T, NT, M, A, O
(granite).
7. S-7SL, Polyurethane Sealant (2-part Self-Leveling); ASTM C920 Type M, Grade
P; Class 25. Not for Clean Zone use.
1) Pecora: DyaTrol II-SG; Use T.
2) Tremco: Dymeric THC-900/901; Use T, M, A, O.
8. S-8, Silicone Sealant (1-part Non-Sag Exterior): ASTM C920 Type S, Grade NS;
self-priming; neutral-cure.
1) Dow Corning: 790 Silicone Building Sealant; Class 100/50, Use
T, NT, G, M, A O (high movement); ASTM C1135; ASTM
E119, UL263 for UL wall/floor listings; 20-year limited
warranty; color variety.
2) Dow Corning: 795 Silicone Building Sealant; Class 50, Use NT,
G, A O (structural and non-structural glazing); ASTM C1135;
color variety.
3) Dow Corning: 995 Silicone Structural Adhesive; Class 25, Use
NT, G A (structural adhesion at factory or field); ASTM C1135;
20-year warranty; color black.
4) GE Momentive Performance Materials: SCS2000 Silpruf
Silicone Sealant and Adhesive; Class 50, Use G, M, A, O
(structural and non-structural glazing); ASTM C1135; color
variety.
5) GE Momentive Performance Materials: SCS9000 Silpruf NB
Non-Staining Silicone Weatherproofing Sealant; Class 50, Use
G, M, A, O (reduce tendency to attract airborne contaminants);
color variety.
6) Pecora: 864 NST Non-Staining Low Modulus Silicone Sealant;
Class 50, Use G, M, A, O.
7) Pecora: 890 NST Non-Staining Ultra-Low Modulus Silicone
Sealant; Class 100, Use G, M, A, O.

14 MARCH – Rev. 2 07 90 00- 5
8) Pecora: 895 NST Structural Silicone Glazing & Weatherproofing
Sealant; Class 50, Use G, M, A, O.
9) Tremco: Spectrem 1 Low Modulus Silicone Joint Sealant;
moisture-cure; Class 100/50, Use NT, G, M, A, O; ASTM
C1382; color variety.
10) Tremco: Spectrem 2 High-Performance Silicone Sealant; Class
50, Use NT, G, M, A, O; color variety.
9. S-9NS, Silicone Sealant (1-part Non-Sag Interior); acetoxy-cure; ASTM G21
mildew-resistant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. Not for Clean Zone
use.
1) Dow Corning: 732; Multi-Purpose.
2) Dow Corning: 736; Heat-Resistant; color red.
3) Dow Corning: 786; Use NT.
4) Dow Corning: 999-A; Use NT, G and A (non-structural; no
water immersion).
5) GE Momentive Performance Materials: SCS1700 Sanitary; Use
NT, G, A, O.
6) Tremco: Tremsil 200; Use NT, G, A, O.
10. S-9SL, Silicone Sealant (1-part Self-Leveling); acetoxy-cure; ASTM C920. Not
for Clean Zone use.
1) Dow Corning: 734.
11. S-11, Polyether Sealant (1-part Non-Sag Clean Zone); ASTM C920 Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, Use T, NT, G, M, A, O; 100 percent solids, moisture-cure;
paintable.
1) ChemLink: M-1 Structural Adhesive/Sealant (M-1 CR is not
approved).
12. S-12, Polyether Sealant (1-part Non-Sag); ASTM C920 Type S, Grade NS, Class
50, Use T, NT, G, M, A, O; paintable. Not for Clean Zone use.
1) ChemLink: DuraLink Super Adhesion Sealant.
13. S-13, Polyurea Selant (2 part self-leveling); ASTM C920 Type M, Grade P,
Class 12.5, Use T, M; not paintable. Acceptable for Clean Zone use.
a. Acceptable Product:
1) ASTC Polymers: 3003C PenJoint.
2.2 FOAM SEALANT
A. S-20, Polyurethane Expandable Foam Sealant; airtight and water-resistant seal; paintable.
Not for Clean Zone use.

14 MARCH – Rev. 2 07 90 00- 6
a. American Polywater Corporation: FST -250 Foam Sealant and
accessories.
b. Dow Chemical: Great Stuff Big Gap Filler.
c. Tremco: ExoAir Flex Foam.
2.3 TAPE AND GASKET SEALANTS
A. T-1C, Polyethylene (PE) and Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE) foam gasket tapes;
density and thickness vary, roll and sheets. For Clean Zone use.
a. PresOn: PF1600 PE foam tape; white; rubber pressure-sensitive adhesive
(PSA).
b. Scapa: PE No. 3824; white; rubber PSA.
c. Sekisui: Voltek, Volara LDPE, white or black.
d. Volara Equivalents:
1) Alveolit® in Europe and Softlon® in Japan, LDPE; white or
black.
B. T-2C, Microcellular Urethane Gasket and Tape Sealant; colors black or grey; pressure-
sensitive adhesive. For Clean Zone use.
a. Rogers Corporation: PORON® 4701-40, 4701-41.
b. Rogers Corporation: PORON® Foam Tape.
C. T-3C, Thermoplastic Elastomer (TPE); color off-white. For Clean Zone use.
a. ExxonMobil Corporation: Santoprene.
D. T-4, Polyurethane Foam Sealant: UV and mildew-resistant pre-compressed foam sealant;

pressure sensitive adhesive; color black or gray. Not for Clean Zone use.
a. EMseal: Backerseal (Greyflex).
b. Tremco: illmode 600.
E. T-5, Polyvinyl Chloride Foam Tape: Preformed foam gasketing; pressure-sensitive

adhesive; colors black or gray. Not for Clean Zone use.
a. 3M: Single-Side Foam Tapes.
b. Saint-Gobain: Norseal N740 Series.
F. T-6, Preformed Silicone Joint Sealant: Highly flexible low-modulus material for
flashings and transitions bonded with a neutral-curing silicone sealant; ASTM D2240
durometer Shore A 25 minimum. Not for Clean Zone use.
a. Dow: 123 Silicone Seal; extruded sheet in 1 to 6 inch (25 to 153 mm)
widths.
b. Dow: 123 Silicone Seal Custom Designs HC; preformed and custom-
fabricated for repair or failed joints; shape approved for specific
application to prevent air and water penetration.

14 MARCH – Rev. 2 07 90 00- 7
G. T-7, Butyl Tape Sealant: AAMA 800; preformed buytl glazing tape, black. Not for Clean
Zone use.
a. Pecora: Extru-Seal.
b. Tremco: POLYshim II Tape or 400 Tape.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

1. Interior Sealants and Sealant Primers: Maximum volatile organic compound
content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1168.
B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant

manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.
C. Joint Backing:
1. Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D1667, closed cell PVC;
oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
2. Floor Opening Filler Plank: Closed cell polyethylene foam plank, 1 1/2 inches
thick, 2.2 pounds per cubic foot density per ASTM D3575, suffix W, method B.
C.a. Acceptable Product: Dow Ethafoam 220 polyethylene foam plank.
D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit

application.
E. Masking Tape: Nonabsorbent, nonstaining.
F. Tooling Agents: Approved by sealant manufacturer; non-staining to sealant and substrate.
F.G. Debris Netting: Woven polyethylene fabric as supplied by Guardian Fall Protection.
Acceptable product, Pro-Knit Debris Netting, product number 70008.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings and conform to manufacturer

recommendations.
B. Verify substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work.
C. Verify substrates, joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts substrate conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter impairing adhesion of sealant.

14 MARCH – Rev. 2 07 90 00- 8
B. Clean and prime joints.
C. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
D. Protect elements surrounding Work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193, C1472 and manufacturer

instructions.
B. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck
dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by ASTM C1472 and manufacturer.
C. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult

manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
F. Tool joints concave or as detailed in the Drawings.
G. Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and
intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) below adjoining surface.
H. Compression Gaskets: Avoid joints except at ends, corners, and intersections; seal joints
with adhesive; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) below adjoining surface.
3.4 FLOOR OPENING FILLER
A. Cover opening with debris netting, cutting around penetrating items. Capture in place
with metal framework over opening, which is installed around penetrating items.
B. Fasten metal frame and welded wire mesh, cut around penetrating items, to concrete floor
surface through debris netting on S-11 sealant.
C. Cut pop out polyethylene plank to fill metal frame and around penetrating items. Place in
metal frame.
D. Cover polyethylene plank with properly mixed S-13 sealant, 1/2 inch nominal depth.
Install S-13 sealant per manufacturers recommendations around penetrating items.
E. Allow S-13 sealant to cure completely.

14 MARCH – Rev. 2 07 90 00- 9
3.43.5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint
sealants and of products in which joints occur.
B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
3.53.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Protect sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion.
B. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair
damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas
are indistinguishable from original work.
C. Ensure joint protection is cured before covering with other materials.

14 MARCH – Rev. 2 07 90 00- 10
3.63.7 SCHEDULE
A. Install sealants suitable for application and color selected by A/E or match adjacent
material.
SEALANT LOCATION Type (NS UNLESS NOTED)
Clean Zone Gaskets (RAH to concrete floor, wall, ceiling, etc.) T-1C, T-2C, T-3C
Cleanroom Wall and Door Gaskets T-1C (PE1600); T-3C at B/C tool
seal
Clean Zone and Cleanroom including interstitial areas, plenums, S-11
MAH, RAH, Clean SUBFAB and Fan Attic/Decks
Clean Zone: HEPA/ULPA filters S-1 (DAP 230), S-9NS (Dow
732), S-9SL
Concrete Floor Slabs and Parking Decks S-6SL, S-7SL
Water Immersion (cooling towers, storage tanks, WWT) S-5, S-7
Precast and Pre-stressed Concrete Floor Panels S-5, S-7
Concrete Walls S-5, S-6NS, S-7NS, S-11
Precast Concrete Wall Panels S-5, S-6NS, S-7NS, S-8, S-11, T-
4, T-5
Masonry Walls S-6NS, S-7NS, S-8, S-11
Ceramic Tile Floors S-8, S-9NS
Metal Curtainwall Systems S-3, S-6NS, S-7NS, S-8, S-12, T-
4/5/6/7
Repair Construction Joints and Glazing T-6
Nonstructural and Structural Glazing S-8, T-7
Metal Panels Lap Sealant T-7
Metal Door, Window, and Louver Frames: S-1, S-6NS, S-7NS, T-5
Exterior Joints S-6, S-7, S-8, S-11
Interior General Purpose S-1, S-3, S-11
Interior and Exterior Wall Penetrations S-5, S-6NS, S-7NS, S-8, S-12, S-
20
Floor Penetrations S-5, S-6, S-7
Ceiling and Roof Penetrations S-3, S-6, S-7, S-8, S-11
Sheet Metal Flashings S-3, S-6, S-7, S-8, S-9NS, S-11,
T-7
Sheet Metal Roofing and Siding S-6, S-7, S-8, S-11, T-7
Threshold Sealant Bed S-3, S-6
Countertop and Backsplash Joints S-9
Plumbing Fixtures S-9
Non-Fire Rated Pipe and Conduit Penetrations S-6, S-7, S-8, S-20
Concrete Form Snap-Tie Holes S-6, S-7, S-8

14 MARCH – Rev. 2 07 90 00- 11
3.73.8 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
WITH BID
07 90 00-01 Qualifications: Submit a letter of qualification X
outlining compliance with Article 1.7
requirements.
07 90 00-02 Products Data: Per construction schedule
Submit data indicating Manufacturer and
product name, type of substrate material,
sealant chemical characteristics, performance
criteria, substrate preparation, and limitations
07 90 00-03 Submit samples for Initial Selection: Per construction schedule
Manufacturer's color charts consisting of
strips of cured sealants showing the full range
of colors available for each product exposed
to view.
07 90 00-04 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Per construction schedule
Submit special procedures, surface
preparation, and perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
07 90 00-05 Closeout Submittal - Warranty: Provide With record documents
executed warranty fulfilling requirements of
Part 1 Article, Warranty.
07 90 00-06 Closeout Submittal - Operation and With record documents
Maintenance Data: Submit description of
adhesive and sealant products, along with
typical installation locations.
END OF SECTION

14 MARCH – Rev. 2 07 90 00- 12
SECTION 08 31 13
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes fire resistive-rated and non-rated access doors and panels with frames
for wall and ceiling applications.
1. Provide for access to controls, valves, traps, dampers, cleanouts, and similar
items requiring operation behind inaccessible finished surfaces.
2. Coordinate exact locations and sizes with various trades to assure proper
placement of access doors and panels.
1. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of access frame unit
anchors in concrete.
3. Section 09 91 26 – Painting – Building: Field paint finish.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International:
1. ASTM E119 – Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction
and Materials.
B. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed):

1. WH – Certification Listings.
C. National Fire Protection Association:

1. NFPA 80 – Standard for Fire Doors, Fire Windows.
D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:

1. UL – Building Materials Directory.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
A. Fire Resistance Ratings: Where indicated as fire rated, provide assemblies from
manufacturers listed in UL Directory or Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey
Listed) Directory.
704618 Access Doors and Frames

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 0 08 31 13 - 1
B. Fire-Rated Horizontal Access Doors: Rating as indicated on Drawings.
1. Tested Rating: Determined in accordance with ASTM E119.
C. Attach label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each fire-
rated access door.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified with minimum

three years documented experience.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work with process, mechanical, electrical, and communication network

scopes requiring access to controls, valves, traps, dampers, cleanouts, and similar items
requiring operation being located behind finished surfaces.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
A. Manufacturers:
1. J. L. Industries, Activar Construction Products Group:
a. Non rated wall or ceiling: Model TM.
b. Fire rated wall or ceiling: Model FD.
2. Karp Associates, Inc.:
a. Non rated wall or ceiling: Model DSC-214M.
b. Fire rated wall or ceiling: KRP-150FR.
3. Milcor,, Hart & Cooley Inc.:
a. Non rated wall or ceiling: Model M.
b. Fire rated wall or ceiling: Model UFR.
4. Nystrom Building Products Co.:
a. Non rated wall or ceiling: Model NT/NW/NP.
b. Fire rated wall or ceiling: Model IT/IW/IP.
5. Substitutions considered with submitted as required by Section 01 60 00 –
Product Requirements.
B. Flush Framed Access Doors:

1. Non-rated: Frames and nominal 1-inch wide exposed flanges of 16-gauge steel
and door panels of 14-gauge steel.
2. Fire rated: Frames and nominal 1-inch wide exposed flanges of 16-gauge steel
and door panels 20-gauge steel inner and outer sheets with mineral fiber fill.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate units of continuous welded construction; weld, fill, and grind joints to assure
flush and square unit.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 0 08 31 13 - 2
B. Wall and Ceiling Access Door and Panel Hardware:
1. Hinge: Standard continuous or concealed spring pin type, 175-degree steel
hinges.
2. Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam lock.
C. Size Variations: Obtain acceptance of manufacturer’s standard size units by concealed

equipment owner to provide proper access to concealed equipment.
2.3 SHOP FINISHING
A. Base Metal Protection: Prime coat units with baked on primer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify rough openings for access doors and panels are correctly sized and located.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Secure frames rigidly in place, plumb and level in opening, with plane of door and panel
face aligned with adjacent finished surfaces.
1. Set concealed frame type units flush with adjacent finished surfaces.
B. Position unit to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access.
C. Install fire-rated units in accordance with NFPA 80 and requirements for fire listing.

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 0 08 31 13 - 3
WITH BID
08 31 13-01 Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of Per construction schedule
access door units.
08 31 13-02 Product Data: Submit literature indicating Per construction schedule
sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled
locations, fire resistance listings, and details
of adjoining Work.
08 31 13-03 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Per construction schedule
Submit installation requirements and rough-in
dimensions.
08 31 13-04 Qualifications: Manufacturer: Company X
specializing in manufacturing products
specified with minimum 3 years’ documented
experience.
08 31 13-05 Closeout Documents: Operation and With record documents
Maintenance Data: Submit description of
system, inspection data, and parts lists.
08 31 13-06 Closeout Documents: Project Record With record documents
Documents: Record actual locations of access
units.
END OF SECTION

28 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 0 08 31 13 - 4
SECTION 26 05 01
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements specifically applicable to Division 26.
B. Work Specifically Excluded from Project:

1. Power company metering facilities.
C. Contractor’s Responsibilities:
1. Complete systems in accordance with the intent of these Contract Documents.
2. Coordinate details of facility equipment and construction for specification
divisions that affect work covered under this Division.
3. Furnish and install incidental items not actually shown or specified, but that are
required by good practice to provide complete functional systems.
4. Equipment and systems to meet project seismic requirements.
D. Intent of Drawings:
1. Electrical plan drawings show general locations of equipment, devices, raceways,
and cable trays unless specifically dimensioned.
2. Contractor: Responsible for proper routing of raceway and cable tray, subject to
prior review by CH2M.
3. Perform the following in addition to what is indicated on the Drawings and
specifications. Submit to CH2M for review:
a. Design, furnish, and install seismic supports, anchors, and bracing for
electrical equipment based on indicated project seismic requirements.
b. Size pull and junction boxes not shown or sized on the Drawings.
c. Route raceways, coordinating with other contractors. Determine raceway
highways in addition to those indicated on plans.
d. Increase raceway sizes as needed based upon actual wire size.
e. Develop installation details based upon the Drawings and Specifications.
f. Route and size grounding system based upon Drawings and
Specifications. Include bonding jumpers and grounding electrode
conductors to separately derived sources and service entrances.
g. Develop wiring and control diagrams based upon supplier drawings to
supplement those shown on the Drawings.
h. Develop electrical equipment front elevations and footprint dimensions
for layout, purchase, and installation.
i. Lay out electrical distribution equipment per National Electrical Code
(NEC) required clearances.
704618 26 05 01
19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 Basic Electrical Requirements - 1
1.2 REFERENCES

1. Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ)
2. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA)
3. National Electrical Code (NEC)
4. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)
5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
7. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
8. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Equipment and Devices Installed Outdoors or in Unheated Enclosures: Capable of

continuous operation within an ambient temperature of 23 to 94 degrees F, relative
humidity of zero to 95 percent.
B. Compliance by Contractor with provisions of this Section does not relieve the Contractor
of the responsibilities of furnishing equipment and materials of proper design,
mechanically and electrically suited to meet operating guarantees at specified service
conditions.
C. Electrical Components and Systems Manufactured within the Scope of Underwriters

Laboratories Inc. (UL): Conform to UL standards, provide UL listing, and label with an
applied UL listing mark. Alternate third-party listing by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory is acceptable.
D. Equipment: Meet applicable requirements of Factory Mutual.
E. Indoor Dry Areas: Use National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1

enclosures for electrical equipment and devices in these areas unless otherwise indicated.
F. Outdoor and Wet Areas: Use NEMA 3R enclosures for electrical equipment and devices
in these areas unless otherwise indicated.
G. Corrosive Areas: Designated on the Drawings. Provide raceways, elbows, fittings,

couplings, junction boxes, and pull boxes of materials specified hereafter. Use NEMA 4X
enclosures for electrical equipment and devices in these areas. Provide other devices and
materials labeled as suitable for installation in corrosive environment.
H. Hazardous Areas: Designated on the Drawings. Provide devices, materials, and

equipment for installation in hazardous areas that are specifically approved for
installation in hazardous areas of class, division, and group indicated and are of
construction that ensures safe performance under conditions of proper use and
maintenance.
I. Close unused holes in boxes, equipment, and raceway.
704618 26 05 01
J. Remove abandoned outlets, cables, and conductors.
A. Conform to latest codes and other legal requirements.
B. Obtain permits and arrange inspections required by codes applicable to this Division.
Submit written evidence to CH2M that required permits, inspections, and code
requirements have been secured.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements
for this Section.
A. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association

(NFPA) 70 NEC, as applicable. Where required by authority having jurisdiction (AHJ),
material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, in order to provide a basis for
approval under the above listed agency.
B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by UL

shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark or label or a
label from a Nationally Recognized Testing Agency.
C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of
hazardous area indicated.
D. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment,
or application, especially when used in extreme climate areas.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials and Equipment: Labeled and/or listed as acceptable to AHJ as suitable for
intended use. intended.
B. Where two or more units of the same class of material are required, provide products of a
single manufacturer. Component parts of materials or equipment need not be products of
the same manufacturer.
704618 26 05 01
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP
A. Install work using procedures defined in National Electrical Contractors Association

(NECA) Standard of Installation.
B. Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide

calibrated torque wrenches and screwdrivers as required.
3.2 SERVICE CONTINUITY
A. Maintain continuity of electric service to functioning portions of processes or buildings

during hours of normal use.
B. Arrange temporary outages for cutover work with Owner. Keep outages to a minimum
number and minimum length of time.
3.3 TOUCH-UP PAINTING
A. Repair damage to factory-applied paint finishes with touch-up paint.
B. Use touch-up paint and methods of preparation and application recommended by

manufacturer of components to be repaired.
3.4 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING
A. Temporary Power:
1. Provide 480/277 volt and/or 120/208 volt temporary power in areas of Work as
required for the performance of the Work by all Divisions of the specifications.
2. Provide fused switch distribution panels, circuit breaker panels, dry type
transformers, fused switches, power outlets, receptacles, and associated wiring as
required to complete the temporary system Work.
3. Energize heaters furnished with all new electrical equipment, such as outdoor
switchgear, motor control centers, switchboards, medium voltage motors, etc., at
rated voltage using the temporary power source for the entire time from when the
equipment is received until it is permanently energized. Provide all connections
for these heaters, in accordance with manufacturer's shop drawings.
B. Temporary Lighting:
1. For temporary 120 volt lighting, provide weatherproof, medium base lamp
sockets with lamp guards. Maintain temporary lighting at all times to conform
with the rules and regulations set forth in the Federal Register (Occupational
Safety and Health Administration - OSHA) covering safety and health
regulations for construction.
2. Provide 300 watt lamps at each stairwell and elevator shaft landing.
3. Do not remove the temporary lighting until permission is granted by the Owner.
704618 26 05 01
3.5 STARTUP TESTING AND INSPECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Voltage: At project completion,

1. Check voltage at termination point of power supply system to project.
2. Check true rms voltage magnitude and balance between phases for loaded and
unloaded conditions.
3. Adjust taps of transformers such that no load voltage is approximately equal to or
up to 3 percent above normal.
B. Provide testing according to the requirements of the International Electrical Testing

Association (NETA) and equipment manufacturer’s recommendations. Include optional
items listed in NETA for the applicable equipment.
1. Testing Company:
a. Provide equipment and technical personnel to perform tests and
inspections.
b. When tests and inspections have been completed, attach a label to
devices tested. Include the following information on the label:
1) Name of testing company.
2) Date tests were completed.
3) Initials of Engineer who performed the tests.
2. Contractor:
a. Furnish the following to the testing organization:
1) Personnel necessary to assist in testing and inspection.
2) Complete set of plans and specifications prior to the
commencement of testing.
3) Applicable drawings and instruction manuals.
4) Itemized description of equipment to be inspected and tested.
5) Test control power necessary to perform tests.
6) Notification of when equipment and systems are ready for
testing.
7) Site-specific hazard notification and safety training.
b. Correct deficiencies noted by the testing organization.
c. Perform low-voltage insulation-resistance, continuity, and low-voltage
motor rotation tests.
d. Adjust motor circuit protectors per manufacturer’s guidelines.
3. Set protective devices per CH2M will perform short-circuit analysis and
coordination study., and will provide protective device settings.
4. The tests shall ensure that the equipment is operational and functioning within
industry standards and manufacturer’s tolerances.
704618 26 05 01
WITH BID
26 05 01-01 Resumes of key Contractor personnel for X

design-build
26 05 01-02 Individual price and delivery schedule for Per construction schedule
equipment
26 05 01-03 Length of time required for certification of X
information, drawings, etc.
26 05 01-04 Inspection and permit certificates and Per construction schedule
certificates of final inspection and acceptance
from authority having jurisdiction
26 05 01-05 Test reports Per construction schedule
END OF SECTION
704618 26 05 01
SECTION 26 05 05
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install the following basic
electrical materials and associated methods:
1. Fuses.
2. Boxes and Condulets.
3. Hinged cover enclosures.
4. Cabinets.
5. Contactors.
6. Control relays.
7. Push buttons, indicating lights, and selector switches.
8. Terminal blocks and accessories.
9. Power system monitoring.
10. Penetration sealing systems and firestopping.
11. Low-voltage surge protective equipment.
1. Section 07 84 00 Firestopping.
2. Section 07 90 00 Joint Protection.
3. Section 08 31 13 Access Doors and Frames.
4. Section 26 05 01 Basic Electrical Requirements.
1.2 REFERENCES

2. Basic Measurement Instruments (BMI)
5. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
704618 26 05 05
19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods - 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FUSES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Bussmann.
2. Gould-Shawmut.
B. Zero to 600 Volts:

1. Provide a complete set of current-limiting fuses wherever fuses are indicated.
Supply a set of six spare fuses of each type and each current rating installed.
Utilize fuses that fit mountings specified with switches and which provide
features rejecting Class H fuses. Provide the following types:
a. For 250- to 600-volt motor and transformer circuits, zero to 600 amps,
UL Class RK-5 with time delay, Bussmann Type FRS-R, Shawmut
Type TRS-R.
b. For zero- to 250-volt motor and transformer circuits, zero to 600 amps,
UL Class RK-5 with time delay, Bussmann Type FRN-R, Shawmut
Type TR-R.
c. For 250- to 600-volt feeder and service circuits, zero to 600 amps, UL
Class RK-1, Bussmann Type KTS-R, Shawmut Type A6K-R.
d. For zero- to 250-volt feeder and service circuits, zero to 600 amps, UL
Class RK-1, Bussmann Type KTN-R, Shawmut Type A2K-R.
e. For zero- to 600-volt feeder and service circuits, 601 to 6,000 amps, UL
Class L, Bussmann Type KRP-C, Shawmut Type A4BY.
2.2 BOXES AND CONDULETS
A. Outlet:
1. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA) OS 1; galvanized steel with 1/2-inch male fixture studs where required;
minimum depth 2 inches.
2. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2; minimum depth 2 inches. Provide
gasketed, watertight cover.
3. Cast Boxes: Cast Feraloy, deep type, gasketed cover, threaded hubs; minimum
depth 2 inches.
B. Floor Boxes for Installation in Cast-In-Place Concrete Floors: Semi-adjustable, cast iron.
C. Pull and Junction Boxes:

1. Sheet Metal Boxes for Interior Dry Location Installations:
a. Electrical:
1) Boxes Having No Dimension Greater Than 12 Inches: NEMA
0S1; galvanized steel.
2) Boxes Equal to or Larger than 12 Inches in Any Dimension: See
hinged cover enclosures within this Section.
b. Communications: NEMA 250; Type 1, galvanized steel enclosures
designed for use as pull boxes with flat screw-applied covers, with or
without knockouts, and gray enamel finish.
704618 26 05 05
2. Cast Metal Boxes for Above-Grade Outdoor and Wet Location Installations:
NEMA 250; Type 4 and Type 6, flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box,
raintight. Galvanized cast Feraloy box and cover with ground flange, neoprene
gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.
3. Cast Metal Boxes for Underground Installations: NEMA 250; Type 4, outside
flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting, raintight. Galvanized cast
Feraloy box and plain cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover
screws.
4. Cast Metal Boxes for Above-grade Hazardous Location Installations: Flat-
flanged, surface-mounted, explosion-/dust-/ignition-proof junction box which
meets applicable National Electrical Code (NEC) 500 requirements for Class I
applications. Cast box for threaded rigid steel conduit connections with threaded
cover and gasket.
5. Fiberglass Handholes for Underground Installations: Die molded with precut 6-
by 6-inch cable entrance at center bottom of each side; fiberglass weatherproof
cover with nonskid finish.
6. Concrete (Precast) Handholes for Underground Electrical Installations: 10- by
17-inch minimum (inside dimensions) cable entrance at center bottom of each
side; cast iron cover marked "electrical" or as shown on the Drawings.
2.3 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES
A. Construction: NEMA 250.

1. Type 1: Steel.
2. Type 4: Steel with gasketed door, raintight.
3. Type 4X: Stainless steel or Polycarbonate or fiberglass-reinforced polyester
(FRP).
4. Type 12: Steel or fiberglass with gasketed door, dusttight.
B. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard.
C. Covers: Continuous hinge held closed by flush latch; operable by hasp and staple for
padlock. Provide neoprene rubber gaskets.
D. Interior Panel for Mounting Terminal Blocks or Electrical Components: 14-gauge steel,
white enamel finish.
2.4 CABINETS
A. Electric Cabinets:
1. Cabinet Boxes: Galvanized steel with removable end walls, size(s) as shown on
Drawings. Provide Unistrut channel and machine screws for terminal block
mounting.
2. Cabinet Fronts: As shown on the Drawings, with concealed trim clamps,
concealed hinge, and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard;
louvered for ventilation of internal components; finish same as enclosure.
3. Provide protective pocket inside front cover with schematic diagram, connection
diagram, and layout drawing of control wiring and components within enclosure.
704618 26 05 05
B. Communication Equipment Rack Enclosures (Freestanding Cabinets): Size, construction,
finish, and configuration as shown on the Drawings.
2.5 CONTACTORS
1. ABB/General Electric Company.
2. Square D Company.
3. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer Company.
4. Siemens.
B. General Purpose:
1. NEMA ICS 2: Electrically or Mechanically held, two- or three-wire control.
2. Enclosure: NEMA 1 unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.
3. Provide bus terminals suitable for mounting in panelboard.
C. Lighting:
1. NEMA ICS 2: Electrically or Mechanically held, two- or three-wire control.
2. Provide bus terminals suitable for mounting in panelboard.
2.6 CONTROL RELAYS
1. ABB/General Electric.
2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer.
3. Potter-Brumfield (Tyco).
4. Struthers-Dunn (Magnecraft).
B. General:
1. Provide magnetic control relays, NEMA Class A300 (300 volts, 10 amps
continuous, 7,200 VA make, 720 VA break), industrial control type with field-
convertible contacts or A600 (600 volts, 10 amps continuous, 7,200 VA make,
720 VA break), industrial control type with field-convertible contacts, and
meeting the requirements of NEMA ICS 2.
2. Where time-delay relays are specified or required, unless otherwise noted,
provide magnetic control relays with timer attachment adjustable from 0.2 to
60 seconds (minimum) and field convertible from on delay to off delay and vice
versa.
3. Where latching (mechanically held) relays or motor thermal detector relays are
specified, provide magnetic control relays with mechanical latch attachment with
unlatching coil and coil clearing contacts.
2.7 PUSH BUTTONS, INDICATING LIGHTS, AND SELECTOR SWITCHES
1. Allen-Bradley, 800H series.
2. ABB/General Electric, CR104P Series, CR2940 series, hazardous locations.
3. Square D, Class 9001 Type K; Type SK, corrosion resistant; Type BR, hazardous
locations.
704618 26 05 05
4. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, 10250T.
B. General:
1. For nonhazardous, indoor, dry locations, including motor control centers, control
panels, and individual stations, provide heavy-duty, NEMA 13, oiltight-type push
buttons, indicating lights, selector switches, and stations for these devices.
2. For nonhazardous, outdoor, or normally wet locations or where otherwise
indicated, provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant, watertight-type push buttons,
indicating lights, or selector switches mounted in NEMA 4 enclosures.
3. For locations indicated as corrosive on the Drawings, provide components and
enclosures rated NEMA 4X.
4. Provide individual, extra-large nameplates indicating specific function.
5. Provide push-button stations with laminated plastic nameplates indicating the
drive they control.
6. Utilize selector switches having standard operating levers. Provide transformer
push-to-test type indicating lights. Provide on or start push buttons colored black.
Provide off or stop push buttons colored red.
2.8 TERMINAL BLOCKS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Terminal Blocks: NEMA ICS 4; UL listed.
B. Signal and Control Terminals:

1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Phoenix Contact, UK Series (UK10).
b. Buchanan, Vanguard Line (10 mm).
c. Weidmuller, SAK Series (SAK10).
d. Entrelec, 500 Series (MS6/8).
2. Modular construction type, DIN 46 277/3 channel mounted; screw clamp
compression connectors, rated 300 volts; minimum terminal width of 0.24 inch,
capable of holding two No. 12 or two No. 14 AWG conductors in each
connector. Provide thermoset characters, black on white background, for terminal
identification numbers. Provide 25 percent spare terminals.
C. Power Terminals:
a. Buchanan.
b. Ilsco.
2. Unit construction type, closed-back type, with tubular pressure screw connectors,
rated 600 volts, size as required. Provide 25 percent spare terminals.
2.9 PENETRATION SEALING SYSTEMS AND FIRESTOPPING
A. Provide sealing in accordance with the requirements of Section 07 90 00 Joint Protection.
B. Install penetration sealing around and within cable or raceway openings where passing
through rated floors, ceilings, or walls in a manner to maintain fire rating of structure
penetrated and in accordance with Section 07 84 00 Firestopping. Avoid unnecessary
cutting and make seals and repairs in a manner acceptable to CH2M.
704618 26 05 05
2.10 LOW-VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
A. Provide secondary surge protective equipment consisting of a surge capacitor and surge
arrestor combination located where indicated on the Drawings. Utilize components for
surge protective equipment covered by this specification, designed and tested in
accordance with NEMA LA-1 and ANSI/IEEE C62.1.
B. Provide surge capacitor impregnated with non-PCB biodegradable dielectric fluid.

Include integral discharge resistor which will reduce residual voltage to 50 volts crest in
less than 5 minutes after unit has been disconnected from circuit.
C. Provide arrestor consisting of an assembly of high-strength metal oxide valve elements

enclosed in a high-strength, corrosion-resistant, molded resin housing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 BOXES AND CONDULETS – LOCATION AND BOX TYPE
A. Types to be Provided, Steel and/or Aluminum Raceway System:

1. Exterior Locations: Cast Feraloy with neoprene gaskets.
2. Interior Dry Locations With:
a. Rigid Steel Conduit: Cast Feraloy.
b. Intermediate Metallic Conduit: Cast Feraloy.
c. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Sheet steel.
d. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Cast aluminum.
e. Communications Wireway: Same material as wireway.
3. Interior Wet Locations with Exposed and Concealed Raceways: Cast Feraloy
with neoprene gaskets.
B. Types to be Provided, Plastic Raceway System:

1. Exposed Raceways, Corrosive Locations: Nonmetallic.
2. Concealed Raceways, Corrosive Locations: Nonmetallic.
C. Types to be Provided, Plastic Coated:

1. Steel Raceway System: Plastic-coated steel.
2. Concrete-Encased Raceways: Cast Feraloy with neoprene gaskets.
D. Single In-line Communications Conduit Runs, All Locations:

1. 2-Inch Conduit and Smaller: Type C conduit bodies of cast Feraloy or
nonmetallic construction as required for the location. Gaskets outdoors and in
wet locations.
2. Conduit Larger than 2-Inch: Straight-through communications wireway as
specified for the location.
3.2 COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS
A. Electrical Boxes: Provide 2- by 4-inch boxes for switches and receptacles with plaster
rings as required or as shown on Drawings and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling,
704618 26 05 05
equipment connections, and code compliance. Provide 4-inch minimum octagonal boxes
for ceiling luminaire outlets.
B. Communications Boxes: Provide 4- by 4- by 2-inch-deep outlet boxes with gang plaster

rings for mounting telecommunications outlets.
C. Electrical and communications box locations shown on the Drawings are approximate
unless dimensioned. Verify location of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas
prior to rough-in.
D. Locate and install boxes to allow access. Where installation is inaccessible, coordinate
locations and sizes of required access doors with other trades; furnish and install same in
accordance with Section 08 31 13 Access Doors and Frames.
E. Locate and install to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance.
3.3 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION
A. Do not install boxes back to back in walls. Provide minimum 6-inch separation, except
provide minimum 24-inch separation in acoustic rated walls.
B. Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate
masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes. Use boxes with sufficient depth to
permit conduit hubs to be located in masonry void space.
C. Provide knockout closures for unused openings.
D. Support boxes independently of conduit.
E. Use multiple-gang boxes where multiple devices are mounted together; do not use
sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems.
F. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation.
G. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches,
and backsplashes.
H. Position boxes to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling plans.
I. In inaccessible ceiling areas, position outlets and junction boxes within 6 inches of
recessed luminaire to be accessible through luminaire ceiling opening.
J. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and partition
studs, accurately positioning to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel stud
bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud walls and adjustable steel channel fasteners for
flush ceiling outlet boxes.
K. Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
704618 26 05 05
3.4 FLOOR BOX INSTALLATION
A. Set boxes level and flush with finish flooring material.
B. Use floor boxes for installations in slab on grade.
3.5 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION
A. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in unfinished areas.
B. Support pull and junction boxes independent of conduit and wireway.
C. Provide pull boxes to limit conduit runs as follows, unless accepted by CH2M:
1. Electric Raceways: Limit conduit runs to 150 feet and contain no more than three
90 degree, right-angle bends.
2. Communications Raceways: Limit conduit runs to 100 feet and contain no more
than the equivalent of two 90 degree, right-angle bends.
D. Install such that boxes are accessible.
E. Provide communications pull boxes of sufficient size and place raceway connections in a
manner that ensures minimum inside cable bend radius is more than 10 times inside
diameter of conduit. Do not install boxes, bends, elbows, tees, conduit outlet bodies, and
other conduit fittings which do not provide for this minimum inside cable bend radius.
3.6 FABRICATION – CONTROL ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS
A. Shop assemble enclosures and cabinets housing terminal blocks or electrical components
in accordance with NEMA ICS 6.
3.7 INSTALLATION – ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS
A. Install cabinets and enclosures plumb; anchor securely to wall and structural supports at
each corner, minimum.
B. Provide accessory feet for freestanding equipment enclosures.
C. Install trim plumb.
3.8 OPENINGS
A. Close openings in boxes, condulets, raceways, and equipment.
704618 26 05 05
WITH BID
26 05 05-01 Catalog cut-sheets, other descriptive literature X

for:
 Fuses
 Hinged cover enclosures
 Cabinets
 Contactors
 Control relays
 Push buttons, indicating lights, and
selector switches
 Terminal blocks and accessories
 Power system monitoring
 Penetrating sealing systems and
firestopping
 Low-voltage surge protective
equipment
26 05 05-02 Weights for:
 Hinged cover enclosures Per construction schedule
 Cabinets
equipment
26 05 05-03 Capacities and ratings for: Per construction schedule
 Fuses
 Contactors
 Control relays
equipment
26 05 05-04 Mounting, including seismic for: Per construction schedule
 Cabinets
equipment
704618 26 05 05
WITH BID
26 05 05-05 Performance characteristics for: X

equipment
26 05 05-06 Model numbers for: X
equipment
26 05 05-07 Datasheets for: X
 Fuses
 Cabinets
 Contactors
 Control relays
 Push buttons, indicating lights, and
selector switches
 Penetration sealing system
equipment
26 05 05-08 Wiring and schematic diagrams for: Per construction schedule
 Cabinets
equipment
26 05 05-09 Software, files, databases for power system Per construction schedule
monitor
26 05 05-10 Operation and maintenance manuals for: With record documents
equipment
END OF SECTION
704618 26 05 05
SECTION 26 05 13
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install medium-voltage cable
and accessories.
1.2 REFERENCES

2. Ethylene-propylene rubber (EPR)
B. Definitions:
1. NETA ATS: International Electrical Testing Association Acceptance Testing
Specification.
2. ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association.
C. References Standards:
1. IEEE Standard 386 – Separable Insulated Connector Systems
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements
for this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS – CABLES
A. General Cable (Prysmian Group)
B. Kerite Co. (The); Hubbell Incorporated.
C. Okonite Company (The)
704618 26 05 13
25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 Medium-voltage Cables - 1
D. Southwire Company
2.2 GENERAL
A. Provide cable with tag containing name of manufacturer, National Electrical Code (NEC)
designation, and year and month of manufacture.
B. Furnish cable in continuous lengths, free of kinks and defects at time of delivery to
jobsite.
2.3 SINGLE-CONDUCTOR, MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLE
A. Cable: Insulated cable rated 5 and 35 kV, ungrounded.
B. Conductor: Copper Concentric, stranded.
C. Insulation: Triple extrusion of semiconducting strand screen, ethylene-propylene rubber

insulation (133 percent level), semiconducting insulation screen, 5-mil bare copper
shielding tape with nominal 12.5 percent overlap, PVC jacket over assembly.
2.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS – CABLE TERMINATIONS
A. Engineered Products Company.
B. G&W Electric Company
C. Raychem Corporation
D. RTE Components; Cooper Power Systems
E. Richards Manufacturing Company
F. Thomas & Betts Corporation/Elastimold
G. 3M; Electrical Products Division
H. Pfisterer
2.5 CABLE TERMINATIONS
A. Modular Molded-Rubber Termination: Class 1, kit form suitable for use indoors or
outdoors with cable specified, including stress cone, ground clamp, nontracking rubber
skirts (outdoor), connector, rubber cap, and aerial lug.
B. MV-Connex pluggable connection system.
C. Porcelain Insulator Cable Terminators: Class 1, kit form suitable for use with cable
specified.
704618 26 05 13
D. Cast Epoxy Cable Termination: Class 1, kit form suitable for use with cable specified,
including stress cone, shield ground connection, wet porcelain rain shield for outdoor
units, epoxy resin molding material, and accessories and molds necessary for proper
application.
E. Load Break Elbows – Elbow Connector:

1. Dead-front termination of 15 kV class underground-type distribution cables to
apparatus equipment.
2. Three-phase Systems: Three-wire,grounded.
3. Single-phase laterals of above system(s).
4. 200-ampere load-make/break, 200-ampere continuous, 15.2 kV phase to ground
and 14.4 kV phase to phase
5. Equipped with integral voltage detection point for determining voltage
conditions.
6. Provide cable shield adapters if required for compatibility with specified cable
type(s).
7. 15 kV.
F. Non-load (Dead) Break Elbows – Elbow Connector:

1. Fully shielded, fully submersible, hot-stick operable, separable insulated
connector suitable for de-energized operation.
2. Three-Phase Systems: Three-wire, grounded.
3. Single-phase laterals of above system(s).
4. 600 ampere rms continuous, 900 ampere rms 8-hour overload.
5. 21.1 kV phase to ground or 36.6 kV phase to phase.
6. Provide cable shield adapter if required for compatibility with specified cable
type(s).
7. Equipped with integral voltage detection point for determining voltage
conditions.
G. Potheads: Class 1 termination for one conductors with porcelain insulators, cable
connector and aerial lug, sealed cable entrance and support, and insulating compound.
2.6 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS – CABLE SPLICES/TAPS
A. 3M
B. Raychem
2.7 CABLE SPLICES/TAPS
A. Modular Molded-rubber Separable Connectors: Shielded, 600-amp insulated connector

system rated for continuous operation at system voltage and 90 degrees C with
emergency overload temperature rating of 130 degrees C. Design and test system
components in accordance with the Specifications for cable sizes shown on the drawings.
Provide molded rubber parts of cured EPDM, and insulate the connecting components
with molded epoxy.
704618 26 05 13
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that conduit is ready to receive work. Use mandrel to determine if installed
conduit is suitable for use.
B. Verify field measurements are as shown on drawings.
C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Thoroughly swab conduit to remove foreign material before pulling cables.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install cable and terminations in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to

IEEE C2.
B. Ground cable shield at each termination and splice.
C. Pull cables using suitable lubricants and cable-pulling equipment. Do not exceed cable
pulling tensions and bending radius recommended by manufacturer.
D. Install cable in manholes along those walls providing the longest route and most spare
cable lengths. Arrange cable to avoid interferences with duct entrances into manhole.
E. Avoid abrasion and other damage to cables during installation.
F. Fireproof cables in manholes using Scotch Brand 77 fireproofing tape and Scotch
Brand 27 or 69 glass electrical tape in half-lapped wrapping extended 1 inch into ducts.
G. Do not splice cables unless specifically approved by CH2M.
H. Provide terminals and connectors acceptable for the type of conductor used.
A. Inspect exposed cable sections for physical damage. Verify that cable is connected
according to drawings and that shield grounding, cable support, and terminations are
properly installed.
B. Perform dc high-potential test of each conductor with other conductors grounded in the
presence of CH2M. Utilize NETA standards, but do not exceed manufacturer’s
recommendations.
C. Record results of test in tabular form and in plots of current versus voltage for
incremental voltage steps and current versus time.
704618 26 05 13
WITH BID
26 05 13-01 Product data indicating cable and accessory X

construction, testing limitations, materials,
and ratings.
26 05 13-02 Provide certified test reports prior to shipment Prior to delivery
for applicable tests on cable furnished per
AEIC 5 and ICEA. When in conflict, apply
the more stringent test.
26 05 13-03 Corona discharge test complying with AEIC
requirements. Provide certified copies to Per construction schedule
CH2M of the original X-Y plot showing
discharge levels at the time of delivery.
26 05 13-04 NETA dc high-potential test results after Per construction schedule
cable installation.
26 05 13-05 Provide calculations that include maximum

pulling tension, maximum sidewall pressure Per construction schedule
at bends, and jam ratio.
26 05 13-06 Provide list of proposed pulling devices and
equipment. Per construction schedule
END OF SECTION
704618 26 05 13
SECTION 26 05 19
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install:

1. 600V Wire.
2. 600V Cable.
3. Wiring connections and terminations.
4. Modular wiring system.
2. Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems.
3. Section 27 10 15 Communications Cable and Accessories.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. Adjustable frequency drives (AFD)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 600V WIRE
A. Thermoplastic-insulated wire.
B. Feeders and Branch Circuits Larger than 6 AWG: Copper, stranded conductor, 600-Volt
insulation, THHN/THWN .
C. Feeders and Branch Circuits 6 AWG and Smaller: Copper, stranded conductor, 600V
insulation, THHN/THWN.
D. Control Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor, 600-Volt insulation, THWN.
704618 26 05 19
14 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 0 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables - 1
2.2 ARMORED METAL-CLAD CABLE, TYPE MC
A. Armored Cable, 14 through 6 AWG: Copper conductor, 600V thermoplastic insulation,

rated 75 degrees C, Type AC.
B. Armored Cable, 4 through 1 AWG: Copper conductor, 600V thermoplastic insulation,

rated 75 degrees C, Type AC.
C. Armored Cable Larger than 1 AWG: Copper conductor, 600V thermoplastic insulation,
rated 75 degrees C; conductor assembly covered with aluminum; the metallic sheath shall
be continuous and close fitting, interlocked metal tape suitable for usein direct sunlight;
Type MC.
2.3 REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLE
A. Type 1, 600-Volt Control Cable for Class 1 Remote Control and Signal Circuits,
Type TC:
1. Individual Conductors: 14 AWG, stranded copper, PVC insulation, nylon jacket,
rated 90 degrees C dry, 75 degree C wet; color coded per ICEA Method 1, plus
one green equipment grounding conductor.
2. Assembly: Bundle wrapped with cable tape and covered with PVC jacket.
3. Provide grounding conductor in addition to number of conductors to be used.
B. Type 2, 300-Volt Control Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal
Circuits:
1. Individual Conductors: 14 AWG, solid copper, PVC insulated, rated
105 degrees C dry, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, plus bare
stranded tinned copper drain conductor.
2. Assembly: Bundle covered with overall PVC jacket.
C. Type 3, 150-Volt Plenum-Rated Control Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and
Signal Circuits:
1. Individual Conductors: 14 AWG, solid copper, Teflon insulated, rated
60 degrees C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded.
2. Assembly: Bundled covered with overall clear or red Teflon jacket.
2.4 POWER CABLE
A. Type 4, 600V Power Cable, Type TC:

1. Individual Conductors: Conductor size per schedule on drawings, 7- or 19-strand
copper, PVC insulation, nylon jacket, rated 90 degrees C dry, 75 degrees C wet,
color coded per ICEA Method 1. For 208V and 480Y/277V systems, provide
cable jacket colors per the schedule in Section 26 05 53 Identification for
Electrical Systems. Provide one green grounding conductor for non-parallel cable
runs; provide with green ground conductor for each parallel cable runs.
2. Assembly: Bundle wrapped with plastic cable tie and arranged as depicted in
drawings. flame, weather, abrasion, chemical, and sunlight resistant.
704618 26 05 19
B. Type 5, 600V Power Cable, Type TC
1. Individual Conductors: Conductor size as shown on drawings, 250 kCM
minimum, 37-strand copper, RHH/RHW-2 (XLPE/EPR) insulation, PVC outer
jacket, rated 90 degrees C dry, 90 degrees C wet.
2.5 INSTRUMENTATION CABLE
A. Type 6, 300V rated for 480V MCC/AFD applications. Instrumentation cable, single pair,
overall shield, type PLTC:
1. Individual Conductors: 18 AWG, stranded, tinned copper, polyethylene or PVC
insulated, rated 105 degrees C, color coding per client standard.
2. Assembly: Twisted single pair, continuous 100 percent coverage aluminum-
polyester shield, 18 AWG, stranded, tinned copper drain wire, overall PVC
jacket. Maximum outer diameter 0.28 inches.
B. Type 7, 300V rated for 480V MCC/AFD applications. Instrumentation cable, multiple
pairs, overall shield, type PLTC:
1. Individual Conductors: 18 AWG, stranded, tinned copper, polyethylene or PVC
insulated, rated 105 degrees C, black and white numerically printed and coded
pairs.
2. Assembly: Individual twisted pairs having 100 percent coverage aluminum-
polyester shield and 20 AWG, stranded, tinned copper drain wire. Provide
conductor bundle with 100 percent coverage overall aluminum-polyester shield
and 18 AWG drain wire. Isolate group shields from each other. Wrap bundle
with cable tape and cover with PVC jacket with overall PVC jacket.
2.6 LIFE SAFETY AND SECURITY ACCESS-SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS CABLE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Use only manufacturers and types acceptable to system

Supplier as listed on the Legend Drawing.
2.7 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS CABLE
A. For communications systems cable also refer to Section 27 10 15 Communications Cable

and Accessories.
2.8 THERMOCOUPLE EXTENSION CABLE
A. Type 7, 300V Thermocouple Extension Cable, Single Pair, Overall Shield, Type PLTC:
1. Individual Conductors: 16 AWG, solid alloys, PVC insulation, rated 105
degrees C, pigmented insulation on individual conductors. Color code per ISA,
alloy type as shown on the drawings.
polyester shield, 20 AWG, stranded, tinned copper drain wire. Bundle wrapped
with cable tape and covered with PVC jacket with overall PVC jacket. Maximum
outer diameter 0.25 inches.
704618 26 05 19
B. Type 8, 300V Thermocouple Extension Cable, Multiple Shielded Pairs, Overall Shield,
Type PLTC:
1. Individual Conductors: 16 AWG, solid alloys, PVC insulation, rated
105 degrees C, pigmented insulation on individual conductors; negative
conductor numerically printed for group identification; color code per ISA, alloy
type as shown on the drawings.
polyester shield, 20 AWG, stranded, tinned copper drain wire. Bundle wrapped
with cable tape and covered with PVC jacket with overall PVC jacket. Provide
conductor bundle with 100 percent coverage overall aluminum-polyester shield
and 20 AWG drain wire. Isolate group shields from each other. Provide outer
PVC jacket.
2.9 MODULAR WIRING SYSTEMS
A. Modular Wiring Systems: Prewired flexible metal conduit assemblies with polarized
special connectors to distribute lighting and receptacle branch circuits from accessory
distribution boxes; UL listed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS
A. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits and no smaller than
14 AWG for control wiring.
B. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway or
cable.
C. Splice cables only with written permission of CH2M. Show splice locations on as-
constructed drawings.
D. Conductors exposed to oils, greases, vapors, fumes, liquids, or other substances having
deleterious effect on the conductor or installation shall be of a type suitable for the
application.
E. No conductor shall be used in such a manner that its operating temperature exceeds that
designated for the type of insulated conductor involved.
F. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
G. Make conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal.
H. Where connection of cables installed under this Section is to be made by others, provide
pigtails of adequate length for neat, trained, and bundled connections.
704618 26 05 19
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Wiring in Raceways:
1. No conductors or cables shall be installed in conduits, ducts, or raceways until
the raceway has been completed.
2. When installing conductors, the electrical contractor shall exercise due care to
prevent damage to conductors or insulation.
3. Pull conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed and approved
wire pulling lubricant for pulling 4 AWG and larger wires.
4. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected
from weather and mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been
completed.
5. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.
B. Cable:
1. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage.
2. Support cables above accessible ceilings; do not rest on ceiling tiles. Use UL
listed spring metal clips or nylon plastic cable ties to support cables from
structure or ceiling suspension system. Include bridle rings or drive rings.
3. Use suitable UL listed cable fittings and connectors.
4. Install life safety and security systems cable per the requirements of NFPA 72,
National Fire Alarm Code.
5. Motor Drive Cables shall be separated by a solid fixed barrier of a material
compatible with cable tray where installed with 600V or less rated cables in cable
tray.
C. Modular Wiring System:

1. Install modular wiring system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Use spring metal clips or nylon plastic cable ties to support cables longer than
6 feet from structure or ceiling suspension system. Include bridle rings or drive
rings.
3.3 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS
A. All feeder cables shall be continuous from origin to panel or equipment terminations
without running splices in intermediate pull or splice boxes. Where taps and splices are
necessary and approved, they shall be made in approved splice boxes with suitable
connector. Splice boxes are to be accessible.
B. Terminate aluminum wire in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Terminate aluminum conductors with tin-plated aluminum-bodied compression

connectors only. Fill with antioxidant compound prior to installation of conductor.
D. Use suitable reducing connectors or mechanical connector adapters for connecting

aluminum conductors to copper conductors.
704618 26 05 19
E. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps
8 AWG and smaller. For 10 AWG and smaller, use insulated spring wire connectors with
plastic caps on lighting and receptacle circuits.
F. Terminate control circuit conductors at terminal blocks only.
G. Use split bolt connectors for copper wire splices and taps 6 AWG and larger. Tape
uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of conductor
insulation value.
H. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.
I. Where approved, make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of
conductors without perceptible temperature rise.
J. Spare conductors are to be coiled and taped and mark as “SPARE”.
K. Splice below-grade conductors in handholes or manholes and make watertight with UL

approved epoxy resin-type splicing kits.
L. Label conductors according to the requirements of Section 26 05 53 Identification for

Electrical Systems.
M. Connect and install armored and other cable per manufacturer’s requirements.
A. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
B. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's recommended

values.
C. Perform continuity and insulation tests on power and equipment branch circuit
conductors. Verify proper phasing connections.
D. Life Safety and Security Access-Surveillance Systems Cable:

1. Test cable per requirements of NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm and Signaling
Code..
2. For external circuits, test cable per manufacturer’s test methods and
requirements.
3.5 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Concealed Interior Locations: Building wire in raceways.
B. Exposed Interior Locations: Building wire in raceways or Type TC cable in cable trays.
C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Building wire in raceways or Modular wiring system.
704618 26 05 19
D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Building wire in raceway.
E. Exterior Locations: Building wire in raceways.
F. Underground Locations: Building wire in raceways.
WITH BID
26 05 19-01 Catalog cutsheets, other descriptive literature X

26 05 19-02 Weights X
26 05 19-03 Capacities and ratings X
26 05 19-04 Manufacturer’s instructions for splicing and X
terminating aluminum conductors
26 05 19-05 Performance characteristics X
26 05 19-06 Datasheets X
26 05 19-07 Shop drawings for modular wiring system, Per construction schedule
including layout of distribution devices,
branch circuit conduit and cables, circuiting
arrangement, and outlet devices
26 05 19-08 Field test results Per construction schedule
END OF SECTION
704618 26 05 19
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Power system grounding.
2. Communication system grounding.
3. Electrical equipment, raceway, and cable tray grounding and bonding.
4. Zero signal reference grid grounding.
5. Metal piping system bonding.
1.2 REFERENCES

2. Distributed Control System (DCS)
3. Ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI)
4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE)
7. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
A. Ground and bond electrical systems and equipment including separately derived sources
and communications systems per requirements of National Electrical Code (NEC) Article
250.
B. Provide communications system grounding conductor at telephone utility point-of-service

entrance and connect to facility ground ring.
C. Provide separate isolated equipment grounding conductor bonded to system at service or

separately derived source. Avoid multiple connections to allow reduction of electrical
noise.
704618 26 05 26
25 OCTOBER 2018 – Rev. 0 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems - 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GROUND RODS
A. Copperclad steel, ¾ inch diameter, 10 feet long, driven full length into the earth.
2.2 GROUND CONDUCTORS
A. Provide grounding conductors sized as shown on Drawings.
B. Provide bare stranded copper conductors below grade. For above grade provide bare or
stranded copper. Support conductor as required using straight sections of conduit.
C. Above ground provide Green THHN/THWN with 600V insulation where routed in
conduit.
D. For resistance grounded systems above 600V match ground conductor insulation to phase
conductor.
E. When ungrounded conductors increased in size or run in parallel proportionately increase

equipment grounding conductor per NEC Article 250.
2.3 TEST WELLS
A. Provide test wells as indicated on Drawings.
2.4 GROUND CONNECTIONS
A. Below Grade: Exothermic welded-type connectors by Cadweld, Thermoweld.
B. Above Grade or in Manholes: Connections as shown on Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Do not splice grounding conductors, except in junction or outlet boxes.
B. Provide separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor in feeder and branch circuits.
C. Provide grounding electrode conductors in 1-inch minimum PVC conduit from separately
derived sources to nearest facility ground bus.
D. Use minimum 6-AWG copper conductor for communications service grounding

conductor. Leave 10 feet of slack conductor at terminal cabinet. Provide ground
conductor(s) to extend facility ground ring to location in each communications room as
shown on Drawings. Use same type and size conductor used for ground ring; thermite
weld pigtail to ground ring.
704618 26 05 26
E. Zero Signal Reference Grid Grounding:
1. Bond raised floor pedestals with a minimum, 6-AWG bare copper at intervals not
exceeding 10 feet that extend from 1 AWG main loops. Form grid with 1 AWG
copper conductor main loops and copper extensions from loop and bond to
facility grounding system.
2. Connect raised floor stringer system to facility grounding system with minimum
1.5-inch wide tinned copper braided strap. Limit braided strap length-to-width
ratio to 5:1.
F. Provide grounding and bonding at utility company's metering equipment and pad-
mounted transformer.
G. Bare Grounding Conductors Below Grade:

1. Ground Ring shall be buried at a depth of not less than 30 inches below the soil.
2. Not in contact with gravel fill or concrete unless making transition from
connections above slab to conductors below grade.
3. Neatly trained around foundations, footings, and other obstacles.
H. Ground Resistance: maximum 25 ohms unless otherwise accepted. Install sufficient

ground rods in addition to code-required grounding if necessary. Where more than one
rod required, install rods at least 3 feet apart.
I. Ground shields of shielded power cable at each splice or termination as recommended by

manufacturer.
J. Ground metal sheathing and exposed metal vertical structural elements of buildings.
Ground metal fences enclosing electrical equipment. Bond metal equipment platforms
which support electrical equipment to equipment ground. Provide electrical continuity
between metal frames and railings supporting push-button stations, receptacles,
instrument cabinets, etc., and raceways carrying circuits to these devices.
K. Bond metal piping systems and metal air ducts that may become energized to separate
grounding electrode
L. Grounding Connections:
1. Connect grounding conductors to ground rods at upper end of rod with end of rod
and connection point below finished grade.
2. Connect sections of outdoor ground mats (counterpoise) for substations or other
equipment below grade. Connect other grounding conductors generally in an
accessible manner.
3. In electrical manholes, install ground rods with ends 4 to 6 inches above floor
with connections of grounding conductors fully visible and accessible.
4. At telephone manholes, install ground rod outside vault in duct bank trench.
Connect ground rod to bonding ribbons inside manhole with a minimum, 6-AWG
copper conductor.
5. Use exothermic welding cartridges and molds in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. For compression connectors, refer to manufacturer's
installation recommendations. Notify CH2M prior to backfilling ground
connections.
704618 26 05 26
6. When making bolted connection to aluminum or galvanized structures, apply
corrosion inhibitor such as Ideal NOALOX, or Penetrox A to contact surfaces
between cable, connector, and surface of structure.
M. Master Reference Ground for Distributed Control System (DCS) / Programmable Logic
Controller (PLC)’s grounding triads will consist of 3 ground rods driven a minimum of
10 feet apart. Rods will be connected with a #4/0 bare conductor. Two Green conductors
with yellow tracer will be brought back to Control Room. One will connect to plant
safety ground. The other will connected to an isolated ground bar for connection to DCS
equipment
A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and
proper installation.
B. Test in CH2M's presence ground resistance of grounding system. Test by means of fall-
of-potential method.
1. Testing Instrument: Biddle Instruments, or (hand-cranked) Megger Null Balance
Earth Tester.
2. Fall-of-Potential Test:
a. Connect instrument per manufacturer’s instructions.
b. Locate C2 probe five times longest distance across grid being tested
away from grid.
c. Place rod P2 at various locations in line between tested electrode and
probe C2 and plot results on graph (distance versus resistance). Take
sufficient readings to yield portion of plotted curve as being constant
(rate-of-resistance change becomes so small with respect to distance as to
be insignificant).
3. Intercepting Slope Test:
a. Provide in lieu of fall-of-potential test for large grids.
b. Perform in accordance with Biddle Instruments guidelines.
4. Conduct two separate tests on opposite sides of grounding grid.
5. Report failure to obtain specified ground resistance to CH2M.
C. Test ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) receptacles, alarm systems, and circuit
breakers for proper connection and operation with methods and instruments prescribed by
manufacturer.
D. Include reports of grounding system tests in operation and maintenance manuals for
review by CH2M.
704618 26 05 26
WITH BID
26 05 26-01 Catalog cutsheets, other descriptive technical Per construction schedule

literature
26 05 26-02 Layout of ground ring, location of grounding Per construction schedule
electrode connections, and routing of
grounding electrode conductors
26 05 26-04 Operation and maintenance manuals (reports Per construction schedule
of grounding system tests)
END OF SECTION
704618 26 05 26
SECTION 26 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Conduit, wireway, cable tray, and equipment supports, including design.
2. Fastening hardware.
3. Concrete equipment pads.
2. Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.
3. Section 05 43 00 Slotted Channel Framing.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. Fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
A. Provide support systems adequate for weight of equipment, conduit, wireways, and/or
cable trays, including wiring that they carry.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size, shape, and location of concrete pads with Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place
Concrete.
1.6 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Support systems in compliance with project seismic requirements.
B. Design per project criteria.
704618 26 05 29
9 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems - 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
A. See Section 05 43 00 Slotted Channel Framing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure
using precast insert system, expansion anchors, preset inserts, beam clamps and spring
steel clips.
B. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board
partitions and walls, expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls, self-
drilling anchors or expansion anchors on concrete surfaces, and sheet metal screws in
sheet metal studs.
C. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, cable, conduit, or

vegetation.
D. Do not use powder-actuated anchors without written permission from CH2M .
E. Do not drill structural steel members without written permission from CH2M .
F. Fabricate supports from slotted channel framing, structural steel, angle, or steel channel,
rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with
spring-lock washers under nuts.
G. Do not use steel channel in place of steel angle, except in enclosed chases, plenums, or
warehouse areas. Use galvanized round smooth rod, threaded at each end, or galvanized
steel angle, for vertical support of steel angle.
H. Install channel with open face down to avoid collection of debris.
I. Install freestanding electrical equipment on 3-1/2-inch concrete pads or raised channel

sills.
J. Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards as required but with no less than four
anchors. Provide steel channel supports to stand cabinets 1 inch off wall.
K. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support recessed mounted cabinets and
panelboards in stud walls.
L. Provide extra care in supporting PVC conduit to protect it from potential damage.
M. Use fiberglass or special-coated metallic supports in areas subject to corrosives.
704618 26 05 29
N. Support individual raceways using clamps, wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling
trapeze. Support multiple raceways/cable trays running adjacent to each other by ceiling
trapeze.
704618 26 05 29
WITH BID
26 05 29-01 Product data indicating accessory X

and ratings.
26 05 29-02 Stamped/certified construction calculations, Per construction schedule
details and drawings for installation of
conduit, raceway, and cable tray support
systems.
END OF SECTION
704618 26 05 29
SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Rigid metal conduit (RMC) and fittings.
2. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) and fittings.
3. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) and fittings.
4. Flexible metal conduit (FMC) and fittings.
5. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC) and fittings.
6. Rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC) and fittings.
7. Electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT) and fittings.
8. Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit (LFNC) and fittings.
9. Conduit supports, clamps, and straps.
10. Warning tape.
1. Section 31 00 00 Earthwork: Trenches.
2. Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete: Protective envelope for underground
conduit installations.
4. Section 26 05 05 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
5. Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
6. Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
7. Section 26 05 49 Vibration Isolation for Electrical Systems.
1.2 REFERENCES

2. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT)
3. Electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT)
4. Flexible metal conduit (FMC)
5. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC)
6. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC)
7. Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit (LFNC)
8. National Electric Code (NEC)
11. Polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC)
12. Rigid galvanized steel (RGS)
704618 26 05 33
14 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems - 1
13. Rigid metal conduit (RMC)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 RMC AND FITTINGS
A. RMC: Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS).
B. Rigid aluminum conduit.
C. PVC Externally Coated Conduit: Rigid steel conduit with external 40-mil PVC coating
and internal phenolic coating over a galvanized surface.
D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: Threaded type, steel. Do not use setscrew-type couplings,
elbows, sweeps, or nipples. Provide bushings with shoulders, grounding lugs, and
insulated nonmetallic throats.
E. Hazardous Area Sealing Fittings: Threaded-type conduit seal fittings and sealing
compound UL listed for hazardous locations in accordance with the US National Electric
Code (NEC) Article 500.
2.2 IMC AND FITTINGS
A. Conduit: Galvanized Steel.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: Use fittings and conduit bodies specified above for RMC.
Do not use setscrew-type couplings, elbows, sweeps, or nipples. Provide bushings with
shoulders, grounding lugs, and insulated nonmetallic throats.
2.3 EMT AND FITTINGS
A. EMT: Galvanized tubing.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: National Electrical Manufacturers Association

(NEMA) FB 1; steel, setscrew type. Provide bushings with insulated nonmetallic throats
and shoulders. Provide grounding lugs for bushings on feeders.
C. EMT: Galvanized tubing with color topcoat.

0.1. Example of Manufacturer and Product: Allied Tube & Conduit; Product: True
Color EMT.
704618 26 05 33
2.4 FMC AND FITTINGS
A. Conduit: Steel.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: Steel.
2.5 LFMC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Conduit: Flexible metal conduit with PVC jacket.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: Metal with PVC jacket.
C. Ground continuity between end connectors via internal or external bonding jumper or
braded strap.
2.6 RIGID PVC AND FITTINGS
A. Conduit: Schedule 40 PVC.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: PVC.
C. Underground / Under-slab elbows and sweeps: Fiberglass as alternate to RMC.
2.7 ELECTRICAL NONMETALLIC TUBING (ENT) AND FITTINGS
A. PVC.
2.8 LFNC AND FITTINGS
A. Conduit: Flexible plastic conduit.
2.9 CONDUIT SUPPORTS, CLAMPS, AND STRAPS
A. Metallic Raceway Systems: Galvanized steel, cadmium plated steel, or malleable iron.
B. Nonmetallic Raceway Systems: Nonmetallic fiberglass-reinforced plastic m or nylon,

polypropylene, or PVC.
2.10 WARNING TAPE
A. Electrical Warning Tape:

1. Heavy-gauge plastic tape for use in trenches containing electric circuits.
2. Made of material resistant to corrosive soil.
3. 3-inch minimum width red tape with printed warning that an electric circuit is
located below tape.
704618 26 05 33
B. Communications and Life Safety/Security Warning Tape:
1. Metallic tape with tin or nickel coated joining clips furnished by tape
manufacturer.
2. Communications Circuits: 6-inch minimum width orange tape with printed
warning that communication circuit is located below tape.
3. Life Safety/Security Circuits: 6-inch minimum width yellow tape with printed
warning that life safety circuit is located below tape.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Following installation, protect products from the effects of moisture, corrosion, and
physical damage during construction. Keep openings in conduit and tubing capped with
manufactured seals during construction.
3.2 MINIMUM SIZE
A. 3/4 inch minimum for exposed or concealed.
3.3 TYPE TO BE USED
A. Exterior, Exposed:
1. Galvanized steel RMC.
2. PVC-coated steel RMC (corrosive area)
B. Interior, Exposed:
1. EMT.
C. Interior, Wet Locations:

2. PVC-coated steel RMC (corrosive area)
D. Interior, Concealed, Not Installed in Concrete:

1. EMT.
E. Above Ground, Embedded in Concrete:

2. PVC.
F. Underground, Direct Earth Burial:

1. PVC.
G. Underground, Concrete-Encased:
2. PVC.
H. Corrosive Nonhazardous Areas (Interior and Exterior, Exposed or Concealed): PVC.
704618 26 05 33
I. Hazardous Areas (Interior and Exterior, Exposed or Concealed): UL-approved galvanized
steel RMC.
J. EMI-sensitive Areas: Galvanized steel RMC and fittings.
K. Provide minimum 24 inches of cover over underground conduits in areas where traffic
can drive over them. Use concrete reinforced encasement when using PVC for road
crossings.
L. Under slab 5 kV and above: PVC, 18-inch minimum depth below finished floor. Provide
concrete-encased, long sweep, steel RMC or fiberglass bends.
M. Under slab Below 5 kV:

1. Greater than or Equal to 3-Inch Diameter: PVC, 18-inch minimum depth below
finished floor. Provide concrete-encased steel RMC or fiberglass bends for
electrical conduits.
2. Less than 3-Inch Diameter: PVC, 18-inch minimum depth below finished floor.
Provide steel RMC bends for electrical conduits.
N. Specialty System EMT trade sizes 2-inches and less than 2-inches shall utilize EMT with
color topcoat per the following schedule:
1. Red – Fire Alarm System.
2. Red – Early Warning Smoke Detection (EWSD) System.
3. Green – Hazardous Production Material Monitoring and Control System.
4. White – Security Access and Surveillance
5. White – Closed Circuit Television Systems
N.O. In addition to the requirements in Section 26 05 49, Vibration Isolation for Electrical
Systems, for final connection to valves, local instrumentation, and other equipment where
flexible connection is required to minimize vibration or where required to facilitate
removal or adjustment of equipment, use the following guidelines:
1. 60-inch maximum lengths of LFMC with minimum 90 degree turn resulting in a
loose and compliant connection.
2. Provide flexible conduit long enough to allow item to which it is connected to be
withdrawn or moved off its base.
3. Plenums or Ducts: Maximum 48-inch lengths of LFMC.
4. Do not use FMC except for:
a. Final connection to nonvaportight or nonweather-resistant light fixtures.
Do not exceed 72 inches length and provide minimum diameter of
3/8 inch.
b. Nonplenum spaces used for environmental air.
3.4 SPECIAL LOCATIONS
A. Use RMC for electrical installations:

1. Where conduit changes from underground, direct burial to exposed.
2. Under equipment mounting pads.
3. To points at least 5 feet outside building walls and concrete slabs.
4. In exterior light pole foundations.
704618 26 05 33
B. Do not use aluminum conduit in direct contact with concrete.
3.5 LOCATION, ROUTING, AND GROUPING
A. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
B. Route exposed conduit and conduit above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular
to walls and adjacent piping.
C. Maintain minimum 6-inch clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12-inch
clearance between conduit and heat sources. Maintain minimum 18-inch clearance above
ceiling grid.
D. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire-pulling operations.

Fasten conduit using galvanized straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, or
bolted split stamped galvanized hangers.
E. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical and use conduit rack per the requirements
of Section 26 05 29, Hangers and supports for electrical systems. Provide space for
25 percent additional conduit for each size of conduit in rack. If 25 percent equals a
fraction of a conduit, round up to next even number.
F. Attach conduit support systems to structure, not to piping or ductwork.
G. Refer to NEC Article 344 for RMC minimum support.
H. Do not fasten conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for
temporary conduit support during construction, before conductors are pulled.
I. Do not notch structural members for passage of raceways.
J. Where nonmetallic conduit is installed in exterior locations, provide adequate supports to

eliminate sagging due to temperature changes.
K. Combine homeruns for lighting and general purpose receptacle circuits if desired, but
assume responsibility for conduit size and conductor de-rating. Do not combine neutral
conductors or other circuits.
3.6 BENDS
A. General: Use hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows and sweeps for bends
in conduit larger than 2-inch size. Provide concentric parallel bends.
B. Electrical Conduit Bends:

1. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes.
Where four 90 degree bends are required, obtain prior approval from CH2M and
Owner.
2. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Install
conduit bodies in readily accessible locations.
704618 26 05 33
C. Communications and Life Safety/Security Conduit Sweeps:
1. Make changes in direction of communications conduit runs with symmetrical
sweeps of the longest possible radius. Provide minimum inside radius for 4-inch
underground and underslab communications conduit sweeps of 60 inches, and
ten times conduit internal diameter for other runs.
2. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90 degree bends between pull points
and/or pull boxes.
3. Make no bends in flexible conduit that exceed allowable cable bending radius or
that significantly restrict conduit flexibility.
3.7 CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter. Deburr cut ends.
B. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely.
C. Damp or Wet Locations: Use conduit hubs for fastening conduit to boxes and equipment.
Enter bottom of electrical equipment with conduit.
D. Install insulating throat connectors wherever raceway terminates in boxes or cabinets.
E. Cap exposed steel communications conduit ends with bushings or smooth collars to
protect cable sheath.
F. Do not exceed 100 feet between pull boxes for communications conduit located within
buildings.
G. Where conductor enters or exits cable tray via conduit , securely fasten conduit to cable
tray with specific-purpose UL listed attachment device.
H. Avoid moisture traps. Where unavoidable, provide junction box with drain/breather
configuration.
I. Pull Ropes and Pull Tapes:

1. Provide pull ropes or pull tapes secured at each end of each empty conduit,
except sleeves and nipples.
2. Use 3/8-inch yellow polypropylene pull rope for each empty electrical conduit.
3. Use nylon pull tape with printed footage indicators for each empty
communications conduit.
4. Identify with tags at each end the origin and destination of each empty conduit
and indicate same on empty or spare conduit on as-built drawings.
J. Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls and floors, seal opening around conduit with
UL-listed foamed silicone elastomer compound with rating equal to or greater than
wall/floor penetrated.
K. Provide each conduit passing from a nonhazardous area to a hazardous area and each
conduit entering an enclosure within a hazardous area with a sealing fitting in accordance
with NEC Article 500.
704618 26 05 33
L. Provide watertight seal where underground conduit enters structure through wall or floor.
M. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible. Otherwise,
route through roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate roof penetrations.
N. Maximum Size Conduit in Slabs Above Grade: 3/4 inch. Do not route conduit to cross
each other in slabs above grade. Locate conduit in center one-third of slab.
O. Wipe plastic conduit clean and dry before joining. Apply full, even coat of cement to
entire area that will be inserted into fitting. Let joint cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
P. Install concealed, embedded, and buried conduit to emerge at right angles to surface and
have no curved portion of bend exposed.
3.8 UNDERGROUND DUCTBANK INSTALLATION
A. See Section 31 00 00, Earthwork for trenching and backfill requirements.
B. Install conduit with minimum grade of 4 inches per 100 feet, either from one handhole,
manhole, or pull box to next, or from high point between them, depending on surface
contour.
C. Install conduits entering handholes, manholes, and structures at right angles.
D. Terminate conduit in end bell at electrical manhole entries and in watertight 4-inch duct
terminators at communications manhole entries.
E. Stagger conduit joints in concrete encasement 6 inches minimum vertically.
F. Separate parallel runs of two or more raceways in a single trench with preformed,
nonmetallic spacers designed for the purpose. Install spacers at maximum 4-foot
intervals. Band conduit together with suitable banding devices. Securely anchor conduit
to prevent movement during concrete placement.
G. Provide minimum 3-inch concrete cover at bottom, top, and sides of duct bank. See
Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete for concrete requirements. See Drawings for
duct banks that require concrete encasement.
H. When installing PVC conduit, install a 4/0 bare stranded ground conductor the length of
the duct bank for ground continuity. Connect ground conductor to loop or earthing ring.
I. For electrical duct banks, provide red dye troweled or mixed into top surface of duct
bank.
J. Do not use union-type fittings.
K. Bury warning tapes 12 inches above duct bank.
704618 26 05 33
L. Do not backfill underground concrete-encased duct banks until CH2M has observed
them.
M. Pull 3-1/2-inch-diameter by 12-inch mandrel through 4-inch communications ducts to

verify circularity and sweep radius. Pull standard length mandrels through other
underground conduits. Request CH2M to observe these activities.
N. Provide expansion fittings at structural isolation breaks. Use a ground jumper or bonding
strap across expansion fitting attached to conduit ends for ground continuity.
3.9 EMPTY RACEWAYS
A. Electrical Conduit: Provide permanent cap over each end of each empty raceway.
B. Communications Conduit: Install removable manufactured plugs in empty conduit

openings. For underground conduit openings, use screw tight, removable, watertight, and
dusttight duct plugs.
C. Provide pull rope or pull tape in each empty electrical and communications conduit as
specified above. Tie pull tape securely to duct plug or wall racking at each end.
D. Provide conduit identification at each end.
3.10 IDENTIFICATION
A. Follow requirements of Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems.
3.11 RACEWAY FINISH
A. Match raceway finish with wall system finish where exposed on wall in fabricated
service aisles.
3.12 GROUNDING
A. Follow requirements of Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
3.13 VIBRATION ISOLATION
A. Follow requirements of Section 26 05 49, Vibration Isolation for Electrical Systems.
3.14 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Follow requirements of Section 26 05 29, Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
3.15 BOXES AND FITTINGS
A. Coordinate conduits with Section 26 05 05, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
B. Close unused openings in raceways, boxes, and fittings.
704618 26 05 33
WITH BID
26 05 33-01 Verify length of empty communications Per construction schedule

conduit at time of installation and provide as-
built documentation
END OF SECTION
704618 26 05 33
SECTION 26 05 34
SURFACE RACEWAYS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Surface metal raceways.
2. Multioutlet assemblies.
3. Auxiliary gutters (wireways).
4. Communications wireway systems.
5. Communications plastic wiring duct.
6. Indoor service poles.
4. Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. American Wire Gauge (AWG)
3. Electrical Equipment Manufacturers Association of Canada (EEMAC)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS
1. Wiremold as shown on drawings.
2. Isoduct as shown on drawings.
704618 26 05 34
25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 Surface Raceways - 1
B. Surface Metal Raceway: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface
metal raceway.
C. Size: As shown on drawings.
D. Finish: Gray enamel.
E. Fittings: Couplings, elbows, and connectors designed for use with raceway system with
which it is to be used.
F. Boxes and Extension Rings: Designed for use with raceway systems with which it is to
be used.
2.2 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLY
1. Wiremold.
2. Isoduct.
B. Multioutlet Assembly: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as a
multioutlet assembly.
C. Size: As indicated on drawings.
D. Receptacles: Convenience receptacles mounted in cover outlets with receptacles as

shown on drawings. See Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices, for receptacle requirements.
E. Finish: Gray enamel.[SJ1]
F. Fittings: Couplings, elbows, outlet and device boxes, and connectors designed for use
with multioutlet system.
2.3 AUXILIARY GUTTERS
1. Square D.
2. Circle AW.
B. Auxiliary Gutters: General purpose-type wireway, with knockouts or without knockouts

as indicated on drawings.
C. Size: inches; length as indicated on drawings.
D. Cover: Screw-applied cover.
E. Connector: Flanged; screw-applied cover.
F. Fittings: Lay-in type with removable top, bottom, and side; captive screws.
704618 26 05 34
G. Finish: Rust-inhibiting primer coat with gray enamel finish.
2.4 COMMUNICATIONS WIREWAY SYSTEMS
1. Hoffman.
2. Approved equal.
B. Sheet Metal Wireway for Interior Dry Location Installations: National Electrical
Manufacturers Association (NEMA), or EEMAC equal, 250; Type 1, sheet metal trough
with screw-applied removable cover on top and optional hinged cover; with or without
knockouts; lay-in, feed through, or closed end; gray enamel finish.
C. Wireway for Outdoor and Wet Location Installations:

1. Stainless Steel: NEMA 250; Type 4X, sheet metal trough with continuously
welded seams and hinged cover with oil-resistant gasket on top; joint sealing
plates with oil-resistant gaskets and external screw clamps; no knockouts; lay-in,
feed through, or closed end; stainless steel finish.
2. Steel: NEMA 250; Type 12, sheet metal trough with continuously welded seams
and cover with oil-resistant gasket on top; joint sealing plates with oil-resistant
gaskets; no knockouts; lay-in, feed through, or closed end; gray enamel finish.
D. Nonmetallic Wireway for Corrosive Location Installations: NEMA 250; Type 12, molded
fiberglass trough with sealed seams and screw-attached hinged cover with oil-resistant
gaskets on top, joint sealing plates with oil-resistant gaskets, no knockouts, feed through
or closed end, gray fiberglass finish.
E. Fittings: Manufacturer's standard parts designed for use with the type of construction
indicated, e.g., closure plates, cutoff fittings, barriers, elbows, crosses, tees, junction
boxes, telescope fittings, connectors, reducers, adapters, hangers, and supports.
2.5 COMMUNICATIONS PLASTIC WIRING DUCT
1. ADC.
2. Telect.
3. Panduit.
B. Polyvinylchloride duct with slots on the sides to provide wire openings and removable
snap-on cover.
C. Size: As shown on the drawings.
D. Finish: Manufacturers' standard color.
E. Fittings: Mounting devices, fasteners, wire retainers, joining and corner strips, and fiber
optic duct fittings designed for use with the raceway system with which it is to be used.
704618 26 05 34
2.6 INDOOR SERVICE POLES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell, Inc.
B. Indoor Service Pole: Freestanding surface metal raceway section with fittings, designed
to be supported between inverted T-grid ceiling suspension system and finished floor,
with integral prewired convenience receptacles and separate raceway for telephone cable.
C. Material: Steel main body and cover plates.
D. Finish: As selected by CH2M .
E. Convenience Receptacles: Type 5-20R configuration, four per pole. Prewired receptacle
with 12 American Wire Gauge (AWG) copper conductor to outlet box attached to pole
top, above ceiling. Leave 6-inch leads. See Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices, for
receptacle requirements.
F. Communication Wiring Raceway: Adequate for eight quantity of four pair 24 AWG
Category 5e and Category 6 data and telephone cables. Include full-sized opening
or1-inch conduit connection at top of pole. Provide knockouts at 18 inches above floor
for mounting single gang face plate.
G. Top Clamp: Concealed above ceiling, suitable for securing pole to inverted T-grid
suspension member. Include trim plate to enclose openings cut in ceiling panel.
H. Foot: Suitable for positive anchoring to hard surface floor.
I. Extra Material: Provide ten each receptacle and telephone connector devices.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Surface Metal Raceway and Multioutlet Assembly:

1. Use flat-head screws to fasten channel to surfaces. Mount plumb and level.
2. Use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner
fittings.
3. Maintain grounding continuity between raceway components to provide a
continuous grounding path.
4. Fastener Option: Use clips and straps suitable for the purpose.
B. Auxiliary Gutter:
1. Bolt auxiliary gutter to steel channels fastened to the wall or in self-supporting
structure. Install level.
2. Gasket each joint in oiltight gutter.
3. Mount raintight gutter in horizontal position only.
C. Communications Wireway Systems:
704618 26 05 34
1. Install surface raceways as shown on the drawings and securely attach wireways
to steel channels fastened to the wall or in self-supporting structure under the
provisions of Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
Securely support wireways at intervals not to exceed 5 feet and at each end or
joint for individual sections. Install level.
2. Run exposed wireways parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or
intersections of vertical planes to maintain headroom and provide a neat
appearance.
3. Close dead ends of wireway with fittings by the same manufacturer.
4. Gasket each joint in oiltight gutter.
5. Mount raintight gutter in horizontal position only.
6. Maintain grounding continuity between metallic raceway components to provide
a continuous grounding path.
7. Bond communications wireway systems to the power system's ground every
50 feet.
D. Communications Plastic Wiring Duct:

1. Use flat-head screws, nylon rivets, clips, stud fasteners, and other suitable
methods recommended by the manufacturer to fasten plastic duct to surfaces.
Mount plumb and level.
2. Use suitable joining strips to make straight-run duct channel connections.
3. Use suitable fittings at angled corner connections to protect wires and cables. For
metallic cable, use corner strips. For fiber optic cable and jumpers, use suitable
fiber optic duct fittings.
E. Indoor Service Poles:

1. Verify that installation of ceiling suspension system and other work above
finished ceiling are completed.
2. Neatly cut openings in ceiling panels.
3. Attach foot and top clamp in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
4. Install trim plate to enclose ceiling panel opening.
5. Install poles plumb.
3.2 GROUNDING
A. Follow the requirements of Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems.

WITH BID
26 05 34-01 Product data indicating accessory Per construction schedule.

and ratings.
704618 26 05 34
END OF SECTION
704618 26 05 34
SECTION 26 05 36
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Cable trays.
2. Cable tray accessories.
3. Cable tray supporting.
3.4. Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems
C. See Section 27 10 10 Basic Communications Materials and Methods, for cable tray used
in Telecom, Life Safety, and I & C systems.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. Fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) VE1 CABLE

TRAYS
A. Ladder-type Cable Trays:

1. Tray: Class 20C, plus 200-pound concentrated static load applied between side
rails at midspan with safety factor of 1.5.
2. Material and Finish of Tray, Fittings, and Accessories: Copperfree aluminum.
3. Inside Width: As shown on the Drawings.
704618 26 05 36
25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 1 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems - 1
4. Inside Depth: 4 inches.
5. Straight Section Rung Spacing: 9 inches on center.
6. Inside Radii of Fittings: As shown on the Drawings.
7. Accessories and Fittings: Manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets,
splice plates, reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips, connectors, and grounding
straps.
8. Covers: Flanged, solid-flush cover located where shown on the Drawings.
2.2 LABELINGNEMA VE1 WARNING SIGNS
A. NEMA VE1 Warning Signs: Engraved Nameplates: 1/2-inch-high black letters on

yellow laminated plastic nameplate, engraved with the following wording: “Warning: Do
not use cable tray as walkway, ladder, or support. Use only as mechanical support for
cables and tubing.”
A.B. Tray Section Tags: Label each tray per section tag as indicated on the drawings. Provide
phenolic laminated plastic nameplate with 1 inch lettering, refer to specification section
26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install cable tray as shown on the Drawings and securely attach under the provisions of
Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
B. NEMA VE1 Cable Tray:

1. Install in conformance with NEMA VE1 and NEC Article 392 requirements and
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Support cable tray at each connection point, at the end of each run, and at other
points to maintain spacing between supports of 12 feet maximum. Install trays
level with respect to grade, plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 feet or 1/2 inch
cumulative.
3. Use expansion connectors where indicated in NEMA VE1 or where cable tray
crosses expansion joints. Use bonding jumpers across expansion connectors for
cable tray ground continuity.
4. Cut standard straight sections to length in field.
5. Install warning signs at 30-foot centers along route of cable tray, located to be
visible. (Reference Section 2.2.A)
6. Provide bonding continuity between metallic cable tray sections and fittings in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Make connections to aluminum tray
and fittings using an antioxidant compound.
7. Bond cable tray systems to the power system’s ground every 50 feet.
8. Provide banded covers on trays where it passes under walkway or is below 6 feet
in elevations.
704618 26 05 36
3.2 GROUNDING
A. Follow the requirements of Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems. (Reference cable tray grounding, NEC Article 392.60.)
B. Do not use bare copper grounding conductors in aluminum cable trays
WITH BID
26 05 36-01 Product data indicating cable tray and X

accessory construction, testing limitations,
materials, and ratings.
END OF SECTION
704618 26 05 36
SECTION 26 05 49
VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install vibration control
devices, materials, and related items for electrical systems.
1.2 REFERENCES

2. Double Neoprene Pad (DNP)
3. Hanger Neoprene or Glass Fiber (HN)
7. Structural Isolation Breaks (SIB)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATION MOUNT TYPES
A. Unit Double Neoprene Pad (DNP):

a. Amber/Booth, Type NR.
b. Korfund Dynamics, Type Korpad.
c. Mason Industries, Type WSW.
d. Vibration Mountings & Control, Series Shear Flex.
2. Form neoprene pad isolators with two layers of 1/4-inch- to 3/8-inch-thick ribbed
or waffled neoprene, separated by a stainless steel or aluminum plate,
permanently adhered together.
3. Neoprene: 40 to 50 durometer.
4. Size pads so that they will be loaded within the manufacturer's recommended
range. Provide a steel top plate equal to the size of the pad to transfer the weight
704618 26 05 49
9 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 Vibration Isolation for Electrical Systems - 1
of the supported unit to the pads and to distribute the load evenly over the surface
of the pads.
B. Unit Hanger Neoprene or Glass Fiber (HN):

a. Amber/Booth, Type BRD-A.
b. Korfund Dynamics, Type H.
c. Mason Industries, Type HD.
d. Vibration Mountings and Control, Type RHD or RFD.
2. Neoprene-in-shear or glass fiber element contained in a steel housing. Provide
neoprene neck bushing or other element where hanger rod passes through hanger
housing to prevent rod from contacting hanger housing. Diameter of hole in
housing sufficient to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc
before contacting the hanger housing.
2.2 FLEXIBLE ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Type A: Field fabricated using a minimum 24-inch length of flexible conduit or cable.
B. Type B: Field fabricated using a minimum 48-inch length of flexible conduit or cable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Transformers and Unit Substations:

1. Mount transformers within the building construction on unit DNP isolators.
Where the transformer is part of a unit substation and the transformer cabinet is
directly connected to switchgear cabinets, mount the entire unit substation
assembly on unit DNP isolators. If the transformers are suspended, use Unit HN
isolators selected to achieve not less than 0.1-inch static deflection.
2. Make electrical connections to isolated transformers and unit substations using
flexible electrical connections. Use Type A connections for conduits less than
1 inch. Use Type B connections for conduits sized 1 inch and larger.
B. Dimmers: Mount dimmer cabinets on Unit DNP isolators.
C. Mechanical Equipment: Make electrical connections to vibration isolated mechanical

equipment using flexible electrical connections. Use Type A or Type B connections for
conduits less than 1 inch. Use Type B connections for conduits sized 1 inch and larger.
D. Expansion Joints or Structural Isolation Breaks (SIB):

1. Conduits Smaller Than 4-Inch: Install expansion-deflection joint where conduit
crosses building expansion or SIB joints.
2. Type A Connections: Use for conduits less than 1 inch.
3. Type B Connections: Use for conduits sized 1 inch to 3-1/2 inch
704618 26 05 49
4. Utilize pad isolators for busway, cable tray, wireway, and 4-inch and larger
conduits at SIBs. Support one end on 1-inch deflection isolators for 25 feet on
one side of SIB.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Position isolated electrical equipment so that it is freestanding and does not
contact the building structure or other systems.
B. Isolation Mounts:
1. Align mounts squarely above or below mounting points for the supported
equipment.
2. If a housekeeping pad is provided, install so that the isolators bear on the
housekeeping pad and the isolator base plate rests entirely on the pad.
3. Connect hanger rods for vibration isolated support to structural beams or joists,
not from the floor slab between beams and joists. Provide intermediate support
members as necessary.
4. Position vibration isolation hanger elements as high as possible in the hanger rod
assembly, but not in contact with the building structure, and so that the hanger
housing may rotate a full 360 degrees about the rod axis without contacting
objects.
C. Flexible Electrical Connections:

1. Install Type B connections in a grossly slack U shape or a 360 degree loop.
2. Do not tie flexible coupling or conduit to the building structure or other rigid
material beyond the point where it takes off from the rigid conduit.

WITH BID
26 05 49-01 Provide a description of products to be X

supplied, including product data, dimensions,
specifications, and installation instructions.
26 05 49-02 Detailed selection data for each vibration X
isolator supporting equipment, including
equipment identification mark, isolator type,
and actual load.
END OF SECTION
704618 26 05 49
SECTION 26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Nameplates and tape labels.
2. Wire and cable markers.
3. Raceway color coding.
4. Box identification.
5. Signage and warning labels.
1.2 REFERENCES

2. Motor Control Center (MCC)
6. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
8. American National Standard Institute (ANSI)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to the installation of identifying

labels and markers for wiring and equipment.
B. Comply with "OSHA" sign standards for danger, caution, warning, etc.
C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Standard

Publication Numbers WC 1 and WC 2 pertaining to identification of power and control
conductors.
D. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standard 969, "Marking

and Labeling Systems" pertaining to electrical identification systems.
704618 26 05 53
25 OCTOBER 2018 – Rev. 0 Identification for Electrical Systems - 1
E. SCADA description screen nomenclature and label description shall match record
drawings where possible. Any deficiencies or lack of information about proper
description submit appropriate RFI for information.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer 2 inch x 3 inch laminated plastic, Normal Power

equipment, ¼ inch for line one and line two, line three and below, 3/16 inch, black letters
on white background. Emergency and UPS Equipment Nameplates: White letters on red
background.
B. Tape Labels: Brady polyester adhesive with minimum 3/16 inch, black letters on a white
background.
C. Wire and Cable Markers: Wrap around adhesive Brady label system, white with black
letters.
D. Conductor and Raceway Color Tape: Colored 3M vinyl electrical tape.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates or tape labels.
B. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines.
C. All equipment hard tags to conform to the following:

1. Line 1: Tool/Equipment Number, ¼ inch
2. Line 2: Description (Main Power, Chiller, Pump, Plug etc.), ¼ inch
3. Line 3: “Fed From”, 3/16 inch
4. Line 4: Panel/Switchboard (What panel is the Tool/Equipment fed from) and
circuit number, 3/16 inch
5. Voltage rating and Phasing, 3/16 inch
D. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts. Utilize rivets for interior/exterior work or

adhesive tape (polyurethane) for interior work. Secure nameplate to outside face of flush-
mounted panelboard doors in finished locations.
E. Use tape labels for identification of individual wall switches, Molded Case circuit
breakers (100A frame and above) and receptacles, control device stations, and boxes.
Junction and pull boxes shall be labeled with source and circuit number. Use Brady
typewritten adhesive tape labels.
704618 26 05 53
3.2 WIRE IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide proper phasing and wire markers on each phase, neutral, and ground conductor in
panelboards, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes where cables separate, and at load
connection. Wire installed in pull-through boxes and condulets is not required to be
labeled
1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Identify each with three-line flag label.
a. Line 1 - panel/source identification
b. Line 2 - circuit numbers
c. Line 3 - voltage / phasing
2. Control Wiring: Identify with control wire number as indicated on schematic and
interconnection diagrams or equipment manufacturer’s shop drawings.
3. Life Safety and Security System Wiring: Identify according to requirements
shown on life safety legend drawing.
4. Intrinsically Safe Conductors: Light blue.
5. Safely isolate and tag spare wires with pertinent associated circuit information
and identified as “SPARE”
a. Line 1 - panel / source identification and circuit numbers
b. Line 2 - voltage / phasing
c. Line 3 - “Spare”
6. Over 600 Volts: Provide wire labels on each conductor in all manholes, 35-kV,
5-kV switchgear and transformers, and at all load connections.
B. Identify conductors for power circuits with source, circuit number, switch location, and
phase. Provide labels similar to E-Z Tag or equivalent.
System Voltage
Conductor 35-kV and 480Y/277V 5-kV and 208Y/120V
Phase A Brown Black
Phase B Orange Red
Phase C Yellow Blue
Neutral Gray/White White
Grounding Green Green
Switch leg (lighting) 277V Purple 120V Pink
3.3 CABLE ASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide labels at each termination or cable separation into individual conductors
704618 26 05 53
1. Provide cable assembly and conduit labels per layout methods in paragraph 3.1
(C) above.
B. Labeling of heat trace cable to include cable operating voltage and wattage
3.4 PHONOLIC LAMINATED PLASTIC NAME PLATE ENGRAVING TAG
A. Panelboards, Special Boxes (i.e. Power Supply Box, Heat Trace), ,

Switchgear,Fused/Non fused Disconnect Switches,Individual stand alone Circuit
Breakers, Adjustable Frequency Drivers, Motor Starters, Uninterruptible Power Supply,
Automatic Transfer Switches, Motor Control buckets and Centers: Provide nameplates
of minimum letter height as scheduled below. Any alternate installation not covered in
theis spec. or project drawings submit request for additional information.
1. Install ALL Labels at locations indicated on drawings and/or at locations that are
viewable when possible from the operator’s location at the equipment. Install
hard tags and tape labels without interference with operation and maintenance of
equipment. DO NOT cover other instructions or labels.
2. HARD TAG SIZE: 2 inch by 4 inch

a. Line 1…Tool/Equipment/Panel Number (1/4 inch)
b. Line 2…Description of Equipment/Device(main Power, Chiller, Pump,
plug, etc…)(1/4 inch)
c. Line 3…FED FROM (3/16 inch)
d. Line 4…Panel/ Switch board Name from where the tool is fed from/
Equipment fed from ; Circuit Numbers (3/16 inch)
Example:
TOOL 7630 1/4”

1/4”
TPU SCRUBBER
3/16”
FED FROM
3/16”
M2WZ072J-A CKT#38,40,42
3/16”
480 VOLT 3 PHASE
B. Distrubtion panels Dead front for Individual Circuit Breakers:

1. HARD TAG SIZE 2 inch by 3 inch
a. Line 1…Equipment Number (1/4 inch)
b. Line 2…Description of Equipment (Main Power, Chiller, Pump,
Transformer, Sub panel, etc…)(1/4 inch)
c. Line 3…Fed From (3/16 inch)
d. Line 4…Panel/switch board Name from where the tool is fed from
/Equipment fed from ; Circuit Numbers (3/16 inch)
e. Line 5…Voltage Rating & Phasing (3/16 inch)
704618 26 05 53
Example:
M2WZ042D-A 1/4”
1/4”
SUB PANEL 3/16”
FED FROM 3/16”
M2WZ044M CKT#28,29,30 3/16”
480V 3PH/3W
Dry-Type Transformers:
2. HARD TAG SIZE: 2 inch by 4 inch
a. Line 1…Transformer number (1/4 inch)
b. Line 2… Feed To (pannel/Equipment number)(1/4 inch)
c. Line 3…Fed From (3/16 inch)
d. Line 4…Panel/ Switch board Name from where the transformer is fed
from; Circuit Numbers (3/16 inch)
e. Line 5…Primary Voltage Rating & Phasing (3PH/3W) – Secondary
Voltage Rating & Phasing(3/16 inch)
Example:
FNTT1E17A 1/4”
1/4”
FEED TO M2WZ044M-A 3/16”
FED FROM 3/16”
M2WZ044M CKT#28,29,30 3/16”
480V 3PH/3W – 120V/208V 3PH/4W
C. Uninterruptible Power Supply

1. The Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) will require two hard tags, each tag to
follow standard format.
a. The Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) will require a sign for the
equipment fed with two sources. WARNING to indicate that more than
one disconnecting means is required to de-endergize the equipment, per
NEC/UL/OSHA/ANSI or NETA guidelines that may apply
b. HARD TAG SIZE: 2 inch by 4 inch
c. Line 1… UPS name (1/4 inch)
d. Line 2… RECTIFIER FEED/BYPASS FEED (1/4 inch)
e. Line 3… FED FROM (3/16 inch)
f. Line 4… Pannel/substation name of where the UPS is fed from and
Circuit Numbers (3/16 inch)
g. Line 5… Voltage Rating & Phasing (3/16 inch)
704618 26 05 53
Example 1:
EU4U2Q15 1/4”
1/4”
RECTIFIER FEED 3/16”
FED FROM
3/16”
EE4D2Q15 CKT#1,3,5
3/16”
120V/208V 3PH/4W
Example 2:
EU4U2Q15 1/4”
1/4”
BYPASS FEED 3/16”
FED FROM 3/16”
EE4D2Q15 CKT#1,3,5 3/16”
120V/208V 3PH/4W
Example 3:
DANGER
FED FROM TWO SOURCES
D. Automatic Transfer Switches:

1. Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) will require two hard tags, each tag to follow
standard format
2. The Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) will require a sign for the equipment fed
with two sources. WARNING to indicate that more than one disconnect means is
required to de-endergize the equipment, per NEC/UL/OSHA/ANSI OR NETA
guidelines that may apply
3. DANGER label
a. HARD TAG SIZE: 2 inch by 4 inch
b. Line 1…Equipment Designation (ATS NUMBER) (1/4 inch)
c. Line 2…SOURCE 1/SOURCE 2 (1/4 inch)
d. Line 3…FED FROM (3/16 inch)
e. Line 4…SS/breaker/generator from where the ATS is fed from (3/16
inch)
f. Line 5…Primary Voltage Rating & Phasing (3PH/3W)(3/16 inch)
704618 26 05 53
Example 1:
ATS BB 1/4”
1/4”
UTILITY SOURCE 3/16”
FED FROM 3/16”
SUBSTATION 4 BREAKER C1 3/16”
480V 3PH/3W
Example 2:
ATS BB 1/4”
1/4”
GENERATOR SOURCE 3/16”
FED FROM
3/16”
EMERGENCY SWGB/Generator
3/16”
480V 3PH/3W
E. AFD/VFD AND ASSOCIATED MOTOR: Hard Tag at MCC, AFD/VFD. Labeling at

motor shall conform to Example for motor below.
1. Line 1…Equipment/AFD or VFD number (1/4 inch)
2. Line 2…System/Equipment description (1/4 inch)
3. Line 3… FED FROM (3/16 inch)
4. Line 4… Panel/Switch board Name from where the AFD/VFD is fed from;
Circuit/Bucket Numbers (3/16 inch)
5. Line 5…Primary Voltage Rating/Phasing HP (3PH/3W 200hp)(3/16 inch)
F. AFD/VFD Example: At AFV/VFD. MCC or panel feeding equipment.
Example:
AFD-10-1-07 1/4”
1/4”
MAH-07 3/16”
FED FROM 3/16”
FE4M1B23 BUCKET #B1 3/16”
480 VOLT 3PH/3W 200HP
704618 26 05 53
1. LABEL ON MOTOR:
a. Line 1… Equipment/AFD or VFD number (1/4 inch)
b. Line 2…System/Equipment description (1/4 inch)
c. Line 3…FED FROM (3/16 inch)
d. Line 4…AFD/VFD where motor is fed from; Circuit/Bucket Numbers
(3/16 inch)
e. Line 5…Primary Voltage Rating/Phasing HP (3PH/3W 200hp)(3/16
inch)
G. Motor Example: Label installed on motor.
MAH-10-1-07 1/4”
1/4”
MAH 3/16”
FED FROM 3/16”
AFD-10-1-07 3/16”
480 VOLT 3PH/3W 200HP
H. Unit Substation Transformers:

1. Line 1…Equipment number (1/2 inch)
2. Line 2…System/Equipment description (1/4 inch)
3. Line 3…Fed From Source (3/16 inch)
4. Line 4… Panel/ Switch board Name from where the transfomer is fed from or
equipment fed from ; Circuit Numbers (3/16 inch)
5. Line 5… Primary Voltage Rating & Phasing 3PH/3W – SecondaryVoltage
Rating & Phasing (3/16 inch)
Example
SUBSTATION 13A 1/4”

1/4”
TRANSFORMER 3/16”
FED FROM
3/16”
SWITCHGEAR 6 INTERRUPTER 1A
3/16”
13200V 3PH/3W – 208/120V 3PH/4W
I. Junction boxes larger than 12 inch X 12 inch above 10 feet above finished floor
1. Phonolic laminated Hard tag is to be placed on covers of all junction boxes 12
inch X 12 inch and larger installed above 10 feet off finish floor. The HARD
TAG should be viewable from the floor as much as possible. The hard tag should
be no smaller than 8 inch X 8 inch with 1 inch font.
704618 26 05 53
a. Line 1…JBOX (1 inch)
b. Line 2…System/Equipment description connected to (1 inch)
c. Line 3…FED FROM (1 inch)
d. Line 4…Panel substation Circuit/Bucket Numbers name of where the
Jbox is fed from (1 inch)
e. Line 5…Primary Voltage Rating/Phasing HP 3PH/3W (1 inch)
3.5 LIFE SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEM DEVICE IDENTIFICATION
A. Label devices with self-adhesive labels, 1/8-inch characters, black letters on white
background per life safety drawings.
B. Where view of device is obstructed by ceiling tile, place additional label on tile visible
from floor.
3.6 CONDUIT LABELING / COLOR CODING SCHEDULE
A. Label conduits at their termination with to and from designation in addition to color
coding at 10 foot intervals with the system color code listed in the following table.
System Color
34.5kV and 4,160V, 3-Phase: Conduits Painted in full length with Yellow
Yellow and stenciled with system voltage in every 10 foot intervals
Grounding Green
Facility Management System (FMS) and FMS-Controlled Blue and Black
Circuitry (low voltage)
General Control (non-FMS line voltage) Brown and White
Emergency Power (Includes Junction Boxes, Pull Boxes, Red
Receptacles, Switches and similar device covers)
UPS Red
Fire Alarm, Voice Evacuation Red
Closed-Circuit Television (CCTV) White
Security Gray
Gas Detection Red and Black
HPM Monitoring and Control Green and White
Intrinsically Safe Light Blue
3.7 BOX IDENTIFICATION
A. Use printed labels or nameplates where specified on Drawings, to identify circuits,

destinations, and spares on junction and pull box lids. Clarify detail inside larger boxes.
3.8 PANELBOARD COLOR CODE
A. Post neutral and phase color codes at each panelboard.
704618 26 05 53
3.9 SIGNAGE AND WARNING LABELS
A. Place signs at service equipment noting location of generator and uninterruptible power
supply systems.
B. Place signs at grounding electrode conductor noting location of remote emergency and
normal sources connected to grounding electrode conductor.
C. Provide warning ribbon on service laterals 12 inches minimum above underground

installation.
704618 26 05 53
3.10 IDENTIFICATION CODING
A. Electrical Equipment Identification (Except Hook-up Panels)

EXAMPLE: 3FN4MB23A-A
3F N 4 M 2 B23 A A
SEQUENTIAL LETTER FOR SUB‐EQUIPMENT

(WHEN REQUIRED)
SEQUENTIAL LETTER
COLUMN LOCATION
BUILDING LEVEL
FAB:301
0 TUNNEL
1 UTILITY
2 SUBFAB
3 FAB
4 SCRUBBER DECK
5 LOWER ROOF
HIGH
6 ROOF
CUP:300
0 GROUND
1 LEVEL 2
2 ROOF
EQUIPMENT TYPE:
BP EXTERNAL BYPASS BREAKER(S)
CB ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKER
D DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD
L LIGHTING PANELBOARD
MOTOR CONTROL
M CENTER
P POWER PANELBOARD
TT TRANSFORMER
U UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY ‐ UPS
VOLTAGE:
4 480 OR 480Y/277V
2 208 OR 208Y/120V
TYPE OF POWER:
N NORMAL POWER
E EMERGENCY POWER
U UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY ‐ UPS
BUILDING:
3F FAB 301
3U CUP 300
3T TUNNEL
S SITE
E B130
F FAB
U CUP
704618 26 05 53
B. Cable Tray Identification
EXAMPLE: 3F1E2A
3 1 E 2 A
SEQUENTIAL LETTER
LEVEL OF TRAY (TOP TO BOTTOM)

1 TOP LEVEL TRAY
2 MIDDLE LEVEL TRAY
3 BOTTOM LEVEL TRAY
TYPE OF TRAY
POWER 600V LADDER
E
TRAY
LIFE SAFETY SOLID BOTTOM TRAY
L
WITH A COVER AND 3 DIVIDERS
I I&C SOLID BOTTOM WITH COVER
HPM HAZARDOUS PRODUCTION MATERIAL
T TELECOM SOLID BOTTOM / CABLEOFIL
BUILDING LEVEL
FAB:301
0 TUNNEL
1 UTILITY
2 SUBFAB
3 FAB
4 SCRUBBER DECK
5 LOWER ROOF
HIGH
6
ROOF
CUP:300
0 GROUND
1 LEVEL 2
2 ROOF
BUILDING
3F FAB 301
3U CUP 300
3T TUNNEL
S SITE
E B130
F FAB
U CUP
704618 26 05 53
C. Circuit Identification
EXAMPLE: 3FC1003
3F C 1003
SEQUENTIAL LETTER
TYPE OF CIRCUIT
C CONTROL
M MEDIUM VOLTAGE (5kV ‐ 34.5kV)
L LOW VOLTAGE (below 600V)
BUILDING
3F FAB 301
3U CUP 300
3T TUNNEL
S SITE
E B130
F FAB
U CUP
704618 26 05 53
WITH BID
26 05 53-01 Catalog cutsheets, other descriptive

literature Per construction schedule
26 05 53-02 Sample of labels for each system Per construction schedule
END OF SECTION
704618 26 05 53
SECTION 26 08 00
COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:

1. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. D877, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating
Liquids Using Disk Electrodes.
b. D923, Standard Practice for Sampling Electrical Insulating Liquids.
c. D924, Standard Test Method for Dissipation Factor (or Power Factor) and Relative
Permittivity (Dielectric Constant) of Electrical Insulating Liquids.
d. D971, Standard Test Method for Interfacial Tension of Oil Against Water by the
Ring Method.
e. D974, Standard Test Method for Acid and Base Number by Color-Indicator
Titration.
f. D1298, Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), or
API Gravity of Crude Petroleum and Liquid Petroleum Products by Hydrometer
Method.
g. D1500, Standard Test Method for ASTM Color of Petroleum Products (ASTM
Color Scale).
h. D1524, Standard Test Method for Visual Examination of Used Electrical Insulating
Oils of Petroleum Origin in the Field.
i. D1533, Standard Test Method for Water in Insulating Liquids by Coulometric Karl
Fischer Titration.
j. D1816, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Oils
of Petroleum Origin Using VDE Electrodes.
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
a. 43, Recommended Practice for Testing Insulating Resistance of Rotating Machinery.
b. 48, Standard Test Procedures and Requirements for Alternating-Current Cable
Terminators Used on Shielded Cables Having Laminated Insulation Rated 2.5 kV
through 765 kV or Extruded Insulation Rated 2.5kV through 500kV.
c. 81, Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface
Potentials of a Ground System.
d. 95, Recommended Practice for Insulation Testing of AC Electric Machinery (2300V
and Above) with High Direct Voltage.
e. 386, Standard for Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution
Systems Above 600V.
f. 400, Guide for Field Testing and Evaluation of the Insulation of Shielded Power
Cable Systems.
g. 450, Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented
Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications.
h. C2, National Electrical Safety Code.
704618 Commissioning of Electrical Systems

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 1
i. C37.20.1, Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker
Switchgear.
j. C37.20.2, Standard for Metal-Clad Switchgear.
k. C37.20.3, Standard for Metal-Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear.
l. C37.23, Standard for Metal-Enclosed Bus.
m. IEEE PC37.122.2TM/D15-2010 – Draft Guide for the Application of Gas-Insulated
Substations 1 kV to 52 kV.
n. C62.33, Standard Test Specifications for Varistor Surge-Protective Devices.
3. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA):
a. S-93-639, 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cables for Use in the Transmission and
Distribution of Electric Energy.
4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. AB 4, Guidelines for Inspection and Preventive Maintenance of Molded Case
Circuit Breakers Used in Commercial and Industrial Applications.
b. PB 2, Deadfront Distribution Switchboards.
c. WC 74, 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the Transmission and Distribution
of Electric Energy.
5. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA): ATS, Acceptance Testing
Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
b. 70B, Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment Maintenance.
c. 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
d. 101, Life Safety Code.
7. National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET).
8. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): CFR 29, Part 1910,
Occupational Safety and Health Standards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Submit 30 days prior to performing inspections or tests:
a. Schedule for performing inspection and tests.
b. List of references to be used for each test.
c. Sample copy of equipment and materials inspection form(s).
d. Sample copy of individual device test form.
e. Sample copy of individual system test form.
2. Energization Plan: Prior to initial energization of electrical distribution equipment;
include the following:
a. Owner’s representative sign-off form for complete and accurate arc flash labeling
and proper protective device settings for equipment to be energized.
b. Staged sequence of initial energization of electrical equipment.
c. Lock-Out-Tag-Out plan for each stage of the progressive energization.
d. Barricading, signage, and communication plan notifying personnel of newly
energized equipment.
3. Submit test or inspection reports and certificates for each electrical item tested within
30 days after completion of test:
4. Operation and Maintenance Data:

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 2
a. After test or inspection reports and certificates have been reviewed by Engineer and
returned, insert a copy of each in Operation and Maintenance Manual.
5. Programmable Settings: At completion of Performance Demonstration Test, submit final
hardcopy printout and electronic files on compact disc of as-left setpoints, programs, and
device configuration files for:
a. Protective relays.
b. Intelligent overload relays.
c. Variable frequency drives.
d. Power metering devices.
e. Uninterruptible power supplies.
f. Electrical communications modules.
A. Testing Firm Qualifications:

1. Corporately and financially independent organization functioning as an unbiased testing
authority.
2. Professionally independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of electrical
equipment and systems being tested.
3. Employer of engineers and technicians regularly engaged in testing and inspecting of
electrical equipment, installations, and systems.
4. Supervising engineer accredited as Certified Electrical Test Technologist by NICET or
NETA and having a minimum of 5 years’ testing experience on similar projects.
5. Technicians certified by NICET or NETA.
6. Assistants and apprentices assigned to Project at ratio not to exceed two certified to one
noncertified assistant or apprentice.
7. Registered Professional Engineer to provide comprehensive Project report outlining
services performed, results of such services, recommendations, actions taken, and
opinions.
8. In compliance with OSHA CFR 29, Part 1910.7 criteria for accreditation of testing
laboratories or a full member company of NETA.
B. Test equipment shall have an operating accuracy equal to or greater than requirements
established by NETA ATS.
C. Test instrument calibration shall be in accordance with NETA ATS.
1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Perform inspection and electrical tests after equipment listed herein has been installed.
B. Perform tests with apparatus de-energized whenever feasible.
C. Inspection and electrical tests on energized equipment shall be:

1. Scheduled with Owner prior to de-energization.
2. Minimized to avoid extended period of interruption to the operating plant equipment.
D. Notify Owner at least 24 hours prior to performing tests on energized electrical equipment.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Tests and inspections shall establish:

1. Electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer’s tolerances and
standards.
2. Installation operates properly.
3. Equipment is suitable for energization.
4. Installation conforms to requirements of Contract Documents and NFPA 70, NFPA 70E,
NFPA 101, and IEEE C2.
B. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NETA ATS, industry standards, and
manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Set, test, and calibrate protective relays , circuit breakers , power monitoring meters, and other
applicable devices.
D. Adjust mechanisms and moving parts of equipment for free mechanical movement.
E. Adjust and set electronic relays and sensors to correspond to operating conditions, or as
recommended by manufacturer.
F. Verify nameplate data for conformance to Contract Documents and approved Submittals.
G. Align and level equipment.
H. Anchor electrical equipment found to be inadequately anchored.
I. Tighten accessible bolted connections, including wiring connections, with calibrated torque
wrench/screw driver to manufacturer’s recommendations, or as otherwise specified in
NETA ATS.
J. Clean contaminated surfaces with cleaning solvents as recommended by manufacturer.
K. Lubricate of applicable moving parts.
L. Inform Engineer of working clearances not in accordance with NFPA 70.
M. Investigate and repair or replace:

1. Electrical items that fail tests.
2. Active components not operating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Damaged electrical equipment.
N. Electrical Enclosures:
1. Remove foreign material and moisture from enclosure interior.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 4
2. Vacuum and wipe clean enclosure interior.
3. Remove corrosion found on metal surfaces.
4. Repair or replace, as determined by Engineer or Owner door and panel sections having
dented surfaces.
5. Repair or replace, as determined by Engineer or Owner poor fitting doors and panel
sections.
6. Repair or replace improperly operating latching, locking, or interlocking devices.
7. Replace missing or damaged hardware.
8. Finish:
a. Provide matching paint and touch up scratches and mars.
b. If required because of extensive damage, as determined by Engineer, or Owner,
refinish entire assembly.
O. Replace fuses and circuit breakers that do not conform to size and type required by the
Contract Documents or approved Submittals.
P. Replace transformer insulating oil not in compliance with ASTM D923.
3.2 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP
A. Voltage Field Test:

1. Check voltage at point of termination of power company supply system to Project when
installation is essentially complete and is in operation.
2. Check voltage amplitude and balance between phases for loaded and unloaded
conditions.
3. Record supply voltage (all three phases simultaneously on same graph) for 24 hours
during normal working day.
a. Submit Voltage Field Test Report within 5 days of test.
4. Unbalance Corrections:
a. Make written request to power company to correct condition if balance (as defined
by NEMA) exceeds 1 percent, or if voltage varies throughout the day and from
loaded to unloaded condition more than plus or minus 4 percent of nominal.
b. Obtain written certification from responsible power company official that voltage
variations and unbalance are within their normal standards if corrections are not
made.
B. Equipment Line Current Tests:

1. Check line current in each phase for each piece of equipment.
2. Make line current check after power company has made final adjustments to supply
voltage magnitude or balance.
3. If phase current for a piece of equipment is above rated nameplate current, prepare
Equipment Line Phase Current Report that identifies cause of problem and corrective
action taken.
3.3 SWITCHGEAR ASSEMBLIES
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Insulator damage and contaminated surfaces.
2. Proper barrier and shutter installation and operation.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 5
3. Proper operation of indicating devices.
4. Improper blockage of air-cooling passages.
5. Proper operation of drawout elements.
6. Integrity and contamination of bus insulation system.
7. Check door and device interlocking system by:
a. Closure attempt of device when door is in OFF or OPEN position.
b. Opening attempt of door when device is in ON or CLOSED position.
8. Check nameplates for proper identification of:
a. Equipment title and tag number with latest one-line diagram.
b. Pushbutton.
c. Control switch.
d. Pilot light.
e. Control relay.
f. Circuit breaker.
g. Indicating meter.
9. Verify fuse and circuit breaker ratings, sizes, and types conform to those specified.
10. Check bus and cable connections for high resistance by low resistance ohmmeter and
calibrated torque wrench applied to bolted joints.
a. Ohmic value to be zero.
b. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise
specified by manufacturer.
c.
11. Check operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems by:
a. Closure attempt for locked open devices.
b. Opening attempt for locked closed devices.
12. Verify performance of each control device and feature.
13. Control Wiring:
a. Compare wiring to local and remote control and protective devices with elementary
diagrams.
b. Proper conductor lacing and bundling.
c. Proper conductor identification.
d. Proper conductor lugs and connections.
14. Exercise active components.
15. Perform phasing check on double-ended equipment to ensure proper bus phasing from
each source.
B. Electrical Tests:
1. Insulation Resistance Tests:
a. Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
b. Each phase of each bus section.
c. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute.
d. With switches and breakers open.
e. Control wiring except that connected to solid state components.
f. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by
manufacturer.
2. Overpotential Tests:
a. Applied ac or dc voltage and test procedure in accordance with C37.20.1 and
NEMA PB 2.Alternatively use NETA ATS, Table 100.2.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 6
d. Test results evaluated on a pass/fail basis.
3. Current Injection Tests:
a. For entire current circuit in each section.
b. Secondary injection for current flow of 1 ampere.
c. Test current at each device.
4. Control Wiring:
a. Apply secondary voltage to control power and potential circuits.
b. Check voltage levels at each point on terminal boards and each device terminal.
5. Operational Test:
a. Initiate control devices.
b. Check proper operation of control system in each section.
3.4 PANELBOARDS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Include the following inspections and related work:
1. Inspect for defects and physical damage, labeling, and nameplate compliance with
requirements of up-to-date drawings and panelboard schedules.
2. Exercise and perform operational tests of mechanical components and other operable
devices in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction manual.
3. Check panelboard mounting, area clearances, and alignment and fit of components.
4. Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to
manufacturer’s instructions for proper torque values.
5. Perform visual and mechanical inspection for overcurrent protective devices.
B. Electrical Tests: Include the following items performed in accordance with manufacturer’s
instruction:
d. With breakers open.
e. With breakers closed.
f. Control wiring except that connected to solid state components.
g. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by
manufacturer.
2. Ground continuity test ground bus to system ground.
3.5 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS

1. Physical and insulator damage.
2. Proper winding connections.
3. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise
4. Defective wiring.
5. Proper operation of fans, indicators, and auxiliary devices.
6. Removal of shipping brackets, fixtures, or bracing.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 7
7. Free and properly installed resilient mounts.
8. Cleanliness and improper blockage of ventilation passages.
9. Verify tap-changer is set at correct ratio for rated output voltage under normal operating
conditions.
10. Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground after energization
and prior to loading.
a. Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.5 for
each:
1) Winding-to-winding.
2) Winding-to-ground.
b. Test Duration: 10 minutes with resistances tabulated at 30 seconds, 1 minute, and
10 minutes.
c. Results temperature corrected in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.14.
d. Temperature corrected insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic
values established by manufacturer.
e. Insulation resistance test results to compare within 1 percent of adjacent windings.
2. Perform tests and adjustments for fans, controls, and alarm functions as suggested by
manufacturer.
3.6 LIQUID FILLED TRANSFORMERS

1. Physical and insulator damage.
2. Proper winding connections.
3. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise
4. Defective wiring.
5. Proper operation of fans, indicators, and auxiliary devices.
6. Effective core and equipment grounding.
7. Removal of shipping brackets, fixtures, or bracing.
8. Tank leaks and proper liquid level.
10. Verify tap-changer is set at correct ratio for rated voltage under normal operating
conditions.
11. Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground after energization
and prior to loading.
a. Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.5 for
each:
b. Test Duration: 10 minutes with resistances tabulated at 30 seconds, 1 minute, and
10 minutes.
c. Results temperature corrected in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.14.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 8
d. Temperature corrected insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic
values established by manufacturer.
e. Insulation resistance test results to compare within 1 percent of adjacent windings.
2. Perform tests and adjustments for fans, controls, and alarm functions as suggested by
manufacturer.
3. Sample insulating oil in accordance with ASTM D923 and have laboratory test for:
a. Dielectric breakdown voltage in accordance with ASTM D877 or ASTM D1816.
b. Acid neutralization number in accordance with ASTM D974.
c. Interfacial tension in accordance with ASTM D971.
d. Color in accordance with ASTM D1500.
e. Visual condition in accordance with ASTM D1524.
f. Specific gravity in accordance with ASTM D1298.
g. Water content, in parts per million, in accordance with ASTM D1533.
h. Dielectric fluid test results in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.4.
i. Power factor at 25 degrees C and at 100 degrees, in accordance with ASTM D924.
j. Maximum power factor, corrected to 20 degrees C, in accordance with
manufacturer’s specifications.
3.7 LOW VOLTAGE CABLES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM

1. Inspect each individual exposed power cable No. 1 and larger for:
a. Physical damage.
b. Proper connections in accordance with single-line diagram.
c. Cable bends not in conformance with manufacturer’s minimum allowable bending
radius where applicable.
d. Color coding conformance with specification.
e. Proper circuit identification.
2. Mechanical Connections For:
a. Proper lug type for conductor material.
b. Proper lug installation.
c. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise
3. Shielded Instrumentation Cables For:
a. Proper shield grounding.
b. Proper terminations.
c. Proper circuit identification.
4. Control Cables For:
a. Proper termination.
b. Proper circuit identification.
5. Cables Terminated Through Window Type CTs: Verify neutrals and grounds are
terminated for correct operation of protective devices.
B. Electrical Tests for Conductors No. 1 and Larger:

a. Utilize 1,000-volt dc megohmmeter for 600-volt insulated conductors and 500-volt
dc megohmmeter for 300-volt insulated conductors.
b. Test each conductor with respect to ground and to adjacent conductors for 1 minute.
c. Evaluate ohmic values by comparison with conductors of same length and type.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 9
d. Investigate values less than 50 megohms.
2. Continuity test by ohmmeter method to ensure proper cable connections.
C. Low-voltage cable tests may be performed by installer in lieu of independent testing firm.
3.8 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES, 35 kV MAXIMUM

1. Inspect each individual exposed cable for:
a. Physical damage plus jacket and insulation condition.
b. Proper connections in accordance with single-line diagram or approved Submittals.
c. Proper shield grounding.
d. Proper cable support.
e. Proper cable termination.
f. Cable bends not in conformance with manufacturer’s minimum allowable bending
radius.
g. Fireproof tape applied in common cable areas.
h. Circuit and phase identification.
2. Mechanical Connections:
a. Proper lug type for conductor material.
specified by manufacturers.
3. Conductors Terminated Through Window Type CTs: neutrals and grounds are terminated
for correct operation of protective devices.
a. Utilize 2,500-volt megohmmeter for 5 kV conductors and 5,000-volt megohmmeter
for 35 kVconductors.
b. Test each cable individually with remaining cables and shields grounded.
c. Test each conductor with respect to ground and to adjacent conductors for 1 minute.
d. Evaluate ohmic values by comparison with conductors of same length and type.
e. Investigate values less than 50 megohms.
2. Shield Continuity Tests:
a. By ohmmeter method on each section of conductor.
b. Investigate values in excess of 10 ohms per 1,000 feet of conductors.
3. Acceptance Tests:
a. In accordance with IEEE 400, ICEA S-93-639, NEMA WC 74, ICEA S-94-649, and
ICEA S-97-682 for insulated conductors.
b. Each conductor section tested with:
1) Splices and terminations in place but disconnected from equipment.
2) Remaining conductors and shields grounded in accordance with IEEE 400.
c. Apply maximum test voltage per NETA ATS, Table 100.6, based on method (DC,
AC, PD or VLF) used.
d. Measure only leakage current associated with conductor.
e. Utilize guard ring or field reduction sphere to suppress corona at disconnected
terminations.
f. Maximum test voltage shall not exceed limits for terminators specified in IEEE 48,
IEEE 386, or manufacturer’s specifications.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 10
g. Apply test voltage in a minimum of five equal increments until maximum acceptable
test voltage is reached.
1) Increments not to exceed ac voltage rating of conductor.
2) Record dc leakage current at each step after a constant stabilization time
consistent with system charging current.
h. Raise conductor to specified maximum test voltage and hold for 15 minutes or as
specified by conductor manufacturer. Record leakage current at 30 seconds and
1 minute, and at 1-minute intervals, thereafter.
i. Immediately following test, ground conductor for adequate time period to drain
insulation stored charge.
j. Test results evaluated on a pass/fail basis.
3.9 METAL ENCLOSED BUSWAYS

1. Inspect for:
a. Bracing, suspension alignment, and enclosure ground.
b. Check if orientation of ventilated bus provides proper cooling in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions and if ventilation openings are not blocked.
c. Phase relationship using continuity test.
d. Supports at maximum allowable intervals.
2. Check outdoor rated busways for:
a. Bus orientation for breathers or weep-hole plugs.
b. Removal of weep-hole plugs.
c. Installation of joint shields.
d. Space heaters operation.
a. Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1
d. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by
manufacturer.
3.10 SAFETY SWITCHES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM

1. Blade pressure and alignment.
2. Operation of switch operating handle.
3. Mechanical support for each fuse.
4. Contact-to-contact tightness between fuse clip and fuse.
5. Cable connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12.
6. Phase barrier material and installation.
7. Verify fuse sizes and types correspond to one-line diagram or approved Submittals.
8. Perform mechanical operational test and verify electrical and mechanical interlocking
system operation and sequencing.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 11
b. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute on each pole.
c. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by
manufacturer.
2. Contact Resistance Tests:
a. Contact resistance in microhms across each switch blade and fuse holder.
b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles or similar switches.
3.11 MOLDED AND INSULATED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. General: Inspection and testing limited to circuit breakers rated 100 amperes and larger and to
motor circuit protector breakers rated 100 amperes and larger.
B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Mounting.
2. Conductor size.
3. Feeder designation according to nameplate and one-line diagram.
4. Cracked casings.
5. Connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12.
6. Operate breaker to verify smooth operation.
7. Compare frame size and trip setting with circuit breaker schedules or one-line diagram.
8. Verify that terminals are suitable for 75 degrees C rated insulated conductors.
C. Electrical Tests:
a. Utilize 1,000-volt dc megohmmeter for 480-volt and 600-volt circuit breakers [and
500-volt dc megohmmeter for 240-volt circuit breakers].
b. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts opened for 1 minute.
c. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts closed for 1 minute.
d. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
a. Contact resistance in microhms across each pole.
b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles and similar breakers.
3. Primary Current Injection Test to Verify:
a. Long-time minimum pickup and delay.
b. Short-time pickup and delay.
c. Ground fault pickup and delay.
d. Instantaneous pickup by run-up or pulse method.
e. Trip characteristics of adjustable trip breakers shall be within manufacturer’s
published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors.
f. Trip times shall be within limits established by NEMA AB 4, Table 5-3.
Alternatively, use NETA ATS, Table 100.7.
g. Instantaneous pickup value shall be within values established by NEMA AB 4,
Table 5-4. Alternatively, use NETA ATS, Table 100.8.
3.12 LOW VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 12
1. Mounting, cell fit, and element alignment.
2. Operation of racking interlocks.
3. Check for damaged arc chutes.
4. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12.
5. Perform mechanical operational and contact alignment tests in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Check operation of closing and tripping functions of trip devices by activating ground
fault relays, undervoltage shunt relays, and other auxiliary protective devices.
7. Verify primary and secondary contact wipe, gap setting, and other dimensions vital to
breaker operation are correct.
8. Check operation and condition of charging motor, motor brushes, associated mechanism,
and limit switches.
9. Check operation of electrically operated breakers in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
10. Check for adequate lubrication on contact, moving, and sliding surfaces.
a. Utilize 1,000-volt dc megohmmeter for 480-volt and 600-volt circuit breakers.
a. Contact resistance in microhms across each pole.
3. Primary Current Injection Test to Verify:
a. Long-time minimum pickup and delay.
b. Short-time pickup and delay.
c. Ground fault pickup and delay.
d. Instantaneous pickup by run-up or pulse method.
e. Trip characteristic when adjusted to setting sheet parameters shall be within
manufacturer’s published time-current tolerance band.
3.13 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKERS

1. Element alignment.
2. Operation of cubicle shutters and racking mechanism.
3. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12.
4. Perform mechanical operational tests on breaker and its operating mechanism in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, plus check:
a. Pull rod adjustment.
b. Trip latch clearance.
c. Overtravel stops.
d. Wipe and gap setting.
5. Perform breaker travel and velocity analysis in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions; confirm values are within manufacturer’s acceptable limits.
6. Check contact erosion indicators in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
7. With breaker in TEST position:

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 13
a. Trip and close breaker with control switch.
b. Trip breaker by manually operating each protective relay.
a. Utilize 2,500-volt dc megohmmeter for 5-kV circuit breakers.
a. Between the line and load stab of closed contact resistance in microhms across each
pole.
a. Maximum applied ac or dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.19.
b. Each pole-to-ground with other poles grounded and contacts closed for 1 minute.
c. Test results evaluated on pass/fail basis.
4. Minimum pickup voltage tests on trip and close coils.
5. Control Wiring Tests:
a. Insulation resistance test at 1,000-volt dc on control wiring, except that connected to
solid state components.
b. Insulation resistance to be 1 megohm minimum.
6. Vacuum bottle overpotential integrity test across each vacuum bottle with breaker in
OPEN position, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Power Factor Test (Each Phase):
a. With breaker in both OPEN and CLOSED position.
b. Compare power factor and arc chute watt loss with adjacent poles or manufacturer’s
published data.
8. Power Factor Test (Each Bushing):
a. Utilize conductive straps and hot collar procedures if bushings are not equipped with
power factor tap.
b. Power factor and capacitance test results within nameplate rating of bushings.
3.14 PROTECTIVE RELAYS
A. Inspect, test and calibrate in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, data
provided, and:
1. Verify that relay is correct unit for application with proper characteristics and
ranges as specified.
2. Inspect relay for damage and confirm that components are in operating condition.
3. Verify relay is set for correct operating time and currents and test for proper
operation. Replace relays that fail to operate properly. After testing, install
tamper-proof seal
3.15 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS

1. Visually check current, potential, and control transformers for:
a. Cracked insulation.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 14
b. Broken leads or defective wiring.
c. Proper connections.
d. Adequate clearances between primary and secondary circuit wiring.
2. Verify Mechanically:
a. Grounding and shorting connections have good contact.
b. Withdrawal mechanism and grounding operation, when applicable, operate properly.
3. Verify proper primary and secondary fuse sizes for potential transformers.
1. Current Transformer Tests:
a. Insulation resistance test of transformer and wiring-to-ground at 1,000 volts dc for
30 seconds.
b. Polarity test.
2. Potential Transformer Tests:
a. Insulation resistance test at test voltages in accordance with NETA ATS,
Table 100.9, for 1 minute on:
b. Polarity test to verify polarity marks or H1-X1 relationship as applicable.
3. Insulation resistance measurement on instrument transformer shall not be less than that
shown in NETA ATS, Table 100.5.
3.16 METERING

1. Meter connections in accordance with appropriate diagrams.
2. Verify meter multipliers.
3. Verify meter types and scales conform to Contract Documents.
4. Check calibration of meters at cardinal points.
5. Check calibration of electrical transducers.
3.17 GROUNDING SYSTEMS

1. Equipment and circuit grounds in panelboard, and switchgear assemblies for proper
connection and tightness.
2. Ground bus connections in panelboard, and switchgear assemblies for proper termination
and tightness.
3. Effective transformer core and equipment grounding.
4. Accessible connections to grounding electrodes for proper fit and tightness.
5. Accessible exothermic-weld grounding connections to verify that molds were fully filled
and proper bonding was obtained.
1. Fall-of-Potential Test:
a. In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.5 for measurement of main ground
system’s resistance.
b. Main ground electrode system resistance to ground to be no greater than 5 ohm(s).
2. Two-Point Direct Method Test:

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 15
a. In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.1 for measurement of ground resistance
between main ground system, equipment frames, and system neutral and derived
neutral points.
b. Equipment ground resistance shall not exceed main ground system resistance by
0.50 ohm.
3. Neutral Bus Isolation:
a. Test each neutral bus individually with neutral bonding jumper removed at service
entrance or separately derived system.
b. Evaluate ohmic values by measuring resistance between ground bus and neutral bus.
c. Investigate values less than 50 megohms.
3.18 GROUND FAULT SYSTEMS
A. Inspection and testing limited to:

1. Zero sequence grounding systems.
2. Residual ground fault systems.
B. Visual and Manual Inspection:

1. Neutral main bonding connection to ensure:
a. Zero sequence sensing system is grounded ahead of neutral disconnect link.
b. Ground strap sensing system is grounded through sensing device.
c. Neutral ground conductor is solidly grounded.
2. Verify control power has adequate capacity for system.
3. Manually operate monitor panels for:
a. Trip test.
b. No trip test.
c. Nonautomatic rest.
4. Zero sequence system for symmetrical alignment of core balance transformers about
current carrying conductors.
5. Relay check for pickup and time under simulated ground fault conditions.
6. Verify nameplate identification by device operation.
1. Test system neutral insulation resistance with neutral ground link removed; minimum
1 megohm.
2. Determine relay pickup by primary current injection at the sensor. Relay pickup current
within plus or minus 10 percent of device dial or fixed setting.
3. Test relay timing by injecting 300 percent of pick-up current or as specified by
manufacturer. Relay operating time in accordance with manufacturer’s time-current
characteristic curves.
4. Test system operation at 55 percent rated control voltage, if applicable.
5. Test zone interlock system by simultaneous sensor current injection and monitoring zone
blocking functions.
3.19 AC INDUCTION MOTORS
A. General: Inspection and testing limited to motors rated 5 horsepower and larger.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 16
1. Proper electrical and grounding connections.
2. Shaft alignment.
3. Blockage of ventilating air passageways.
4. Operate motor and check for:
a. Excessive mechanical and electrical noise.
b. Overheating.
c. Correct rotation.
d. Check vibration detectors, resistance temperature detectors, or motor inherent
protectors for functionality and proper operation.
e. Excessive vibration, in excess of values in NETA ATS, Table 100.10.
5. Check operation of space heaters.
a. In accordance with IEEE 43 at test voltages established by NETA ATS, Table 100.1
for:
1) Motors above 200 horsepower for 10-minute duration with resistances
tabulated at 30 seconds, 1 minute, and 10 minutes.
2) Motors 200 horsepower and less for 1-minute duration with resistances
tabulated at 30 seconds and 60 seconds.
b. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by
manufacturers.
2. Calculate polarization index ratios for motors above 200 horsepower. Investigate index
ratios less than 1.5 for Class A insulation and 2.0 for Class B insulation.
3. Insulation resistance test on insulated bearings in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
4. Measure running current and voltage, and evaluate relative to load conditions and
nameplate full-load amperes.
3.20 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS

1. Insulator damage and contaminated surfaces.
2. Barrier and shutter installation and operation.
3. Operation of indicating devices.
4. Overload protection.
5. Blockage of air-cooling passages.
6. Operation of drawout elements.
8. Check door and device interlocking system by:
a. Closure attempt of device when door is in OPEN position.
b. Opening attempt of door when device is in ON position.
9. Check nameplates for proper identification of each:
a. Equipment title and tag number with latest one-line diagram.
b. Pushbutton.
c. Control switch.
d. Pilot light.
e. Control relay.
f. Circuit breaker.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 17
g. Indicating meter.
10. Verify fuse sizes and types conform to Contract Documents or approved Submittal.
11. Check bus connections for high resistance by low resistance ohmmeter and calibrated
torque wrench applied to bolted joints:
a. Ohmic value to be zero.
c. Check operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems by:
d. Closure attempt for locked open devices.
e. Opening attempt for locked closed devices.
12. Verify performance of each control device and feature furnished as part of motor control
center.
13. Control Wiring:
a. Compare wiring to local and remote control, and protective devices with elementary
diagrams.
b. Check conductor lacing and bundling.
c. Check conductor identification.
d. Check conductor lugs and connections.
14. Exercise active components.
15. Inspect magnetic contactors for:
a. Correct mechanical operations.
b. Correct contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure.
c. Correct torque of connections.
16. Perform phasing check on double-ended motor control centers to ensure proper bus
phasing from each source.
b. Bus section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute on each phase.
c. Contactor phase-to-ground and across open contacts for 1 minute on each phase.
d. Starter section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground on each phase with starter
contacts closed and protective devices open.
e. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
a. Maximum applied ac or dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.9.
b. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute for each phase of each bus section.
c. Test results evaluated on pass/fail basis.
3. Bottle integrity test for vacuum contactors in accordance with manufacturer’s procedure.
4. Test by Primary Current Injection:
a. Overload units at sensors using 300 percent of motor full-load current: Overload trip
times to be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data.
b. Check voltage levels at each point on terminal boards and each device terminal.
5. Control Wiring Tests:
a. Apply secondary voltage on control power and potential circuits.
b. Check voltage levels at each point on terminal boards and at each device terminal.
c. Insulation resistance test at 1,000-volt dc on control wiring, except that connected to
solid state components: Insulation resistance to be 1 megohm minimum.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 18
6. Test indicating and monitoring devices for proper operation.
7. Perform setup and testing of solid state relays and multifunction protective devices in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
8. Measure Contact and Power Fuse Resistance:
a. Contact resistance shall not exceed manufacturer’s recommended values.
b. Resistance of power fuse not to deviate more than 15 percent between identical
fuses.
3.21 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

1. Check doors and panels interlocks.
2. Check connections for high resistance by calibrated torque wrench applied to bolted
joints.
3. Check positive mechanical and electrical interlock between normal and alternate sources.
4. Operational Checks:
a. Manual transfer function switch.
b. Generator under load and nonload conditions.
c. Auto-exerciser of generator under load and no-load conditions.
5. Verify settings and operation of control devices.
a. Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1, for
each phase with switch CLOSED in both source positions.
b. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute.
c. Test values in accordance with manufacturer’s published data.
2. Contact Resistance Test:
a. Contact resistance in microhms across each switch blade for both source positions.
b. Investigate values exceeding 500 micro-ohms.
c. Investigate values deviating from adjacent pole by more than 50 percent.
3. Set and calibrate in accordance with Specifications, manufacturer’s recommendations,
and Coordination Study or information provided by CH2M.
a. Voltage and frequency sensing relays.
b. Time delay relays.
c. Engine start and shutdown relays.
4. Perform automatic transfer tests by:
a. Simulating loss of normal power.
b. Return to normal power.
c. Simulating loss of alternate power.
d. Simulating single-phase conditions for normal and alternate sources.
5. Monitor and verify operation and timing of:
a. Normal and alternate voltage sensing relays.
b. Engine-start sequence.
c. Timing delay upon transfer and retransfer.
d. Engine cool down and shutdown.
e. Interlocks and limit switch functions.
f. Engine cool down and shutdown feature.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 19
3.22 BATTERY SYSTEM

1. Physical damage and electrolyte leakage.
2. Evidence of corrosion.
3. Intercell bus link integrity.
4. Battery cable insulation damage and contaminated surfaces.
5. Operating conditions of ventilating equipment.
6. Visual check of electrolyte level.
1. Measure:
a. Bank charging voltage.
b. Individual cell voltage.
c. Electrolyte specific gravity in each cell.
d. Measured test values to be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data.
2. Verify during recharge mode:
a. Charging rates from charger.
b. Individual cell acceptance of charge.
3. Load tests for integrity and capacity; test values in accordance with IEEE 450.
3.23 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SURGE ARRESTORS AND SURGE CAPACITORS
A. Visual Inspection:
1. Ground connections to ground bus.
2. Shortest practical jumper connections to line.
1. Grounding electrode resistance test in accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.5 using
three-point fall-of-potential method.
2. Insulation power factor.
3. Insulation resistance.
4. RF noise test using Stoddart noise test set with applied voltage of 1.18 times maximum
continuous operating voltage.
5. Insulation power factor leakage current, watts loss, and insulation resistance test in
accordance with manufacturer’s test values. RIV value not to exceed 10 microvolts above
background noise.
6. Leakage current and watts loss tests.
3.24 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS

1. Verify capacitors are connected in proper configuration.
2. For units switched with motors, verify capacitor rating does not exceed motor nameplate
maximum allowable value.
1. Insulation resistance, each pole-to-case and pole-to-ground; values in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendation.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 20
2. Capacitance for pole-to-pole combinations; ratings differing more than plus 15 percent,
minus 0 percent from manufacturer’s values shall be replaced.
3. Resistance of internal discharge arrestors with analog volt-ohmmeter; resistance to be in
excess of 2 megohms.
3.25 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEMS

1. Grounding.
2. Blockage of ventilating passageways.
3. Water jacket heater operation.
4. Integrity of engine cooling and fuel supply systems.
5. Excessive mechanical and electrical noise.
6. Overheating of engine or generator.
7. Installation of vibration isolators.
8. Cooling liquid type and level.
9. Operate engine-generator and check for:
a. Excessive mechanical and electrical noise.
b. Overheating.
c. Correct rotation.
d. Check resistance temperature detectors or generator inherent thermal protectors for
functionality and proper operation.
e. Excessive vibration.
10. Verify voltage regulator and governor operation will cause unit speed and output voltage
to stabilize at proper values within reasonable length of time.
11. Proper operation of meters and instruments.
12. Compare generator nameplate rating and connection with one-line diagram or approved
Submittal.
13. Verify engine-generator operation with adjustable frequency drives energized and
operating under normal load conditions.
B. Electrical and Mechanical Tests:

1. Cold start test by interrupting normal power source with test load consisting of connected
building load to verify:
a. Transfer switch operation.
b. Automatic starting operation.
c. Operating ability of engine-generator.
d. Overcurrent devices capability to withstand inrush currents.
2. Phase rotation tests.
3. Test engine protective shutdown features for:
a. Low oil pressure.
b. Overtemperature.
c. Overspeed.
4. Vibration baseline test on generator sets in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
5. Load bank test with reactors and resistors adjusted to 80 percent power factor for each
load step. Record voltage, frequency, load current, oil pressure, and engine coolant
temperature at 15-minute intervals:
a. 25 percent applied load for 30 minutes.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 21
b. 50 percent applied load for 30 minutes.
c. 75 percent applied load for 30 minutes.
d. 100 percent applied load for 3 hours.
e. Load test results to demonstrate ability of unit to deliver rated load for test period.
6. One-Step Rated kW Load Pickup Test:
a. Perform test immediately after performing load bank test.
b. Apply rated load, minus largest rated hp motor, to generator.
c. Start largest rated horsepower motor and record voltage drop for 20 cycles minimum
with high-speed chart recorder or digital storage oscilloscope.
d. Compare voltage drop with maximum allowable voltage dip for specified starting
situation.
3.26 THERMOGRAPHIC SURVEY
A. Provide thermographic survey per NETA ATS Table 100.18 of connections associated with
incoming service conductors, bus work, and branch feeder conductors No. 4/0 and larger at
each:
1. Medium and low voltage switchgear.
2. Unit substation.
3. Medium voltage motor control center.
4. Distribution Panelboard.
5. Provide thermographic survey of feeder conductors No. 2 and larger terminating at:
6. Motors rated 50 hp and larger.
7. Medium and low voltage disconnect switches.
8. Transfer switches.
9. Engine-generators.
10. Remove necessary enclosure metal panels and covers prior to performing survey.
B. Perform with equipment energized during periods of maximum possible loading per
NFPA 70B, Section 20.17.
C. Do not perform survey on equipment operating at less than 20 percent of rated load.
D. Utilize thermographic equipment capable of:

1. Detecting emitted radiation.
2. Converting detected radiation to visual signal.
3. Detecting 1 degree C temperature difference between subject area and reference point of
30 degrees C.
E. Temperature Gradients:
1. 3 degrees C to 7 degrees C indicates possible deficiency that warrants investigation.
2. 7 degrees C to 15 degrees C indicates deficiency that is to be corrected as time permits.
3. 16 degrees C and above indicates deficiency that is to be corrected immediately.
F. Provide written report of:

1. Areas surveyed and the resultant temperature gradients.
2. Locations of areas having temperature gradients of 3 degrees C or greater.
3. Cause of heat rise and actions taken to correct cause of heat rise.
4. Detected phase unbalance.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 22
END OF SECTION

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 26 08 00 - 23
SECTION 26 09 13
ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install power monitoring
for the 34.5kV and downstream facility distribution system:
1. Power meters.
2. Circuit monitors.
3. Transformer temperature monitoring devices.
4. Molded case circuit breaker electronic trip units.
5. Low voltage power circuit breaker trip units.
6. Digital relays.
7. Power monitoring network.
8. Personal computer (PC) workstations.
9. Power monitoring software.
10. GPS Time Clock
11. Remote Terminal Units
12. Remote Input / Output Modules
B. The Electrical Power Monitoring System (EPMS) provides operations personnel with
visibility into the electrical infrastructure of the facility via graphic user interface screens,
event logging, and alarming at workstations placed at key locations.
C. The EPMS architecture is comprised of application servers, storage arrays, client

workstations, network switches, gateways, power meters, remote terminal units, and
miscellaneous electrical equipment controllers including protective relays, trip units,
PLCs and other specialized controllers, network media and packaged equipment.
D. The EPMS contractor shall furnish as necessary equipment required to provide for
facility wide network monitoring of electric power equipment
E. The EPMS contractor shall furnish as necessary network switches, gateways, meters,
discrete input devices, device accessory power supplies, and remote terminal units to
electrical equipment manufacturers for factory installation by the equipment
manufacturer. Shall also provide licenses for server and client software, and
programming of EPMS contractor furnished devices and systems. EPMS contractor will
supply and install backbone network switches for installation by others
F. Electrical equipment vendors will supply proprietary gateways as needed mounted in

electrical equipment and in compliance with this specification, and network media and
connections within the electrical equipment.
704618 26 09 13
19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 Electrical Power Monitoring System - 1
1.2 REFERENCES

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
2. Attachment unit interface (AUI)
4. Building Automation System (BAS)
5. Computer and Business Equipment Manufacturers’ Association (CBEMA)
6. Crest factors (CF)
7. Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)
8. Electromagnetic coupling (EMC)
9. Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
11. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
12. International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
13. Local Area Network (LAN)
14. Liquid crystal display (LCD)
15. Manufacturers Messaging Specification (MMS)
18. Network Interface Card (NIC)
19. Open Database Connectivity (ODBC)
20. Personal computer (PC)
21. Programmable logic controller (PLC)
22. Resistance temperature detector (RTD)
23. Remote Terminal Unit (RTU)
24. Total harmonic distortion (THD)
26. Unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP)
27. Wide Area Network (WAN)
B. References Standards:
1. Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems
A. Complete system for power monitoring of 34.5kV and downstream switchgear. Power
monitoring to include features as described within this Section and shown on the
Drawings. The power distribution system to be capable of being monitored from one host
computer as described in this Section.
1.4 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. The control unit to comply with Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Emission
Standards specified in Part 15, Sub-Part J for Class A application.
704618 26 09 13
B. Power monitoring components, including circuit monitors, transformer temperature
monitors, motor protection devices, and digital relays included within the power
equipment lineups to be factory installed, wired and tested prior to shipment to job site.
C. Control power, CT, PT, and data communications wire to be factory wired and harnessed
within the equipment enclosure.
D. Where external circuit connections are required, terminal blocks to be provided and the
manufacturer's drawings to clearly identify the interconnection requirements including
wire type to be used.
E. Contractor interconnection wiring requirements to be clearly identified on the power

monitoring system drawings.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The Supplier to be International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 9000 registered.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Siemens.
B. Schneider
2.2 GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA
A. The facility and equipment shall be designed to operate continuously.
B. Provide a solid-state based digital power monitoring networked system and metering as
identified on the electrical one-line diagrams, EPMS network diagrams, and in
compliance with the requirements of this Section.
C. Products used in this project installation shall be new and currently under manufacture
warranty.
D. High Availability: The system shall utilize primary and redundant servers to achieve
seamless operation of the EPMS in the event of a failure of one EPMS server. The
servers may be discrete machines or virtual machines (VM's) hosted by a multi-node
cluster, as determined by the Owner. Operation described herein will function properly
irrespective to being hosted on discrete or virtual machines.
704618 26 09 13
1. Any programming or configuration changes to the primary server shall be
automatically replicated to the redundant server.
2. Any configuration changes which are replicated to multiple servers/systems must
have a mechanism to roll-back to the previous configuration change in a rapid
automated fashion.
3. Both primary and redundant servers will actively poll EPMS devices, however
only the primary server shall host the workstations, and archive data.
4. Failure of the primary server shall result in operations seamlessly transferring to
the redundant server. Upon restoring the primary server, operations shall
seamlessly transfer back to the primary server, and the redundant server shall
resume standby operation.
5. Machine Virtualization and Clustering: Failure of a single node in the cluster will
not affect the performance, monitoring, or control capabilities of the cluster or
operator stations. Virtualization and clustering shall also allow the maintenance
and patching of systems with minimal downtime, loss of visibility or data. Upon
failure of one machine in the cluster, the remaining machine(s) can annunciate
and log the condition, assume control of data collection, alarm functions,
applications, and allow user access with minimal loss of continuity. When the
failed machine comes back on line, it will seamlessly be integrated back into the
cluster.
E. Like components and equipment shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order
to achieve standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and
service.
F. Sparing: Provide sufficient discrete and analog inputs and outputs (I/O) at each monitored
location to support an additional 25% above the quantity called for by design.
G. Backward Compatibility: EPMS software shall support current firmware versions of

deployed devices through the warranty period of the software and devices. Software
patches and updates shall not require firmware updates to EPMS-connected devices.
H. Develop the communications network architecture and overall system performance to:
1. Have a maximum latency of 500ms from a state or value change at the equipment
to where the change is reflected in the EPMS server
2. Be isolated from the internet or any other network segment which is not wholly
dedicated to EPMS management
3. Ensure the cyber security and network isolation of industrial control systems as
described in NERC CIPv5 and IEC 62443-2-4.
4. Ensure no device on the network has the capability to connect to outside
networks or systems beyond the isolated EPMS LAN. (Devices cannot ‘phone
home’.)
I. The controllers and components shall be rated for continuous operation within the
specified extreme environmental conditions.
J. The system shall provide the capability for on line programming and configuration
modifications.
704618 26 09 13
K. Devices/systems shall validate the authenticity, or digital signature, of any software or
firmware updates prior to the installation/loading of those files or packages.
L. Power Supplies:
1. Backbone Network switches and application servers circuits shall be 120VAC
single corded from a UPS backed source .
2. Except as noted below, each monitored electrical panel power supply circuit shall
be 120VACsingle corded from a UPS backed source Meters, protective relays,
I/O modules, Ethernet switches, gateways, trips units, etc. shall draw power from
the circuit provided. Provide power converters as needed for devices that require
control voltage other than what is provided. Use of internally derived control
power is not acceptable, except as a back-up to the provided control power
circuit.
a. Medium voltage switchgear that is provided with station batteries for
circuit breaker operation may use station battery for EPMS control
power.
b. GenPACs may use engine starting batteries for EPMS control power.
c. Static Transfer Switches may use internally derived control power for
EPMS.
d. UPS’s may use internally derived control power for EPMS.
M. Like hardware furnished to the project shall employ identical versions of software and
firmware as applicable.
1. During level 1 commissioning, EPMS vendor's project manager shall coordinate
with Owner's commissioning team to determine the accepted version of firmware
and/or software in each device type.
2. During Level 3 commissioning the vendor's project manager and Owner's
commissioning team shall ensure that the accepted versions are installed in
devices.
N. Support the following standard communications configurations, as a minimum and

support simultaneous communications:
1. RS485 supports communication with up to 16 slave devices per communications
string. Each string shall consist of an approved 22 AWG (or greater) twisted pair
shielded cable for RS485 communications.
2. Standard Ethernet TCP/IP, 802.3 communications networks. Ethernet
communications of either CAT-5e, CAT-6 or fiber optic shall be supported at a
10BaseT, 100BaseT, 1000BaseT and 10GBaseT communications speed as called
out in the EPMS network diagram.
3. The EPMS will utilize open protocols as listed here. Signals shall be converted as
needed through Owner-approved gateway devices to approved protocols. Any
one of the Protocols listed below can be utilized by vendor for their use.
a. Open Platform Communications Unified Architecture (OPC-UA)
b. Open Platform Communications Data Access (OPC-DA)
c. Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI)
d. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 61850
e. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
1) Version 3 and above only.
2) Disable if not used.
704618 26 09 13
3) Remove SNMP trap recipients if traps are not required.
f. Building Automation and Controls Network (BACnet)
g. Modbus TCP devices shall support a minimum of four concurrent
Modbus pollers at a polling interval of 1s from each poller.
h. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPS)
i. Where supported, set device trusted host IP’s for only services needed
(servers and FOC workstations).
O. Pre-Assembled Components (PACs) shall be fully wired by the manufacturer such that
the EPMS contractor need provide a single connection for communications. PAC
manufacturer will factory mount and wire a biscuit jack for field termination of the
EPMS network to the PAC. Ethernet and serial network connections shall be fully tested
and validated by the PAC manufacturer.
P. Devices on the EPMS network with a real-time clock shall be kept in synchronism with a
GPS time clock to the best extent possible. Time-synchronized devices shall include, but
not be limited to servers, workstations, power meters, protective relays, trip units, PLCs,
Battery Monitoring Systems, and UPS controllers.
1. Where possible, devices shall be configured to periodically poll the GPS time
clock using the one of the following, as called out in construction drawings.
a. Network Time Protocol (NTP) over Ethernet
b. IRIG-B over serial network
c. Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) over Ethernet
d. For devices that do not support time sync protocols, the EPMS servers
will periodically write the current time to the real-time clock of those
devices.
2. Event time stamping:
a. Events monitored by devices using NTP or IRIG-B shall be time-
stamped by the device within 1ms of event occurrence.
b. Events monitored by devices using SNTP shall be time-stamped by the
device within 100ms of event occurrence.
c. Events monitored by devices without time-sync capabilities shall be
time-stamped with 1s resolution by the EPMS server immediately upon
being logged.
3. Network Latency
a. Ethernet devices shall have a maximum latency of 500ms from a state or
value change to when the value change is reflected in the EPMS servers,
1s from value change to workstation screen update, and 2s from value
change to the event log entry.
b. Serial devices shall have a maximum latency of 2s from a state or value
change to where the value change reflected in the EPMS servers, 3s from
value change to workstation screen update, and 4s from value change to
the event log entry.
c. Serial communications daisy-chains shall be limited to 8 slave devices,
or fewer if needed to meet latency requirements.
Q. The EPMS shall be capable of accurately displaying and logging events and alarm times
out to 1ms and in the sequence in which they occurred.
704618 26 09 13
2.3 POWER METERS
A. PM1: Revenue Accurate Power Quality Meter

1. Meter type: True RMS bi-directional four-quadrant power quality sub-cycle
transient detection and harmonics power meter
2. Power supply: 85-240 VAC (plus or minus 10 percent), 47-63 Hz or 110-330
VDC (plus or minus 10 percent).
3. Environmental conditions:
a. Temperature: -20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F).
b. Humidity: 5 to 95 percent non-condensing.
4. Connections:
a. 3-wire wye.
b. 4-wire wye.
c. 3-wire delta.
d. Direct delta.
e. Single phase.
f. 4 voltage inputs minimum:
1) Line to neutral: 50 to 347 VAC rms line-to-neutral.
2) Line to line: 0 to 600 VAC rms line-to-line.
3) Overload protection: 1500 VAC rms continuous.
4) Dielectric withstand: of 3250 VAC rms 1 second occurrence.
g. 5 current inputs minimum:
1) Overload protection: 20 Amp continuous and 500 Amp
occurrence.
2) Dielectric withstand: 3250 VAC rms 1 second occurrence.
5. Solid-state digital power monitoring with the point data indicated on the EPMS
points list with minimum metering capabilities for:
a. AC line to line voltage (three phase).
b. AC line to neutral voltage (three-phase, four-wire).
c. AC line to line voltage average (three phase).
d. AC line to neutral voltage average (three-phase, four-wire).
e. AC line current (per phase and neutral).
f. AC line current average (per phase).
g. Watts.
h. Watt hours.
i. Volts Amps Reactive (VARs).
j. Volts Amps Apparent (VA).
k. Power factor.
l. Instantaneous peak demand.
m. Maximum peak demand.
n. Frequency.
o. Voltage unbalance
p. Current unbalance.
q. Harmonic distortion.
r. Sag/swell detection.
s. Transient detection.
t. Waveform capture.
u. GPS time synchronization via external receiver.
704618 26 09 13
1) IRIG-B
2) Network Time Protocol (NTP)
v. Static Transfer Switch (STS) position.
w. Breaker position.
x. Ground fault status.
y. Harmonics up to the 256th for individual, even, odd and total.
6. Sampling rate: 1024 samples per cycle minimum.
7. Transient detection: 17 µs at 60 Hz (20 µs at 50 Hz). Capable of capturing
transient at 1024 samples per cycle for channels.
8. Measurement accuracy:
a. ANSI C12.20 Class 0.2
b. Voltage: 0.01%
c. Current: 0.01%
d. Power Factor: 0.5%
e. Sampling Rate: 256/cycle
f. Individual Harmonics: to 256th
9. Communications:
a. Minimum interfaces:
1) One 10Base-T Ethernet Modbus TCP with optional 10Base-FL
fiber ports.
2) One RS-485 Modbus RTU master and slave.
3) One Infrared data port.
4) Support concurrent communications.
b. Modbus communications capable of communicating with feeder breakers
on same bus, and aggregating data.
c. Protocols
1) ION
2) DNP 3.0
3) Modbus
4) SMTP
5) SNTP
6) MV-90 compatibility
7) XML compatibility
8) SNMP
9) HTTP (web pages)
10) IEC 61850 with third party compliance certification
10. Firmware: Flash-based field upgradable. Firmware updates must be digitally
signed. Device must validate signature prior to loading the firmware into
memory.
11. Calendar:
a. 3 year internal minimum.
b. Provisions for periodic schedules to perform the following functions:
1) Time of use rate schedules with seasonal, holiday and rate tariffs
support.
2) Demand Control.
3) Load Scheduling.
4) Logging.
5) Periodic Resetting.
704618 26 09 13
12. Mathematical functions:
a. Arithmetic.
b. Scientific.
c. Comparison.
d. Logical.
e. Trigonometric.
f. Fahrenheit and Celsius temperature conversion.
g. Thermocouple linearization: Type J, Type K, Type R, Type T and RTD.
h. Thermal demand calculations for any parameter.
i. Sliding window demands for any parameter.
j. Predicted Demand calculations of sliding window demand parameters.
13. Historical data logging:
a. Event triggered.
b. Scheduled triggered.
c. Manual triggered.
d. Transient triggered.
e. Minimum and maximum logs.
f. Waveform capture:
g. Time stamp resolution: 0.001 seconds.
14. Provide on-board inputs and outputs as needed.
a. Digital and analog outputs monitored by the meter available via the
Modbus TCP/IP connection to the EPMS.
15. Provide indication for alarm and trip conditions:
a. Setpoint response time: ½ cycle minimum.
b. Control of internal recording and digital output relays.
c. 64 programmable setpoints minimum.
16. Configure devices to display data at the meters by selecting individual
parameters using a membrane push-button operator display.
17. Security:
a. Remote Programming (e.g. through a computer) is secured by an
integrated Active Directory user account, or local user ID and password.
Materials / information used for authentication or authorization must be
stored securely in a cryptographically sound manner as described by
NIST.
b. Programming Updates and configuration changes are tracked / logged in
non-volatile memory that persists until the information has been reported
to the management console/server software
c. Programming through the front panel can be secured by a hard or soft
key, or a minimum 10-character password with strong characteristics and
has limited rights capabilities.
d. Support HTTPS (TLS 1.2+), or SSH
18. Programming:
a. Provide alarm/status monitoring that is time and date stamped to 1ms.
Auxiliary contacts for breaker trip indication shall be individually
hardwired discrete inputs into meter.
b. Upon any breaker open, close, trip, sag/swell or transient events meter
shall time/date stamp and log event into internal non-volatile memory
704618 26 09 13
and concurrently write to event log into EPMS Web/Server software with
resolution of 1ms.
c. Meter shall initiate a waveform capture at trip, saw/swell and transient
events. An alarm shall be indicated at the EPMS GUI and the email shall
be sent out to FOC personnel advising of trip. Waveform capture shall
include at least three full cycles prior to the triggering event.
d. Breaker open, closed and tripped status shall be displayed on meters as
well as EPMS GUI with appropriate breaker labels.
B. PM2: Advanced Power Meter.

1. Meter type: True RMS bi-directional four-quadrant, demand and harmonics
power meter.
2. Power supply: Accept range of power from 100 to 240 VAC (plus or minus 10
percent), 47 to 63 Hz or 120 to 300 VDC (plus or minus 10 percent) or 24 VDC
without external converters or separate ordering options. 24 VDC required for
battery backed applications. Low voltage control power option to accept 20 to 60
VDC.
a. Temperature: minus 20 degrees C to 60 degrees C (minus 4 degrees F to
140 degrees F).
b. Humidity: 5 percent to 95 percent RH, non-condensing.
4. Connections:
a. 3-wire wye.
b. 4-wire wye.
c. 3-wire delta.
d. Direct delta.
e. Single phase.
f. 4 voltage inputs minimum:
1) Line to neutral: 50 to 347 VAC rms line-to-neutral.
2) Line to line: 0 to 600 VAC rms line-to-line.
3) Overload protection: 1500 VAC rms continuous.
4) Dielectric withstand: of 3250 VAC rms one second occurrence.
g. 5 current inputs minimum:
occurrence.
2) Dielectric withstand: 3250 VAC rms one second occurrence.
5. Provide solid-state digital power monitoring with the following minimum
metering protection capabilities:
a. AC line to line voltage (three phase).
b. AC line to neutral voltage (three-phase, four-wire).
c. AC line to line voltage average (three phase).
d. AC line to neutral voltage average (three-phase, four-wire).
e. AC line current (per phase and neutral).
f. AC line current average (per phase).
g. Watts.
h. Watt hours.
i. Volts Amps Reactive (VARs).
j. Volts Amps Apparent (VA).
704618 26 09 13
k. Power factor.
l. Instantaneous peak demand.
m. Maximum peak demand.
n. Frequency.
o. Voltage unbalance
p. Current unbalance.
q. Harmonic distortion.
r. Waveform Capture
s. Ground fault status.
t. GPS time synchronization
1) IRIG-B
2) Network Time Protocol
u. Harmonics up to the 63rd for individual, even, odd and total.
a. Voltage: 0.3 percent reading minimum.
b. Current: 0.3 percent reading minimum.
c. Frequency: 0.01 Hz.
8. Communications:
a. Minimum interfaces:
1) One 10Base-T Ethernet Modbus TCP.
2) One RS-485 Modbus RTU slave.
3) One Infrared data port.
4) Support concurrent communications.
b. Serial Rate: Configurable for 9600, 19.2k, 28.8k, 38.4k, or 57.6kbps.
c. Field configurable protocol parameters from the front display or through
communications port access and can be accomplished without resetting
the meter or interruption to operations.
d. Ethernet gateway: Support up to 12 slave meters via RS-485 Modbus
RTU communications. Ethernet port access by the site EPMS.
e. E-mail: Transmit alarms conditions, status notifications and data logs in
a Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) compatible e-mail message.
f. Meter hardware must be capable of communicating with up to 4 Modbus
TCP/IP master connections as a slave device.
g. EPMS Ethernet network devices shall have a unique Media Access
Control (MAC) address in a known range provided by the manufacturer.
h. EPMS Ethernet network devices shall support Dynamic Host
Communication Protocol (DHCP) protocol for dynamic IP addressing.
memory.
10. Calendar: 2 year internal minimum.
11. Mathematical functions:
a. Arithmetic.
b. Scientific.
c. Comparison.
d. Logical.
e. Trigonometric.
704618 26 09 13
f. Fahrenheit and Celsius temperature conversion.
g. Thermocouple linearization: Type J, Type K, Type R, Type T and RTD.
12. Historical data logging:
a. Event triggered.
b. Scheduled triggered.
c. Manual triggered.
d. Concurrent logging of measured or calculated parameters by means of
two configurable data recorders each with 16 channels minimum.
e. Waveform capture:
1) Simultaneous recording of voltage and current inputs.
2) 96 consecutive cycles with 16 samples per cycle minimum.
f. Variable depth logs.
g. Memory: 10 MB minimum non-volatile.
h. Time stamp resolution: 0.001 seconds.
a. Digital and analog outputs monitored by the meter shall be exposed via
the Modbus TCP/IP connection to the EPMS.
14. Provide indication for alarm and trip conditions.
a. Setpoint response time: one second minimum.
b. Control of internal recording and digital output relays.
c. 24 programmable setpoints minimum.
16. Programming:
a. Provide alarm/status monitoring that is time and date stamped to 1ms.
b. Upon any breaker trip events meter shall time/date stamp and log event
into internal non-volatile memory and concurrently write to event log
into EPMS Web/Server software with resolution of no more than one
millisecond. An alarm shall be indicated at the EPMS GUI and the email
shall be sent out to FOC personnel advising of trip. An auxiliary contact
for open and close status shall be individually hardwired discrete input
into meter as shown on the electrical Drawings.
c. Breaker Open and Closed status shall be displayed on meters as well as
EPMS GUI with appropriate breaker labels. Upon status change, meter
shall time/date stamp and log event into internal non-volatile memory
and concurrently write to event log into the EPMS Web/Server software.
17. Security:
NIST.
704618 26 09 13
C. PM3: Basic Power Meter.

1. Meter type: Basic true RMS four-quadrant power and demand power meter
without external converters or separate ordering options. 24 VAC required for
battery backed applications Low voltage control power option to accept 20 to 60
VDC.
a. Temperature: minus 5 degrees C to55 degrees C (23 degrees F to 131
degrees F)
b. Humidity: 5 percent to 95 percent RH, non-condensing
4. Connections:
a. 3-wire wye
b. 4-wire wye
c. 3-wire delta
d. Single phase
e. 3 voltage inputs minimum:
1) Line to neutral: 50 to 347 VAC rms line-to-neutral
2) Line to line: 0 to 600 VAC rms line-to-line
3) Overload protection: 1500 VAC rms continuous
4) Dielectric withstand: of 3250 VAC rms one second occurrence
f. 3 current inputs minimum:
occurrence
2) Dielectric withstand: 3250 VAC rms one second occurrence
a. Ac line to line voltage (three phase).
b. Ac line to neutral voltage (three-phase, four-wire).
c. Ac line to line voltage average (three phase).
d. Ac line to neutral voltage average (three-phase, four-wire).
e. Ac line current (per phase and neutral).
f. Ac line current average (per phase).
g. AC Power KVAR, KVA, KW
8. Communications:
a. Interface: RS-485 Modbus RTU or Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP.
b. Serial Rate: Configurable for 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k, or 57.6kbps.
c. Field configurable protocol parameters from the front display or through
communications port access and can be accomplished without resetting
the meter or interruption to operations.
704618 26 09 13
d. Interface devices to a higher-level Modbus RTU master meter to provide
data access remotely from a single Ethernet port access by the site
EPMS.
e. Meter hardware must be capable of communicating with up to 4 Modbus
TCP/IP master connections as a slave device.
f. EPMS Ethernet network devices shall have a unique Media Access
g. EPMS Ethernet network devices shall support Dynamic Host
memory.
a. Digital and analog outputs monitored by the meter shall be exposed via
the Modbus TCP/IP connection to the EPMS.
11. Provide LED indication for alarm and trip conditions.
13. Security:
NIST.
D. PM4: Basic Power Meter.

1. Meter type: Basic true RMS four-quadrant and demand power meter
without external converters or separate ordering options. 24 VAC required for
battery backed applications.
a. Temperature: minus 5 degrees C to 55 degrees C (23 degrees F to 131
degrees F)
b. Humidity: 5 percent to 95 percent RH, non-condensing
4. Connections:
a. 3-wire wye
b. 4-wire wye
c. 3-wire delta
d. Single phase
e. 3 voltage inputs minimum:
704618 26 09 13
1) Line to neutral: 50 to 347 VAC rms line-to-neutral
2) Line to line: 0 to 600 VAC rms line-to-line
3) Overload protection: 1500 VAC rms continuous
4) Dielectric withstand: of 3250 VAC rms one second occurrence
f. 3 current inputs minimum:
occurrence
2) Dielectric withstand: 3250 VAC rms one second occurrence
a. Ac line to line voltage (three phase).
b. Ac line to neutral voltage (three-phase, four-wire).
c. Ac line to line voltage average (three phase).
d. Ac line to neutral voltage average (three-phase, four-wire).
e. Ac line current (per phase).
f. Ac line current average (per phase).
g. AC Power KVAR, KVA, KW
8. Communications:
a. Interface: RS-485 Modbus RTU or Ethernet.
b. Serial Rate: Configurable for 9600, 19.2k, 28.8k, 38.4k, or 57.6kbps.
c. Field configurable protocol parameters through the communications port
and can be accomplished without resetting the meter or interruption to
operations.
d. Interface devices to a higher-level Modbus RTU master meter to provide
data access remotely from a single Ethernet port access by the site
EPMS.
e. EPMS Ethernet network devices shall have a unique Media Access
f. EPMS Ethernet network devices shall support Dynamic Host
memory.
10. Provide on-board inputs and outputs as needed:
a. All digital and analog outputs monitored by the meter shall be exposed
via the Modbus TCP/IP connection to the EPMS.
11. Provide LED indication for alarm and trip conditions.
12. Security:
NIST.
704618 26 09 13
2.4 CIRCUIT MONITORS
A. Provide true rms metered values.
B. Include:
1. Frequency.
2. Temperature.
3. Current.
4. Demand current.
5. Voltage.
6. Real power.
7. Reactive power.
8. Apparent power.
9. Demand power.
10. Predicted demand power.
11. Power factor.
12. Accumulated energy.
13. Accumulated reactive energy.
14. THD of each current and voltage.
15. K-factor of each current.
C. Digitally sample current and voltage signals for waveform analysis and true rms metering
accurate beyond the 30th harmonic (fundamental of 60 Hz).
D. Operating Temperature Range: -25 degrees C to 70 degrees C.
E. Overcurrent Withstand Rating: 500 amps for 1 second.
F. Store setup parameters in nonvolatile memory and retain in the event of a control power
interruption. Batteries or other devices used to provide non-volatile memory to be
serviceable from the front of the circuit monitor. Servicing to not require removing the
circuit monitor from the equipment in which it is mounted.
G. Maintain in nonvolatile memory maximum and minimum values for each instantaneous
value reported and the time and date that the minimum or maximum was set.
H. Accept inputs from industry standard instrument transformers (120V ac secondary PTs
and 5 A secondary CTs). Connection to 480Y/277 V ac circuits to be possible without
use of PTs. If PTs are not used, it will not be necessary to bring voltages greater than
120V ac (line to neutral) to the circuit monitor.
1. Support PT primaries through 1.2 kV.
704618 26 09 13
2. Support CT primaries through 32 kA.
I. Accurate to within 0.25 percent of reading plus 0.05 percent of full scale for voltage and
current metering and to within 0.5 percent for power and energy functions.
1. Maintain accuracies for both light and full loads.
2. No annual recalibration by users to be required.
3. Sample voltage and current for all phases simultaneously to assure high accuracy
in conditions of low power factor or large waveform distortions (harmonics).
J. Circuit monitor to be able to be applied in three-phase, three- or four-wire systems. A

fourth CT input to be available to measure neutral or ground current. If the fourth CT is
not used, then a residual current to be calculated by vectorial addition of the phase
currents. In four-wire connections the circuit monitor to utilize the circuit neutral
common reference and not earth ground, to provide metering accuracy.
K. Capable of being applied without modification at nominal frequencies of 50, 60, or

400 Hz.
L. The circuit monitor to operate over a range of control power 100-240V ac or 100-
300V dc. Connections to 18-60V dc to also be available.
M. Provide ride-through capability for backup control power for up to 8 seconds.
N. The circuit monitor to surface or flush mount to an enclosure and be provided with a
bezel ring.
1. Equipped with an integral, continuous duty display to provide local access to the
following metered quantities and the minimum and maximum value of each
instantaneous quantity since last reset of min/max:
a. Current, per phase rms, 3-phase average and neutral (if applicable).
b. Voltage, phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral, and 3-phase average (phase-
to-phase and phase-to-neutral).
c. Real power, per phase and 3-phase total.
d. Reactive power, per phase and 3-phase total.
e. Apparent power, per phase and 3-phase total.
f. Power factor, 3-phase total and per phase.
g. Frequency.
h. Demand current, per phase and three phase average.
i. Demand real power, three phase total.
j. Demand apparent power, three phase total.
k. Accumulated Energy, (MWh and MVARh).
l. THD, current and voltage, per phase.
m. K-factor, current, per phase.
2. Allow reset of the following electrical parameters from the front of the circuit
monitor:
a. Peak demand current.
b. Peak demand power (kW) and peak demand apparent power (kVA).
c. Energy (MWh) and reactive energy (MVARh).
3. Allow setup for system requirements from the front of the circuit monitor. Setup
provisions to include:
704618 26 09 13
a. CT rating As indicated on Drawings.
b. PT rating As indicated on Drawings.
c. System type As indicated on Drawings.
d. Demand interval (5-60 min.).
e. Watt-hours per pulse.
4. Reset and setup functions to have a means for protection against
unauthorized/accidental changes.
5. The display to remain on continuously, with no detrimental effect on the life of
the circuit monitor.
O. Communications:
1. Interface: RS-485 Modbus RTU or Ethernet.
2. Serial Rate: Configurable for 9600, 19.2k, 28.8k, or 38.4k.
3. Field configurable protocol parameters through the communications port and can
be accomplished without resetting the meter or interruption to operations.
4. Interface devices to a higher-level Modbus RTU master meter to provide data
access remotely from a single Ethernet port access by the site EPMS.
5. EPMS Ethernet network devices shall have a unique Media Access Control
(MAC) address in a known range provided by the manufacturer.
6. EPMS Ethernet network devices shall support Dynamic Host Communication
Protocol (DHCP) protocol for dynamic IP addressing
P. Equipped with a front panel communications port:

1. Completely accessible during normal operation.
2. Should not require exposure of the operator to life-threatening voltage when in
use.
3. The operator to be able to connect a small PC to the port without use of tools or
splices.
4. Port to have the same communication functionality of the standard hard wired
rear port.
5. When a connection is made to the front port, the circuit monitor to disregard
communication from the rear port until the front port is disconnected.
Q. It should be possible to field upgrade the firmware in the circuit monitor to enhance
functionality.
1. Upgrades to be done through either the front or rear communication connection.
2. No circuit monitor disassembly or changing of integrated circuit chips to be
required.
3. It should not be necessary to de-energize the circuit or the equipment to upgrade
the firmware.
R. The following metered values as well as the minimum and maximum instantaneous
readings since last reset to be communicated by the circuit monitor:
1. Frequency.
2. Temperature.
3. Current, per phase rms and neutral (if applicable).
4. Current, three-phase average rms.
5. Current, apparent rms.
6. Voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral.
704618 26 09 13
7. Voltage unbalance, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral.
8. Power factor, per phase.
9. Power factor, three-phase total.
10. Real power, per phase and three-phase total.
11. Reactive power, per phase and three-phase total.
12. Apparent power, per phase and three-phase total.
13. Demand current, per phase and three-phase average.
14. Demand real power, three-phase average.
15. Demand reactive power, three-phase average.
16. Demand apparent power, three-phase average.
17. Accumulated energy, (MWh, MVAH, and MVARh).
18. THD, voltage and current, per phase.
19. K-factor, per phase.
S. Power demand calculations to be done by one of the following calculation methods,

selectable by the user:
1. Thermal demand using a sliding window updated every 15 seconds. Window
length to be set by the user from 5-60 minutes in 5-minute increments.
2. Block interval, with optional sub-intervals. Window length to be set by the user
from 5-60 minutes in 5-minute intervals. The user to be able to set the sub-
interval length from 5-30 minutes in 5-minute intervals.
3. External pulse synchronization, utilizing a synch pulse provided externally. An
optional status input to be used to sense the pulse.
4. Sliding block interval with continuous sliding 15-second subintervals.
T. The default demand calculation method to be a 15-minute sliding window thermal

demand.
U. The following demand readings to be reported by the circuit monitor:

1. Average demand current, per phase.
2. Peak demand current, per phase.
3. Average demand for real power, reactive power, and apparent power.
4. Predicted demand for real power, reactive power, and apparent power.
5. Peak demand for real power, reactive power, and apparent power.
V. Circuit monitor to be capable of receiving a broadcast message over the communications

network that can be used to synchronize demand calculations by several circuit monitors.
This message need not be addressed specifically to one circuit monitor.
W. The following energy readings to be reported by the circuit monitor:

1. Accumulated energy.
2. Accumulated reactive energy.
3. Accumulated apparent energy.
X. For real and reactive energy reported values, separate totals for energy flow in each
direction to be kept, as well as an arithmetic sum.
Y. Circuit monitors to include current and voltage waveform capture capability. Waveform
capture to be user selectable for 4, 12, 24, 36, 48, or 60 cycles of data.
704618 26 09 13
1. Either type of waveform capture to be initiated either from a PC workstation
running the appropriate power monitoring software, or by the circuit monitor as a
user defined response to an alarm condition.
2. In addition, an external trigger to be able to initiate the 12, 24, 36, 48, or 60 cycle
waveform.
3. The waveform capture sequence to be initiated within 1 millisecond after the
trigger is sensed.
4. A user definable delay of 2 - 10 cycles to determine how many pre-event cycles
are included in the waveform capture.
5. The circuit monitor to capture, and store in internal memory, 64 digitally sampled
data points for each cycle of each phase voltage and current.
6. The circuit monitor to transmit the waveform samples over the network to the PC
workstation for display, archival, and analysis.
7. Each voltage and current of all the phases to be sampled concurrently so that
proper phase relationships are maintained, so that harmonic flow analysis can be
performed, and so that the effect of a disturbance can be observed on all phase
voltages and currents.
8. Harmonic analysis performed on the captured waveforms to resolve harmonics
through the 31st.
9. The data used for the four cycle waveform capture display to also be used to
derive metered quantities.
10. Waveforms to reflect actual circuit performance. Waveforms synthesized or
composed over time to not be acceptable.
Z. Data logging to be accomplished either within the circuit monitor or at the computer
workstation, or both. Each circuit monitor to be able to log data, alarms and events, and
multiple waveforms. The monitors to offer up to 356 KB of on-board non-volatile
memory. Information to be communicated to the workstation upon demand. Logged
information to be stored in each circuit monitor to include:
1. Up to 14 separate data logs configurable by the user. Each log entry to be date
and time stamped. The type of data for the log to be selected from a list of
175 monitored values. Each log entry to be user configurable to consist of from
one to over 75 values of instantaneous data, depending on the type of data. It to
be possible to set up each log to take data at a different user defined schedule
interval. In addition, it to be possible for a user to define an event or new
min/max condition that will trigger log file entries.
2. Data logs to be configurable by users to be fill-and-hold or circular (FIFO).
3. A min/max log file to include the time, date, and value for the minimum and
maximum of each of the instantaneous metered values.
4. An alarm and event log to contain time, date, event information, and coincident
information for each user defined alarm or event. This log to have a capacity of
up to 1,000 events selected from over 100 alarms or events.
5. Waveform logs to store captured waveforms, 4-, 12-, 24-, 36-, 48-, and 60-cycle
as defined by the user. Waveform log entries to be scheduled at a user defined
interval, externally triggered, or forced in response to a user defined event.
Waveform logs to be either fill-and-hold or circular (FIFO) as defined by the
user.
704618 26 09 13
6. A simple user interface to be available to enable the user to allocate circuit
monitor memory to different log functions.
AA. Circuit monitor input/output options: Input/output modules to be field replaceable.

Circuit monitors to be equipped with one of the following I/O options as shown on the
Drawings:
1. Option One - One solid state output suitable for KYZ pulse initiation; one solid
state input suitable for external end of demand interval demand pulse detection.
2. Option Two - One solid state output suitable for KYZ pulse initiation; eight solid
state status inputs.
3. Option Three - One solid state output suitable for KYZ pulse initiation; four solid
state status inputs; three mechanical output relays.
4. Option Four - One solid state output suitable for KYZ pulse initiation; four solid
state status inputs; three mechanical output relays; one analog input, convertible
from 0-5V dc to 4-20 mA; one analog output, 4-20 mA.
5. Option Five - One solid state output suitable for KYZ pulse initiation; four solid
state status inputs; three mechanical output relays; one analog input, convertible
from 0-5V dc to 4-20 mA; one analog output, 0-1 mA.
6. Option Six - One solid state output suitable for KYZ pulse initiation; four solid
state status inputs; three mechanical output relays; four analog inputs, convertible
from 0-5V dc to 4-20 mA; four analog outputs, 4-20 mA.
7. Option Seven - One solid state output suitable for KYZ pulse initiation; four
solid state status inputs; three mechanical output relays; four analog inputs,
convertible from 0-5V dc to 4-20 mA; four analog outputs, 0-1 mA.
BB. Alarm events to be user definable. The following classes of events to be available as
alarm events:
1. Over/under current.
2. Over/under voltage.
3. Current imbalance.
4. Phase loss, current.
5. Phase loss, voltage.
6. Voltage imbalance.
7. Over kVA.
8. Over kW or kVAR into/out of load.
9. Over/under frequency.
10. Under power factor, true or displacement.
11. Over THD.
12. Over K-factor.
13. Over demand, current or power.
14. Reverse power.
15. Phase reversal.
16. Status Input change.
17. End of incremental energy interval.
18. End of demand interval.
19. Over/under analog inputs.
20. Current sag/swell.
21. Voltage sag/swell.
704618 26 09 13
CC. For each over/under metered value alarm, the user to be able to define a pick-up, drop-
out, and delay.
DD. Provide four alarm severity levels.
EE. Provide indication of an alarm condition on the front panel.
FF. Output Relay Control:

1. Relay outputs to operate either by user command sent over the communication
link, or set to operate in response to a user defined alarm event.
2. Output relays to close in either a momentary or latched mode as defined by the
user.
3. Each output relay used in a momentary contact mode to have an independent
timer that can be set by the user.
4. It to be possible for individual relay outputs to be controlled by multiple alarms
in a wired "OR" configuration.
GG. Circuit monitors noted on the Drawings to include sag and swell detection capability:
1. The circuit monitor to continuously monitor for disturbances in the currents and
incoming voltage. There to be zero blind time; each cycle to be individually
monitored.
2. Detect disturbance events less than one cycle in length.
3. The user to be able to set a threshold and delay which to be used by the circuit
monitor to determine if an event has occurred. The threshold to be user defined
as either a fixed setpoint or relative setpoint. When using the relative setpoint, the
circuit monitor to set the nominal current or voltage equal to its present average
value. The circuit monitor to automatically adjust the nominal current and
voltage values to avoid nuisance alarms caused by gradual daily variations of
currents and voltages.
4. Upon detecting a disturbance, the circuit monitor to be capable of :
a. Logging a waveform of the event, 12, 24, 36, 48, or 60 cycles in length,
of all phase currents and voltages. The sample rate to be of sufficient
resolution to show the 31st harmonic for each cycle.
b. Operating output relay on an optional I/O module.
c. Recording the disturbance into an event log with a date and time stamp
accurate to the millisecond.
d. Causing an operator alarm at the computer workstation.
5. Data and waveform logs to be communicated over the local area network or
through the front panel communications port so that the user may view and
analyze the data using the power monitoring software and workstation.
HH. Advanced harmonic information to be available via the circuit monitor. This to include
the calculation of the harmonic magnitudes and angles through the 31st harmonic.
1. This information to be available for all three phases, current and voltage, plus the
neutral current. To ensure maximum accuracy for analysis, the current and
voltage information for all phases to be obtained simultaneously from the same
cycle.
2. The circuit monitor to have a minimum of 100k of on board memory to log
harmonic magnitudes and angles.
704618 26 09 13
3. The harmonic magnitude to be reported as a percentage of the fundamental or as
a percentage of the rms values, as selected by the user.
2.5 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER ELECTRONIC TRIP UNITS
A. Electronic trip units to be provided as shown on the Drawings.
B. Provide the following breaker/trip unit information to the power monitoring network:
1. Breaker frame type.
2. Breaker sensor rating.
3. Rating plug.
4. Protective settings.
C. Provide individual phase and ground ammeter information to the power monitoring
network.
D. Provide the following trip information to the power monitoring network:

1. Date/time of last trip.
2. Type of last trip (overload, short circuit, ground fault).
3. Magnitude of phase and ground fault at time of last trip.
E. Provide the following maintenance information to the power monitoring network:

1. Number of overload trips.
2. Number of short circuit trips.
3. Number of ground fault trips.
F. Ability to communicate up to 19.2 k baud on the power monitoring network.
2.6 LOW VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP UNITS
A. Digital and true rms sensing.
B. Integral to the circuit breaker; include the following:

1. Unit status indicator.
2. Integral testing.
3. Adjustable long delay and ampere setting.
4. Local mode of trip indicators.
5. Rating plug.
6. Local high-load indication.
7. Adjustable short time delay and pickup.
8. Adjustable ground fault delay and pickup.
9. Selectable I2t on short time and ground fault.
10. Zone selective interlocking.
C. Include an integral, four digit, alphanumeric display to indicate the following:

1. Amperes.
2. Peak power (MW).
3. Present power (MW).
4. Energy (MWh).
704618 26 09 13
5. Mode of trip.
6. Service trip messages.
D. Powered from within the circuit breaker without the need for an external power source.
E. Ability to communicate up to 19.2 k baud on the power monitoring network.
F. Provide breaker identification information to the power monitoring network:

1. Frame size.
2. Rating plug and multiplier.
G. Trip information to be available over the power monitoring network:

1. Breaker tripped.
2. Cause of trip.
3. Time of trip.
4. Trip currents: per phase and three-phase average.
5. Number of trips by type, i.e., instantaneous, ground.
H. Breaker status and maintenance information available over the power monitoring
network:
1. Breaker open or closed.
2. Number of open/close operations.
3. Number of breaker trips.
4. Breaker loading in percent of capacity based on long time pickup setting.
I. Metered values available over the power monitoring network:

1. Current, per phase rms, ground, and neutral (if applicable).
3. Power factor, three-phase.
4. Real power, three-phase.
5. Accumulated real energy.
6. Energy (Wh).
7. Present and peak demand current, per phase, neutral, and three-phase average.
8. Present, peak, and predicted demand power (kW).
J. Minimum and maximum readings available:

1. Current, per phase rms, ground, and neutral (if applicable).
3. Power factor, three-phase.
4. Power, three-phase (kW).
K. Energy reported values available over the network, to include separate totals for energy
flow in each direction, as well as an arithmetic sum.
L. Calculate power demand using the sliding window method with a user selected window
of 5-60 minutes, in 5-minute intervals.
704618 26 09 13
2.7 DIGITAL PROTECTIVE RELAYS
A. Digital protective relays to be installed as shown on the Drawings. Accept three-phase

inputs from industry standard current transformers with 1- or 5-Amp nominal
secondaries.
B. Provide three-phase overcurrent protection (ANSI 50/51) and ground overcurrent

protection (American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 50/51G or 50/51N).
C. The user to be able to select a variety of time current curves from different families.
Families of curves to include definite time, inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse and
ultra inverse.
D. Provide front panel keypad and display, from which it to be possible to:
1. Select time-current characteristic curves.
2. Set CT ratios.
3. Display phase current information.
4. Observe digital relay trip status.
5. Gather diagnostic information about the relay.
6. View cause of trip.
E. Communications:
1. Interface: RS-485 Modbus RTU or Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP.
2. Serial Rate: Configurable for 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k, or 57.6kbps.
3. Field configurable protocol parameters from the front display or through
communications port access and can be accomplished without resetting the meter
or interruption to operations.
4. Interface devices to a higher-level Modbus RTU master meter to provide data
access remotely from a single Ethernet port access by the site EPMS.
5. Meter hardware must be capable of communicating with up to 4 Modbus TCP/IP
master connections as a slave device.
Protocol (DHCP) protocol for dynamic IP addressing.
8. Communicate instantaneous rms currents per phase and ground and demand
currents per phase to the power monitoring software.
9. Communicate breaker status, and type of trip including fault magnitude to the
power monitoring software.
10. Communicate the digital relay settings to the power monitoring software.
F. Provide two options for control power for the relay:

1. 100-240V ac.
2. 120/300V dc.
2.8 Remote Input/Output Modules:
A. Provide remote input/output modules meeting the requirements set forth in this
specification. Note exceptions taken with a detailed description.
704618 26 09 13
B. Supply remote input/output modules and capabilities to monitor misc. digital status and
alarms as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Basic hardware requirements of the Addressable relays are as follows:

1. Power supply: Power supply: Accept range of power from 100-240 VAC (+/-
10%), 47 to 63 Hz or 120-300 VDC (+/-10%) or 24 VDC without external
converters or separate ordering options. 24 VDC required for battery backed
applications. Low voltage control power option to accept 20-60 VDC.
2. On-board I/O: 16 digital inputs or 8 digital inputs/8 digital outputs minimum.
3. Interface: RJ45 Modbus TCP/IP connection.
2.9 GPS Time Clock
A. Manufacturers:
1. Arbiter Systems
2. EndRun Technologies
3. Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories
4. GE Multisync
5. Owner- approved equivalent
B. Specifications:
1. GPS Receiver:
a. L1 Band (1575.42 MHz), 8-channel
b. Antenna type RG-6
c. Acquisition & lock time: <5 minutes
2. Accuracy:
a. 500ns with GPS signal
b. Maintain accuracy with as few as one GPS signal
c. 100µs/day without GPS signal (holdover)
C. Time Reference Outputs

1. Network Time Protocol (NTP)
2. Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)
3. IRIG-B, 1kHz, modulated and unmodulated, IEEE 1344
4. (1) 10/100/1000-Base-T, RJ-45 Ethernet port
5. (1) pair fiber optic ports
D. Network Security
1. Support HTTPS (TLS 1.2+), or SSH
E. Environmental Conditions
1. Temperature 0 C to 50 C
2. Relative Humidity: 0% to 95%, non-condensing.
3. EMC: comply with FCC 20780
4. SWC: comply with ANSI/IEEE C37.90-1
5. Rack mount
6. Self-diagnostic status contact
704618 26 09 13
2.10 Network Switches
A. Manufacturer and Model

1. Cisco.
2. MOXA
3. Siemens
4. N-Tron
5. Owner- approved equivalent.
B. Power Supply
1. 1 Power supply: Accept range of power from 100-240 VAC (+/-10%), 47 to 63
Hz or 120-300 VDC (+/-10%) or 24 VDC without external converters or separate
ordering options. 24 VDC required for battery backed applications. Low voltage
control power option to accept 20-60 VDC.
2. 124W maximum
3. Dual-corded, as required
C. Environmental Conditions:
1. Temperature 0 to 40 degrees C
2. Humidity: 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing
3. Altitude: 0 to 10,000 feet
D. Network Security
1. Support HTTPS (TLS 1.2+), or SSH
2.11 POWER MONITORING NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS
A. Support the following standard communications configurations, as a minimum and

support simultaneous communications:
1. RS485 supports communication with up to 16 slave devices per communications
string. Each string shall consist of an approved 22 AWG (or greater) twisted pair
shielded cable for RS485 communications.
2. Standard Ethernet TCP/IP, 802.3 communications networks. Ethernet
communications of either CAT-5e, CAT-6 or fiber optic shall be supported at a
10BaseT, 100BaseT, 1000BaseT and 10GBaseT communications speed as called
out in the EPMS network diagram.
3. The EPMS will utilize open protocols as listed here. Signals shall be converted as
needed through Owner-approved gateway devices to approved protocols. Any
one of the Protocols listed below can be utilized by vendor for their use.
a. Open Platform Communications Unified Architecture (OPC-UA)
b. Open Platform Communications Data Access (OPC-DA)
c. Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI)
d. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 61850
e. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
1) Version 3 and above only.
2) Disable if not used.
704618 26 09 13
3) Remove SNMP trap recipients if traps are not required.
f. Building Automation and Controls Network (BACnet)
g. Modbus TCP devices shall support a minimum of four concurrent
Modbus pollers at a polling interval of 1s from each poller.
h. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPS)
i. Where supported, set device trusted host IP’s for only services needed
(servers and FOC workstations).
B. General Network Information:

1. The power monitoring system to be connected by means of Fiber optics as the
backbone network.
2. Network to consist of managed Ethernet switches for Backbone EPMS network
communications, Un-managed Ethernet switches and/or Ethernet Gateways that
allow display units, computers, programmable controllers, and other higher level
or sub-networks to access the electrical data being gathered by the power
monitoring devices.
a. Support the following at a minimum:
1) Ability to update switch OS firmware with security updates
2) Capability to adjust/modify any default administrator credentials
3) Standard Ethernet TCP/IP, 802.3 non-blocking communications.
4) 10/100/1000 BaseT communications speeds.
5) CAT5e and multi-mode fiber optic cabling to end-point devices
6) Single-mode fiber-optic cabling between network switches
7) 120VAC, 125VDC or 24VDC powered, as needed.
8) Dual-corded, as needed.
b. Support as needed:
1) 1Gb fiber optic MMFO SFP multi-mode 0.50 or 62.5micron
laser optimized LC duplex uplink ports.
2) Provide with two matching switch tested fiber patch cords.
c. Provide a minimum of 10% spare ports beyond what is required by the
design at each network switch location.
3. It should be possible to add an unlimited number of PC workstations to the
network. Addition of a new workstation to not require modification to existing
workstations. Adding workstations to require only a network tap; extensive
rewiring or wiring to each group of monitoring devices to not be required.
4. Each PC connected to the network to be a Windows OS workstation with a
standard Ethernet Network Interface Card (NIC).
C. Ethernet Gateways:
1. Power monitoring devices using Modbus RTU communications to be connected
by one or more Ethernet Gateways to the network backbone for communications
, as shown on the Drawings.
2. Provide indicating LEDs for the Ethernet connections to assist in trouble-
shooting. Provide indicators for transmit, receive, collision, link, and polarity of
the connection.
3. Serial Rate: Configurable for 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k, or 57.6kbps
704618 26 09 13
4. The system to provide for secure operation via an encryption algorithm such that
unauthorized personnel cannot intentionally or inadvertently alter the
communication or setup parameters.
5. A dedicated Ethernet Gateway to be used which requires no hardware
adjustments or modifications. Standard PCs or programmable logic controllers
(PLCs) are not acceptable as gateways to the power monitoring and control
devices
6. Copper Ethernet to RS-485 serial ports
a. One 10/100Base-T, RJ45 Ethernet Modbus TCP port.
b. One or two RS-485 Modbus RTU ports
c. Modbus serial master and slave support.
d. Control Power: 12-48VDC or 120-300VDC or 100-240VAC
e. Environmental Conditions:
1) Operating Temperature: 0-55 degrees C
2) Humidity: 5 percent to 95 percent RH, non-condensing
7. Fiber Ethernet to RS-485 serial
a. One 10Base-FL, Fiber Ethernet Modbus TCP port.
b. One or two RS-485 Modbus RTU ports
c. Modbus serial master and slave support.
d. Control Power: 12-48VDC or 120-300VDC or 100-240VAC
e. Environmental Conditions:
1) Operating Temperature: 0-55 degrees C
2) Humidity: 5 percent to 95 percent RH, non-condensing
Protocol (DHCP) protocol for dynamic IP addressing.
2.12 Servers:
A. The Contractor shall provide server system requirements to Owner. System requirements
should allow Owner-provided servers to host EPMS application software with no more
than 50% RAM and 50% CPU continuous utilization with production software and
modules installed and running.
B. Servers shall come pre-assembled with the current version of Microsoft Windows Server.
C. The Contractor shall provide and field install devices and components for integration
with EPMS power monitoring workstations.
D. Vendor server software shall be compatible with the current version of Microsoft
Windows Server and SQL.
2.13 EPMS Software Options:
A. Provide application software to support system configuration, monitoring of devices, data

logging, alarming, and other operations associated with the power monitoring system.
Each PC workstation is to be equipped with power monitoring software from the options
listed below, as noted on the Drawings. Different workstations to be able to have
704618 26 09 13
different software options installed; installation of a given software option on any
workstation to not limit the software options on any other workstation.
1. Windows OS Platform:
a. Provide Microsoft Windows OS client/server application for both
standalone monitoring and network connectivity over the PC LAN or
WAN. Coordinate with Engineer/Client for version requirements. Allow
remote access and data sharing of real-time power system information.
Monitor the entire system of power monitoring devices in the
background for alarms, events, and data logging, allowing the operator to
perform other tasks with the workstation.
b. Provide the following as noted on the Drawings. In addition, provide
add-on modules described below as noted on the Drawings.
1) Basic power monitoring (standalone) to operate on Windows
OS, used where power monitoring data retrieved and displayed
on individual PCs.
a) Support a minimum of 1000 power monitoring devices
and poll as required.
b) Provide security to protect system data.
(1) Support unlimited user accounts, each with a
unique name and password.
(2) Provide ten privilege access levels that
determine which functions each user can access.
(3) Setup functions to be password protected.
c) Device setup to be accessible in both on-line and off-line
modes.
d) Permit device setup including configuration of circuit
monitor data and waveform logs. Allow user to define
circuit monitor alarms and configure circuit monitor
relay operation.
e) Allow devices and quantities to be organized into logical
groups (function, location, department, etc.). Groups to
be user defined, each group having a unique name.
f) Provide resets of supported devices. Allow resets by
device or by group of devices.
g) Include an online, context-sensitive help system.
h) Events to be recorded in an event log:
(1) Capable of holding at least 1000 events, defined
by user and limited only by size of storage drive.
(2) Record date/time of event, event description,
and user name (if applicable).
(3) Record occurrences related to operation of
software, such as breakers opening or closing,
loss of power, loss of device communications,
user logon, changes to system setup, etc.
i) Monitor for alarm conditions detected by each device
and indicate alarm at workstation.
(1) Alarms to be user defined pick-ups and drop-
outs.
704618 26 09 13
(2) Include pre-defined system alarms.
(3) Provide ten severity levels for analog and digital
alarm conditions.
(a) Each severity level to provide user-
selected indication including audible,
visible, and/or required
acknowledgment.
(b) Alarm severity levels to allow further
customization by requiring password
acknowledgment of alarms and by
associating a unique color and/or sound
with the level.
(4) Alarms to be reported by exception.
(5) At any time, a summary of active alarms may be
viewed.
(6) Alarms to be recorded in the event log.
(7) Alarms to be on-board or PC-based.
j) Display digital status inputs.
k) Provide real-time tabular displays of electric plant
information.
l) Log power monitoring data to PC hard disk at user
specified intervals.
(1) Capable of exporting logged data to other file
types used by other common commercially
available software products.
(2) Allow logging of non-electrical quantities such
as water, gas, steam, and air pressure.
m) Retrieve and display tables of historical data recorded
over time.
n) Provide time trend plots of historical data over time.
(1) It is to be possible to overlay on the same plot
information from multiple circuit monitors.
(2) It is to be possible to plot only a portion of the
total data available.
(3) The user is to be able to specify the beginning
and ending date and time of the data to be
plotted.
o) Retrieve and display data and alarm and event logs
created and stored in circuit monitors.
p) Capture and log waveforms and harmonic information
based on user-specified criteria.
(1) Provide graphical waveform displays for the
voltages, phase currents, and residual current
monitored by circuit monitors.
(2) The following information is to be calculated
and displayed based on minimum of four cycles
of data:
704618 26 09 13
(a) (THD, rms magnitudes, peak values,
crest factors (CF), and magnitudes of
individual harmonics.
(b) Harmonics calculations to be based on
samples covering multiple cycles in
order to reduce inaccuracies caused by
sampling discontinuities.
(3) Retrieve, display, and store 4, 12, 24, 36, 48, and
60 cycle waveforms from circuit monitors.
q) Allow Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE):
(1) Serve system data to other applications
supporting DDE for advanced reporting and
graphics.
(2) Read, display, log, trend, and alarm DDE data
from other applications.
(3) Allow the creation of custom quantities to read
DDE quantities from other applications and
metered values from other utilities (gas, water,
steam, and air pressure).
r) Enable monitoring in more than one location by dialing
up remote sites and automatically polling devices.
s) Comply with the Open Database Connectivity (ODBC)
standards of data storage to allow other software
products access to the stored information. It is to be
possible to format data stored by the server for ODBC
database.
t) After power loss and restoration, restart automatically,
go on-line and resume logging and alarming.
u) Capable of password-protected control of system
operations from the workstation including the operation
of circuit monitor outputs, PLC outputs, electronic trip
units, digital protective relays, and other devices.
v) Allow user to create custom tables for viewing electric
system information. Custom tables to be modifiable as
need arises.
2) Full system power monitoring (standalone):
a) Provide same functionality of basic power monitoring
described above and the additional functionality
described below.
b) Include task manager scheduling capability that provides
automated program operations for repetitive tasks, such
as scheduled resets, device log and file retrieval,
generating and printing reports, launching executables,
sending email, and activating beepers. Frequency and
execution of automated tasks to be user defined.
c) Provide real-time bar chart and meter displays of electric
plant information.
704618 26 09 13
d) Allow creation of custom real-time trend plots, charts,
and meter panels for viewing electric system
information. Custom displays to be easily modified as
the need arises.
e) Allow user to develop reports for displayable electrical
system information.
(1) Provide options to simplify routine printouts of
various data for standard reports.
(2) User to be allowed to modify reports.
f) Allow user to save and retrieve computer workspaces
that include user selected graphics, tables, meters, and
bar charts.
3) Single device monitoring (one device at a time):
a) To have same functionality of full system power
monitoring described above, with the following
exception: the software to communicate with one device
at a time.
4) Advanced system power monitoring to have same functionality
of full system power monitoring described above, and to provide
these functions on the same PC and/or distribute information
processing across the PC LAN or WAN. The server and client’s
PC to operate on Windows OS.
a) Display system information on the local PC and on
client PC that is accessible via the PC LAN or WAN and
has the appropriate power monitoring software (see
section c. below, optional power monitoring software
add-on modules).
(1) Allow connection to network server via modem
to access system information and acknowledge
alarms from a PC or laptop at remote location.
(2) Broadcast alarms across the PC LAN or WAN.
(3) Log power monitoring data to logical drive
including the local computer hard disk and
remote drive accessible via a network PC or
server.
c. Provide optional power monitoring client software as indicated on the
Drawings for use with the Windows OS-based system monitoring
applications described above:
1) Power Monitoring:
a) Located wherever needed on any PC in the monitoring
system connected to the server via LAN, WAN, or
modem.
b) Display system information listed above in basic power
monitoring collected by the network server from the
power monitoring devices.
2) System Manager:
704618 26 09 13
a) Located wherever needed on any PC in the monitoring
modem.
b) Display system information listed above in advanced
system power monitoring collected by the network
server from the power monitoring devices.
3) Interactive Graphics:
a) To reside independently on separate PCs networked to
the server, or on any PC with other power monitoring
software as indicated on the Drawings.
b) Compatible with the power monitoring software.
c) Located wherever needed on any PC in the monitoring
modem.
d) The software to display real-time information collected
by the network server from the power monitoring
devices on custom drawings including power one-line
system drawings, equipment elevation drawings, shop
floor layouts, legends, process drawings, etc.
e) It is to be possible to display the quantities available
from the power monitoring devices or programmable
logic controllers in the location, size, and color selected
by the user.
f) The software to provide the ability to perform
executables and launch other programs.
g) Allow the user to zoom, scale, and scroll the drawings to
the desired degree of magnification.
h) The software is to be capable of displaying status of
circuit breakers (open/closed/tripped), status of
transformer fans (on/off), transformer coil and motor
temperatures, power factor capacitors (on/off), circuit
breaker status and control, and other information
available on the power monitoring network. The data to
be available in multiple formats, value blocks, meters,
and bar charts.
i) From within any drawing the user to have the ability to
link and display drawings in a hierarchical fashion to
allow access to related drawings.
j) Allow the user to manually control various system
operations with proper password entry (for example,
load transfer).
k) Include analog function blocks to display the condition
(for example, high, low, or alarm) of metered quantities
such as current, voltage, temperature, etc.
l) Components shown on one-line diagrams to be color-
coded based on the on/off status signals from the device.
m) Supply custom graphic screens based on user-supplied
drawings.
704618 26 09 13
2. Software Service Agreement:
a. The electrical equipment manufacturer to include a 1-year Software
Service Agreement which provides customer with software upgrades for
the software specified above as they are available
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install per manufacturer’s instructions.
3.2 DEMONSTRATION
A. Include a complete working demonstration of the system with simulation of possible

operating conditions which may be encountered.
B. Mount devices rigidly and adequately for the environment within which the device
operates.
C. Install wiring in conduit or raceway suitable for its located environment.
D. Configure and program devices, servers, network components including PAC provided
power meters.
E. Cleaning:
1. Clean up debris resulting from EPMS vendor field personnel activities daily.
Remove cartons, containers, crates, etc., under vendor control as soon as their
contents have been removed. Waste shall be collected and placed in a designated
location.
2. At the completion of work in any area, the Contractor shall clean work,
equipment, etc., keeping it free from dust, dirt, and debris, etc.
3. At the completion of work equipment furnished under this Section shall be
checked for paint damage, and any factory-finished paint that has been damaged
shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. Cabinet or enclosure that has been
deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent
areas.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide labeling and identification per requirements of Section 26 05 53, Identification

for Electrical Systems.
B. Label plug-in components such that label remains stationary during component
replacement.
C. Provide warning signs to conform to OSHA and State and local requirements.
704618 26 09 13
D. Manufacturers' nameplates and Standards labels shall be visible and legible after
equipment is installed.
E. Label identifiers shall match record documents.
704618 26 09 13
WITH BID
26 09 13-01 Provide electrical datasheets indicating heat X

rejection and ventilation requirements.
Indicate electrical characteristics and
connection requirements.
26 09 13-02 Provide single line diagrams indicating X
external wiring requirements. Identify
terminal blocks used for interconnections and
wire type to be used.
26 09 13-03 Provide overall system schematic and Per construction schedule
interconnecting diagrams.
26 09 13-04 Detailed EPMS software configuration Per construction schedule
documentation including channel
descriptions, ranges, engineering units and
addresses at a minimum.
1. Owner approval required prior to
procurement of equipment.
2. Software configuration dependent on third-
party device integration will follow 10
business days after third-party vendor
submittals are approved and provided to
EPMS vendor.
END OF SECTION
704618 26 09 13
SECTION 26 09 23
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Low Voltage Switches.
2. Local Room Controllers
3. Occupancy Sensors.
4. Photocells/daylight sensors.
1. Section 26 29 16 Contactors
2. Section 26 50 00 Lighting
1.2 REFERENCES

1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHES
A. Approved Manufacturer:
1. Leviton.
2. Hubbell
3. GE
4. Lutron
B. Design switches for snap-in installation into one-, two-, four-, and eight-gang boxes.
704618 26 09 23
4 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 Lighting Control Devices - 1
C. Coordinate switch and switch plate cover finish with Architect.
D. For non-dimming switches provide two-button switches.
E. For dimming switches provide a minimum of 3 scenes with raise-lower feature.
F. Provide product compatible with lighting control system.
2.2 LOCAL ROOM CONTROLLER
A. Approved Manufacturer:
1. Leviton.
2. Hubbell
3. GE
4. Lutron
B. Provide a local room controller that can provide standalone room control, or be
networked for facility wide lighting control.
C. Provide controller that allows central connection and integration for all occupancy
sensors, daylight sensors, low voltage switches and light fixtures within a space.
D. Provide with 0-10V dimming capabilities
2.3 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
A. Exterior Photocell Switches:

1. Automatic ON/OFF switching photo control.
2. Housing: Self-contained, die-cast aluminum, unaffected by moisture, vibration,
or temperature changes.
3. Setting: ON at dusk and OFF at dawn.
4. Time delay feature to prevent false switching.
5. Field adjustable to control operating levels.
B. Occupancy Sensor:
1. General:
a. Capable of operating with lamp, ballasts, and drivers specified.
b. Readily accessible user adjustable controls for time delay and sensitivity.
c. Detection Range: 1000 square feet.
2. Passive Infrared Sensor:
a. Provide sensors that respond to human heat and movement to detect
occupants in the coverage area.
b. Temperature compensated pyroelectric sensor.
c. High immunity to false triggering due to RFI and EMI noise.
d. Multi-segmented lens in multi-tier configuration with grooves-in to
eliminate dust and residue buildup.
3. Ultrasonic:
a. Provide sensors which respond to ultrasonic disturbances within as well
as outside the line of sight to detect occupants in the coverage area.
704618 26 09 23
b. Use advanced signal processing technology to adjust the detection
threshold dynamically to compensate for constantly changing levels of
activity and airflow throughout the controlled space.
c. Provide adjustable sensitivity and time delay response at sensor head.
4. Dual Technology:
a. Sensors use a combination of passive infrared and ultrasonic
technologies to detect occupants in coverage area.
b. Provide technology mode selection to allow installer to configure the
operation mode between dual technology, passive infrared only, or
ultrasonic only functionality.
c. No audio dual technology units will be accepted.
5. Sensor Mounting:
a. Ceiling: Directional coverage 360 degrees.
b. Wall: Directional coverage 180 degrees.
c. Switch Box:
1) Directional coverage 180 degrees.
2) Coverage area: At desk top level up to 300 square feet and gross
motion up to 1000 square feet.
6. High Bay:
a. Directional coverage 360 degrees.
b. Mounting height: 12 feet to 50 feet.
c. Mounting: Conduit threads.
d. Bi-level switches turn lights on when occupant enters the coverage area
and turns lights either off or to a preset dimmed level after coverage area
is vacated for preset time delay.
C. Daylight Sensor:
1. Photoelectric, low-voltage ambient light sensor (blue-enhanced photo diode).
2. Compatible with dimming system.
3. Field adjustable between 7 and 140 foot-candles.
D. Mechanically and Electrically Held Lighting Contactors: Refer to

Section 26 29 16 Contactors for requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Pre-installation Meeting:
1. Occupancy Sensors/Daylight Sensors: Arrange pre-installation meeting with
manufacturer’s factory authorized representative at Owner’s facility, to verify
placement of sensors and installation criteria.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Verify finishes and location of exposed components and switches with the Contractor.
704618 26 09 23
D. Install lighting control panels and local room controllers to be accessible. Allow space for
adequate ventilation and free circulation of air.
E. Complete electrical connections to control circuits, network terminations, RS-232

connections, analog inputs, and override wiring.
F. Outdoor Luminaires: Photocells switch lights ON at dusk and OFF at dawn.
G. Dimming Systems:
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Do not connect ballasts or equipment to dimming system unless acceptable to
dimming system manufacturer.
H. Occupancy Sensors: Locate and aim sensors in correct location required for complete and
proper volumetric coverage within range of coverage(s) of controlled areas per
manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide 90 percent to 100 percent room coverage to
accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within
room(s). Locations and quantities of sensors shown on Drawings are diagrammatic and
only indicate which rooms are to be provided with sensors. Provide additional sensors if
required to properly and completely cover respective room.
A. Test switches after installation to confirm proper operation.
3.3 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
A. Furnish manufacturer’s representative for the following services at jobsite or classroom

as designated by Owner for minimum workdays listed below (travel time excluded):
1. 7 workdays for installation assistance and inspection of installation.
2. 3 workdays for functional and performance testing.
3. 3 workdays for plant startup.
4. 2 workdays for instruction of two site personnel.

WITH BID
26 09 23-01 Controls and Other Equipment: Catalog cuts X

and/or shop drawings showing functional
features, programmable capabilities,
dimensions, voltage capacity, load capacity,
contact ratings, wiring diagrams, enclosure
type, and temperature ratings.
704618 26 09 23
WITH BID
26 09 23-02 A one-line diagram of the proposed system.

Per construction schedule
26 09 23-03 Operation and maintenance manuals. With operations and maintenance

manuals
26 09 23-05 Record drawings showing programming and

maintenance of the control system, indicating With operations and maintenance
the load controlled by each relay, the relay manuals
panel number, the location of switches, power
supplies, and control enclosures.
END OF SECTION
704618 26 09 23
SECTION 26 11 16
SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install secondary unit
substations:
1. Design, test, and assemble in accordance with applicable standards of National
Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and Institute of Electrical and
Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE).
2. Complete from incoming line terminals to outgoing feeder terminals.
3. Front of Substation: Control side of switchgear and nameplate side of
transformer.
B. Work Includes:
1. Incoming line section.
2. Transformer section.
3. Secondary switchgear section.
C. Related Sections:
2. Section 26 12 16 Dry-type, Medium-voltage Transformers.
3. Section 26 23 00 Low-voltage Switchgear.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
A. Protect transformers from moisture using appropriate manufacturer shipping and

wrapping packaging as instructed by manufacturer.
704618 26 11 16
19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 Secondary Unit Substations - 1
B. Deliver switchgear sections in 60-inch maximum width shipping splits, individually
wrapped for protection, and mounted on shipping skids.
C. Store switchgear sections in clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide
additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water,
construction debris, and traffic. Handle switchgear sections in accordance with
NEMA and manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for purpose.
Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchgear internal components, enclosure, and
finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Schneider/Square D.
B. Siemens.
C. Eaton
2.2 PRIMARY EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide an incoming line section for each secondary unit substation of type
indicated on Drawings and in accordance with requirements contained in the following
paragraphs.
2.3 AIR-FILLED TERMINAL COMPARTMENT
A. Terminal Compartment Assembly: air-filled, floor-standing metal enclosure mechanically

and electrically connected to substation transformer on primary side.
B. Cables: Enter compartment from below termination equipment. Use compartment as pull
section for direct termination at transformer terminals.
2.4 PRIMARY PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. See One-Line Drawings
2.5 TRANSFORMER SECTION
A. See Section 26 12 16 Dry-type Medium-voltage Transformers for secondary distribution

transformers.
2.6 SECONDARY EQUIPMENT
A. See Section 26 23 00 Low-voltage Switchgear, for switchgear requirements.
704618 26 11 16
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. In addition to factory tests described herein, perform the following special factory tests
on equipment provided under this Section. Test in accordance with latest revision of
ANSI and NEMA standards.
1. Temperature test(s): on one unit only per project covering one or more units of
given kVA rating. When record available of temperature tests on essentially
duplicate units, added tests not required. When transformer supplied with
auxiliary cooling equipment to provide more than one kVA rating, conduct
temperature tests on lowest kVA AN rating and highest kVA AF rating.
2. Basic impulse test on windings.
B. Factory tests as outlined above, witnessed by Owner:

1. Notify Owner 2 weeks prior to date tests to be performed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify surfaces ready to receive work.
B. Verify field measurements as shown on Drawings.
C. Verify required utilities available, in proper location, and ready for use.
D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surface conditions.
E. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Install housekeeping pads where shown on Drawings.
G. Secure switchgear rigidly to floors or mounting pads with anchor bolts; Phillips Drill
Company concrete anchors.
H. Retighten to NEMA standards current-carrying bolted connections and support framing

and panels.
I. After equipment is installed, touch up scratches, etc., incurred during shipment or

installation.
A. See Section 26 05 01 Basic Electrical Requirements, for startup testing and inspection
requirements of secondary equipment.
B. See Section 26 12 16 Dry-type Medium-voltage Transformers for startup testing and

inspection of distribution transformers.
704618 26 11 16
WITH BID

26 11 16-02 Layout with dimensions and openings X
26 11 16-03 Weights X
26 11 16-05 Enclosure construction, floor plans (conduit X
entry location), shipping splits, lifting and
supporting points
26 11 16-06 Front and side views of enclosures with overall X
dimensions
26 11 16-07 Mounting, including seismic anchoring detail X
26 11 16-08 Conduit entrance/exit locations and X
requirements
26 11 16-09 Nameplate legends X
26 11 16-10 Noise X
26 11 16-11 Electrical voltages, loads, frame sizes, trip X
ratings, integrated equipment short-circuit
ratings, and interfaces
26 11 16-12 One-line, schematic, and interconnection Per construction schedule
diagrams, including control, metering, and
ratings
26 11 16-13 Size and number of busbars per phase, neutral, X
and ground
26 11 16-14 Switchgear instrument details Per construction schedule
26 11 16-15 Transformer diagrammatic nameplate for each X
unit
26 11 16-16 One-line diagram superimposed on front Per construction schedule
elevation showing instrumentation and
protective device locations
26 11 16-17 Instructions for handling and installation Prior to delivery
26 11 16-18 Factory testing results including standard Prior to delivery
model tests and options
26 11 16-19 Record documents, including field test results, Per construction schedule
startup report, and manufacturer
representative’s field certification
704618 26 11 16
WITH BID
26 11 16-20 Operation and maintenance manuals Prior to delivery

26 11 16-21 Training Per construction schedule
END OF SECTION
704618 26 11 16
SECTION 26 12 13
LIQUID-FILLED, MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install liquid-filled secondary
distribution transformers.
1. Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete
4. Section 26 09 13 Electrical Power Monitoring and Control.
1.2 REFERENCES

2. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)
4. Basic impulse insulation level (BIL)
5. Current Transformers (CT)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
A. Protect transformers from moisture by using appropriate heaters and shipping materials
and preparation as instructed by the manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. ABB
704618 26 12 13
19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 Liquid-filled, Medium-voltage Transformers - 1
B. Schneider/Square D.
C. Eaton.
D. Siemens.
2.2 RATINGS
A. Temperature Ratings: Average temperature rise 65 degrees C maximum when

transformer operated at full nameplate rating in 30 degree C ambient (average),
40 degree C maximum per American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Institute of
Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) C57.
B. Transformer Cooling and Power Rating:

1. Self-cooled / fan cooled (ONAN/ONAF).
2. Power ratings per One-Line Drawings.
C. Primary Voltage:
1. Two each 2-1/2 percent full capacity above and below normal primary taps.
2. Externally operated tap changer adjustable only with transformer de-energized,
including provisions for padlock (padlock provided by others).
3. Basic Impulse Insulation Level (BIL): 150 kV.
4. Voltage ratings per One-Line Drawings.
D. Secondary Voltage:
1. BIL: 60kV.
2. Voltage ratings per One-Line Drawings.
E. Frequency: 60 Hz.
F. Impedance: per One-Line Drawings.
G. Sound Level: maximum sound levels per National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA) publication TR-1.
H. Efficiency: minimum efficiency per Code of Federal Regulations 10 CFR 431.196.
2.3 CONSTRUCTION
A. Windings:
1. High- and Low-voltage Windings: copper.
2. Manufacturer's standard insulation system.
B. Core:
1. Construct of high-grade, high-magnetic permeability, grain-oriented silicon steel
laminations.
2. Keep magnetic flux density well below saturation point.
3. Provide three legged core for delta-wye transformers and five legged for wye-
wye transformers.
704618 26 12 13
4. Ground to tank by means of flexible grounding strap.
C. Transformer Tank and Radiators:

1. Designed to withstand 7 -psig pressure per ANSI and NEMA standards.
2. Weld tank cover on top with nonorganic gasket provided between tank and its
cover.
3. Provide handhole with gasketed/bolted cover in top of tank.
4. On wye-wye transformers, provide accessible internal link between primary and
secondary winding neutral points.
5. Welded radiators.
6. Base: allow jacking, rolling, or skidding. Provide jacking pads flush to enclosure
and four lifting lugs.
7. Dry powder: Manufacturer’s standard gray, 3-mil dry film thickness.
D. Coolant:
1. Vacuum dry transformers prior to filling and vacuum fill with degassed and dried
fluids.
2. Fill transformers with less flammable (>300 degree C flashpoint) fluid
(EnviroTemp FR3).
E. Terminations:
1. Primary (High-voltage) Terminations:
a. Air-filled compartment sized to accommodate 6-inch conduit, each
having 3 phase conductors and one ground. Provide compression lugs
suitable for copper conductors.
b. Bushings: porcelain or cast resin epoxy, mounted on opposite side of
transformer from secondary bushings. Bushings located above bottom of
transformer at elevation approximately 50 percent of overall height of
unit for units with air-filled terminal chambers.
c. Silver-plated copper bus bars.
2. Secondary (Low-voltage) Terminations:
a. Air-filled compartment sized to accommodate 2-6-inch conduits, each
having 2 conductors per phase and one ground. Provide compression
lugs suitable for copper conductors.
b. Bushings: porcelain or cast resin epoxy mounted on opposite side of
transformer from primary bushings. Bushings located above bottom of
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fan Cooling Equipment:

1. Provide fans, control and power wiring, controller with test switch, and current-
limiting fuses in power supply to controller.
2. Provide three-phase winding temperature indicator with contacts to control fans
and alarm contacts.
3. Provide Class B stranded, Type SIS control and power conductors.
704618 26 12 13
4. Provide hand-auto switch with the following functions:
a. Hand: Fans operate continuously.
b. Auto: Fans operate from temperature sensors/controller.
c. Fan Power Source: 120V, single phase provided by others for fans.
B. Provide copper ground pads with NEMA-spaced holes externally attached to tank on both
low- and high-voltage end of transformer tank.
C. Power Monitoring:
1. Provide means for monitoring of fan cooling equipment and transformer
temperature. Monitoring to be connected to the EPS system as defined in Section
26 09 13, Electrical Power Monitoring and Control.
2. Transformer to have a single point of connection for EPMS communications.
D. Nameplates:
1. Provide stainless steel diagrammatic nameplate mounted to each unit per ANSI
requirements. See Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems for
additional detailed specifications.
2. Provide white phenolic nameplate engraved to black core indicating transformer
unit number per One-Line Drawings. Make characters 1 inch tall minimum.
E. Provide the following accessories:

1. Pressure-vacuum gauge with bleeder.
2. Liquid-level gauge with Form C alarm contacts.
3. Dial-type temperature gauge with Form C alarm contacts.
4. 1-inch drain valve with 3/8-inch sample port.
5. 1-inch fill plug.
6. Cover-mounted pressure relief device.
7. Sudden pressure relay with seal-in relay, ANSI Device 63.
8. Winding Temperature, ANSI Device 49.
9. Alarm and relay contacts connected to NEMA four-terminal junction box by
means of flexible, watertight conduit.
F. Grounding Resistors:
1. Neutral grounding resistor as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Resistor rating: 400 amperes for 10 seconds.
3. Mount resistor on top of the transformer and connect to ground pad and neutral
bushing.
G. Bushing Current Transformers (CT):

1. Provide quantity and CT primary rating where indicated on the Drawings. CTs
to have an accuracy class of C400.
2. Connect CTs to the shorting-type terminal strips located in a NEMA 4 terminal
junction box.
3. CT secondary conductors to be Type SIS size 10 AWG, with ring-tongue crimp
lugs. Route secondary conductors to terminal junction box by means of flexible,
water-tight conduit.
704618 26 12 13
A. Comply with applicable portions of NEMA and ANSI standards for transformers and
include the following tests as minimum:
1. Turns ratio.
2. Polarity and phase rotation.
3. No-load loss.
4. Full-load loss.
5. Excitation.
6. Impedance and resistance.
7. High potential.
8. Induced potential.
B. Perform the following tests on a single unit of each identical unit.

1. Sound level.
2. Temperature rise / heat run.
C. Provide certified test reports for each unit as part of operations and maintenance manual.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify pads are ready to receive work.
B. See Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete, for concrete requirements.
C. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings and as indicated by manufacturer's

shop drawings.
D. Verify required utilities available, in proper location, and ready for use.
E. Beginning of installation means installer accepts conditions.
F. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
G. Install safety labels to NEMA requirements.
H. Fasten units to pads.
A. See Section 26 05 01 Basic Electrical Requirements, for startup testing and inspection.

1. Check primary, secondary, and ground connections.
2. Clean and inspect bushings.
3. Inspect bushing clamps and gaskets.
704618 26 12 13
4. Inspect cover and handhole gasket seals.
5. Inspect tap changer seals.
6. Check for oil leaks and external damage to radiators.
7. Check liquid level.
8. Check accessory devices for condition and proper operation.
1. Test dielectric liquid to American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) and
manufacturer’s requirements, per ANSI minimum breakdown voltage, after
installation and before energizing.
2. Insulation Resistance Test: Megger transformer windings high to low and
ground, low to high and ground, and high and low to ground.
3. Perform turns ratio test.
4. Where auxiliary cooling provided, verify proper operation of equipment.
5. Test transformer per ANSI/IEEE C57.
6. Witness Testing:
a. Owner may choose to witness the tests. Notify The Owner at least 10
working days in advance to allow Owner or representative to be present.
D. Adjust primary taps so secondary voltage within zero to 2.5 percent of rated voltage at no
load.
704618 26 12 13
WITH BID

on core and coil construction, insulation
system, materials of construction
26 12 13-03 Weights X
26 12 13-05 Standard Factory Test on Each Unit X
26 12 13-06 Product data indicating design tests and X
options for similar units
26 12 13-07 Mounting, including seismic, conduit X
openings, connection and support points
26 12 13-08 Diagrammatic nameplate for each unit X
26 12 13-09 Performance characteristics: no-load and full- X
load losses in kW; efficiency and heat loss at
50, 75, 100 percent load and where
applicable, 115 and 125 percent of OA
nameplate
26 12 13-10 Short circuit withstand capability, including X
thermal and mechanical ratings
26 12 13-11 Noise X
26 12 13-12 Electrical voltage, load, and interface for X
accessories
26 12 13-13 Wiring and schematic diagrams Per construction schedule
26 12 13-14 Control interfaces Per construction schedule
26 12 13-15 Factory testing results Prior to delivery
END OF SECTION
704618 26 12 13
SECTION 26 12 16
DRY-TYPE, MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install ventilated dry-type
distribution transformers.
1. Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1.2 REFERENCES

3. Basic Impulse Insulation Level (BIL)
4. Current Transformer (CT)
6. Light emitting diode (LED)
10. Safety Instrumented System (SIS)
1. ANSI C57.12.01 – General Requirements for Dry-Type Distribution and Power
Transformers
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
A. Protect dry-type transformers from moisture by using appropriate standard shipping

protection and wrapping.
704618 26 12 16
19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 Dry-type, Medium-voltage Transformers - 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
B. Siemens.
C. ABB
2.2 RATINGS
A. Temperature Ratings: 80 degrees C maximum average temperature rise when transformer

operated at full nameplate rating in 30 degree C ambient (average), 40 degree C
maximum per American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Institute of Electrical and
Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) C57.12.01
B. Transformer Cooling and Power Rating:

1. Self-cooled/fan cooled (AN/AF) ratings per One-Line Drawings
2. Power ratings per One-Line Drawings.
C. Primary Voltage:
1. Two 2 1/2 percent full capacity above and below normal primary taps.
2. Taps adjustable only with transformer de-energized and readily accessible
through side of transformer.
3. Basic Impulsive Insulation Level (BIL): 150kV.
4. Voltage ratings per One-Line Drawings
D. Secondary Voltage:
1. Voltage ratings per One-line Drawings
E. Frequency: 60 Hz.Impedance: per One-Line Drawings
F. Sound Level: maximum sound levels per National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA) publication TR-1.Efficiency: minimum efficiency per Code of Federal
Regulations 10 CFR 431.196.
2.3 CONSTRUCTION
A. Windings:
1. High- and Low-voltage Windings: Copper
2. Nonhygroscopic and nonhydrophylic windings suitable for prolonged storage and
operation at 95 percent relative humidity from minus 40 degrees C to plus
40 degrees C.
3. Separately wound high and low voltage windings as one rigid, coaxially
arranged, tubular coil.
4. Class H, 220 degree C, Vacuum Pressure Impregnation (VPI), resin encapsulated
coil insulation.
704618 26 12 16
5. Cast bottom coil supports and space blocks to absorb thermal
expansion/contraction of coils.
B. Core:
1. Construct of high-grade, high-magnetic permeability, grain-oriented silicon steel
laminations.
2. Keep magnetic flux density well below saturation point.
3. Cruciform in shape core with mitered joints.
4. Protect outside (exposed) surfaces of core with corrosion-resistant coating.
5. Visibly ground core to frame by means of flexible grounding strap.
C. Terminations:
1. Primary (High-voltage) Terminations:
a. Air-filled compartment. Provide compression lugs suitable for copper
conductors.
transformer from secondary bushings. Bushings located above bottom of
c. Silver plated copper bus bars.
2. Secondary (Low-voltage) Terminations:
a. Throat coupled to low-voltage switchgear. Provide braided jumpers from
transformer to switchgear.
transformer from primary bushings. Bushings located above bottom of
D. Enclosure:
1. Indoor ventilated type enclosure.
2. Heavy-gauge steel with ventilating opens in accordance with NEMA and NEC
requirements.
3. Base: allow jacking, rolling, or skidding. Provide flush jack pads with enclosure
and four lifting lugs.
4. Dry powder, manufacturer’s standard gray, 3-mil dry film thickness.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fan Cooling Equipment:

1. Provide fans, control and power wiring, controller with test switch, current-
limiting fuses in power supply to controller, light emitting diode (LED)-type
indicating lights, and alarm silencing relay.
2. Provide three-phase winding temperature indicator with contacts to control fans
and alarm contacts.
3. Provide Class B stranded Type SIS control and power conductors.
4. Provide hand-auto switch with the following functions:
a. Hand: Fans operate continuously.
b. Auto: Fans operate from temperature sensors/controller.
704618 26 12 16
5. Fan Power Source: self powered from switchgear or secondary bushings, 120 or
208V, single phase.
B. Provide copper ground pads with NEMA-spaced holes attached to frame on low- and
high-voltage ends of transformer.
C. Power Monitoring:
1. Provide means for monitoring of fan cooling equipment and transformer
temperature. Monitoring to be connected to the EPS system as defined in Section
26 09 13, Electrical Power Monitoring and Control.
2. Transformer to have a single point of connection for EPMS communications.
D. Nameplates:
1. Provide stainless steel diagrammatic nameplate mounted to unit per ANSI
requirements. See Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems, for
additional detailed specifications.
2. Provide white phenolic nameplate engraved to black core indicating transformer
unit number per drawings. Provide 1 inch tall minimum characters.
A. Comply with applicable portions of NEMA and ANSI standards for transformers and
include the following tests as minimum:
1. Turns ratio.
2. Polarity and phase rotation.
3. No-load loss.
4. Full-load loss.
5. Excitation.
6. Impedance and resistance.
7. High potential.
8. Induced potential.
B. Provide the following tests on only one unit of each size furnished:
1. Sound level.
2. Temperature rise/heat run.
C. Witness Testing – Owner shall have the right to witness tests.
D. Provide certified test reports for each unit as part of the operations and maintenance
manual.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify pads are ready to receive work.
B. See Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete for concrete requirements.
704618 26 12 16
C. Verify field measurements as shown on Drawings and as indicated by manufacturer's
shop drawings.
D. Verify required utilities available, in proper location, and ready for use.
E. Beginning of installation means installer accepts conditions.
F. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
G. Install safety labels to NEMA requirements.
H. Fasten units to pads.

1. Check primary, secondary, and ground connections.
2. Clean and inspect bushings.
3. Inspect bushing clamps and gaskets.
4. Check accessory devices for condition and proper operation.
1. Insulation Resistance Test: Megger transformer windings high to low and
ground, low to high and ground, and high and low to ground.
2. Perform turns ratio test.
3. Where auxiliary cooling provided, verify proper operation of equipment.
4. Test transformer per ANSI/IEEE C57.
C. Adjust primary taps so secondary voltage is within zero to 2.5 percent of rated voltage at
no load.
704618 26 12 16
WITH BID

on core and coil construction, insulation
system, materials of construction
26 12 16-02 Layout with dimensions and openings Per construction schedule
26 12 16-03 Weights Per construction schedule
26 12 16-04 Capacities and ratings Per construction schedule
26 12 16-05 Standard factory tests on each unit X
26 12 16-06 Product data indicating design tests and X
options for similar units
26 12 16-07 Mounting, including seismic, conduit Per construction schedule
openings, connection and support points
26 12 16-08 Diagrammatic nameplate for each unit X
26 12 16-09 Performance characteristics: no-load and full- Per construction schedule
load losses in kW; efficiency and heat loss at
50, 75, 100 percent load and where
applicable, 133-1/3 percent of AA nameplate
26 12 16-10 Short circuit withstand capability, including X
thermal and mechanical ratings
26 12 16-11 Noise X
26 12 16-12 Electrical voltage, load, and interface for Per construction schedule
accessories
26 12 16-14 Control interfaces Per construction schedule
26 12 16-17 Operation and maintenance manuals Prior to delivery
END OF SECTION
704618 26 12 16
SECTION 26 13 13
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install medium-voltage,

circuit breaker switchgear.
B. Equipment completely factory built, assembled, wired, and tested; equipment and
components of new construction not used or rebuilt.
C. Designed, tested, and assembled in accordance with the latest applicable standards of
American National Standards Institute (ANSI), Institute of Electrical and Electronic
Engineers, Inc. (IEEE), and National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
D. Related Sections:
1.2 REFERENCES

1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
3. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)
6. Current transformer (CT)
9. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV)
13. Rating factor (RF)
14. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
16. Voltage transformer (VT)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
704618 26 13 13
19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 Medium-voltage Circuit Breaker Switchgear - 1
A. Protect switchgear from moisture by using appropriate heaters as instructed by the

manufacturer.

C. Store switchgear sections in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an
additional heavy canvas or plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction
debris, and traffic.
D. Handle switchgear sections in accordance with NEMA and manufacturer’s written

instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid
damage to switchgear internal components, enclosure, and finish.
1.5 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide two sets of spare fuses of each size and rating.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Siemens.
C. Eaton
D. ABB
2.2 CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR
A. Circuit Breaker Switchgear:

1. IEEE 37.20; metal-clad switchgear assembly, including drawout vacuum-type
circuit breakers in freestanding cubicles, securely bolted together to form an
integrated structure.
2. Each section isolated from adjoining sections by metal barriers.
3. Provide individual front doors over each breaker compartment.
4. Provide two bolted rear covers for each vertical section of the switchgear, which
expose only the secondary of the corresponding breaker when removed.
5. Where fitted circuit breaker spaces are indicated on the Drawings, provide empty
cubicles that are fitted with hardware necessary to accommodate installation of
future circuit breakers in field without any modifications. Provide fitted spaces
with doors and instruments as shown on the Drawings.
6. Provide bus supports, standoff insulators, and sleeves of porcelain or epoxy.
7. Incorporate provisions for future bus extensions on both ends of the bus.
704618 26 13 13
B. Breaker / Bus Module:
1. Provide bus with flame-retardant insulation.
2. Cover or seal openings between housings to provide a noncombustible fire
separation.
3. Provide bus joints in each unit.
4. Provide stationary guide rail to function with the circuit breaker to provide
operating, test, and disconnected positions.
5. Provide automatic shutter assembly to cover the stationary contacts when the
breaker is disconnected (including test position) or removed.
6. Ground the breaker in and between positions with a ground contact.
C. System Voltage: 4.16 kV, three phase, 60 Hz.
D. Voltage and Insulation Levels: To IEEE C37.20.
E. Main Bus Ampacity: As indicated on the Drawings. Provide bus of full capacity over the
length of the lineup; tapered bus not approved. Provide silver-plated copper bus. Arrange
bus work Phase A, B, C, left to right, top to bottom, front to back, as viewed from the
front. Provide joints with a minimum of four bolts with Belleville washers on each side.
F. Bus Insulation and Bracing: Fully insulate bus with flame-retardant, nonhygroscopic,
track-resistant insulating material. Do not provide field taped joints. Brace bussing for 25
kA rms symmetrical short circuit.
G. Momentary Current Rating: To IEEE C37.20, equal to momentary rating of circuit

breakers.
H. Provide a 1/4-inch by 2-inch silver-plated copper ground bus over the entire length of the
switchgear bolted to each housing and breaker ground contact.
I. Provide for front switchgear doors opening without disturbing relays and meters. Provide
lock-open stops to limit door swing to 110 degrees of arc. Provide gasketed (dust tight)
doors
J. Instrument Transformer Wiring:

1. Terminate CT and VT secondary wiring on terminal blocks as specified herein.
2. Provide test blocks as specified herein on the front side of the inner door.
2.3 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Circuit Breaker: IEEE C37.04; horizontal drawout type, mounted two high.
B. Circuit Breaker Operator: Spring-charged stored energy with electric operator.

Provisions for manual charging to be provided.
C. Provide interlocks to prevent closing of a breaker between operating and test positions, to
trip breakers upon insertion or removal from housing, and to discharge stored energy
mechanisms upon insertion or removal from the housing.
704618 26 13 13
D. Rated Maximum Voltage: 4.76 kV.
E. Nominal Voltage: 4.16 kV, three phase, three wires, plus ground, 60 Hz for use on an
resistance grounded 4.16-kV-GNDY/2.4-kV system.
F. Voltage and Insulation Levels: To IEEE C37.20.
G. Rated Frequency: 60 Hz.
H. Rated Dielectric Strength (Power Frequency Withstand): 19 kV, low frequency; 60-kV
BIL crest. Maximum Tripping Delay: 2 seconds.
I. Rated Interrupting Time: 3 cycles.
J. Short-circuit Rating: As indicated on the Drawings.
K. Momentary Close and Latch Rating: 97 kA crest.
L. DC Interrupting current: 50 percent.
M. Operation Endurance Capability: IEEE C37.06.
N. Short-time Current (3 Seconds): 36 kA Back-to-Back Capacitor Switching: 1,640A.
O. Control Voltages:
1. Breaker Spring Charge: 125 Vdc.
2. Breaker Close and Trip125 Vdc.
3. Provide auto-throw-over system for control power system.
4. Provide one capacitor stored-energy trip energy system for each circuit breaker.
Maintain charge in stored energy system for 8 hours after a complete loss of
input voltage and remain capable of tripping the breaker during that time.
P. Provide wear indicators on vacuum bottle contacts.
Q. Provide breaker auxiliary contacts one each “a” and “b” per breaker, contact rating
125 Vdc, 10A.
R. Provide provisions and apparatus for remote racking of circuit breakers. Provide one unit
for facility.
S. Provide provisions and apparatus for remote trip and close via umbilical from at least end
of lineup or farther. Provide one unit for facility.
2.4 PROTECTIVE RELAYS AND INSTRUMENTS
A. Protective Relays: Provide relaying instruments as indicated on the Drawings for each
circuit breaker. Provide relays as specified on the Drawings or equivalent units
manufactured by Sweitzer. Provide relays with semiflush-mounted cases, drawout
704618 26 13 13
arrangement. Provide relays (except time delay and auxiliary) with integral test switches.
Factory calibrate and block relays before shipment. Provide two sets of test plugs.
B. CT: IEEE C37.20; 5-ampere secondary, with single secondary winding and secondary
shorting device, primary/secondary ratios as shown on the Drawings, burden consistent
with connected metering and relay devices, accuracy of 0.3.
C. VT: IEEE C57.13; 120-volt secondary, drawout- or trunion-mounted disconnecting type

with integral fuse mountings, primary/secondary ratio as shown on the Drawings, burden
consistent with connected metering and relay devices, accuracy of 0.3. Interlock with
access door to disconnect; ground and isolate from primary voltage when door is open.
Interlock control power transformers with breaker to prevent access when breaker is
closed.
D. Control Power: Provide disconnect breaker for separate 125 Vdc control power on each
end of switchgear with auto/manual throwover scheme.
E. Digital Multifunction Power Meter:

1. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide a solid-state digital multifunction
power meter per 26 09 13 Electrical Power Monitoring System and Control.
F. Control Switches: Rotary, multistage, snap-action type with 600V ac-dc silver-plated
contacts, engraved escutcheon plate, and pistol grip handle.
1. Breaker Control: Two positions (open-close) with green (open) and red (closed)
target.
G. Indicating Lights: Push-to-test light emitting diode (LED) type. Red, breaker closed;
green, breaker open.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Surge Protection Devices:

1. Metal oxide semiconductor type.
2. Station class.
3. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): 6.0 kV.
4. Locate as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Snubber Circuit: Provide snubber circuit or surge protection to avoid control damage
from lightning or from switching of vacuum breakers.
C. Incoming Cable Terminations: Two-hole, long-barrel, compression type. Provide

adequate room for pre-manufactured indoor-type stress cones by RayChem. Stress cones
furnished and installed by others; cable lug sizes as per the Drawings. Provide for bottom
cable entry/exit.
D. Wiring and Terminal Blocks:

1. Terminate control, metering, and instrumentation wiring on 600V, 30A, heavy-
duty terminal blocks. Separately mount CT terminal blocks with CT secondaries
terminated on four-point shorting-type terminal blocks. Provide terminal blocks
704618 26 13 13
on each side of shipping splits and clearly label. Provide 25 percent spare
terminals.
2. Provide test switches per the Drawings, mount on hinged instrument panels and
fully wire.
3. Provide test switches of molded polycarbonate with screw-type terminals for
ring-tongue connectors at rear. Provide shorting switches on current circuits, with
four potential and six current poles.
4. Provide 14 AWG minimum control wiring, 12 AWG minimum on current
circuits, 600V, 90 degree C, Type SIS, terminated in crimp-on lugs.
5. Conductor and Terminal Block Identification: Machine-lettered, PVC sleeve-type
wire markers on conductors. Identified terminal blocks with phenolic nameplates
as described herein. Clearly and neatly label individual terminals with indelible
black marking pen.
6. Wire both sides of trip and close coils to terminal blocks.
E. Nameplates: Per Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems, white phenolic
engraved to a black core. Nameplate size, character height, and inscription per the
Drawings. Provide nameplates for each breaker, relay, instrument, control device,
transformer, and incoming line compartment with minimum character height 5/32 inch.
Attach nameplates with plastic pop-in rivets. Provide master nameplate on tie-breaker
cubicle indicating equipment name (1-inch letters), voltage and service (1/2-inch letters),
and source of power (1/2-inch letters), for example:
SWITCHGEAR NAME
Voltage and Service
Source: [TAG OF UPSTREAM
FEEDER DISCONNECT]
F. Mimic Bus: Provide a laminated plastic mimic bus over the face of the switchgear.
Mimic bus shall depict incoming line, breaker, voltage transformer, and control power
transformer medium blue in color and fastened with countersunk screws, locknuts, and
washers.
G. Key Interlocks: As indicated on the Drawings.
H. Circuit Breaker Lifting Device: Carriage and track on top of switchgear lineup with
lifting device to serve drawout circuit breakers in switchgear.
I. Provide 120-Vac space heaters in each cubicle to prevent condensation. Controlled by a

common thermostat mounted on the interior wall opposite the front of the switchgear.
Feed heaters from emergency power panel.
J. Ground and Test Device:

1. Draw-out element capable of being inserted into the switchgear in place of a
circuit breaker to provide access to the primary switchgear circuits for the
purpose of temporary connection of grounds or test equipment.
704618 26 13 13
K. Infrared Scanning Viewports
1. Provide viewports for infrared scanning to be located factory installed in
manufacturers standard locations.
2. Provide a minimum of three per vertical section of switchgear.
2.6 INDOOR SWITCHGEAR ENCLOSURE
A. Meet the requirements of NEMA 1 and ANSI C37.
B. Provide removable steel floor plates at bottom of each incoming/outgoing section.

Provide rodent-proof switchgear.
C. Provide painted or plated surfaces. Clean painted surfaces in a hot phosphatized bath and
coat with corrosion-resistant primer (lead-free), finish coat manufacturer's standard.
2.7 OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR ENCLOSURE
A. Walk-in, weatherproof structure rated NEMA 3R.
B. Provide 60-inch (15-kV systems) or 48-inch (4.76-kV systems) minimum clearance from
face of switchgear to wall on opposite of aisle.
C. Provide 72-inch (15-kV systems) or 60-inch (4.76-kV systems) minimum clearance from
face of switchgear to equipment on opposite side of aisle of equal or lesser voltage
(follow NEC clearances as a minimum).
D. Provide 240-Vac space heaters operated at 120 Vac (for extended life) in each cubicle
with individual thermostat control. Provide power for space heaters from external source
provided by others.
E. Suitable for site erection on a concrete pad.
A. General:
1. Actual operation performed whenever possible.
2. Inspect and verify continuity checks are made.
3. Component devices operated in circuits as shown on diagrams.
4. Control and primary circuits given dielectric tests as described herein.
B. Detailed Tests:
1. Control Circuits and Devices:
a. Control bus energized at 80 percent rated dc or 85 percent rated ac
control voltage.
b. Control devices operated as shown on diagrams.
c. Verification of remote circuits which were not included in operational
test.
704618 26 13 13
2. Instruments, Meters, Protective Relays, and Associated Equipment:
a. Functionally tested by energizing current and potential circuits to rated
values.
b. Instruments operated and expected readings verified.
c. Meters checked for proper calibration; current and voltage circuits for
phasing.
d. Protective relays operated for functional check in accordance with rating
and application. Instantaneous trips manually operated to verify correct
functioning of operation indicator and associated circuits.
e. Relays set on maximum and checked for operation and friction.
3. Dielectric Tests:
a. Control circuits and associated wiring received insulation test of 1,500V,
60 cycles, for 1 minute, except where equipment manufacturer
specifications do not permit.
b. Primary circuits (except VTs) tested phase to phase and phase to ground
with 60-cycle voltage applied for 1 minute.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Verify field measurements are as shown on the Drawings.
C. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.
D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts conditions.
F. Secure switchgear securely to floor or mounting pads with anchor bolts, concrete
anchors, or as required by manufacturer.
G. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing switchgear.
H. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
I. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.
J. Adjust trip and time-delay settings to values as instructed by CH2M.
A. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and
grounding.
704618 26 13 13
B. Check tightness of accessible bolted bus joints using calibrated torque wrench. Tighten in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommended values.
C. In addition to manufacturer requirements, see Section 26 05 01 Basic Electrical

Requirements for startup, testing, and inspection requirements of medium-voltage circuit
breaker switchgear.
D. Physically test key interlock systems to ensure proper function.
704618 26 13 13
WITH BID
26 13 13-01 Detailed literature describing features. X

26 13 13-02 Preliminary drawings, including exterior X
dimensions, and estimated shipping weights.
26 13 13-03 Front elevations with bus superimposed. X
26 13 13-04 Size and number of bus bars. X
26 13 13-05 Electrical characteristics including voltage, X
frame size, trip ratings, BIL, and integrated
equipment short-circuit ratings.
26 13 13-06 Product data for components and accessories. Per construction schedule
Nameplate schedules.
26 13 13-07 Sections of each type of switchgear cubicle in X
the lineup.
26 13 13-08 Front elevation of switchgear with
instrumentation, relaying, and control devices Per construction schedule
illustrated.
26 13 13-09 Overall dimensions of switchgear and X
enclosure including shipping splits.
26 13 13-10 Foundation and anchor bolt plans, including X
seismic mounting with bottom cable entry/exit
location dimensions.
26 13 13-11 Top cable entry/exit location dimensions. X
Instructions for handling and installation of
switchgear.
26 13 13-12 Elementary (schematic) wiring diagrams for
power, control, relaying, and metering Per construction schedule
elements.
26 13 13-13 Interconnection diagrams of control, relaying, Per construction schedule
and metering elements, including terminal
strips and point-to-point wiring.
26 13 13-14 Manufacturer's original drawings of Per construction schedule
overcurrent protective device time-current
coordination curves.
26 13 13-15 Cable terminal sizes. Per construction schedule
26 13 13-16 Key interlock diagram. Per construction schedule
704618 26 13 13
WITH BID
26 13 13-17 List of factory tests to be performed prior to X

shipment.
26 13 13-18 Three copies of the manufacturer’s Per construction schedule
representative‘s field certification.
26 13 13-19 Maintenance instructions for cleaning Per construction schedule
methods, cleaning materials recommended,
instructions for circuit breaker removal,
replacement, testing and adjusting, and
lubrication.
26 13 13-20 Complete one-line and three -line drawings, Per construction schedule
equipment elevations, schematic diagrams,
and interconnection drawings.
26 13 13-21 Material and equipment summary sheets and Per construction schedule
recommended spare parts list.
26 13 13-22 Descriptive bulletins and instructions for X
relays, instruments, current and voltage
transformers, control devices, capacitors,
diodes, and resistors.
26 13 13-23 Excitation curves and ratio correction factor Per construction schedule
curves for instrument transformers.
26 13 13-24 Certified factory test reports specified. Prior to delivery
END OF SECTION
704618 26 13 13
SECTION 26 13 16
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE FUSIBLE INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install medium-voltage fusible
interrupter switchgear.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. Alternating current (AC)
4. Automatic transfer control relay (ATCR)
6. Current transformers (CT)
7. Direct current (DC)
13. Rating factor (RF)
16. Voltage transformers (VT)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
704618 26 13 16
19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. A Medium-voltage Fusible Interrupter Switchgear - 1
A. Protect switchgear from moisture by using appropriate heaters as instructed by the

manufacturer.
B. Deliver switchgear in 72-inch maximum width shipping splits, individually wrapped for
protection, and mounted on shipping skids.
C. Store switchgear sections in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an
additional heavy canvas or plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction
D. Handle switchgear sections in accordance with NEMA and manufacturer’s written

damage to switchgear internal components, enclosure, and finish.
1.5 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide two insulated-handle tools designed for pulling fuses.
B. Provide two sets of spare fuses of each size and rating.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Eaton.
B. Schneider Electric
C. S&C Electric
D. ABB
2.2 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE FUSIBLE INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR
A. Interrupter Switchgear Ratings:

1. Nominal System Voltage: As indicated on the Drawings.
2. Maximum Design Voltage: 38 kV.
3. Basic impulse insulation level (BIL): 150 kV.
4. Bus Continuous Current: As indicated on the drawings
5. Short Time Current (2-Seconds): 25 kA.
2.3 CONSTRUCTION
A. Switchgear assembly, including individual air interrupter switches in freestanding

cubicles, securely bolted together to form an integrated structure.
704618 26 13 16
B. Integrally design and produce the switchgear assembly of interrupter switches,
enclosures, and operators to ensure a completely coordinated product.
C. Provide metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear consisting of dead-front, completely

metal-enclosed vertical sections containing load interrupter switches and fuses (where
shown) of the number, rating, and type noted on the Drawings or specified herein.
D. Supply the following features on vertical sections containing a three-pole, two-position

open-closed switch:
1. Barriers: Glass polyester between fuse and switch compartments, between
individual poles (both switch and fuses), and between outer phases and the
enclosure.
2. Actuate each switch by means of a quick-make, quick-break, manually operated,
stored-energy mechanism. Provide mains and ties with motor recharge. Provide
feeders with manual recharge.
3. Mechanical Linkages between the Interrupter Switchblades and Operating
Mechanism: Insulating material meeting or exceeding the BIL of the bus
insulation system.
4. Speed of opening or closing of contacts independent of the operator.
5. Provide the operating mechanism with sufficient force to overcome the forces
associated with closing the switch into a fault.
6. Provide the interrupter switch with separate main, make, and break contacts to
provide maximum endurance for fault close and load interrupting duty.
7. Spring load arcing contacts on make and break and provide last in and last out,
with arc interruption taking place in arc chutes.
8. Provide high-impact viewing window to enable visual inspection of switch poles
from outside the enclosure.
9. Provide ability to observe the blown fuse indicator or switch position without
opening the fuse access door.
E. Fuse Holder: Positively clamp fuses in position with provision for easy removal and
replacement from the front without the use of special tools.
F. Provide through-bushings for fault isolation between source-and-load bays and source-
and-tie bays and not between load bay and load bay.
2.4 SAFETY INTERLOCKING
A. Interlock hinged door with the switch shaft so the switch must be open before the door
can be opened, and the door must be closed before the switch can be closed.
2.5 INSULATION
A. Provide porcelain or epoxy insulation to support current-carrying parts.
2.6 MAIN BUS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Provide buses of high-conductivity copper with silver-plated joints.
704618 26 13 16
B. Provide hardware with high tensile strength and anticorrosive plating.
C. Provide ground bus sized to carry rated 2-second current of the assembly and extending
the entire length of the switchgear; ground bus conductor copper.
D. Provide the quantity shown on the Drawings, compression-type ground lugs for each
compartment.
E. Make provisions for convenient extension of main and ground bus in the future.
2.7 WIRING/TERMINATIONS
A. Provide one terminal pad per phase for attaching cable terminal lugs for a maximum of
two conductors per phase of the sizes indicated on the Drawings. Provide sufficient space
for electrical stress relief termination devices.
B. Provide small wiring, fuse blocks, and terminal blocks within the vertical section
indicated on the drawings. Label each control wire with wire markers. Provide terminal
blocks for customer connections to other apparatus.
2.8 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES
A. Where indicated on drawings, provide 36-kV line to ground, suitable for operation on a
34.5-kV line to line, three-phase, three-wire system, station class lightning protection
devices mounted in air-filled terminal compartment.
B. Provide totally solid-state type protection devices using metal oxide ceramic elements,
not cap-type protection devices, Cutler-Hammer, Type SMX.
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide permanently mounted operating handle, lockable in both positions. Interlock fuse
compartment door to prevent opening with switch in closed position.
B. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish with each switch two 5-amp, 120-Vac auxiliary contacts (one
each N.O. and NC). Extend leads to terminal strip in the instrument or fuse compartment.
C. Signage: Provide "Danger – High Voltage, Keep Out" signs on doors and covers
providing access to live parts and nameplates per Section 26 05 53, Identification for
Electrical Systems.
D. Internal Light: Provide each unit with a switched 120V light within the cubicle for
viewing status of the switch contacts; 120V power provided from a remote source.
Provide access to the light switch through the outer door.
E. Infrared Scanning Viewports

1. Provide viewports for infrared scanning, to be factory mounted in manufacturer’s
standard locations.
2. Provide a minimum of two per vertical section of switchgear
704618 26 13 16
2.10 FABRICATION
A. Construction: Universal frame type; formed, welded, and bolted members, top and rear
covers removable.
B. Covers and Doors: Fabricated from not less than 12-gauge steel, maximum dimensions as
shown on the Drawings.
C. Provide each switch cubicle with a single or double door over the switch/fuse assembly.
Provide high-impact windows for viewing contact position and blown fuse indicators.
D. Provide spare fuse compartment on interior side of each switch door.
E. Provide door-to-door nonwalk-in indoor units. Screen and barrier openings to prevent the
entrance of small animals, snow, sand, etc.
2.11 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Clean surfaces before applying paint.
B. Apply corrosion-resistant primer to surfaces.
C. Apply finish coat of baked enamel paint to 3 mils thick, minimum.
D. Finish Color: Manufacturer’s standard gray.
2.12 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS – MEDIUM-VOLTAGE FUSES
A. Siemens.
C. S & C.
2.13 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE FUSES
A. Fuse: Enclosed current-limiting, nonexpulsion type suitable for use indoors.
B. Fuse Rating: As indicated on the Drawings.
C. System Voltage: 34.5 kV.
D. Interrupting Rating: As indicated on the Drawings.
2.14 FACTORY TESTING
A. Fully assemble and test the metal-enclosed gear at the factory prior to shipment. Test in
accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards.
704618 26 13 16
B. Provide for factory tests as outlined above. Allow for witnessing by the Owner.
1. Notify the Owner 2 weeks prior to the date the tests are to be performed.
2. Include the cost of transportation and lodging for up to three people, with the cost
of meals and incidental expenses the Owner's responsibility.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Verify field measurements are as shown on the Drawings.
D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surface conditions.
F. Secure switchgear rigidly to floors or mounting pads with anchor bolts, Phillips Drill
Company concrete anchors, or as required by manufacturer.
G. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing switchgear.
H. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
I. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.
J. Adjust trip and time-delay settings to values as instructed by CH2M.
grounding.
C. In addition to manufacturer’s requirements, see Section 26 05 01, Basic Electrical

Requirements for startup, testing, and inspection requirements of certain components.
E. Perform mechanical operator tests in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Check

blade alignment and arc interrupter operations.
F. Perform insulation resistance test on each phase to ground and from each phase to each
other phase. Record results.
704618 26 13 16
G. Perform ac or dc overpotential test to IEEE 37.20.
H. Perform contact resistance test across each switchblade; report contact resistance in
excess of 50 microhms.
I. Perform overpotential test to IEEE C37.20.3.
J. Do not perform tests outside the limits set by the manufacturer.
704618 26 13 16
WITH BID
26 13 16-01 Detailed literature describing features. X

26 13 16-02 Preliminary drawings, including exterior X
dimensions, and estimated shipping weights.
Front elevations with bus superimposed.
26 13 16-03 Size and number of bus bars. X
frame size, trip ratings, and integrated
26 13 16-05 Product data for components and accessories. X
Nameplate schedule.
26 13 16-06 Sections of each type of switchgear in the X
lineup.
26 13 16-07 Front elevation of switchgear with X
instrumentation, relaying, and control devices
illustrated.
26 13 16-08 Overall dimensions of switchgear and X
26 13 16-09 Foundation and anchor bolt plans, including Per construction schedule
seismic mounting, with bottom cable
entry/exit location dimensions and/or top
cable entry/exit location dimensions.
26 13 16-10 Instructions for handling and installation of Prior to delivery
switchgear.
26 13 16-11 Elementary (schematic) wiring diagrams for Per construction schedule
power, control, relaying, and metering
elements.
26 13 16-12 Interconnection diagrams of control, relaying, Per construction schedule
26 13 16-14 Key interlock diagrams. Per construction schedule
26 13 16-15 Certified factory test report on fault close, Prior to delivery
momentary, and BIL based on ANSI and
NEMA standards for essentially duplicate
units.
704618 26 13 16
WITH BID
26 13 16-16 Certified report for factory tests specified Prior to delivery

herein.
26 13 16-17 Maintenance instructions for cleaning Prior to delivery
instructions for switch removal, replacement,
testing and adjusting, and lubrication.
26 13 16-18 Complete one-line and three-line drawings, Per construction schedule
26 13 16-19 Material and equipment summary sheets and Prior to delivery
26 13 16-20 Descriptive bulletins and instructions for X
diodes, and resistors. Include excitation
curves and ratio correction factor curves for
instrument transformers.
END OF SECTION
704618 26 13 16
SECTION 26 13 44
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE GAS-INSULATED CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Medium-voltage (MV), indoor, SF6 gas-insulated (GIS), metal-clad switchgear
equipped with SF6 insulated vacuum circuit breakers with rated maximum
voltage of 38 kV.
2. Include design, manufacture, factory-production testing and field service
assistance during installation and commissioning of switchgear and associated
equipment.
2. Section 26 05 13 Medium-Voltage Cables.
3. Section 26 05 53 Identification of Electrical Systems
1.2 REFERENCES
A. In the event of a conflict between the Specifications and/or Drawings and the local or
regional regulatory rules/codes/standards, in addition to the applicable codes and
standards, the requirements of the more stringent shall prevail.
B. Standards, Listing, Labeling and Marking:

1. IEC 60044-1 – Instrument Transformers – Part 1: Current Transformers.
2. IEC 60044-2 – Instrument Transformers – Part 2: Inductive Voltage
Transformers.
3. IEC 60044-7 – Instrument Transformers – Part 7: Electronic Voltage
Transformers.
4. IEC 60044-8 – Instrument Transformers – Part 8: Electronic Current.
5. IEC 60376 – Specification of technical grade sulfur hexafluoride (SF6) for use in
electrical equipment.
6. IEC 60480 – Guidelines for the checking and treatment of sulfur hexafluoride
(SF6) taken from electrical equipment and specification for its re-use.
7. IEC 61850 – Communication Networks and Systems in Substations.
8. IEC 60870-5-103 – Companion Standard for the Informative Interface of
Protection Equipment.
9. IEC 61131 – PLC Programming.
10. IEC 62271-1 - High-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear – Part 1: Common
Specifications.
11. IEC 62271-100 – High-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear – Part 100:
Alternating-Current Circuit-Breakers.
12. IEC 62271-102 – High-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear – Part 102:
Alternating Current Disconnectors and Earthing Switches.
704618 Medium-Voltage Gas-Insulated Circuit Breaker Switchgear

19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 26 13 44 - 1
13. IEC 62271-200 – AC Metal-Enclosed Switchgear and Controlgear for Rated
Voltages Above 1 kV and Up To and Including 52 kV.
14. ISO 9001.
15. Additional Requirements:
a. Electrical components and/or systems shall be listed and labeled by a
nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) such as: UL, ETL,
CSA, or FM; shall be labeled and/or listed as part of a UL-labeled
assembly, or shall be evaluated by a third party acceptable to the
authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) as suitable for the use intended. All
labels shall be applied at the manufacturer’s factory or facility prior to
shipment.
b. Conform to the following Standards:
1) IEEE C37.04-1999 - Rating Structure for AC High-Voltage
Circuit Breakers.
2) IEEE C37.06-2009 – AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated
on a Symmetrical Current Basis – Preferred Ratings and Related
Required Capabilities for Voltages Above 1,000V.
3) IEEE C37.09-1999 (R2007) – Standard Test Procedure for AC
High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current
Basis.
4) IEEE C37.010-1999 (R2005) – Application Guide for AC High-
Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis.
5) IEEE C37.2-2008 – Electrical Power System Device Function
Numbers, Acronyms, and Contact Designations.
6) IEEE C37.20.2-1999 (R2005), (where applicable) – Metal-Clad
Switchgear.
7) IEEE C37.20.7-2007 – Guide for Testing Metal-Enclosed
Switchgear Rated Up to 38 kV for Internal Arcing Faults.
8) IEEE C37.90-2005 – Standard for Relays and Relay Systems
Associated with Electric Power Apparatus.
9) IEEE C57.13-2008 – Requirements for Instrument Transformers
10) IEEE PC37.122.2TM/D15-2010 – Draft Guide for the
Application of Gas-Insulated Substations 1 kV to 52 kV.
11) NEMA C37.54-2002 (where applicable) – For Indoor
Alternating Current High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Applied as
Removable Elements in Metal-Enclosed Switchgear –
Conformance Test Procedures.
12) NEMA C37.55-2002 (where applicable) – Switchgear – Medium
Voltage Metal-Clad Assemblies - Conformance Test Procedures.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Materials and equipment shall be new and of high quality, ensuring long life and reliable
operation.

19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 26 13 44 - 2
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Switchgear:
1. Warrant that switchgear is free of non-conformities in workmanship and
materials for 1 year from date of initial operation, but not more than 18 months
from date of shipment.
B. Circuit Breakers:
1. Provide 5-year warranty.
A. Furnish service and maintenance of switchgear for 1 year from Date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Siemens.
C. ABB
2.2 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
A. System Configuration: Switchgear shall be single bus type, suitable for application in
38 kV, 3-phase, 60 Hz, 3-wire system, as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Electrical Ratings:
1. Rated Nominal System Voltage: 34.5 kV.
2. Maximum Design Voltage: 38.0 kV.
3. Rated Main Bus Current: As indicated on the Drawings.
4. Rated Interrupting Symmetrical Short-Circuit Current, kA Symmetrical: As
indicated on the Drawings.
5. Peak Withstand Current: 104 kA.
6. Rated Power-Frequency Withstand Voltage (1 Minute): 80 kV.
7. Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage (BIL): 140 kV, with SF6 gas at atmospheric
pressure.
8. Continuous Current Rating of the Main Circuit Breaker: As indicated on the
Drawings.
9. Continuous Current Rating of the Tie Circuit Breaker: As indicated on the
Drawings.
10. Continuous Current Rating of the Feeder Circuit Breakers: As indicated on the
Drawings.

19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 26 13 44 - 3
C. Provide medium-voltage, gas-insulated, metal-clad vacuum circuit breaker switchgear.
Meet IEEE C37.20.2 or IEC except for differences related to fixed circuit breaker
construction and phase bus arrangement. Locate components of the switchgear, such as
circuit breakers, busbar, disconnect switches, grounding switches, VTs, etc., in grounded
aluminum metal or stainless steel enclosures. Provide construction that can withstand
forces repeatedly, without distortion, caused by closing and opening of the circuit
breaker. Provide switchgear capable of withstanding stresses produced by fault
conditions up to and including the 40 kA rated short-circuit current and breaking capacity
without damage.
D. Provide switchgear with arc resistant capability. Provide standard to which switchgear is
built.
E. Provide each current carrying component of the equipment with the capability of
continuous operation at the specified ratings without exceeding the maximum
temperature rises stated in the ANSI/IEEE and IEC standards.
F. Design the switchgear and individual components to perform at full nameplate rating at
the service conditions specified.
G. Arrange devices, connections, and wiring to satisfy the functional and performance
requirements shown on the Drawings.
H. Equip low-voltage panel doors with a minimum of two-point latching system, operated
with a single handle, or provide single quarter-turn latch with a fold-down handle.
Provide operating handle with provisions for locking the door shut. Provide hinges for
doors and swing panels that do not permit sagging due to weight of the door or panel.
Provide a suitable doorstop. Provide dust-tight NEMA 1/IP20 construction for each
cabinet door.
I. Completely wire, test, and install the local control and protection panel on the front of
each switchgear panel. Neatly arrange and secure wiring to the panel or support with
suitable brackets as required. Do not splice wires.
J. Do not exceed more than two wires on each terminal screw. Arrange terminal blocks in a
series of rows. Segregate panel wiring and field wiring from one another, and
separate Vac from Vdc wiring, by the row of terminal blocks. Do not obstruct access to
the terminal blocks for connections of terminals or for installation of control cables with
devices or other material.
K. Provide 1 spare 12 point non-shorting block for field power monitoring connections.
L. Equip switchgear with UL/CE Marked accessories. Provide wiring compliant with the
latest revision of the NEC/IEC standards.
M. Design and manufacture the switchgear lineup with provision for future expansion on
both ends except where the arrangement does not allow extension. Provide future bus
extension disconnect switch in order to avoid de-energization of the main busbar where
indicated on the Drawings. When extending either end of the switchgear, it shall only be

19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 26 13 44 - 4
necessary to evacuate the bus extension switch SF6 gas compartment and remove end
panels for the associated busbars. No other gas compartment shall be affected. The
disconnect switch for the future extension will not add any section to the line-up length.
N. Construct the enclosures housing the primary medium-voltage components of gas-tight

cast aluminum or stainless steel. Provide ferrous metal components with electrostatically
applied paint finish in manufacturer’s standard light gray color. Plate for corrosion
resistance mechanism parts not suitable for painting.
O. Provide switchgear compartments of metal construction using materials that are naturally
resistant to corrosion, such as stainless steel or aluminum. Provide end cover and local
control and protection doors of sheet steel painted light gray ANSI 70, RAL 7035, or
manufacturer’s own standard color.
P. Factory-assemble the medium-voltage enclosure. Provide modular design. Enclose

medium-voltage components in cast aluminum, hermetically sealed, single pole (phase)
enclosures to eliminate the possibility of phase-to-phase faults in the switchgear. If single
pole construction is not possible, provide information on how phase-to-phase faults are
protected against.
Q. Provide indoor, freestanding, rigid, metal-enclosed modular type switchgear. Provide

switchgear assembly with separate gas cubicles for the circuit breaker, bus and
disconnect/ground switch.
R. Provide the front of each switchgear section with separate compartments for the
following main components:
1. Protective relays and controls located in the top compartment. Locate terminal
blocks, CT connections, VT connections and miscellaneous control devices in
this compartment. Locate connection terminal blocks for Owner’s external
connections in this compartment. Operation of the switchgear shall not be
affected by opening the low-voltage compartment doors.
2. Three-position switch operating mechanism with serviceable items accessible
from the front.
3. Circuit breaker operating mechanism with serviceable items accessible from the
front.
4. Provide lower compartment with availability for additional mounting of low-
voltage components or external connection, if required. Provide air-insulated
cable termination compartment, with segregation barriers between main sections
and feeder sections and between tie sections and feeder sections, or provide
internal pluggable type stress cones for primary cable connections per Section 26
05 13, Medium-Voltage Cables.
S. Finger Safe: When any door or panel is opened/removed, all internal electrical
components shall be rated to IP20 per IEC 60529.
T. SF6 Gas and Compartments:

1. Pressurize the medium-voltage enclosure with SF6 gas to isolate energized
components from environmental influences, thus allowing long intervals between
maintenance. Provide switchgear with required minor maintenance of the

19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 26 13 44 - 5
primary components at 10-year intervals and major maintenance at 20-year
intervals. Design the switchgear so that normal service, inspection, maintenance,
grounding of high-voltage cables and elimination of electrostatic charges can be
carried out safely with adjacent sections energized.
2. Provide gas-tight enclosures which do not require topping off or refilling SF6 gas
during normal operation for the expected service life of the switchgear. Provide
switchgear compartments and associated structures able to withstand repeatedly,
without distortion, forces caused by closing and opening of the circuit breakers.
Provide continuous ground bus run the length of the switchgear for effective
grounding.
3. Divide each busbar to circuit breaker gas compartment into separate sections that
are isolated by gas-tight bushings. Divide compartments such that in the event of
an internal fault, a pressure relief device operates before internal pressure
exceeds the design limit of the compartment. Provide individual gas-sealed
compartments capable of being separately evacuated for inspection or
maintenance while keeping the adjacent compartments pressurized to rated
pressure.
4. Provide switchgear enclosures with seals at intersections between gas-filled
compartments and at positions where sliding or rotating shafts enter a gas-filled
compartment. Provide material for the seals that is non-deteriorating, capable of
withstanding the gas pressure of the compartments under all service conditions,
including seismic events.
5. Guarantee that leakage of gas from the enclosures will not exceed 0.2 percent of
the gas per compartment per year from the enclosures.
6. Gas Monitoring:
a. Provide gas leakage detection system for each gas compartment, and
connect to an alarm system. Include provisions for supervisory control
monitoring. Provide each gas-tight SF6-filled compartment with a
temperature-compensated pressure sensitive device to monitor the gas
density. If the gas density falls below the preset limits, use a relay to
initiate an alarm to the supervisory control monitoring system. Provide
an independent gas monitoring system for each section of the busbar.
b. Wire all gas alarms to relay I/O for use by Owner to annunciate via
Owner’s power monitoring system or per Drawings.
U. Pressure Relief:
1. Pressure Relief Devices: Provide each gas compartment with a pressure relief
device to limit the pressure of SF6 gas to a safe level and to limit the
consequences in the event of an internal fault. Do not design switchgear which
allows the arc to burn through the enclosure at designated points. Design pressure
relief devices such that discharges resulting from internal faults are directed away
from locations where personnel may be present. Locate busbar pressure relief
area such that gases are exhausted through the top of the enclosures. Provide
pressure relief device designs proven by arc fault design tests in accordance with
IEC 62271-200 and/or IEEE C37.20.7 standards.

19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 26 13 44 - 6
V. Bus and Connections:
1. Provide copper conductors and connectors for the busbars, designed to carry
rated continuous current at 40 degrees C ambient temperature and able to
withstand the rated short-circuit current specified. Provide conductor surfaces
with a smooth finish to prevent electrical discharges.
2. Provide silver-plated disconnect and ground switch contacts for high
conductivity and to match the rating of the associated busbar or circuit breaker.
3. Provide plug-type design for the joints between lengths of busbars, and from the
busbar to the components to permit easy dismantling for maintenance purposes.
4. Do not provide insulating sleeves, boots or coverings on busbar conductors.
W. Insulation/Support:
1. Provide sulfur-hexafluoride (SF6) gas and epoxy cast-resin insulating materials
for the insulation of primary conductors of each phase from the grounded metal
enclosure. Pressurize the insulating gas to higher than atmospheric pressure.
Provide non-hygroscopic epoxy cast-resin solid insulators, free from voids and
contaminants. Contour insulators such that a uniform voltage gradient is
produced over the entire surface. Provide epoxy cast resin bushing-type
insulators at the intersections between compartments. Support the live conductors
with bushing-type insulators and where necessary, provide a gas-tight barrier
between compartments. Design gas-tight bushing-type insulators such that it is
possible to inspect, maintain, or pressurize each gas section individually without
interfering with adjacent gas sections.
X. Mimic Diagram:
1. Provide each section with a mimic diagram of sufficient size, in a color to
contrast with the switchgear finish and plainly visible to an operator. Show
circuit breakers, disconnect switches, grounding switches and busbar connections
on mimic diagram. Also show busbar VTs or busbar cable connections. Locate
mimic diagram on the front of each section in conjunction with the mechanical
switch and circuit breaker position indicators. Provide mimic diagram symbols in
accordance with ANSI Y 14.15 and ANSI Y 32.2 or IEC.
Y. Ground Bus:
1. Provide a continuous ground bus run the length of a switchgear group for reliable
grounding. Connect each feeder section housing to the switchgear ground bus.
Z. Vacuum Circuit Breaker:

1. Provide vacuum type circuit breakers. Design the circuit breaker to withstand
impacts and vibrations under rated and short-circuit current conditions. Provide
metal alloy vacuum interrupters that will withstand high switching duties and
include ceramic insulators securely fused to the end fittings.
2. Carry the moving contact activating rod on bellows, protected from the sputtering
of molten metal during switching operation by a shield. Support the terminals of
the vacuum interrupters using epoxy cast resin supports or bushings.
3. Incorporate a suitable form of arc control in the design. Provide self-cleaning and
self-aligning contacts to ensure full contact without undue maintenance.
4. Provide each circuit breaker with a suitable mechanically operated indicating
device, marked OPEN and CLOSED in wording or symbols. Provide indicating

19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 26 13 44 - 7
device that is visible at all times from the front of the panel. Provide motor
charged, stored energy type circuit breaker operating mechanisms equipped with
a spring charged indicator. Provide trip free circuit breaker mechanisms and
design for operation from a control power source rated 125V dc, capable of
operating within the range of 72 percent to 112 percent of the selected control
voltage for the Closing, Tripping and Close-Open functions.
5. Provide circuit breakers rated in accordance with IEEE C37.06 and/or IEC
62271-100. Provide rated operating sequence (duty-cycle) 0-15 sec-CO or
0-0.3 sec-CO-3 min-CO per IEEE C37.04 and/or related IEC standards with
overall switchgear short-time rating of 2 seconds per IEEE C37.20.2 clause 5.4.5,
or IEC equivalent.
6. Provide circuit breaker short-time rating of three seconds per IEEE C37.04
and/or related IEC standards.
7. Design circuit breakers to withstand the transient recovery voltage (TRV) that
occurs during the interruption of load currents and short-circuit currents within
its rating. The vacuum circuit breakers shall not produce excessive overvoltage as
a result of current chopping. Design to reduce the current chopping value to less
than 5A.
8. Locate circuit breaker operating mechanism in a separate cabinet at the front of
the circuit breaker section, allowing access from the front of the switchgear while
the primary equipment is in service. Design operating mechanism for high speed
opening and closing of the circuit breaker under all operating conditions.
Adequately size mechanical parts to ensure consistent operation of the
mechanism when subjected to forces due to specified short-circuit currents.
Provide maximum difference in opening time between the three poles of
2 milliseconds. Allow lubrication and servicing of the moving or auxiliary parts
of the mechanism by removing the front cover plate.
9. Accomplish closing by means of a motor-charged, spring-operated, stored-
energy-type mechanism with electrical release. It shall not be possible for the
circuit breaker to close unless the closing spring is fully charged. Provide a
visual, mechanical indicating device to indicate the status of the stored-energy
closing spring. The indicator shall show charged symbol when the mechanism is
fully charged (ready to close the circuit breaker) and a discharged symbol when it
is in any other condition. Provide for manually charging the closing spring.
Tripping (opening) of the circuit breaker shall be by means of a spring that is
automatically charged when the circuit breaker is closed.
10. Provide operating mechanism with a shunt release and the necessary auxiliary
switches. Fit an operations counter to the mechanism and design to indicate the
total number of opening operations. Provide the operating mechanism with the
following control and interlocking features:
a. Local manual close and trip function push buttons shrouded to prevent
inadvertent operation.
b. Provide operating mechanism to automatically recharge the closing
spring after the completion of a closing operation.
c. A control power cutoff switch for disconnection of the control power.
d. Local-remote selector switch at the circuit breaker with provisions for
connection to Owner’s supervisory control system.
e. Operations counter.

19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 26 13 44 - 8
f. Status contacts for Owner’s use, 6-a’s and 4-b’s.
g. Emergency Machine Off pushbutton shrouded to prevent inadvertent
operation.
h. Remote switching control apparatus to allow for tripping and closing via
umbilical from at least end of lineup or farther. Provide one remote unit
for facility.
AA. Disconnecting and Grounding Switch:

1. Utilize a three-phase, three-position (Connected-Open-Ready-to-Ground) rod
inline type switch to isolate the circuit breaker and feeder from the system.
2. Locate the three-position switches in each phase of the bus compartment in
separate compartments such that when in the disconnected or grounded position,
no live parts are accessible in the interrupter compartment when the main bus is
energized.
3. Provide silver-plated spiral spring type disconnect and ground switch contacts for
positive contact and conductivity.
4. Mechanically and electrically block access to the three-position switch operating
means when the circuit breaker is in the closed position to prevent misoperation.
It shall not be possible to switch directly from connected to grounded position.
Prohibit simultaneous access to manual disconnect and grounding switch
operating means via a keyed selector. The grounding position shall allow for
safely grounding the feeder circuit by closing of the circuit breaker. Coordinate
the ratings of the three-position switch with the system ratings. Provide means of
visual confirmation of the switch position. This provision shall be available for
use with the switchgear energized. Allow for all operations to be performed
without requiring the opening of doors.
5. The manually operated mechanism for the three-position switch shall require one
operating handle for changing the switch position from connected to
disconnected (open). A different handle shall be required for changing the switch
position from disconnected to ground position. A mechanism operated position
indicator shall be located on the front of the switchgear panel and indicate
Connected-Open-Ready-to-Ground.
6. Provide the three-position switch operating mechanism with the following
control features:
a. Local manual operation of the three-position switch, utilizing two
separate operating handles, provided as accessories.
b. Manual operation shall block electrical operation of electrically operated
mechanism. Provide operating mechanism to allow local and remote
electrical operation of the disconnect switch with automatic cutoff when
switch has reached complete travel between positions.
c. Auxiliary switches as required for interlocking and remote indication.
d. Provide a means of visual verification of position of the switches
according to NFPA 70 (NEC). The use of permanently installed micro-
cameras and a laptop computer shall be acceptable.
7. Where two switching devices (for example, circuit breaker and three-position
switch) require interlocking, design the interlocks to prohibit simultaneous
operation of the devices. Provide interlock system to prevent either device from

19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 26 13 44 - 9
being blocked in an intermediate or undefined position. Provide system to
operate effectively for either electrical switching commands or manual.
8. Provide means to ground both the outgoing circuit and the busbars, but not both
simultaneously, either by closing the busbar ground switch, then the circuit
breaker and then the cable ground switch, or by separate grounding devices.
Provide grounding function as part of the integral design of the equipment and
include complete safety interlocking to prevent accidental misoperation. Do not
allow selection of an integral grounding position or connection of a portable
grounding device unless the circuit breaker is in the open position. Provide
locking facilities for the grounding devices.
BB. Current Transformers (CTs):

1. Capable of carrying the rated primary current for a period of one minute with the
secondary windings open-circuited as specified in IEEE C57.13 and/or related
IEC 60044-1 standards.
2. Rated to withstand the specified operational, short-circuit and voltage impulse
conditions not less than that of the associated switchgear.
3. Provide low-voltage, toroidal type CTs, free from dielectric-stressed cast-resin
components and located inside or outside the gas-tight enclosure.
4. Provide each main circuit breaker with current transformer sets in quantities as
indicated on the Drawings, 5A secondary current, primary current and accuracy
class as shown on the Drawings.
5. Provide each feeder circuit breaker with current transformer sets in quantities as
6. Provide each tie circuit breaker with current transformer sets in quantities as
7. Install CTs around the outside of the cast aluminum phase housings or around the
feeder cables so that the CT is free of dielectric and thermal stress. Locate CTs
on the cable termination side of the circuit breaker.
8. Provide multi-ratio (MR) CTs where shown on the Drawings.
CC. Voltage Transformers (VTs):

1. Provide VT ratings and locations as indicated on the Drawings to comply with
the requirements of this section, and in accordance with IEEE C57.13 or related
IEC 60044-2 standards.
2. Provide inductive single-phase busbar VTs housed in individual SF6 gas filled
compartments or solid-insulated metal-enclosed VTs mounted on the top of the
appropriate busbar phase enclosure.
3. Provide individual current limiting type fusing on primary of busbar VTs to
avoid a bus shutdown resulting from a VT failure. Locate current limiting fuses
in a SF6 gas-insulated housing or solid-insulated metal housing.
4. Equip busbar VTs with a three-position switch (Connected-Open-Ready-to-
Ground) to allow for maintenance on the busbar VT or fuses without de-
energizing the switchgear.
5. Connect the busbar voltage transformer and fuse housings for each phase by a
piping system, resulting in an individual gas compartment and monitoring system

19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 26 13 44 - 10
for each busbar voltage transformer/fuse set. Monitor the pressure by means of
an indicator on the front of the switchgear.
6. Provide a separate valve with identification label for evacuating and gas filling
the busbar voltage transformer, fuse system or replacement of a manometer
(pressure gauge).
7. Provide each single-phase busbar VT/fuse enclosure with its own pressure relief
device.
8. Wire secondary leads for VTs to a molded-case circuit breaker, located in a
corresponding low-voltage compartment.
DD. Power Cable Terminations:

1. Provide bottom entry cable terminations, inclusive of accessories, to meet the
design objectives of the gas-insulated switchgear, including electrical ratings,
loss of SF6 gas, safe-to-touch, etc.
2. Provide UL-listed cable termination system. Provide complete cable termination
to meet the switchgear short-circuit current and BIL as specified.
3. Provide space and facilities for the number of cables, size and type for each
incoming and outgoing feeder as shown on the Drawings. Include for each
termination kit suitable tinned copper braid for connection of the cable ground
shield. A copper lug shall be crimped at one end of each grounding braid.
Provide a suitable shipping cover fitted securely at each cable termination point
in the switchgear. Only remove these covers just prior to field termination of
cables. Replace shipping covers with dielectric-rated cable plugs or dielectric
rated covers prior to energization.
4. Data for connected power cables will be provided by CH2M to select the correct
cable plugs.
5. Cable preparation and tool kits for assembly of terminations will be provided on
site by the Contractor.
6. Color code for easy identification of the leads from the plug-in termination kit for
detecting the potential.
EE. Operator Platforms

1. Provide operator platforms at appropriate height above grade, as dictated by
switchgear and cable compartment construction. Platform to be constructed to all
applicable structural and seismic standards for operations personnel and
accessibility.
2. Egress via stairs to be provided at each end of lineup.
FF. Metering and Relaying:

1. Provide UL/CE Marked microprocessor-based multifunction digital-meter units
suitable for three- or four-wire systems. Mount units on the instrument
compartment door and as follows:
a. For incoming monitoring for main circuit breakers, Schneider ION 7650
or Siemens 9650, multifunction power meter with Ethernet
communications capability.
2. Multifunction Protective Relaying: microprocessor-based three-phase relays,
UL/CE Marked and as follows:
a. Provide Manufacturer’s recommended relay package with functions as
shown on Drawings.

19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 26 13 44 - 11
b. Modular communication for simple integration into SCADA systems.
Provide Modbus TCP communication protocol.
c. Main Circuit Breakers:
1) Provide monitoring of the CT and VT circuits and alarm on
circuit failure.
2) Provide a graphic mimic display visually indicating the position
(open/closed) of the circuit breaker, protection function trip and
metering data. Unlimited user-configurable Human Machine
Interface (HMI) screens to allow the user to create unique single
line displays with a simple tool or from an existing library.
3) Capable of locally performing tie-main-tie auto-transfer and
auto-restore functions where indicated on Drawings.
4) Provide complete sequence-of-events recording, time-stamped in
milliseconds. Provide oscillography (waveform) capture, with
configurable pre- and post-fault data capture times.
Provide relay binary inputs with chatter blocking and filter time.
The chatter blocking shall block a binary input indication and
prevent the generation of indications when the signal cannot be
interpreted. The filter time indicates how long a signal must be
present before it shall be interpreted as an indication. This shall
serve to suppress short, intermittent changes. These two features
shall be available and settable separately for each binary input
indication.
d. Feeder Protection Relays with Communications:
1) Monitor the CT circuits and alarm on circuit failure.
2) Capable of being used in a reverse interlocking bus protection
scheme.
3) Pluggable terminal blocks including CT blocks to ensure ease of
relay replacement and maintenance testing.
e. Software/Data Information - Relay Software:
1) Configure relay through the latest release of Windows software.
2) Provide complete sequence-of-events recording, time stamped in
milliseconds under all conditions. Provide oscillography
(waveform) capture, with configurable pre- and post-fault data
capture times. Internally and externally generated binary values
shall be configurable to appear in the custom generated fault.
Display information containing time, date, interrupted current
amps per phase, time in pickup, trip open, close or user
programmed status points, etc.
3) Logging of system and protective events, last 200 events,
accessible via front RS-232 communications port and rear
service communications port used to connect to a personal
computer having an RS-232 port or USB via conversion.
4) Log of last eight faults, maximum five second record time,
containing date and time stamps, pickup and tripping signals,
interrupted current amps, voltage, etc. Provide the analog
quantities displayed in the oscillography with the option for
viewing in either primary or secondary quantities.

19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 26 13 44 - 12
5) Provide fault records in the industry standard Comtrade format,
importable or exportable.
6) Provide four protection settings groups, with setting group
changes available locally through front function key and binary
input, remotely through operator or service communication
interface using a personal computer and via system interface
Modbus RTU.
7) Provide logging settings, annunciations, fault records, Binary I/O
and LED assignments with easy to print options and easy file
transfer capabilities.
8) Provide feature for archiving or retrieving an entire project that
includes all subfolders and relay files in one simple to use
feature.
9) Provide a measurement supervision feature for monitoring
external current and voltage transformers connected to the relay.
10) Provide software with the capability of entering the settings in
both primary and secondary quantities.
11) Provide reversible current transformer polarities using a setting
in the software when it becomes necessary.
12) Include a software commissioning tool for hardware
(BI/BO/LEDs) and SCADA mapped points.
13) Software compatible with earlier version relay firmware releases.
14) Provide software with capability to assign an IP address to the
relay allowing for a web browser commissioning tool feature to
view relay information online.
GG. Control Wiring:

1. Factory installed, complete with bundling, lacing and protection where necessary
and complying with the following:
a. Flexible conductors of 14 AWG (2.5 mm2) for wires across hinges,
control and VT circuits and for interconnections between shipping units.
b. Conductors sized according to NFPA 70 (NEC) or IEC standards for the
duty required.
c. Terminate wiring using IP20 DIN rail mounted terminals.
d. Fit all terminating wires with bootlace ferrules, hex crimped with a
ratchet-type crimping tool.
e. Mark wiring at both the device end and at the terminal block or other
device using heat shrink type wire markers.
f. All CT circuits 10AWG minimum, with ring lugs only.
HH. Accessories:
1. Voltage Indication Test LEDs: Provide three voltage indication test LEDs
suitable for verification of voltage present at the cable side of the circuit breaker
to work with the installed voltage indication system.
2. Phase Rotation Accessory: Provide plug in tool for indication/verification of
phase rotation.
3. Operation Tools: Provide a set of tools necessary to operate switchgear.

19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 26 13 44 - 13
4. Video Monitor (if used): one laptop computer, one copy of software to view the
micro-cameras, one firewire and one USB 2 cable for verification of three-
position switch position.
5. Surge Arresters:
a. Plug-in, dry type.
6. Nameplates and Labels:
a. Provide permanent nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53,
Identification for Electrical Systems.
b. Identify each component of the switchgear and control panel. Provide
white letters with black background. Provide warning labels, white
letters on red background, on each compartment with external circuit.
c. Provide nameplates and labeling to comply with applicable codes and
standards.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (AND TESTS)
A. Factory Testing:
1. Fully test switchgear and document accessories and by certified production test
reports in accordance with IEC 62271-200.
2. Test low voltage control panel in accordance with ANSI/IEC standards.
3. Allow for two representatives from the Owner to witness the factory approval
test prior to shipping. Provide 15 working days’ notice of all tests.
4. Testing:
a. Conduct the following production tests for the medium-voltage portion
of the switchgear in accordance with IEC 62271-200:
1) Power-frequency voltage (high-pot) test of the insulation one
minute.
2) Dielectric test of auxiliary circuit with 1 kV, 1 sec, 60Hz.
3) Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit.
4) Partial discharge test.
5) Mechanical operation test.
6) Pressure test of gas-filled compartments.
7) Gas tightness test of factory gas-filled compartments as per
shipping splits (SF6 gas leakage test).
8) Primary injection testing of current transformers.
9) Test of auxiliary devices.
10) Verification of the correct wiring.
11) Wiring insulation test at 2 kV for 1 minute.
12) Measurement of gas condition after filling.
13) Test low voltage control panel in accordance with ANSI/IEC and
include wiring check and functional operation check of the
switching devices.
14) Provide accessibility to test terminals without having to
dismantle any part of the switchgear.
5. Design Tests:
a. Test for Assembly, Mechanical Endurance, and Temperature Rise:
1) Inspect each complete switchgear panel for correctness of
assembly and functioning of the various parts. Test for

19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 26 13 44 - 14
mechanical endurance of the circuit breaker (equipped with
closing device) consisting of 1,000 operations, followed by a test
for temperature rise of the complete switching equipment.
Conduct a temperature rise test on the busbars to prove
compliance with design requirements.
b. Impulse Voltage Tests:
1) Subject each switchgear panel to the impulse voltage tests, with
test voltage to be a full impulse voltage wave conforming to the
requirements set out in the relevant IEC Standards.
c. Contact Resistance:
6. Conduct a millivolt drop test or equivalent resistance test before and after the
temperature rise test specified above on each phase and on each contact of a
switching equipment of each type. Results of test to serve as the datum for
routine tests.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify that equipment support structure is level in accordance with the manufacturer’s
requirements.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Unload, store and handle switchgear in a manner to prevent damage, and as
recommended by the manufacturer.
2. Install switchgear in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Utilize
a factory trained and certified service representative to assist in installation and
commissioning of the switchgear.
3. Properly align, level and anchor the switchgear.
4. Do not violate minimum required code clearances about switchgear.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Protective Relay Settings:

1. Set relays in accordance with CH2M coordination study.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Inspect interior and exterior of installed switchgear. Remove paint splatters and other
spots, dirt and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.
A. Repeat factory tests during field commissioning prior to energization.

19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 26 13 44 - 15
B. Additional Tests:
1. Protective relay functionality.
2. Protective relay communication.
3. Power monitoring communication.
4. Breaker control communication test (interface to EPS controls).
5. Grounding system test on each breaker.

19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 26 13 44 - 16
WITH BID
26 13 44-01 In addition to the listed requirements, provide X
the following:
Proposed Submittal Schedule.
Proposed Fabrication and Shipment Schedule.
Long-lead component receiving dates.
Recommended Protective Relay Package.
Preliminary Elevations and Plan dimensional
drawings.
Fabrication time period.
Factory Test and Adjustment period.
Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) availability
date.
Packaged system shipping date, including
expected arrival at the jobsite.
Manufacturers Recommended Value
Engineering Options
26 13 44-02 General: Shop drawings and product X
information.
26 13 44-03 General Arrangement Drawings: X
Dimensioned elevation and floor plan,
foundation details, switchgear and panel
layout, one-line diagram.
26 13 44-04 One-line diagram. X
26 13 44-05 Panel Arrangement Drawing: Layout of X
devices on the panel doors.
26 13 44-06 Gas Monitoring: Layout of gas monitoring X
zones.
26 13 44-07 Gas Segregation: Gas segregation zones. X
26 13 44-08 General: Three-line diagrams. Per construction schedule
26 13 44-09 Schematic: Elementary schematic drawing in Per construction schedule
ANSI/IEC format.
26 13 44-10 Nameplates: Nameplate engraving drawings. Per construction schedule
26 13 44-11 Bill of materials. Per construction schedule
26 13 44-12 Nameplates: Nameplate legends. Per construction schedule

19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 26 13 44 - 17
WITH BID
26 13 44-13 Test Certificates: Internationally recognized Prior to delivery
test certificates covering this equipment.
26 13 44-14 Schematics: Wiring schematic diagrams in Per construction schedule
ANSI/IEC format. Identify each device with a
unique function number conforming to IEEE
C37.2 or IEC, including complete circuit on a
drawing in its entirety for each high voltage
device.
26 13 44-15 Spare Parts: Recommended spare parts list for Per construction schedule
start-up support.
26 13 44-16 Instruction Manual Per construction schedule
26 13 44-17 General: Features, characteristics and ratings X
of individual circuit breakers and other
components.
26 13 44-18 Details: Equipment assembly details X
indicating dimensions, weights, required
clearances, method of field assembly,
components and location and size of each
field connection.
26 13 44-19 Bus Configuration: With size and number of X
conductors in each bus run, including phase
and ground conductors of main and branch
buses.
26 13 44-20 Buses: Current rating of buses. X
26 13 44-21 Ratings: Short-time and short-circuit ratings X
of switchgear assembly.
26 13 44-22 Wiring Diagrams: Detailed wiring diagrams Per construction schedule
showing wiring for power, signal and control
systems including differentiation between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
26 13 44-23 Shipping and Handling: Proposed shipping, Per construction schedule
handling and storage criteria and intentions.

19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 26 13 44 - 18
WITH BID
26 13 44-24 Short-Circuit Type Tests: To support the short With record documents
circuit ratings assigned to the circuit breaker
offered, submit certificate of short circuit
rating or a complete short circuit test report,
including oscillographic and photographic
records. Include in the certificate or report
No-Load Operations and Basic Short Circuit
Test Duties, including Critical Tests where
necessary and Short Time Current Tests as
specified in this Specification Section.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
26 13 44-25 Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit Before date of Substantial
drawings, documentation, and instruction Completion
manuals.
END OF SECTION

19 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 26 13 44 - 19
SECTION 26 18 39
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install medium-voltage motor
controllers.
1.2 REFERENCES

6. Canadian Electric Code (CEC)
7. Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
10. Maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV)
11. Motor protection relay (MPR)
15. Remote resistance temperature detection module (RTDM)
704618 26 18 39
18 SEPTEMBER 2018 – Rev. 0 Medium-voltage Motor Controllers - 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
A. Protect motor starters from moisture by using appropriate heaters as instructed by the
manufacturer.
B. Deliver starter sections in 72-inch maximum width shipping splits, individually wrapped
for protection, and mounted on shipping skids.
C. Store starters in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional
heavy canvas or plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and
traffic.
D. Handle starters in accordance with NEMA and manufacturer’s written instructions. Lift
only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to starter
internal components, enclosure, and finish.
1.5 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide two insulated-handle tools designed for pulling fuses.
B. Provide two sets of three spare fuses of each size and rating.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Eaton.
C. Siemens.
D. ABB.
2.2 MOTOR CONTROLLER
A. Medium-voltage Motor Controller: Class E2.
B. System Voltage: 4,160V, 60 Hz
C. Controller Current Interrupting Rating with Current-limiting Fuses: As indicated on the

Drawings.
704618 26 18 39
2.3 STARTERS
A. Designed to accommodate motors of the size and type as shown on the Drawings.
B. Nonreversing to accommodate the following motor type:

1. Induction motor full-voltage start stacked 2-high per enclosure.
C. Provide the following equipment for type starter indicated.

1. Include for each induction motor full-voltage starter:
a. Medium-voltage Section:
1) Three isolated vertical line connectors.
2) One drawout three-pole isolating switch.
3) Three current-limiting power fuses.
4) One rollout three-pole run vacuum contactor assembly.
5) One 750 VA control power transformer.
6) Two control circuit primary current-limiting fuses.
7) One control circuit secondary fuse.
8) One run-test circuit.
9) Four electrical interlocks.
10) Three current transformers.
11) Three load terminals.
12) One zero-sequence ground fault current transformer where
ground fault protection is specified.
b. Low-voltage Slideout Panel:
1) One motor protection relay (MPR).
2) One control relay.
3) One set of control circuit terminal blocks.
4) One microprocessor metering package.
c. Enclosure:
1) Two starters per vertical section.
2.4 COMPONENTS
A. Contactor: Drawout Vacuum type, size as indicated in Drawings.

1. Vacuum:
a. Magnetically held vacuum contactor(s) rated 400 amperes at 7,200 volts
maximum with an interrupting capacity of 50 kAIC, three-phase
symmetrical.
b. Magnetically held vacuum contactors, rated 800 amperes, 5,000 volts,
with an interrupting capacity of 50 kAIC, three-phase symmetrical.
B. Bus:
1. Horizontal Main Power Bus:
a. Locate the power bus in its own separate enclosure and isolate from the
starters.
b. Provide minimum current-carrying capacity of 2,000 amperes.
c. Support on fiberglass polyester insulators.
d. Three-phase copper silver-plated entire width of control center with bolt
holes on either side to facilitate extension of control center.
704618 26 18 39
2. Ground Bus:
a. Continuous and extended from one end of motor control center to other
through each vertical section.
b. Locate in bottom of enclosure.
c. Rated 500 amperes minimum.
d. Copper Silver plated.
C. Medium-voltage Fuse: As indicated on the Drawings.
D. Fuse Interrupting Rating: 50,000 amperes rms symmetrical.
E. Thermal Overload Relays: Solid-state manual reset type selected by manufacturer to

protect motors with horsepower indicated.
F. Isolating Switch:
1. Provide externally operated medium-voltage isolating switch for each contactor.
2. Accomplish the following:
a. De-energize contactor.
b. Disconnect control transformer.
c. Ground the blades.
3. Mechanically interlocked to prevent the following:
a. Opening isolating switch when contactor is closed.
b. Opening compartment door when isolating switch closed.
c. Closing isolating switch when door open.
d. Closing isolating switch when contactor is in closed position.
G. Load-break Switch: Three-pole, two-position (open/close) load-break, fused, air-

interrupter type with gang-operated, quick-make, quick-break, stored-energy operating
mechanism and position indicator and blown fuse indicator; height and depth to match
that of motor controller depth.
1. Maximum Voltage: 5.5 kV.
2. Basic impulse insulation level (BIL) Rating: 60 kV.
3. Continuous Current: 600 amperes.
4. Interrupting Capacity: 600 amperes at 80 percent PF.
5. Interrupting Capacity: 80 amperes at 10 percent PF.
6. Momentary Current: 10 cycles asymmetrical (amperes).
7. Momentary Current: 4 seconds symmetrical (amperes).
8. Fault Current Closing: 40,000 asymmetrical (amperes).
2.5 MOTOR PROTECTION
A. Provide a microprocessor-based multifunction motor protective relay (MPR) that

monitors three-phase alternating current (AC) and makes separate trip and alarm
decisions based on preprogrammed motor current and temperature conditions.
B. Relay capable of combining the effects of temperature, time, current (both positive and
negative sequence), and true rms into a single protective system.
704618 26 18 39
C. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide a definite purpose microprocessor-based MPR
in each starter and/or where indicated on the Drawings for protection, control, and
monitoring of the motors as follows:
1. Constantly monitor the true rms current into the motor and, by means of a
protective algorithm, separate into positive and negative sequence components.
Use these components to determine the heating effects on the stator and rotor of
the motor to provide maximum motor protection and utilization. Provide relay
capable of being connected by three-wire conductor to a remote resistance
temperature detection module (RTDM) located at the motor to monitor up to six
motor winding, four bearing, and one auxiliary resistance temperature detector
(RTD) input. Integrate the temperature input data from the RTDM with the
protective algorithm. Appropriately shift the protective algorithm curve right for
lower temperatures to allow maximum motor utilization and shifted to the left for
higher temperatures to provide maximum motor protection. Provide the
following protective functions:
a. Motor running-time overcurrent protection (IEEE Device 49/51).
b. Zero-sequence ground fault protection (IEEE Device 50/51G) with
adjustable start delay in one-cycle increments.
c. Adjustable instantaneous overcurrent protection (IEEE Device 50) with
adjustable start delay in one-cycle increments.
d. Current unbalance protection (IEEE Device 46).
e. Rotor protection.
f. Underload trip with start- and run-time delays (IEEE Device 37/2).
g. Jam trip with start- and run-time delays.
h. Stator protection with RTDM (IEEE Device 49).
i. Motor-bearing overtemperature protection with RTDM (IEEE
Device 38).
j. Load-bearing overtemperature protection with RTDM (IEEE Device 38).
k. Auxiliary overtemperature protection with RTDM.
2. Provide the following control functions by internal solid-state-based timers or
relays:
a. Incomplete sequence delay (IEEE Device 2/19).
b. Limitation on number of starts per time period in minutes (IEEE
Device 66).
c. Antibackspin time delay (IEEE 2).
d. Programmable transition relay based on current and/or time.
3. Include a digital display of the following monitoring functions:
a. Line amperes in each phase (rms).
b. Ground current in amperes.
c. Percent motor full-load current in each phase.
d. Cumulative running time in hours.
e. Total number of starts and number of starts remaining per hour.
f. Time left since oldest start in minutes.
g. Winding temperature in degrees C or F.
h. Motor-bearing temperature in degrees C or F.
i. Load-bearing temperature in degrees C or F.
j. Percent I2T trip level.
704618 26 18 39
4. Accommodate external current transformers with ranges from 10/5 through
4,000/5 amperes. Provide three current transformers sized per manufacturer's
recommendations based on motor full-load amperes and service factor. Where
ground fault protection is specified, provide 50/5-ampere zero-sequence
transformer.
a. Include terminals for shutdown based on external contacts for incomplete
sequence of operation and remote trip/remote reset.
b. Draw power from a control power transformer located in the starter or
separate source of 120-volt or 240-volt power supply where shown on
the Drawings.
c. Provide separately mounted RTDM, mounted near the motor, to provide
up to six starter RTDs, two motor-bearing RTDs, two load-bearing
RTDs, and one auxiliary RTD.
5. Provide separate Form C (N.O./NC) trip, alarm, and auxiliary contacts with
ratings of 10 amperes at 115/240 Vac or 30 Vdc resistive. Provide programmable
auxiliary relay contact to actuate only on a user-selected trip condition. Provide a
4- to 20-mA output signal proportional to one of the following user-selectable
parameters:
a. Average of the three-phase currents.
b. Hottest winding RTD temperature.
c. I2T level.
6. Monitor electrical current, receiving commands from remote sources either by
contact closures or digital data, giving commands by means of contact closure to
the motor starters and other devices under its control, and displaying information
by alphanumeric display to the operator and by digital signals with other
equipment.
a. Mount combination relay and operator panel on the door of the starter.
Program specific data entry to suit the actual motor application into the
device by means of the operator panel push buttons.
b. Store entered data in nonvolatile memory so as not to require battery
backup. Store in nonvolatile memory setup information even after power
failure, monitored information at the time of a trip, and cause of trip even
after power failure. Secure programmed set points by means of a switch
and key.
c. Provide alphanumeric display to read out (in English) complete
description of protective functions, e.g., instantaneous overcurrent and
monitored and programmable data, such as percent of full load in amps
and motor-bearing temperature.
d. User selectable to be programmable while the motor is running or to
require a motor shutdown for programming.
7. Provide an addressable communications card capable of transmitting data,
including trip/alarm data over a two-wire area network to a central computer for
storage and/or printout. Transmit data in RS232C format via a translator module
required.
D. Universal RTD Module:

1. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide an electronic RTDM for use with
associated MPR or as a stand-alone device to monitor motor temperature. Equal
704618 26 18 39
to Westinghouse-type Universal RTD module having the features and functions
specified below. UL recognized, CSA certified, and also meet appropriate ANSI
standards.
2. Monitor RTDs of the three-lead type or two-lead type as provided by the motor
manufacturer. Monitor up to 11 RTD inputs of four function groups as follows:
Six for motor windings, two for motor bearings, two for load bearings, and one
auxiliary input. RTD field D.I.P. switch programmable to accept the following
types of RTD input:
a. 10-ohm copper.
b. 100-ohm platinum.
c. 100-ohm nickel.
d. 120-ohm nickel.
e. Provide separate field selectable RTDs for each of the four function
groups.
3. Operate the RTDM from 120-Vac power (plus or minus 15 percent), 50 or 60 Hz.
Power consumption with communication card of 7 volt-amperes. Provide
appropriate control power transformer when RTDM is located in motor starter
assembly or appropriate 120-volt circuit when located at the motor.
4. Suitable for location at the MPR or at the motor as indicated on the Drawings.
Capable, when located at the motor, of transmitting temperature information to
the MPR over three-conductor shielded cable up to a maximum distance of
500 feet or via a fiber-optic linkup to a maximum distance of 400 feet. Contractor
provided shielded cable or fiber-optic link as shown on the Drawings or as
recommended by the manufacturer.
5. Suitable for operating temperatures of from zero to 70 degrees C and suitable for
humidity of zero to 95 percent RH noncondensing. NEMA 1 enclosure.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Incoming Cable Terminations: Clamp type with adequate space for stress cone
installation.
B. Auxiliary Contacts: Two each normally open/closed contacts in addition to seal-in

contact.
C. LED Indicating Lights – Run: Red in front cover.
D. Control Relays: Class A300 or A600 with Form a contacts rated A150 and 120-Vac,
60-Hz operating coil.
E. Ground Fault Protection: Provide solid-state ground fault detection relaying with
adjustable sensitivity and sensors as required.
F. Control and Instrument Wiring: Provide 600V barrier-type terminal boards with strap-
screw lugs; provide copper wiring with Safety Instrumented System (SIS) insulation
minimum size 14 American Wire Gauge (AWG); land wiring requiring external
connection or connection across shipping splits on terminal boards; terminate wiring
using insulated ring-type compression terminals; terminate current transformer leads on
shorting-type terminal blocks.
704618 26 18 39
G. Current Transformers: Where shown on the Drawings or required, provide dry-type,
insulated current transformers for the equipment voltage in accordance with the ANSI
standards. Design current transformers with mechanical and thermal ratings to withstand
short-circuit current, stresses, and heating effects equal to the equipment in which they
are installed; provide current transformers that have polarity identified, are capable of
carrying rated primary current continuously, and have ample capacity for the connected
burden.
H. Voltage Transformers: Dry type, single phase, 60 Hz; provide voltage transformers
having an accuracy classification as determined under the latest ANSI system of accuracy
classification for this type of equipment; provide voltage transformers having adequate
capacity for the burden imposed on them; provide transformer primary with current-
limiting fuses; provide low-voltage windings as shown on the Drawings.
2.7 ENCLOSURES
A. Provide NEMA 1A, gasketed. Obtain control power from an external source as shown on
the Drawings.
B. Provide an incoming line enclosure section to accommodate the number and size of
incoming cables for entry as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Provide an outgoing feeder enclosure section to accommodate the number and size of
outgoing cables for top or bottom entry.
D. Allow for control and monitoring cables to enter the top or bottom.
E. Provide welded steel frame structures, formed steel doors and side sheets, flat steel top,
and rear covers.
F. Provide Grade 5 hardware, plated zinc-dichromate.
2.8 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Clean surfaces before applying paint.
C. Finish Color: Manufacturer’s standard 61, light gray.
A. Factory tests performed on the equipment provided under this Section. Tests in
accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards and not exceeding
manufacturer guidelines.
1. Dielectric test (high potential) at 2,000 volts plus 2.25 times nominal voltage for
60 seconds, phase to phase and phase to ground.
2. Sequence of control circuits.
3. Style/part number check of components.
704618 26 18 39
4. Wiring check.
B. Provide for factory tests as outlined above to be witnessed by the Owner. Notify the
Owner 2 weeks prior to the date the tests are to be performed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Verify field measurements are as shown on shop drawings.
D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts conditions.
F. Secure medium-voltage motor controller and other freestanding motor control

components rigidly to floors or mounting pads with anchor bolts; Philips Drill Company
concrete anchors or as required by manufacturer.
G. Retighten to NEMA standards current-carrying bolted connections and support framing

and panels.
H. After the equipment is installed, touch up scratches, marks, etc., incurred during shipment
or installation of equipment. If required by CH2M because of undue amount of scratches,
repaint the entire assembly.
I. Install motor surge protective equipment indicated. Ground in accordance with NEC.
Connect lightning arrester and surge capacitor ground terminals to motor frame and to
motor circuit ground wire indicated.
J. Provide labeling per Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems.
grounding.

Requirements for startup, testing, and inspection requirements.
704618 26 18 39
D. Program the MPRs in accordance with the recommendations documented by the
coordination study or as directed by CH2M.
E. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
F. Adjust trip and time-delay settings to values as instructed by CH2M.
A. Manufacturer’s representative for the following services at jobsite or classroom as

designated by Owner for:
1. Installation assistance and inspection of installation.
2. Functional testing.
3. Startup.
4. Instruction of site personnel.
B. Manufacturer’s Certification: Provide a qualified, factory-trained manufacturer's

representative to certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, and
tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
704618 26 18 39
WITH BID
26 18 39-01 Master drawing index. X Per construction schedule

26 18 39-02 Front view elevation. X Per construction schedule
26 18 39-03 Floor plan. X Per construction schedule
26 18 39-04 Top view. X Per construction schedule
26 18 39-05 Weight and seismic mounting. Per construction schedule
26 18 39-06 One-line diagram. X Per construction schedule
26 18 39-07 Schematic diagram. X Per construction schedule
26 18 39-08 Wiring diagram including interfaces and Per construction schedule
power sources for heaters, oil pumps,
controls, control power, and monitoring as
applicable.
26 18 39-09 Nameplate schedule. Per construction schedule
26 18 39-10 Component list. Per construction schedule
26 18 39-11 Conduit entry/exit locations. X Per construction schedule
26 18 39-12 Assembly Ratings: X Per construction schedule
 Short-circuit rating.
 Voltage.
 Continuous current.
 Basic impulse insulation level (BIL).
26 18 39-13 Major Component Ratings: X Per construction schedule
 Voltage.
 Continuous current.
 Interrupting ratings.
26 18 39-15 Manufacturer’s overcurrent protective device Per construction schedule
time-current coordination curves.
26 18 39-16 Instructions for handling and installation. Prior to delivery
26 18 39-17 Connection details between close-coupled Prior to delivery
assemblies
26 18 39-18 Composite floor plan of close-coupled Prior to delivery
assemblies.
704618 26 18 39
WITH BID

representative’s field certification.
26 18 39-20 Maintenance instructions for cleaning Per construction schedule
instructions for device removal, replacement,
testing and adjusting, and lubrication.
26 18 39-21 Certified factory test reports. Prior to delivery
END OF SECTION
704618 26 18 39
SECTION 26 22 00
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install the following low-
voltage transformers:
1. Dry-type, two-winding transformers.
2. Dry-type buck-and-boost transformers.
3. Dry-type dual-output harmonic canceling transformers.
2. Section 26 05 49 Vibration Isolation for Electrical Systems.
1.2 REFERENCES

3. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
A. Handle equipment and store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Store in warm, dry location with uniform temperature. Cover ventilating openings to keep
out dust.
C. Handle transformers using only lifting eyes and brackets provided for purpose. Protect
units against entrance of rain, sleet, or snow if handled in inclement weather.
704618 26 22 00
25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 Low-voltage Transformers - 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. ABB
B. Eaton
C. Schneider (Square D)
D. Siemens
2.2 DRY-TYPE, TWO-WINDING TRANSFORMERS
A. Dry-type Transformers: National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) ST 20;

factory-assembled, air-cooled, dry-type transformers; ratings as shown on drawings.
B. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated kVA as follows:
Rating Insulation Class Rise, Degrees C
15 kVA and below 185 degrees C 115
16 to 500 kVA 220 degrees C 80
1. Obtain required performance without exceeding above-indicated temperature rise
in 40 degree C maximum ambient.
C. Efficiency: minimum efficiency per Code of Federal Regulations 10 CFR 431.196
D. Case Temperature: 35 degree C maximum. If used in Class 1 Div. 2 hazardous area,

provide a T3C rating.
E. Winding Taps, Transformers Less Than 15 kVA: Two 5 percent below-rated voltage,
full-capacity taps on primary winding.
F. Winding Taps, Transformers 15 kVA and Larger: NEMA ST 20.
G. Transformers 75 kVA and Larger: Provide 4.5 percent minimum impedance unless
harmonic rated.
H. Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20.
I. Sound Levels – Maximum:

KVA Rating Sound Level
Up to 9 kVA 40 dB
10 to 50 kVA 45 dB
51 to 150 kVA 50 dB
151 to 300 kVA 55 dB
301 to 500 kVA 60 dB
704618 26 22 00
J. Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV.
K. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of visible flexible copper
grounding strap.
L. Mounting: Transformers 75 kVA and less suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting;
transformers larger than 75 kVA suitable for floor or trapeze mounting.
M. Coil Conductors: Aluminum Continuous windings with terminations brazed or welded.
N. Lugs: Two-hole, long barrel copper only compression lugs.
O. Enclosure:
1. Case or enclosure shall be provided with a noncombustible moisture resistant
case or enclosure that provides protection against the accidental insertion of
foreign objects.
2. NEMA ST 20, Type 1: Provide lifting eyes or brackets.
3. Heavy-gauge steel with wiring compartment suitable for conduit entry and large
enough to allow convenient wiring.
4. On units rated 15 kVA and below, totally enclosed, nonventilated, NEMA 3R,
enclosure construction, with lifting eyes.
5. On units rated 30 kVA and above, ventilated, NEMA 2, dripproof enclosure
construction with lifting holes. Protect ventilation openings against falling dirt.
6. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.
7. Provide drip shield at ventilation openings.
P. Electrostatic Shielding:
1. Provide on isolation transformers when indicated.
2. Provide on harmonic rated transformers.
3. Place electrostatic shield consisting of single turn of aluminum between primary
and secondary winding and grounded to transformer core.
Q. Motor Drive Isolation:

1. Where shown on drawings, provide motor drive isolation transformers.
2. Design for use with three-phase ac, adjustable-frequency drives, 600 volts and
below, to provide isolation between incoming line and drive circuitry. Design to
minimize line disturbances caused by SCR firing within drive unit. Include
thermoguards in motor drive isolation transformers to provide additional
protection for transformer from increased heating due to nonsinusoidal
characteristics of drive currents.
3. Provide reduced short-circuit current and voltage line transients. Size transformer
specifically to drive kVA requirements dictated by horsepower of motor-drive
combination and, as such, be mechanically braced to withstand stress of current
reversals and short-circuit currents associated with specific drive kVA rating.
R. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data and overload capacity based on rated
allowable temperature rise.
704618 26 22 00
2.3 DRY-TYPE BUCK-AND-BOOST TRANSFORMERS
A. Dry-type Buck-and-Boost Transformers: NEMA ST 1; factory-assembled, dry-type, two-

winding buck-and-boost transformers; ratings as shown on drawings.
B. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated kVA as follows:
Type Rating Insulation Class Temperature Rise, Degrees C
Single-phase 185 degrees C 115
Three-phase 220 degrees C 150
C. Mounting: Wall.
D. Coil Conductors: Continuous windings.
E. Enclosure: NEMA ST 1; Type 1.
F. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.
G. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data.
2.4 DUAL-OUTPUT HARMONIC CANCELING TRANSFORMERS
A. Dry-type Dual-output Harmonic Canceling Transformers: Factory-assembled, air-cooled,

dry-type, two outputs per phase, 30 degree phase shift between the two outputs for
harmonic cancellation and phase shift from primary to secondary for added cancellation,
delta primary, ratings as shown on drawings.
B. Each secondary rated for 60 percent of primary.
C. Harmonic K-factor as shown on drawings, 200 percent neutral bus.
D. Primary Voltage: 480V.
E. Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120V.
F. Frequency: 60 Hz.
G. Insulation Class: 220 degree C.
H. Temperature Rise: 80 degrees C.
I. Overtemperature Sensor: 170 degrees C.
J. Winding Taps, Transformers 15 kVA and Less: One 5 percent above and below rated
voltage, full-capacity taps on primary winding.
K. Winding Taps, Transformers greater than 15 kVA: Two 2.5 percent above and below
rated voltage, full capacity on primary winding.
704618 26 22 00
L. Noise per NEMA ST-20.
M. Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV.
N. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of visible flexible copper
grounding strap.
O. Mounting: Transformers 75 kVA and less suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting;
transformers larger than 75 kVA suitable for floor or trapeze mounting.
P. Coil Conductors: Continuous windings with terminations brazed or welded.
Q. Lugs: Two-hole, long barrel copper only compression lugs.
R. NEMA 3R enclosure.
S. Electrostatic Shielding: Single.
T. Electro-magnetic cancellation, no electronics or capacitors.
2.5 FACTORY TESTING
A. Perform the following standard factory tests on equipment provided under this Section.
Test in accordance with latest version of American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
and NEMA standards.
1. Ratio tests at rated voltage connection and at tap connections.
2. Polarity and phase relation tests on rated voltage connection.
3. Applied potential tests.
4. Induced potential test.
5. No-load and excitation current at rated voltage on rated voltage connection.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set transformer plumb and level.
B. Use liquidtight, flexible conduit, 2-foot minimum length, for connections to transformer
case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.
C. Mount transformers on vibration isolating pads suitable for isolating transformer noise
from building structure. Reference Section 26 05 49 Vibration Isolation for Electrical
Systems.
D. Avoid mounting of transformers in areas which tend to amplify noises, such as stairways,
hall areas, and corners near ceilings. Avoid, where possible, nearby reflecting objects or
enclosures which might resonate or echo.
704618 26 22 00
3.2 TRANSFORMER TAPS
A. Set initial transformer taps up one tap to increase secondary voltage.
B. At project completion measure primary and secondary voltages and adjust taps.
C. Keep 120V outputs between 120-125V and 277V outputs between 277-290V.
A. Check for damage.
B. Clean transformer of debris inside and out.
C. Tighten connections prior to energizing transformer.
704618 26 22 00
WITH BID
26 22 00-01 Catalog cut-sheets, other descriptive literature X

26 22 00-03 Weights X
26 22 00-04 Capacities and Ratings: Voltage, kVA, X
impedance, tap configurations, insulation
system type, and rated temperature rise
26 22 00-05 Mounting, including seismic Per construction schedule
26 22 00-06 Performance Characteristics: Inrush current, X
loss data, and efficiency at 50, 75, and
100 percent rated load
26 22 00-07 Noise: Sound level and noise attenuation X
26 22 00-09 Operation and maintenance manuals Per construction schedule
END OF SECTION
704618 26 22 00
SECTION 26 23 00
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install low-voltage, metal-
enclosed switchgear.
3. Section 26 09 13 Electrical Power Monitoring System
1.2 REFERENCES

5. Light emitting diodes (LEDs)
8. Service entrance (SE)
12. Ultraviolet (UV)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
A. Protect switchgear from moisture by using appropriate shipping wrapping and

preparations instructed by the manufacturer.

704618 26 23 00
25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 2 Low-voltage Switchgear - 1
1.5 EXTRA STOCK
A. Spare Fuses: Provide two each spare fuse sets for each size and type.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
B. Siemens.
C. Eaton
D. ABB
D.E. Russelectric
2.2 CONSTRUCTION AND RATINGS
A. Factory-assembled, dead-front, metal-enclosed, and self-supporting switchgear assembly

complete from incoming line terminals to load-side terminations. Align sections at front
and rear.
B. Switchgear Height: 90 inches nominal, excluding floor sills, lifting members, and pull
boxes.
C. Switchgear Ratings and Configuration:

1. Short-circuit Rating: As shown on Drawings.
2. Bus Voltage and Ampere Ratings: As shown on Drawings.
3. Frequency: 60 Hz.
D. Enclosure: NEMA Type 1
E. Line and Load Terminations: Accessible from the rear of the switchgear.
F. Individually mount each main, tie, and feeder device.
G. Separate each ventilated breaker compartment from other breaker compartments and bus
work by grounded metal barriers.
H. Provide hinged rear doors that can be bolted and padlocked closed for each vertical
section.
I. Provide each breaker with a remotely operated mechanism capable of moving the breaker
to one of four positions: Provide one unit for facility.
1. Connected (primary and secondary contacts engaged).
2. Test (primary contacts disengaged, secondary contacts engaged).
704618 26 23 00
3. Disconnected (primary and secondary contacts disengaged).
4. Removed.
J. Fit each breaker compartment with shutters that cover the primary line (bus) and load
connections when the breaker is in the disconnected or removed position.
K. Provide brackets to accommodate training and securing of cables. Separate adjacent

vertical section with full vertical insulated barriers.
L. Provide each breaker compartment with a hinged door, the capability of operating the
breaker with the door open or closed, the capability of breakers being moved into the
connected, test, or disconnected positions with the door closed, and allow trip setting
accessibility with the breaker door open or closed.
M. Wiring: Provide switchboard-type wiring with wiring identified at each end. Terminate
on terminal blocks control and instrumentation circuits requiring external connection or
those crossing shipping splits. Provide 600-Volt alternating current (AC) 30-amp
terminal blocks,. Provide ring-type compression terminals (connectors) manufactured by
Amp for control and instrumentation terminations. Provide each terminal block with a
marking strip, factory marked in a black, indelible ink with terminal numbers
corresponding to numbering on shop drawings. Provide permanent sleeve-type wire
identification markers on conductors. Use Safety Instrumented System (SIS)-type wire
for control and instrument circuits, making terminations with ring-type compression
terminals. Size the wire to suit load requirements with 14 American Wire Gauge (AWG)
minimum size for control circuits, and 10 American Wire Gauge (AWG) minimum size
for Current Transformer Circuits. Provide 25 percent spare terminal points. Terminate
current transformer leads on shorting-type terminal blocks.
N. Switchgear Cable Entrance: Top and bottom for control cables, Bottom for line and load
power cables.
O. Auxiliary Section Devices: Individually mounted and compartmented.
P. Spring Charging Motors: Stored Energy Mechanism provided such that spring charging
via electric motor is available, with emergency provisions for manual charging available.
Q. Provide apparatus for remote trip/close and charging motor with fifty foot umbilical cord.
Provide one of each unit for facility.
2.3 BUS WORK
A. Bus Material: silver-plated Copper.
B. Bus Connections: Bolted, accessible from rear only. Provide complete bus, device
supports, mounting, and connection for distribution devices shown as provisions for
future devices. Rate distribution device line and load connection straps to carry the full
continuous current rating of the device frame (not trip rating). Insulate and extend load
connection straps beyond the main bus into the rear cable compartment.
704618 26 23 00
C. Bus Arrangement: Phase A-B-C, left to right, top to bottom, and front to rear as viewed
from the front. Provide a main horizontal bus with a continuous current rating as shown
with full capacity through each section, and provisions for future extension at each end.
D. Neutral Bus: Where indicated, provide neutral bus extending the entire length of the
switchgear of the same material as the main bus and a continuous current rating
200 percent of the main horizontal bus rating.
E. Bus Bar Isolation/Insulation: Isolate/insulate vertical buses from main bus by means of
full-length glass polyester barriers. Phase-isolate main buses and insulate from each other
and from device load lugs by means of isolating insulating barriers. Provide removable
bus joint bolt caps for maintenance. Insulate feeder bus connections with rubber boot.
F. Ground Bus: Provide a 3- by-1/4-inch minimum cross section copper ground bus through
the entire length of the switchgear, bolted to each vertical section. Provide a ground lug
for one 4/0 AWG bare copper conductor on each end of the bus.
2.4 MIMIC BUS
A. Show bussing, connections, and devices in single-line form on the front panels of the
switchgear using blue color laminated plastic strips fastened flat against the panel face
with stainless steel screws.
2.5 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Low-voltage Circuit Breakers Insulated Case Circuit Breakers: Provide with digital, true
rms programmer, and positive flux-transfer trip device. Mains, tie, and feeder breakers
drawout-mounted with electrically (120Vac) operated stored energy mechanism,
100 percent rated, operating handle capable of being padlocked in the off position, and
separate push-to-close and push-to-open pushbuttons. Breaker trip functions:
1. Current Setting: Adjustable.
2. Long-time Pickup: Adjustable.
3. Long-time Delay: Adjustable.
4. Long-time timing light.
5. Short-time Pickup: Adjustable.
6. Short-time Delay: Adjustable.
7. Short-time I2t switch.
8. Instantaneous Pickup:
a. Mains and Ties: Adjustable.
b. Feeders: Adjustable.
9. Ground Fault Pickup: Adjustable.
10. Ground Fault Delay: Adjustable.
11. Trip Indication Targets: Overload, short circuit, and ground fault.
12. Arc Flash Reduction/Maintenance Mode with indicating light.
13. Zero-sequence type ground fault system. Where switchgear is part of a double-
ended system, provide ground fault system suitable for an installation where each
transformer is connected directly to the grounding electrode conductor.
14. Transfer-scheme (single-point) grounding of transformers is not approved.
704618 26 23 00
B. Provide each breaker with a visible indicator to indicate breaker position and state.
C. Auxiliary Contacts: Provide each breaker with two normally open and two normally
closed auxiliary contacts.
D. Tools: Supply one complete set of specialized tools necessary for operation and
maintenance for each lineup of switchgear.
2.6 INSTRUMENTS AND SENSORS
A. Provide PM1 power meters in accordance with Section 26 09 13 Electrical Power

Monitoring System. Provide connection to switchgear breakers and transformer
temperature monitor.
B. Protection and Controls:

1. Under-voltage trip of circuit breakers by bus.
2. Single-phase trip of circuit breakers
3. Control power:
a. Dual 3 KVA fused control power transformer with primary and
secondary disconnect switch.
b. Dual source with automatic transfer from switchgear bus.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Terminations: Provide two hole, long-barrel compression-type lugs for line and load
connections suitable for copper conductors. Rate lugs suitable for 75 degree C-rated
conductors.
B. Circuit Breaker Lifting Device: Integral switchgear-supported, rail-mounted elevating

hoist on top of the switchgear for movement of circuit breakers in and out of the
switchgear structure; lifting yoke and hand-cranking device for drawout breakers.
C. Key Interlocks: Provide mechanical key interlocks where indicated on the Drawings with
interlocking scheme as indicated.
D. Nameplates: Provide nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53 Identification for

Electrical Systems.
E. Provide a test kit for testing the breakers and the trip units.
F. Fitted Spaces:
1. Provide fitted spaces where indicated on the Drawings.
2. Complete with accessories and wiring to allow insertion of a circuit breaker in
the future without modification of the structure or door. Provide removable blank
door plates where required.
G. 12 point terminal strip connected to each power monitor for field connections.
704618 26 23 00
H. Infrared Scanning Viewports
1. Provide viewports for infrared scanning to be located in the factory in
manufacturer’s recommended locations.
2. Provide a minimum of three per vertical section of switchgear
2.8 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Clean surfaces in phosphatized bath before applying paint.
C. Apply finish coat manufacturer’s standard powder coat or paint to 3-mil dry film
thickness.
D. Finish Color: Manufacturer’s standard gray.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install switchgear in locations shown on Drawings in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions.
B. Secure switchgear to floor or mounting pads with anchor bolts or as required by

manufacturer. Always refer to manufacturer’s installation instructions for recommended
anchor bolt size, placement, and quantity.
C. Install switchgear plumb and in longitudinal alignment with pad or wall.
D. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing switchgear.
grounding.
B. Measure insulation resistance of each bus section phase to phase and phase to ground for
1 minute each at a test voltage of 1,000 Volts, and a minimum acceptable value for
insulation resistance of 2 megohms.
C. Check tightness of accessible bolted bus joints using a calibrated torque wrench. Tighten
in accordance with manufacturer's recommended values.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
704618 26 23 00
B. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.
C. Adjust trip and time-delay settings to values as instructed by CH2M.
3.4 NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR TERMINATIONS
A. Terminate neutral conductors on individual terminals unless conductors are paralleled

and terminals are rated for connection of more than one conductor.
3.5 ARC FLASH POTENTIAL
A. Provide arc flash potential labeling per NEC and NFPA 70E.
704618 26 23 00
WITH BID
26 23 00-01 Descriptive literature describing features. X

26 23 00-02 Sketch with maximum external dimensions. X
26 23 00-03 Size and number of bus bars per phase, X
neutral, and ground.
frame size, trip ratings, and integrated
26 23 00-05 One-line diagram superimposed over front X
elevation view showing instrumentation bus
and protective device location.
26 23 00-06 Shipping weight. X
26 23 00-07 Include front and side views of enclosures Prior to delivery
with overall dimensions shown, including
shipping splits.
26 23 00-08 Conduit entrance locations and requirements. Per construction schedule
26 23 00-09 Nameplate schedules. Per construction schedule
26 23 00-10 Switchgear instrument details, including Per construction schedule
complete schematic and wiring diagrams.
26 23 00-11 Instructions for handling and installation of Prior to delivery
switchgear.
26 23 00-12 Installation drawing for mounting in seismic Per construction schedule
zone applicable for site location.
26 23 00-13 Manufacturer's original drawings of time- Per construction schedule
current curves for each type and size of
overcurrent protective device.
26 23 00-14 Provide three certified copies of factory test Prior to delivery
reports.
26 23 00-15 Include maintenance instructions for cleaning Per construction schedule
lubrication.
26 23 00-16 Include a front view, plan view, elementary Per construction schedule
diagram, device summary, and complete
wiring diagrams.
704618 26 23 00
WITH BID
26 23 00-17 Include descriptive bulletins and instructions X

for circuit breakers, instruments, current and
voltage transformers, and control devices.
END OF SECTION
704618 26 23 00
SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Service and distribution panelboards.
2. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards.
B. Panelboard Types and Classes

1. Type I – Circuit Breaker Equipped
2. Class 1 – Panelboard
4. Section 26 05 19 Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)
1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 250
2. NEMA PB1
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70
4. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 489
5. UL 67
6. Federal Specification - W-P-115C Panel, Power Distribution.
7. IEC 60529 – Degrees of Protection
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
704618 26 24 16
25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 Panelboards - 1
1.4 SPARE PARTS
A. Keys: Furnish two for each panelboard to Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES – PANELBOARDS
A. Eaton.
B. Square D. (I-Line, NF or NQOD)
C. Siemens.
D. ABB.
2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards:
1. Type I, Class 1 Circuit Breaker type.
B. Enclosure: National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) PB 1, Type 1; cabinet

size as shown on drawings.
C. Finger Safe: Provide panel rated IP2X per IEC 60529.
D. Provide cabinet front with screw cover and hinged door with flush lock. Finish in
manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
E. Provide panelboards with copper bus, ratings as scheduled. Provide copper double
ground bus in panelboards.
F. Minimum Integrated Short-circuit Rating: 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240 Volt
panelboards; 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 Volt panelboards or as shown on
drawings. Provide fully rated circuit breakers, series or cascade type ratings are not
allowed.
G. Molded-case Circuit Breakers: Provide plug-on-type circuit breakers

1. Thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers
UL-listed as Type HACR for air-conditioning equipment branch circuits. Handle
lockable in off position.
2. Electronic Trip-Unit Circuit Breakers: Breakers 60A and above, provide RMS
sensing; field-replaceable rating plug; with the following field-adjustable
settings:
a. Instantaneous trip w/ minim adjust range to 12x.
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
704618 26 24 16
H. When indicated, provide 100 percent rated circuit breakers.
I. Where indicated, provide neutral bus bar of the same material as the phase bus bars and a
continuous current rating 200 percent of the phase bus bars. Provide at least one terminal
screw for each branch circuit.
J. Terminations: Provide mechanical set screw type lugs suitable for copper conductors.
Provide lugs suitable for 75 degree C rated conductors
1. Provide full height structures and bussing to allow space for future devices,
unless indicated on the drawings.
2. Provide modifications that allow device change-out by qualified worker while
panelboard is energized.
3. Provide bus connections of A-B-C left-to-right when facing the front of the
panelboard.
4. Provide panelboard and individual device nameplates in accordance with
Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems
2.3 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards: Type I, Class 1 Circuit Breaker
type.
B. Life Safety Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards; Type I, Class 1 Circuit
Breaker type.
C. Legally Required Standby Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards; Type I, Class 1 Circuit
Breaker type.
D. Critical Operation Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards; Type I, Class 1 Circuit Breaker
type.
E. Enclosure: Type 1 or as indicated on drawings.
F. Cabinet Size: 5 3/4 inches deep; 20 inches wide.
G. Finger Safe: Provide panel rated IP2X per IEC 60529.
H. Provide surface cabinet front with typewritten directory, concealed trim clamps,
concealed hinge and hinged door and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's
standard gray enamel.
I. Provide panelboards with copper bus, ratings as scheduled on drawings. Provide double
copper ground bus in panelboards.
J. Minimum Integrated Short-circuit Rating: 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240 Volt
panelboards; 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 Volt panelboards or as shown on
drawings.
704618 26 24 16
K. Molded-case Circuit Breakers: Bolt-on-type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers with
common trip handle for all poles. Provide circuit breakers UL-listed as Type SWD and
HID for lighting circuits. Provide UL, Class A, ground fault interrupter circuit breakers
where scheduled. Provide 30 mA ground fault interrupter circuit breakers for heat trace
loads. Provide circuit breakers UL-listed as Type HACR for air-conditioning equipment
branch circuits. Provide fully rated circuit breakers, series or cascade type ratings are not
allowed.
L. Provide lock-on devices for each continuous-duty circuit in each panelboard.
M. Where indicated, provide neutral bus bar of the same material as the phase bus bars and a
continuous current rating 100 percent of the phase bus bars. Provide at least one terminal
screw for each branch circuit.
N. Provide lockoff devices for each multipole circuit in each panelboard. Provide capability
of accepting a single padlock on each device.
O. Terminations: Provide hardware required to accommodate the type of connectors

specified in Section 26 05 19 Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
P. Terminations: Provide mechanical setscrew-type lugs suitable for copper conductors.

Provide lugs suitable for 75 degree C rated conductors.
Q. Nameplates: Laminated plastic with engraved letters on each unit. See

Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems.
R. Provide standard circuit inventory holders.
S. Refer to panel schedules attached to this Section for specific requirements. Branch
Circuit pole arrangement as indicated on panel schedules.
T. Provide isolated ground bus where indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards plumb, vertical unless impractical, and in conformance with NEMA
requirements.
B. Height: 78 inches to top.
C. Adjust trim to cover openings.
D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to
reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads.
704618 26 24 16
F. Stub five empty 1-inch conduit to accessible location above ceiling out of each recessed
unit.
A. Measure steady-state load currents at each panelboard feeder. Where the difference at any
panelboard between phases exceed 20 percent, rearrange circuits to balance the phase
loads within 20 percent. Take care to maintain proper phasing for multiwire branch
circuits.
B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment,
anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for
circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses.
A. Store products specified in this Section in a dry location. Following installation, protect
products from the effects of moisture, corrosion, and physical damage during
construction.
3.4 GROUND BUS INSTALLATION
A. Install ground bus in accessible location.
B. Ground wires to be taken to individual terminals unless terminals are parallel rated.
A. Provide arc flash potential warning labeling on equipment in accordance with NEC.

WITH BID
26 24 16-01 Electrical characteristics for circuit breakers, X

including voltage, frame size, trip ratings,
integrated short-circuit ratings in rms
symmetrical amperes, and time-current
curves.
26 24 16-02 Electrical characteristics for switches, X
including voltage, switch size, and integrated
short-circuit ratings in rms symmetrical
amperes.
704618 26 24 16
WITH BID
26 24 16-03 Characteristics, including dimensions, Prior to delivery

enclosure type, weight, outline and support
point dimensions, main bus ampacity,
integrated short-circuit current rating, circuit
breaker and fusible switch arrangement, and
sizes.
26 24 16-04 Current limiting breaker data proving Prior to delivery
protection, showing both peak currents, and
I2t energy.
26 24 16-05 Operation and maintenance instructions Before date of Substantial
including descriptive bulletins. Completion
26 24 16-06 Test results X Provide factory testing results per

UL 67.
END OF SECTION
704618 26 24 16
SECTION 26 25 00
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install the following enclosed
bus assemblies:
1. Indoor busway and fittings.
2. Outdoor busway and fittings.
3. Busway plug-in units.
3. Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
4. Section 26 23 00 Low-voltage Switchgear.
1.2 REFERENCES

5. Transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
A. Handle and store equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Protect busway from moisture with appropriate coverings. Store in dry interior location.
C. Prevent damage to internal components, housing, and finish.
704618 26 25 00
25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 Enclosed Bus Assemblies - 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS – BUSWAY AND PLUG-IN UNITS
A. General Electric.
B. Square D.
C. Eaton.
D. Siemens.
2.2 INDOOR BUSWAY
A. Plug-in Busway: NEMA BU 1; three-phase, three-wire low-impedance plug-in busway

rated 480 volts, 60 Hz. Provide nonventilated housing with plug-in openings on 24-inch
centers each side with hinged doors to protect opening where plug-in units not installed;
ampere ratings as shown on drawings.
B. Feeder Busway: NEMA BU 1; three-phase, three-wire low-impedance]busway rated

480 volts, 60 Hz. Provide ventilated housing; ampere ratings as shown on drawings.
C. Fully rated in all mounting positions.
D. Conductors: 98 percent conductive copper bars, fully insulated, except at joints.
E. Joints: Provide single-bolt type with silver-plated contact surface for bus and splice plate.
F. Busway and Component Short-circuit Withstand Rating: 65,000 amps rms symmetrical.
G. Provide fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
H. Provide wall and floor flanges on both sides of barriers penetrated by bus.
I. Provide fire-rated fittings when penetrating rated wall or floor.
J. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard
K. Bolts: Indicating type that change color at specified torque.
2.3 SUPPORTS
A. See Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
2.4 SWITCHGEAR INTERFACE
A. Coordinate with Section 26 23 00 Low-voltage Switchgear for busway interface.
704618 26 25 00
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install busway until building is closed in and moisture tight.
B. Install busway, flanges, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Tighten joints using torque wrench to manufacturer's specified values.
D. Install torque indicating type bolts facing down to allow for visual inspection.
E. Install busway expansion fittings at each location where busway run crosses building
expansion joint.
F. Mounting and Support: See Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems.
G. Install integral fire stops where busway penetrates fire-rated walls and floors. Seal around
opening to maintain fire rating equal to wall or floor rating.
H. Install integral weather seal where busway penetrates exterior wall or roof. Provide
appropriate flange and seal around opening to maintain weathertight installation.
I. Coordinate with other trades to ensure busway can be installed at locations indicated
without conflict.

WITH BID
26 25 00-01 Catalog cutsheets, other descriptive literature Per construction schedule

26 25 00-02 Riser/isometric diagram, layout with Per construction schedule
dimensions and openings
26 25 00-04 Ratings including short-circuit, voltage, basic Per construction schedule
impulse insulation level (BIL), impedance,
and continuous current
26 25 00-05 Mounting, including seismic, supports and Prior to delivery
fittings, fire stops, wall/floor flanges, and
weatherseals
26 25 00-06 Component list including associated cable Per construction schedule
terminal sizes
704618 26 25 00
WITH BID
26 25 00-07 Details on floor and wall penetrations Prior to delivery
26 25 00-09 Operation and maintenance manuals including With operations and maintenance
joint retightening schedule and recommended manuals
renewal parts list
END OF SECTION
704618 26 25 00
SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Wall switches.
2. Wall dimmers.
3. Receptacles.
4. Floor-mounted service fittings.
5. Device plates and box covers.
6. Cords and caps.
1.2 REFERENCES

2. American Disabilities Act (ADA)
3. Arc fault circuit interrupter (AFCI)
5. Corrosion-resistant (CRE)
7. Leakage current detection and interruption (LCDI)
11. Transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS)
13. Single Pole Single Throw (SPST)
14. Double Pole Double Throw (DPDT)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Wall Switches:
704618 26 27 26
23 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 Wiring Devices - 1
1. Bryant.
2. General Electric.
3. Hubbell.
4. Leviton.
5. Pass and Seymour.
6. Crouse-hinds/Appleton/Killark for classified area installation
B. Wall Dimmers:
1. Leviton.
2. Lutron.
C. Receptacles:
1. Bryant.
3. Hubbell.
4. Leviton.
6. Crouse-hinds/Appleton/Killark for classified area installation
D. Floor-Mounted Service Fittings:

1. Bryant.
3. Hubbell.
4. Leviton.
E. Device Plates and Box Covers:

1. Bryant.
3. Hubbell.
4. Leviton.
F. Cords and Caps:

1. Hubbell.
2. Leviton.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Wall Switches:
1. Wall Switches (SPST, DPST, three or four way) for Lighting Circuits and Motor
Loads Under 1/2 Horsepower: National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA) WD 1; alternating current (AC) general-use snap switch with toggle
handle, rated 20 amperes and 120 to 277 VAC, ivory handle in office areas, gray
handle in other areas, screw-type terminals.
2. Pilot Light Type: Red pilot handle, handle lighted when switch is on.
3. Locator Type: Lighted handle.
704618 26 27 26
4. Weatherproof: Switches as specified mounted in cast metal box with gasketed,
weatherproof device plate as specified.
5. Corrosion-resistant (CRE) Switches: Switches as specified mounted in CRE,
PVC-coated cast metal box with CRE device plate as specified.
B. Wall Dimmers:
1. Linear slide type.
2. Rating: 600 watts minimum, larger size to accommodate load shown on
drawings.
C. Receptacles:
1. Convenience and Straight-blade Receptacles: NEMA WD 1.
2. Locking-blade Receptacles: Type indicated on drawings.
3. Convenience Receptacle Configuration: Type 5-20R.
a. Plastic Face: Ivory in office areas, gray in other areas.
b. Emergency Receptacles: Red plastic face with prewired neon glow lamp
behind each pair of slots.
4. Weatherproof Receptacles: Receptacles as specified mounted in cast steel box
with gasketed, weatherproof device plate as specified.
5. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacles: Duplex convenience
receptacle with integral GFCI c/w nominal sensitivity level of 5 mA on the load
side and tripping time of 1/30th of a second, NEMA Type 5-20R. Feed-through
type for downstream device protection.
6. Specific-purpose Receptacles: such as transient voltage surge suppression
(TVSS) receptacles with integral TVSS line to ground/line to neutral and neutral
to ground.
a. Configuration: Type as indicated on drawings, black plastic face.
b. Pin-and-Sleeve Type: Number of poles and wires as indicated on
drawings. Provide back boxes where indicated. Provide gasketed cover
and watertight sealing glands. Provide matching plug with cord-grip
features for each receptacle.
c. Isolated Ground Type: Straight-blade Type 5-20R as indicated on the
drawings, orange plastic face.
d. CRE: Straight-blade Type 5-20R, with flanged inlet. Receptacle Face
Color: Yellow.
e. Twist-lock Type: NEMA configuration as shown on the drawings.
Provide one matching plug with cord-grip feature for each receptacle.
D. Floor-mounted Service Fittings:

1. Flush-type Service Fitting for Convenience Receptacle: Satin aluminum housing
with stainless steel device plates for two, back-to-back, duplex convenience
receptacles.
2. Flush-type Service Fitting for Communications: Satin aluminum Housing with
stainless steel plates with two, back-to-back, 1-inch inside-diameter bushed
openings.
3. Flush Covers for Duplex Convenience Receptacle: Aluminum flush cover
suitable for floor box with duplex flap opening. Provide aluminum-finish
protective rings for use with threaded openings.
704618 26 27 26
4. Flush Covers for Communications: Aluminum flush cover suitable for floor box,
with 2-1/8- by 1-inch combination threaded opening. Provide aluminum-finish
protective rings.
5. Poke-through Fittings: UL-listed as fire-rated poke-through device. Include fire
stops and smoke barriers in through-floor component 2-hour rating minimum.
Terminate in 4-inch-square by 2-1/2-inch deep junction box.
E. Device Plates and Box Covers:

1. Decorative Cover Plate: Ivory smooth plastic in office areas. Satin finish smooth
stainless steel in other areas. Red smooth plastic for emergency receptacles.
Orange smooth plastic for isolated ground receptacles. Provide isolated ground
receptacle covers with the phrase “Isolated Ground” in addition to circuit
number.
2. Engraved Plates: Same plate as specified herein. Provide with engraved
3/16-inch high upper case characters, with filler of black color, except white on
red and orange covers. Engrave cover plates with panelboard and circuit number,
e.g., LP-16.
3. Cast Metal Plates: Use with cast metal box. Use steel plates with steel boxes and
copper-free aluminum with aluminum boxes. Provide stainless steel screws.
4. Raised Sheet Steel Plates: Use 1/2-inch high zinc- or cadmium-plated covers
with surface-mounted sheet steel boxes.
5. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device
covers.
6. CRE Plates:
a. Switches: Where CRE switches are indicated on the plans, provide a
yellow neoprene, bubble-type device plate with elastomer body, Hubbell
PresSwitch Type 17CM81.
b. Receptacles: Where CRE receptacles are indicated on the drawings,
provide a yellow neoprene device plate with cover caps held tightly in
place with stainless steel springs, Hubbell Type 52CM21 or 74CM24.
F. Cords and Caps:

1. Attachment Plug Configuration: Match receptacle configuration at outlet
provided for equipment.
2. Cord Construction: Oil-resistant thermoset insulated Type SO multiconductor
flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for extra-
hard usage in damp locations.
3. Cord Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment and rating of branch circuit
overcurrent protection.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall switches 48 inches above floor, off position down.
B. Install wall dimmers 48 inches above floor. Derate ganged dimmers as instructed by
manufacturer. Do not use common neutral.
704618 26 27 26
C. Install convenience receptacles 18 inches above floor, 44 inches above floor when over a
counter, grounding pole on top.
D. Install specific-use receptacles at heights shown on drawings.
E. Drill opening for poke-through fitting installation in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.
F. Corridor Convenience Receptacles: Hospital grade.
G. Install decorative cover plates on switches, receptacles, and blank outlets in finished
areas. Use jumbo-size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
H. Install cast metal or galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in
unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface-mounted outlets.
I. Install devices and wall plates flush and level.
J. Install prefinished cord set where connection with attachment plug is indicated or
specified or use attachment plug with suitable strain-relief clamps.
K. Provide suitable strain-relief clamps for cord connections to outlet boxes and equipment
connection boxes.
L. SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
WITH BID
END OF SECTION
704618 26 27 26
SECTION 26 28 16
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Enclosed low-voltage circuit breakers for main feeders and branch circuit
protection.
2. Disconnect switches for service/motor and equipment disconnecting means.
3. Fuses.
4. Enclosures.
1.2 REFERENCES

7. Variable frequency drive (VFD)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
1.4 SPARE PARTS
A. Fuses: Furnish to Owner 2 sets of spare fuses of each type and rating installed.
B. Fuse Pullers: Furnish 2 fuse pullers to Owner.
704618 26 28 16
25 APIL 2019 – Rev. 0 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers - 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. General Electric.
B. Eaton.
C. Siemens.
D. Square D.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Individually Mounted Enclosed Low-voltage Circuit Breakers:

1. Enclosure:
a. Heavy duty National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA) Type 1 unless indicated otherwise on drawings.
b. Provide surface-mounted box with door; interlock door with circuit
breakers so door may not be opened when circuit breaker is in closed
position. Provide defeater so qualified personnel can open door when
circuit breaker is in closed position. Provide ability to lock breaker in
open position.
c. Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
2. Minimum Integrated Short-circuit Rating: 85,000 amps rms symmetrical for
240 Volt and 65,000 amps rms symmetrical for 480 Volts/600 Volts. Provide
fully rated circuit breakers, series or cascade type ratings are not allowed.
3. Molded-case Circuit Breakers: Bolt-on-type thermal magnetic trip with inverse
time-current element for overload tripping and instantaneous magnetic trip circuit
breakers complete with common trip handle for all poles; Class 1. Circuit breaker
frame size equal to 250 A or larger to have adjustable magnetic trip setting and to
be front mounted. Electronic trip unit circuit breaker to be RMS sensing c/w field
replaceable rating plug and followings: instantaneous/long- and short-time delay
adjustments, pickup levels and time delayed ground fault adjustable pickup
levels. Provide UL, Class A, ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) breakers
where shown on drawings. Provide 30 mA GFCI breakers for heat trace loads
protecting equipment, 5mA trip sensitivity for personnel safety. Provide circuit
breakers listed as Type HACR for air conditioning branch circuits and
Types SWD and HID for lighting circuits.
4. Do not use tandem circuit breakers or single-pole units with handle ties where
three-pole units are indicated.
5. Molded-case Circuit Breakers with Current Limiters: Provide circuit breakers
with replaceable current-limiting elements, in addition to integral thermal and
instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole.
6. Current-limiting Molded-case Circuit Breakers: Provide circuit breakers with
integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Interrupting rating
100,000 symmetrical amperes. Protect molded-case circuit breakers downstream
as shown on drawings.
704618 26 28 16
7. Terminations: Provide hardware as required to accommodate type of connectors
specified in Section 26 05 19 Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables.
8. Nameplates: Provide laminated plastic nameplates with engraved letters on each
unit in accordance with Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems.
9. Finish: Provide manufacturer’s standard gray enamel.
10. Shunt trip: 120 Volt trip coil energized from separate control circuit, set to trip at
55 percent rated voltage.
B. Disconnect Switches:
1. Fusible Switch Assemblies: 800 A or less, quick-make, quick-break, load-
interrupter, Type HD, enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle
interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in on position. Handle
lockable in off position; fuse clips designed to accommodate current-limiting
Class R fuses.
2. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: Type HD; quick-make, quick-break, load-
interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to
prevent opening front cover with switch in on position. Handle lockable in off
position.
3. Enclosures: NEMA Type 1 unless indicated otherwise on drawings.
4. Terminations: Provide hardware as required to accommodate type of connectors
specified in Section 26 05 19 Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables.
5. Nameplates: Provide laminated plastic nameplates with engraved letters on each
unit in accordance with Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems.
6. Finish: Provide manufacturer’s standard gray enamel.
7. Equipment Ground Bus Bar: For variable frequency drive (VFD) applications,
where remote disconnect (safety) switches are required, provide appropriate
quantity and size of ground lugs to terminate each equipment grounding
conductor on a single ground lug for incoming and outgoing motor drive cable
types used.
C. Fuses:
1. See Section 26 05 05 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods, for detailed
specifications.
2. Fuses 600 Amperes and Less: Class RK1 for mains, feeders, branch circuits;
Class RK5 for low-voltage motors and Class RK5for low voltage transformer
600 A or less as indicated on drawings; dual element, current-limiting, time-
delay, one-time fuse, 600 Volts.
3. Fuses 601 Amperes and Larger: Current-limiting, time-delay, one-time fuse,
600 Volts, UL, Class L.
4. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes.
D. Enclosure nameplates for electrical system identification in accordance with

Section 26 05 53.
704618 26 28 16
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install circuit breakers and disconnect switches where indicated on drawings.
B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
C. Individually Mounted Enclosed Circuit Breakers and Disconnect Switches:

1. Install enclosures plumb.
2. Maximum Height: Top of enclosure at 78 inches AFF.
3. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper
alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check for proper installation and tightness
of connections.
4. Mount vertical unless approved by CH2M.
A. Perform Megger insulation and continuity tests on each switch, circuit breaker,
components and control circuit.
704618 26 28 16
WITH BID

26 28 16-02 Physical characteristics, including Per construction schedule
dimensions, enclosure type, openings
26 28 16-04 Electrical characteristics for breakers Per construction schedule
including voltage, frame size, trip rating,
integrated short-circuit rating
26 28 16-05 Electrical characteristics for switches Per construction schedule
including voltage, switch size, integrated
short-circuit rating
26 28 16-06 Time-current curves for breakers and fuses Prior to delivery
26 28 16-07 Current limiting test data proving protection, Prior to delivery

show peak currents and I2t energy
END OF SECTION
704618 26 28 16
SECTION 26 29 13
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install enclosed controllers not
installed in motor control centers (MCCs), including:
1. Manual motor starters.
2. Magnetic motor starters (including-soft starters)
3. Combination magnetic motor starters.
1.2 REFERENCES

4. Distributed Control System (DCS)
5. Energy-efficient (EF)
7. Motor control center (MCC)
8. Motor circuit protectors (MCPs)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
1.4 EXTRA STOCK
A. Fuses: Furnish to Owner 2 spare sets of fuses of each type and rating installed.
B. Fuse Pullers: Furnish 2 fuse pullers to Owner.
704618 26 29 13
9 APRIL 2018 – Rev. 0 Enclosed Controllers - 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Allen-Bradley/Baldor.
B. Eaton.
C. Siemens.
D. Square D.
E. ABB.
2.2 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS
A. Integral Horsepower Motor Starter: Size and poles as indicated on drawings; AC, general
purpose, Class A, manually operated, nonreversing, full-voltage controller for induction
motors rated in horsepower. Provide with field-convertible manual/automatic overload
reset feature factory set in manual reset mode. Class 20-type ambient compensated relay
with adjustable (85 to 115 percent of respective rating) trip. Provide with SPST NO
contact. Bimetallic type thermal elements. Provide red (run) green (off) transformer-type
light emitting diode (LED) pilot lights, two NO and NC auxiliary contacts, and toggle
operator with provisions for padlock.
B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Motor Starter: Horsepower rating and poles as indicated
on drawing; AC, general purpose, Class A, manually operated full-voltage controller for
fractional horsepower induction motors with adjustable thermal overload unit (bimetallic
heaters). Provide red (run) green (off) transformer-type LED pilot lights and toggle with
provisions for padlock operator.
C. Enclosure: Type 1 unless indicated otherwise on drawings.
2.3 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS
A. Magnetic Motor Starters: AC, general purpose, Class A, magnetic controller for induction
motors rated in horsepower, Size 1 minimum.
B. Full-voltage Starting: Nonreversing,
C. Conform to schematic and wiring as indicated on drawings. Control circuit is 120 Volts
fed from integral CPT at the starter completed with secondary fuses.
D. Reduced-voltage Starting: Solid-state type; specific type as indicated on drawings:

1. Solid-state reduced-voltage starters for use with standard three-phase induction
motors.
2. Six SCR control, microprocessor control logic.
3. Adjustable Current Limit: 100 to 400 percent FLA minimum.
4. Power save option.
704618 26 29 13
5. Over temperature protection circuit with contacts to disconnect solid-state starter.
6. Motor rated shorting contactor to bypass solid-state starter.
7. Cooling fan and filter louver to remove heat from starter.
E. Coil Operating Voltage: 120 Volts 60 Hz.
F. Size: As indicated on drawings.
G. Overload Relay: Field-convertible manual/automatic overload reset feature factory set in

manual reset mode. Class 20-type ambient compensated relay with adjustable (85 to
115 percent of respective rating) trip. One SPST NO contact. Thermal bimetallic type
elements. Solid state overload relay to be selected against single phasing and
voltage/current unbalance. Solid state overload relay with ground fault protection where
required for motor and feeder protection.
H. Enclosure: NEMA 12, unless indicated otherwise on drawings.
I. Combination Motor Starters: Factory assembled combined motor starters with

disconnecting means indicated on drawings. Circuit breaker to be HMCP with field
adjustable short circuit trip, settings to be coordinated with motor LRC.
J. Auxiliary Contacts: Minimum two normally open and two normally closed field
convertible contacts in addition to seal-in contact, or as indicated on drawings.
K. Front Cover Control Devices: Heavy-duty, NEMA 13 control and indicating devices for
NEMA 1 and 12 enclosures. Provide heavy-duty NEMA 4 type devices for NEMA 4
enclosures. Provide corrosion-resistant type for NEMA 4X applications as indicated on
drawings. Type indicated on drawings.
L. Indicating Lights: Transformer LED-type mounted in front cover. Lens color(s), red run,
green stop. Push-to-test-type indicating lights.
M. Relays: Type indicated on drawings.
N. Control Power Transformers: Secondary voltage as indicated on drawings, 100 VA

minimum, unless indicated otherwise on drawings; protection as indicated on drawings.
2.4 CONTROLLER OVERCURRENT PROTECTION AND DISCONNECTION MEANS FOR

COMBINATION STARTER
A. Motor Circuit Protector (MCP): Circuit breakers with integral instantaneous magnetic trip
in each pole. Provide interlock to prevent opening front cover with MCP in on position
defeatable with screwdriver. Interrupting rating (starter as an assembly) as indicated on
drawings. Handle lockable in off position. Where required to achieve specified short-
circuit rating, provide current-limiter attachment rated at 65,000 amps rms symmetrical
interrupting current.
B. Molded-case, Thermal-magnetic Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers with integral thermal

and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide interlock to prevent opening front
704618 26 29 13
cover with circuit breaker in on position defeatable with screwdriver. Handle lockable in
off position. Interrupting rating (as an assembly) as indicated on drawings. Where
required to achieve specified short-circuit rating, provide current-limiter attachment rated
at 65,000 amps rms symmetrical interrupting current.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Select and install overload relay elements in motor starters based on actual motor
nameplate ratings, such as full-load current, service factor, temperature rise, and ambient
motor temperature. Coordinate with starter vendor to obtain starters early for install and
overloads later when actual motor full load current is known.
B. Motor Data: Provide self-adhesive, typed label attached inside each motor starter
enclosure door identifying motor served by tag number and equipment name, nameplate
horsepower, full-load amperes, motor code letter, service factor, and installed overload
relay element catalog number.
C. Set MCPs to minimum trip setting that will permit motor starting under normal
conditions using procedures outlined in manufacturer's instructions booklet.
D. Provide nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical

Systems. Add lamacoid of warning sign for multiple voltage sources inside the enclosure
if automation control and interface is required.
E. Mounting height is 5 feet (1500 mm) to the operating handle.
F. Mount HOA on front of the enclosure for automated Programmable Logic Controller
(PLC) / Distributed Control System (DCS) remote control and shutdown.
G. Ground and bond equipment as per NEC Article 250 Grounding and Bonding.
H. Identify components/wire tags on control/field wiring and terminal blocks at the enclosed
controller.
3.2 TESTING
A. Manufacturer’s field services to provide on-site test and adjustment on the solid state
controller to ensure the controller fully functional to operate the equipment.
B. Acceptance test by field contractor to perform the Megger insulation test for enclosed
controller/components/wiring on the control circuit.
A. Provide arc flash potential labeling on equipment per NEC and NFPA 70E.
704618 26 29 13
WITH BID

on motor starters, relays, control transformers,
control devices, and overcurrent devices
26 29 13-02 Layout with dimensions, enclosure types, and Per construction schedule
openings
26 29 13-05 Wiring and schematic diagrams that identify Per construction schedule
devices, indicate connections, and identify
terminal numbers (note devices furnished
when options involved)
26 29 13-06 Time-current curves for overcurrent and With operations and maintenance
overload devices manuals
26 29 13-07 List of motors with the following:
 Nametag Per construction schedule
 Motor horsepower
 Full load nameplate and actual amps
 Service factor
 Overload heater element part number
 Overcurrent device rating and settings
26 29 13-08 Operation and maintenance manuals Before date of Substantial
Completion
END OF SECTION
704618 26 29 13
SECTION 26 29 16
CONTACTORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes contactors for general-purpose use and lighting control.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. Alternating Current (AC)
3. Direct Current (DC)
7. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Contactors:
1. Eaton.
2. General Electric Company.
3. Square-D Company.
4. Allen-Bradley
704618 26 29 16
25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 Contactors - 1
2.2 MATERIALS:
A. General:
1. NEMA ICS 2 – Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and
Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts Alternating Current (AC) or
750 Volts Direct Current (DC).
2. Mechanically held, electrically operated contactors with size and number of poles
as indicated on drawings.
3. Capable of making and breaking all classes of loads, including inductive ballast,
without the aid of auxiliary arcing contacts.
4. Provide controls as shown on drawings.
B. Coils: Encapsulated and rated for operation at 120 Volts, 60Hz.
C. Contacts: Fully rated, totally enclosed, silver plated, capable of inspection or replacement
without disturbing line or load wiring.
D. Enclosures:
1. NEMA 1 for dry, indoor non-manufacturing areas.
2. NEMA 1 for non-hazardous manufacturing areas.
3. NEMA 3R for damp or outdoor locations.
E. Pushbuttons, Selector Switches, and Indicating Lights:

1. Pushbuttons: Momentary contact type with flush head unless indicated otherwise
on drawings.
2. Selector Switches: Number of positions in rotation action (H/A or H/O/A) as
indicated on drawings. Where a "Test" (Hand) or similar momentary position is
required, provide switch unit with spring return from momentary position to
"Off" and maintained in “Auto”.
3. Indicating Lights: Transformer type with six-volt incandescent lamps and
interchangeable color caps. Specific colors are indicated on drawings.
4. Auxiliary contacts: One NO and one NC field convertible contacts in addition to
holding contact.
5. Control Power Transformer: 120 Volts secondary furnished with fuse and bond
the unfused leg of secondary to equipment ground.
6. Combination contactors: Contactors to be installed with thermal magnetic circuit
breaker (integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount enclosures plumb and level, 6 feet x 6 inches to top, and rigidly attach to structure
using materials and methods specified in Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems.
B. Install surface mounted units in a manner to permit vertical flow of air behind cabinets
and enclosures.
704618 26 29 16
C. Install incoming and outgoing power and control circuits in accordance with
Section 26 05 19 Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
D. Check interconnection and operation of control devices, interlocks, indicating lights, and
control relays. Set timers and time delay relays for correct intervals. Check contactor-
operating coil for correct voltage rating.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems.
704618 26 29 16
WITH BID
26 29 16-01 Submit Product Data on each contactor Per construction schedule

including:
 Dimensions.
 Voltage and number of poles.
 Current ratings and NEMA size.
 Enclosure type and accessories.
END OF SECTION
704618 26 29 16
SECTION 26 29 23
VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install pulse-width modulated
(PWM) variable frequency motor controllers for controlling speed of alternating current
(AC) squirrel-cage induction motors.
B. Variable frequency motor controllers are also known as any of the following:
1. Adjustable frequency drive (AFD).
2. Variable frequency drive (VFD).
3. Adjustable speed drive (ASD).
4. Variable speed drive (VSD).
1.2 REFERENCES

1. Adjustable frequency drive (AFD)
2. Adjustable speed drive (ASD)
10. Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)
11. OLE for Process Control (OPC)
12. Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
13. Pulse-width modulated (PWM)
14. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)
15. Total Demand Distortion (TDD)
18. Variable frequency drive (VFD)
19. Variable speed drive (VSD)
704618 26 29 23
01 NOVEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 Variable Frequency Motor Controllers - 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
A. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70
(National Electric Code - NEC), as applicable. Where required by the Engineering
Company of Record or per Ddrawings authority having jurisdiction (AHJ), material and
equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or
other organization acceptable to the Engineering Company of RecordAHJ, in order to
provide a basis for approval under the above listed agency.
B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) shall conform to those standards and shall have an
applied UL listing mark or label.
C. Provide materials and equipment specified by the Engineering company of record or per
the Ddrawings acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of hazardous area
indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Fuji
B. Toshiba
B.C. ABB
2.2 GENERAL
A. Input Voltage: 480 Volt plus or minus 10 percent, three-phase, 60 Hz plus or minus
2 percent.
B. Main Disconnect: Circuit breaker interlocked with enclosure door, breaker rated for
250,000A fault duty symmetrical withstand.
C. Minimum 973 percent drive efficiency at rated load and speed.
D. Overload Capability: 120 percent for 1 minute.
E. Overload Protection: Thermal overload relays in all three phases.
704618 26 29 23
F. Overcurrent Protection: Breaker.
G. Surge Protection: On input terminals, able to withstand 510 Volts line-to-ground.
H. Operating Frequency Range: 3 to 70 80 Hz.
I. Active current limit to provide 110 percent torque for 1 minute.
J. AFD capable of operating when powered from normal power, engine generator power,
solidly grounded power system, or resistance grounded power system.
K. AFD capable of starting and operating without motor connected.
L. Rate AFD for altitude where installed.
M. Provide terminal blocks for control and power interfaces.
N. Enclosure: NEMA 12 unless indicated otherwise.
2.3 COMMUNICATIONS AND CONTROLS
A. Full digital control of frequency and voltage with seven-segment liquid crystal display
(LCD) built-in key pad with programming, monitoring, alarms, adjustment, and control
features including:
1. Manual/Off/Auto selector with bumpless transfer.
2. Local manual speed, start, stop, reset controls.
3. Local or remote speed reference selector for bumpless transfer via programmable
acceleration/deceleration rates.
4. Adjustment of speed, rate of change, dc boost, current limit, frequency skip.
5. Remote start-stop control capability via contact.
6. Monitoring of current, frequency, voltage, and speed.
7. Drive diagnostics.
8. Temperature
B. Interfaces and Cards:

1. 4-20 mA interface for drive speed input and current or speed output.
2. Troubleshooting and diagnostic card.
3. Ethernet Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) interface card.
4. Telecom duplex box with blank cover plate installed inside drive enclosure.
4. Interfaces and interposing relays per AFD interface drawings.
5. Provide option for secondary low voltage access for customer contacts,
programming port, and ethernet.
6. Three programmable contacts for remote indication of events and alarms.
7. Failsafe dry contacts for fault, run, and auto indications.
7.8. Current switch with dry contacts to monitor the control panel cooling fan.
C. Programming and Software:

1. Programming port for laptop running drive vendor configuration software.
2. If control signal is lost, keep speed at previous setting.
704618 26 29 23
3. Flying restart after momentary 0.5 to 20 second power failure.
3.4. Resume full control of a motor which is spinning in either direction. The drive
shall smoothly decelerate the motor to a stop and start the motor in the correct
direction if reverse rotation is detected.
2.4 POWER QUALITY
A. AFDs: iInstalled in a new facility wherewith harmonics are present. Apply guidelines of
IEEE 519, Table 10.3 and 211.1.
B. Ratio of Short-circuit Current at Point of Common Coupling to Maximum Load Current:

Less than 20.
C. Unit Substation Transformer Serving AFDs: 35 kV delta primary, 480 Volt wye
secondary, solid-grounded.
D. Perform calculation for Total Demand Distortion (TDD) and Total Harmonic Distortion
(THD) at the point of common coupling.
E. Provide AFD input line reactors or harmonic filters if TDD and THD exceed limits of
IEEE 519.
1. Rating:
a. Motors less than or equal to 100 HP – 3%
E.b. Motors greater than 100 HP – 5%
F. Provide AFD output line filters as required to protect motors from excessive voltage
spikes, common mode voltages, and excessive harmonics.
2.5 DRIVEN LOAD CHARACTERISTICS
A. Motor Voltage Rating: 460 Volt, three-phase.
B. Motor Service Factor: 1.0 for inverter rated and 1.15 for others.
C. Motor Temperature Rise: Class B, based on 40 degrees C ambient.
D. Motor Insulation: Class F.
E. Motor Torque Characteristic: NEMA Design B.
F. Load Type: Variable torque.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
704618 26 29 23
B. Branch/Feeder Circuit conductors must have an ampacity not less than 125 percent of the
rated input current to the drive
B.C. All interconnect conductors and control wiring require labels.
3.2 TESTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Test in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Make and record settings in coordination with operating requirements from CH2M.
C. For AFDs sent to driven equipment Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) facilities,
provide testing, adjustment, and technical assistance for operation of overall system.
D. Furnish AFD set-up and motor alignment utilizing EMC vendor supplied field start-up
technicians.
3.3 MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A. Furnish manufacturer’s representative for the following services at job site or classroom
as designated by Owner for minimum workdays listed below, travel time excluded:
1. 1 workdays for programming.
2. 1 workdays for functional and performance testing.
3. 1 workdays for instruction of 5 personnel.
A. Retest units failing to meet Specifications to satisfaction of CH2M.
B. Furnish units that perform as specified if AFDs fail second test.
704618 26 29 23
WITH BID

26 29 23-02 Enclosure external and internal layout X
drawings with bill of material, dimensions and
openings
26 29 23-03 Weights X
26 29 23-05 AFD single-line diagram X
26 29 23-06 Speed range and output frequency range in Hz X
26 29 23-07 Maximum continuous output horsepower X
operating capability
26 29 23-08 Maximum short-term (60-second duration) X
horsepower without shutdown or damage to
AFD
26 29 23-09 Maximum input current under rated load and X
in speed range for conductor sizing
26 29 23-10 Recommended sizes for line overcurrent X
protection
26 29 23-11 Fault duty withstand capability in symmetrical X
amperes
26 29 23-12 Efficiency under rated load at 60, 45, 30, and X
15 Hz
26 29 23-13 Mounting X
26 29 23-15 Model numbers X
26 29 23-16 Datasheets Per construction schedule
26 29 23-17 Electrical input and output voltage ratings, X
load, and interface
26 29 23-18 Wiring, interconnection, and schematic X
diagrams
26 29 23-19 Control interface Per construction schedule
26 29 23-20 TDD and THD at points of common coupling X
26 29 23-21 Instruction and technical manuals Per construction schedule
704618 26 29 23
WITH BID
26 29 23-22 Spare parts list and pricing With operations and maintenance
manuals
26 29 23-23 Software, files, databases With operations and maintenance
manuals
26 29 23-27 Training Before date of Substantial
Completion
26 29 23-28 AFD settings Per construction schedule
END OF SECTION
704618 26 29 23
SECTION 26 32 13
ENGINE GENERATORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Engine generator system.
2. Radiator.
3. Exhaust silencer and fittings.
4. Fuel tank and fittings.
5. Generator control/alarm panels.
6. Battery and charger.
1. Section 01 80 13 Project Site Design Criteria
2. Section 13 48 00 Sound Vibration and Seismic Control.
6. Section 26 32 14 Engine Generator Control Panel
1.2 REFERENCES

1. Alternating Current (AC)
3. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
4. American Society for Testing & Materials (ASTM)
6. Automatic transfer switch (ATS)
7. Diesel Engine Manufacturer's Association (DEMA)
9. International Building Code (IBC)
13. Telephone Influence Factor (TIF)
1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) MG-1 – Motors and
Generators.
2. NFPA 110 – Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems. Meet Level 1
requirements.
704618 26 32 13
10 JANUARY 2019 – Rev. 0 Engine Generators - 1
3. NEMA MG-2 – Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection,
Installation and Use of Motors and Generators.
4. Listed to UL 2200 – Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies.
5. Seismic Design Requirements: The enclosure/housing, the internal support
structure, day tank, sound attenuation equipment, and the anchorage of electrical
equipment, and associated raceways shall be designed and constructed to
withstand the stresses produced by seismic forces as defined in and required by
the Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code (VUSBC), 2015 with seismic
forces calculated per Section 9.6 of American Society of Civil Engineers
(ASCE) 7. The seismic criteria in 01 80 13 Project Site Design Criteria are
applicable to this project.
6. Emissions and Noise Requirements: Comply with emission and noise
requirements applicable to the project site..
7. Guarantee: Manufacturer to guarantee the entire system to be in accordance with
nameplate specifications and to be free from defects in material and
workmanship under normal use for a minimum of 1 year from the date the
system is put into service.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in engine generators with 3 years’ documented

experience.
A. Engine Generator System: Provide emergency, legally required standby, and optional
standby power source. Provide day tank with associated pumps, instrumentation and
controls as required to communicate with Owner provided Facility Management Control
System (FMCS) PLC. No wireless communication of any type.
B. System Capacity: Each unit kW and kVA as indicated on the Drawings; standby rating
using engine-mounted radiator and No. 2 fuel oil.
C. Operation: Operate in automatic mode in conjunction with automatic transfer switches

and packaged engine generator systems control panel as described herein.
1. Upon start signal from an automatic transfer switch start engine generators.
2. Connect first unit to reach 90 percent of rated frequency and voltage to main
emergency switchgear bus by closing its circuit breaker. Automatically
synchronize next generator and parallel with main bus, and then close its breaker
to main bus.
3. Automatic Emergency Load Acquisition Sequence Time: Maximum 10 seconds
from utility normal power source failure.
704618 26 32 13
4. Upon restoration of normal voltage and frequency (phases greater than
90 percent of nominal) and after 0 to 25 minute adjustable time period, retransfer
back to normal.
5. After loads have been removed, continue to operate engine generator unloaded
for 0 to 30 minutes adjustable for engine cool down.
1.6 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Reliability Tests:
1. Certified Factory Equivalent Model Tests: Test power generation system
consisting of prime mover, generator, and necessary controls as complete
systems on representative engineering prototype models. Do not perform tests on
equipment sold but on separate production models. Certify that this prototype
testing has been accomplished. Include:
a. Maximum power level (maximum kW).
b. Maximum motor starting capacity (maximum kVA).
c. Structural soundness.
d. Torsiograph Analysis per MIL-STD 705C, Method 504.2: Calculate
torsional analysis using data from actual tests by generator set
manufacturer to verify freedom from torsional stresses within plus or
minus 10 percent of rated speed. Make results available to CH2M for
inspection upon request. Perform actual torsional fatigue test on
complete prototype generator set. Do not base calculations on engine and
generator data separately.
e. Engine alternator cooling airflow.
f. Transient response and steady-state governing.
g. Alternator temperature rise by embedded thermocouples and by
resistance method.
h. Harmonic analysis and voltage waveform deviation according to
MIL-STD 705C, Method 601.4.
i. Three-phase, Short-circuit Test for Mechanical and Electrical Strength:
With system operating at rated volts, amps, power factor, and speed,
short-circuit generator terminals ten times on all three phases for
10 seconds. Demonstrate that generator set builds up and performs
normally without manual intervention, such as resetting of circuit
breakers or other tripping devices when short circuit is removed.
j. Perform endurance testing at rated load and speed without significant
damage or failures of electrical or mechanical components.
k. Sound generation at octave bands in accordance with ISO 8528-10.
l. Parallel Test: Demonstrate that representative prototype generator sets
are capable of withstanding 120 degree out-of-phase paralleling from
full-rated voltage and speed without sustaining mechanical or electrical
damage.
2. Certified Factory Production Model Tests: Before shipment of equipment, test
generator and system components under rated load and power factor for
performance and proper functioning of control and interfacing circuits. Do not
test at unity power factor only (resistance banks only). Other tests:
a. Single-step load pickup.
704618 26 32 13
b. Transient response and steady-state governing.
c. Alternator temperature rise by resistance method.
d. Functional compatibility between generator set controls and master
controls.
e. Fuel consumption.
3. Notify CH2M in advance of these tests. Allow CH2M to witness these tests.
Forward certified copies of test results to CH2M for review prior to shipment.
4. General testing requirements as outlined in NEMA MG-1 and MIL-STD 705C.
A. Protect generator and accessories from moisture by using appropriate heaters as

instructed by manufacturer.
B. Store generator and accessories in clean, dry space. Maintain wrapping or provide
additional heavy canvas or plastic cover to protect from dirt, water, construction debris,
and traffic.
C. Handle generator and accessories in accordance with NEMA and manufacturer’s written
damage to internal components, enclosure, and finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Caterpillar.
B. Kohler.
C. MTU Onsite Energy.
D. Cummins.
E. Generac.
2.2 ENGINE
A. Directly connected to generator by semiflexible coupling. Mount both on common

subbase.
B. Type: Water cooled in line or V type, four-stroke cycle, compression ignition diesel
internal combustion engine with removable wet-type cylinder liners.
C. Rating: Sufficient to operate at 10 percent overload for 1 hour at specified elevation and
ambient limits.
D. Fuel System: Appropriate for use with ultra-low sulfur No. 2 fuel oil (ASTM D975).
704618 26 32 13
E. Governed Engine Speed: 1,800 rpm at 60 Hz.
F. Governor:
1. Isochronous type for parallel operation. Maintain engine speed within plus or
minus 0.5 percent, steady state, and meet ISO 8528 Class 2 response criteria from
no load to full load.
2. Include actuator, governor control module, separate magnetic pickup (do not use
to operate other devices besides governor), idle/run switch for warmup after
maintenance, three-phase isochronous load-sharing module, and auto
synchronizer; integrated into engine generator control panels by panel
manufacturer.
G. Safety Devices: Engine shutdown on high jacket water temperature, low lubricating oil
pressure, engine overspeed, and engine overcrank. Limits as selected by manufacturer.
H. Engine Starting: Direct current (DC) starting system with positive engagement. Number
and voltage of starter motors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions of sufficient
capacity to start engine in an unconditioned space. within specified time period. Include
remote starting control circuit with manual-off-remote selector switch on engine
generator control panel.
I. Engine Jacket Heater: One thermal circulation-type water heater with integral
thermostatic control, sized to maintain engine jacket water at normal engine operating
temperature and suitable for operation on a 20 A, three-phase, 480 Vac circuit.
J. Attached Radiator:
1. Radiator using solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol coolant with blower-type
fan, sized to maintain safe engine temperature when generator is fully loaded at
ambient temperature and altitude specified. Radiator Airflow Restriction:
0.5 inch WC, maximum.
2. Provide engine-mounted cooling radiator with blower fan and Venturi shroud.
Provide rigid guard to close both top and sides of moving parts between engine
and radiator.
K. Engine Accessories:
1. Fuel Strainer and Filter: Mount between engine fuel pump and engine. Provide
indicating pressure gauges on both upstream and downstream sides of strainer
and filter. Provide water/fuel separator/fuel strainer in line with fuel filter.
2. Lube Oil Filter: Conveniently located for servicing. Equip with spring-loaded
bypass valve to ensure oil circulation if filters are clogged. Provide oil drain
extension line positioned to permit convenient servicing of unit as installed.
3. Provide oil drip pan for mounting underneath engine. Provide bayonet-type oil
level stick.
4. Intake Air Filter: Heavy-duty, dry-type, replaceable element type rated for
normal service with restriction indicators that indicate service life of element.
5. Lubrication Oil Cooler: Shell-and-tube type, arranged for utilizing engine-
cooling water as oil-cooling medium.
6. Generator Fuel Pump.
704618 26 32 13
7. Water Pump: Engine-driven centrifugal type with thermostatic valve to maintain
engine at recommended temperature level. Provide spin-on-type engine water
filters to treat coolant and prevent corrosion and scale deposits within cooling
system.
8. Pre-lubricating Oil Pump: Electric-driven continuously operating type for
continuous circulation to ensure proper lubrication for automatic engine starts.
9. Lubricating Oil Pump: Gear type for supplying oil under predetermined constant
pressure to main bearings, pistons, piston pins, timing gears, camshaft bearings,
and valve mechanism.
10. Engine-Mounted Gauges:
a. Lubrication and pressure gauge.
b. Cooling water temperature gauge.
c. Lubrication oil temperature gauge.
11. Furnish one set of tools required for preventative maintenance of engine
generator system. Package tools in adequately sized metal toolbox.
12. Provide two additional sets of each fuel, oil, and air filter element required for
engine generator system.
13. Provide motor starters for engine accessories prewired from factory.
L. Vibration Isolation:
1. Meet applicable Diesel Engine Manufacturer's Association (DEMA) vibration
standards.
2. Use vibration analytical techniques to determine shaft critical speeds and to
develop bearing design and shaft balancing to mitigate vibration.
3. Apply torsional analysis and design to mitigate torsional vibration.
4. Engine and Generator Individually: Do not exceed 10 mils vibration in any plane
at continuous rating point when measured at attachment points to common steel
subbase.
5. Mount engine and generator on common structural steel frame sufficiently rigid
to prevent deflection between vibration isolators.
6. Demonstrate freedom from torsional vibration by torsional analysis.
7. Follow the requirements of Section 13 48 00 Sound Vibration and Seismic
Control.
2.3 GENERATOR
A. Generator: Reconnectable brushless, revolving field type, coupled directly to engine

flywheel through flexible driving disc for positive alignment. Directly bolt generator
housing to engine flywheel housing. Provide generator housing with single ball bearing
support for rotor.
B. Rotor: Layer wound with thermosetting epoxy between each layer plus final epoxy coat
for moisture and abrasion resistance. Provide amortisseur windings integral with rotor
coil support, shielded type shaft bearing with provisions for easy servicing through grease
pipes which extend to generator frame exterior. Design bearing for minimum B-10
40,000-hour life, dynamically balanced to 25 percent overspeed.
C. Stator Winding: Two-thirds pitch design to eliminate third harmonic waveform distortion
and minimize harmful neutral circulating current when operating in parallel. Provide
704618 26 32 13
windings with two dips and bakes of varnish, plus final epoxy coating for moisture and
abrasion resistance. Provide 5 percent rms maximum total voltage output waveform
harmonic distortion measured at full load into a load bank. Match pitch between parallel
units. Rating: Voltage, kW, and kVA as indicated on the Drawings, 0.8 power factor,
60 Hz, three-phase, four-pole at 1,800 rpm.
D. Rating applicable for continuous service in standby power application and in

conformance with applicable NEMA standards, latest revision.
E. Insulation: Minimum Class H.
F. Temperature Rise: 80 degrees C continuous, 105 degrees C standby in 40 degree C

ambient as measured by resistance.
G. Enclosure: Open drip proof.
H. Voltage Regulation: Include solid-state generator-mounted Volts per hertz exciter-

regulator with SCR control to match engine and generator characteristics with voltage
regulation, plus or minus 1 percent, from no load to full load with a maximum of
15 percent instantaneous voltage dip when rated load and power factor are applied with
recovery rate of no more than 2 seconds to stable operation. Stable operation is defined as
operation with terminal voltage remaining constant within ±1 percent of rated voltage.
Provide built in protection against damage when regulator or generator is run at low
frequencies for short periods of time. Include manual controls to adjust voltage drop, plus
or minus 5 percent voltage level and voltage gain.
I. Rotating Brushless Exciter: Incorporate full-wave, three-phase rotating rectifier with

hermetically sealed, metallic-type, silicon diodes to supply main field excitation. Provide
surge protection to protect against transient conditions.
J. Provide cross-current compensation system for maximum cross current of 5 percent of

engine generator set continuous kVA rating at 0.8 to 1 power factor.
K. Telephone Influence Factor (TIF): Maximum 50.
L. Load Connection Box (Generator Connection Box): Provide end-mounted load

connection box for top conductor entry. Allow access to power terminals. Provide
working clearance in direction of access to connection box.
2.4 ENGINE GENERATOR ACCESSORIES
A. Fuel System:
1. Fuel Tank for each generator:
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Simplex.
2) Tramont.
3) Pryco.
b. Freestanding Mounted in generator room near engine, 300 gallons or
volume necessary for 2 hours of running time at full-rated load.
704618 26 32 13
c. Dual wall contained.
d. Provide heavy-duty 120-Vac, single-phase, 60-Hz motors and bronze
gear pumps with stainless steel shafts, one transfer pump and one return
pump. Size pumps GPM to accommodate the engine fuel consumption
rate and overhead transfer to generator.
e. Provide check valve in the intake line before transfer pump.
f. Provide 2-inch manual fuel fill tube with screw-on-type vented cap.
g. Provide terminal box for connection of instruments and control devices
to Owner provided FMCS PLC.
h. Provide four set point fuel level contacts for connection to PLC.
1) High high
2) High
3) Low
4) Low Low
i. Provide leak detector in dual wall tank to detect failure of the primary
tank for shut down pump motor and connection to FMCS PLC.
j. Mount fuel strainer to fuel inlet of tank.
k. Match finish color to generator.
2. Provide wire-reinforced flexible fuel lines with threaded connections and swivel
fittings for each fuel connection on engine. Coordinate fuel supply and return line
sizes from remote main tank to meet engine manufacturer's minimum installation
requirements and maximum tank pumping capacity.
3. Provide diesel engine manufacturer's standard fuel system, including replaceable
spin-on-type fuel filter conveniently located for servicing.
B. Exhaust Silencer: Critical-type silencer with muffler companion flanges made of carbon
steel with an internal heat blanket and flexible stainless steel exhaust fitting suitable for
horizontal orientation, sized in accordance with engine manufacturer's instructions.
Mount so weight is not supported by engine. Size exhaust pipe so back pressure does not
exceed engine specifications. Verify exhaust pipe size shown on the Drawings is
sufficient for length shown. Provide stainless steel flexible exhaust adapter for each
exhaust outlet between engine and silencer, minimum 24 inches long.
C. Batteries: Heavy-duty, diesel-starting type, lead-acid storage batteries with minimum

capacity per SAE J537 at 0 degrees F, minimum 12 Volts. Provide sufficient capacity for
minimum six 10-second starting attempts in specified ambient range. Include battery
compartment heater to maintain battery temperature above 40 degree F.
D. Battery Tray: Plastic-coated metal or wooden tray treated for electrolyte resistance,
constructed to contain spillage of electrolyte.
E. Battery Charger: Constant potential, current-limiting type. Meet battery manufacturer's

recommendations for charge rate, float, and equalizing charge potential. Provide low
battery voltage alarm contacts for remote annunciation. Include overload protection, full
wave rectifier, DC voltmeter and ammeter, and 120 Vac fused input. Provide built-in
equalizer charge timer. Provide wall-mounted enclosure to meet NEMA 250, Type 1
requirements.
704618 26 32 13
F. Low-voltage Insulated Case Circuit Breakers: with digital, true rms programmer, and
positive flux-transfer trip device. Fixed-mounted with electrically (120Vac) operated
stored energy mechanism, 100 percent rated, operating handle capable of being
padlocked in the off position, and separate push-to-close and push-to-open pushbuttons.
Mount unit in NEMA 1 enclosure. Provide auxiliary contact wired to generator control
panel to indicate when generator breaker opens. Breaker trip functions:
1. Current Setting: Adjustable.
2. Long-time Pickup: Adjustable.
3. Long-time Delay: Adjustable.
4. Long-time timing light.
5. Short-time Pickup: Adjustable.
6. Short-time Delay: Adjustable.
7. Short-time I2t switch.
8. Instantaneous Pickup: Adjustable.
9. Ground Fault Pickup: Adjustable.
10. Ground Fault Delay: Adjustable.
11. Trip Indication Targets: Overload, short circuit, and ground fault.
12. Manual charging lever for backup to electric operator.
G. Resistance Grounding: Low resistance to limit fault current, but trip circuit breaker.
H. Digital Engine-generator Control Panel: NEMA 250, Type 1 generator-mounted control

panel enclosure with engine and generator controls and indicators. Isolate generator-
mounted control panel from engine vibration. Include provision for padlock and the
following equipment and features:
1. Frequency Meter: 45- to 65-Hz range, digital or 3-1/2-inch dial.
2. Alternating Current (AC)-Output Volt Meter: Digital or 3-1/2-inch dial,
0.5 percent accuracy, with phase selector switch.
3. AC-Output Ammeter: Digital or 3-1/2-inch dial, 0.5 percent accuracy, with phase
selector switch.
4. Output Voltage Adjustment: Plus or minus 5 percent range.
5. LCD Display:
a. Engine: Lubrication oil pressure, lubricating oil temperature, cooling
water temperature, engine overspeed, engine overcrank, fuel oil pressure,
fuel level set points in tank, low jacket water temperature, approaching
high jacket water temperature, approaching low oil pressure, low battery
voltage, engine control switch not in auto position, generator breaker
open, direct-reading indicating tachometer, and engine running time
meter.
b. Generator: Generator AC volts (Line to Line, Line to Neutral and
Average), Generator AC Current (Average and Per Phase), Generator
AC Frequency, Generator kW (Total and Per Phase), Generator kVA
(Total and Per Phase), Generator kVAR (Total and Per Phase), Power
Factor (Average and Per Phase), Total KW-hr, Total KVAR-hr, Percent
kW, Percent kVA, Percent kVAR, Generator Bearing Temperature,
Generator Stator Winding Temperature, Real kW Load Histogram,
Voltage Regulation, Excitation Voltage, Excitation Current.
6. Engine start/stop selector switch and emergency stop push button.
704618 26 32 13
7. Output Contacts: Running status, auto status, load shedding, remote alarm
functions, battery charger status and air intake/exhaust louver control.
I. Master Engine Generator Control Panel: Refer to Section 26 32 14 Engine Generator

Control Panel for interface requirements.
J. Terminal Box: Provide single terminal box on engine generator skid for power, control
and instrumentation wiring from other components of engine generator system including
but not limited to generator switchgear/switchboard or transfer switches. Factory-install
and connect to terminal box engine generator skid mounted devices and controls
requiring interface. Design and apply separation for power limited cables and wire where
required.
K. Nameplates: in accordance with Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and field dimensions are as shown on
Drawings.
B. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install generator system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide grounding in accordance with Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for

Electrical Systems.
A. Provide full-load test utilizing portable test bank for 4 hours minimum.
B. Final test conducted in presence of CH2M and or Owner.

1. Interrupt normal source to transfer switch.
2. Verify switch transfer to emergency source after appropriate time delays and
operation of appropriate indicating lights and signal circuits.
3. After 15 minutes, re-energize normal source.
4. Verify switch re-transfer to normal source after appropriate time delays, engine
cool off time, and operation of appropriate indicating lights and signal circuits.
5. Demonstrate operation of off/auto/test/engine start control switch.
C. During test, record the following at 20-minute intervals on calibrated strip charts:
1. Kilowatts.
704618 26 32 13
2. Amperes.
3. Voltage.
4. Coolant temperature.
5. Ambient temperature
6. Frequency.
7. Oil pressure.
8. Power factor.
D. Test alarm and shutdown circuits by simulating conditions.
3.4 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
A. When plant electrical system is essentially complete, and plant can be operated, provide
full and partial load and operational tests for at least 4 hours, including at least
2 continuous hours at full-rated load. Include motor starting test to verify specified
performance. Perform 50 percent and 100 percent load change. Notify Owner at least
5 working days prior to beginning of test. Allow Owner or CH2M to witness tests.
Provide required instrumentation and equipment necessary to conduct tests.
B. Provide factory-qualified erection engineer to personally supervise complete installation

of diesel engines and generators, including setting, alignment, assembly, connections,
startup, testing, and instruction of Owner. Furnish manufacturer's written certification
ensuring that each item of equipment is complete, in good condition, free from damage,
and properly installed, connected, and adjusted.
C. Furnish manufacturer’s representative for the following services at jobsite or classroom

as designated by Owner, travel time excluded:
2. Functional testing.
3. Plant startup.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust generator output voltage and engine speed.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean engine and generator surfaces. Replace lubricating oil and fuel filters.
704618 26 32 13
WITH BID
26 32 13-01 Catalog cut-sheets, other descriptive literature X Per construction schedule
26 32 13-02 Layout with dimensions and openings for X Per construction schedule
generator and other components specified.
Identify fluid drain ports and clearance
requirements
26 32 13-03 Weights X Per construction schedule
26 32 13-04 Capacities and ratings X Per construction schedule
26 32 13-06 Performance characteristics X Per construction schedule
26 32 13-07 Model numbers X Per construction schedule
26 32 13-08 Datasheets X Per construction schedule
26 32 13-09 Noise X Per construction schedule
26 32 13-10 Emissions (NOx, CO, HC, PM) X Per construction schedule
26 32 13-11 Electrical voltage, load, and interface X Per construction schedule
26 32 13-14 Software, files, databases Per construction schedule
26 32 13-15 Factory testing results Before date of Substantial

Completion
704618 26 32 13
WITH BID

Completion
26 32 13-19 Description of generator transient responses X Per construction schedule

during startup, switchover, and shutdown
26 32 13-20 Certified performance curves showing engine Prior to delivery
fuel consumption versus steady-state load in
kilowatts
26 32 13-21 Maximum overload performance for load Before date of Substantial
condition greater than rated, for 1 minute, Completion
with frequency and voltage maintained at
rated levels
26 32 13-22 Octave band noise spectrum measured at unit With record documents
26 32 13-23 Fuel consumption rate in gallons or liters per X Per construction schedule
hours at various loads, ventilation and
combustion air requirements in cubic feet or
cubic meters per minute, reference air supply
temperature and electrical diagrams, including
one-line and schematic diagrams
26 32 13-24 Certified statement of rated load compliance Per construction schedule
at specified ambient temperature and
elevation for 2-hour load test duration
26 32 13-25 Dimensioned drawings of conduit and cable Before date of Substantial
entry locations for power, control, Completion
instrumentation, alarm and monitoring
systems
26 32 13-26 Point-to-point wiring diagrams of field- Per construction schedule
installed interconnection wiring, including
connections necessary for complete and
operational system
26 32 13-27 Radiator core dimensions and required X Per construction schedule
cooling air flow in cubic feet per minute
26 32 13-28 Generator loading software Before date of Substantial
Completion
END OF SECTION
704618 26 32 13
SECTION 26 32 14
ENGINE GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Paralleling controls for two-unit engine generator system.
2. Controls, alarms, and displays for each engine generator as a unit.
2. Section 26 32 13 Engine Generators.
1.2 REFERENCES

4. Facility management control system (FMCS)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. ASCO Controls, Inc.
B. Caterpillar
C. Cummins
D. MTU Onsite Energy
704618 26 32 14
10 JANUARY 2019 – Rev. 0 Engine Generator Control Panel - 1
E. Russelectric, Inc.
F. Zenith Controls, Inc.
2.2 GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL AND ACCESSORIES
A. General:
1. Furnish master engine generator control panel arranged to control parallel
operation of two-unit engine generator system as specified in
Section 26 32 13 Engine Generators.
2. Provide controls and auxiliary components needed for complete and operational
system. Provide control panels, instrumentation and controls as required to
communicate with Owner provided Facility Management Control System
(FMCS) PLC. No wireless communication of any type.
B. System Description: For normal power failure, automatically start, parallel, and supply
emergency generator power to building loads. Provide generator control panel with alarm
system to automatically shut down an engine and initiate load shedding in event of engine
failure. When normal power returns, initiate automatic power transfer through automatic
transfer switches, then shut down engine generators and place back on standby until next
power failure occurs.
C. Automatic Operation:
1. When engine generators and master controls are in auto mode, place emergency
generating system on standby. Upon receipt of engine start signal, from ATS start
engine generators, and connect the first to reach 90 percent of rated voltage and
frequency to emergency bus through its generator circuit breaker within
10 seconds of start signal. Automatically synchronize the next generator and
parallel with main bus. Synchronously share system load between units.
2. Within 10 seconds of engine start signal automatically synchronize remaining
generators and parallel to emergency bus by closing circuit breakers.
3. When normal supply voltage returns, automatically transfer building loads back
to normal via individual automatic transfer switches. After transfer is complete
open generator circuit breakers and continue to operate engines unloaded for 0-
to 30-minute adjustable time period through controls.. Automatically reset
controls and keep in readiness for next operation. Provide manual override for
retransfer of load from emergency to normal source for each engine generator
unit.
D. Manual Operation:
1. When master control is placed in manual mode, operate entire emergency
generating system as a manual station with starting and stopping of engine
generator sets controlled from each individual engine generator.
2. Provide built-in synchronizing panel in master control section for use while
operating in manual mode.
3. Unless otherwise specified, keep protective functions as described hereinafter
and/or as shown on the Drawings in effect during manual operation, as well as in
automatic operation.
704618 26 32 14
E. Automatic Start and Alarms:
1. Provide automatic engine-starting control and failure system to control starting,
stopping, and monitoring of each engine generator. Permit six 10-second
cranking attempts with 10-second rest period between each. Initiate overcrank
lockout after 6 unsuccessful cranking attempts.
2. Provide each engine generator cubicle with the following:
a. NFPA 110, Level 1 annunciator panel.
b. Integrate the following into system master Programmable Logic
Controller (PLC) and display on operator interface:
1) Fail to synchronize.
2) Engine generator not in auto.
3. Should malfunction occur, send anticipatory signal (approximately 1 second) to
Owner's PLC to shed low-priority loads. Then open respective generator circuit
breaker, shut down engine, sound alarm horn, and indicate nature of failure.
4. After trouble has been corrected, provide capability to reset system manually.
Reset alarms and allow system to be placed in desired mode of operation.
5. Provide digital outputs with Modbus TCP/IP or Ethernet IP protocol for remote
communication of the above-listed items.
F. Engine Selector Switch:

1. Provide for each engine generator set the following modes of operation:
a. Lockout/Reset: Lock out engine generator set. When lockout/reset mode
is selected while engine generator is operating, immediately shut down
engine generator and trip generator circuit breaker.
b. Off/Cooldown: Allow normal shutdown with time delay to allow engine
to cool after operating under load. When off mode is selected while
engine generator is operating, trip generator circuit breaker, but continue
to operate engine until expiration of time-delay setting of time-delay idle.
c. Auto: Place engine generator set on standby and start whenever signal is
given from automatic transfer system or when system test is performed.
When normal power returns and transfer system signals engine generator
to shut down or system test is terminated, open circuit breaker and
continue to operate engine for idle time-delay period before shutting
down in readiness for next operation.
d. Run/Test: Start engine and bring up to speed and voltage. Continue to
operate engine until another mode is selected. Use this mode for testing
or for manual operation. Should a power failure occur while engine is
operating in run/test mode and system is in auto mode, automatically
synchronize engine generator, close its generator circuit breaker to bus,
and otherwise perform as described under automatic operation.
2. Provide indication when system is in either lockout/reset or off mode or engine
generator has been shut down due to malfunction as described previously.
G. Master Control PLC:

1. Provide in master control section with the following modes of operation:
a. Auto: Keep system in readiness to perform as outlined under automatic
operation as described in this Section.
704618 26 32 14
b. Manual: Lock automatic synchronizer out of system. Start engine
generators upon receipt of engine start signal, but perform synchronizing
and paralleling procedures manually.
c. Test: Operate engine generator system in parallel with utility source. If
normal power source is lost during testing, do not affect system loads.
d. Provide warning indication on master control cubicle to indicate when
system is not in auto position. Provide digital output for connection to
facility management control system (FMCS).
2. Provide direct current (DC) control voltage to generator switchgear from highest
charged engine-starting battery available via automatic DC control voltage-
sensor system (master control battery selector). Should battery supplying DC
control voltage decrease in voltage below that of another battery input,
automatically switch control voltage to highest charged battery without
interruption to system. Ensure stable DC control voltage supply as long as one of
the input batteries is adequately charged. Fuse DC control circuitry so that fault
in one segment of circuitry does not disable entire DC control system.
3. Should a generator fail to synchronize while operating in automatic mode,
automatically shut down engine generator and lock out system after time-delay
period, adjustable from 0 to 300 seconds. At that time, allow master controls to
be placed in manual mode, failed engine generator reset and manually
synchronized to bus.
H. Automatic Load Shedding:

1. Prevent additional load from being added to emergency bus until sufficient
generating capacity is on line to satisfy load requirements. Send signals to shed
load, in reverse order of priority, should an engine generator set fail during
operation.
2. Accomplish load shedding by notifying FMCS to shed optional standby loads. If
normal voltage is available when load shed signal is present, automatically re-
energize lower-priority loads. If normal voltage is not available, keep lower-
priority loads de-energized. Under latter condition when reason for load shedding
is corrected, automatically reconnect lower-priority loads to emergency source
when sufficient generating capacity is on bus.
3. Provide load shed bypass to manually override load shed circuitry for supervised
operation. Do not override protective function of under frequency load shedding
as described hereinafter. If system is left in bypass mode, do not prevent addition
of load to emergency bus as generators are added to system when activated by
normal power failure.
4. Should frequency of generating system increase or over/under voltage failure
occur, provide visual and audible indication. If frequency decreases, load shed
after time delay, provide visual and audible indication. Do not allow bypass of
load shed function when load has been shed due to under frequency failure.
Provide reset to clear alarm and indicator when voltage/frequency failure has
been corrected.
I. Protective Features:
1. Reverse power for each engine generator set to provide antimotoring protection.
If reverse-power flow is detected, send discrete signal to engine generator control
704618 26 32 14
panel to open its associated generator circuit breaker, shut down engine, initiate
load shedding of lowest-priority loads, sound alarm horn, and provide visual
indication on generator cubicle.
2. Protective functions as indicated on the drawings.
3. Synchronizing check relay to prevent closing generator circuit breaker to bus
until oncoming generator source is within acceptable limits of bus.
4. Audible and visual alarm should malfunction occur. Should alarm be reset after
malfunction, restart alarm again upon receipt of another signal. Automatically
reset alarm when failed circuit has been reset.
5. System exercise mode to permit supervised testing of system. Automatically start
engine generator sets, synchronize them, and close their breakers to the bus.
Operate generator system in parallel with normal utility source.
6. Summary alarm digital output and engine run digital output for connection to
FMCS.
J. Master Control Panel: Provide components shown on the drawings and listed below to
monitor and control engine generator operation in conjunction with master control
circuitry.
1. Digital Touch Screen:
a. Alternating current (AC) Volt meter with selector switch to monitor each
generator phase-to-phase voltage and phase-to-neutral voltage.
b. AC ammeter with selector switch to monitor phase current of generator
in each of three phases.
c. AC watt meter to monitor power being provided by engine generator.
d. AC VAR meter to monitor reactive power being provided by engine
generator.
e. Power factor meter to monitor overall system power factor.
f. Frequency meter control to be used in conjunction with frequency meter.
g. Provide visual indication of phase angle difference between generator
bus and utility voltages during synchronization.
h. Alarm indication as described in this Section.
2. Digital Touch Screen Functions:
a. Automatic engine-starting panel to control starting, stopping, and alarm
failures associated with engine generator set.
b. Load-sharing type electronic governor to control engine speed under all
conditions of load.
c. Automatic synchronizer to compare generator bus voltage and frequency
with that of incoming generator and utility normal source during periods
of automatic synchronizing and to control engine generator set so that
generator is brought within acceptable limits of synchronization and
parallel operation. When these conditions are met, send signal via
automatic synchronizer to close appropriate circuit breakers.
d. System exercise mode as described in this Section.
e. Mode selector with lockout/reset-off/cooldown-auto-run/test positions as
described in this Section.
f. Voltage-adjust function to be used in conjunction with interior-mounted
voltage regulator.
704618 26 32 14
g. Speed-adjust function to be used in conjunction with interior-mounted
electronic governor.
h. Feeder Circuit breaker control.
i. Load shed bypass function as described in this Section.
j. Load-shed function as described in this Section.
k. Synchronization check relay to prevent inadvertent closing of generator
breaker during automatic and manual synchronization.
l. Generator circuit breaker controls to disconnect generator for shutdown
malfunctions described in this Section. Provide with quick-close feature
to ensure synchronization in paralleling.
m. Solid-state, volts-per-hertz, voltage regulator with SCR control to match
engine and generator characteristics and provisions to operate in
conjunction with brushless exciter specified in Section 26 32 13 Engine
Generators, with voltage regulation, plus-or-minus 1 percent from no
load to full load. Include manual controls to adjust voltage drop plus-or-
minus 5 percent.
3. Terminal blocks with 25 percent spare terminals for connection of incoming
control wires.
4. FMCS Interface: FMCS serves as centralized alarm and control system for
facility. Provide the following interface signals at each engine generator control
panel for connection to FMCS:
a. Common fail alarm set to activate when any alarm point on engine
generator control panel annunciator is in alarm.
b. Activate engine generator power-available signal with voltage-sensing
activated by output voltage of each engine generator unit.
c. Alarm outputs, configured from factory, incorporated into equipment's
controls, not added in field with additional relays. Provide energized
signal to FMCS and cause alarm if any of the following conditions exist:
1) Power lost to equipment.
2) Physical wire connection lost.
3) Equipment in alarm.
4) Fuse in PLC blown.
K. Renewal Parts: Provide two sets of required fuses.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Arrange a preinstallation meeting with suppliers and CH2M/Owner to coordinate

installation and interconnection of generator paralleling switchgear with other packaged
engine generator system components.
B. Install generator paralleling switchgear in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
704618 26 32 14
A. Test generator paralleling switchgear in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements

and Section 26 05 01 Basic Electrical Requirements.

2. Functional and performance testing.
3. Plant startup.
704618 26 32 14
WITH BID

design-build
26 32 14-02 Catalog cutsheets, other descriptive literature X Per construction schedule
26 32 14-03 Layout with dimensions and openings X Per construction schedule
26 32 14-05 Capacities and ratings Per construction schedule
26 32 14-07 Performance characteristics Per construction schedule
26 32 14-08 Electrical voltage, load, and interface Per construction schedule
26 32 14-09 Wiring and schematic diagrams showing skid- Per construction schedule
to-panel and panel-to-panel wiring details.
26 32 14-12 Factory testing results Per construction schedule
26 32 14-16 Description of equipment operation during Per construction schedule
startup, synchronization, paralleling,
switchover, and shutdown
END OF SECTION
704618 26 32 14
SECTION 26 33 46
BATTERY MONITORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install a battery monitoring
system.
2. Section 27 00 10 General Communications Requirements.
1.2 REFERENCES

5. Single-pole, double-throw (SPDT)
7. Vented lead acid (VLA)
8. Valve-regulated lead acid (VRLA)
B. Definitions:
1. Battery Monitoring System: An unmanned fixed surveillance system for
stationary batteries.
2. Cycle: Any battery discharge event followed by recharge.
3. Float Voltage: Voltage applied to a cell/battery intended to maintain it in a fully
charged condition during normal operation.
4. String: Two or more cells connected in series to form a battery.
A. A complete system for the monitoring of valve-regulated lead acid (VRLA) batteries,
consisting of all the hardware, software, cabling and other components, to permit the safe
and reliable collection and display of battery data and fault conditions.
B. Monitored, recorded, archived, and displayed parameters:

1. Individual cell/jar voltage during float, discharge, and charge.
2. Total overall battery voltage.
3. Individual cell/jar direct current (DC) resistance.
704618 26 33 46
25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 Battery Monitoring - 1
4. Resistance of the intercell connections, measured between the connected posts so
as to include both the resistance of the connector and the bolted connection.
5. Float, charge, and discharge current of each string.
6. Individual cell/jar temperature.
7. Ambient room temperature.
8. Number of cycles.
9. Time and duration of each discharge.
10.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty against defects in design, materials, workmanship, and overall

performance for 12 months after initial startup or 18 months after ship date, whichever
comes first.
A. Provide service and maintenance of battery monitoring system for 1 year from date of
substantial completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Alber.
B. BTech.
C. Cellwatch.
D. Midtronics Cellguard.
2.2 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS AND OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
A. Input Power: 115 Vac plus or minus 10 percent, 1 Phase 60 Hz.
B. Operating Temperature Range: 4 degrees C to 50 degrees C.
C. Humidity: 0 percent to 85 percent non-condensing.
D. Measurement Ranges:
704618 26 33 46
1. Jar Voltage: 0 to 20 Volts DC.
2. Jar and Intercell Resistance: 2 to 25,000 micro Ohms.
3. String Voltage: 42 to 600 Volts DC.
4. Temperature: 0 to 80 degrees C.
5. String Current:
a. Charge and Discharge: 10 to 2500 Amps.
b. Float: 0 to 5000 milliamps.
E. Frequency of Measurements:
1. Continuously measured (more frequently than once per minute):
a. Charge current.
b. Discharge current.
c. Pilot cell temperature.
d. Ambient temperature.
e. Individual cell/jar voltage during discharge.
f. Total battery voltage during discharge.
g. Number of cycles.
h. Time and duration of discharge.
2. Measured at a rate of 4 to 24 times per day:
a. Individual cell/jar float voltage.
b. Total battery voltage during normal operation.
3. Measured at a rate of 1 to 2 times per day:
a. Individual cell/jar resistance.
b. Intercell resistance.
F. During a discharge, record and archive battery voltage, individual cell voltages, battery
string current and individual cell temperatures.
G. Provide trend analysis for the following parameters:

1. Current flow.
2. Temperature.
3. Cell/jar voltage.
4. Cell/jar and resistance.
H. Transmit all data and alarms to a remote computer via Ethernet Network using Windows
Browser or Modbus TCP/IP.
I. Automatically generate an alarm when any of the monitored battery parameters fall
outside a predetermined limit and communicate it to personnel via a remote central
computer.
J. Provide two programmable Form C single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) alarm contacts to

annunciate alarm data.
K. In the event that the battery/string configuration changes, the system shall be
reconfigurable with the addition or removal of components to be able to monitor new
battery configuration.
704618 26 33 46
2.3 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
A. For use on batteries, provide stainless steel tab washer or ring lug type connection
hardware.
B. For all voltage sense leads, provide an in-line current limiting device that is rated to
safely clear and contain the maximum overall string voltage at maximum available short-
circuit amperage rating.
1. Acceptable current limiting devices:
a. Fuses.
b. Fusible links.
c. Resistors.
d. Optical isolators.
e. Positive temperature coefficient devices.
2. The wire installed between the terminal connectors and current limiting devices
shall be of acid-resistant construction.
2.4 SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide software capable of the following:

1. Operating on Windows operating systems.
2. Communicating with the battery monitoring system to: Acquire, archive, recall,
sort, print and/or plot the measured parameters, and facilitate the observance of
trends in the data.
3. Monitoring and displaying of real time battery parameters.
4. Managing multiple battery monitoring systems.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FACTORY TESTING
A. Factory Acceptance Test: Test complete system at factory to validate the functionality
and performance required by this specification.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Provide labeling in accordance

with Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems.
A. Include services of a factory technician to:

1. Supervise the system installation.
2. Assist in establishing and setting default limits.
3. Start up the system.
4. Perform all required site acceptance tests to demonstrate that the system meets
the functionality and performance requirements of this specification.
704618 26 33 46
B. Instruct up to ten Owner’s personnel for minimum of 1 day in maintenance and operation
of the system.
WITH BID
26 33 46-01 Itemized list of exceptions and deviations X

from these specifications
26 33 46-03 Single-line diagram including external wiring X
requirements
26 33 46-04 Mounting and detailed scaled installation Prior to delivery
drawings
26 33 46-5 Functional relationship of equipment Prior to delivery
including, dimensions, normal and service
access areas, heat dissipation, and airflow
requirements (include battery and
rack/enclosure)
26 33 46-08 Datasheets for each type of panel, controller, X
device, sensor or other system hardware
shown on the functional block diagram.
26 33 46-9 Electrical voltage, load, and interface X
26 33 46-10 Wiring and schematic diagrams X
26 33 46-11 Function block diagram showing major Prior to delivery
components and panels, other processing
devices and required cabling.
26 33 46-12 Control interface X
26 33 46-13 Suggested parts list and supplier contact Prior to delivery
26 33 46-14 Onsite written test procedure Per construction schedule

26 33 46-15 Software, files, databases With operations and maintenance
manuals
704618 26 33 46
WITH BID

Completion
END OF SECTION
704618 26 33 46
SECTION 26 33 53
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install static uninterruptible
power supplies (UPS), including but not limited to:
1. UPS Module.
2. System Control Switchgear with static bypass.
3. Battery System.
4. Battery Protective and Disconnect Device.
5. Maintenance Bypass Switch.
3. Section 26 33 46 Battery Monitoring.
A. System Configuration: Single module Uninterruptible Power System
B. Components: System includes battery to provide continuous source of electrical

power, rectifier/charger to maintain battery charge and to provide input to inverter
when utility power is available, inverter to provide power to load during normal
operation, static switch to transfer load automatically and without disturbance between
inverter and utility power, manual switch to bypass static switch for maintenance,
overall system manual bypass, input and output isolation transformers and filters to
provide appropriate isolation and disturbance attenuation, and necessary monitors,
sensors, and control circuits.
C. Design Standards:
1. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1778, Standard for Safety Uninterruptible
Power Systems.
2. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) 22.2, cUL Equipment.
3. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) 587, American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) C62.41, Guide for Surge Voltages in Low-
voltage AC Power Circuits.
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70, National Electric Code (NEC).
5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) PE-1, Uninterruptible
Power Systems – Specification and Performance Verification.
704618 26 33 53
25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 Static Uninterruptible Power Supply - 1
D. Modes of Operation:
1. Normal: The inverter continuously powers the critical load. The rectifier/charger
derives power from the utility alternating current (AC) source and supplies direct
current (DC) power to the inverter, while simultaneously float charging the
battery.
2. Emergency: Upon utility AC power failure, without any switching, the inverter
obtains power from the battery plant and provides uninterrupted power to the
critical AC load. Designed to have no interruption in power to the critical load
upon failure or restoration of the utility ac source.
3. Recharge: Upon restoration of the utility AC source, the rectifier/charger
automatically powers the inverter and simultaneously recharges the battery with
no interruption to the critical AC load.
4. Bypass: If the UPS must be taken out of service for maintenance or repair, the
bypass switch transfers the load to the bypass source with no output disturbance
transferred to the AC critical load.
5. Off-battery: For Battery only maintenance, external disconnect breaker
disconnects the battery from the rectifier/charger and inverter. The UPS module
continues to function and meet all of the specified steady-state performance
criteria, except for the power outage back-up time capability.
1.3 REFERENCES

3. American Power Conversion (APC)
5. Controlled Power Company (CPC)
7. Double neoprene pad (DNP)
8. Emergency power off (EPO)
10. Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT)
11. International Fire Code (IFC)
13. Multi-module Unit (MMU)
17. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
18. Pulse-width Modulation (PWM)
19. Root mean squared (RMS)
20. Total harmonic distortion (THD
23. Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
24. Valve-regulated lead-acid (VRLA)
704618 26 33 53
25. Vented lead-acid (VLA)
26. Volt-amperes (VA)
1. UL 1778, Standard for Safety Uninterruptible Power Systems.
2. IEEE 587, ANSI C62.41, Guide for Surge Voltages in Low-voltage AC Power
Circuits.
3. NFPA 70, NEC.
4. OSHA.
5. NEMA PE-1, Uninterruptible Power Systems – Specification and Performance
Verification.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal
requirements for this Section.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect UPS and accessories from moisture by using appropriate heaters or desiccants
as instructed by manufacturer.
B. Store UPS and accessories in a clean, dry space. Maintain wrapping or provide
additional heavy canvas or plastic cover to protect from dirt, water, construction
C. Handle UPS and accessories in accordance with NEMA and manufacturer’s written
damage to internal components, enclosure, and finish.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. UPS: Provide warranty against defects in workmanship and materials for 12 months
after initial startup, or 18 months after ship date, whichever comes first.
B. Battery: Pass the battery manufacturer’s standard warranty to the end user.
C. Warranty - End User: Pass warranties associated with buy-out items to the end user.
A. Operating Ambient Temperature:

1. UPS: 32 to 104 degrees F.
2. Battery: 77 degrees F, plus or minus 5 degrees F.
B. Storage/Transport Ambient Temperature: Minus 13 to 131 degrees F.
704618 26 33 53
C. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent, noncondensing.
D. Altitude:
1. Operating: Up to 4000 feet above mean sea level without derating.
2. Storage/Transport: Up to 50,000 feet without derating.
E. Audible Noise: Limit noise generated by UPS under conditions of normal operation
below sound pressure level of 75 db measured at 5 feet from the UPS cabinet.
A. Manufacturer’s Field Service:

1. Service Personnel:
a. Directly employ a nationwide service organization, consisting of factory-
trained field service personnel dedicated to the start-up and maintenance
of UPS and power equipment.
b. A dispatch center to coordinate field service personnel schedules. One
toll-free number shall reach a qualified support person 24 hours per day,
365 days per year. If emergency service is required, on-site service shall
be 4 hours or less within 150 miles of a service center.
c. Two local service personnel shall be assigned to the site with a regional
office as a backup.
B. Maintenance Contracts: A complete offering of preventative and full-service

maintenance contracts for both the UPS system and battery system shall be available.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Toshiba (G9000)
2.2 SYSTEM RATINGS AND OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
A. System Continuous Rating: As shown on the drawings . Maintain output voltage

within specified limits at loads from full load to no load.
B. Battery Capacity: Discharge time to end voltage: 15 minutes at full load per battery
bank, 77 degrees C.
C. Voltage Rating:
1. Input:
a. Three-phase: 480 Volts.
2. Output:
a. Three-phase: 480 Volts.
D. Equipment Short-Circuit Rating: 42,000 A rms.
704618 26 33 53
2.3 UPS MODULE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Input:
1. Voltage Range: Plus or minus 10 percent.
2. Frequency Range: 60, plus or minus 3 Hz.
3. Inrush Current Limiting: 30 percent of full load rated max.
4. Current Walk-in: 25 to 100 percent in 15 seconds.
5. Power Factor: Minimum 0.95 lagging at full load with nominal input voltage.
6. Two-step Rectifier Input Current Limit:
a. Step 1: Factory set at 115 percent (adjustable 100 to 125 percent) normal
full load input current.
b. Step 2: Factory set at 100 percent (adjustable 85 to 125 percent) for on-
generator operation.
7. Two-step Battery Charge Current Limit:
a. Step 1: Factory set at 10 percent (adjustable 1 to 25 percent) maximum
discharge current.
b. Step 2: Factory set at 1 percent (adjustable 1 to 25 percent) maximum
discharge current.
8. Current Distortion: Less than 7 percent at full load input.
9. Surge Protection: Sustains input surges without damage per criteria listed in
ANSI C62.41-1991.
B. Output:
1. Load Rating: 100 percent continuous load rating at 0 to 104 degrees F for any
combination of linear and non-linear load.
2. Voltage Regulation: Plus or minus 0.5 percent for steady state balanced load.
3. Voltage Adjustment: Plus or minus 5 percent.
4. Free Running Frequency: 60 Hz, plus or minus 1.0 percent
5. Frequency Regulation: 0.1 percent.
6. Measure UPS efficiency under the following conditions:
a. UPS, operating at full-rated load kVA, and kW.
b. Battery, fully charged and floating on system.
c. Input voltage within specified range.
d. Efficiency: Defined as output kW divided by input kW.
e. Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: 95 percent.
7. Phase Displacement:
a. 120, plus or minus 1 degree for balanced loads.
b. 120, plus or minus 4 degrees for 50 percent unbalanced loads.
8. Unbalanced Voltage Regulation:
a. 100 percent balanced loads: Plus or minus 1 percent.
b. 100 percent unbalanced loads: Plus or minus 2 percent.
9. Voltage Transients:
a. Compliant to IEC 62040-3 Class 1.
b. 100 percent load step: Plus or minus 3 percent.
c. Loss or return of AC input power: Plus or minus 3 percent with
5-millisecond recovery time.
d. Transfer to/from Bypass: Plus or minus 5 percent.
10. Voltage Transient Recovery Time:
704618 26 33 53
a. Compliant to IEC 62040-3 Class 1.
b. Within 1 percent of output voltage rating within one electrical cycle
(16 milliseconds).
11. Harmonic Distortion: Maximum 5 percent rms voltage total harmonic distortion
(THD) and maximum 3 percent for any single harmonic, at rated frequency and
voltage, from 10 percent load to full load and over battery voltage range,
measured into a linear load.
12. Three-phase Overload Ratings:
a. 150 percent for 10 seconds with voltage regulation.
b. 125 percent for 10 minutes with voltage regulation.
c. 100 percent continuously.
13. Current Limit: 125 percent of rated output current.
14. Fault Clearing: Sub-cycle current of at least 300 percent but not more than
500 percent of normal full load current (when bypass is not available).
15. Power Factor: 0.95 lagging.
2.4 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
A. UPS Materials:
1. Provide all new high-grade materials for UPS module with solid-state electronic
devices, sealed semi-conductors, and control logic and fuses that are physically
isolated from power train components.
2. The maximum working voltage, current, and di/dt of all solid-state power
components and electronic devices shall not exceed 75 percent of the ratings
established by their manufacturer.
3. The operating temperature of solid-state component sub-assemblies shall not be
greater than 75 percent of their ratings.
4. Electrolytic capacitors shall be computer grade and operated at no more than
95 percent of their voltage rating at the maximum rectifier charging voltage.
B. Mechanical Design Features

1. Enclosure:
a. Construction: NEMA Type 1 enclosure designed for floor mounting.
b. Mounting: Structurally adequate with provisions for hoisting, jacking,
and forklift handling.
c. Allow installation, maintenance, and service of UPS without removal of
or access to side or rear panels.
d. Provide adequate space and termination facilities for terminating input
and output cables. Provide provisions for top and bottom access to input,
output, and DC connections.
2. Ventilation:
a. Provide redundant forced air cooling to ensure that all components are
operated well within temperature ratings.
b. Locate air intake at bottom front and air exhaust at top of unit.
c. Incorporate removable air filters that do not require shutting down UPS
for replacement, are readily accessible and located at air intakes.
d. Provide temperature sensors to monitor UPS internal temperature. Upon
detection of temperatures in excess of manufacturer’s recommendations,
704618 26 33 53
the sensors shall cause audible and visual alarms to be sounded on the
UPS panel.
3. Lugs: Two-hole, long barrel copper only compression lugs.
4. Grounding: Electrically isolate the AC output neutral from the UPS module
chassis. Provide the UPS module chassis with an equipment ground terminal.
Provide a terminal for bonding the system neutral to the facility service entrance
ground (customer-supplied cable).
C. Protection:
1. Provide built-in self-protection for surges, sags, and overcurrent from the AC
source, overvoltage and voltage surges from output terminals of paralleled
sources, and load switching and circuit breaker operation in the distribution
system.
2. Provide protection against sudden changes in output load and short circuits at the
output terminals. Provide built-in protection against permanent damage to itself
and the connected load for all predictable types of malfunctions. Use fast-acting
current limiting devices to protect against cascading failure of solid-state devices.
Internal UPS malfunctions shall cause the module to trip off-line with minimum
damage to the module and provide maximum information to maintenance
personnel regarding the reason for tripping off-line.
3. Provide control section for monitoring and control. Locate meters, controls, and
mimic panel on control section door with alarm functions integral to UPS
enclosure, or in a separate alarm panel.
4. If short-circuit fault occurs downstream of UPS, load is to be transferred
automatically and without interruption, by static switch to input line. After fault
is cleared by capacity of input line and load current returned to normal, then
static switch is to automatically retransfer without interruption of load, back to
inverter.
D. Rectifier/Charger Unit:
1. Solid-state, providing direct current to inverter unit and for battery charging.
2. Provide with input circuit breaker. Provide circuit breaker of frame size and trip
rating to supply full-rated load to critical load and recharge battery at the same
time. Provide circuit breaker with an undervoltage trip so circuit breaker opens
automatically when control voltage is lost.
3. Size rectifier/charger to supply power for load and recharging of batteries.
Provide charging rate sufficient to restore battery from discharge to 90 percent
full charge within ten times the discharge time. After battery is recharged,
maintain battery at full charge until next emergency operation.
4. Fuse Protection: Fuse each AC phase individually with fast-acting fuses so that
loss of any semi-conductor shall not cause cascading failure. Bolt fuses to bus
bars at both ends to ensure mechanical and electrical integrity. The display panel
on the front of the unit shall indicate a blown fuse occurring on any phase of the
rectifier.
5. Limit initial magnetization inrush current to 500 to 800 percent of
rectifier/battery charger full-load current. Provide minimum power factor of
0.8 lagging at nominal input voltage and frequency with inverter operating at
full-rated load.
704618 26 33 53
6. DC Filter: Provide the rectifier/charger with an output filter to minimize ripple
current into the Battery. The AC ripple voltage of the rectifier DC output shall
not exceed 0.5 percent root mean squared (RMS) of the float voltage. The AC
ripple current in the battery during float operation shall not exceed two percent
RMS of the inverter full load DC current. The filter shall be adequate to ensure
that the DC output of the rectifier/charger will meet the input requirements of the
inverter without the battery connected.
7. Battery Equalize Charge: Provide an automatic equalize charge timer feature to
automatically apply an equalize voltage to the battery after a 30-second or longer
utility outage that generates a Battery Discharging Alarm. The duration of
equalize charge time shall be adjustable from 0 to 72 hours. Manual override
shall be provided for the automatic equalize circuit.
8. Temperature Compensated Battery Charging: Battery charging rate is
compensated in proportion to change in battery temperature. Based on battery
temperature input from the battery monitoring system, battery charge voltage is
reduced by a preset value per cell for every degree above 25 degrees C and
increased by the preset value per cell for every degree below 25 degrees C. The
module liquid crystal display (LCD) will indicate when the temperature
compensation is active.
9. Over-voltage Protection: Provide DC over-voltage protection within each module
so that if the DC voltage rises to the pre-set limit, that UPS module shall shut
down automatically. In the Multi-module UPS System, should the connected
critical load exceed the capacity of the available on-line modules, the system
control cabinet will initiate an uninterrupted load transfer to bypass.
E. Inverter:
1. Inverter Unit: Solid-state Pulse-width Modulation (PWM) controlled Insulated
Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) technology device. Inverter will be capable of
accepting rectifier/charger or battery output and providing rated output within
required specified limits.
2. Provide electronic controls for individual phase voltage compensation to obtain
phase voltage balance of no more than 3 percent under operating conditions,
including up to 50 percent current unbalance.
3. Provide fault sensing, static isolation, and an output circuit breaker .
4. Inverter: Capable of providing specified rated volt-amperes (VA) within
operating range of battery while connected to 1 to 0.8 leading or lagging power
factor load. Provide current limit for loads in excess of 150 percent of full load
rating. Provide maximum effective current at output of inverter, when bypass AC
input not available, of 150 percent.
5. Static Voltage Regulation of Inverter Steady-State Output: Deviate plus or
minus 2 percent maximum under the following conditions:
a. Ambient temperature variations.
b. Minimum to maximum DC bus voltage.
c. Maximum frequency excursions.
6. Provide manual adjustment control to regulate output voltage, plus or
minus 3 percent from rated value.
7. Provide output frequency controlled within plus or minus 2 Hz. Limit frequency
transients for system disturbances to plus or minus 0.1 percent maximum.
704618 26 33 53
8. Battery Protection:
a. Provide the inverter with monitoring and control circuits to protect the
battery from damage due to excessive discharge.
b. Initiate inverter shutdown when the battery voltage has fully discharged.
c. Automatically calculate and adjust the battery end-of-discharge voltage
for partial load conditions to allow extended operation without damaging
the battery. Automatic shutdown based on discharge time is not
acceptable.
F. Static Bypass Transfer Switch:

1. Description: Fully rated, solid-state static bypass transfer switch which allows
"make before break" or overlap-type transfer of load from UPS to utility power
source (or back again) without interruption of power to critical load. Do not use
forward and reverse contactors. Provide control unit with an automatic transfer
circuit which senses status of inverter logic signals and alarm conditions and
initiates uninterrupted transfer of load in case of malfunction or external
overload.
2. Continuous Duty Static Switch:
a. Rated to provide 1000 percent of capacity subcycle and up to 500 percent
of rated load for three cycles.
b. Capable of transferring the full rated load from UPS module output to
bypass power source.
c. Capable of continuously carrying the full rated load as necessary without
sustaining damage, should a bypass breaker fail.
3. Manual Load Transfers: Initiated from the control panel by utilizing isolation and
bypass circuit breakers. The static switch shall not be required.
4. Automatic Transfer Conditions:
a. Transfer static bypass switch from inverter to bypass power source for
the following conditions:
1) Inverter Under-voltage: Less than 90 percent of nominal.
2) Inverter Over-voltage: Greater than 110 percent of nominal.
3) Inverter overload.
4) Inverter shutdown for any reason.
5) DC circuit under-voltage or over-voltage.
6) Final voltage of system battery is reached.
b. Inhibit static bypass switch transfer to bypass source for the following
conditions:
1) Bypass Source Under-voltage: Less than 80 percent of nominal.
2) Bypass Source Over-voltage: Greater than 120 percent of
nominal.
3) Inverter not synchronized and in phase with normal source.
c. Automatic Retransfer Conditions: Automatically retransfer load to
inverter provided the following conditions are met:
1) Inverter logic and bypass source are synchronized and in phase.
2) Inverter conditions are stable for 32 seconds.
3) Retransfer selector switch is in the automatic position.
4) UPS output is not overloaded.
704618 26 33 53
2.5 MAINTENANCE BYPASS/ISOLATION DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD
A. Description: A make-before-break maintenance bypass switch to route the flow of

power to the load around the rectifier/charger, inverter, and static bypass transfer
switch.
1. Switch shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked to prevent interrupting
power to the load when switching to bypass mode.
2. Switch shall electrically isolate other UPS components to permit safe servicing.
B. Provide two thermal-magnetic breakers for maintenance bypass and for maintenance
isolation. Each circuit breaker shall have an interrupting rating of 65 kAIC. Provide a
key interlock system.
1. Key interlock requires unlocking the maintenance bypass breaker before
switching from normal position with key that is released only when the UPS is
bypassed by the static bypass transfer switch. Lock is designed specifically for
mechanical and electrical component interlocking.
C. Provide indication of load current while in maintenance bypass position.
D. Provide cost option for load bank test connection.
2.6 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
A. Controls:
1. AC input circuit breaker.
2. Inverter operator switch to initiate inverter operation.
3. Inverter standby switch to cause inverter to cease operation.
4. Static switch transfer switch to permit manual actuation of static transfer switch.
5. Static switch lockout switch to inhibit automatic retransfer of load to inverter.
6. Battery charge timer.
7. Indicator test switch.
8. Static switch preferred input circuit breaker .
9. Static switch output circuit breaker or contactor.
10. Static switch bypass circuit breaker or contactor.
11. Overall system manual bypass and controls.
12. Emergency power off (EPO) switch.
13. Audio reset push-button switch.
14. Controls for static switch maintenance bypass switch.
B. Time Delay: Provide field adjustable 0 to 120 seconds minimum time delay return
from battery only power to normal after normal power loss.
C. UPS Control Panel: Group displays, indications, and basic system controls on a
common control panel on front of UPS enclosure.
D. Provide logic microprocessors, sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and wiring

required to support listed items. Alarms will include audible signals and visual
displays.
704618 26 33 53
E. Indications:
1. Quantitative Indications:
a. Input voltage, each phase, line to line.
b. Input current, each phase, line to line.
c. Bypass input voltage, each phase, line to line.
d. Bypass input frequency.
e. System output voltage, each phase, line to line.
f. System output current, each phase.
g. System output frequency.
h. DC bus voltage.
i. Battery current and direction (charge/discharge).
j. Elapsed time discharging battery.
k. Battery time remaining during battery operation.
l. Number of transfers to standby source.
m. Percent load.
2. Power Flow: A power flow diagram shall graphically depict whether the load is
being supplied from the inverter, bypass, or battery and provide, on the same
screen, the status of the following components:
a. Normal operation.
b. Battery circuit breaker.
c. Inverter output circuit breaker .
d. Bypass circuit breaker .
e. Static transfer switch (connected, disconnected).
f. Time to overload transfer.
3. Alarm Indications shall include the following:
a. Input Fail.
b. Control Power Fail.
c. Output Over/Under Frequency.
d. Output Under-voltage.
e. Output Over-voltage.
f. Overload.
g. Overload Transfer.
h. Overload Shutdown.
i. DC Ground Fault.
j. DC Capacitor Fuse Blown.
k. Battery CB Open.
l. Battery Discharging.
m. Low Battery Warning.
n. Low Battery Shutdown.
o. DC Over-voltage Shutdown.
p. Load on Bypass.
q. Auto Retransfer Primed.
r. Manual Reset/Retransfer.
s. Static Switch Unable.
t. Bypass Not Available.
u. Bypass Phase Sequence Wrong.
v. Reverse Power.
w. Rectifier Fuse Blown.
704618 26 33 53
x. Inverter Fault.
y. Hardware Shutdown.
z. Emergency Off.
aa. Ambient Over-temperature.
bb. Blower Failed.
cc. Equipment Over-temperature.
dd. Over-temperature Timeout.
ee. Temperature Compensated Charging Active.
4. Operator Guidance: Provide menu-driven operator instructions detailing the
operation of the UPS system.
a. The instruction menu shall be located at the control panel.
b. The UPS logic microprocessor shall monitor each step, thus prompting
itself to the next step of the instructions.
c. The following instructions shall be available as a minimum:
1) UPS Startup.
2) UPS Shutdown.
3) Inverter Stop.
4) Inverter Start.
5) Transfer of Load to Static Bypass.
6) Equalize Charge to System Battery.
F. EPO Switch: Capable of local operation and operation by means of activation by

external dry contacts.
G. Dry Contacts: Provide form-C isolated dry contacts for external use to monitor:
1. UPS on line.
2. Load on static switch bypass.
3. Load on overall system bypass.
4. UPS on battery.
5. UPS battery low.
6. Summary alarm.
H. Communication Network: Modbus TCP/IP or Ethernet IP interface built into control

module to enable digital communications with power monitoring network and
remotely located annunciators and/or network supervisors.
I. Provide monitor panel to monitor:

1. System normal.
2. On battery.
3. UPS alarm.
4. On bypass.
5. On system bypass.
6. Bypass unavailable.
7. Shutdown imminent.
8. On generator.
2.7 STORAGE BATTERY
A. Manufacturers:
704618 26 33 53
1. East Penn
2. Enersys
3. C&D
B. Furnish a storage battery for UPS with sufficient capacity to maintain UPS output at
required load for minimum specified time. Battery to provide 100 percent of specified
capacity at initial startup. Provide heavy-duty industrial type battery designed for
stationary power service. Provide system with two parallel battery banks redundant of
each other.
C. Provide valve-regulated lead-acid batteries. Provide impact- resistant plastic container

of a design proven by field experience.
D. Each battery bank to have sufficient capacity to supply load for 15 minutes.
E. Supply battery with the following:

1. Cabinets, , protected with electrolyte-resistant paint.
2. Intercell and interior connectors , end to end and/or back to back. Maximum
connection voltage drop of 30 mV between adjacent units.
3. Special tools and fittings required to assemble battery.
4. Cell numerals.
5. DC disconnect.
6. Barrier around battery terminals to prevent accidental contact
7. Battery Life: Per warranty .
8. Battery Monitoring System per Section 26 33 46 Battery Monitoring.
2.8 FACTORY TESTING
A. Test UPS system as defined here for compliance with this Specification. Perform tests
described in this Section at UPS manufacturer's facility. Tests may be witnessed by
Owner / CH2M.
B. Provide equipment, instruments, load banks, and apparatus for testing. Assure
instruments are of sufficient accuracy to verify specified performance parameters.
C. Perform testing at normal ambient conditions within test facility.
D. Power Module Tests: Subject power module to the following tests as a minimum.
Conduct control and power tests simultaneously if appropriate.
1. Control Tests: Test operation of the following items/functions:
a. Instrumentation:
1) Accuracy on display.
2) Operation upon command.
b. Annunciation:
1) Sensor operation.
2) Distinction between manual override and normal status alarm.
3) Status command.
4) Display operation, normal alarms.
c. Logic:
704618 26 33 53
1) Protective functions.
2) Normal operation functions.
d. Operator controls.
e. Troubleshooting controls.
2. Power Tests: For steady-state tests in this paragraph, measure and continuously
record phase voltages, three-phase currents, frequency, and power factor or
kilowatts, at module input and output terminations.
a. No load.
b. 50 percent of rated power module kW load, balanced.
c. 100 percent of rated power module kW load, balanced for 24 hours.
d. Output harmonic voltages at 100 percent rated kW load.
3. System Tests: Perform system tests exclusive of battery bank. System may be
tested in increments, as long as it is demonstrated that each power module
performs as specified when operating with any other power module. Test systems
with two power modules with both power modules operational. Control and
power tests may be conducted simultaneously, if appropriate.
a. Control Tests: Test operation of the following system items/functions:
1) Instrumentation:
a) Accuracy on display.
b) Operation upon command.
2) Annunciation:
a) Sensor operation.
b) Distinction between troubleshooting controls, normal
status, Priority 1 alarm and Priority 2 alarm.
c) Status command.
d) Display operation normal alarms.
3) Logic:
a) Protective functions.
b) Normal operation functions.
4) Operator controls.
5) Troubleshooting controls.
4. Power Tests, Steady State: For steady state tests in this paragraph, measure and
continuously record three-phase voltages, three-line currents, frequency, and
power factor or kilowatts, at system input and output terminations.
a. No load.
b. 50 percent of rated system kW load, balanced.
c. 100 percent rated system kW load, balanced.
5. Power Tests, Transient: For transient tests in this paragraph, measure voltages
with continuous recording instruments at output termination of system
output/bypass module.
a. 0 to 50 percent load addition.
b. 50 to 100 percent load rejection.
c. Manually initiated transfer.
d. Manually initiated retransfer.
e. 125 percent of rated system load, balanced.
f. 150 percent of rated system load, balanced.
g. Automatic transfer.
h. Automatic retransfer.
704618 26 33 53
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Secure enclosures to floor.
C. Include services of technician to supervise adjustments, final connection, and system

energization.
A. On-site Tests: Provide on-site factory-trained technician to supervise installation and

testing.
B. Field UPS Start-up Inspection and Testing:

1. Visual Inspection:
a. Inspect equipment for signs of damage.
b. Verify installation per drawings.
c. Inspect cabinets for foreign objects.
d. Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly sized and configured
per vendor requirements as noted in vendor drawings supplied with
installation manuals or submittal package.
e. Inspect all battery cell cases.
f. Inspect each cell for proper polarity.
g. Verify all printed circuit boards are configured properly.
2. Mechanical Inspection:
a. Check all control wiring connections for tightness.
b. Check all power wiring connections for tightness.
c. Check all terminal screws, nuts, and/or spade lugs for tightness.
3. Electrical Inspection:
a. Check all fuses for continuity.
b. Confirm input bypass voltage and phase rotation is correct.
c. Verify control transformer connections are correct for voltages being
used.
d. Assure connections and voltage of the battery strings.
e. Battery inspection and certification according to IEEE standards.
4. Unit Start-Up:
a. Energize control power.
b. Perform control/logic checks and adjust to meet manufacturer
specification.
c. Verify DC float and equalize voltage levels.
d. Verify DC voltage clamp and over-voltage shutdown levels.
e. Verify battery discharge, low battery warning, and low battery shutdown
levels.
f. Verify fuse monitor alarms and system shutdown.
g. Verify inverter voltages and regulation circuits.
h. Verify inverter/bypass sync circuits and set overlap time.
704618 26 33 53
i. Perform manual transfers and returns.
j. Simulate utility outage at no load.
k. Verify proper recharge.
C. Instruct up to ten Owner’s personnel for minimum of 1 day in maintenance and

operation of equipment.
D. Provide test instruments to record elapsed time between transfers, voltage, current,
frequency, waveform, and transients.
1. Include services of an experienced technician to make final adjustments, final
connections, and perform final testing.
2. Evidence of transients or phase shifts in graphs will be cause for rejection of
system.
704618 26 33 53
WITH BID
26 33 53-01 Itemized list of exceptions and deviations X

from these specifications
26 33 53-03 Layout with dimensions and openings for X
major components including inverter, by-pass,
transformers, charger, battery, battery rack,
and battery enclosure
26 33 53-04 Locations of conduit entry and exit points X
26 33 53-05 Single-line diagram including controls, X
metering, and external wiring requirements
26 33 53-06 Weights X
26 33 53-08 Heat rejection and ventilation requirements X
under no load and full load conditions
26 33 53-09 Mounting and detailed scaled installation Prior to delivery
drawings, including seismic
26 33 53-10 Detailed layouts of metering, alarm, and Prior to delivery
mimic panels (metering to also show on
single-line)
26 33 53-11 System configuration and rating with single- Prior to delivery
line diagrams (detail breaker and disconnect
locations, frame size, trip ratings, and model
numbers)
26 33 53-12 Functional relationship of equipment Prior to delivery
including weights, dimensions, normal and
service access areas, heat dissipation, and
airflow requirements (include battery and
rack/enclosure)
26 33 53-15 Size and weights of shipping units for field Prior to delivery
handling
26 33 53-16 Datasheets X
26 33 53-17 Noise X
26 33 53-18 Electrical voltage, load, and interface X
704618 26 33 53
WITH BID
26 33 53-19 Wiring and schematic diagrams Prior to delivery
26 33 53-20 Function block diagram X

26 33 53-21 Control interface Prior to delivery
26 33 53-22 Battery specification, installation, and Prior to delivery

maintenance requirements
26 33 53-23 Size and type of cable to interconnect X
batteries to UPS system
26 33 53-24 Suggested parts list and supplier contact Prior to delivery
26 33 53-25 Onsite written test procedure

Before date of Substantial
Completion
26 33 53-26 Software, files, databases

With operations and maintenance
manuals
26 33 53-28 Field test results

Per construction schedule

Completion
END OF SECTION
704618 26 33 53
SECTION 26 35 53
DYNAMIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements necessary to furnish and install Dynamic Voltage

Regulators (DVR) for stabilizing short-term power quality issues.
B. Dynamic Voltage Regulators also knows as:

1. Dynamic Voltage Restorers (DVR)
2. Static Synchronous Compensator (STATCOM)
3. Power Factor Correction
1. Section 26 05 01 – Basic Electrical Requirements.
2. Section 26 12 13 – Liquid-filled Medium-voltage Transformers
3. Section 26 09 13 – Electrical Power Monitoring System
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

1. IEEE Std. C37.34 – IEEE Standard Test Code for High-Voltage Air Switches.
2. IEEE Std. 18TM – IEEE Standard for Shunt Power Capacitors.
3. IEEE Std. C37.06 – AC high-voltage circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical
current basis -preferred ratings and related required capabilities for voltages
above 1000V.
4. IEEE Std. C37.34 – IEEE Standard Test Code for High-Voltage Air Switches.
5. IEEE Std. C37.90TM – IEEE Standard for Relays and Relay Systems Associated
With Electric Power Apparatus
6. IEEE Std. C57.13 – IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers
7. IEEE Std. C57.16 – IEEE Standard Requirements, Terminology and Test Code
for Dry-Type Air-Core Series-Connected Reactors
8. IEEE Std. C57.21 – IEEE Standard Requirements, Terminology and Test Code
for Shunt Reactors Rated Over 500 kVA
9. IEEE Std. 62.11 – Metal-oxide surge arresters for AC power circuits
10. IEEE Std. 80TM – IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding
11. IEEE Std. C93.1 – Requirements for power-line carrier coupling capacitors and
coupling capacitor voltage transformers (CCVT)
12. IEEE Std. 139TM – IEEE Recommended Practice for the Measurement of Radio
Frequency Emission from Industrial, Scientific, and Medical (ISM) Equipment
Installed on User’s Premise
13. IEEE 1303TM – IEEE Guide for Static Var Compensator Field Tests
14. IEEE 1313 – Standard for Power Systems Insulation Coordination
15. IEEE Std. 1531 – Guide for application and specification of harmonic filters
704618 Dynamic Voltage Regulator

01 NOVEMBER 2018 - Rev. 0 26 35 53 - 1
16. IEEE Std 1453-2011 – IEEE Recommended Practice – Adoption of IEC 61000-
4-15:2010, Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) testing and measurement
techniques – Flicker meter – Functional and Design Specifications
17. IEEE Std 519-2014 – IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirements for
Harmonic Control in Electric Power Systems.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
1. BIL – Basic Insulation Level
2. DVR – Dynamic Voltage Regulator
3. HV – High Voltage
4. IGBT – Insulated-Gate Bipolar Transistor
5. LV – Low Voltage
6. PCC – Point of Common Coupling
7. PWM – Pulse Width Modulated
8. VSC – Voltage Source Converter
A. The dynamic voltage regulator provides correction for power quality events at the point
of common coupling. The system consists of a line reactor, power factor correction,
voltage injection transformer, voltage source converter, low-pass filter, power protection,
controller and operator interface module.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. See Datasheets at end of this Specification for DVR and power factor correction.
B. System ratings and performance criteria apply to the normal continuous range of AC
voltage for operating conditions as specified in the datasheet, and at specified faults
levels conditions for ambient temperature.
C. Voltage regulation: 35kV (1.0 per unit); continuously adjustable 0.9 to 1.1.
D. Determine peak dynamic and continuous rated capacitive/inductive reactive power output
of the DVR System based on the system analysis results.
E. Under steady state conditions the DVR System is capable of continuously supplying
sufficient NPS current to maintain the NPS voltage and NPS current magnitudes at the
35kV bus to within the limits in the datasheet. The DVR System’s overload capability
can be used to address short duration swells in NPS magnitude provided the overload is
available for the necessary duration.
F. Under steady state conditions, with the voltage dead band between 1.0 - 1.03 per unit
(adjustable range by HMI), the DVR System output is zero or near zero so that the entire
reactive capability is available for the dynamic conditions. DVR system controller
controls additional shunt capacitor and/or a reactor bank(s) at the PCC under steady state
conditions to maintain requirements defined above. The DVR System mitigates step
voltage effects of switching the shunt devices controlled by the DVR System.

01 NOVEMBER 2018 - Rev. 0 26 35 53 - 2
G. The droop slope of the characteristic shall be continuously adjustable between 0.5% and
10% over the entire output range.
H. The DVR System shall continue to generate reactive power and support the transmission
system during a temporary under-voltage down to the value 0.2 per unit, per item 20 in
the datasheet. The DVR System may be blocked if the voltage falls below 0.2 pu.
I. The DVR System shall continue to absorb reactive power during a temporary overvoltage
up to the value 1.25 pu and may be tripped for overvoltage of greater than 1.25 pu, per
the datasheet.
J. The DVR System shall resume automatic operation within 30 cycles once the voltage
returns within the defined operating band as defined in the V-I characteristic.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide minimum 1 year manufacturer’s warranty. Include an optional price for a 2-year
warranty extension for total of 3-year warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. American Superconductor (AMSC)
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. NEMA Rating: 3R
B. Close-couple voltage injection transformer and DVR unit.
C. Short Circuit Rating: 100 kAIC
2.3 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
A. IGBT Inverters design requirements;

1. Each phase of the Voltage Source Converter (VSC) shall withstand maximum
overvoltage and overcurrent stress due to system faults and switching.
2. DVR System shall be controllable up to the maximum voltage listed in the
datasheet. The VSC shall be capable of blocking if the voltage exceeds the value
at which DVR System may be blocked.

01 NOVEMBER 2018 - Rev. 0 26 35 53 - 3
3. The DVR System shall have sufficient redundant modules to meet the guaranteed
reliability, availability, performance and the harmonic performance criteria under
all possible operation modes with failed modules as discussed below.
4. The inverters shall be 3-phase type.
5. The inverters shall be IGBT semiconductor based PWM modules, switched at a
minimum frequency of 2 kHz.
6. Inverters shall have independent phase control as an option for transient events.
7. Inverters module shall be fully integrated air-cooled, four-quadrant power
converters and dc bus.
8. Each Inverter module shall employ capacitors, suitable sensing, driving, and
isolating circuitry, and a microprocessor or DSP based controller.
9. The inverter module shall be capable of producing capacitive and inductive
VARs with the added ability to operate at 3 times their continuous output current
for up to two seconds.
10. The design of the inverter structure shall permit easy access for visual inspection
and maintenance. Each single-phase module (or equivalent) shall be parallel
connected, including all necessary heat sinks, snubber circuits and gate drivers.
11. Inverters shall be arranged in parallel fashion. Reactors shall be supplied as
required for filtering. Parallel inverters shall be provided such that the loss of one
inverter shall not reduce the capability of the remaining inverters for operation.
Inverters shall be fused for protection requirements.
12. There shall be a monitoring system that monitors the status of the modules. The
monitoring system shall be able to detect module failures and the detected
failures shall be displayed on the HMI monitor, recorded and printed out in the
control room, including the location of the failed module, time of failure and, if
to the extent possible, cause of failure. There shall be an alarm when all the
redundant modules in any phase have failed.
B. Cooling
1. Cooling system maintains full DVR System rated capacity at maximum ambient
temperature and maximum device losses.
2. Cooling for semiconductors by natural convection or forced air. Forced air requires
full redundancy and removable filters at air inlets.
3. Air-cooled system monitoring alarms::
a. Blower transfer
b. High exhaust air temperature or high heat sink temperature
c. High differential pressure across the filter
d. Low air flow
4. Minimum Tripping States
a. Excessive exhaust air temperature or high heat sink temperature
b. Loss of air flow
C. Reactors
1. The reactors shall be of single phase, air-core design, self-cooled and suitable for
outdoor installation (ambient conditions in datasheet shall be considered).

01 NOVEMBER 2018 - Rev. 0 26 35 53 - 4
2. Reactors shall be capable of withstanding short circuit forces based on maximum
design fault levels.
3. The reactor voltage rating shall be as required by the DVR System design. The
bidder shall determine the BIL rating as required by the DVR System design and
the insulation requirements.
4. Audible noise levels from the reactors shall be coordinated to meet the
requirements for the DVR System installation and the applicable IEEE standards.
D. Capacitors
1. The capacitor units shall be constructed with materials resulting in minimum
losses and maximum reliability. Each unit shall be free of PCB.
2. Reactors for limiting of inrush currents (if required) shall be connected in series
with the capacitor banks if required.
3. The capacitor voltage rating shall be as required by the Power system
characteristics and overall DVR System design. The BIL rating shall be
determined by the bidder as required by the DVR System design.
4. The individual capacitor units can be internally or externally fused or fuseless.
Supplier shall specify with their bid.
5. Audible noise levels from the capacitor banks shall be coordinated to meet the
requirements for the DVR System installation and the applicable IEEE standards.
6. Capacitor dielectric losses shall not exceed 0.15 W/kVar.
7. The capacitor units shall use internal discharge resistors that reduce the residual
voltage to below 50V in not more than 5 minutes.
E. Power Transformers
1. Provide close coupled transformer per Specification Section 26 12 13 – Liquid-
filled Medium-voltage Transformers
2. Reactive Current Rating: 100% full load amps.
3. Designed for harmonic currents voltage levels associated with the DVR System
under normal operating conditions without loss of life.
F. Instrument Transformers
1. The range, accuracy and response time of the voltage and current measuring
equipment shall be adequate to meet the accuracy and response requirements.
G. Controls
1. ON/OFF sequencing of the DVR System
2. Emergency OFF control
3. Control mode selection
4. Voltage control through three phase voltage regulation
5. Filter switching strategy
6. Coordinate the 34.5 kV Capacitor Banks switching control;
7. Coordinate the 34.5 kV Reactor Banks switching control;
8. HV overvoltage

01 NOVEMBER 2018 - Rev. 0 26 35 53 - 5
9. HV undervoltage
10. LV bus undervoltage
11. DVR System current supervision
12. Trip Conditions
13. Alarms
H. SCADA and monitoring

1. DVR System local control shall be provided in a form of PC based HMI operator
station located in the DVR System control building. The HMI with local and
remote servers shall provide an Operator with primary local control, status,
alarms, analogs, remote desktop protocol (RDP), touch screen hardware using a
keyboard and mouse Control and monitoring points available at the HMI:
a. Station One-line
b. Network Integration One-line
c. Diagnostics:
1) Fault and event recording, internal and external to the DVR
System;
2) Local data storage
3) Switchgear status
4) Alarms
5) DVR System ON/OFF sequencing
6) Local/Remote control
7) Auto/manual mode of operation
8) Voltage control
9) Filter switching
10) Monitoring and protection of the DVR System control system
2. Provide remote monitoring capability through the building electrical power
monitoring system. Refer to specification Section 26 09 13 – Electrical Power
Monitoring System for standard communication configurations.
I. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch on equipment.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (AND TESTS)

A. Inverters to undergo type and production tests.
B. Control Systems verification
1. Control function.
2. Control linearity.
3. Monitoring system.
4. Overall system performance for minor and major system disturbances.
5. Processor loading of all digital controllers.
6. DVR System parallel operation with other controls in the system and control
stability.
7. Control equipment performance for auxiliary power supply voltage (AC and
DC) and frequency variations (AC).

01 NOVEMBER 2018 - Rev. 0 26 35 53 - 6
C. Demonstrate compliance to these requirements: (a) A step change in control signal to
initiate a change of capacitive and (b) a step change in control signal to initiate a change of
inductive MVAR:
- Response Time: not greater than 500 ms
- Settling Time: not greater than 2000 ms
- Overshoot: not greater than 10%
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install work in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
grounding.

Requirements for startup, testing, and inspection requirements of medium-voltage circuit
breaker switchgear.
D. Repeat factory tests during field commissioning prior to energization.
E. Conduct testing in accordance with IEEE Std 1303.
3.3 ATTACHMENTS
A. The following documents, attached immediately behind End of Section, are part of this
Section:
1. DVR
2. Power Factor Correction.

01 NOVEMBER 2018 - Rev. 0 26 35 53 - 7
WITH BID
26 35 33-00 Detailed literature describing features. X Per construction schedule.
26 35 33-01 Product data for components and accessories. X Per construction schedule.
26 35 33-02 Shop Drawings Per construction schedule.
26 35 33-03 Electrical characteristics including voltage, X Per construction schedule.
frame size, trip ratings, BIL, and equipment
short-circuit ratings.
26 35 33-04 Front elevation of equipment with Per construction schedule.
instrumentation, relaying, and control devices
illustrated.
26 35 33-05 Overall dimensions of equipment and X Per construction schedule.
26 35 33-06 Foundation and anchor bolt plans, including Per construction schedule.
seismic mounting with bottom cable entry/exit
location dimensions.
26 35 33-07 Cable entry/exit location dimensions. Per construction schedule.
Instructions for handling and installation.
26 35 33-08 Elementary (schematic) wiring diagrams for X Per construction schedule.
power, control, relaying, and metering
elements.
26 35 33-09 Interconnection diagrams of control, relaying, Per construction schedule.
26 35 33-10 List of factory tests to be performed prior to X Per construction schedule.
shipment.
representative‘s field certification of system
commissioning and performance assurance.
26 35 33-12 Maintenance instructions for cleaning Per construction schedule.
lubrication.
26 35 33-13 Complete one-line and three -line drawings, Prior to shipment

01 NOVEMBER 2018 - Rev. 0 26 35 53 - 8
WITH BID
26 35 33-14 Material and equipment summary sheets and X Per construction schedule.
26 35 33-15 Descriptive bulletins and instructions for Per construction schedule.
diodes, and resistors.
26 35 33-16 Excitation curves and ratio correction factor Per construction schedule.
curves for instrument transformers.
26 35 33-17 Certified factory test reports specified. Within specified days of test.
26 35 33-18 Closeout Submittal; Project Record Before date of Substantial
Documents: Completion.
26 35 33-19 Closeout Submittal; Operation and Before date of Substantial
Maintenance Data: Completion.
END OF SECTION

01 NOVEMBER 2018 - Rev. 0 26 35 53 - 9
D-VAR DVR DATA SHEET
Equipment Specification
Description Specification
System Capacity TBD [5-PME]
System
Voltage Rebuild 60%

Full Build: 23 kAIC @ 34.5 kV
Available Short Circuit
Initial Build: 40 kAIC @ 34.5 kV
Plant Nominal Power Factor .89
Nominal Connection Voltage (LV) 480 V
Maximum continuous voltage 508 V
Maximum continuous current 4800 A per phase
System Frequency 60 Hz
Continuous Rating ±4.0 MVAr continuous (per module)
Characteristics
±12 MVAr (3 times continuous current for

Transient Overload Rating
up to 2 seconds - per module)
Speed of Response Approximately 1.5 cycles
,DVR
Losses
No load Losses 0.5 kW
Load Losses 75 kW
Designed to operate when background
harmonics are within IEEE 519 limits.
Harmonics
Exceeding 519 limits may cause the D-VAR
to trip offline or cause damage.
25 Year (Regular maintenance can extend
Design Life
the life of equipment)
Reliability/availability (%) Greater than 98 %
Inverter Type IGBT Voltage source converter

Semiconductors
Structure Dual IGBT

Dimensions (L x W x H) 172 x 89 x 38 (mm)
Maximum ratings
Power
Collector- emitter voltage 1200 V

Collector current 900 A
Maximum collector dissipation 5000 W
Operating temperature -40 to +150ºC
Number of power semiconductors
6 in 3phase Bridge
in each valve

01 NOVEMBER 2018 - Rev. 0 26 35 53 - 10
Type Air Cooled
Cooling System
Exchanged heat 68 kW
Oversizing thermal margin 0.1
Nominal Flow 21.92 m3/h
Number of Fans 2
Power consumption of each fan 2.5kW each
Operating temperature of the power
<150°C
electronic
Operating temperature of the
50°C (Ambient Air)
cooling fluid
Elevation <1000m above sea level

Conditions
-50°C to 50°C (Heater package is needed

Operating Temperature range
Service
for colder temperatures)

Design Wind Speed 120 mph
Seismic zone consistent with installation
Seismic
site
Average Precipitation 15-20" Rain
Humidity 5 to 95%
Approximate Dimensions and Weight of Enclosure

Height 2540 mm
PME Mechanical
Characteristics
Width 2489 mm
Depth 2972 mm
Weight 5897 kg
Enclosure Type NEMA 3R
Standard Color Gray ANSI Standard No.61.
Required LV power 125 VDC, 500 W
No Load: 64.4 dB at 1 meter
Noise level Full Load: 81.4 dB at 1 meter, 78.4 dB at 2
meter
Quality system compliance ISO 9001: 2015

01 NOVEMBER 2018 - Rev. 0 26 35 53 - 11
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION DATA SHEET
Tag Number(s) PFC-31-1

Name Power Factor Correction
General
Voltage 34.5kV
Maximum output 30 MVAR
Frequency 60 HZ
Location Outdoor
Insulation level 140 kV BIL
Short circuit current 40kA
Bank configuration Fixed, switched single or multistep
Interlocking Mechanical or solenoid
ARC Resistant
Busbar Copper
Standards
IEC, IEEE, / ANSI,
ASCE 7-10 120mph Wind rating
IEEE-693-2005 High seismic level
MSK-64 X rating for seismic intensity
Enclosure
NEMA 3R, Non walk-in
Cable Entry Bottom
Exterior Finish Manufacturer standard
Capacitors
Type Single, three or split-phase
Fusing Internal or unfused
Discharge Resistor Built-in
Losses < 0.15W / kVAR, including resistors
Dielectric Polypropylene film
Impregnant Faradol non-PCB
Container Stainless steel
Bushings Grey porcelain one, two or three
Inrush Reactors Single phase, air core
Detuning / filter reactors Type
Type Vacuum (transient free solutions available)

01 NOVEMBER 2018 - Rev. 0 26 35 53 - 12
Phase Three
Current rating 1200A
Fuses 300A, 63kA short time current
Power Factor Controller
Microprocessor-based system for single or three
phase system Insensitive to harmonics
Control Voltage 100 VAC to 240 VAC
Power Factor Setting 0.7 inductive to 0.7 capacitive

01 NOVEMBER 2018 - Rev. 0 26 35 53 - 13
SECTION 26 36 23
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install automatic transfer
switches (ATS).
1.2 REFERENCES

1. Automatic transfer switches (ATS)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
A. ATS Manufacturer:
1. Company specializing in transfer switches and emergency power control systems
with 10 years’ minimum experience.
2. Maintain local service center capable of emergency service or routine
preventative maintenance and offer preventative maintenance contracts. Maintain
records of each switch by serial number for 10 years minimum.
A. Inherently double-throw power transfer switch unit and control module interconnected to
provide complete automatic operation.
B. Electrically operated and mechanically held. Mechanically interlock to ensure only one of
two possible positions, normal or emergency.
C. Provide inspection capability from front. Provide manual operating handle for
maintenance, permitting operator to manually stop contacts at any point throughout entire
travel, to properly inspect and service contacts.
704618 26 36 23
10 JANUARY 2019 – Rev. 0 Automatic Transfer Switches - 1
D. Provide control module to direct transfer switch operation. Control sensing and logic with
built-in microprocessor for reliability, minimum maintenance, and inherent digital
communications capability.
E. Monitor each phase voltage of normal source with 85 to 100 percent adjustable pickup
and 70 to 98 percent adjustable dropout, both in increments of 1 percent, fully field
adjustable without use of tools, meters, or power supplies. Factory set to pick up at
90 percent, drop out at 85 percent.
F. Provide emergency source voltage sensing with 85 to 100 percent adjustable pickup and
84 to 86 percent fixed dropout and frequency sensing with 90 to 100 percent adjustable
pickup and 87 to 89 percent fixed dropout, fully field adjustable in 1 percent increments
without use of tools, meters, or power supplies. Factory set to pick up at 90 percent
voltage and 95 percent frequency.
G. Control Module: Include time delays fully field adjustable in increments over entire range
as follows:
1. Time delay adjustable from 0 to 6 seconds and factory set at 1 second to override
momentary normal source outages to delay transfer switch and engine starting
signals.
2. Transfer to emergency source time delay adjustable from zero to 5 minutes.
3. Manual retransfer to normal source.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. ASCO 7000.
B. Caterpillar
C. Cummins/ONAN.
D. Generac
E. Kohler
F. MTU Onsite Energy
G. Russelectric, Type RMT D.
H. Zenith Controls Inc.
2.2 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES (ATS)
A. Provide low-voltage automatic transfer switches listed in the table at the end of this
specification capable of switching resistive and inductive-type loads.
704618 26 36 23
B. Nominal Voltage and Poles:
1. 480 Volts, three-phase, three-wire, plus ground
2. Three-pole (three-phase)
C. Short-circuit Withstand Capability:
3-Cycle Closing and Withstand Rating,

ATS Used with Molded-
Switch Amperes Case Breaker, rms Symmetrical Amps
100 to 400 42,000
600 to 800 65,000
1,000 to 1,200 85,000
1,600-4000 100,000
D. Continuous Current Rating: 1200 amperes.
E. Transfer Mechanism:
1. Momentarily energized electric operator to activate double-throw switch.
2. Overcenter-type linkage to provide quick-make, quick-break action of switch
contacts.
3. Capable of operating at 70 percent of nominal system voltage.
4. Interlock normal and emergency source contacts mechanically and electrically to
prevent simultaneous closing.
5. Silver-tungsten alloy main contacts mechanically held without use of hooks,
latches, magnets, or springs.
6. Separate arcing contacts and arc extinguishing chutes.
F. Manual Operator: Capable of actuating switch with same action and speed as electric
operator.
G. Enclosure:
1. NEMA 1.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color.
3. Door lock with provision for padlock.
H. Lugs:
1. Two-hole, long barrel copper only compression lugs.
I. In-phase Monitor:
1. Control retransfer sequence back to normal power source from emergency power
source.
2. Use solid-state synchronizer sensing circuit.
3. Provide potentiometer for adjustment of phase angle. Provide manual bypass
switch.
4. Operate from emergency source to normal source in either transfer direction only
when two sources are within 10 electrical degrees of 0-phase angle to each other
or normal source has failed.
704618 26 36 23
5. Do not permit operation of transfer switch from emergency source to normal
source with abnormal voltage nor with slip frequency greater than one-third cycle
per second.
2.3 BYPASS ISOLATION SWITCH
A. Fully rated, manually operated.
B. Bypass to either normal or emergency source
C. Manual Bypass: Achieve without load break to source connected to load by ATS.
D. Prevent bypass to dead source by use of solenoid-operated lockout mechanism.
E. Prevent partial transfer using quick-make, quick-break overcenter contact action.
2.4 ATS ACCESSORIES
A. Provide one each Form C contact rated 5A at 120 Vac for each of the following:
1. Loss of normal voltage via voltage sensing relay on normal source for generator
start signal.
2. Loss of normal voltage via voltage sensing relay on normal source for facility
monitoring use at FMCS.
3. Emergency source detected at line side of transfer switch via voltage-sensing
relay on emergency source.
4. Transfer switch in normal position.
5. Transfer switch in emergency position for facility monitoring use at FMCS.
6. Failure to synchronize.
B. Provide one red and one green indicating light on enclosure door.
1. Illuminate green light when switch is in normal position.
2. Illuminate red light when switch is in emergency position.
C. Provide two amber indicating lights on enclosure door.

1. Illuminate one light when normal source is present.
2. Illuminate second light when emergency source is present.
3. Operate lights from voltage-sensing relays, not directly from main busses.
D. Identify control wire terminations with tubular sleeve-type markers.
E. Provide schematic drawing under clear plastic on interior of enclosure door.
F. Generator Control Panel Remote Control:

1. Transfer to emergency.
2. Return to normal power.
3. Block transfer to normal or emergency.
G. Digital Meter: 2 percent accuracy with phase selection.

1. Volt meter, emergency bus.
704618 26 36 23
2. Volt meter, normal bus.
3. Ammeter.
4. Frequency meter.
5. Running time meter for generator operating time.
H. Communication Network: Modbus TCP/IP or Ethernet IP interface built into ATS control
module to enable digital communications with power monitoring network and remotely
located annunciators and/or network supervisors. No wireless communication of any
type. Enable remote annunciator to indicate and control the following functions via
digital communications in control panel:
1. Indication:
a. Load connected to normal or emergency source.
b. Normal and/or emergency source available.
c. Transfer switch in test mode.
d. Transfer switch control panel in time-delay function.
2. Control:
a. Simulate normal source failure to sensing controls.
b. Time-delay bypass.
I. Manual/automatic retransfer selector switch.
J. Nameplates: Provide nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53 Identification for

Electrical Systems.
2.5 ATS CONTROL DEVICES
A. Four-position switch mounted on enclosure door with four modes as follows:

1. Off:
a. Control relays de-energized, engine-start circuit open. No operation
under any circumstance.
b. Provide door-mounted indicating light illuminated when in off position.
2. Auto: Complete automatic operation as specified.
3. Test: Simulate failure of normal source. Transfer to emergency as specified.
Manual retransfer to normal after switch is returned to auto position.
4. Engine Start: ATS remains connected to normal source and initiates engine-start
circuit. Transfer to emergency source only on failure of normal source and after
appropriate time delay.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install ATS in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
A. Adjust contactors, time delays, and functioning parts.
704618 26 36 23
B. Clean exterior and interior surfaces.

2. Functional and performance testing.
3. Plant startup.
A. Test ATS in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and Section 26 05 01 Basic

Electrical Requirements.
B. Test in accordance with requirements of authority having jurisdiction.
704618 26 36 23
WITH BID
26 36 23-01 Catalog cutsheets, other descriptive literature X Per construction schedule
26 36 23-02 Layout with dimensions and openings X Per construction schedule
26 36 23-03 Weights X Per construction schedule
26 36 23-04 Capacities and ratings X Per construction schedule
26 36 23-06 Performance characteristics X Per construction schedule
26 36 23-07 Model numbers X Per construction schedule
26 36 23-08 Electrical voltage, load, and interface for X Per construction schedule
accessories
26 36 23-10 Control interface X Per construction schedule
26 36 23-14 Description of equipment operation during Per construction schedule

startup, synchronization, paralleling,
switchover, and shutdown
26 36 23-15 Installation instructions Per construction schedule
704618 26 36 23
APPENDIX A
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH TABLE
Equipment Number Rating

ATS-31 480V, 3Ø,3W,1200A
ATS-32 480V, 3Ø,3W,1200A
ATS-33 480V, 3Ø,3W,1200A
ATS-34 480V, 3Ø,3W,1200A
ATS-35 480V, 3Ø,3W,1200A
ATS-36 480V, 3Ø,3W,1200A
ATS-37 480V, 3Ø,3W,1200A
ATS-38 480V, 3Ø,3W,1200A
ATS-39 480V, 3Ø,3W,1200A
ATS-40 480V, 3Ø,3W,1200A
END OF SECTION
704618 26 36 23
SECTION 26 41 00
FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. System design.
2. Air terminals, interconnecting conductors, and other system components and
accessories.
3. Grounding and bonding for lightning protection.
4. System inspection and certification.
3. Section 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
A. Lightning Protection System: system protecting roof-mounted mechanical equipment,

chimneys and stacks, consisting of air terminals on roofs, bonding of structure and other
metal objects, grounding electrodes, and interconnecting conductors.
1.3 REFERENCES

2. Independent Protection Co. (IPC)
3. Lightning Protection Institute (LPI)
a. NFPA 780-2011 – Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection
Systems.
b. UL 96-2005 (R2010) – UL Standard for Safety, Lightning Protection
Components.
c. IEEE 142™-2007 – Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and
Commercial Power Systems (Green Book).
d. IEEE 81-1983 – Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance,
and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System.
704618 26 41 00
15 APRIL 2019 – Rev. A Facility Lightning Protection - 1
e. LPI-175-2008 – Lightning Protection Institute’s (LPI) Standard of Practice.
f. OSHA regulations (Standards-29 CFR).
g. ULPA – United Lightning Protection Association.
h. UL 96A-2007 (R2010) – UL Standard for Safety, Installation Requirements
for Lightning Protection Systems.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Designer: Lightning Protection Institute (LPI)-certified Designer or recognized lightning

protection Manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in lightning protection equipment with minimum

3 years' documented experience and member of LPI.
C. Installer: Authorized installer of manufacturer with minimum 3 years' documented

experience and member of LPI.
D. Inspection of Final Installation and Grounding Connections of the System: Performed by

LPI-certified inspector.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work of this Section with roofing and exterior, and interior finish
installations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Thompson Lightning Protection.
B. Independent Protection Co. (IPC).
C. Erico.
D. Kuefler Lightning Protection.
E. Advanced Lightning Technology, LTD.
704618 26 41 00
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Components: Copper or high copper content, heavy-duty bronze castings unless

otherwise specified.
B. Air Terminals:
1. Solid copper with tapered points.
2. Length sufficient to extend minimum 10 inches above object being protected.
3. Diameter: 1/2 inch.
C. Air Terminal and Conductor for Chimney: Lead-coated copper.
D. Ground Rods:
1. Materials: Copper clad steel.
2. Diameter: 3/4 inch.
3. Length: 10 feet.
E. Ground Plate: Copper.
F. Conductors: Copper.
G. Cable Connections and Splicers:

1. Welds: Exothermic process.
2. Fasteners: Bolted, clamp type.
3. Through-Roof: Lead seal flashing washer.
H. Conduit: PVC Schedule 40 per Section 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems.
I. Contact the Owner at least 7 days before inspections and tests are scheduled.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Verify field measurements as shown on shop drawings.
3.2 PROTECTION OF SURROUNDING ELEMENTS
A. Protect elements surrounding work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
704618 26 41 00
B. Certify completed system as UL master labeled.
C. Install ground rods per Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
A. Isolate lightning protection system from other ground conditions while performing tests.
B. Obtain services of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. to provide inspection and certification

of lightning protection system.
C. Obtain UL master label and attach to building at location directed by CH2M .
704618 26 41 00
WITH BID

design-build
showing dimensions and materials of each
component, include indication of
certification by listing authority
26 41 00-03 Layout of air terminals, grounding Per construction schedule
electrodes, and bonding connections to
structure and other metal objects
26 41 00-04 Detail of terminal, electrode, and conductor Per construction schedule
sizes, and connection and termination
details.
26 41 00-05 Field test results (include description of Per construction schedule
equipment tested, description of test, test
results, conclusions, recommendations, and
signature of responsible test organization
authority)
END OF SECTION
704618 26 41 00
SECTION 26 50 00
LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Lighting materials.
2. Lenses/louvers.
3. Reflectors.
4. Listings.
5. Lamps.
6. Self-contained emergency power exit signs.
7. Site lighting poles.
8. Obstruction lights.
4. Section 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
5. TBD – Lighting Controls:
a. Section 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices.
b. Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices.
c. Section 26 29 16 Contactors.
1.2 REFERENCES

4. Electrical Testing Lab (ETL)
5. Illumination Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)
6. Light Emitting Diode (LED)
10. Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP)
12. United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
704618 26 50 00
14 MARCH 2019 – Rev. 1 Lighting - 1
for this Section.
A. Ship luminaires with parabolic-type louvers protected by a clear plastic bag. Handle with
white gloves to prevent fingerprint damage.
B. Aluminum Poles:
1. Provide manufacturer’s standard protection for the finish during shipment and
installation. At minimum, spirally wrap each pole shaft with protective paper
secured with tape, and ship small parts in boxes.
2. Do not store poles on ground.
3. Support poles so they are at least 1 foot above ground level and growing
vegetation.
4. Do not remove factory-applied pole wrappings until just before installing pole.
5. Ship poles with bolt circle template, base cover, handhold cover, and shaft cap or
tenon.
C. Steel Poles:
1. Provide manufacturer’s standard protection for the finish during shipment and
installation. At minimum, spirally wrap each pole shaft with protective paper
secured with tape, and ship small parts in boxes.
2. Do not store poles on ground.
3. Support poles so they are at least 1 foot above ground level and growing
vegetation.
4. Do not remove factory-applied pole wrappings until just before installing pole.
5. Ship poles with bolt circle template, base cover, handhold cover, and shaft cap or
tenon.
1.5 EXTRA STOCK
A. LED Luminaires 3 percent of quantity furnished; minimum of 5 of each size and type.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LIGHTING MATERIALS
A. Provide minimum quality products as described in the luminaire schedule.
B. Provide luminaires rated by manufacturer to start and operate to their full lumen capacity
for rated life of the luminaire at the minimum low and maximum high ambient
temperatures as defined in the Contract Documents at their installation location.
C. Recessed Luminaires: Provide feed-through junction boxes. Access components through

the ceiling opening.
D. Luminaires Provide with minimum 18-American Wire Gauge (AWG) wiring leads.
704618 26 50 00
E. Component Access: Accessible and replaceable without removing luminaire from
ceiling.
F. Lighting Busway: Three-circuit 20-ampere lighting busway for surface mounting by

manufacturer of busway-mounted luminaires; natural aluminum factory finish.
G. Prefabricated Wiring System: Where a prefabricated wiring system is scheduled, equip

luminaires with required adapters at the factory.
2.2 UL / ELECTRICAL TESTING LAB (ETL) LISTINGS
A. Luminaires and Components: UL- or ETL-tested, listed, and labeled.
B. Provide luminaires installed under canopies, roofs, or similar damp or wet locations with
UL/ETL listing and labeling as suitable for damp or wet locations.
C. Thermally protect for this application recessed luminaires installed in fire--rated ceilings
and using a fire-rated protective cover and provide a fire-rated listing.
D. Provide luminaires in exterior installations with a UL/ETL listing and labeling as suitable
for wet locations.
2.3 ILLUMINATION ENGINEERING SOCIEITY OF NORTH AMERICAN (IESNA)

PHOTOMETRICS
A. Provide luminaires with IESNA formatted photometric files via an ETL for lighting
software interface.
2.4 LAMPS
A. Refer to luminaire schedule for specific lamp descriptions.
B. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps

1. Metal Halide: Phosphor coated unless otherwise noted in the luminaire schedule;
suitable for the burning position required.
C. Light Emitting Diode (LED) Lamps

1. Comply with Restriction of the use of Certain Hazardous Substances (RoHS).
2. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) as scheduled.
2.5 LED SOURCE SYSTEMS
A. General:
1. Provide IESNA LM-80 and LM-79 Test reports.
2. Warranty: 5 years minimum.
B. Electronic Module/Light Engine:

1. Mount all components to a single plate and factory prewired with quick
disconnect plugs.
704618 26 50 00
2. Include a driver, thermal control device, thermal protector device, and surge
protector device in accordance with IEEE/ANSI C62.41.2 to Category C Low.
3. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) As indicated on the Luminaire Schedule.
4. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Minimum of 80.
C. Drivers:
1. Expected life of 50,000 hours minimum.
2. Operating Voltage Range: 50/60-Hz input source of 120V to 277V with
sustained variations of plus or minus 10 percent voltage with no damage to
driver.
3. Input current total harmonic distortion: less than 20 percent up to 50 percent of
full load rating.
4. Power Factor: Greater than 0.90.
5. Dimming:
a. Continuously dimmable from 10 to 100 percent.
2.6 SELF-CONTAINED EMERGENCY POWER EXIT SIGNS
1. Lithonia.
2. Sure-Lights.
B. Type: Exit signs as described above, except with integral battery-operated emergency
power supply, including power failure relay, test switch, ac on pilot light, battery, and
fully automatic two-rate charger.
C. Battery: Nickel-cadmium cell requiring no maintenance or replacement for 10 years

under normal conditions.
2.7 SITE LIGHTING POLES
A. General:
1. Site Lighting Poles: Meet EPA wind loading rating requirements.
2. Refer to pole base details as shown on the Drawings for specific pole base
requirements.
3. Pole Top: Provide 2-3/8-inch outside diameter slip fitter.
4. Anchor Bolts: As recommended by pole manufacturer. Provide template, flat
washers, lock washers, and hex nuts for each pole.
5. Hand Hole: 3 inches by 5 inches with removable weatherproof cover installed 18
inches above bottom of pole.
B. Aluminum Poles:
1. Manufactured of corrosion-resistant aluminum alloys. Seamless extruded or spun
seamless type with minimum 0.188-inch wall thickness.
2. Shape: Round, Straight.
3. Provide pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis when used
with copper ground wire.
4. Shaft Top: Fitted with cap.
704618 26 50 00
5. Base:
a. Anchor bolt mounted and machined to receive lower end of shaft.
b. Welded joint between shaft and base.
c. Base Cover: Cast aluminum alloy.
d. Hardware, Except Anchor Bolts: either anodized aluminum alloy or
stainless steel.
e. Handhole.
6. Provide pole cast-in-place foundations with galvanized steel anchor bolts, threaded
at the top end and bent 90 degrees at the bottom end.
7. Provide base covers to match pole and galvanized nuts and washers for anchor
bolts.
8. Pole and Bracket Finish: Dark bronze finish to match fixture.
B. Steel Poles:
1. Minimum 11-gauge steel with minimum yield/strength of 48,000 psi and hot-
dipped galvanized factory finish.
2. Provide pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis when used
with copper ground wire.
3. Tapered tubular members, either round in cross section or polygonal.
4. Provide one-piece pole shafts of welded construction with no bolts, rivets, or other
means of fastening except as specifically approved.
5. Pole Markings: Approximately 3 feet to 4 feet above grade and include
manufacturer, year of manufacture, top and bottom diameters, and length.
6. Base Covers: Structural quality hot-rolled carbon steel plate having a minimum
yield of 36,000 psi.
2.8 OBSTRUCTION LIGHTS
1. Cooper/Crouse Hinds.
1. Flight Light Inc.
2. Dialight
B. Obstruction Lights: Weatherproof single or duplex style per plan Drawings.
C. Lamps: LED, minimum 35 candelas, L-810, 120V277V.
D. Photoelectric Cell: Twistlock spring base, 1,500 watts, 120 Volts, range of 0.5 to
3.0 foot-candles mounted on weatherproof bo base with receptacle to receive
photoelectric cell.
E. Toggle Switch: Refer to Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify ceiling types and coordinate with luminaires and accessories.
704618 26 50 00
B. Fit recessed luminaire trims snugly to the mounting surface without light leaks or gaps.
Provide heat-resistant rubber gasketing where necessary.
C. Separately support from structure luminaires installed in lay-in ceilings from two
opposite corners and fasten to grid. Reference Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems.
D. Install luminaires as shown on Drawings; install aligned, aimed, and leveled. Coordinate
aiming of adjustable luminaires with Engineer prior to completion of project.
E. Mark standard luminaires equipped with emergency power with a red adhesive sticker
(not more than 3/8 inch in diameter) mounted on metal door frame.
F. Provide in-line fusing at pole hand hole for pole-mounted luminaires. Reference
Section 26 05 05 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
G. Handle parabolic trim cones and louvers with new, clean white cotton or silk gloves.
Deliver trims in clean, sound condition at completion of project.
H. Leave luminaires clean at time of acceptance of work with lamps operational. Relamp
inoperable lamps at completion of work.
I. Support swinging-type luminaires with a separate safety cable to structure capable of

supporting four times the vertical load.
J. Install underground wiring in conduit with watertight connections. Refer to

Section 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
K. Luminaire Pole Bases: Size and construct as indicated on Drawings. Project anchor bolts
2 inches minimum above base. Install poles on bases plumb; provide shims and double
nuts for adjustment. Grout around pole base.
L. Embedded Luminaire Poles: Depth as recommended by pole manufacturer; install plumb.
M. Use belt slings or non-chafing ropes to raise and set prefinished luminaire poles.
N. Where a ground wire is indicated, connect ground wire to pole and luminaire ground;
otherwise, provide a ground rod at each pole with grounding conductors.
O. Satisfy earthquake zone requirements if earthquake zone is identified on documents.
704618 26 50 00
3.2 INSTALLATION – OBSTRUCTION LIGHTS
A. Install wire so that photoelectric cell energizes and de-energizes the obstruction lights.
B. Install manual switch to bypass photoelectric cell.
A. Place obstruction lights on four corners of the building and around perimeter of building
as shown on plans. Install on 1-1/4-inch rigid galvanized conduit stands projecting 3 feet
above highest portion of roof.
B. Provide single photocell on roof parapet facing north to control all obstruction lights via
Building Management System and a 277V contactor panel with Hand-Off-Auto switch.
C. Provide obstruction lighting automatic monitoring system. Locate monitor in an area that
is generally occupied by the responsible personnel.
704618 26 50 00
WITH BID
26 50 00-01 Luminaires: Complete ITL photometric test Per construction schedule

data for each luminaire formatted in “.ies”
format, including candlepower distribution
curves in two or more planes, candlepower
chart zero to 180 degrees, lumen output zonal
summary chart, average and maximum
brightness data, and coefficients of utilization
for zonal cavity calculations. For outdoor
luminaires include BUG rating and IES
distribution designation.
26 50 00-02 Luminaire: Complete specification including Per construction schedule
metal gauge, dimensions, lens material, and
accessory information.
26 50 00-03 Drivers: Catalog cuts showing type, wiring Per construction schedule
diagram, nominal watts, input voltage,
starting current, input watts, sound rating,
power factor, current crest factor for ballasts,
total harmonic distortion, EMI/RFI rating, and
low temperature characteristics.
26 50 00-04 LED Luminaires: Catalog cut sheets including Per construction schedule
IESNA LM-80 test reports, IESNA TM-21
ratings, operating temperature range,
warranty, rated life, surge protection, thermal
control device,, correlated color temperature,
and color rendering index.
26 50 00-05 Site lighting pole data and catalog cuts, Per construction schedule
including wind loading, complete dimensions,
material weight, and finish.
26 50 00-06 Equipment operation and maintenance Per construction schedule
manuals.
26 50 00-07 Submit sample lighting fixtures of types Per construction schedule
indicated on the Drawings or Schedules.
END OF SECTION
704618 26 50 00
SECTION 26 60 10
HEAT TRACING SYSTEM – ELECTRIC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements for electric heat tracing for the following uses:
1. Freeze protection of piping.
2. Constant temperature process pipe heating.
2. Section 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
3. Section 40 08 25 Insulation.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-conditioning Engineers, Inc.
(ASHRAE)
3. Bill of Material (BOM)
4. Central Processing Unit (CPU)
7. Factory Mutual (FM)
8. Ground fault (GFI)
9. Material Take-off (MTO)
10. Miles per hour (MPH)
14. Piping and instrumentation diagram (P&ID)
A. Provide a complete Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)-listed system of heating cable,

components, and controls to:
1. Prevent pipelines from freezing.
2. Maintain a constant process pipeline temperature.
704618 26 60 10
25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 1 Heat Tracing System – Electric - 1
1.4 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Environmental Conditions: Design the heat tracing systems to the following ambient
conditions:
Location Summer Winter

Indoor 72 degree F dry bulb 68 degrees F
50 percent RH 30 percent RH
Outdoor 93 degree F dry bulb 23 degree F dry bulb
74 degree F wet bulb 120 Max Wind Speed
B. Freeze Protection System:

1. Design Voltage: 277 Vac.
2. Circuit Breaker Size and Loading: 30A not loaded to more that 80 percent (24A
maximum for inrush current).
3. Thermal Rating: Design system based on:
a. Linear heating element installation with no spiral wrap of pipe.
b. Pipe and equipment insulation as specified in
Section 40 08 25 Insulation.
c. Pipe materials as shown on the process and instrumentation diagrams
(P&IDs).
d. Allowance of 10 percent safety factor for calculated heat loss.
e. Maintaining pipe or container contents at 40 degrees F in winter design
ambient temperature and a wind speed of 120 miles per hour (MPH) for
the Project location.
4. Element Length:
a. Select based on pipe lengths shown in the model and not to exceed listed
manufacturer's recommendations for the design voltage.
b. Add additional length to allow for valves, devices, flanges, and pipe
support.
c. Coordinate with the maximum loading allowed on the electrical circuit
breaker
5. Electrical Requirements:
a. Comply with Section 26 05 01 Basic Electrical Requirements, and
b. Install splices and other electrical connections in junction boxes mounted
external to the insulation.
c. Provide necessary electrical and control devices and appurtenances for a
complete and operational system, consistent with the design criteria.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
704618 26 60 10
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. nVent - Tyco/Raychem.
A.B. Chromalox
2.2 HEATING ELEMENTS
A. Low Temperature, Self-regulating:

1. Description: Two copper bus wires embedded in parallel in a self-regulating
polymer core with variable power output responding to temperatures along
length, suitable for direct use on plastic pipe and for self-crossing of the element
without hot spots.
2. Jacket: Radiation cross-linked polyethylene, dielectric rated at 300 Vac at
105 degrees C with outer braid of tinned copper and outer jacket of
fluoropolymer.
3. Operating Voltage: or 208277 Volt, single-phase, 60 Hz.
4. Labeling: Continuously stencil outer jacket with manufacturer's name, catalog
number, nominal supply voltage, and nominal output in watts per foot.
5. Voltage Rating: 1,600-Vac rms for 1-minute duration between parallel
conductors and metallic braid.
6. Output Rating: As listed on the datasheets, watts per foot at 50 degrees F.
7. Continuous Exposure Temperature:
8. Power On: 150 degrees F.
9. Power Off: 185 degrees F.
10. Minimum Installation Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F.
11. Minimum Bending Radius: 1-1/4 inches.
12. T Rating: T6, 185 degrees F.
13. FM Hazard Class: Ordinary hazard.
14. Provide heat trace line power monitoring via data transmitted over the the heat
trace cable.
B. High-Temperature Cable:
1. Description: Self-regulating heating element consisting of two copper bus wires
embedded in parallel in a self-regulating polymer core with variable power
output responding to temperatures along length, suitable for direct use on plastic
pipe and for self-crossing of the element without hot spots.
2. Jacket: Radiation cross-linked polyethylene dielectric rated at 300 Vac at
105 degrees C with outer braid of tinned copper and outer jacket of
fluoropolymer.
3. Operating Voltage: or 208277 Volts, single-phase, 60 Hz.
4. Labeling: Continuously stencil outer jacket with manufacturer's name, catalog
number, nominal supply voltage, and nominal output in watts per foot.
5. Voltage Rating: 1,600-Vac rms for 1-minute duration between parallel
conductors and metallic braid.
6. Output Rating: As listed on the datasheets, watts per foot at 50 degrees F.
7. Continuous Exposure Temperature:
704618 26 60 10
a. Power On: 150 degrees F.
b. Power Off: 185 degrees F.
8. Minimum Installation Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F.
9. Minimum Bending Radius: 1-1/4 inches.
10. T Rating: T3, 380 degrees F.
11. FM Hazard Class: Unclassified.
2.3 CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. General: Complete system to match the operating requirements of the various types of
heat trace system, including all components required.
B. Ambient Sensing Thermostatic Control:

1. Thermostat Type: Mechanical.
2. Enclosure National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Rating: 1 to
match location and area hazard.
3. Temperature Range: 35 to 250 degrees F.
4. Operating Differential: 5 to 8 degrees F.
5. Voltage Rating: To match circuit voltage.
6. Switch Rating: To match circuit amperes.
7. Switch Type: SP-DT.
8. Sensing Bulb: Stainless steel.
9. Maximum Bulb Temperature: 600 degrees F.
10. Enclosure: Cast aluminum.
C. Pipeline Sensing Thermostatic Control:

1. Thermostat Type: Electronic, resistance temperature detector (RTD) sensing.
2. Enclosure NEMA Rating: 1 to match location and area hazard.
4. Operating Differential: 4 degrees F.
5. Repeatability: Plus or minus 1 percent of span.
6. Voltage Rating: To match circuit voltage.
7. Switch Rating: To match circuit amperes.
8. Switch Type: SP-ST.
9. RTD: Platinum, 1,000-ohm resistance.
10. Maximum Bulb Temperature: 900 degrees F.
11. Enclosure: Polycarbonate.
D. Electronic Heat Tracing Monitoring System:

1. Description: Complete electronic monitoring system, including control panel,
controller, and appurtenances.
2. Monitoring Capacity: 12 circuits.
3. Supply Voltage: 120 Vac.
4. Power Consumption: 8 watts.
5. Operating Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 165 degrees F.
6. Circuit Input Impedance: 50,000 ohms.
7. Alarm Mode:
a. Alarm Conditions: Circuit fault, direct current (DC) power loss, Central
Processing Unit (CPU) fail.
704618 26 60 10
b. Circuit Alarm Threshold Range: 70 to 300 Vac.
c. Alarm Output: 120/240 Vac, 1-ampere resistive.
d. Alarm Time Delay: 3 seconds.
e. Re-alarm Timer Range: Manufacturer's standard.
8. Enclosure: Formed aluminum.
9. Control Panel: NEMA 1 for indoor locations of ordinary hazard class, and
NEMA 3R or 4 for outdoor locations of ordinary hazard class, with hinged and
key-locked door.
E. Microprocessor Heat Tracing Control and Monitoring System:

1. Description: Complete panel face-mounted, microprocessor-based control and
monitoring module with temperature sensors and control panel.
2. Monitoring and Control Capacity: 10 circuits.
3. Supply Voltage: 120 Vac.
4. Power Consumption: 40 watts.
5. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 160 degrees F.
6. Relative Humidity Range: 0 to 90 percent.
7. Data Retention: Nonvolatile EEPROM not requiring battery backup.
8. Security: Key-lock access required to change parameters; not for routine
surveillance or alarm acknowledgment.
9. Input Sensor: Three-wire, 100-ohm platinum RTD for each circuit.
10. Output:
a. Control: Replaceable 30-ampere, 120-Vac or 240-Vac SPST mechanical
relays.
b. Alarm: 10-ampere, 120/240-Vac single-pole, double-throw (SPDT)
common mechanical relay.
11. Approvals: CSA, FM.
13. Control Dead Band: 3 degrees F.
14. Alarm Monitors: Ground fault alarm for each circuit for ground leakage of
50 mA or more.
15. Chassis: Formed aluminum.
16. Control Functions:
a. On/off control.
b. Digital temperature display.
c. Alarms for high temperature, low temperature, and damaged sensor.
d. Minimum and maximum temperature in given time period.
e. Data entry through nine-key tactile feel mechanical switch key pad.
17. Enclosure: Formed aluminum.
18. Control Panel: NEMA 1 for indoor locations of ordinary hazard class and
NEMA 3R or 4 for outdoor locations of ordinary hazard class, with hinged and
key-locked door.
704618 26 60 10
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that preparation work required before execution of work specified in this Section
has been completed and is acceptable.
B. Notify CH2M in writing describing conditions that are not acceptable for execution of
work specified in this Section.
3.2 FIELD PREPARATION
A. Test piping systems and accept prior to start of heat tracing.
B. For thermoplastic piping, cover piping with aluminized tape prior to application of the
thermal element.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install electric heat tracing system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions
and NEC Article 427.
B. Apply heating cable linearly on pipe and secure to pipe using straps, cable ties, or
polyester tape.
C. Contain splices and other electrical connections in junction boxes mounted external to the
insulation.
D. Test heat tracing using a 1,000-Vdc Megger to verify minimum insulation resistance is 10
to 1,000 megohms, regardless of length, but do not exceed manufacturer’s
recommendations.
E. Apply insulation per Sections 40 08 25 Insulation.
F. Apply electric-traced signs to the outside of the thermal insulation.
A. Functional Tests: Conduct on each tracing circuit assisted by the manufacturer's

representative as follows:
1. Verify power is available to each circuit and control panel.
2. Simulate each function specified for control panels. Perform under actual or
approved simulated operating conditions.
3. Provide written report and certification that systems function per design intent.
A. Include the following minimum service requirements in the Bid. Exclude travel time.
704618 26 60 10
1. 1 man-days for training of Owner's personnel for startup, operation, and
maintenance.
2. 3 man-days for installation assistance, functional testing, and certification of the
installation.
3. 2 man-days for startup assistance.
WITH BID

26 60 10-02 Electrical characteristics (wattage, voltage, X
etc.).
26 60 10-03 Materials description for all components, X
including thermostats and controls.
26 60 10-04 Heating capability and limitations. X
26 60 10-05 Installation recommendations. Per construction schedule
26 60 10-06 Description of system operations. Per construction schedule
26 60 10-07 Connection details. Per construction schedule
26 60 10-08 Wiring diagrams. Per construction schedule
END OF SECTION
704618 26 60 10
SECTION 26 60 20
OEM ELECTRIC MOTORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install electric motors which
are provided as drivers for equipment that is normally assembled for off-the-shelf
availability.
1.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Provide motors with the following design criteria:

1. High-efficiency design.
2. Ball and roller-type bearings with an Anti-friction Bearing Manufacturers
Association (AFBMA) L-10 life of 40,000 hours.
3. Minimum insulation class of F.
4. Lowest possible motor speed.
5. Maximum locked rotor code of six times FLA.
6. Service factor of 1.15 in general based on ambient temperature of 40 degrees C, a
service factor of 1.0 for inverter rated motors.
7. Low starting current National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA)Type B.
8. Overcome motor starting load inertia. Accelerate the load to rated speed under
both rated and at 10 percent reduced voltage conditions during starting without
excessive heating.
9. Size motors for the altitude at which they are being installed.
10. Rate motors to operate on an engine-generator set.
11. If indicated on the datasheet, apply an epoxy dip on windings for outdoor
application.
B. Provide motor enclosures and junction boxes suitable for the area electrical classification
listed for the driven equipment.
C. Inverter-rate three-phase motors in adjustable frequency drive applications with 1,600V

surge insulation per NEMA MG 1 and provide insulated bearings.
1.3 REFERENCES

1. Anti-friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA)
704618 26 60 20
20 DECEMBER 2018 – Rev. 1 OEM Electric Motors - 1
6. Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
1.4 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
(National Electric Code - NEC), as applicable. Where required by authority having
jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally
recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, in order to
B.A. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by
D.B. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment,
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. OEM manufacturer's standard supplier.
B. When alternates are available, provide the following manufacturers:

1. Baldor.
3. Toshiba.
4. Leeson.
5. Siemens.
6. U.S. Motors
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
704618 26 60 20
WITH BID
26 60 20-01 Rating of each motor. X

26 60 20-02 Motor manufacturer and model. X
26 60 20-03 Motor efficiency at half load and at full load. X
26 60 20-04 L-10 life of bearings provided. X
26 60 20-05 Make and model of bearings. X
26 60 20-06 Service factor and insulation class. X
END OF SECTION
704618 26 60 20
SECTION 27 00 10
GENERAL COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: General requirements specifically applicable to

Division 27 Communications requirements.
B. The Contractor is responsible for:

1. Furnishing materials, labor, and equipment in accordance with these
Specifications and the accompanying Drawings.
3. Coordinating the details of facility equipment and construction for other
specification divisions that affect the communications system work covered
under this division.
4. Furnishing and installing incidental items not actually shown or specified, but
which are required by good practice to provide complete functional systems.
C. Intent of Drawings: Communication Plan Drawings show only general locations of

raceways, cable tray, equipment, and devices, unless specifically dimensioned.
D. Schedules: Detailed schedules, provided as reference documentation, refer to product

types and identification information noted within the applicable specification sections. In
addition, schedules may be used by the Contractor as a submittal showing final
installation and test results.
1.2 REFERENCES

4. Electronics Industry Association (EIA)
5. Fiber Optic Distribution Unit (FDU)
6. Horizontal cross connect (HC)
7. Horizontal distribution terminal (HDT)
9. Local area network (LAN)
10. Data Center (DC)
13. Satellite communications cabinet (SCC)
14. Satellite communications room (SCR)
15. Telecommunications outlet (TO)
704618 27 00 10
25 OCTOBER 2018 – Rev. 0 General Communications Requirements – 1
16. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)
18. Unshielded twisted pair (UTP)
19. Wide area network (WAN)
B. Definitions:
1. Active Equipment: Electronic equipment used to develop various wide area
network (WAN), local area network (LAN) services, and telephony services
(e.g., digital multiplexers, RS 232 controllers, Ethernet wiring hubs, PBX
switches).
2. Backbone Media: The portion of the communications wiring system that
interconnects communications rooms and entrance facilities; includes cabling and
mechanical termination at the cross connects.
3. Backbone Pathways: Raceway, sleeves, cable tray, and other facilities used for
the installation of backbone media.
4. Data Centers (DCs): Room(s) within B301 FAB building used to house server
equipment racks as well as distribute communications services to satellite
communications rooms (SCRs) and satellite communications cabinets (SCCs) in
the B301 FAB and B300 CUP buildings. Room(s) also serve as the WAN
interconnect point to the existing campus via the FAB Server Room and the Main
Server Room within existing buildings on campus – as indicated on plans and
one-line diagrams. The DCs will contain passive equipment used for electrical
protection (protectors) and building cross connect. The DCs may also include a
dedicated row of active equipment used for LAN and serve the functions of an
SCR.
5. Campus: Buildings and grounds of a multibuilding complex (e.g., university,
industrial park, or military establishment).
6. Channel: The end-to-end transmission path between two points at which
application-specific equipment is connected; may include one or more links,
cross connect jumpers and/or patch cords, and work area station cords, but does
not include connection to active equipment.
7. Communications Rooms: Collective term used to describe DCs, SCRs, and
SCCs.
8. Consolidation Point (CPs): A location for interconnection between horizontal
cables extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into
outlet pathways.
9. Cross Connect: Group of wall or rack-mounted connection points (e.g., wiring
blocks or fiber optic distribution units (FDUs) used to terminate and administer
building cabling).
10. Cross Connections: Jumpers and/or patch cords to join communications circuits
at the cross connect.
11. Fiber Optic Distribution Unit (FDU): Wall- or rack-mounted cross-connect used
to terminate and administer fiber optic cabling. Also known as optical fiber cross
connect.
12. Horizontal Cross Connect (HC): A cross-connect of horizontal cabling to other
cabling or equipment.
13. Horizontal Distribution Terminal (HDT): Wiring block housed in a hinged cover
enclosure which provides a transition connection between unshielded twisted pair
704618 27 00 10
(UTP) cables running to the serving communication room and UTP cables
running to telecommunications outlets (TOs) in the work area.
14. Horizontal Media: Portion of the communications wiring system that extends
from SCRs or SCCs to the TO at the work area; includes cabling, TOs, and
mechanical cable termination at the cross connect and the TO.
15. Horizontal Pathways: Raceway, cable tray, access floors, and underfloor facilities
used for the installation of horizontal media.
16. Jack: Receptacle used in conjunction with a plug to make electrical contact
between communications circuits (e.g., eight-position/eight-contact modular
jacks).
17. Link: A transmission path between two points, not including terminal equipment,
work area cables, and equipment cables; one continuous section of conductors or
fiber, including the connecting hardware at each end.
18. Local Area Network (LAN): Data transmission facilities connecting a number of
communicating devices (e.g., serial data, Ethernet, token ring, FDDI). Typically,
the network is limited to a single premise.
19. Optical Fiber Cross Connect: See FDU.
20. Passive Equipment: Nonelectronic hardware and apparatus (e.g., equipment
racks, cable trays, electrical protection, wiring blocks, FDUs).
21. Patch Cords: Length of copper or fiber cable with connectors at each end used to
join communications circuits at a cross connect.
22. Pathways: Raceway, sleeves, cable tray, access floors, underfloor systems, and
other facilities used for the installation of communications media.
23. Protectors: Electrical protective devices used to protect against hazards, such as
contact with electrical circuits, lightning, and above-normal voltages induced by
high currents on power circuits in proximity to a metallic communications
circuit.
24. Raceways: Enclosed channel designed expressly for holding wires and cables
(e.g., conduit, surface raceways, and wireways).
25. Satellite Communications Cabinet (SCC): Cabinet or group of cabinets which
may serve the same purpose as an SCR.
26. Satellite Communications Room (SCR): Room used to distribute
communications services to work areas and to interconnect with the DC. The
SCR contains passive equipment used for cross connect and also includes active
network equipment used for LANs. Also contains passive equipment used for
telephone cross connects between the backbone and horizontal cabling.
27. Telecommunications Outlet (TO): Connecting device, consisting of a faceplate
with jacks, mounted in a work area to interconnect horizontal cabling with station
equipment.
28. Wide Area Network (WAN): Active communications transmission facilities
extending beyond the premises.
29. Wiring Block: Punchdown terminating equipment used to terminate twisted-pair
cross-connect facilities.
30. Work Area: A building space where users interact with communications terminal
equipment.
704618 27 00 10
1. Materials, equipment, and methods are to conform to the requirements of the
following communications standards:
a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Electronics Industry
Association (EIA) / Telecommunications Industry Association
(TIA) 568-B-2001, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard.
b. ANSI / EIA / TIA 569-A-1998, Commercial Building Standard for
Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
c. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) 802.3,
Standard for Ethernet Connection through Coaxial, Twisted-pair, and
Fiber Media.
d. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), NFPA 70 National
Electrical Code (NEC) Article 725, Signal Circuits.
e. NEC Article 770, Optical Fiber Cables.
f. NEC Article 800, Communication Circuits.
g. Standards related to or referenced by the standards listed above.
A. The communications distribution system consists of six major subsystems:

1. Backbone Pathways: Interbuilding and intrabuilding facilities, such as raceways
and cable tray, used by the backbone communications distribution subsystem, to
interconnect common carrier service providers and communications rooms.
2. Horizontal Pathways: Intrabuilding facilities such as raceways and cable tray
used by the horizontal communications distribution subsystem to connect SCRs,
SCCs, and CPs with TOs located at the work area.
3. Communications Room Distribution Subsystem: DC, SCR and SCC passive
equipment installations used to distribute communications services.
4. Backbone Communications Distribution Subsystem: Interbuilding and
intrabuilding backbone transmission media and cable terminations.
5. Horizontal Communications Distribution Subsystem: Intrabuilding horizontal
transmission media, TOs, and cable terminations. Used by the horizontal
communications distribution subsystem to connect SCRs, SCCs and CPs with
TOs located at the work area.
6. Work Area Communications Distribution Subsystem: Special-use telephones and
components used to interconnect TOs and station equipment.
1.4 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. The following are incorporated into the design:

1. The communications equipment room installations are designed to be as similar
as possible.
2. Electrical protection is provided for underground and outdoor copper cabling.
3. The zoning of SCRs and SCCs is intended to restrict the maximum physical
horizontal wiring length between cross connects and a served TO to 295 feet.
B. Compliance by the Contractor with the provisions of this specification does not relieve
them of the responsibilities of furnishing equipment and materials of proper design,
704618 27 00 10
mechanically and electrically suited to meet operating guarantees at the specified service
conditions.
C. Electrical components and systems manufactured within the scope of Underwriters

Laboratories Inc. (UL) to conform to the UL standards, and be UL-listed and labeled with
an applied UL listing mark.
D. Corrosive areas are designated on the Drawings. Raceways, elbows, fittings, couplings,
junction boxes, and pull boxes to be of materials specified hereafter. NEMA 4X or
Electrical Equipment Manufacturers Association of Canada (EEMAC) as applicable
enclosures to be used for all electrical equipment and devices. Other devices and
materials to be labeled as suitable for installation in a corrosive environment.
E. Hazardous areas are designated on the Drawings. Provide devices, materials, and
construction that will ensure safe performance under conditions of proper use and
maintenance.
F. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment,
or application. Validate when used in extreme climate areas.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
National Electric Code (NEC). Where required by authority having jurisdiction (AHJ),
material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, in order to provide a basis for
approval under the above listed agency.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The Contractor is to have a minimum of 3 years of documented experience performing

cable placement, splicing, termination, connecting, and testing for each of the types of
704618 27 00 10
media or system component specified in the Contract Documents (e.g., Category 5e UTP,
Category 6A UTP, multimode fiber, single-mode fiber). In the case of newer
technologies that do not have a 3-year history, the Contractor is to have documented
experience for at least half of the lifetime of the new technology.
B. Additional WAN and LAN Qualifications: Minimum of 6 years’ successful business

experience in design and installation of systems like the type specified.
C. Category 5e and 6A UTP and Fiber Optic Cable Technicians: Documented training
and/or certification for the types of media and connectors specified.
D. Project Manager, Engineers, Supervisors, and Principal Skilled Technicians: Minimum

6 years’ experience in like work.
A. Conformance to the latest codes and other legal requirements is the responsibility of the
Contractor.
B. Obtain permits and arrange inspections required by codes applicable to this Section and
submit written evidence to CH2M that the required permits, inspections, and code
C. Communications cables are to conform to NEC Article 725, Signal Circuits and
NEC Article 800, Communication Circuits as applicable.
D. Fiber optic communications cables are to conform to NEC Article 770, Optical Fiber
Cables.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of equipment specified in this Section with other trades to avoid
interference with work of other trades.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provided materials and equipment are to be labeled and/or listed as acceptable to the AHJ
as suitable for the use intended.
B. Provide manufacturer's standard finish color, except where specific color is indicated.
704618 27 00 10
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP
A. Install system components under the direction of qualified personnel so appearance and
workmanship meets or exceeds industry standards.
B. Install and test cable, material, and equipment in accordance with manufacturers'
instructions.
C. Coordinate work with equipment suppliers and other contractors.
A. Continuous operation of the Owner's existing systems and public utility systems is of
critical importance.
B. Connections to existing services or utilities or other work that requires the temporary
shutdown of any existing operations or utilities is to be planned in detail with appropriate
scheduling of the work and coordinated with the Owner.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION REVIEW
A. CH2M will review and observe installation work to identify discrepancies by the
Contractor with requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Review, observation, assistance, and actions by CH2M is not be construed as undertaking

supervisory control of the work, or of methods and means employed by the Contractor.
The CH2M's review and observation activities does not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibilities of these Contract Documents.
C. The fact that CH2M does not make early discovery of faulty or omitted work does not bar
CH2M from subsequently rejecting this work and identifying the need for the Contractor
to make the necessary corrections.
D. Regardless of when discovery and rejection are made, and regardless of when the
Contractor is ordered to correct such work, the Contractor is not to claim against CH2M
for an increase in the Contract price, or for any payment on account of increased cost,
damage, or loss.
704618 27 00 10
WITH BID
27 00 10-01 General: Component datasheets for Per construction schedule

material and equipment items.
Manufacturer's standardized schematic
diagrams and catalog cuts are not
acceptable unless applicable portions are
clearly indicated and nonapplicable
portions clearly deleted or crossed out.
Installation is not to proceed until CH2M
has reviewed submittals for general
conformance with the intent of the
specifications, and specific conformance
with the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
704618 27 00 10
SECTION 27 05 28
COMMUNICATIONS INNERDUCT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: This Section specifies the requirements necessary to furnish and install
communications innerduct and fittings.
2. Section 07 84 00 Firestopping.
1.2 REFERENCES

2. High density polyethylene (HDPE)
5. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
B. Reference Standards:
1. UL 94V-O.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.

704618 27 05 28
9 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 Communications Innerduct - 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 INNERDUCT
A. Fabric Innerduct:
1. Multiple fabric pockets sewn together to form separate pulling channels for
cable.
2. Pull Tape:
a. Required within each innerduct pocket
b. With printed, accurate sequential footage marks
3. Standard Outdoor Innerduct:
a. 3-inch, 3-cell polyester/nylon textile innerduct containing 1250 lbs
polyester flat woven pull tape within each cell.
4. Indoor Textile Innerduct (Riser-listed):
a. 3-inch, 3-cell nylon textile innerduct containing 1250 lbs polyester flat
woven pull tape within each cell.
5. Plenum-Listed Textile Innerduct:
a. 3-inch, 3-cell nylon textile innerduct containing 200 lbs nylon-resin flat
woven pull tape within each cell which meets UL2024A for flame
propagation and smoke density values for use in air handling spaces.
2.2 PENETRATION SEALING MATERIALS
A. Duct Water Seal: Product suitable for closing underground and entrance conduit openings
where innerduct or cable is installed to prevent the entry of gases, liquids, or rodents into
the structure.
B. Firestopping: Intumescent fire barrier penetration sealing materials such as those offered
by STI, 3M or Nelson.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Protect products from the effects of moisture, corrosion, and physical damage during
construction. Except during installation activity in a section, keep openings in conduit,
wireway, and innerduct capped with manufactured seals.
3.2 TYPE TO BE USED
A. Underslab and Underground Raceways: Nonrated indoor/outdoor innerduct.
704618 27 05 28
B. Above-Ground Raceways, Exterior and Interior: Nonrated indoor/outdoor innerduct.
C. Interior Exposed Locations, Including Cable Tray Installations:

1. Non-plenum Areas: Riser-rated indoor innerduct.
2. Plenum Areas: Plenum-listed innerduct.
D. Note: In case of conflict between this Section and the drawings or schedules, request
clarification from CH2M HILL.
3.3 INNERDUCT INSTALLATION
A. Refer also to manufacturer’s installation guidelines.
B. Pull innerduct through conduit and wireways, or place innerduct in cable trays using
continuous un-spliced lengths of innerduct between manholes, pull boxes, and/or section
termination points.
C. Cut innerduct square; remove frayed ends.
D. Bring innerduct to the shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely.
E. Provide suitable innerduct slack in manholes, handholes, pull boxes, and at turns to
ensure that there is no kinking or binding of the tubing.
F. Make changes in direction of communications innerduct runs with sweeps of the longest
possible radius and at least 10 times the outside diameter of the largest outside diameter
backbone cable planned as part of this project.
G. During innerduct placement avoid excessive tension which can damage the fabric
innerduct. Inspect the innerduct following placement and replace any damaged sections.
H. Innerduct Mountings, Hangers, and Attachments: When exposed indoors or in manholes,

hold innerduct firmly in place using independent support.
1. Install straps, hangers, and other similar fittings adequate to support loads and so
as not to damage innerduct.
2. Do not fasten innerduct supports to steam pipes, water pipes, duct work, ceiling
grid support wires, or other utilities.
3. Do not allow innerduct sag to contact the ceiling grid or light fixtures.
I. Underground Conduit Installation: After innerduct is installed in conduit entering

structures, seal all openings inside conduit around innerduct at first box or outlet to
prevent the entrance of gases, liquids, or rodents into the structure. Use suitable plastic-
expandable compound (e.g., duct water seal).
J. Indoor Conduit Installation:

1. Arrange innerduct neatly, cut to proper length, and remove surplus. Provide
trained and bundled innerduct pigtails extending at least 18 inches beyond
exposed conduit openings.
704618 27 05 28
2. At locations where the ends of innerduct sections appear in a pull box, join the
pull tape.
K. Record lengths at the time of installation from the pull tapes and provide on as-built
documentation.
L. Following innerduct installation, secure each pull tape with minimum of 3’-0” length to
ensure future usability.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Seal all conduit and textile innerduct entering structures at the first box or outlet to
prevent entrance into the structure of gases, liquids or rodents.
B. Inspect fire stopping installation by others between building structure and conduit, wire
way, and cable tray to verify integrity of installation.
C. Exposed Textile Innerduct Penetrations: Install conduit sleeves or fire barrier sealing
systems in all openings where open and exposed textile innerduct passes through fire-
rated walls and floors. After installation, install intumescent fire barrier penetration
sealing material between textile innerduct and sleeves or fire barrier system.
D. Raceway Penetrations: After textile innerduct installation, install intumescent fire barrier
penetration sealing material between textile innerduct and conduit or wire way at all
exposed penetration locations.
E. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage during water seal or firestop installation. Repair
any damage.
F. Refer to Section 07 84 00 Firestopping for additional firestopping requirements.

WITH BID
27 05 28-01 Manufacturer’s cutsheets, clearly indicating X Per construction schedule

specific products proposed for use. Include
actual inside and outside dimensions, and UL
listing if applicable to inside plant
applications
END OF SECTION
704618 27 05 28
SECTION 27 05 53
COMMUNICATIONS IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. This Section specifies the requirements necessary to furnish and install
communications labeling and marking for:
a. Innerduct.
b. Cable.
c. Equipment.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. Data Center (DC)
3. Local Area Network (LAN)
4. Satellite Communications Room (SCR)
5. Satellite Communications Cabinet (SCC)
6. Telecommunication Outlet (TO)
B. References Standard:
1. ANSI/TIA-606-C
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Nameplates: Engraved laminated plastic, minimum 3/16-inch-high letters on a

contrasting background.
B. Cable Labels: Flexible tabs permanently attached to cable by adhesive, clear plastic
jacket, and/or plastic tie-wraps.
704618 27 05 53
25 OCTOBER 2018 – Rev. 0 Communications Identification - 1
C. Wiring Block Labels: Cardboard-like strips that slip inside clear plastic holders located
on protector panels and wiring blocks.
D. Fiber Optic Distribution Unit Labels: Labels may be provided with the equipment or
added using adhesive-attached card holders or plastic strips.
E. Telecommunication Outlet (TO) Labels: Rectangular-shaped adhesive-backed tabs.
F. Miscellaneous Labels: Adhesive-backed tabs or plastic tape that are applied to smooth
surfaces to identify materials and equipment. Identification plates and labels to be
attached to avoid removal or shifting through accidental contact, normal activity,
environmental conditions, or material aging. Adhesives to be permanent, i.e., they are to
provide a secure bond that does not become loose due to aging or interaction with the
surface or environment. Non-engraved labels to be machine-printed in non-fading
permanent ink that distinctly contrasts to the background material; handwritten marking
is not permitted. Lettering to be in uppercase unless specifically noted otherwise in the
Drawings and Schedules.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates or labels.
B. Install equipment identification parallel to equipment lines and visible from 3 feet.
C. Install cable labels at both ends of each cable, near end of sheath, such that tracing is
readily performed.
D. Secure nameplates using screws, rivets, or suitable adhesive.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Innerduct: Provide labels for each innerduct at terminating ends and at other exposed
appearances (e.g., building entrance locations, manholes, handholes, pull boxes). At
minimum, each label must include far-end and unique innerduct identifiers. Other
exposed appearances, as described here, shall include the termination information for
both termination ends of the labeled innerduct.
B. Backbone Cable: Provide labels for backbone cables at each splice or terminating end for
each twisted-pair and fiber optic cable and at other exposed appearances (e.g., building
entrance locations, manholes, handholes). At minimum, each label to include near-end
and far-end identifiers plus cable type and pair/strand numbers. Other exposed
appearances, as described here, shall include the termination information for both
termination ends of the labeled cable.
C. Horizontal Cable: Label horizontal cables to identify the unique TO jack identification
number.
704618 27 05 53
D. TO: Label each TO with a unique identifying number as shown on the Schedules and
Drawings.
E. Equipment Racks and Mountings: Label each equipment rack and mounting using
nameplates or approved labels.
F. Wiring Blocks:
1. Label wiring block terminations using the following color-coded inserts to
identify the type of media or equipment terminated:
Termination Color
Horizontal TO cabling Blue
Data Center (DC) campus/backbone cabling White
Satellite Communications Room (SCR) and Satellite Gray
Communications Cabinet (SCC) backbone/riser cabling
Local exchange carrier cabling Green
PBX and other common equipment cabling Purple
Local area network (LAN), auxiliary circuits, etc. Yellow
Transmission electronics equipment cabling Orange
2. Identify backbone cable wiring block positions with the cable number and pair
numbers.
3. Identify horizontal wiring block positions with the unique TO jack identification
numbers.
G. Modular Jack Panel:

1. Identify horizontal modular jack panel ports with the unique TO identification
numbers.
2. Identify equipment modular jack panel ports with the specified equipment unit
identification numbers.
H. Fiber Optic Distribution Unit (FDU): In addition to the cable labeling, label FDUs to
identify the termination connector assignments including cable number and strand count
shown on cable schedules. This identification to be in summary form on one label.
I. Active Equipment: Label active equipment by placing adhesive-backed labels with

specified identifiers on the front of each equipment chassis in the most visible, least
obtrusive location. Owner furnished, Owner installed network equipment labeling to be
Owner provided.
J. Patch Cord Cross Connects: Label copper and fiber-optic patch cords at each end
between 3 inches and 12 inches from the cable end. Label patch cord cables to identify a
unique cable number comprised of the terminating and equipment identifier. Owner
furnished, Owner installed cross connect patch cord labeling to be Owner provided.
704618 27 05 53
WITH BID
27 05 53-01 Provide a complete identification plan. Within 30 days after award of

Communications identification plan to include Contract, but no later than
the following specifics for each label type: 60 days prior to first installation
Material, dimensions, background color, letter
typeface and size, letter color, label format,
attachment method, and placement on labeled
item. Submittal to also include samples of
each label type.
END OF SECTION
704618 27 05 53
SECTION 27 10 10
BASIC COMMUNICATIONS MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: General requirements specifically applicable to Division 27

communications requirements.

1. Furnishing materials, labor, and equipment in accordance with this Section and
the accompanying Drawings.
3. Coordinating the details of facility equipment and construction for other
specification divisions that affect the communications system work covered
under this Division.
which are required by good practice to provide complete functional systems.
C. Intent of Drawings: Communication plan Drawings show only general locations of

raceways, cable tray, equipment, and devices, unless specifically dimensioned.
D. This Section specifies the requirements necessary to furnish, install, identify, and test
products and materials listed below:
1. Communications raceway, surface raceway, and cable tray.
2. Communication manholes.
3. Communication handholes.
4. Innerduct.
5. Communication backboard.
6. Equipment racks and cabinets.
7. Protector panels and protectors.
8. Wiring block systems.
9. Modular patch panels.
10. Fiber optic distribution units (FDUs).
11. Cable management accessories.
12. Ground busbar hardware.
13. Equipment rack and cabinet ground bars.
14. Telecommunications outlet faceplates and jacks.
15. Unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable.
16. Multi-pair backbone cable.
17. Fiber optic cable.
18. Fiber optic connectors.
19. Ground wire.
20. Fiber Optic and UTP Patch Cords.
21. Communication identification.
704618 Basic Communications Materials and Methods

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 1
22. Communications system testing (test result form provided as Appendix to this
Section):
a. On-the-reel fiber optic cable testing (Section 27 10 20.14 – On-the-Reel
Fiber Optic Cable Test Summary).
b. Backbone UTP cable system testing (Section 27 10 20.11 – Backbone
UTP Cable Summary).
c. Horizontal UTP cable system testing (Section 27 10 20.13 – Horizontal
UTP Cable Schedule and Test Summary).
d. Fiber optic cable system testing (Section 27 10 20.12 – Post-Installation
Fiber Optic Cable Test Summary, and Section 27 10 20.15 – Fiber Optic
Attenuation Performance Test).
E. Schedules: Detailed schedules, provided as reference documents, include product type

and identification. These same schedules may be used as a submittal showing final
installation and test results. The following schedules are provided:
1. Backbone cable (on Drawings).
2. Horizontal cable.
F. Related Sections:
1. Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork.
2. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
3. Appendices attached to end of this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Active Equipment: Electronic equipment used to develop various wide area network
(WAN), local area network (LAN) services, and telephony services (e.g., digital
multiplexers, RS 232 controllers, Ethernet wiring hubs, PBX switches).
B. Backbone Media: The portion of the communications wiring system that interconnects
communications rooms and entrance facilities; includes cabling and mechanical
termination at the cross connects.
C. Backbone Pathways: Raceway, sleeves, cable tray, and other facilities used for the
installation of backbone media.
D. Data Centers (DCs): Room(s) within B301 FAB building used to house server equipment
racks as well as distribute communications services to satellite communications rooms
(SCRs) and satellite communications cabinets (SCCs) in the B301 FAB and B300 CUP
buildings. Room(s) also serve as the WAN interconnect point to the existing campus via
the FAB Server Room and the Main Server Room within existing buildings on campus –
as indicated on plans and one-line diagrams. The DCs will contain passive equipment
used for electrical protection (protectors) and building cross connect. The DCs may also
include a dedicated row of active equipment used for LAN and serve the functions of an
SCR.
E. Campus: Buildings and grounds of a multibuilding complex (e.g., university, industrial

park, or military establishment).

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 2
F. Channel: The end-to-end transmission path between two points at which application-
specific equipment is connected; may include one or more links, cross connect jumpers
and/or patch cords, and work area station cords, but does not include connection to active
equipment.
G. Communications Rooms: Collective term used to describe DCs, SCRs, and SCCs.
H. Consolidation Point (CPs): A location for interconnection between horizontal cables

extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into outlet pathways.
I. Cross Connect: Group of wall or rack-mounted connection points (e.g., wiring blocks or
fiber optic distribution units (FDUs) used to terminate and administer building cabling).
J. Cross Connections: Jumpers and/or patch cords to join communications circuits at the
cross connect.
K. Fiber Optic Distribution Unit (FDU): Wall- or rack-mounted cross-connect used to

terminate and administer fiber optic cabling. Also known as optical fiber cross connect.
L. Horizontal Cross Connect (HC): A cross-connect of horizontal cabling to other cabling or

equipment.
M. Horizontal Distribution Terminal (HDT): Wiring block housed in a hinged cover

enclosure which provides a transition connection between unshielded twisted pair (UTP)
cables running to the serving communication room and UTP cables running to
telecommunications outlets (TOs) in the work area.
N. Horizontal Media: Portion of the communications wiring system that extends from SCRs
or SCCs to the TO at the work area; includes cabling, TOs, and mechanical cable
termination at the cross connect and the TO.
O. Horizontal Pathways: Raceway, cable tray, access floors, and underfloor facilities used
for the installation of horizontal media.
P. Jack: Receptacle used in conjunction with a plug to make electrical contact between
communications circuits (e.g., eight-position/eight-contact modular jacks).
Q. Link: A transmission path between two points, not including terminal equipment, work
area cables, and equipment cables; one continuous section of conductors or fiber,
including the connecting hardware at each end.
R. Local Area Network (LAN): Data transmission facilities connecting a number of

communicating devices (e.g., serial data, Ethernet, token ring, FDDI). Typically, the
network is limited to a single premise.
S. Optical Fiber Cross Connect: See FDU.
T. Passive Equipment: Nonelectronic hardware and apparatus (e.g., equipment racks, cable
trays, electrical protection, wiring blocks, FDUs).

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 3
U. Patch Cords: Length of copper or fiber cable with connectors at each end used to join
communications circuits at a cross connect.
V. Pathways: Raceway, sleeves, cable tray, access floors, underfloor systems, and other
facilities used for the installation of communications media.
W. Protectors: Electrical protective devices used to protect against hazards, such as contact
with electrical circuits, lightning, and above-normal voltages induced by high currents on
power circuits in proximity to a metallic communications circuit.
X. Raceways: Enclosed channel designed expressly for holding wires and cables (e.g.,
conduit, surface raceways, and wireways).
Y. Satellite Communications Cabinet (SCC): Cabinet or group of cabinets which may serve
the same purpose as an SCR.
Z. Satellite Communications Room (SCR): Room used to distribute communications

services to work areas and to interconnect with the DC. The SCR contains passive
equipment used for cross connect and also includes active network equipment used for
LANs. Also contains passive equipment used for telephone cross connects between the
backbone and horizontal cabling.
AA. Telecommunications Outlet (TO): Connecting device, consisting of a faceplate with

jacks, mounted in a work area to interconnect horizontal cabling with station equipment.
BB. Wide Area Network (WAN): Active communications transmission facilities extending
beyond the premises.
CC. Wiring Block: Punchdown terminating equipment used to terminate twisted-pair cross-
connect facilities.
DD. Work Area: A building space where users interact with communications terminal
equipment.
A. The communications distribution system consists of six major subsystems:

1. Backbone Pathways: Interbuilding and intrabuilding facilities, such as raceways
and cable tray, used by the backbone communications distribution subsystem, to
interconnect common carrier service providers and communications rooms.
2. Horizontal Pathways: Intrabuilding facilities such as raceways and cable tray
used by the horizontal communications distribution subsystem to connect SCRs,
SCCs, and CPs with TOs located at the work area.
3. Communications Room Distribution Subsystem: DC, SCR and SCC passive
equipment installations used to distribute communications services.
4. Backbone Communications Distribution Subsystem: Interbuilding and
intrabuilding backbone transmission media and cable terminations.
5. Horizontal Communications Distribution Subsystem: Intrabuilding horizontal
transmission media, TOs, and cable terminations. Used by the horizontal

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 4
communications distribution subsystem to connect SCRs, SCCs and CPs with
TOs located at the work area.
6. Work Area Communications Distribution Subsystem: Special-use telephones and
components used to interconnect TOs and station equipment.
1.4 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Materials, equipment, and methods shall conform to the requirements of the following
communications standards:
1. ANSI / TIA-568-C.0-2009, TIA Standard – Generic Telecommunications
Cabling for Customer Premises.
2. ANSI / TIA-568-C.1-2009, TIA Standard – Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling Standard.
3. ANSI / TIA-568-C.2-2009, TIA Standard – Balanced Twisted-Pair
Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard.
4. ANSI / TIA-568-C.3-2008, TIA Standard – Optical Fiber Cabling Components
Standard.
5. ANSI / TIA-569-C-2012, TIA Standard – Telecommunications Pathways and
Spaces.
6. ANSI / TIA-606-C-2017, Administration Standard for Telecommunications
Infrastructure.
7. ANSI / TIA-607-B-2012, Generic Telecommunications Grounding (Earthing)
and Bonding for Customer Premises.
8. ANSI / TIA-758-B-2012, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications
Infrastructure Standard.
9. ANSI / TIA-862-A-2011, Building Automation Systems Cabling Standard for
Commercial Buildings.
10. TIA-526-7 2002(R 2012), TIA Standard – Measurement of Optical Power Loss
of Installed Single-mode Fiber Cable Plant.
11. TIA-526-14-B 2010, TIA Standard – Measurement of Optical Power Loss of
Installed Multi-mode Fiber Cable Plant.
12. IEEE 802.3, Standard for Ethernet Connection Through Coaxial, Twisted-Pair,
and Fiber Media.
13. Related Standards and addendums to the Standards or referenced by the
standards listed above.
B. The following criteria applies:

1. The communications equipment room installations shall be as similar as possible.
2. Provide electrical protection for interbuilding twisted-pair cabling installed
underground or when routed outdoors exposed to lightning.
3. Communication room and cabinet zoning shall restrict the maximum horizontal
wiring physical length between cross-connects and a served outlet to 295 feet.
Verify installed cable physical length does not exceed 295 feet.
C. Compliance by the Contractor with the provisions of this Section does not relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing equipment and materials of proper design,
mechanically and electrically suited to meet operating guarantees at the specified service
conditions.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 5
D. Electrical components and systems manufactured within the scope of Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) shall conform to the UL standards and be UL listed and labeled with
an applied UL listing mark.
E. Corrosive areas are designated on the Drawings. Raceways, elbows, fittings, couplings,
junction boxes, and pull boxes shall be of materials specified hereafter. NEMA 4X
enclosures shall be used for electrical equipment and devices. Provide devices and
materials labeled as suitable for installation in a corrosive environment.
F. Hazardous areas are designated on the Drawings. Provide devices, materials, and
construction that will ensure safe performance under conditions of proper use and
maintenance.
G. Where a manufacturer’s performance warranty is required, select products within the

product suite of materials to achieve the performance warranty.
A. Conformance to the latest codes and other legal requirements is the responsibility of the
Contractor.
B. Obtain permits and arrange inspections required by codes applicable to this Section and
submit written evidence to CH2M that the required permits, inspections, and code
C. Twisted-pair communications cables shall conform to the National Electrical Code:

1. Article 725, Signal Circuits; for data and VoIP cabling.
2. Article 800, Communication Circuits; for cabling that extends a circuit from a
communications utility such as a DSL or PBX line.
D. Fiber optic communications cables shall conform to the National Electrical Code
Article 770, Optical Fiber Cables.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The Contractor is to have a minimum of 3 years of documented experience performing

cable placement, splicing, termination, connecting, and testing for each of the types of
media or system component specified in the Contract Documents (e.g., Category 5e UTP,
Category 6A UTP, multimode fiber, single-mode fiber). In the case of newer
technologies that do not have a 3-year history, the Contractor is to have documented
experience for at least half of the lifetime of the new technology.
B. The Contractor shall be a currently certified installer of products.
C. Additional WAN and LAN Qualifications: Minimum of 6 years’ successful business

experience in design and installation of systems like the type specified.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 6
D. Category 6A UTP and Fiber Optic Cable Technicians: Documented training and/or
certification for the types of media and connectors specified.
E. Project Manager, Engineers, Supervisors, and Principal Skilled Technicians: Minimum

6 years’ experience in like work.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Install complete cabling solution per manufacturer’s warranty requirements.
B. Materials: Provide cables and materials in accordance with manufacturer’s warranty.
C. Workmanship: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s installation

requirements.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of equipment specified in this Division with other trades to avoid
interference with work of other trades.
1.9 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide materials and equipment labeled and/or listed as acceptable to the authority
having jurisdiction as suitable for the use intended.
B. Provide manufacturer’s standard finish color, except where specific color is indicated.
2.2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Metallic:
1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid galvanized steel.
2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Galvanized tubing.
3. Flexible Metal Conduit: Steel.
4. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit: Flexible metal conduit with PVC jacket.
5. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: Threaded type or setscrew type for EMT; material
to match conduit.
B. Nonmetallic:
1. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: Schedule 40 PVC.
2. Liquidtight Nonmetallic Flexible Conduit: Flexible plastic conduit.
3. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: PVC.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 7
C. Conduit Supports – Conduit Clamps, Straps, and Supports: Galvanized steel, cadmium
plated, or malleable iron for metallic conduit, nonmetallic for nonmetallic conduit.
D. Conduit Seal: Listed product suitable for sealing space around installed cables to prevent
gas, liquid, or dust to pass in or out of classified areas.
2.3 FLOOR PENETRATIONS
A. Flush-Mount Floor Outlets: Flush-mounted outlet assembly with a fire rating listing for
reinforced concrete or concrete-on-steel floor. Includes spaces for up to four RJ45-type
jacks with slide covers.
1. Communications Only:
a. Legrand/Wiremold/Walker RC9AMD Series Poke-Thru.
b. Legrand/Wiremold/Walker AMD8 Series Poke-Thru.
2. Communications/Power: Legrand/Wiremold/Walker RC4 Series Poke-Thru.
B. Furniture Feeds: Low-profile service head with a fire rating for routing communications
and optionally power cable through concrete floor and into modular furniture units.
1. Communications Only: Hubbell HPW PT2FIT, large capacity poke-thru.
2.D. Communications/Power: Legrand/Wiremold RC9CFFTC Series Service Head.
2.42.3 SURFACE RACEWAY
A. Material and Construction: Sheet metal or nonmetallic trough with optional cover,
intended for use only in dry, exposed locations, in sizes shown on Drawings.
B. Boxes, Extensions, and Fittings: Designed for use with raceway system to be provided.
2.52.4 WIREWAY
A. Material and Construction: Sheet metal or nonmetallic trough with hinged or removable
cover, in sizes shown on Drawings.
B. Boxes, Extensions, and Fittings: Designed for use with raceway system to be provided.
2.62.5 CABLE TRAYS
A. VE-1 Tray:
1. NEMA Class 12B.
2. Material and Finish of Tray, Fittings, and Accessories: copper-free aluminum.
3. Width: As indicated on Drawings.
4. Inside Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
5. Straight Section Rung Spacing: Ventilated trough.
6. Inside Radii of Fittings: 12 inches.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 8
7. Tray Grounding: Conform to NFPA and NEMA standards.
8. Accessories and Fittings: Manufacturer’s standard clamps, hangers, brackets,
splice plates, reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips, connectors, and grounding
straps.
9. Covers: Solid.
10. UL Classified as a bonding conductor.
B. Cable Runway:
1. Tubular Style Runway: Ladder type with 2-inch stringer height with welded
rungs.
2. Solid Bar Style Runway: Ladder type with 1-1/2-inch stringer height with welded
rungs.
3. Rungs: 1/2-inch by 1-inch steel C-channel shape with rounded edges, spaced on
9-inch centers.
4. Width: As indicated on Drawings.
5. Finish: Flat black powder coat.
6. Fittings and Accessories: Fittings, supports, splices, etc., for the runway system
shall be installed to provide a complete assembly – including fasteners, hardware,
and other items required to complete the installation as indicated on the
Drawings.
8. Accessories:
a. Cable Retaining Posts:
1) Acceptable Manufacturers & Part Numbers:
a) Legrand – 1R-A330-06-ZN-BK
b) B-Line – SB126062FB
c) B-Line – SB117AK2BZ
d) Or equal
C. Basket Tray:
1. Wire basket support systems are defined to include, but are not limited to,
straight sections of continuous wire mesh, field-formed horizontal and vertical
bends, tees, drop-outs, supports, and accessories.
2. Material Construction: High-strength steel wires formed into a standard 2-inch by
4-inch wire mesh pattern with intersecting wires welded together. Wire ends
along wire basket sides (flanges) shall be rounded during manufacturing for
safety of cables and installers.
3. Width: As indicated.
4. Depth: As indicated.
5. Fittings and Accessories: Field formed as needed, provide manufacturer standard
fasteners, hardware, and other items required to complete the installation as
indicated on the Drawings.
7. Approved manufacturers/product lines:
a. B-Line / Flextray
b. Legrand / Cablofil
c. WBT / Basket Tray
d. Hubbell / Wire Basket Tray
e. Thomas & Betts / Express Tray

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 9
f. Basorfil / Basket Cable Tray
g. United Structural / Basket Tray
h. or Approved Equal.
2.72.6 NEMA VE1 WARNING SIGNS
A. Engraved Nameplates: 1/2-inch-high black letters on yellow laminated plastic nameplate,

engraved with the following wording: “Warning: Do not use cable tray as walkway,
ladder, or support. Use only as mechanical support for cables and tubing.”
2.82.7 COMMUNICATION HANDHOLES
A. Precast Concrete: Air entrained, 5,000-psi compressive strength at 28 days.
B. Design Loading: AASHTO HS20-44
C. Steel Reinforcing: ASTM A-615-84, Grade 60.
D. Construction: In modular sections with tongue-and-groove joints.
E. Handhole Shape: Rectangular.
F. Inside Dimensions: 8-foot length; 4-foot width; 6-foot deep.
G. Wall Thickness: 6-inches.
H. Include 36-inch-diameter grooved opening in top section.
I. Necking and Shaft Sections: 30-inch-diameter clear opening.
J. Include 12-inch drain opening and two 1-inch ground rod openings in base section.
K. Duct Terminators: Cast-in-place terminators. End bells not permitted.
L. Include cable-pulling irons opposite each duct entry window.
M. Include inserts for cable racks at no more than 20 inches on center.
N. Handhole Frames and Covers: Class 30B gray cast iron, machine finished with flat-
bearing surfaces. Covers inscribed with 2-inch-high letters indicating communications or
telephone function.
O. Pulling Irons: 7/8-inch-diameter steel bar forming a triangle of 9 inches per side when
set. Galvanize for irregular-shaped articles.
P. Cable Rack Inserts: Galvanized steel channel insert with minimum load rating of
800 pounds; length to match cable rack channel.
Q. Cable Rack Channel: 4- by 1-1/2- by 3/16-inch galvanized steel channel wall bracket,
48-inch length, with cable rack arm mounting slots on 8-inch centers.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 10
R. Cable Racks: Galvanized steel channel, 2-1/2 by 14 inches with high-glazed, wet-process
porcelain insulators.
S. Handhole Steps: Galvanized steel suitable for handhole shape and construction.
T. Approved Manufacturer and Part Number:

1. Oldcastle Precast: 4860TV or equivalent.
2.92.8 PULL TAPE
A. Pull Tape: Measuring and pulling tape constructed of synthetic fiber with plastic jacket,
printed with accurate sequential footage marks.
2.102.9 PENETRATION SEALING MATERIALS
A. Duct Water Seal: Product suitable for closing underground and entrance conduit openings
where innerduct or cable is installed to prevent the entry of gases, liquids, or rodents into
the structure.
B. Firestopping: Intumescent fire barrier penetration sealing material.
2.112.10 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATION BACKBOARDS
A. Termination Backboards: Fire-retardant, AC-grade void-free plywood furnished in sheets

measuring 4 feet wide, 8 feet long, and 3/4 inch thick.
A.B. See also Architectural drawings and specifications.
2.122.11 EQUIPMENT RACKS AND CABINETS
A. Floor-Supported Equipment Racks:

1. Two-post 84-inch-vertical 6.5-inch-deep channel rack with EIA hole pattern, in
19-inch width.
1) Ortronics
a) Approved Part Numbers:
(1) OR-MM20706-B
2. Four-post 84-inch-vertical 30-inch-deep channel rack with EIA hole pattern, in
19-inch width.
1) Ortronics
(1) OR-MM20730-B
B. Vertical Cabling Management Sections:

1. 84-inch-high by 43-, 6-, or 10-inch-wide vertical cable manager with cover.
1) Ortronics.
(1) OR-MM20VMS704-B

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 11
(2) OR-MM20VMS706-B
(3) OR-MM20VMS710-B
2. Vertical Cabling Management Sections:
a. 84-inch-high by 3- or 6-inch-wide vertical cable manager with latches.
b. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Ortronics.
(1) OR-MM20VML704-B
(2) OR-MM20VML706-B
3. 84-inch-high by 3- or 6-inch-wide, double-sided vertical cable manager with
covers.
1) Ortronics.
(1) OR-DVMS704
(2) OR-DVMS706
C. Overhead Equipment Racks:

1. Two-post 7-inch-deep channel rack with EIA hole pattern, in 19-inch width.
1) Ortronics
(1) MMOHR-4RU-B
(2)(1) MMOHR-5RU-B
(3) MMOHR-6RU-B
D. Wall-Mounted Equipment Enclosures:

a. Ortronics
1) Approved Part Numbers:
a) SWM18RUPL-26-26
E. Full-Height Floor-mounted SCC Enclosures:

a. Ortronics
2. Part Numbers (replace “X’s” with W for white or B for black):
a. 52-RU x 39 inches deep frame: OR-LX523039-BX
b. 52-RU, 19 inches EIA rails with tapped #12-24 holes: OR-LX5230M12-
B-A
c. 52-RU, full flat, solid doors: OR-LX5230DFFS-BX-A
d. Swing door handle with lock: OR-LXDHSPN-0333-A
e. 52-RU side panels for 39 inches deep frame: OR-LX5239SPSL-BX-A
f. Top panel with 120v fan kit: OR-LX3039TPH1-XB-A
g. Vertical wire trellis: OR-LXVWT5206-B-A
h. Levelers: OR-LXLVL-IP-B-A
2.12 CONSOLIDATION POINTS
F.A. Fab Level Consolidation Point Wall Mount Bracket:

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 12
1. Acceptable Manufacturers & Part Numbers:
a. Legrand – OR-WMBV3U
b. Or equal
G.2.13 EQUIPMENT RACK ACCESSORIESquipment Rack Accessories:
1.A. Installation kit for concrete floor including concrete anchors, studs, nuts, and washers.
B. Line-up spacer kit for attaching two racks mounted side by side including spacer plates,
cap screws, nuts, and washers.
C. Full Height Rack mounted PDU:

1. Raritan Part Number: PX3-1371
D. Horizontal Power Strip:

1. Acceptable Manufacturers & Part Numbers:
a. Legrand – OR-50900052
b. Chatsworth - 12816-707
2.
2.132.14 ELECTRICAL PROTECTOR PANELS AND PROTECTORS
A. Protector blocks suitable for protection against overvoltage and sneak currents meeting
NEC requirements as a primary protector.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Circa.
2. TII Technologies (Porta Systems).
C. Protector Panels: Electrical protection panel which accepts individual protector units,
equipped with a 110-wiring block output; for example:
1. 6 Pair: Circa 1880ENA1/NSC-6 110 connector input to 110 connector output.
2. 25 Pair: Circa 1880ENA1/NSC-25 110 connector input to 110 connector output.
3.1. 100 Pair: Circa 1880ECA1-100 110 connector input to 110 connector output.
D. Electrical Protectors: Protector used to provide electrical protection for communications

equipment and circuits exposed to voltage surges and fault currents; plugs into the
1880ENA and 1880ECA panels above. For example:
1. Circa 4B1E standard service protector unit, wide-gap gas tube protector for
POTS lines.
2. Circa 4B1S-300 standard service protector unit, solid state module for service
provider digital circuits.
3. Circa 4B6S-300e high bandwidth module for 1Gbps digital circuits.
E. High-Speed Data Protector Panels for Category 5e and Category 6 Circuits:

1. Eight-pair block (e.g., Porta Systems protector pack 505E8-65, Category 5e
rated).
2.1. Four-pair block (e.g., Porta Systems protector pack 606-65, Category 6 rated).

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 13
2.142.15 WIRING BLOCK SYSTEMS
1. Panduit.
2. Siemon.
B. 110 Wiring Blocks: Molded plastic blocks suitable for wall or equipment rack mounting,
arranged with horizontal index strips that secure and organize 25 cable pairs each (e.g.,
OrtronicsPanduit 110 wiring block).
1. 100 Pair with Legs: P110KB1005Y with 5-pair connectors.
2.1. 300 Pair with Legs: 110AW4-300P110KB3005Y with 5-pair connectors.
3. 100 Pair without Legs: P11-KBNL1004EJY, with 4- and 5-pair connectors.
4. 200 Pair without Legs, 19-inch Rack Mount: P110B1005R2Y, with 5-pair
connectors.
5. 200 Pair without Legs, 19-inch Rack Mount and Jumper Troughs:
P110B1005R4WJY, with 5-pair connectors.
2.152.16 MODULAR PATCH PANELS
1. Belden
2. Ortronics (Only used for Mohawk cabling)
B. Patch panel:
1. Manufacturer: Belden
2. Part number: RVAPPF2U48BK
C.A. Modular Patch Panel with Integrated Ports: Eight-position/eight-conductor modular jacks
integrated as one panel using the EIA/TIA-T568B wiring label, arranged for 19-inch EIA
equipment rack mounting, equipped with printed wiring connections and 110 IDC wiring
block input. Examples: Acceptable Manufacturers and part numbers:
1. Belden part number:
a. 24 Ports: RVAPPF1U24BK
b. 48 Ports: RVAPPF2U48BK
1.2. Ortronics Modular Jack Panel, Category 6Apart number::
a. 24 Jacks: OR-PHD610U24, Flat Panel.
b. 48 Jacks: OR-PHD610U48, Flat Panel.
c. 24 Jacks: OR-PHA610U24, Angled Panel.
d. 48 Jacks: OR-PHA610U48, Angled Panel.
D. Modular Patch Panel: Modular ports accepting discrete eight-position/eight-conductor

jacks for Category 6A connectivity, arranged for 19-inch EIA equipment rack mounting.
Examples:
1. Ortronics Modular Jack Panel:
a. 24 Ports: (TBD), Flat Panel.
b. 48 Ports: (TBD), Flat Panel.
2. Ortronics Jacks for Modular Jack Panel:
a. Category 6A Jack, Black, Unshielded: (TBD).

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 14
2.162.17 FIBER OPTIC DISTRIBUTION UNITS (FDU)
1. Corning Cable Systems.
B. FDUs: Enclosure arranged for 19-inch equipment rack mounting equipped to hold
adapter connector panels and cable mounting accessories.
1. Four-Rack Unit Connector Panel Housing: Example:
a. Corning Cable Systems: CCH-04U.
2. Three-Rack Unit Connector Panel Housing: Example:
3.2. Two-Rack Unit Connector Panel Housing: Example:
4.3. One-Rack Unit Connector Panel Housing: Example:
5.4. Fiber Adapter Connector Panels: Modular panels for use with adapters to make
direct fiber optic interconnections.
a. LC Connector Panels:
1) MM Connector Panels:
a) Corning Cable Systems CCH-CP24-LP, connector panel
with and multi-mode (OM4) ceramic insert adapters,
24-strand capacity, Keyed-Non Keyed, Aqua color.
2) SM Connector Panels:
a) Corning Cable Systems CCH-CP24-LD, connector panel
with single-mode (OS2) ceramic insert adapters,
24-strand capacity, Keyed-Non Keyed, yellow color.
2.172.18 CABLE MANAGEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Open and Closed Cable Distribution Rings: J-hooks, C-rings, and D-rings made of plated
steel or plastic.
B. Wire Distribution Post: Plastic spool/post for mounting on backboards with screw to hold
jumper wires in place.
C. Jumper Trough: White fire-retardant, molded plastic frame which will accommodate
jumper wire and/or patch cords (e.g., Panduit jumper trough.
1. With Legs: P110JTW-X.
2. Without Legs: P110JT-X.
D. 1-Rack Unit (1-RU)One-Position Cable Management Wire Management Panels:

1-3/4-inch panels with distribution rings for use on 19-inch or 23-inch EIA racks.
Examples:
1. Panduit 19-inch D-ring panel, CMPH1.
2. Chatsworth 19-inch small ring panel, clear, 11752-519.
3. Chatsworth 23-inch small ring panel, clear, 11752-519.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 15
E. 2-Rack Unit (2-RU) Cable Management Panel Two-Position Wire Management Panels:
3-1/2-inch panels with distribution rings for use on 19-inch or 23-inch EIA racks.
Examples:
1. Panduit 19-inch D-ring panel, CMPH2.
2. Chatsworth 19-inch medium ring panel, 11753-519.
3. Chatsworth 23-inch medium ring panel, 11753-519.
4.3. Chatsworth 19-inch large ring panel, clear, 11564-519.
5. Chatsworth 23-inch large ring panel, clear, 11564-523.
2.182.19 GROUNDING AND BONDING HARDWARE
A. Ground Busbar: Solid copper plate, predrilled for two-hole lug connections, with 1/4-inch
minimum thickness, for wall and backboard mounting using standoff insulators.
1. 4-Inch by 10-Inch Product Example: Chatsworth busbar 10622-010.
2. 4-Inch by 20-Inch Product Example: Chatsworth busbar 10622-020.
B. Ground Terminal Block: At equipment mounting locations (e.g., backboards and hinged
cover enclosures) where rack-type ground bars cannot be mounted, provide screw lug-
type terminal blocks.
C. Ground Wire: Grounding conductors of the size and type shown on the Drawings or use a
minimum of 6 AWG stranded copper wire with green thermoplastic insulation.
D. Rack-Mount Bus Bar: Pre-drilled horizontal bus bar for consolidating rack equipment
grounds. Example: Chatsworth part number: 10610-019.
2.192.20 SUSPENDED CABLE SUPPORTS
A. Wide Base Supports:

1. Sheet metal J-hooks used with structure-attached independent support wires,
rods, or structural fasteners. Example: Erico/Caddy CAT HP J-hook.
2. Reinforced fabric used with structure attached independent support wires, rods,
or structural fasteners. Example: Erico/Caddy CAT 425 adjustable cable support.
2.202.21 UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR CROSS-CONNECT WIRE
1. Superior Essex International.
2. General Cable.
3. Berk-Tek.
B. Bulk cross-connect wire consisting of 24 AWG solid copper conductors individually

insulated with PVC, WECO color band marked at regular intervals, and twisted together
in pairs.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 16
2.212.22 TWISTED-PAIR PATCH CORDS
1. Belden.
B. Modular Plug to Modular Plug: Factory-assembled, eight-position modular plug-ended.

Category as indicated on Drawings or cable schedules, four-pair 24-AWG stranded
conductor UTP patch cord with straight-through wiring that can be used between eight-
position/eight-conductor modular patch panel ports to complete circuits. Patch cord
performance grade matched to the horizontal cable grade installed.
B.C. Refer to specification 27_10_10, 3.26 for provision of patch cord quantities and
additional information.
2.222.23 FIBER OPTIC PATCH CORDS
B. LC to LC duplex, factory-assembled, fiber optic patch cord. Patch cord fiber performance
grade and connector grade matched to the fiber optic cable grade and connectors
installed.
2.232.24 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Identification plates and labels shall be attached to avoid removal or shifting
through accidental contact, normal activity, environmental conditions, or material
aging.
2. Adhesives shall be permanent and provide a secure bond that does not become
loose due to aging or interaction with the mounting surface or environment.
3. Non-engraved labels shall be machine-printed in nonfading permanent ink that
distinctly contrasts to the background material; handwritten marking is not
permitted. Incidental exposure to water or other liquids normal to the
environment shall not cause marking to run or fade.
4. Lettering shall be in uppercase unless specifically noted otherwise in the
Drawings or schedules.
B. Nameplates: Engraved laminated plastic, minimum 3/16-inch-high letters on a

contrasting background.
C. Cable Labels: Flexible tabs permanently attached to cable by adhesive, clear plastic
jacket, and/or plastic tie-wraps.
D. Wiring Block Labels: Cardboard-like strips that slip inside clear plastic holders located
on protector panels and wiring blocks.
E. Fiber Optic Distribution Unit Labels: Labels may be provided with the equipment or
added using adhesive-attached card holders or plastic strips.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 17
F. Telecommunication Outlet Labels: Rectangular-shaped adhesive-backed tabs.
G. Miscellaneous Labels: Adhesive-backed tabs or plastic tape that are applied to smooth
surfaces to identify materials and equipment.
2.242.25 MULTI-SERVICE AUDIO VISUAL OUTLET BOX
A. Approved Manufacturer and Part Number:

1. FSR – PWB-100
2.26 RACK MOUNTED 110 BLOCK AND JUMPER TROUGH
A. 4-RU Dual 100-pair 110 blocks and jumper troughs

1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Part Numbers:
a. Legrand - OR-302003251
b. or equal.
B. 1-RU Dual 50-pair 110 blocks

1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Part Numbers:
a. Leviton - 41DBR-1F4
b. or equal.
2.27 110 STYLE JUMPER TROUGH
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Part Numbers:

1. Legrand - OR-30200140
2. or equal.
2.28 OUTLET BOXES
A. 5”-inch Square Metallic Outlet Boxes:

1. ManufactuererManufacturer: Randl Industries, Inc.
2. Approved part numbers:
a. T-55017
b. T-55018
1.c. T-55019
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP
A. Install system components under the direction of qualified personnel; appearance and
workmanship shall meet or exceed industry, product manufacturer, and Owner standards.
B. Install and test cable, material, and equipment in accordance with manufacturers’
instructions.
C. Coordinate work with equipment suppliers and other contractors.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 18
A. Continuous operation of the Owner’s existing systems and public utility systems is of
critical importance. Potential impact on operating systems shall be fully explained and
coordinated with CH2M and Owner.
B. Connections to existing services or utilities or other work that requires the temporary
shutdown of any existing operations or utilities shall be planned in detail with appropriate
scheduling of the work and shall be coordinated with CH2M and Owner.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION REVIEW
A. CH2M will review and observe installation work to ensure compliance by the Contractor
with requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Review, observation, assistance, and actions by CH2M shall not be construed as

undertaking supervisory control of the work or of methods and means employed by the
Contractor. CH2M’s review and observation activities shall not relieve the Contractor
from the responsibilities of these Contract Documents.
C. The fact that CH2M does not make early discovery of faulty or omitted work shall not
bar CH2M from subsequently rejecting this work and insisting that the Contractor make
the necessary corrections.
D. Regardless of when discovery and rejection are made, and regardless of when the
Contractor is ordered to correct such work, the Contractor shall have no claim against
CH2M for an increase in the Contract price, or for payment on account of increased cost,
damage, or loss.
A. Protect products from effects of moisture, corrosion, and physical damage during
construction. Except during installation activity in a section, keep openings in conduit,
wireway, and innerduct capped with manufactured seals.
3.5 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Horizontal Cable Support: Where specified on the Drawings between TOs and raceway
or cable tray entrances, support horizontal cables from structure using J-hooks:
1. Support J-hooks from a rigid mount such as a beam, 1/4-inch threaded rod or
1/4-inch plain rod. When supporting a J-hook from a rod, place a nut at the
bottom of the rod to prevent the J-hook from slipping off the end of the rod.
2. Support wires, when used, shall be independent and dedicated to the
communications cable support. There cannot be any attachment or contact with
similar wires used for the ceiling grid support. The independent support wire
shall be supported at both ends. Do not support J-hooks using ceiling support
wire.
3. Support single cables at intervals not to exceed 4 feet.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 19
4. Support bundles of two or more cables at intervals not to exceed 4 feet with cable
tie bundling every 2 feet.
5. J-hook support assemblies shall be of adequate size to support the intended cable
load.
B. Remove and replace ceiling tile as required to obtain access for completing the
Contractor’s portion of the project. Repair ceiling tile damage caused by this activity.
C. Fire-Rated Wall and Floor Penetrations:

1. Inspect firestopping installation by others between building construction and
innerduct and conduit, sleeves, wireway, and cable tray to verify integrity of
installation.
2. The Contractor is responsible for locating and providing fire-rated wall
penetrations where required.
a. For Exposed Cable:
1) Before Cable Installation: Install conduit sleeves with insulating
throat bushings and fire-barrier sealing systems in openings
where open cable passes through fire-rated walls and floors.
2) After Cable Installation: Install intumescent fire barrier
penetration sealing materials between cables and sleeves or
install fire barrier sealing systems.
b. For Raceways: After cable installation, install intumescent fire barrier
penetration sealing materials between cables and conduit, innerduct, or
wireway at exposed penetration locations.
c. For Cable Trays:
1) During Cable Installation: Protect firestopping materials
throughout the construction period in a clean and properly
protected condition to maintain each assembly without any
indication of damage.
2) After Cable Installation: Restore fire barrier penetration sealing
materials to provide required protection.
3. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage during water seal or firestop installation;
repair damage.
D. Identify and label the system in accordance with submitted and approved plan.
E. Place blank covers over unused/unterminated outlet and outlet jack openings.
3.6 IDENTIFICATION INSTALLATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates or labels.
B. Install identification parallel to equipment lines and visible from 3 feet. Install cable
labels at both ends of each cable, near end of sheath, such that tracing is readily
performed.
C. Secure nameplates using screws, rivets, or suitable adhesive.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 20
D. Basic Cable and Faceplate Identification Scheme: Cables, faceplates, jacks, and patch
panel ports shall have a consistent “FRXXNN” format, where:
1. F = Floor number.
2. R = Room identifier.
3. XX = Faceplate location.
4. NN = Port number.
5. Labeling information shall be recorded on as-built drawings, and test documents
shall use the same identification system to permit correlation of test data with
specific cable.
E. Innerduct: Provide labels for each innerduct at terminating ends and at other exposed
appearances (e.g., building entrance locations, manholes, handholes, pull boxes, etc.). At
minimum, each label must include far-end and unique innerduct identifiers.
F. Backbone Cable: Provide labels for backbone cables at each splice or terminating end for
each twisted-pair and fiber optic cable and at other exposed appearances (e.g., building
entrance locations, manholes, handholes, etc.). At minimum, each label shall include
near-end and far-end identifiers plus cable type and pair/strand numbers.
G. Horizontal Cable: Label horizontal cables to identify the unique outlet jack identification
number.
H. Telecommunication Outlet: Label each outlet with a unique identifying number as shown
on the schedules and Drawings.
I. Equipment Racks and Mountings: Label each equipment rack and mounting using
nameplates or approved labels marked as designated on the Drawings.
J. Wiring Blocks:
1. Label wiring block terminations using the following color-coded inserts to
identify the type of media or equipment terminated:
Termination Color
Horizontal outlet cabling Blue
DC campus/backbone cabling White
DC to SCR/SCC backbone/riser cabling Gray
Local exchange carrier cabling Green
PBX and other common equipment cabling Purple
LAN, auxiliary circuits, etc. Yellow
Transmission electronics equipment cabling Orange
2. Identify backbone cable wiring block positions with the cable number and pair
numbers.
3. Identify horizontal wiring block positions with the unique outlet jack
K. Modular Jack Panel:

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 21
1. Identify horizontal modular jack panel ports with the unique outlet identification
numbers.
2. Identify equipment modular jack panel ports with the specified equipment unit
L. Fiber Optic Distribution Unit: In addition to the cable labeling, label FDUs to identify the
termination connector assignments including cable number and strand count shown on
cable schedules. This identification shall be in summary form on one label.
M. Active Equipment: Label active equipment by placing adhesive-backed labels with

specified identifiers on the front of each equipment chassis in the most visible, least
obtrusive location. Labels shall be visible with unit doors open or closed.
N. Patch Cord Cross-Connects: Label copper and fiber-optic patch cords at each end
between 3 and 12 inches from the cable end. Label patch cord cables to identify a unique
cable number comprised of the terminating and equipment identifier.
3.7 DEMOLITION
A. Verify that field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on the
Drawings.
B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.
C. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record
documents. Report discrepancies to the CH2M before disturbing existing installation.
D. Beginning of demolition means Contractor accepts existing conditions.
E. Coordinate utility service outages with Owner prior to contacting utility company.
F. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during
construction.
G. Maintain existing systems in service until new system is complete and ready for service.
Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from
Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage
duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
H. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
I. Remove abandoned conductors to source of supply.
J. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible

ceiling finishes. Cut embedded or concealed conduit flush with walls, floors and patch
surfaces unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
K. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit
servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets
that are not removed.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 22
L. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension
work.
M. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or are to be reused.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT
A. Conduit Usage Schedule:

1. Exposed Outdoor Locations: Rigid steel conduit.
2. Wet Interior Locations: Rigid steel conduit.
3. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Electrical metallic tubing.
4. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Electrical metallic tubing.
5. Corrosive Interior Locations: Schedule 40 PVC conduit.
6. Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Rigid steel conduit.
B. Route exposed conduit and conduit above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular
to walls and adjacent piping.
C. Maintain minimum 6-inch clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12-inch
clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues, steam pipes, and heating
appliances. Maintain minimum 18-inch clearance above ceiling grid.
D. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire-pulling operations.

Fasten conduit using galvanized straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, or
bolted split stamped galvanized hangers.
E. Do not fasten conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for
temporary conduit support during construction before conductors are pulled.
F. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipe cutter; deburr cut ends.
G. Bring conduit to the shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely.
H. Use conduit hubs for fastening conduit to cast boxes and for fastening conduit to sheet
metal boxes in damp or wet locations.
I. Except for communications conduits, use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in
direction as around beams. Conduit bodies shall be readily accessible.
J. Avoid moisture traps where possible; where unavoidable, provide junction box with drain
fitting at conduit low point.
K. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and
moisture. Provide a permanent cap over empty conduits.
L. Provide a pull rope or pull tape in empty conduit. Tie pull rope securely to duct plugs or
wall racking at ends. Provide conduit identification at ends.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 23
M. Install expansion-deflection joints where conduit cross building expansion, seismic, or
structural isolation break (SIB) joints; expansion fittings shall have copper bonding
jumper.
N. Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls and floors, seal opening around conduit with
UL-listed foamed silicone elastomer compound with rating equal to or greater than the
wall/floor penetrated.
O. Use PVC-coated rigid steel factory elbows for bends in plastic conduit runs longer than
100 feet or in plastic conduit runs that have more than two bends regardless of length.
P. Wipe plastic conduit clean and dry before joining. Apply full, even coat of cement to
entire area that will be inserted into fitting. Let joint cure for 20 minutes minimum.
Q. Concealed, embedded, and buried conduit shall emerge at right angles to the surface and
have none of the curved portion of the bend exposed.
R. Provide warning tapes above underground conduits.
S. For conduits penetrating cold refrigeration rooms or other interior areas with at least a
20 degree F delta in temperature, provide seal-offs on each side of the wall, fill both with
sealant, and seal the conduit-to-wall interface on both sides.
3.9 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION
A. Install cable tray as shown on the Drawings and securely attach under the provisions of
Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
B. NEMA VE1 Cable Tray:

1. Install in conformance with NEMA VE1 and NEC Article 392 requirements and
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Support cable tray at each connection point, at the end of each run, and at other
points to maintain spacing between supports of 12 feet maximum. Install trays
level with respect to grade, plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 feet or 1/2 inch
cumulative.
3. Use expansion connectors where indicated in NEMA VE1 or where cable tray
crosses expansion joints. Use bonding jumpers across expansion connectors for
cable tray ground continuity.
5. Install warning signs at 30-foot centers along route of cable tray, located to be
visible. (Reference Section 2.7.A)
6. Provide bonding continuity between metallic cable tray sections and fittings in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Make connections to aluminum tray
and fittings using an antioxidant compound.
7. Bond cable tray systems to the power system’s ground every 100 feet.
8. Provide banded covers on trays where it passes under walkway or is below 6’ in
elevations.
C. Cable Runway:

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 24
1. Install bars, channels, and runway in the maximum possible lengths to provide
the maximum rigidity.
2. Install framing and cable runway support to maintain spacing between supports
of 6 feet maximum using 5/8-inch threaded rod hangers or appropriate wall-
mounted accessories. Install horizontal trays level with respect to grade, plus or
minus 1/8 inch per 10 feet or 1/2 inch cumulative.
3. Provide two or more points of support for section of framing or cable runway
used for support of vertical loads. Do not splice at either end of section to provide
point of support.
4. Extend horizontal framing to wall when vertical hanger distance exceeds 3 feet.
6. Elevation Change Methods:
a. Install standard vertical outside and inside bends with 11-1/2 inches or
longer radius using connecting straight sections.
b. Join straight section segments using 45 degree clamps. Do not use
90 degree clamps to form cable support surfaces.
c. Do not exceed 9-inch spacing between cable support surfaces and/or
ladder cross members at elevation change locations.
3.10 MANHOLE / HANDHOLE INSTALLATION
A. Excavate, install base material, and compact base material in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions and under provisions of Section 31 00 00 – Earthwork.
B. Install and seal precast sections in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Use precast neck and shaft sections to bring the manhole/handhole entrance to proper
elevation.
D. Install manholes/handholes plumb.
E. Set the top of each manhole/handhole to finished elevation or as indicated.
F. Install ground rod with top protruding 4 inches above manhole/handhole floor. Connect
to noncurrent-carrying metal parts in the manhole with 6 AWG bare copper conductor.
G. Attach cable racks to inserts after manhole/handhole installation is complete.
H. Provide manhole/handhole identification on manhole/handhole cover.
3.11 INNERDUCT INSTALLATION
A. Innerduct Usage Schedule:

1. Underslab and Underground Raceways: Outdoor or indoor innerduct.
2. Above-Ground Raceways, Exterior and Interior: Indoor innerduct.
3. Interior Exposed Locations, Including Cable Tray Installations:
a. Nonplenum Areas: Indoor innerduct.
b. Plenum Areas: Plenum-listed innerduct.
4. Cable Tray to Equipment-Mounting Transitions: Split-corrugated innerduct.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 25
5. Note: In case of conflict between this Section and the Drawings or Schedules,
request clarification from CH2M.
B. Pull innerduct through conduit and wireways, or place innerduct in cable trays using
continuous unspliced lengths of innerduct between manholes, handholes, pull boxes,
and/or section termination points.
C. Cut innerduct square; deburr cut ends.
D. Bring innerduct to the shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely.
E. Wipe innerduct and fittings clean and dry before joining. Apply full, even coat of cement
to entire area that will be inserted into fitting. Let joint cure according to cement
manufacturer’s instructions.
F. Provide suitable innerduct slack in manholes, handholes, pull boxes, and at turns to
ensure that there is no kinking or binding of the tubing.
G. Make changes in direction of communications innerduct runs with sweeps of the longest
possible radius and at least 10 times the inside diameter of the innerduct.
H. During innerduct placement avoid excessive tension which can deform the innerduct.
Inspect the innerduct following placement and replace any damaged sections.
I. Innerduct Mountings, Hangers, and Attachments: When exposed indoors or in

manholes/handholes, hold innerduct firmly in place using independent support.
1. Install straps, hangers, and other similar fittings adequate to support loads and so
as not to damage innerduct.
2. Do not fasten innerduct supports to steam pipes, water pipes, duct work, ceiling
grid support wires, or other utilities.
3. Do not allow innerduct sag to contact the ceiling grid or light fixtures.
J. Underground Conduit Installation: After innerduct is installed in conduit entering

structures, seal openings inside conduit around innerduct at first box or outlet to prevent
the entrance of gases, liquids, or rodents into the structure. Use suitable plastic-
expandable compound (e.g., duct water seal).
K. Manhole and Handhole Installation:

1. At locations where innerduct will be continuous through a manhole or handhole,
allow sufficient slack for securing the innerduct to the side of the vault while
maintaining the required minimum bend radius. Secure the innerduct to the
racking.
2. At manholes/handholes serving as a junction location, pull the exposed end of the
innerduct to the far end of the vault, install manufactured duct plugs, and secure
to cable racks.
3. At other locations where the ends of innerduct sections appear in a manhole or
handhole, join the pull tape, and then splice innerduct sections together using
watertight couplings which do not reduce the inside diameter of the innerduct.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 26
L. Indoor Conduit Installation:
1. Arrange innerduct neatly, cut to proper length, and remove surplus. Provide
trained and bundled innerduct pigtails extending at least 18 inches beyond
exposed conduit openings.
2. At locations where the ends of innerduct sections appear in a pull box, join the
pull tape, and then splice innerduct sections together using couplings which do
not reduce the inside diameter of the innerduct.
M. Indoor Exposed Installation: Tie-wrap innerduct to one side of vertical ladder rack every
2 feet minimum, and to one side of horizontal ladder-type cable tray every 5 feet
minimum.
N. Following installation, visually inspect innerduct, remove any burrs at openings, and, if
necessary, clean innerduct interior.
O. Label innerduct as required in this Section.
3.12 PULL TAPE AND DUCT PLUG INSTALLATION
A. Following innerduct installation, install pull tape with preprinted foot markers in
innerduct sections. Tie the pull tape securely to wall racking at each location.
B. Following innerduct and pull tape installation, cap or plug innerduct with manufactured
seals to prevent moisture or foreign matter from entering until cable installation starts.
3.13 PENETRATIONS
A. Seal conduit and innerduct entering structures at the first box or outlet to prevent entrance
of gases, liquids, or rodents into the structure.
1. Conduit with Innerduct Installed: Suitable duct water seal between conduit and
innerduct.
2. Empty Innerduct: Removable screw-tight duct plugs.
3. Cable Installed: Suitable duct water seal between innerduct and cable.
3.14 COMMUNICATIONS ROOM DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Install communications backboards, equipment racks and cabinets, boxes, raceways,

framing, cable tray, wiring blocks, FDUs, and other related materials and equipment
plumb as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer’s
specifications and procedures.
B. Finish paint communications backboards with durable, fire-retardant paint to match the
wall color.
C. Provide split-corrugated innerduct to protect fiber optic cables at transitions from cable
tray systems to equipment cabinets and racks.
D. Furnish and install wire and hardware required to properly ground and bond
communications cable and equipment.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 27
1. Install building and/or telecommunications ground busbars as shown on the
Drawings.
2. Connect a pigtail extension from the building grounding facility to the
communications room ground bus hardware as shown on the Drawings.
3. Install rack mount busbar at top of the back rail of in each equipment rack and
the top RU position within each cabinet noted on telecom drawings and Bbond
each equipment rack to overhead runway with 6 AWG insulated stranded copper
pigtail. Bond each equipment cabinet rack mounted busbar to building steel with
6 AWG insulated stranded copper pigtail.
4. Install bonding jumper across each runway joint using minimum 6 AWG
insulated stranded copper wire.
E. Ground metallic raceways, cable trays, cable shields, equipment racks, equipment
cabinets, and other metallic equipment located in a communications room to the
telecommunications ground busbar using a minimum of 6 AWG insulated copper wire.
3.15 RACEWAY PREPARATION
A. Verify that installed raceways, cable tray, equipment cabinets, equipment racks, cross-
connect systems, cabling, and local area network systems are suitable for use and ready to
receive work.
B. Use mandrel to clean and thoroughly swab raceway systems before installing cable.
3.16 GENERAL COMMUNICATIONS CABLING METHODS
A. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage.
B. Install cable in raceway and cable tray after interior of building has been physically
protected from the weather and mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been
completed.
C. Pull tape (muletape) with preprinted foot markers is usually provided when conduit and
innerduct are installed; if not, provide pull tape in each empty communications conduit
containing a bend and over 10 feet in length.
D. Provide abrasion protection for any cable or wire bundles, which pass through holes or
across edges of sheet metal.
E. Arrange wiring neatly, cut to proper length, and remove surplus wire.
F. Where connection of cables installed under this Section are to be made by others, provide
pigtails of adequate length for neat, trained, and bundled connections.
G. Install communications cable in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Place cable

so as not to exceed the pulling tension or minimum cable bend radius limits specified by
the manufacturer.
H. Utilize continuous unspliced lengths of copper conductors or fiber optic strands between
splice enclosures and/or termination points.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 28
I. The number of twisted pairs or fiber strands specified for each cable shall be terminated,
tested, and functional.
J. Provide suitable cable slack in vaults, handholes, boxes, outlets, and at turns to ensure
that there is no kinking or binding of the sheath. In the horizontal cable system, include
slack in length calculations to ensure that physical horizontal cable lengths do not exceed
90 meters (295 feet). Horizontal slack requirements:
1. UTP: 3 meters (10 feet) in closets, 30 cm (12 inches) at outlet.
2. Optical Fiber: 3 meters (10 feet) in closets, 1 meter (3.3 feet) at outlet.
K. Cable Management Mountings, Hangers, and Attachments:

1. Hold communications cable firmly in place using independent support.
2. Install straps, mountings, hangers, J-hooks, threaded or nonthreaded support rods,
distribution rings, cable tie mountings, and other similar fittings adequate to
support loads with ample safety factors and so as not to damage, bind, or deflect
cable. Do not use plumbers’ perforated straps as a means of support.
3. Do not fasten communications cable supports to steam, water, or other piping,
ductwork, mechanical equipment, electrical equipment, electrical raceways, or
wires used to support ceiling grid. Do not allow communications cables to make
contact with ceiling tiles, ceiling grid support wires, or lighting fixtures.
L. Communications Cable Ties:

1. Install cable ties loosely so as not to bind the cable sheath or distort the
placement of twisted-pair components.
2. Plenum Building Areas: Where cable passes through open return air space, use
plenum-rated plastic or stainless steel cable ties.
3. Nonplenum Building Areas: Use conventional flame-retardant nylon ties with a
consistent natural or white color.
4. Exterior and Underground Locations: Use black plastic UV-resistant cable ties.
M. Communications Jumpers and Patch Cords: Route and arrange cross-connects neatly in
the wire management trays and troughs provided as part of the cross-connect system. Cut
wire to proper length and remove surplus.
3.17 UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Place UTP cable so as to maintain the minimum cable bend radius limits specified by the
manufacturer or the following, whichever is larger:
1. Horizontal Four-Pair UTP Cables:
a. Termination Points: Eight times the cable diameter.
b. Other Locations: Four times the cable diameter.
2. Multipair UTP Cables: Maintain a minimum bend radius of ten times the cable
diameter.
B. To avoid stretching four-pair horizontal cable conductors during installation, do not

exceed a 25-pound force pulling tension (tensile loading).

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 29
C. Use wiring block and/or connector manufacturer’s recommended tools, with the proper
sized anvils, for copper punchdown, wirewrap, and crimp terminations. Stuffer caps are
not permitted.
D. Directly terminate twisted-pair cable on wiring blocks in standard WECO color-code

order.
E. Cable Jackets: To reduce untwisting of pairs, maintain the twisted-pair cable jacket as
close as possible to the point of termination.
1. Multipair Cable: Strip back only as much cable jacket as is required to terminate
on connecting hardware.
2. Horizontal Cable: Strip back no more than 1 inch of cable sheathing.
F. Pair Twist: Preserve wire pair twists as closely as possible to the point of mechanical
termination to minimize signal impairment; limit untwisting as follows:
1. Multipair Cables: No greater than 1 inch.
2. Category 5e, 6, and 6A Horizontal Cables: No greater than 1/2 inch.
G. UTP Patch and Station Cords: Field assemble unshielded twisted-pair patch cords
terminated as shown on the Drawings.
1. Use stranded UTP cable designed for use as patch cordage.
2. Provide modular plugs designed for installation on the wire type, AWG size, and
flat/oval or round sheath shape of the cable used.
3. Make straight through wiring connections unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
3.18 FIBER OPTIC CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Use care when handling fiber optic cable. Carefully monitor pulling tension and cable
bend radius so as not to exceed the limits specified by the manufacturer.
B. Provide the following service loop of cable for connectorizing, polishing, and
serviceability:
1. Backbone Cable Segment:
a. Sheathed Near Each FDU: 24 feet.
b. Sheathed in Communication Vault: As indicated on the Drawing or cable
schedule.
c. Unsheathed in FDU: 10 feet.
2. Horizontal Cable Segment:
a. Unsheathed in FDU: 10 feet.
b. Unsheathed at Outlet: 4 feet.
C. Backbone fiber optic cable shall be placed in innerduct.

1. Install from communication room to communication room or cabinet.
2. Install in raceway and cable tray.
3. Provide split innerduct at pull points, such as pull boxes and telecommunication
vaults.
4. Provide innerduct inside the communication room from the point where the cable
enters the room to where the cable terminates using solid or split innerduct. If a

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 30
dedicated surface raceway is provided for the fiber optic cable inside the
communication room, it may not be necessary to provide innerduct for this
portion of the cable segment.
5. Provide split innerduct for the backbone cable segment service loop outside of
the FDU.
D. Fiber Optic Cable Termination:

1. Tight Buffer Strands: Directly terminate tight buffered fiber optic cable strands at
both the FDU and outlet ends with LC connectors as shown on the cable
schedules or Drawings.
2. Loose Tube Strands: Install buffer tubes on loose tube fiber optic cable strands
before directly terminating with LC connectors as shown on the cable schedules
or Drawings.
3. Buffered Strands: Directly terminate buffered fibers included in composite cable
at both the FDU and outlet ends with LC connectors as shown on the cable
schedules or Drawings.
3.19 INSTALLED-CABLE FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
B. Verify cables are terminated according to the Drawings and shield grounding, cable
support, and terminations are properly installed.
3.20 CROSS-CONNECT PREPARATION
A. Verify that cable raceways, equipment cabinets, equipment racks, cross-connect systems,
cabling, and local area network systems are ready to receive work.
3.21 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Perform inspections and tests specified hereinafter and as indicated under

communications distribution subsystems specified in other sections.
B. General Inspection Requirements:

1. As part of any performance test, inspect cable, material, and equipment for
physical damage, continuity, and proper connection.
2. Verify identification and labeling at required locations for visibility, condition,
legibility, and accuracy.
C. General Test Requirements:

1. At the completion of communications system installation and at such time as
CH2M may indicate, conduct performance tests and complete corresponding test
reports for delivery to CH2M and Owner.
2. Furnish test equipment and personnel required for tests. Test shall be calibrated
within 1 year of the test being performed. Technicians performing the tests
require current training certification for the equipment being used.
3. Tests shall demonstrate that cable, material, and equipment components and
assemblies operate in accordance with the Contract Documents.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 31
4. Unless specified elsewhere, provide at minimum 48 hours’ notice to CH2M of
the time and location of the test to be performed.
D. General Test Report Requirements:

1. Each test report shall include the following sections:
a. Project identification, contractor, and test date.
b. Scope of testing.
c. List of equipment used in the test with a photocopy of the calibration
certificate.
d. List of technician(s) performing the tests identified in the scope of testing
with a photocopy of their training/certification documentation.
e. Summary of Test Results: The summary is to be developed and
completed by the Contractor.
f. Individual Test Datasheets: The individual test datasheets are to be
developed and completed by the Contractor. Each sheet shall contain
identification sufficient to correlate test result with installed cable.
2. Report Media:
a. Prepare test reports on 8-1/2- by 11-inch paper providing reproducible
quality printing.
b. The individual test data reports may be submitted on electronic media if
software needed to read the media is also provided.
E. Cables with pairs or fiber strands that fail to meet performance test criteria and defective
terminating devices shall be replaced by the Contractor free of charge. Test reports shall
include test data from both the cable that failed and its replacement cable.
3.22 BACKBONE UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR CABLE SYSTEM TESTING
A. Link Test Configuration: Perform metered tests on each multi-pair twisted-pair cable link
through the wiring block and/or patch panel terminations at each end of the cable section.
B. Channel Test Configuration: Perform metered tests on each multi-pair twisted-pair cable
channel, including cabling sections, cross-connect equipment, jumper wire and/or patch
cords, and equipment cords through the connectors at each end, but not including
connections to active equipment.
C. Backbone Multi-Pair Performance Tests:

1. Use field instrument capable of the following test parameters:
a. Wire map (identify shorted, open, and crossed pairs).
b. Attenuation.
c. Length.
2. Cable may be tested in one-pair to five-pair increments.
D. Test Reports: Include field test results for each pair, including cable link length.
1. The test summary will include:
a. Cable identification as it appears on the cable schedule.
b. Cable identification as it is labeled according to the Specifications.
c. Pass or fail status of each cable pair.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 32
2. The individual test datasheets are not required for the backbone unshielded
twisted-pair cable system test.
3.23 HORIZONTAL UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR CABLE SYSTEM TESTING
A. Link Test Configuration: Perform metered field tests on each four-pair UTP cable link
through the wiring block, patch panel, and/or TO terminations at each end of the cable
section using the basic link test configuration described in ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C.2.
B. Channel Test Configuration: Perform metered tests on each four-pair UTP cable channel,
including cabling sections, cross-connect equipment, jumper wire and/or patch cords,
TOs, and work area station cords through the connectors at each end, but not including
connections to active equipment using the channel test configuration described in
ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C.2.
C. Horizontal Performance Tests:

1. Use field test instrument(s) capable of the following swept/stepped frequency
voltage measurements in accordance with the performance parameters required
by EIA/TIA-568-C.2.
a. Category 5e: Frequencies up to 100 MHz.
b. Category 6: Frequencies up to 250 MHz.
c. Category 6A: Frequencies up to 500 MHz.
2. Test each horizontal link or channel pair to verify/determine wire map, length,
attenuation, and near-end crosstalk (NEXT).
3. Test voice links that exceed 90m in length for wire map, opens, shorts, crossed
pairs, and dial tone.
4. The TIA/EIA 568-C.2 standard allows for a 10 percent uncertainty in the
nominal velocity of propagation of signals in a UTP cable when determining the
cable length with an electronic tester. If during a test for a data link the tester
identifies a length longer than 90 meters (295 feet), verify the physical length of
the cable does not exceed 90 meters.
5. Test each direct connected modular plug terminated link per TIA-568.2-D annex.
D. Test Reports: Include field test results for each pair, including cable link length.
b. Cable identification as it appears on the individual test reports.
c. Cable identification as it is labeled according to the Specifications.
d. Pass or fail status.
2. The individual test datasheet will consist of the automated printout produced by
the cable scanning equipment.
3.24 ON-THE-REEL FIBER OPTIC CABLE TESTING
A. Perform optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) on-the-reel tests for each fiber strand
in cable with fiber optic components after delivery to the project site. Test results shall be
approved by CH2M prior to cable installation.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 33
B. Preparation:
1. Assign a unique number to each reel. Record this reel number on the
manufacturer’s product test data shipped with the cable reel, and on each test
report that references cable taken from the reel. Installed cable segments shall be
traceable to the reel, and thus to the manufacturer’s test data. If the
manufacturer’s product test data is not shipped with the cable reel, arrange for the
cable distributor to provide a copy.
2. Submit documentation providing the proposed testing sequence, expected
duration, and scheduled date and time for testing to CH2M.
C. Performance Tests:
1. Verify that each reel holds one continuous cable.
2. Review factory-produced manufacturer’s product test data to confirm
conformance to product specifications included elsewhere in the Contract
Documents.
3. Furnish a copy of the OTDR calibration certificate to the Owner at the time and
location of testing.
4. Verify cable length and attenuation is consistent with manufacturer’s datasheet
and reel identification.
5. Test each multi-mode and single-mode fiber optic strand for continuity and loss
in the units of dB/km using a recording OTDR with disk storage capabilities.
a. Multi-mode Fiber: Test each fiber at 850 nm and 1,300 nm in one
direction.
b. Single-Mode Fiber: Test each fiber at 1,310 nm and 1,550 nm in one
direction.
D. Test Reports: Submit a test report for each reel with fiber optic components, including
factory and field test results for each fiber.
1. Test Summary Report. The test report will include:
a. Assigned reel identification number.
b. Copy of the OTDR calibration certificate.
c. Manufacturer’s product test data.
d. Cable identification as it appears on the cable schedule.
e. Cable identification as it appears on the OTDR printout.
f. Cable identification as it is labeled according to the Specifications.
g. Pass or fail status for each fiber strand.
h. The individual test datasheets will consist of the OTDR printouts, one
per fiber.
3.25 POST-INSTALLATION FIBER OPTIC CABLE SYSTEM TESTING
A. Link Test Configuration: Perform metered tests on each fiber optic segment through FDU
and/or TO terminations at each end of the cable section.
B. Channel Test Configuration: Perform metered tests on each fiber optic channel, including
link segments, patch cords, and work area station cords through the connectors at each
end, but not including connections to active equipment.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 34
C. Fiber Optic Performance Tests:
1. Calculate the maximum allowable loss for each fiber optic link or channel by
adding the theoretical fiber loss based on length and allowances of 0.75 dB per
mated connector pair and 0.3 dB per splice.
2. Test each installed and connectorized single-mode and multi-mode fiber optic
link and channel for end-to-end attenuation through FDU and/or TO terminations
using a power meter with a stabilized light source. An OTDR may not be used to
perform the end-to-end attenuation testing.
a. Test Jumpers: Use two test meter reference jumpers for calibration and
testing per TIA 526-7 Method A.2 for single mode fiber or TIA 526-14
Annex C for multi-mode fiber.
b. Horizontal Multi-mode Links: Test each fiber link for end-to-end
attenuation in one direction at 850 nm and 1,300 nm.
c. Backbone Multi-mode Links: Test each fiber link for end-to-end
attenuation in one direction at both 850 nm and 1,300 nm.
d. Backbone Single-Mode Links: Test each fiber link for end-to-end
attenuation in one direction at both 1,310 nm and 1,550 nm.
3. In addition to the tests in paragraph 2 above, when one of the following
conditions occurs, test the link or channel for length and end-to-end, splice, and
connector attenuation through terminations using a recording-type OTDR.
a. Installed and connectorized interbuilding fiber optic cable which includes
a splice.
b. Cable length markings on the cable sheath are not legible.
c. Links or channels that fail the power meter test(s).
4. Terminate meter jumpers using connectors and fiber like those installed in the
system.
D. Test Reports: Include field test results for each fiber strand.
b. Identification of reel from which cable was taken.
d. Pass or fail status for each strand. A strand has failed if it does not pass
any required test.
2. The individual test data will include:
a. Project identification.
b. Cable Segment Identification:
1) Cable run number.
2) Source location and FDU identification.
3) Destination location and FDU identification.
c. Test Equipment Identification:
1) Calibration date.
2) Light source serial number.
3) Receiver serial number.
d. Fiber specifications.
e. Calculated Segment Attenuation:
1) Cable length in kilometers.
2) Calculated link loss at 850-nm wavelength.
3) Calculated link loss at 1,300-nm wavelength.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 35
f. Fiber strand number.
g. Measured segment attenuation.
h. Test technician and date of testing.
i. An attenuation performance datasheet is included in the Appendix.
3.26 WORKSTATION PATCH CORDS
A. Provisions:
1. Refer to the CP Port Utilization schedule/specification for patch cords required at
each Consolidation Point (CP).
2. Provide (1) Category 6A patch cord at each telecom outlet of the following
device types as indicated on the plans and cable schedules:
a. FFU Gateways
b. Fab level KVM uplink cord – Refer to the CP Port Utilization for
provision of these patch cords.
c. Security Control Panel – Noted as “SCP” devices on horizontal cable
schedules.
d. Battery chargers
e. Lighting Control Panels – Noted as “LCP” devices on horizontal cable
schedules.
f. Boilers
g. Chillers
h. AHU’s
i. MAH’s
j. CRAC units
a. Wireless Access Points (WAP’s) that are not served from a CP – Refer to
the CP Port Utilization for provision of these patch cords.
b. AFD’s
c. PLC panels
d. UPS devices
e. ATS devices
f. Generators
g. Elevator control panels
h. Power monitoring equipment
a. Electrical switchgear
b. Electrical substation – Noted as “SS” devices on horizontal cable
schedules.
5. Devices shown on the drawings and horizontal cable schedule specifications that
do not show a panel or device name shall be considered “future use” and will not
receive a patch cord at this time.
6. Patch cords within the SCR/SCC/Data Center spaces will be owner furnished and
owner installed.
7. Security equipment rack patch panels will be provided and installed by the
security vendor.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 36
8. Horizontal cabling for camera devices are terminated with Male-RJ45 plugs and
thus do not require patch cords.
9. Provided patch cords shall be un-packaged and have any tie-wraps removed.
10. Provided patch cords for all devices shall be neatly placed within the equipment
panel ready for connection. See “Coordination Required” below.
11. Note that there may be instances where field-fabricated patch cords will be
necessary due to lengths needed versus the pre-manufactured lengths available.
B. Coordination Required:
1. Prior to patch cord procurement:
a. For each device/panel type of those noted above, coordinate with
panel/device/system installer the necessary patch cord length
b. Coordinate color of patch cords with owner’s network team.
i.2. Coordinate installation of provided patch cords with owner’s network team
during the commissioning efforts associated with each end device/panel prior to
connecting the end device/panel to the telecom outlet.

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 37
3.263.27 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
WITH BID
27 10 10-01 Qualifications for copper cabling. X
27 10 10-02 Qualifications for fiber optic cabling. X
27 10 10-03 Cable Tray Per construction schedule
27 10 10-04 Manholes Per construction schedule
27 10 10-05 Innerduct Per construction schedule
27 10 10-06 Pull Tape Per construction schedule
27 10 10-07 Equipment Racks Per construction schedule
27 10 10-08 Vertical Cable Management Per construction schedule
27 10 10-09 Equipment Racks Accessories Per construction schedule
27 10 10-10 Electrical Protectors Per construction schedule
27 10 10-11 Wiring Blocks Per construction schedule
27 10 10-12 Modular Patch Panels Per construction schedule
27 10 10-13 Fiber Optic Distribution Units and Coupler Per construction schedule
Panels
27 10 10-14 Cable Management Accessories Per construction schedule
27 10 10-15 Ground Bus Bars Per construction schedule
27 10 10-16 Outlet Face Plates Per construction schedule
27 10 10-17 Copper Cable Jacks Per construction schedule
27 10 10-18 Suspended Cable Supports Per construction schedule
27 10 10-19 Multi-pair Backbone Copper Cable Per construction schedule
27 10 10-20 Horizontal UTP Copper Cable Per construction schedule
27 10 10-21 Cross-Connector Wire Per construction schedule
27 10 10-22 Single Mode Fiber Optic Cable Per construction schedule
27 10 10-23 Multi-mode Fiber Optic Cable Per construction schedule
27 10 10-24 Fiber Optic Connectors Per construction schedule
27 10 10-25 Ground Wire Per construction schedule
27 10 10-26 Identification Materials Per construction schedule
27 10 10-27 Copper Cable Test Reports 10 Days after testing and prior to
project completion
27 10 10-28 Fiber Optic Cable Test Reports 10 Days after testing and prior to
project completion
END OF SECTION

25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 3 27 10 10 - 38
SECTION 27 10 20
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS TESTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. This Section covers work necessary to furnish communications system testing,
including the following:
a. On-the-reel fiber optic cable testing.
b. Backbone unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable system testing.
c. Horizontal UTP cable system testing.
d. Fiber optic cable system testing.
1. Section 27 00 10 General Communication Requirements.
2. Section 27 10 15 Communication Cable and Accessories.
1.2 REFERENCES

3. Near-end crosstalk (NEXT)
4. Optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR)
B. Definitions:
1. Link: A transmission path between two points, not including terminal equipment,
work area cables, and equipment cables; one continuous section of conductors or
fiber, including the connecting hardware at each end.
2. Channel: The end-to-end transmission path between two points at which
application-specific equipment is connected; includes one or more links, cross-
connect jumpers and/or patch cords, and work area station cords, but does not
include active equipment.
1. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) / Electronics Industry
Association (EIA) 568.
704618 27 10 20
25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 Communications Systems Testing - 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT APPLICABLE
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
A. Perform inspections and tests specified hereinafter and as indicated under

communications distribution subsystems specified in other Sections.
B. General Inspection Requirements:

1. As part of any performance test, inspect cable, material, and equipment for
physical damage, continuity, and proper connection.
2. Verify identification and labeling at required locations for visibility, condition,
legibility, and accuracy.
C. General Test Requirements:

1. At the completion of communications system installation and at such time as
CH2M may indicate, conduct performance tests and complete corresponding test
reports for delivery to CH2M and/or Owner.
2. Furnish test equipment and personnel required for tests. Test to be calibrated
within 1 year of the test being performed. Technicians performing the tests
require current training certification for the equipment being used.
3. Tests are to demonstrate that cable, material, and equipment components and
assemblies operate in accordance with the contract documents.
4. Unless specified elsewhere, provide at minimum 48 hours of notice to CH2M of
the time and location of the test to be performed.
D. General Test Report Requirements:

1. Each test report to include the following sections:
a. Project identification, contractor, and test date.
b. Scope of testing.
c. List of equipment used in the test with a photocopy of the calibration
certificate.
d. List of technician(s) performing the tests identified in the scope of testing
with a photocopy of their training/certification documentation.
e. Summary of Test Results: The summary is to be developed and provided
with the Cable Schedules and to be completed by the Contractor.
f. Individual Test Datasheets: The individual test datasheets are to be
developed and provided with the Cable Schedules and to be completed
704618 27 10 20
by the Contractor. Each sheet to contain identification sufficient to
correlate test result with installed cable.
2. Report Media:
a. Prepare test reports on 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch paper providing
reproducible quality printing.
b. The individual test data reports may be submitted on compact disc with
the files in PDF format. Provide the compact disks in an 8-1/2-
inch by 11-inch compact disk file envelope and then in a paper envelope.
E. Cables with pairs or fiber strands that fail to meet performance test criteria and defective
terminating devices to be replaced by the Contractor free of charge. Test reports to
include test data from both the cable that failed and its replacement cable.
3.2 ON-THE-REEL FIBER OPTIC CABLE TESTING
A. Perform optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) on-the-reel tests for each fiber strand
in cable with fiber optic components after delivery to the project site. Test results to be
reviewed by CH2M prior to cable installation.
B. Preparation:
1. Assign a unique number to each reel. Record this reel number on the
manufacturer's product test data shipped with the cable reel and on each test
report that references cable taken from the reel. Installed cable segments to be
traceable to the reel, and thus to the manufacturer’s test data. If the
manufacturer's product test data is not shipped with the cable reel, arrange for the
cable distributor to provide a copy.
2. Submit documentation providing the proposed testing sequence, expected
duration, and scheduled date and time for testing to CH2M.
C. Performance Tests:
1. Verify that each reel holds one continuous cable.
2. Review factory-produced manufacturer's product test data to confirm
conformance to product specifications included elsewhere in the contract
documents.
3. Furnish a copy of the OTDR calibration certificate to the Owner at the time and
location of testing.
4. Verify cable length and attenuation is consistent with manufacturer's datasheet
and reel identification.
5. Test each multimode and single-mode fiber optic strand for continuity and loss in
the units of dB/km using a recording OTDR with disk storage capabilities.
a. Multimode Fiber: Test each fiber at 850 nm and 1,300 nm in one
direction.
b. Single-mode Fiber: Test each fiber at 1,310 nm and 1,550 nm in one
direction.
D. Test Reports: A test report is required for each reel with fiber optic components,
including factory and field test results for each fiber, according to the general test report
requirements in Paragraph 3.1.D.
1. Test Summary Report. The test report will include:
704618 27 10 20
a. Assigned reel identification number.
b. Copy of the OTDR calibration certificate.
c. Manufacturer's product test data.
d. Cable identification as it appears on the Cable Schedule.
e. Cable identification as it appears on the OTDR printout.
f. Cable identification as it is labeled according to the Specifications.
g. Pass or fail status for each fiber strand.
2. The individual test datasheets will consist of the OTDR printouts, one per fiber.
3.3 BACKBONE UTP CABLE SYSTEM TESTING
A. Link Test Configuration: Perform metered tests on each multipair twisted pair cable link
through the wiring block and/or patch panel terminations at each end of the cable section.
B. Channel Test Configuration: Perform metered tests on each multipair twisted pair cable
channel, including all cabling sections, cross-connect equipment, jumper wire and/or
patch cords, and equipment cords through the connectors at each end, but not including
connections to active equipment.
C. Backbone Multipair Performance Tests:

1. Use field instrument capable of the following test parameters:
a. Wire map (identify shorted, open, and crossed pairs).
b. Attenuation.
c. Length.
2. Cable may be tested in one-pair to five-pair increments.
D. Test Reports: Include field test results for each pair, including cable link length. Refer to
Paragraph 3.1.D for the test report requirements.
a. Cable identification as it appears on the Cable Schedule.
b. Cable identification as it is labeled according to the Specifications.
c. Pass or fail status of each cable pair.
2. The individual test datasheets are not required for the backbone UTP cable
system test.
3.4 HORIZONTAL UTP CABLE SYSTEM TESTING
A. Link Test Configuration: Perform metered field tests on each four-pair UTP cable link
through the wiring block, patch panel, and/or telecommunications outlet (TO)
terminations at each end of the cable section using the basic link test configuration
described in Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) / Electronics Industry
Association (EIA) 568-B.1.
B. Channel Test Configuration: Perform metered tests on each four-pair UTP cable channel,
including all cabling sections, cross-connect equipment, jumper wire and/or patch cords,
TOs, and work area station cords through the connectors at each end, but not including
connections to active equipment using the channel test configuration described in
TIA/EIA 568-B.1.
704618 27 10 20
C. The TIA/EIA 568-B.1 standard allows for a 10 percent uncertainty in the nominal
velocity of propagation of signals in a UTP cable when determining the cable length with
an electronic tester. If during a test for a data link the tester identifies a length longer than
90 meters (295 feet), verify the physical length of the cable does not exceed 90 meters.
D. Horizontal Performance Tests:

1. Use field test instrument(s) capable of the following swept/stepped frequency
voltage measurements in accordance with the performance parameters required
by EIA/TIA 568-B.2.
a. Category 3: frequencies up to 16 MHz.
b. Category 5e: frequencies up to 100 MHz.
c. Category 6: frequencies up to 250 MHz.
d. Category 6A: frequencies up to 500 MHz.
2. Test each horizontal link or channel pair to verify/determine wire map, length,
attenuation, and near-end crosstalk (NEXT) as described in TIA/EIA 568-B.1.
E. Test Reports: Include field test results for each pair, including cable link length in
accordance with TIA/EIA 568-B.1. Refer to Paragraph 3.1.D for the test report
requirements.
b. Cable identification as it appears on the individual test reports.
d. Pass or fail status.
2. The individual test datasheet will consist of the automated printout produced by
the cable scanning equipment.
3.5 POST-INSTALLATION FIBER OPTIC CABLE SYSTEM TESTING
A. Link Test Configuration: Perform metered tests on each fiber optic segment through
Fiber Optic Distribution Unit (FDU) and/or TO terminations at each end of the cable
section.
B. Channel Test Configuration: Perform metered tests on each fiber optic channel, including
all link segments, patch cords, and work area station cords through the connectors at each
end, but not including connections to active equipment.
C. Fiber Optic Performance Tests:

1. Calculate the maximum allowable loss budget for each fiber optic link or channel
by adding the theoretical fiber loss based on length and allowances of 0.5 dB per
connector and 0.2 dB per splice.
2. Test each installed and connectorized single-mode and multi-mode fiber optic
link and channel for end-to-end attenuation through FDU and/or TO terminations
using a power meter with a stabilized light source. An OTDR may not be used to
perform the end-to-end attenuation testing.
a. Test Jumpers: Use two test meter reference jumpers for calibration and
testing.
b. Horizontal Multimode Links: Test each fiber link for end-to-end
attenuation in one direction at 850 nm and 1,300 nm.
704618 27 10 20
c. Backbone Multimode Links: Test each fiber link for end-to-end
attenuation in one direction at both 850 nm and 1,300 nm.
d. Backbone Single-mode Links: Test each fiber link for end-to-end
attenuation in one direction at both 1,310 nm and 1,550 nm.
3. In addition to the tests in subparagraph 2 above, when one of the following
conditions occurs, test the link or channel for length and end-to-end, splice, and
connector attenuation through terminations using a recording-type OTDR.
a. Installed and connectorized interbuilding fiber optic cable which includes
a splice.
b. Cable length markings on the cable sheath are not legible.
c. Links or channels that fail the power meter test(s).
4. Terminate meter jumpers using connectors and fiber like those installed in the
system.
D. Test Reports: Include field test results for each fiber strand. Refer to Paragraph 3.1.D for
the test report requirements.
b. Identification of reel from which cable was taken.
d. Pass or fail status for each strand. A strand has failed if it does not pass
any required test.
e. A test summary datasheet is included as an Attachment to this Section.
2. The individual test data will include:
a. Project identification.
b. Cable Segment Identification:
1) Cable run number.
2) Source location and FDU identification.
3) Destination location and FDU identification.
c. Test Equipment Identification:
1) Calibration date.
2) Light source serial number.
3) Receiver serial number.
d. Fiber specifications.
e. Calculated Segment Attenuation:
1) Cable length in kilometers.
2) Calculated link loss at 850 nm wavelength.
3) Calculated link loss at 1,300 nm wavelength.
4) Calculated link loss at 1310 nm wavelength.
5) Calculated link loss at 1,550 nm wavelength.
f. Fiber strand number.
g. Measured segment attenuation.
h. Test technician and date of testing.
i. An attenuation performance datasheet is included as an Attachment to
this Section.
704618 27 10 20
3.6 WARRANTY COMPLIANCE
A. Contractor shall adhere to all manufacturer material handling and installation precautions
and provide any required tests and documentation as indicated by manufacturer’s
warranty procedure documentation.
3.7 ATTACHMENTS
A. None.
WITH BID
27 10 20-01 Provide the proposed testing sequence, X 14 days prior to testing

expected duration of testing, scheduled date
and time for each test. Identify the
manufacture and model of twisted pair and
fiber optic cable test equipment proposed for
use.
27 10 20-02 Provide the proposed on-reel fiber optic X 10 calendar days prior to on-reel
testing procedure, expected duration, and fiber optic testing
scheduled date for testing. Also include test
equipment manufacturer, model, serial
number, and latest certification date.
27 10 20-03 Provide the following: X 5 calendar days after completion
 Manufacturer's product test data for on-the- of each group of testing
reel fiber optic cable components and field-
test data for fibers on each cable reel with
fiber optic components.
 Final performance testing data and test
reports for communications distribution
system cabling systems. Test report
requirements are noted in PART 3 Test
Reports Paragraphs.
END OF SECTION
704618 27 10 20
SECTION 27 13 00
BACKBONE COMMUNICATIONS CABLING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. This Section specifies the requirements to furnish and install an interbuilding and
intrabuilding backbone unshielded twisted pair (UTP) and fiber optic cable
distribution subsystem, including:
a. UTP cable placement and termination.
b. Fiber optic cable placement and termination.
c. Splice closures and related components.
3. Section 27 05 53 Communications Identification.
4. Section 27 05 28 Communications Innerduct.
5. Section 27 10 20 Communications System Testing.
1.2 REFERENCES

5. Building communications room (BCR)
6. Building Industry Consulting Services, International (BICSI)
8. Fiber optic distribution unit (FDU)
9. Main communications room (MCR)
14. Telecommunications closet (TC)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
704618 27 13 00
25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 Backbone Communications Cabling - 1
for this Section.
(National Electric Code - NEC), American National Standards Institute (ANSI) /
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) / Electronics Industry Association
(EIA) 568-B (Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard), TIA – 569-
B (Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces),
ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A (Administration Standard for the Telecommunications
Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings), ANSI-J-STD – 607-A (Joint Standard for
Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications), Building Industry Consulting Services, International (BICSI)
(Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual), as applicable. Where required by
authority having jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by
a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, in
order to provide a basis for approval under the above listed agency. Materials and
equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by Underwriters
Laboratories Inc. (UL) shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL
listing mark or label.
B. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of
C. Strictly adhere to all BICSI, EIA, and TIA recommended installation practices when
installing communications/data cabling.
A. The backbone distribution subsystem refers to interbuilding and intrabuilding

communications distribution subsystem, to interconnect existing communications rooms
on campus with communications rooms within new B300 and B301 buildings.
1. Interbuilding Backbone: Multi-pair copper and multi-strand Single mode and
Multimode fiber cables from existing PBX room and Fab Server Room (FSR) to
new MSR-301-A (Data Center).
2. Intrabuilding Backbone: Multi-pair copper and multi-strand Single mode and
Multimode fiber cables from new MSR-301-A (Data Center) to each satellite
communications room (SCR) and satellite communications cabinet (SCC) within
the B300 & B301 buildings.
704618 27 13 00
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Labeling Materials: Cross-connect labeling materials, including label holders and label
inserts, are provided as part of Section 27 05 53 Communications Identification.
2.2 GROUNDING HARDWARE
A. Cable Shield Ground Connectors: Shield bonding connectors with screw stud connection.
B. Splice Grounding Accessories: Supplied by the splice case manufacturer when available;
otherwise, use 6 American Wire Gauge (AWG) insulated ground wire with shield
bonding connectors.
2.3 TWISTED-PAIR BUILDING SPLICE CLOSURE
A. Building Closures: Twisted-pair fire-retardant splice closures including covers, end

plates, and accessories suitable for installation within buildings.
2.4 TWISTED-PAIR SPLICE CONNECTORS
A. Connectors: Modular splice connectors for use in twisted-pair splice closures. Use fire-
retardant PVC connectors in splice closures located within buildings.
2.5 SPLICE CLOSURE ENCAPSULANT
A. Use an encapsulant compatible with underground cable.
2.6 FIBER OPTIC BUILDING SPLICE CLOSURES
A. Use fiber optic fire-retardant splice closures within buildings.
2.7 PENETRATION SEALING SYSTEMS (WATER)
A. Duct Water Seal: Intended for use to close underground and entrance duct openings
where cable is installed.
2.8 DUCT PLUGS
A. Conduit Plugs: Removable 4-inch screw tight duct plugs.
2.9 MULTIPAIR UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR BACKBONE CABLE
1. Superior Essex International.
2. General Cable.
3. Berk-Tek.
704618 27 13 00
B. Multipair UTP Backbone Cable: 100-ohm UTP cable for use in the backbone distribution
subsystem shall meet or exceed the requirements of TIA/EIA 568-B, 100-ohm UTP
Multipair Backbone Cable.
1. Conductors: WECO color-coded 24 AWG solid copper thermoplastic-insulated
conductors twisted together in pairs.
2. Conductor Core: Pairs twisted together into binder groups of 25 pairs and
assembled to form a single compact core surrounded by a plastic core wrap.
3. Sheath:
a. Gel-Filled Cables: Cores are overlaid with corrugated aluminum and
steel shields covered by a polyethylene outer jacket (ASP sheath).
b. Air-Filled Riser Cables: Cores are overlaid with corrugated aluminum
shield covered by a PVC outer jacket.
c. Air-Filled Plenum Cables: Cores with or without aluminum shield
overlay covered by a thermoplastic outer jacket suitable for use in
plenums. Cables without shields require a parallel external 6 AWG
ground conductor.
C. Type ANMW, Bell system type ANMW, UTP Cable for Direct Burial or Underground
Conduit Installation:
1. Pair Size: As shown on the Drawings.
2. Assembly: Gel-filled with outer shield.
D. Multi-Pair Backbone, Category 3, Twisted-Pair Nonplenum Cable, NEC/UL CMR

listing:
2. Assembly: Conductor core is covered by a color-coded PVC outer jacket with a
nylon binder and rip cord for tearing back the sheath.
E. Multi-Pair Backbone, Category 3 Twisted-Pair Plenum Cable, NEC/UL CMP listing:

2. Assembly: Conductor core is covered by an ECTFE outer jacket.
2.10 SINGLE-MODE FIBER OPTIC CABLE
B. Single-Mode Optical Fibers: 8.3/125-micron, ISO OS2 grade, for use in the backbone
distribution subsystem shall meet or exceed the requirements of TIA/EIA 568-C.3,
including the following specifications:
1. Maximum Attenuation:
a. Outside Optical Fiber Cable:
1) 0.5 dB per km at 1,310 nm.
2) 0.5 dB per km at 1,550 nm.
b. Inside Optical Fiber Cable:
1) 1 dB per km at 1,310 nm.
2) 1 dB per km at 1,550 nm.
704618 27 13 00
C. Type 8.3/250-OSP, Backbone Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cable for Underground Conduit
Installation:
1. Individual Fibers: 8.3/125/250 microns.
2. Assembly: Nonmetallic gel-filled, loose-tube fiber core with dielectric strength
member enclosed by a nonmetallic cross-ply sheath; requires buffer tubing.
3. NEC/UL Listing: None; not approved for general use within building except
when installed in metallic conduit.
D. Type 8.3/250, Backbone Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cable for Underground Conduit and
Building Riser Installation, with NEC/UL OFNR Listing:
1. Individual Fibers: 8.3/125/250 microns.
2. Assembly: Nonmetallic gel-filled, loose-tube fiber core with dielectric-strength
E. Type 8.3/900, Backbone Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cable for Building Installation, with
NEC/UL OFNR Listing:
1. Individual Fibers: 8.3/125/250/900 microns.
2. Assembly: Core of individually tight-buffered fibers is surrounded by a
nonmetallic sheath.
F. Type 8.3/900P, Backbone Single-Mode Fiber Optic Cable for Building Installation, with
NEC/UL OFNP Listing:
1. Individual Fibers: 8.3/125/250/900 microns.
nonmetallic sheath.
2.11 MULTI-MODE FIBER OPTIC CABLE
B. Multi-mode Optical Fibers 50/125 ISO rated OM4 graded-index optical fibers for use in
the backbone and horizontal distribution subsystems, meets or exceeds the requirements
of EIA/TIA 568-B.3, including the following specifications:
1. OM4:
a. Maximum Mean Fiber Loss:
1) 3.5 dB per km at 850 nm.
2) 1.5 dB per km at 1,300 nm.
b. Minimum Overfilled Modal Bandwidth-Length Product:
1) 3,500 MHz•km at 850 nm.
2) 500 MHz•km at 1,300 nm.
c. Minimum Effective Modal Bandwidth-Length Product:
1) 4,700 MHz•km at 850 nm.
2) Not applicable at 1,300 nm.
C. Type 50/250-OSP, Backbone Multi-mode Fiber Optic Cable for Underground Conduit
Installation:
1. Individual Fibers: 50/125/250 micron.
704618 27 13 00
2. Assembly: Nonmetallic gel-filled loose-tube fiber core with dielectric strength
member enclosed by a nonmetallic sheath; requires buffer tubing.
3. NEC/UL Listing: None; not approved for general use within buildings except
when installed in metallic conduit.
D. Type 50/250, Backbone Multi-mode Fiber Optic Cable for Underground Conduit and
Building Riser Installation, with NEC/UL OFNR Listing:
1. Individual Fibers: 50/125/250 microns.
2. Assembly: Nonmetallic gel-filled, loose-tube fiber core with dielectric-strength
E. Type 50/900, Multi-mode Fiber Optic Indoor/Outdoor Cable, with NEC/UL OFNR
Listing:
1. Individual Fibers: 50/125/250/900 micron.
nonmetallic sheath.
F. Type 50/900P, Multi-mode Fiber Optic Indoor Cable, with NEC/UL OFNP Listing:
1. Individual Fibers: 50/125/900 micron.
nonmetallic sheath.
2.12 FIBER OPTIC CONNECTORS
B. Single-Mode Connectors: FOCIS and TIA-568.C.3 Compatible, Ceramic zirconia ferrule

with rear body suitable for 1.6-mm 3-mm maximum cable diameter and termination on
single-mode fiber.
1. Connector Type: LC.
C. Multi-mode Connectors: FOCIS and TIA-568.C.3 Compatible, Ceramic zirconia ferrule

with rear body suitable for 1.6-mm 3-mm maximum cable diameter and termination on
multi-mode fiber.
1. Connector Type: LC.
D. Field Polish Termination: Field installable connector designed for heat-cure epoxy or
anaerobic epoxy adhesive. Example:
1. Corning Heat-Cure connector.
E. Field Terminated Pre-Polished: Field-installable connector with a factory pre-polished

ferrule incorporating a mechanical splice in the connector body. Example:
1. Corning UniCam® connector.
2. Corning OptiSnap® connector.
704618 27 13 00
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Ensure that all conduit raceway ends are capped with conduit collars to protect cables. Be
sure all raceway and cable tray routes are free from debris or obstructions.
B. Conduct fiber optic cable reel tests as specified in Section 27 10 20 Communications

System Testing.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install innerduct in accordance with the provisions of Section 27 05 28 Communications

Innerduct.
B. Place and terminate twisted-pair and fiber optic cable in accordance with manufacturer
installation guidelines.
C. Provide splice closures as indicated on the drawings:

1. Use 710 connectors for twisted-pair splicing. Use fire-retardant type in splice
closures located inside buildings.
2. The fusion process is to be used for fiber optic splicing. The maximum allowable
loss per fusion splice is 0.2 dB.
3. Following the completion of testing, underground splice closures to satisfactorily
pass an air pressure test and then be filled with encapsulant.
4. After underground splice closures are sealed, pressure wash handholes and
manholes where splice closures are installed.
D. Underground Conduit Openings: Seal the high end of underground duct section openings
to protect against water and gas leaks; use water seal with installed cables and removable
4-inch screwtight duct plugs in vacant underground duct openings.
E. Raceway Entrances: Seal raceways entering structures, including conduit and innerduct
with cable installed, at the first box or outlet to prevent the entrance of gases, liquids, or
rodents into the structure.
1. Inspect entrance seal installation by others between building structure and/or
innerduct and conduit to verify integrity of installation.
2. Empty Conduit: Unless provided by others, install removable screwtight duct
plugs.
3. Conduit with Innerduct Installed: Install suitable duct water seal between conduit
and innerduct.
4. After Cable Installed: Install suitable duct water seal between conduit and cable
or between innerduct and cable.
F. Fire-rated Wall and Floor Penetrations:

1. Inspect firestopping installation by others between building structure and/or
installation.
2. Exposed Cable:
704618 27 13 00
a. Before Cable Installation: Unless provided by others, install conduit
sleeves with insulating throat bushings or fire-barrier sealing systems in
openings where open cable passes through fire-rated walls and floors.
b. After Cable Installation: Install intumescent fire-barrier penetration
sealing materials between cables and sleeves or install fire-barrier sealing
systems.
3. Raceways: After cable installation, install intumescent fire-barrier penetration
sealing materials between cables and conduit, innerduct, or wireway at exposed
penetration locations.
4. Cable Trays:
a. During Cable Installation: Protect firestopping materials throughout the
construction period to maintain each assembly without any indication of
damage.
b. After Cable Installation: Restore fire-barrier penetration sealing materials
to provide required protection.
G. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage during water seal or firestop installation; repair
any damage.
H. Furnish and install wire and hardware required to properly ground and bond
communications cable and equipment in accordance with the provisions of
Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. The following
additional requirements apply:
1. Serve each metallic splice closure by a minimum of a 6 AWG insulated copper
wire connected to a ground source.
2. Bond multipair communications cable metallic sheaths together at each splicing
and/or terminating location to provide 100 percent metallic sheath continuity
throughout the communications distribution system.
a. At termination points, install a cable shield bonding connector to provide
a screw stud connection for ground wire. Use a bonding jumper to
connect the cable shield connector to an appropriate ground source like
an equipment rack or cabinet ground bar.
b. Bond metallic cable shields together within splice closures using cable
shield bonding connectors or the splice case grounding and bonding
accessories provided by the splice case manufacturer.
3. If a metallic shield is not provided within the sheath around a multipair cable
core, install a green, insulated 6 AWG stranded ground conductor run parallel to
the multipair cable. Connect 6 AWG to building ground.
I. Identify and label the system in accordance with the provisions of

Section 27 05 53 Communications Identification.
3.3 FINAL TEST
A. Conduct final system testing in accordance with the provisions of

Section 27 10 20 Communications System Testing.
704618 27 13 00
WITH BID
27 13 00-01 Provide manufacturer’s cutsheets, clearly X Within 10 working days after

indicating specific products proposed for use. contract award
27 13 00-02 Submit backbone cable schedule checkoff list X Provide with record documents.
for each installed, terminated, and labeled
cable showing completions and as-built
corrections. Schedule(s) provided with the
drawings to be used as the basis for this
submittal. Format or content variations to be
approved by CH2M prior to start of
installation.
27 13 00-03 Submit backbone cable splicing schedule X Provide with record documents.
checkoff list for each installed splice closure
showing completions and as-built corrections.
Use cable identification provided in the
drawings.
27 13 00-04 Provide wiring block and fiber distribution X Provide with record documents.
unit (FDU) addressing and/or numbering lists
for cables installed. Use identification
provided in the drawings.
27 13 00-05 Provide test documentation in accordance X Provide with record documents.
with Section 27 10 20 Communication
System Testing
END OF SECTION
704618 27 13 00
SECTION 27 15 00
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable placement and termination.
2. Telecommunications outlet (TO) components.
3. Telecommunications consolidation point (CP) components.
1. Section 27 00 10 . General Communication Requirements.
2. Section 27 05 53 Communications Identification.
2.3. Section 27 10 10 Basic Communications Materials and Methods.
4. Section 27 10 20 Communications System Testing.
3.5. Section 27 115 00 Communications Horizontal CablingEquipment Room
Fittings.
1.2 REFERENCES

3. Building Industry Consulting Services, International (BICSI)
4. Consolidation point (CP)
6. Horizontal distribution terminal (HDT)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
for this Section.
704618 27 15 00
25 APRIL 2019– Rev. 1 Communications Horizontal Cabling - 1
(National Electric Code - NEC), American National Standards Institute (ANSI) /
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) / Electronics Industry Association
(EIA) 568-B (Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard), TIA 569-B
(Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces),
ANSI/TIA/EIA 606-A (Administration Standard for the Telecommunications
Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings), ANSI-J-STD 607-A (Joint Standard for
Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications), Building Industry Consulting Services, International (BICSI)
(Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual), as applicable. Where required by
authority having jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by
a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, in
order to provide a basis for approval under the above listed agency.

C. Strictly adhere to all BICSI, EIA, and TIA recommended installation practices when
installing communications/data cabling.
D. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of
E. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment,
A. The horizontal distribution subsystem refers to intrabuilding UTP and fiber optic
communications cabling connecting satellite communications rooms (SCRs) and satellite
communications cabinets (SCCs) to consolidation points (CPs) and (TOs) located at the
work area.
B. Cables are routed through spaces below raised floors, open ceiling areas, and spaces
above suspended ceiling tile. Primary support is provided by conduit, wireway, and cable
tray. Open cable supports such as J-hooks shall be used only in areas indicated on plans
to provide support between wireway or cable tray and some TO locations.
C. Basic methods used to provide horizontal cables to work area locations:

1. Conduit directly connects SCRs or SCCs to outlet boxes used for TOs.
2. Conduit provides as raceway between a wireway or cable tray and an outlet box
used for a TO.
3. Dedicated outlet conduit from ceiling space serves individual wall outlet boxes
used for TOs.
4. Cleanroom ceiling devices are served via J-hook pathway with TO’s secured to
ceiling grid supports within the interstitial space.
704618 27 15 00
5. Raised floor work areas are served from J-hook pathway below the raised floor to
floorboxes within raised floor system.
6. Cubicle areas may include power pole outlets or furniture system outlets.
7. Fab level CP devices are served from cable tray on SubFab level up through slab
pop outs and cables are terminated on patch panels below the cleanroom floor.
8. SubFab level CP devices are served from cable tray on SubFab level and are
terminated on patch panels below the lateral rack cable tray.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS (TO)
A. Wall-mount outlet with mounting lugs used as an interface for plug-in modular wall
telephone sets.
1. Stainless steel phone plate with single port:
a. Part number example: Ortronics OR-403STJ1WP.
B. Modular Telecommunications Outlet System:

1. Single Gang, White Face Plate.
a. Modular Two-Port Outlet Faceplate.
b. Modular Four-Port Outlet Faceplate.
c. Modular Six-Port Outlet Faceplate.
d. Integrated outlet label area and clear cover.
2. Single Gang, Stainless Steel Face Plate for use in interstitial and other clean-air
stream areas.
a. Modular Two-Port Outlet Faceplate.
b. Modular Four-Port Outlet Faceplate.
c. Modular Six-Port Outlet Faceplate.
d. Integrated outlet label area and clear cover.
3. Modular Faceplate Inserts:
a. Category 6A Jack, White, Unshielded.
b. Blank insert, White.
4. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: Minimum depth of (TBD) inches.
5. Metallic Outlet Box per 27 10 10 Basic Communications Materials and Methods
es:
a. 5” Square Outlet boxes:
1) Manufactuerer: Randl Industries, Inc.
2) Approved part numbers:
a) T-55017
b) T-55018
5. T-55019
C. Consolidation Points (CP’s)

1. 48-port patch panel per specification 27 10 10 Basic Communications Materials
and Methods.
D. Camera Telecom Outlets
704618 27 15 00
c)1. Male RJ-45 smodular plug per 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling
Part 2.4.
2.2 UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR HORIZONTAL CABLE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and product series:

1. Belden.
1. Pproduct series: 10GXS
a.2. Mohawk product series: small diameter GigaLAN 10
B. UTP Horizontal Cable: 100-ohm UTP cable for use in the horizontal distribution
subsystem shall meet or exceed the requirements of TIA/EIA 568-B.2, 100-ohm UTP
Cable.
1. EIA/TIA Category: 6A.
2. Conductors: WECO color-coded 24 AWG solid copper thermoplastic-insulated
conductors twisted together in pairs; rated 60 degrees C and 300 volts.
3. Assembly: Pairs formed together into multi-pair groups and enclosed by a
thermoplastic jacket.
4. Four-pair cable sheaths must be clearly factory colored or color labeled at
intervals not greater than 1 foot to easily differentiate between up to four cables.
C. Type UTP6A, Category 6A four-pair UTP nonplenum cable, NEC/UL CM or CMR

Listing.
D. Type UTP6AP, Category 6A four-pair UTP plenum cable, NEC/UL CMP listing.
2.3 CATEGORY 6A UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR MODULAR JACK CONNECTORS

(FEMALE-RJ-45)

1. Belden - REVConnect Jack 10GX UTP - RVAMJKUEW-S1
1.2. Ortronics - OR-KT2J6A
2.4 CATEGORY 6A UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR MODULAR PLUG CONNECTORS

(MALE-RJ-45)

1. Belden - REVConnect 10GX UTP Plugs - RVAFPUBK-S1
1.2. Ortronics - FTPUC6A
B. The modular plug assemblies used to terminate the 4-pair balanced twisted-pair cable
shall have the characteristics listed below.
1. The connector termination method shall involve no pair separation making
bonded-pair cable quick and easy to terminate.
2. The connector shall incorporate crosstalk compensation circuitry at their plug
interfaces, using flexible printed circuit board (PCB) technology in order to meet
the TIA 568-C.2 mated connection requirements extended in frequency up to 625
MHz.
704618 27 15 00
3. When mated to cordage, the transmission characteristics of the connector shall be
guaranteed at 625 MHz. The minimum guaranteed values at 625 MHz are as
follows:
a. NEXT at 625 MHz = 37.1 dB
b. PSANEXT at 625 MHz = 56.1 dB
c. Return Loss @ 625 MHz = 13.0 dB
2.5 ANALOG WALL PHONE UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR MODULAR JACK

CONNECTORS (FEMALE 6P4C)

1. Belden - AX100590
2. Ortronics - OR-KSRJ25A
2.52.6 SUSPENDED CABLE SUPPORTS
A. Wide Base Supports: Do not exceed recommended cable capacity.
2.7 EXTERIOR, WEATHERPROOF ANALOG PHONE

1. GAI-Tronics – 256-001
2.8 CLASS-1, DIVISION-2 WALL PHONE

1. GAI-Tronics – 226-002
A.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Ensure that conduit raceway ends are capped with conduit collars to protect cables. Be
sure raceway and cable tray routes are free from debris or obstructions.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Install HDT components, TOs, and related materials plumb, as shown on the drawings,
and in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and procedures.
B. Place and terminate UTP cable in accordance with the provisions of

Section 27 10 15 Communications Cable and Accessories.
C. Horizontal Cable Support: Where specified on the drawings between TOs and raceway or
cable tray entrances, support horizontal cables from structure using J-hooks:
704618 27 15 00
1. Support J-hooks from a rigid mount such as a beam, 1/4-inch threaded rod or
1/4-inch plain rod. When supporting a J-hook from a rod, place a nut at the
bottom of the rod to prevent the J-hook from slipping off the end of the rod.
2. Support wires, when used, to be dedicated to the communications cable support.
There cannot be any attachment or contact with similar wires used for the ceiling
grid support. The independent support wire to be supported at both ends. Do not
support the independent support wire to the ceiling grid. Do not support J-hooks
using ceiling support wire.
3. Support single cables at intervals not to exceed 4 feet.
4. Support bundles of two or more cables at intervals not to exceed 4 feet with cable
tie bundling every 2 feet.
5. J-hook support assemblies to be of adequate size to support the intended cable
load.
D. Remove and replace ceiling tile as required to obtain access for completing this
Contractor's portion of the project. Repair ceiling tile damage caused by this activity.
E. Modular Furniture/Power Poles: At the entry point to power poles and modular furniture
partitions, tie or enclose the cable bundles in a manner that does not restrict the bend
radius of the components.
F. Fire-rated Wall and Floor Penetrations:

1. Inspect firestopping installation by others between building structure and/or
installation.
2. The Contractor is responsible for locating and providing fire-rated wall
penetrations where required.
a. For Exposed Cable:
1) Before Cable Installation: Install conduit sleeves with insulating
throat bushings and fire-barrier sealing systems in openings
where open cable passes through fire-rated walls and floors.
2) After Cable Installation: Install intumescent fire barrier
penetration sealing materials between cables and sleeves or
install fire barrier sealing systems.
b. For Raceways: After cable installation, install intumescent fire barrier
penetration sealing materials between cables and conduit, innerduct, or
wireway at exposed penetration locations.
c. For Cable Trays:
1) Before Cable Installation: Protect firestopping materials through-
out the construction period in a clean and properly protected
condition to maintain each assembly without any indication of
damage.
2) After Cable Installation: Restore fire barrier penetration sealing
materials to provide required protection.
3. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage during water seal or firestop installation;
repair any damage.
G. Hazardous Areas: Ensure that each conduit running from a nonhazardous area to a
hazardous area and each conduit entering an enclosure within a hazardous area is
704618 27 15 00
provided with a sealing fitting which meets applicable NEC 500 requirements. After
installing and terminating cables serving hazardous locations, seal cables in conduit by
filling sealing fittings using an approved sealing compound of the same manufacture.
H. Identify and label the system in accordance with the provisions of

Section 27 05 53 Communications Identification.
I. Place blank covers over unused/unterminated TO and TO jack openings.
3.3 CONSOLIDATION POINT INSTALLATION
A. When shown on the drawings, a wiring block is used at a CP to provide a transition

connection between UTP cables running to the serving communication room and UTP
cables running to TOs in the work area. Wiring block-to-wiring block cross connections
are not permitted at CPs.
B. For CPs, provide and install wiring block systems and related components as specified in
Part 2.1 of this specificationSection 27 11 00 Communications Equipment Room Fittings.
3.4 FINAL TEST
A. Conduct final system testing in accordance with the provisions of


WITH BID
27 15 00-01 Submit horizontal cable schedule checkoff list X Provide with project record
for each installed, terminated, and labeled documents.
cable showing completions and as-built
corrections
27 15 00-02 Provide wiring block addressing and/or X Provide with project record
numbering lists for cables installed documents.
27 15 00-03 Provide test documentation in accordance X Provide with project record
with Section 27 10 20 Communication documents.
System Testing
END OF SECTION
704618 27 15 00
BLUE RIDGE
B300 SCC-11 HORIZONTAL CABLE SCHEDULE
GENERAL NOTES
A REFER TO DRAWING SHEET MTVT0-0001 FOR PROJECT GENERAL NOTES, LEGENDS AND ABBREVIATIONS.
B PROVIDE AS-BUILT INFORMATION FOR ANY CHANGES TO THIS CABLE SCHEDULE. INSERT THE "TO
TEST SUMMARY" INFORMATION INTO THIS SCHEDULE. SUBMIT THIS SCHEDULE WITH THE
INDIVIDUAL TEST DATA SHEETS.
C SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 271500 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FOR THE HORIZONTAL CABLING
AND TERMINATION HARDWARE ASSOCIATED WITH THE CABLING ON THIS SCHEDULE.
D ALL VOICE CABLES SHALL BE TERMINATED WITH RJ-11, 6P4C MODULAR JACK AT THE TELECOM OUTLET.
E UPON INSTALLING OFCI WIRELESS ACCESS POINT DEVICES, NOTE MAC ADDRESS FOR EACH PHYSICAL
DEVICE ASSOCIATED WITH THIS SCHEDULE AND UPON COMPLETION OF THIS EFFORT, PROVIDE THE
OWNER A TYPED COPY OF THIS SCHEDULE REFLECTING THE MAC ADDRESS ASSOCIATED WITH EACH
WIRELESS ACCESS POINT TELECOM OUTLET NOTED BELOW.
F SOME DEVICES WITHIN THIS PROJECT DO NOT HAVE DEDICATED HOME-RUN TELECOM OUTLETS,
INSTEAD ARE SERVED FROM CONSOLIDATION POINTS (CP's). REFER TO CP PORT UTILIZATION
SCHEDULE, SPECIFICATION 27_15_00 - 301.CP, FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
G REFER TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 27_15_00 FOR PATCH CORD PROVISION REQUIREMENTS.
H CAMERA TERMINATIONS SHALL BE TERMINATED USING MALE RJ-45 PLUGS AT CAMERA DEVICE END. SEE
SPECIFICATION 27_15_00 AND DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
CABLE TYPE KEY

CAT6A CATEGORY 6A UTP 4 PR CABLE
704618 Communications Horizontal Cabling - 300.11 CUP SCC

25 APRIL 2019 - Rev. 0 MICRON CONFIDENTIAL 27 15 00.300.11 - 1
OUTLET (TO) CABLE TERMINATION TO TEST
IDENTIFICATION TO DATA CABLE TO VOICE CABLE SUMMARY
TELECOM PORT #
CABLE RACK CABLE RACK BLOCK PASS
OUTLET LABEL QTY RACK PANEL START QTY BLOCK PAIR # DATE NOTES REV
TYPE ROW TYPE NO ROW FAIL
BLDG-LEVEL-RM-NUM END
300-0-11-001 4 CAT 6A A 1 01 1 4 PLC-86-3U-05-01 0

300-0-11-002 1 CAT 6A A 1 01 5 5 LCP-40-3U-02-01 0
300-0-11-003 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 6 7 AFD-3A-3U-02-06 0
300-0-11-004 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 8 9 AFD-3A-3U-02-07 0
300-0-11-005 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 10 11 AFD-3B-3U-02-01 0
300-0-11-006 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 12 13 AFD-3B-3U-02-02 0
300-0-11-007 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 14 15 AFD-3B-3U-02-03 0
300-0-11-008 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 16 17 AFD-3C-3U-04-01 0
300-0-11-009 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 18 19 AFD-3C-3U-04-02 0
300-0-11-010 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 20 21 AFD-3C-3U-04-03 0
300-0-11-011 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 22 23 AFD-3C-3U-04-04 0
300-0-11-012 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 24 25 AFD-3C-3U-04-05 0
300-0-11-013 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 26 27 AFD-3C-3U-04-06 0
300-0-11-014 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 28 29 AFD-3D-3U-04-01 0
300-0-11-015 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 30 31 AFD-3D-3U-04-02 0
300-0-11-016 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 32 33 AFD-3D-3U-04-03 0
300-0-11-017 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 34 35 AFD-3D-3U-04-04 0
300-0-11-018 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 36 37 AFD-3D-3U-04-05 0
300-0-11-019 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 38 39 AFD-40-3U-02-01 0
300-0-11-020 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 40 41 AFD-40-3U-02-02 0
300-0-11-021 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 42 43 AFD-40-3U-02-03 0
300-0-11-022 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 44 45 AFD-40-3U-02-04 0
300-0-11-023 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 46 47 AFD-40-3U-02-05 0
300-0-11-024 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 1 2 AFD-40-3U-02-06 0
300-0-11-025 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 3 4 CH-3A-3U-01-01 0
300-0-11-026 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 5 6 CH-3A-3U-01-02 0
300-0-11-027 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 7 8 CH-3A-3U-01-03 0
300-0-11-028 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 9 10 CH-3A-3U-01-04 0
300-0-11-029 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 11 12 CH-3B-3U-01-03 0
300-0-11-030 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 13 14 CH-3B-3U-01-04 0
300-0-11-031 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 15 16 CH-3B-3U-01-05 0
300-0-11-032 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 17 18 CH-3B-3U-01-06 0
300-0-11-033 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 19 20 GEN 1 TANK 0
300-0-11-034 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 21 22 GEN 2 TANK 0
300-0-11-035 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 23 24 GEN 3 TANK 0
300-0-11-036 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 25 26 GEN 4 TANK 0
300-0-11-037 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 27 28 GEN MC-1 0
300-0-11-038 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 29 30 GENERATOR 1 0
300-0-11-039 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 31 32 GENERATOR 2 0
300-0-11-040 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 33 34 GENERATOR 3 0
300-0-11-041 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 35 36 GENERATOR 4 0
300-0-11-042 1 CAT 6A A 1 02 37 37 BLR-40-3U-01-02 0
300-0-11-043 1 CAT 6A A 1 02 38 38 BLR-40-3U-01-03 0
300-0-11-044 1 CAT 6A A 1 02 39 39 BLR-40-3U-01-04 0
300-0-11-045 1 CAT 6A A 1 02 40 40 BLR-40-3U-01-05 0
300-0-11-046 1 CAT 6A A 1 02 41 41 BLR-40-3U-01-06 0
300-0-11-047 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 1 1 4 0
300-0-11-048 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 1 5 8 0
300-0-11-049 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 1 9 12 0
300-0-11-050 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 1 13 16 0
300-0-11-051 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 1 17 20 0
300-0-11-052 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 1 21 24 34.5kV DVR SWITCHGEAR 0
300-1-11-053 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 42 43 31 B MAIN SWITCHGEAR
34.5kV 0
300-1-11-054 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 44 45 30 0
300-0-11-055 1 CAT 6A A 1 02 46 46 CCC-3U-00-A12-10 0
300-0-11-056 1 CAT 6A A 1 02 47 47 CCC-3U-00-A12-9 0
300-0-11-057 1 CAT 6A A 1 02 48 48 CCC-3U-00-A300-11-8 0
300-0-11-058 1 CAT 6A A 1 03 1 1 CCC-3U-00-E10-13 0
300-0-11-059 1 CAT 6A A 1 03 2 2 CCC-3U-00-E11-14 0
300-0-11-060 1 CAT 6A A 1 03 3 3 CCC-3U-00-H12-15 0
300-0-11-061 1 CAT 6A A 1 03 4 4 CCC-3U-00-K12-44 0
300-0-11-062 1 CAT 6A A 1 03 5 5 CCC-3U-00-N09-16 0

300-0-11-063 1 CAT 6A A 1 03 6 6 CCC-3U-00-N12-17 0
300-0-11-064 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 7 8 300-0-A/11 0
300-0-11-065 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 9 10 300-0-D/11 0
300-0-11-066 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 11 12 300-0-F/11 0
300-0-11-067 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 13 14 300-0-F/9 0
300-0-11-068 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 15 16 300-0-G/11 0
300-0-11-069 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 17 18 300-0-H/9 0
300-0-11-070 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 19 20 300-0-J/11 0
300-0-11-071 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 21 22 300-0-L/9 0
300-0-11-072 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 23 24 300-0-L/11 0

BLUE RIDGE
B300 SCR-21 HORIZONTAL CABLE SCHEDULE
GENERAL NOTES
CABLE TYPE KEY

704618 Communications Horizontal Cabling - 300.21 CUP SCr

TELECOM PORT #
300-1-21-001 4 CAT 6A A 2 01 1 4 PLC-86-3U-02-01 0

300-1-21-002 2 CAT 6A A 2 01 5 6 3UU4U1L2 - UPS 0
300-1-21-003 2 CAT 6A A 2 01 7 8 BATTERY CHARGER 1 0
300-1-21-004 2 CAT 6A A 2 01 9 10 BATTERY CHARGER 2 0
300-1-21-005 2 CAT 6A A 2 01 11 12 SCP 1 0
300-1-21-006 2 CAT 6A A 2 01 13 14 SCP 2 0
300-1-21-007 1 CAT 6A A 2 01 15 15 CRAC-300-11-3U-07-01 0
300-1-21-008 2 CAT 6A A 2 01 16 17 A/V-1 0
300-1-21-009 2 CAT 6A A 2 01 18 19 A/V-2 0
300-1-21-010 2 CAT 6A A 2 01 20 21 A/V-3 0
300-1-21-011 2 CAT 6A A 2 01 22 23 A/V-4 0
300-1-21-012 2 CAT 6A A 2 01 24 25 A/V-5 0
300-1-21-013 2 CAT 6A A 2 01 26 27 A/V-6 0
300-0-21-014 4 CAT 6A A 2 01 28 31 PLC-86-3U-01-01A 0
300-0-21-015 4 CAT 6A A 2 01 32 35 PLC-86-3U-01-01B 0
300-1-21-016 2 CAT 6A A 2 01 36 37 3UE4TT1K4A 0
300-1-21-017 2 CAT 6A A 2 01 38 39 3UE4TT1K4B 0
300-1-21-018 2 CAT 6A A 2 01 40 41 3UE4TT1L4B 0
300-1-21-019 2 CAT 6A A 2 01 42 43 3UE4TT1L4C 0
300-0-21-020 2 CAT 6A A 2 01 44 45 AFD-3A-3U-02-01 0
300-0-21-021 2 CAT 6A A 2 01 46 47 AFD-3A-3U-02-02 0
300-0-21-022 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 1 2 AFD-3A-3U-02-03 0
300-0-21-023 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 3 4 AFD-3A-3U-02-04 0
300-0-21-024 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 5 6 AFD-3A-3U-02-05 0
300-0-21-025 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 7 8 AFD-3A-3U-03-01 0
300-0-21-026 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 9 10 AFD-3A-3U-03-02 0
300-0-21-027 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 11 12 AFD-3A-3U-03-03 0
300-0-21-028 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 13 14 AFD-3A-3U-03-04 0
300-0-21-029 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 15 16 AFD-3A-3U-03-05 0
300-1-21-030 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 17 18 AFD-3C-3U-01-01 0
300-1-21-031 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 19 20 AFD-3C-3U-01-01 0
300-1-21-032 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 21 22 AFD-3C-3U-01-02 0
300-1-21-033 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 23 24 AFD-3C-3U-01-02 0
300-1-21-034 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 25 26 AFD-3C-3U-01-03 0
300-1-21-035 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 27 28 AFD-3C-3U-01-03 0
300-1-21-036 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 29 30 AFD-3C-3U-01-04 0
300-1-21-037 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 31 32 AFD-3D-3U-01-04 0
300-1-21-038 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 33 34 AFD-3D-3U-01-05 0
300-1-21-039 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 35 36 AFD-3D-3U-01-05 0
300-1-21-040 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 37 38 AFD-3D-3U-01-06 0
300-1-21-041 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 39 40 AFD-3D-3U-01-06 0
300-1-21-042 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 41 42 AFD-3D-3U-01-07 0
300-0-21-043 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 43 44 AFD-64-3U-02-01 0
300-0-21-044 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 45 46 AFD-64-3U-02-02 0
300-1-21-045 2 CAT 6A A 2 02 47 48 AHU-300-11-3U-01-01 0
300-1-21-046 2 CAT 6A A 2 03 1 2 AHU-300-11-3U-01-02 0
300-0-21-047 2 CAT 6A A 2 03 3 4 ATS-31 0
300-0-21-048 2 CAT 6A A 2 03 5 6 ATS-32 0
300-0-21-049 2 CAT 6A A 2 03 7 8 CH-3A-3U-01-05 0
300-0-21-050 2 CAT 6A A 2 03 9 10 CH-3A-3U-01-06 0
300-0-21-051 2 CAT 6A A 2 03 11 12 CH-3A-3U-01-07 0
300-0-21-052 2 CAT 6A A 2 03 13 14 CH-3B-3U-01-01 0
300-0-21-053 2 CAT 6A A 2 03 15 16 CH-3B-3U-01-02 0
300--21-054 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 1 04 0
300-0-21-055 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 05 08 0
300-0-21-056 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 09 12 0
300-0-21-057 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 13 16 0
300-0-21-058 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 17 20 0
300-0-21-059 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 21 24 0
300-0-21-060 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 26 29 0
300-0-21-061 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 30 33 0
300-1-21-062 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 34 37 0

TELECOM PORT #
300-1-21-063 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 38 41 0
300-1-21-064 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 42 45 0
300-0-21-065 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 46 49 0
300-1-21-066 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 51 54 0
300-0-21-067 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 55 58 0
300-0-21-068 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 59 62 0
300-0-21-069 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 63 66 0
300-0-21-070 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 67 70 0
300-0-21-071 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 71 74 0
300-1-21-072 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 04 76 79 0
300-0-21-073 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 04 80 83 0
300-0-21-074 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 04 84 87 0
300-1-21-075 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 04 88 91 0
300-0-21-076 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 04 92 95 0
300-0-21-077 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 04 04 01 04 0
300-0-21-078 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 04 01 05 08 0
300-0-21-079 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 04 01 09 12 0
300-0-21-080 0 0 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 04 01 13 16 0
300-1-21-081 24 CAT 6A A 2 03 1 24 SECURITY PATCHPANEL 0
300-1-21-082 4 CAT 6A A 2 03 17 20 0
300-1-21-083 4 CAT 6A A 2 03 21 24 0
300-1-21-084 4 CAT 6A A 2 03 25 28 0
300-1-21-085 4 CAT 6A A 2 03 29 32 0
300-1-21-086 4 CAT 6A A 2 03 33 36 0
300-1-21-087 4 CAT 6A A 2 03 37 40 0
300-1-21-088 4 CAT 6A A 2 03 41 44 0
300-1-21-089 4 CAT 6A A 2 03 45 48 0
300-1-21-090 4 CAT 6A A 2 04 1 4 0
300-1-21-091 4 CAT 6A A 2 04 5 8 0
300-1-21-092 4 CAT 6A A 2 04 9 12 0
300-1-21-093 4 CAT 6A A 2 04 13 16 0
300-1-21-094 4 CAT 6A A 2 04 17 20 0
300-1-21-095 4 CAT 6A A 2 04 21 24 0
300-1-21-096 4 CAT 6A A 2 04 25 28 34.5kV DVR SWITCHGEAR 0
300-1-21-097 2 CAT 6A A 2 04 29 30 31 A 0
300-0-21-098 2 CAT 6A A 2 04 31 32 4.16kV CUP UNIT SS 33 0
300-0-21-099 2 CAT 6A A 2 04 33 34 4.16kV CUP UNIT SS 34 0
300-0-21-100 2 CAT 6A A 2 04 35 36 480V CUP UNIT SS 32-1 0
300-0-21-103 2 CAT 6A A 2 04 41 42 480V CUP UNIT
GENERATOR SS 32-4
SWGR 0
300-0-21-104 2 CAT 6A A 2 04 43 44 EMERG-1
GENERATOR SWGR 0
300-0-21-105 2 CAT 6A A 2 04 45 46 EMERG-2 0
300-0-21-106 1 CAT 6A A 2 04 47 47 CCC-3U-00-F01-3 0
300-0-21-107 1 CAT 6A A 2 04 48 48 CCC-3U-00-M03-22 0
300-1-21-108 1 CAT 6A A 2 05 1 1 CCC-3U-01-L01-19 0
300-0-21-109 1 CAT 6A A 2 05 2 2 ELEVATOR CONTROL 0
300-0-21-110 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 3 4 300-0-G/5 0
300-0-21-111 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 5 6 300-0-E/2 0
300-1-21-112 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 7 8 300-1-F/3 0
300-0-21-113 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 9 10 300-0-F/7 0
300-1-21-114 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 11 12 300-1-H/3 0
300-0-21-115 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 13 14 300-0-H/3 0
300-0-21-116 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 15 16 300-0-G/7 0
300-0-21-117 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 17 18 300-0-J/2 0
300-0-21-118 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 19 20 300-0-J/5 0
300-1-21-119 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 21 22 300-1-K/10 0
300-1-21-120 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 23 24 300-1-K/3 0
300-0-21-121 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 25 26 300-0-K/4 0
300-1-21-122 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 27 28 300-1-K/6 0
300-0-21-123 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 29 30 300-0-J/8 0

TELECOM PORT #
300-1-21-124 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 31 32 300-1-K/12 0

300-0-21-125 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 33 34 300-0-K/2 0
300-1-21-126 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 35 36 300-1-L/4 0
300-0-21-127 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 37 38 300-0-L/5 0
300-1-21-128 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 39 40 300-1-K/8 0
300-1-21-129 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 41 42 300-1-M/10 0
300-1-21-130 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 43 44 300-1-L/3 0
300-0-21-131 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 45 46 300-0-M/3 0
300-1-21-132 2 CAT 6A A 2 05 47 48 300-1-L/6 0
300-0-21-133 2 CAT 6A A 2 06 1 2 300-0-L/7 0
300-0-21-134 2 CAT 6A A 2 06 3 4 300-0-N/2 0
300-1-21-135 2 CAT 6A A 2 06 5 6 300-1-M/4 0
300-0-21-136 2 CAT 6A A 2 06 7 8 300-0-M/5 0
300-1-21-137 2 CAT 6A A 2 06 9 10 300-1-M/8 0
300-0-21-138 2 CAT 6A A 2 06 11 12 300-0-M/9 0
301-0-21-139 2 CAT 6A 0 00 00 00 00 301-1-J/1 0
301-0-21-140 2 CAT 6A 0 00 00 00 00 301-1-J/2 0
301-0-21-141 2 CAT 6A 0 00 00 00 00 301-1-J/00 0
301-0-21-142 2 CAT 6A 0 00 00 00 00 301-1-J/02 0
301-0-21-143 1 CAT 6A 04 01 01 04 0
301-0-21-144 1 CAT 6A 04 01 05 08 0

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
CABLE TYPE KEY


TELECOM PORT #
300-0-22-001 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 1 2 AFD-40-3U-03-02 0

300-0-22-002 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 3 4 F-3C-3U-05-01 0
300-1-22-003 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 5 6 MAH-300-11-3U-02-02 0
300-0-22-004 4 CAT 6A A 1 01 7 10 PLC-86-3U-03-01-0B08 0
300-0-22-005 4 CAT 6A A 1 01 11 14 PLC-86-3U-04-01A 0
300-0-22-006 4 CAT 6A A 1 01 15 18 PLC-86-3U-04-01B 0
300-0-22-007 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 19 20 AFD-3B-3U-02-04 0
300-0-22-008 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 21 22 AFD-3B-3U-02-05 0
300-0-22-009 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 23 24 AFD-3B-3U-02-06 0
300-0-22-010 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 25 26 AFD-3B-3U-03-01 0
300-0-22-011 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 27 28 AFD-3B-3U-03-02 0
300-0-22-012 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 29 30 AFD-3B-3U-03-03 0
300-0-22-013 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 31 32 AFD-3B-3U-03-04 0
300-0-22-014 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 33 34 AFD-3B-3U-03-05 0
300-0-22-015 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 35 36 AFD-40-3U-03-01 0
300-0-22-016 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 37 38 AFD-40-3U-03-03 0
300-0-22-017 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 39 40 AFD-40-3U-03-04 0
300-0-22-018 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 41 42 AFD-40-3U-03-05 0
300-1-22-019 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 43 44 AHU-300-11-3U-01-07 0
300-0-22-020 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 45 46 AFD-62-3U-02-01 0
300-0-22-021 2 CAT 6A A 1 01 47 48 AFD-62-3U-02-02 0
300-0-22-022 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 1 2 AFD-62-3U-02-03 0
300-0-22-023 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 3 4 AFD-63-3U-02-01 0
300-0-22-024 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 5 6 AFD-63-3U-02-02 0
300-0-22-025 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 7 8 AFD-63-3U-02-03 0
300-0-22-026 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 9 10 AFD-64-3U-02-03 0
300-0-22-027 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 11 12 AFD-64-3U-02-04 0
300-0-22-028 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 13 14 AFD-REC-PUMP-1 0
300-0-22-029 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 15 16 AFD-REC-PUMP-2 0
300-1-22-030 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 17 18 AHU-300-11-3U-01-03 0
300-1-22-031 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 19 20 AHU-300-11-3U-01-04 0
300-1-22-032 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 21 22 AHU-300-11-3U-01-05 0
300-1-22-033 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 23 24 AHU-300-11-3U-01-06 0
300-0-22-034 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 25 26 LCP-50-3U-06-01 0
300-0-22-035 1 CAT 6A A 1 02 27 27 BLR-40-3U-01-01 0
300-1-22-036 1 CAT 6A A 1 02 28 28 MAH-300-11-3U-02-01 0
300-0-22-037 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 1 1 4 0
300-0-22-038 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 1 5 8 0
300-1-22-039 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 1 9 12 0
300-1-22-040 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 1 13 16 0
300-1-22-041 0 0 0 1 CAT 6A 1 02 1 17 20 0
300-1-22-042 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 29 30 0 00 00 00 00 0
300-1-22-043 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 31 32 0
300-1-22-044 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 33 34 0
300-1-22-045 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 35 36 0
300-1-22-046 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 37 38 0
300-1-22-047 2 CAT 6A A 1 02 39 40 0
300-0-22-048 1 CAT 6A A 1 02 41 41 CCC-3U-00-A01-1 0
300-1-22-049 1 CAT 6A A 1 02 42 42 CCC-3U-00-A04-2 0
300-0-22-050 1 CAT 6A A 1 02 43 43 CCC-3U-00-A10-7 0
300-0-22-051 1 CAT 6A A 1 02 44 44 CCC-3U-00-A9-6 0
300-0-22-052 1 CAT 6A A 1 02 45 45 CCC-3U-00-D05-23 0
300-0-22-053 1 CAT 6A A 1 02 46 46 CCC-3U-00-D06-24 0
300-0-22-054 1 CAT 6A A 1 02 47 47 CCC-3U-00-H01-4 0
300-1-22-055 1 CAT 6A A 1 02 48 48 CCC-3U-01-A02-18 0
300-1-22-056 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 1 2 300-1-A/4 0
300-0-22-057 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 3 4 300-0-A/5 0
300-0-22-058 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 5 6 300-0-A/9 0
300-1-22-059 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 7 8 300-1-C/2 0
300-0-22-060 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 9 10 300-0-B/4 0
300-0-22-061 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 11 12 300-0-A/7 0
300-0-22-062 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 13 14 300-0-C/3 0

TELECOM PORT #
300-0-22-063 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 15 16 300-0-C/5 0

300-0-22-064 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 17 18 300-0-C/9 0
300-1-22-065 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 19 20 300-1-D/3 0
300-0-22-066 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 21 22 300-0-D/3 0
300-1-22-067 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 23 24 300-1-D/6 0
300-0-22-068 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 25 26 300-0-C/7 0
300-1-22-069 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 27 28 300-1-E/4 0
300-0-22-070 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 29 30 300-0-E/5 0
300-0-22-071 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 31 32 300-0-F/3 0
300-0-22-072 2 CAT 6A A 1 03 33 34 300-0-G/2 0

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
CABLE TYPE KEY

704618 Communications Horizontal Cabling - 301.11 FAB SCR

TELECOM PORT #
301-2-11-001 36 CAT 6A A 01 1 1 36 0
301-2-11-002 36 CAT 6A A 01 2 1 36 0
301-2-11-003 36 CAT 6A A 01 3 1 36 0
301-2-11-004 36 CAT 6A A 01 4 1 36 0
301-2-11-005 36 CAT 6A A 01 5 1 36 0
301-2-11-006 36 CAT 6A A 01 6 1 36 0
301-2-11-007 36 CAT 6A A 01 7 1 36 0
301-2-11-008 36 CAT 6A A 01 8 1 36 0
301-2-11-009 36 CAT 6A A 01 9 1 36 0
301-2-11-010 36 CAT 6A A 01 10 1 36 0
301-2-11-011 36 CAT 6A A 03 1 1 36 0
301-2-11-012 36 CAT 6A A 03 2 1 36 0
301-2-11-013 36 CAT 6A A 03 3 1 36 0
301-2-11-014 36 CAT 6A A 03 4 1 36 0
301-2-11-015 36 CAT 6A A 03 5 1 36 0
301-2-11-016 36 CAT 6A A 03 6 1 36 0
301-2-11-017 36 CAT 6A A 03 7 1 36 0
301-2-11-018 36 CAT 6A A 03 8 1 36 0
301-2-11-019 36 CAT 6A A 03 9 1 36 0
301-2-11-020 36 CAT 6A A 03 10 1 36 0
301-2-11-021 36 CAT 6A B 02 1 1 36 0
301-2-11-022 36 CAT 6A B 02 2 1 36 0
301-2-11-023 36 CAT 6A B 02 3 1 36 0
301-2-11-024 36 CAT 6A B 02 4 1 36 0
301-2-11-025 36 CAT 6A B 02 5 1 36 0
301-2-11-026 36 CAT 6A B 02 6 1 36 0
301-2-11-027 36 CAT 6A B 02 7 1 36 0
301-2-11-028 36 CAT 6A B 02 8 1 36 0
301-3-11-029 36 CAT 6A B 02 9 1 36 0
301-3-11-030 36 CAT 6A B 02 10 1 36 0
301-3-11-031 36 CAT 6A B 04 1 1 36 0
301-3-11-032 36 CAT 6A B 04 2 1 36 0
301-3-11-033 36 CAT 6A B 04 3 1 36 0
301-3-11-034 36 CAT 6A B 04 4 1 36 0
301-3-11-035 36 CAT 6A B 04 5 1 36 0
301-3-11-036 36 CAT 6A B 04 6 1 36 0
301-3-11-037 36 CAT 6A B 04 7 1 36 0
301-3-11-038 36 CAT 6A B 04 8 1 36 0
301-3-11-039 36 CAT 6A B 04 9 1 36 0
301-3-11-040 36 CAT 6A B 04 10 1 36 0
301-3-11-041 36 CAT 6A B 04 1 1 36 0
301-3-11-042 36 CAT 6A B 04 2 1 36 0
301-3-11-043 36 CAT 6A B 06 3 1 36 0
301-3-11-044 36 CAT 6A B 06 4 1 36 0
301-3-11-045 36 CAT 6A B 06 5 1 36 0
301-3-11-046 36 CAT 6A B 06 6 1 36 0
301-3-11-047 36 CAT 6A B 06 7 1 36 0
301-3-11-048 36 CAT 6A B 06 8 1 36 0
301-2-11-049 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 1 2 301-2-T/10 0
301-2-11-050 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 3 4 301-2-U/6 0
301-2-11-052 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 5 6 301-2-U/1 0
301-2-11-053 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 7 8 301-2-R/2 0
301-2-11-054 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 9 10 301-2-Q/1 0
301-2-11-055 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 11 12 301-2-N/1 0
301-2-11-056 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 13 14 301-2-L/1 0
301-1-11-057 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 15 16 301-1-T/10 0
301-1-11-058 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 17 18 301-1-Q/9 0
301-1-11-059 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 19 20 301-1-N/10 0
301-1-11-060 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 21 22 301-1-M/9 0
301-1-11-061 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 23 24 301-1-S/7 0
301-1-11-062 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 25 26 301-1-S/7 0
301-1-11-063 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 27 28 301-1-Q/7 0

TELECOM PORT #
301-1-11-064 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 29 30 301-1-N/7 0

301-1-11-065 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 31 32 301-1-L/7 0
301-1-11-066 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 33 34 301-1-T/5 0
301-1-11-067 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 35 36 301-1-Q/5 0
301-1-11-068 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 37 38 301-1-N/5 0
301-1-11-069 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 39 40 301-1-M/5 0
301-1-11-070 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 41 42 301-1-K/6 0
301-1-11-071 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 43 44 301-1-L/3 0
301-1-11-072 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 45 46 301-1-N/3 0
301-1-11-073 2 CAT 6A B 06 9 47 48 301-1-Q/3 0
301-1-11-074 2 CAT 6A B 06 10 1 2 301-1-S/3 0
301-1-11-075 2 CAT 6A B 06 10 3 4 301-1-T/3 0
301-1-11-076 2 CAT 6A B 06 10 5 6 301-1-L/1 0
301-1-11-077 2 CAT 6A B 06 10 7 8 301-1-N/1 0
301-1-11-078 2 CAT 6A B 06 10 9 10 301-1-Q/1 0
301-1-11-079 2 CAT 6A B 06 10 11 12 301-1-S/1 0
301-1-11-083 2 CAT 6A B 06 10 13 14 301-1-S/0 0
301-2-11-085 1 CAT 6A B 06 10 15 15 CCC-02-X08-43 0
301-1-11-086 1 CAT 6A B 06 10 16 16 CCC-3F-01-K00-46 0
301-1-11-087 1 CAT 6A B 06 10 17 17 CCC-3F-01-M00-36 0
301-1-11-088 1 CAT 6A B 06 10 18 18 CCC-3F-01-M01-35 0
301-1-11-089 1 CAT 6A B 06 10 19 19 CCC-3F-01-Q01-37 0
301-1-11-090 1 CAT 6A B 06 10 20 20 CCC-3F-01-S00-38 0
301-1-11-091 1 CAT 6A B 06 10 21 21 CCC-3F-01-T00-39 0
301-1-11-092 1 CAT 6A B 06 10 22 22 CCC-3F-01-T08-20 0
301-1-11-093 1 CAT 6A B 06 10 23 23 CCC-3F-01-U01-41 0
301-1-11-094 1 CAT 6A B 06 10 24 24 CCC-3F-01-U02-40 0
301-1-11-095 1 CAT 6A B 06 10 25 25 CCC-3F-01-V08-21 0
301-2-11-096 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 1 04 0
301-1-11-097 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 05 08 0
301-1-11-098 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 09 12 0
301-1-11-099 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 13 16 0
301-1-11-100 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 17 20 0
301-1-11-101 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 21 24 0
301-1-11-102 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 26 29 0
301-1-11-103 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 30 33 0
301-1-11-104 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 34 37 0
301-1-11-105 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 38 41 0
301-1-11-106 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 42 45 0
301-2-11-107 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 46 49 0
301-2-11-108 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 51 54 0
301-2-11-109 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 55 58 0
301-2-11-110 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 59 62 0
301-2-11-111 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 63 66 0
301-2-11-112 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 67 70 0
301-2-11-113 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 71 74 0
301-2-11-114 1 CAT 6A 1 02 04 76 79 0
301-2-11-115 1 CAT 6A 1 02 04 80 83 0
301-2-11-116 1 CAT 6A 1 02 04 84 87 0
301-2-11-117 1 CAT 6A 1 02 04 88 91 0
301-2-11-118 1 CAT 6A 1 02 04 92 95 0
301-2-11-119 1 CAT 6A 1 04 01 01 04 0
301-2-11-120 1 CAT 6A 1 04 01 05 08 0
301-1-11-121 1 CAT 6A 1 04 01 09 12 0
301-1-11-122 1 CAT 6A 1 04 01 13 16 0
301-1-11-123 1 CAT 6A 1 04 01 17 20 0
301-1-11-124 1 CAT 6A 1 04 01 21 24 0
301-2-11-125 1 CAT 6A 1 04 02 26 29 0
301-2-11-126 1 CAT 6A 1 04 02 30 33 34.5KV FAB SWITCHGEAR 0
301-1-11-127 4 CAT 6A A 05 2 1 4 35 0

TELECOM PORT #
301-1-11-128 4 CAT 6A A 05 2 5 8 AFD-2A-3F-01-01 0

301-1-11-129 4 CAT 6A A 05 2 9 12 AFD-2A-3F-02-01 0
301-2-11-130 4 CAT 6A A 05 2 13 16 AFD-2A-3F-05-02 0
301-1-11-131 4 CAT 6A A 05 2 17 20 AFD-52-3F-05-01 0
301-1-11-132 4 CAT 6A A 05 2 21 24 AFD-52-3F-05-02 0
301-1-11-133 4 CAT 6A A 05 2 25 28 AFD-52-3F-05-03 0
301-1-11-134 4 CAT 6A A 05 2 29 32 ATS-33, 34 0
301-1-11-135 4 CAT 6A A 05 2 33 36 PLC-10-3F-01-01-1S03 0
301-1-11-136 4 CAT 6A A 05 2 37 40 PLC-10-3F-02-01-1S04 0
301-1-11-137 4 CAT 6A A 05 2 41 44 PLC-10-3F-03-01-1S05 0
301-1-11-138 4 CAT 6A A 05 2 45 48 PLC-10-3F-04-01-1S09 0
301-1-11-139 4 CAT 6A A 05 3 1 4 PLC-10-3F-05-01-1S10 0
301-1-11-140 4 CAT 6A A 05 3 5 8 SCP-3F-01-R06-1 0
301-1-11-141 4 CAT 6A A 05 3 9 12 SS-35-1, SS-35-5 0
301-1-11-142 4 CAT 6A A 05 3 13 16 SS-35-2 0
301-1-11-143 4 CAT 6A A 05 3 17 20 SS-35-3, SS-35-4 0
301-1-11-144 4 CAT 6A A 05 3 21 24 UPS 0
301-3-11-145 4 CAT 6A A 05 3 25 28 0
301-2-11-146 4 CAT 6A A 05 3 29 32 0
301-2-11-147 4 CAT 6A A 05 3 33 36 0
301-2-11-153 4 CAT 6A A 05 3 37 40 0
301-2-11-154 4 CAT 6A A 05 3 41 44 0
301-2-11-155 4 CAT 6A A 05 3 45 48 0
301-2-11-156 4 CAT 6A A 05 4 1 4 0
301-2-11-157 4 CAT 6A A 05 4 5 8 0
301-2-11-158 4 CAT 6A A 05 4 9 12 0
301-2-11-159 4 CAT 6A A 05 4 13 16 0
301-2-11-160 4 CAT 6A A 05 4 17 20 0
301-2-11-161 4 CAT 6A A 05 4 21 24 0
301-2-11-162 4 CAT 6A A 05 4 25 28 0
301-2-11-163 4 CAT 6A A 05 4 29 32 0
301-2-11-164 4 CAT 6A A 05 4 33 36 0
301-2-11-165 4 CAT 6A A 05 4 37 40 0
301-2-11-166 4 CAT 6A A 05 4 41 44 0
301-2-11-167 4 CAT 6A A 05 4 45 48 0
301-2-11-168 4 CAT 6A A 05 5 1 4 0
301-2-11-169 4 CAT 6A A 05 5 5 8 0
301-2-11-170 4 CAT 6A A 05 5 9 12 0
301-1-11-171 4 CAT 6A A 05 5 13 16 0
301-1-11-172 4 CAT 6A A 05 5 17 20 0
301-1-11-173 4 CAT 6A A 05 5 21 24 0
301-1-11-174 4 CAT 6A A 05 5 25 28 0
301-1-11-175 4 CAT 6A A 05 5 29 32 0
301-1-11-176 4 CAT 6A A 05 5 33 36 0
301-1-11-177 4 CAT 6A A 05 5 37 40 0
301-1-11-178 4 CAT 6A A 05 5 41 44 0
301-1-11-179 4 CAT 6A A 05 5 45 48 0

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
CABLE TYPE KEY


TELECOM PORT #
301-2-12-001 36 CAT 6A A 01 1 1 36 0
301-2-12-002 36 CAT 6A A 01 2 1 36 0
301-2-12-003 36 CAT 6A A 01 3 1 36 0
301-2-12-004 36 CAT 6A A 01 4 1 36 0
301-2-12-005 36 CAT 6A A 01 5 1 36 0
301-2-12-006 36 CAT 6A
27_1 A 01 6 1 36 0
301-2-12-007 5_00 - CAT 6A A 01 7 1 36 0
301-2-12-008 36 CAT 6A A 01 8 1 36 0
301-2-12-009 36 CAT 6A A 01 9 1 36 0
301-2-12-010 36 CAT 6A A 01 10 1 36 0
301-2-12-011 36 CAT 6A A 03 1 1 36 0
301-2-12-012 36 CAT 6A A 03 2 1 36 0
301-2-12-013 36 CAT 6A A 03 3 1 36 0
301-2-12-014 36 CAT 6A A 03 4 1 36 0
301-2-12-015 36 CAT 6A A 03 5 1 36 0
301-2-12-016 36 CAT 6A A 03 6 1 36 0
301-2-12-017 36 CAT 6A A 03 7 1 36 0
301-2-12-018 36 CAT 6A A 03 8 1 36 0
301-2-12-019 36 CAT 6A A 03 9 1 36 0
301-2-12-020 36 CAT 6A A 03 10 1 36 0
301-3-12-021 36 CAT 6A B 02 1 1 36 0
301-3-12-022 36 CAT 6A B 02 2 1 36 0
301-3-12-023 36 CAT 6A B 02 3 1 36 0
301-3-12-024 36 CAT 6A B 02 4 1 36 0
301-3-12-025 36 CAT 6A B 02 5 1 36 0
301-3-12-026 36 CAT 6A B 02 6 1 36 0
301-3-12-027 36 CAT 6A B 02 7 1 36 0
301-3-12-028 36 CAT 6A B 02 8 1 36 0
301-3-12-029 36 CAT 6A B 02 9 1 36 0
301-3-12-030 36 CAT 6A B 02 10 1 36 0
301-3-12-031 36 CAT 6A B 04 1 1 36 0
301-1-12-032 2 CAT 6A B 04 2 1 2 301-1-T/13 0
301-2-12-033 2 CAT 6A B 04 2 3 4 301-2-K/15 0
301-2-12-034 2 CAT 6A B 04 2 5 6 301-2-N/15 0
301-2-12-035 2 CAT 6A B 04 2 7 8 301-2-Q/15 0
301-2-12-036 2 CAT 6A B 04 2 9 10 301-2-T/15 0
301-2-12-037 2 CAT 6A B 04 2 11 12 301-2-G/2 0
301-2-12-038 2 CAT 6A B 04 2 13 14 301-2-L/15 0
301-2-12-040 2 CAT 6A B 04 2 15 16 301-2-J/1 0
301-1-12-041 2 CAT 6A B 04 2 17 18 301-1-N/15 0
301-1-12-042 2 CAT 6A B 04 2 19 20 301-1-Q/15 0
301-1-12-043 2 CAT 6A B 04 2 21 22 301-1-M/13 0
301-1-12-044 2 CAT 6A B 04 2 23 24 301-1-N/13 0
301-1-12-045 2 CAT 6A B 04 2 25 26 301-1- Q/14 0
301-1-12-046 2 CAT 6A B 04 2 27 28 301-1-K/11 0
301-1-12-047 2 CAT 6A B 04 2 29 30 301-1-N/11 0
301-1-12-048 2 CAT 6A B 04 2 31 32 301-1-Q/12 0
301-1-12-049 2 CAT 6A B 04 2 33 34 301-1-S/12 0
301-1-12-050 2 CAT 6A B 04 2 35 36 301-1-T/11 0
301-1-12-051 2 CAT 6A B 04 2 37 38 301-1-S/15 0
301-1-12-052 2 CAT 6A B 04 2 39 40 301-1-T/15 0
301-1-12-053 2 CAT 6A B 04 2 41 42 301-1-L/15 0
301-1-12-055 1 CAT 6A B 04 2 43 43 CCC-3F-01-V15-19 0
301-1-12-056 1 CAT 6A B 04 2 44 44 CCC-3F-01-V16-18 0
301-2-12-057 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 1 04 0
301-2-12-058 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 05 08 0
301-1-12-059 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 09 12 0
301-1-12-060 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 13 16 0
301-1-12-061 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 17 20 0
301-1-12-062 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 21 24 0
301-1-12-063 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 26 29 0

TELECOM PORT #
301-1-12-064 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 30 33 0
301-1-12-065 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 34 37 0
301-2-12-066 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 38 41 0
301-2-12-067 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 42 45 0
301-2-12-068 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 46 49 0
301-2-12-069 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 51 54 0
301-2-12-070 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 55 58 0
301-2-12-071 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 59 62 0
301-2-12-072 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 63 66 0
301-2-12-073 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 67 70 0
301-2-12-074 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 71 74 0
301-1-12-075 1 CAT 6A 1 02 04 76 79 34.5KV FAB SWITCHGEAR 0
301-1-12-076 4 CAT 6A B 04 3 1 4 0 00 00 00 00 37 0
301-1-12-077 4 CAT 6A B 04 3 5 8 0 00 00 00 00 AFD-2A-3F-01-02 0
301-1-12-078 4 CAT 6A B 04 3 9 12 0 00 00 00 00 AFD-2A-3F-01-03 0
301-2-12-079 4 CAT 6A B 04 3 13 16 0 00 00 00 00 AFD-2A-3F-05-01 0
301-1-12-080 4 CAT 6A B 04 3 17 20 0 00 00 00 00 ATS-37, 38 0
301-1-12-081 4 CAT 6A B 04 3 21 24 0 00 00 00 00 PLC-10-3F-06-01-1S11 0
301-1-12-082 4 CAT 6A B 04 3 25 28 0 00 00 00 00 PLC-10-3F-07-01-1S13 0
301-1-12-083 4 CAT 6A B 04 3 29 32 0 00 00 00 00 PLC-10-3F-08-01-1S14 0
301-1-12-084 4 CAT 6A B 04 3 33 36 0 00 00 00 00 PLC-11-3F-01-01-1R12 0
301-1-12-085 4 CAT 6A B 04 3 37 40 0 00 00 00 00 PLC-86-3F-01-01-1K15 0
301-1-12-086 4 CAT 6A B 04 3 41 44 0 00 00 00 00 SCP-3F-01-R13-1 0
301-1-12-087 4 CAT 6A B 04 3 45 48 0 00 00 00 00 SS-37-1, SS-37-3 0
301-1-12-088 4 CAT 6A B 04 4 1 4 SS-37-2 0
301-1-12-089 4 CAT 6A B 04 4 5 8 SS-37-4 0
301-1-12-090 4 CAT 6A B 04 4 9 12 UPS 0
301-1-12-091 4 CAT 6A B 04 4 13 16 UPS 0
301-2-12-092 4 CAT 6A B 04 4 17 20 0
301-2-12-093 4 CAT 6A B 04 4 21 24 0
301-2-12-094 4 CAT 6A B 04 4 25 28 0
301-2-12-095 4 CAT 6A B 04 4 29 32 0
301-2-12-096 4 CAT 6A B 04 4 33 36 0

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
CABLE TYPE KEY


TELECOM PORT #
301-2-13-001 36 CAT 6A A 02 1 1 36 0
301-2-13-002 36 CAT 6A A 02 2 1 36 0
301-2-13-003 36 CAT 6A A 02 3 1 36 0
301-2-13-004 36 CAT 6A A 02 4 1 36 0
301-2-13-005 36 CAT 6A A 02 5 1 36 0
301-2-13-006 36 CAT 6A A 02 6 1 36 0
301-2-13-007 36 CAT 6A A 02 7 1 36 0
301-2-13-008 36 CAT 6A A 02 8 1 36 0
301-2-13-009 36 CAT 6A A 02 9 1 36 0
301-2-13-010 36 CAT 6A A 02 10 1 36 0
301-2-13-011 36 CAT 6A A 04 1 1 36 0
301-2-13-012 36 CAT 6A A 04 2 1 36 0
301-2-13-013 36 CAT 6A A 04 3 1 36 0
301-2-13-014 36 CAT 6A A 04 4 1 36 0
301-2-13-015 36 CAT 6A A 04 5 1 36 0
301-2-13-016 36 CAT 6A A 04 6 1 36 0
301-2-13-017 36 CAT 6A A 04 7 1 36 0
301-2-13-018 36 CAT 6A A 04 8 1 36 0
301-2-13-019 36 CAT 6A A 04 9 1 36 0
301-2-13-020 36 CAT 6A A 04 10 1 36 0
301-2-13-021 36 CAT 6A B 01 1 1 36 0
301-3-13-022 36 CAT 6A B 01 2 1 36 0
301-3-13-023 36 CAT 6A B 01 3 1 36 0
301-3-13-024 36 CAT 6A B 01 4 1 36 0
301-3-13-025 36 CAT 6A B 01 5 1 36 0
301-3-13-026 36 CAT 6A B 01 6 1 36 0
301-3-13-027 36 CAT 6A B 01 7 1 36 0
301-3-13-028 36 CAT 6A B 01 8 1 36 0
301-3-13-029 36 CAT 6A B 01 9 1 36 0
301-3-13-030 36 CAT 6A B 01 10 1 36 0
301-3-13-031 36 CAT 6A A 06 1 1 36 0
301-3-13-032 36 CAT 6A A 06 2 1 36 0
301-3-13-033 36 CAT 6A A 06 3 1 36 0
301-3-13-034 36 CAT 6A A 06 4 1 36 0
301-3-13-035 36 CAT 6A A 06 5 1 36 0
301-3-13-036 36 CAT 6A A 06 6 1 36 0
301-2-13-037 2 CAT 6A A 06 7 1 2 301-2-E/2 0
301-1-13-038 2 CAT 6A A 06 7 3 4 301-1-J/10 0
301-1-13-039 2 CAT 6A A 06 7 5 6 301-1-H/9 0
301-1-13-040 2 CAT 6A A 06 7 7 8 301-1-E/9 0
301-1-13-041 2 CAT 6A A 06 7 9 10 301-1-B/9 0
301-1-13-042 2 CAT 6A A 06 7 11 12 301-1-H/7 0
301-1-13-043 2 CAT 6A A 06 7 13 14 301-1-G/8 0
301-1-13-044 2 CAT 6A A 06 7 15 16 301-1-D/7 0
301-1-13-045 2 CAT 6A A 06 7 17 18 301-1-B/7 0
301-1-13-046 2 CAT 6A A 06 7 19 20 301-1-H/6 0
301-1-13-047 2 CAT 6A A 06 7 21 22 301-1-E/5 0
301-1-13-048 2 CAT 6A A 06 7 23 24 301-1-B/5 0
301-1-13-049 2 CAT 6A A 06 7 25 26 301-1-C/5 0
301-1-13-050 2 CAT 6A A 06 7 27 28 301-1-E/4 0
301-1-13-051 2 CAT 6A A 06 7 29 30 301-1-G/3 0
301-1-13-052 2 CAT 6A A 06 7 31 32 301-1-H/4 0
301-1-13-053 2 CAT 6A A 06 7 33 34 301-1-B/2 0
301-1-13-054 2 CAT 6A A 06 7 35 36 301-1-E/1 0
301-1-13-055 2 CAT 6A A 06 7 37 38 301-1-G/2 0
301-1-13-056 2 CAT 6A A 06 7 39 40 301-1-C/2 0
301-1-13-057 2 CAT 6A A 06 7 41 42 301-1-C/6 0
301-1-13-058 24 CAT 6A B 03 1 1 24 SECURITY PATCHPANEL 0
301-1-13-059 1 CAT 6A A 06 7 43 43 CCC-3F-00-J02-1 0
301-1-13-060 1 CAT 6A A 06 7 44 44 CCC-3F-01-A06-23 0
301-1-13-061 1 CAT 6A A 06 7 45 45 CCC-3F-01-A07-22 0
301-1-13-062 1 CAT 6A A 06 7 46 46 CCC-3F-01-A09-7 0

TELECOM PORT #
301-1-13-063 1 CAT 6A A 06 7 47 47 CCC-3F-01-A09-8 0

301-1-13-064 1 CAT 6A A 06 7 48 48 CCC-3F-01-D03-31 0
301-1-13-065 1 CAT 6A B 03 2 1 1 CCC-3F-01-D05-30 0
301-1-13-066 1 CAT 6A B 03 2 2 2 CCC-3F-01-D07-28 0
301-1-13-067 1 CAT 6A B 03 2 3 3 CCC-3F-01-D07-29 0
301-1-13-068 1 CAT 6A B 03 2 4 4 CCC-3F-01-D08-15 0
301-1-13-069 1 CAT 6A B 03 2 5 5 CCC-3F-01-D09-14 0
301-1-13-070 1 CAT 6A B 03 2 6 6 CCC-3F-01-D11-12 0
301-1-13-071 1 CAT 6A B 03 2 7 7 CCC-3F-01-E00-33 0
301-1-13-072 1 CAT 6A B 03 2 8 8 CCC-3F-01-G01-34 0
301-1-13-073 1 CAT 6A B 03 2 9 9 CCC-3F-01-G09-16 0
301-1-13-074 1 CAT 6A B 03 2 10 10 CCC-3F-01-D07-28 0
301-1-13-075 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 1 04 0
301-1-13-076 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 05 08 0
301-1-13-077 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 09 12 0
301-1-13-078 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 13 16 0
301-1-13-079 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 17 20 0
301-1-13-080 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 21 24 0
301-1-13-081 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 26 29 0
301-1-13-082 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 30 33 0
301-1-13-083 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 34 37 0
301-1-13-084 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 38 41 0
301-1-13-085 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 42 45 0
301-1-13-086 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 46 49 0
301-1-13-087 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 51 54 0
301-1-13-088 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 55 58 0
301-1-13-089 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 59 62 0
301-1-13-090 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 63 66 0
301-1-13-091 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 67 70 0
301-1-13-092 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 71 74 0
301-1-13-093 1 CAT 6A 1 02 04 76 79 0
301-1-13-094 1 CAT 6A 1 02 04 80 83 0
301-1-13-095 1 CAT 6A 1 02 04 84 87 0
301-1-13-096 1 CAT 6A 1 02 04 88 91 0
301-1-13-097 1 CAT 6A 1 02 04 92 95 0
301-1-13-098 1 CAT 6A 1 04 01 01 04 0
301-1-13-099 4 CAT 6A B 03 2 1 4 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-1-13-100 4 CAT 6A B 03 2 5 8 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-1-13-101 4 CAT 6A B 03 2 9 12 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-1-13-102 4 CAT 6A B 03 2 13 16 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-1-13-103 4 CAT 6A B 03 2 17 20 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-1-13-104 4 CAT 6A B 03 2 21 24 0 00 00 00 00 34.5KV FAB SWITCHGEAR 0
301-1-13-105 4 CAT 6A B 03 2 25 28 0 00 00 00 00 36 0
301-1-13-106 4 CAT 6A B 03 2 29 32 AFD-2A-3F-03-01 0
301-1-13-107 4 CAT 6A B 03 2 33 36 AFD-74-3F-15-01 0
301-1-13-108 4 CAT 6A B 03 2 37 40 AFD-74-3F-15-02 0
301-1-13-109 4 CAT 6A B 03 2 41 44 AFD-74-3F-15-03 0
301-1-13-110 4 CAT 6A B 03 2 45 48 ATS-35, 36 0
301-1-13-111 4 CAT 6A B 03 3 1 4 PLC-74-3F-01-01-1J04 0
301-1-13-112 4 CAT 6A B 03 3 5 8 SCP-3F-01-G09-1 0
301-1-13-113 4 CAT 6A B 03 3 9 12 SS-36-1, SS-36-2 0
301-1-13-114 4 CAT 6A B 03 3 13 16 SS-36-3, SS-36-4 0
301-1-13-115 4 CAT 6A B 03 3 17 20 UPS 0
301-1-13-116 4 CAT 6A B 03 3 21 24 0
301-1-13-117 4 CAT 6A B 03 3 25 28 0
301-1-13-118 4 CAT 6A B 03 3 29 32 0
301-1-13-119 4 CAT 6A B 03 3 33 36 0
301-1-13-120 4 CAT 6A B 03 3 37 40 0
301-1-13-121 4 CAT 6A B 03 3 41 44 0
301-1-13-122 4 CAT 6A B 03 3 45 48 0
301-1-13-123 4 CAT 6A B 03 4 1 4 0

TELECOM PORT #
301-1-13-124 4 CAT 6A B 03 4 5 8 0
301-1-13-125 4 CAT 6A B 03 4 9 12 0
301-1-13-126 4 CAT 6A B 03 4 13 16 0
301-1-13-127 4 CAT 6A B 03 4 17 20 0
301-1-13-128 4 CAT 6A B 03 4 21 24 0
301-1-13-129 4 CAT 6A B 03 4 25 28 0
301-1-13-130 4 CAT 6A B 03 4 29 32 0
301-1-13-131 4 CAT 6A B 03 4 33 36 0
301-1-13-132 4 CAT 6A B 03 4 37 40 0
301-1-13-133 4 CAT 6A B 03 4 41 44 0
301-1-13-134 4 CAT 6A B 03 4 45 48 0
301-1-13-135 2 CAT 6A B 03 5 1 2 0
301-1-13-136 CAT 6A 1 CAT6A 02 1 1 4 0

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
CABLE TYPE KEY


TELECOM PORT #
301-2-14-001 36 CAT 6A A 02 1 1 36 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-2-14-002 36 CAT 6A A 02 2 1 36 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-2-14-003 36 CAT 6A A 02 3 1 36 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-2-14-004 36 CAT 6A A 02 4 1 36 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-2-14-005 36 CAT 6A A 02 5 1 36 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-2-14-006 36 CAT 6A A 02 6 1 36 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-2-14-007 36 CAT 6A A 02 7 1 36 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-2-14-008 36 CAT 6A A 02 8 1 36 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-2-14-009 36 CAT 6A A 02 9 1 36 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-2-14-010 36 CAT 6A A 02 10 1 36 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-2-14-011 36 CAT 6A B 01 1 1 36 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-2-14-012 36 CAT 6A B 01 2 1 36 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-2-14-013 36 CAT 6A B 01 3 1 36 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-2-14-014 36 CAT 6A B 01 4 1 36 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-2-14-015 36 CAT 6A B 01 5 1 36 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-3-14-016 36 CAT 6A B 01 6 1 36 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-3-14-017 36 CAT 6A B 01 7 1 36 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-3-14-018 36 CAT 6A B 01 8 1 36 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-3-14-019 36 CAT 6A B 01 9 1 36 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-3-14-020 36 CAT 6A B 01 10 1 36 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-3-14-021 36 CAT 6A A 04 1 1 36 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-2-14-022 2 CAT 6A A 04 3 1 2 0 00 00 00 00 0 0
301-2-14-023 2 CAT 6A A 04 3 3 4 0 00 00 00 00 0 0
301-2-14-024 2 CAT 6A A 04 3 5 6 0 0
301-1-14-025 2 CAT 6A A 04 3 7 8 0 0
301-1-14-026 2 CAT 6A A 04 3 9 10 0 0
301-1-14-027 2 CAT 6A A 04 3 11 12 0 0
301-1-14-028 2 CAT 6A A 04 3 13 14 0 0
301-1-14-029 2 CAT 6A A 04 3 15 16 0 0
301-1-14-030 2 CAT 6A A 04 3 17 18 0 0
301-1-14-031 2 CAT 6A A 04 3 19 20 0 0
301-1-14-032 2 CAT 6A A 04 3 21 22 0 0
301-1-14-033 2 CAT 6A A 04 3 23 24 0 0
301-1-14-034 2 CAT 6A A 04 3 25 26 0 0
301-1-14-035 2 CAT 6A A 04 3 27 28 0 0
301-1-14-036 2 CAT 6A A 04 3 29 30 0 0
301-1-14-037 2 CAT 6A A 04 3 31 32 0 0
301-1-14-038 2 CAT 6A A 04 3 33 34 0 0
301-1-14-039 2 CAT 6A A 04 3 35 36 0 0
301-1-14-040 2 CAT 6A A 04 3 37 38 0 0
301-1-14-041 24 CAT 6A A 04 2 1 24 0
301-1-14-042 1 CAT 6A A 04 3 39 39 CCC-3F-01-A12-5 0
301-1-14-043 1 CAT 6A A 04 3 40 40 CCC-3F-01-A12-6 0
301-1-14-044 1 CAT 6A A 04 3 41 41 CCC-3F-01-A14-4 0
301-1-14-045 1 CAT 6A A 04 3 42 42 CCC-3F-01-A15-3 0
301-1-14-046 1 CAT 6A A 04 3 43 43 CCC-3F-01-A16-2 0
301-1-14-047 1 CAT 6A A 04 3 44 44 CCC-3F-01-A16-9 0
301-1-14-048 1 CAT 6A A 04 3 45 45 CCC-3F-01-D11-13 0
301-1-14-049 1 CAT 6A A 04 3 46 46 CCC-3F-01-D14-10 0
301-1-14-050 1 CAT 6A A 04 3 47 47 CCC-3F-01-D14-11 0
301-1-14-051 1 CAT 6A A 04 3 48 48 CCC-3F-01-K16-17 0
301-2-14-052 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 1 04 EMERGENCY PHONE 65 0

TELECOM PORT #

301-1-14-076 4 CAT 6A A 04 5 1 4 0 0
301-1-14-077 4 CAT 6A A 04 5 5 8 0 0
301-1-14-078 4 CAT 6A A 04 5 9 12 0 0
301-1-14-079 4 CAT 6A A 04 5 13 16 0 0
301-1-14-080 4 CAT 6A A 04 5 17 20 0 0
301-1-14-081 4 CAT 6A A 04 5 21 24 0 0
301-1-14-082 4 CAT 6A A 04 5 25 28 0
34.5KV FAB SWITCHGEAR 0
301-1-14-083 4 CAT 6A A 04 5 29 32 38 0
301-1-14-084 4 CAT 6A A 04 5 33 36 AFD-2A-3F-03-02 0
301-1-14-085 4 CAT 6A A 04 5 37 40 AFD-2A-3F-03-05 0
301-1-14-086 4 CAT 6A A 04 5 41 44 ATS-39, 40 0
301-1-14-087 4 CAT 6A A 04 5 45 48 SCP-3F-01-E15-1 0
301-1-14-088 4 CAT 6A B 05 1 1 4 SS-38-1, SS-38-2 0
301-1-14-089 4 CAT 6A B 05 1 5 8 SS-38-3 0
301-1-14-090 4 CAT 6A B 05 1 9 12 SS-38-4 0
301-1-14-091 4 CAT 6A B 05 1 13 16 UPS 0
301-1-14-092 4 CAT 6A B 05 1 17 20 0 0
301-1-14-093 4 CAT 6A B 05 1 21 24 0 0
301-1-14-094 4 CAT 6A B 05 1 25 28 0 0
301-1-14-095 4 CAT 6A B 05 1 29 32 0 0
301-1-14-096 4 CAT 6A B 05 1 33 36 0 0
301-1-14-097 4 CAT 6A B 05 1 37 40 0 0
301-1-14-098 4 CAT 6A B 05 1 41 44 0 0
301-1-14-099 4 CAT 6A B 05 1 45 48 0 0
301-1-14-100 4 CAT 6A B 05 2 1 4 0 0
301-1-14-101 4 CAT 6A B 05 2 5 8 0 0
301-1-14-102 4 CAT 6A B 05 2 9 12 0 0
301-1-14-103 4 CAT 6A B 05 2 13 16 0 0
301-1-14-104 4 CAT 6A B 05 2 17 20 0 0
301-1-14-105 4 CAT 6A B 05 2 21 24 0 0

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
CABLE TYPE KEY


TELECOM PORT #
301-2-21-001 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 1 2 0 0
301-2-21-002 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 3 4 0 0
301-3-21-005 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 25 26 0 0
301-3-21-006 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 27 28 0 0
301-3-21-007 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 29 30 0 0
301-3-21-008 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 31 32 0 0
301-3-21-009 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 33 34 0 0
301-3-21-010 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 35 36 0 0
301-3-21-011 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 37 38 0 0
301-2-21-013 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 39 40 0 0
301-2-21-014 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 41 42 0 0
301-2-21-015 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 43 44 0 0
301-2-21-016 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 45 46 0 0
301-2-21-018 24 CAT 6A A 03 1 1 24 0 0
301-1-21-019 1 CAT 6A A 01 1 27 27 CCC-3F-01-A01-25 0
301-1-21-020 1 CAT 6A A 01 1 28 28 CCC-3F-01-A01-26 0
301-1-21-021 1 CAT 6A A 01 1 29 29 CCC-3F-01-A02-45 0
301-1-21-022 1 CAT 6A A 01 1 30 30 CCC-3F-01-A04-24 0
301-1-21-023 1 CAT 6A A 01 1 31 31 CCC-3F-01-C02-27 0
301-1-21-024 1 CAT 6A A 01 1 32 32 CCC-3F-01-D02-36 0
301-1-21-025 1 CAT 6A A 01 1 33 33 CCC-3F-01-D03-32 0
301-1-21-043 1 0 1 00 00 00 00 EMERGENCY PHONE 9 0
301-1-21-044 1 0 1 00 00 00 00 EMERGENCY PHONE 19 0
301-1-21-048 4 CAT 6A A 01 1 34 37 0 00 00 00 00 0 0
301-1-21-049 4 CAT 6A A 01 1 38 41 0 00 00 00 00 0 0
301-1-21-050 4 CAT 6A A 01 1 42 45 0 00 00 00 00 0 0
301-2-21-051 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 1 4 0 00 00 00 00 AFD-2A-3F-06-01 0
301-2-21-052 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 5 8 UPS 0
301-2-21-053 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 9 12 UPS 0
301-3-21-055 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 13 16 0 0
301-3-21-057 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 17 20 0 0
301-3-21-058 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 21 24 0 0
301-3-21-059 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 25 28 0 0
301-3-21-060 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 29 32 0 0
301-3-21-061 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 33 36 0 0
301-2-21-062 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 37 40 0 0
301-2-21-063 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 41 44 0 0
301-2-21-064 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 45 48 0 0
301-2-21-065 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 1 4 0 0
301-2-21-066 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 5 8 0 0
301-2-21-067 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 9 12 0 0
301-2-21-068 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 13 16 0
301-2-21-069 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 17 20 0
301-2-21-070 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 21 24 0

TELECOM PORT #
301-2-21-071 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 25 28 0
301-2-21-072 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 29 32 0
301-2-21-073 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 33 36 0
301-2-21-074 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 37 40 0
301-2-21-075 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 41 44 0
301-2-21-076 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 45 48 0
301-2-21-077 4 CAT 6A A 01 4 1 4 0
301-1-21-082 4 CAT 6A A 01 4 5 8 0
301-1-21-083 4 CAT 6A A 01 4 9 12 0
301-1-21-084 4 CAT 6A A 01 4 13 16 0
301-1-21-085 4 CAT 6A A 01 4 17 20 0
301-1-21-086 4 CAT 6A A 01 4 21 24 0
301-1-21-087 4 CAT 6A A 01 4 25 28 0
301-1-21-088 4 CAT 6A A 01 4 29 32 0

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
CABLE TYPE KEY


TELECOM PORT #
301-2-23-001 2 CAT 6A A 12 2 41 42 301-2-A/13 0

301-2-23-002 2 CAT 6A A 12 2 43 44 301-2-A/10 0
301-2-23-008 2 CAT 6A A 12 1 1 2 301-2-B/13 0
301-2-23-009 2 CAT 6A A 12 1 3 4 301-2-B/11 0
301-2-23-010 2 CAT 6A A 12 1 5 6 301-2-B/10 0
301-2-23-011 2 CAT 6A A 12 1 7 8 301-2-B/15 0
301-2-23-012 1 CAT 6A A 12 1 9 9 CCC-3F-02-C14-42 0
301-2-23-013 1 CAT 6A A 12 1 10 10 CCC-3F-02-C14-42 0
301-2-23-014 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 1 04 0
301-2-23-015 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 05 08 0
301-2-23-016 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 09 12 0
301-2-23-017 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 13 16 0
301-2-23-018 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 17 20 0
301-3-23-019 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 21 24 0
301-2-23-020 4 CAT 6A A 12 2 17 20 0 00 00 00 00 AFD-2A-3F-06-02 0
301-3-23-021 4 CAT 6A A 12 1 11 14 0
301-3-23-022 4 CAT 6A A 12 1 15 18 0
301-3-23-023 4 CAT 6A A 12 1 19 22 0
301-3-23-024 4 CAT 6A A 12 1 23 26 0
301-3-23-025 4 CAT 6A A 12 1 27 30 0
301-2-23-026 4 CAT 6A A 12 1 31 34 0
301-2-23-027 4 CAT 6A A 12 1 35 38 0
301-2-23-028 4 CAT 6A A 12 2 21 24 0
301-2-23-029 4 CAT 6A A 12 1 39 42 0
301-2-23-030 4 CAT 6A A 12 1 43 46 0
301-2-23-031 4 CAT 6A A 12 2 1 4 0
301-2-23-032 4 CAT 6A A 12 2 5 8 0
301-2-23-033 4 CAT 6A A 12 2 25 28 0
301-2-23-034 4 CAT 6A A 12 2 9 12 0
301-2-23-035 4 CAT 6A A 12 2 29 32 0
301-2-23-036 4 CAT 6A A 12 2 33 36 0
301-2-23-037 4 CAT 6A A 12 2 37 40 0
301-2-23-038 4 CAT 6A A 12 2 13 16 0

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
CABLE TYPE KEY

704618 Communications Horizontal Cabling - 301.41 FAB SCC

TELECOM PORT #
301-3-41-001 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 1 2 301-3-K/12 0

301-3-41-002 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 3 4 301-3-R/12 0
301-3-41-003 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 5 6 301-3-P/12 0
301-3-41-004 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 7 8 301-3-M/12 0
301-3-41-005 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 9 10 301-3-K/14 0
301-3-41-006 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 11 12 301-3-H/12 0
301-3-41-007 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 13 14 301-3-F/13 0
301-3-41-008 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 15 16 301-3-D/12 0
301-3-41-009 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 17 18 301-3-E/14 0
301-3-41-010 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 19 20 301-3-H/14 0
301-3-41-011 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 21 22 301-3-M/14 0
301-3-41-012 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 23 24 301-3-P/14 0
301-3-41-013 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 25 26 301-3-R/14 0
301-3-41-014 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 27 28 301-3-U/12 0
301-4-41-015 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 3 4 301-4-K/12 0
301-4-41-016 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 5 6 301-4-K/14 0
301-3-41-017 1 CAT6A 1 02 1 1 4 0
301-3-41-018 1 CAT6A 1 02 1 5 8 0
301-3-41-019 1 CAT6A 1 02 1 9 12 0
301-4-41-020 4 CAT 6A A 01 1 33 34 FFU GATEWAY #1 0

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
CABLE TYPE KEY


TELECOM PORT #
301-3-42-001 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 1 2 301-3-E/7 0

301-3-42-002 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 3 4 301-3-G/9 0
301-3-42-003 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 5 6 301-3-H/7 0
301-3-42-004 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 7 8 301-3-L/9 0
301-3-42-005 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 9 10 301-3-K/7 0
301-3-42-006 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 11 12 301-3-P/7 0
301-3-42-007 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 13 14 301-3-R/7 0
301-3-42-008 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 15 16 301-3-D/9 0
301-3-42-009 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 17 18 301-3-G/8 0
301-3-42-010 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 19 20 301-3-J/9 0
301-3-42-011 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 21 22 301-3-M/8 0
301-3-42-012 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 23 24 301-3-M/7 0
301-3-42-013 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 25 26 301-3-R/8 0
301-3-42-014 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 27 28 301-3-P/9 0
301-3-42-015 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 29 30 301-3-E/10 0
301-3-42-016 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 31 32 301-3-G/11 0
301-3-42-017 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 33 34 301-3-H/10 0
301-3-42-018 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 35 36 301-3-M/10 0
301-3-42-019 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 37 38 301-3-R/10 0
301-3-42-020 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 39 40 301-2-T/7 0
301-4-42-022 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 29 30 301-4-K/10 0
301-4-42-023 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 31 32 301-4-M/8 0
301-4-42-024 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 33 34 301-4-P/8 0
301-4-42-025 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 35 36 301-4-R/8 0
301-4-42-026 2 CAT 6A A 01 2 1 2 301-4-T/7 0
301-3-42-027 1 CAT6A 1 02 1 1 4 0
301-4-42-028 4 CAT 6A 01 2 3 6 FFU GATEWAY #2 0
301-3-42-029 1 CAT 6A 01 2 41 41 0

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
CABLE TYPE KEY


TELECOM PORT #
301-3-43-001 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 1 2 301-3-G/4 0

301-3-43-002 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 3 4 301-3-Q/3 0
301-3-43-003 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 5 6 301-3-R/4 0
301-3-43-004 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 7 8 301-3-E/4 0
301-3-43-005 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 9 10 301-3-G/5 0
301-3-43-006 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 11 12 301-3-J/5 0
301-3-43-007 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 13 14 301-3-L/5 0
301-3-43-008 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 15 16 301-3-P/5 0
301-3-43-009 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 17 18 301-3-N/4 0
301-3-43-010 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 19 20 301-3-T/6 0
301-3-43-011 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 21 22 301-3-U/1 0
301-3-43-012 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 23 24 301-3-H/3 0
301-3-43-013 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 25 26 301-3-K/3 0
301-3-43-014 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 27 28 301-3-M/3 0
301-4-43-015 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 42 43 301-4-K/6 0
301-4-43-016 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 44 45 301-4-K/4 0
301-3-43-017 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 46 47 301-3-D/1 0
301-3-43-018 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 48 49 301-3-G/2 0
301-3-43-019 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 50 51 301-3-L/1 0
301-3-43-020 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 52 53 301-3-M/1 0
301-3-43-021 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 54 55 301-3-P/2 0
301-3-43-022 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 56 57 301-3-E/2 0
301-3-43-023 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 58 59 301-3-R/2 0
301-3-43-024 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 60 61 301-3-R/1 0
301-3-43-025 2 CAT 6A A 01 2 1 2 301-3-H/1 0
301-3-43-026 2 CAT 6A A 01 2 3 4 301-3-D/1 0
301-3-43-027 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 1 04 0
301-3-43-028 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 05 08 0
301-3-43-029 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 09 12 0
301-3-43-030 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 13 16 0
301-3-43-031 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 17 20 0
301-3-43-032 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 21 24 0
301-3-43-033 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 26 29 0
301-3-43-034 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 30 33 0
301-3-43-035 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 34 37 0
301-3-43-036 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 38 41 0
301-3-43-037 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 42 45 0
301-3-43-038 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 46 49 0
301-3-43-039 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 5 8 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-3-43-040 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 9 12 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-3-43-041 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 13 16 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-3-43-042 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 17 20 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-3-43-043 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 21 24 0 00 00 00 00 0
301-4-43-044 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 25 28 0 00 00 00 00 FFU GATEWAY #3 0
301-4-43-045 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 29 32 0 00 00 00 00 AFD-2A-3F-08-01 0
301-4-43-046 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 33 36 0 00 00 00 00 AFD-22-3F-02-01 0
301-4-43-047 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 37 40 0 00 00 00 00 AFD-22-3F-02-02 0
301-4-43-048 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 41 44 0 00 00 00 00 AFD-20-3F-13-01 0
301-4-43-049 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 45 48 0 00 00 00 00 AFD-20-3F-13-02 0
301-4-43-050 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 1 4 0 00 00 00 00 AFD-2A-3F-10-01 0

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
CABLE TYPE KEY


TELECOM PORT #
301-3-44-001 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 1 2 0 00 00 00 00 301-3-B/15 0

301-3-44-002 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 3 4 0 00 00 00 00 301-3-B/14 0
301-3-44-003 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 5 6 0 00 00 00 00 301-3-B/11 0
301-3-44-004 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 7 8 301-3-A/12 0
301-3-44-005 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 9 10 301-3-A/10 0
301-3-44-006 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 11 12 301-3-A/8 0
301-3-44-007 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 13 14 301-3-B/9 0
301-4-44-008 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 15 16 301-4-A/9 0
301-4-44-009 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 17 18 301-4-A/15 0
301-4-44-010 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 19 20 301-4-B/15 0
301-4-44-011 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 21 22 301-4-B/13 0
301-4-44-012 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 23 24 301-4-A/13 0
301-4-44-013 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 25 26 301-4-A/11 0
301-4-44-014 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 27 28 301-4-B/11 0
301-4-44-015 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 29 30 301-4-B/9 0
301-4-44-016 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 31 32 301-4-A/7 0
301-4-44-017 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 33 34 301-4-B/7 0
301-4-44-018 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 35 36 301-4-A/5 0
301-4-44-019 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 37 38 301-4-B/5 0
301-4-44-020 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 39 40 301-4-B/3 0
301-4-44-021 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 41 42 301-4-A/3 0
301-4-44-022 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 43 44 301-4-B/1 0
301-3-44-023 2 CAT 6A A 01 1 45 46 301-3-B/7 0
301-4-44-024 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 1 4 0
301-4-44-025 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 5 8 0
301-4-44-026 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 9 12 0
301-4-44-027 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 13 16 0
301-4-44-028 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 17 20 0
301-4-44-029 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 21 24 0
301-4-44-030 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 25 28 0
301-4-44-031 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 29 32 0
301-4-44-032 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 33 36 0
301-4-44-033 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 37 40 AFD-20-3F-02-02B 0
301-4-44-034 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 41 44 AFD-20-3F-02-02A 0
301-4-44-035 4 CAT 6A A 01 2 45 48 AFD-20-3F-02-03B 0
301-4-44-036 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 1 4 AFD-20-3F-02-03A 0
301-4-44-037 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 5 8 AFD-21-3F-02-02B 0
301-4-44-038 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 9 12 AFD-21-3F-02-02A 0
301-4-44-039 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 13 16 AFD-20-3F-02-04A 0
301-4-44-040 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 17 20 AFD-20-3F-02-04B 0
301-4-44-041 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 21 24 (F)AFD-20-3F-02-05B 0
301-4-44-042 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 25 28 (F)AFD-21-3F-02-03B 0
301-4-44-043 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 29 32 (F)AFD-21-3F-02-03A 0
301-4-44-044 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 33 36 AFD-20-3F-12-01A 0
301-4-44-045 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 37 40 AFD-20-3F-12-01B 0
301-4-44-046 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 41 44 AFD-20-3F-12-02B 0
301-4-44-047 4 CAT 6A A 01 3 45 48 AFD-20-3F-12-02A 0
301-4-44-048 4 CAT 6A A 01 4 1 4 AFD-20-3F-02-01A 0
301-4-44-049 4 CAT 6A A 01 4 5 8 AFD-20-3F-02-01B 0
301-4-44-050 4 CAT 6A A 01 4 9 12 (F)AFD-20-3F-02-06A 0
301-4-44-051 4 CAT 6A A 01 4 13 16 (F)AFD-20-3F-02-06B 0
301-4-44-052 4 CAT 6A A 01 4 17 20 AFD-21-3F-02-01B 0
301-4-44-053 4 CAT 6A A 01 4 21 24 AFD-21-3F-02-01A 0
301-4-44-054 4 CAT 6A A 01 4 25 28 AFD-2A-3F-10-02 0
301-5-44-055 4 CAT 6A A 01 4 29 32 AFD-21-3F-03-02 0
301-5-44-056 4 CAT 6A A 01 4 33 36 AFD-24-3F-01-02 0
301-5-44-057 4 CAT 6A A 01 4 37 40 AFD-20-3F-03-03 0
301-5-44-058 4 CAT 6A A 01 4 41 44 AFD-20-3F-03-04 0
301-5-44-059 4 CAT 6A A 01 4 45 48 (F)AFD-21-3F-03-03 0
301-5-44-060 4 CAT 6A A 01 5 1 4 (F)AFD-24-3F-01-03 0
301-5-44-061 4 CAT 6A A 01 5 5 8 (F)AFD-20-3F-03-05 0
301-5-44-062 4 CAT 6A A 01 5 9 12 (F)AFD-20-3F-03-06 0

TELECOM PORT #
301-5-44-063 4 CAT 6A A 01 5 13 16 AFD-20-3F-03-02 0

301-5-44-064 4 CAT 6A A 01 5 17 20 AFD-20-3F-03-01 0
301-5-44-065 4 CAT 6A A 01 5 21 24 AFD-21-3F-03-01 0
301-5-44-066 4 CAT 6A A 01 5 25 28 AFD-24-3F-01-01 0
301-5-44-067 4 CAT 6A A 01 5 29 32 AFD-20-3F-13-01 0
301-5-44-068 4 CAT 6A A 01 5 33 36 AFD-20-3F-13-02 0
301-5-44-069 4 CAT 6A A 01 5 37 40 AFD-2A-3F-10-01 0
301-5-44-070 4 CAT 6A A 01 5 41 44 PLC-86-3F-00-01-5C03 0
301-5-44-071 4 CAT 6A A 01 5 45 48 PLC-86-3F-03-01-5C03 0
301-5-44-072 4 CAT 6A A 01 6 1 4 PLC-86-3F-00-02-5C03 0
301-4-44-073 4 CAT 6A A 01 6 5 8 PLC-86-3F-01-10-4B06 0
301-4-44-074 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 1 04 0
301-4-44-075 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 05 08 0
301-4-44-076 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 09 12 0
301-4-44-077 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 13 16 0
301-4-44-078 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 17 20 0
301-4-44-079 1 CAT 6A 1 02 01 21 24 0
301-4-44-080 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 26 29 0
301-4-44-081 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 30 33 0
301-4-44-082 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 34 37 0
301-4-44-083 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 38 41 0
301-4-44-084 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 42 45 0
301-4-44-085 1 CAT 6A 1 02 02 46 49 0
301-4-44-086 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 51 54 0
301-4-44-087 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 55 58 0
301-4-44-088 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 59 62 0
301--44-089 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 63 66 0
301--44-090 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 67 70 0
301--44-091 1 CAT 6A 1 02 03 71 74 0
301--44-092 1 CAT 6A 1 02 04 76 79 0
301--44-093 1 CAT 6A 1 02 04 80 83 0
301--44-094 1 CAT 6A 1 02 04 84 87 0

BLUE RIDGE
CP 301-2-11-001 CONSOLIDATION POINT PORT UTILIZATION SCHEDULE
GENERAL NOTES
B PROVIDE AS-BUILT INFORMATION FOR ANY CHANGES TO THIS SCHEDULE.
C SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 27_15_00 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FOR THE HORIZONTAL CABLING AND
TERMINATION HARDWARE
UPON INSTALLING ASSOCIATED
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.
ADDRESS FOR EACH PHYSICAL DEVICE
D ASSOCIATED WITH THIS SCHEDULE AND UPON COMPLETION OF THIS EFFORT, PROVIDE THE OWNER A TYPED
COPY OF THIS SCHEDULE REFLECTING THE MAC ADDRESS ASSOCIATED WITH EACH WIRELESS ACCESS POINT
TELECOM OUTLET NOTED BELOW.
E REFER TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 27_15_00 FOR PATCH CORD PROVISION REQUIREMENTS.
F PROVIDE PATCH CORDS TO ALL SERVED EQUIPMENT NOTED IN THE PORT UTILIZATION SCHEDULE BELOW.
CONSOLIDATION POINT (CP) ID CP PORT ID SERVED EQUIPMENT ID

CP 301-2-11-001 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-11-001-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-11-001-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Communications Horizontal Cabling -

704618 CP Utilization Cable Schedule
25 APRIL 2019 - REV. 0 MICRON CONFIDENTIAL 27 15 00 - 301.CP - 1
BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
C SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 27_15_00 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FOR THE HORIZONTAL CABLING
AND
UPONTERMINATION HARDWARE
INSTALLING OFCI ASSOCIATED
WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS POINT THE CABLING
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.
ADDRESS FOR EACH PHYSICAL
D DEVICE ASSOCIATED WITH THIS SCHEDULE AND UPON COMPLETION OF THIS EFFORT, PROVIDE THE

CP 301-2-11-002 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-003 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-004 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-005 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-006 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-007 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-008 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-009 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-010 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-11-010-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-11-010-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-011 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-11-011-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-11-011-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-012 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-11-012-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-11-012-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-013 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-11-013-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-11-013-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-014 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-11-014-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-11-014-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-015 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-11-015-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-11-015-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-016 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-017 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-11-017-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-11-017-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-018 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-11-018-001
2 CP 301-2-11-018-002
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-019 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-11-019-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-11-019-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-020 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-021 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-022 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-023 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-11-023-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-11-023-001 - Port 2
3 CP 301-2-11-023-002 - Port 1
4 CP 301-2-11-023-002 - Port 2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-024 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-11-024-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-11-024-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-025 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-026 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-11-026-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-11-026-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-027 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-11-027-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-11-027-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-11-028 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND TERMINATION
UPON HARDWARE
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-11-029 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND TERMINATION
UPON HARDWARE
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-11-030 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND TERMINATION
UPON HARDWARE
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-11-031 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND TERMINATION
UPON HARDWARE
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-11-032 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND TERMINATION
UPON HARDWARE
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-11-033 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND TERMINATION
UPON HARDWARE
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-11-034 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND TERMINATION
UPON HARDWARE
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-11-035 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND TERMINATION
UPON HARDWARE
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-11-036 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND TERMINATION
UPON HARDWARE
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-11-037 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND TERMINATION
UPON HARDWARE
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-11-038 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND TERMINATION
UPON HARDWARE
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-11-039 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND TERMINATION
UPON HARDWARE
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-11-040 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND TERMINATION
UPON HARDWARE
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-11-041 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND TERMINATION
UPON HARDWARE
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-11-042 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND TERMINATION
UPON HARDWARE
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-11-043 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND TERMINATION
UPON HARDWARE
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-11-044 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND TERMINATION
UPON HARDWARE
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-11-045 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND TERMINATION
UPON HARDWARE
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-11-046 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND TERMINATION
UPON HARDWARE
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-11-047 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND TERMINATION
UPON HARDWARE
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-11-048 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-12-001 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-12-002 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-12-003 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-12-004 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-12-005 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-12-006 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-12-007 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-12-008 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-12-009 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-12-010 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-12-010-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-12-010-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-12-011 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-12-011-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-12-011-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-12-012 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-12-012-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-12-012-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-12-013 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-12-013-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-12-013-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-12-014 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-12-014-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-12-014-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-12-015 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-12-015-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-12-015-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-12-016 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-12-017 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-12-018 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-12-019 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-12-019-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-12-019-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-12-020 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-12-020-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-12-020-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-12-021 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-12-022 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-12-023 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-12-024 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-12-025 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-12-026 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-12-027 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-12-028 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-12-029 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-12-030 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-12-031 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-13-001 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-13-001-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-13-001-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-13-002 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-13-003 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-13-004 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-13-005 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-13-006 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-13-007 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-13-008 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-13-008-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-13-008-001 - Port 2
3 CP 301-2-13-008-002 - Port 1
4 CP 301-2-13-008-002 - Port 2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-13-009 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-13-009-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-13-009-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-13-010 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-13-010-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-13-010-001 - Port 2
3 CP 301-2-13-010-002 - Port 1
4 CP 301-2-13-010-002 - Port 2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-13-011 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-13-011-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-13-011-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-13-012 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-13-012-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-13-012-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-13-013 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-13-013-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-13-013-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-13-014 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-13-014-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-13-014-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-13-015 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-13-015-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-13-015-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-13-016 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-13-017 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-13-018 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-13-019 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-13-019-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-13-019-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-13-020 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-13-020-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-13-020-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-13-021 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-13-021-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-13-021-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-13-022 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-13-023 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-13-024 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-13-025 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-13-026 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

KVM UPLINK KVM UPLINK KVM UPLINK KVM UPLINK KVM UPLINK KVM UPLINK
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-13-027 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-13-028 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-13-029 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-13-030 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-13-031 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-13-032 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-13-033 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-13-034 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-13-035 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-13-036 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-14-001 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-14-002 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-14-003 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-14-004 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-14-005 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-14-006 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-14-007 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-14-008 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-14-009 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-14-010 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-14-010-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-14-010-001 - Port 2
3 CP 301-2-14-010-002 - Port 1
4 CP 301-2-14-010-002 - Port 2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-14-011 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-14-011-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-14-011-001 - Port 2
3 CP 301-2-14-011-002 - Port 1
4 CP 301-2-14-011-002 - Port 2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-14-012 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-14-012-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-14-012-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-14-013 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-14-013-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-14-013-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-14-014 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
OFCI WIRELESS WITH
ACCESS THEDEVICES,
POINT CABLINGNOTE
ON THIS
MACSCHEDULE.

CP 301-2-14-015 KVM WAP
1 CP 301-2-14-015-001 - Port 1
2 CP 301-2-14-015-001 - Port 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-14-016 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-14-017 KVM WAP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-14-018 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-14-019 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-14-020 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

BLUE RIDGE
GENERAL NOTES
AND
WIRELESS WITH
DEVICES, ON THIS
NOTE MAC SCHEDULE.

CP 301-3-14-021 KVM WAP
1 KVM UPLINK
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48

SECTION 28 13 70
SECURITY ACCESS AND SURVEILLANCE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements to furnish and install a complete operational security

surveillance and access control system.
1. Section 08 71 00 Door Hardware.
2. Section 14 24 13 Hydraulic Freight Elevators.
3. Section 14 24 23 Hydraulic Passenger Elevators.
4. Section 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors – Cables.
5. Section 28 13 71 Closed Circuit Television System.
6. Section 28 31 50 Life Safety Systems.
C. In the event of conflict regarding security/access control system requirements between

this Section and another Section, the provisions of this Section govern.
A. The security / access control system (S/ACS) consists of software, hardware, network
equipment, security devices, enclosures, wiring, and raceways for a fully autonomous
system providing access control with intrusion detection and transaction monitoring.
B. The S/ACS is an expansion of the Owner’s existing (Lenel) corporate access control
system, networked from Boise, ID.
C. New S/ACS components will be added within this project, to include but not be limited
to, the following:
1. Security control panels.
2. Card reader units.
3. Door status switches.
4. Door alarm sounders.
5. Power supplies and batteries.
6. Enclosures, cabinets racks and junction boxes.
7. New software and appropriate software licenses where required.
D. Refer to the Drawings for items designated as provided by Owner. This includes, but is
not limited to, the following:
1. Corporate security network.
2. Security server.
3. Security workstation.
4. Security network switches.
704618 28 13 70
25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 Security Access and Surveillance - 1
E. System Operation: The S/ACS shall be capable of performing the following functions as
a minimum:
1. Generating and reporting an event every time a card reader is used to gain access.
2. Capability to trigger alarms and actions of intruder.
3. Ability to email specific personnel when certain event occurs.
4. Ability to integrate with the IP video surveillance system /
5. Closed-circuit television (CCTV) systems provided in Section 28 13 71 Closed
Circuit Television Systems. An Ethernet port is to be provided.
F. System Interface: The S/ACS to allow system administrators to carry out the following
tasks from a single workstation:
1. View system status, intrusion, access control and video alarms.
2. Administer the local system.
3. Filter and request reports.
4. Display alarms or device status as a continually updated list or as a graphical map
with icons updating in real time.
5. Arm or disarm intrusion detection devices.
6. Program automatic lock and unlock schedules for access-controlled doors.
7. Manually lock and unlock access-controlled doors and gates.
8. Put the facility into lockdown mode, automatically locking down all doors with
one set of commands.
9. Add or delete users.
10. Issuance or revocation of credentials.
G. System Programming: Install and program the S/ACS in coordination with the Owner:
1. The Owner will provide necessary IP network information for Contractor to
program devices.
2. The Owner will provide access control lists and can assist with programming
specific access lists once all doors are configured and initialized in the access
control and intrusion detection system.
3. Contractor will be given temporary access to the Owner’s corporate S/ACS
system server to accomplish programming for the following:
a. All hardware devices installed as a part of this work.
b. All access and user defined authorization levels, as required by Owner’s
S/ACS security system coordinator.
c. All input of alarm condition messages.
d. Import of mapping displays and program all associated map icons.
e. Input of all other integrated programming requirements of the system
coordinated with Owner’s S/ACS security system coordinator to provide
a fully functional and operational access control and intrusion detection
system.
1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Card Readers: Designated doors shall receive access control card readers for entry. Other
doors will receive door status contact switches and alarm sounders, where indicated.
B. Perimeter Doors: Perimeter exterior doors shall be monitored for alarm conditions, such
as door held open and door forced conditions.
704618 28 13 70
C. Exit Doors: Exit only doors will receive annunciator alarm sounders, to sound locally
when the door is opened.
D. Failure Mode: Facility doors are to fail secure (locked) upon expiration of battery power.
E. Panel Location: S/ACS panels to be located in secured spaces with access controlled by a
card reader.
F. Panel Locks: S/ACS panel enclosures to be locked, using the same type of lock and key
as currently used onsite by the Owner. Coordinate with the Owner for lock information.
G. Panel Tamper: S/ACS panel enclosures to have a tamper switch that alerts the S/ACS
system that the door is opened.
H. Wiring: Security wiring is to be protected within white conduit or raceways. Where

possible, conduits shall be routed within the interior of the building, concealed from
view. Reference the requirements of Section 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors – Cables.
I. Wiring Integrity: All interconnecting wiring between S/ACS components will be

monitored for integrity so that an abnormal condition (wire-to-wire short, wire break, or
wire ground-fault condition) is automatically indicated to the user upon arming the
system.
J. Backup Power: CCTV components to be provided with a seamless backup power source
(4 hours minimum).
1. Backup power sources may include battery units, auxiliary power supplies,
uninterruptible power supply (UPS) units, or generators.
2. The Satellite Communication Rooms (SCRs) will be served by a facility UPS,
backed by generator power, serving all equipment in those rooms.
1.4 REFERENCES

3. Closed-circuit television (CCTV)
5. Graphical user interface (GUI)
6. Identification (ID)
9. Security / access control system (S/ACS)
10. Security Control Panel (SCP)
1.5 SUBMITTALS
704618 28 13 70
for this Section.
A. Electronic Components: Comply with latest applicable standards of Electronics Industry

Association (EIA); standard industry grade; types and ratings commonly available in
local distributor stock. Nonstandard or specially manufactured components may not be
used.
B. Contractor is to employ the services of an approved security system integrator for

programming, calibrating, system startup and testing.
C. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70
(National Electric Code- NEC), as applicable. Where required by authority having
D. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by

E. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide a 4-year warranty for access cards.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Security equipment is to be interfaced with and is to be functionally compatible with the

site CCTV system provided in Section 28 13 71 Closed Circuit Television System and
per the drawings.
B. Installation of security card readers, proximity switches, status switches and request-to-
exit devices are to be coordinated per Section 08 71 00 Door Hardware, Section 14 24 13
Hydraulic Freight Elevators, and Section 14 24 23 Hydraulic Passenger Elevators.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE SYSTEM INTEGRATORS
A. Aronson Security Group (ASG), Limited.
704618 28 13 70
2.2 SYSTEM SOFTWARE MANUFACTURER
A. Lenel OnGuard, Lenel Systems Inc.
2.3 ACCESS CONTROL SERVER
A. The S/ACS server is existing, located at the Owner’s corporate headquarters in Boise, ID.
B. Provide software programming as indicated within Article 1.2. The Owner will provide
temporary access to the corporate S/ACS server and software to accommodate Lenel
programming of new devices.
2.4 ACCESS CONTROL WORKSTATION
A. Workstations shall meet manufacturer’s minimum hardware requirements and Owner’s

standard build requirements.
B. Access control workstation is provided by Owner.
2.5 DESKTOP DISPLAY MONITOR
A. Desktop display monitor is provided by Owner.
2.6 BADGE PRINTERS
A. The badge printer(s) are existing – no new printers are required.
2.7 SECURITY CONTROL PANELS (SCPs)
A. General:
1. On-board 802.3af compliant Power over Ethernet (PoE) Ethernet port.
2. Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) 128-bit algorithm for communications to
reader and I/O modules.
3. 240,000 cardholders, 50,000 event transaction buffer.
4. Individual extended held open and strike times (ADA required)
5. UL 294B, UL1076 listed and CE approved.
6. Enclosure Type: Include stainless steel enclosure.
7. Flexible Network-Connected Door I/O Module:
8. Supports 10/100 Ethernet communications to Lenel intelligent system controller.
9. Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) 128-bit algorithm for communications.
B. Panel Component Modules: Security control panels consist of a pre-wired assembly

comprised of an enclosure, backplane and power supply units accommodating Lenel
access control modules. Utilize the following sub-components shown below, referring to
the Drawings:
1. (1) Altronix Trove3M3; Trove3 enclosure with Altronix/Lenel backplane,
2. (1) eFlow104NB; 24VDC, 10A Power Supply and Charger.
3. (1) eFlow 102NB; 24VDC, 10A Power Supply and Charger.
704618 28 13 70
4. (2) Altronix ACM8CB; Power controller with fire alarm interface and 8 PTC-
protected outputs.
5. (1) Altronix PD8ULCB; Power distribution module with 8 positive temperature
coefficient (PTC)-protected outputs.
6. (1) RSB2; Rocker Switch Bracket with (2) Rocker Switches.
7. (1) Lenel LNL-2220; Intelligent dual reader controller.
8. (5) Lenel LNL-1320; Series 3 dual reader interface modules.
9. (1) Lenel LNL-1100; Input control module.
10. (1) Lenel LNL-1200; Output control module.
11. Dimensions: 30.12"W x 36.12"H x 7.06"D.
12. Conduit: Knockouts accommodate up to 2-inch conduits.
13. Battery Space: Accommodates up to four 12 Vdc, 12AH batteries.
14. Cam Lock: Coordinate keying of cam lock with Owner’s existing key standard
on other facility security control panels to match keys.
15. Product: Altronix TROVE3M3, 12-door (or greater) Lenel panel assembly,
model T3MK75F16D with Lenel components noted above, or approved equal.
2.8 CARD-READER UNITS
A. Mullion Reader: (used for majority of installations) multiCLASS SE® mullion mounted
card reader
1. Furnish and install mullion mount card reader as shown on Drawings and
specified herein.
2. Detection Range: iCLASS Card: 1.6-inch.
3. Dimensions: 1.9-inch x 6.0-inch x 0.9-inch.
4. Current draw: 200 Ma (peak power draw), 75 mA (standard power mode) at 5-
16 Vdc.
5. Transmit Frequency: 125 kHz an 13.56 MHz.
6. Optionally compatible with open supervised device protocol (OSDP) using
secure channel protocol (SCP) over RS-485 communications.
7. Product: HID RP15, model 910PTNNEK00000 mullion reader.
B. Turnstile and Gate Reader: (used for personnel turnstiles and vehicle gate installations)
multiCLASS SE® wall switch card reader
1. Furnish and install mullion mount card reader as shown on Drawings and
specified herein.
2. Detection Range: iCLASS Card: 2.4-inch.
3. Dimensions: 3.3-inch x 4.8-inch x 1.0-inch.
4. Current draw: 200 Ma (peak power draw), 85 mA (standard power mode) at 5-
16 Vdc.
5. Transmit Frequency: 125 kHz and 13.56 MHz.
6. Optionally compatible with open supervised device protocol (OSDP) using
secure channel protocol (SCP) over RS-485 communications.
7. Product: HID RP40, model 920PTNNEK00000 wall switch reader.
2.9 ACCESS CARD
A. Standard 13.56 MHz access card, product: HID iClass . Select access cards to match
Owner’s current access cards.
704618 28 13 70
B. . Coordinate with Owner for quantity to be provided.
2.10 POWER SUPPLY
A. Power supply units are to convert the available commercial power to the power required
by system and external devices, as well as power on/off switching, fault protection, and
power-on indication.
B. Power supply units shall be of the uninterruptible type with sealed batteries to maintain
system operation during power outage.
2.11 BATTERY UNITS
A. Battery assemblies shall use lithium iron phosphate battery units.
B. Batteries shall be sized to meet backup requirements noted in Design Criteria within this
Section and the Drawings.
C. Product: Relion Lipo lithium iron phosphate battery.
2.12 SURFACE-MOUNT DOOR ALARM SWITCH
A. General: surface-mounted, balanced magnetic reed switch for door and access hatch
intrusion detection shall be provided.
B. Electrical:
1. Type: Form C contacts.
2. Voltage: 30V ac/V dc minimum.
3. Current: 0.25 A minimum.
4. Power: 3 W maximum.
5. UL-listed under Standard 634.
6. Leads as required for installation: 3 feet minimum.
C. Physical:
1. Hermetically sealed electronics and magnet-sealed within a die-cast aluminum
housing, suitable for indoor and outdoor wet locations.
2. For surface mounting to door and door frame or to access hatch cover and frame.
3. Mounting hardware shall be provided.
4. Performance: Gap distance: 3/4 inch or less.
D. Product: Sentrol 2500 Series.
2.13 RECESSED DOOR ALARM SWITCH
A. General: recessed-mounted, balanced magnetic reed switch for door intrusion detection
shall be provided.
1. Type: Form C contacts.
3. Current: 0.25A minimum.
704618 28 13 70
4. Power: 3W maximum.
B. Physical:
1. Hermetically sealed electronics and magnet-sealed within a plastic housing,
suitable for indoor locations.
2. For recessed mounting in door and door frame.
4. Performance: Gap distance: 1 inch or less.
C. Product: Sentrol 1076CD.
2.14 OVERHEAD ROLL UP DOOR ALARM SWITCH
A. General: low profile unit within cast aluminum for door intrusion detection shall be
provided.
1. Type: Form C contacts, closed loop.
3. Current: 0.25A minimum.
4. Power: 3W maximum.
B. Physical:
1. Hermetically sealed electronics and magnet-sealed within a cast aluminum
housing, suitable for industrial applications.
2. For surface mounting; includes 18-inch flexible stainless-steel cable.
4. Performance: Gap distance: up to 3 inches or less.
C. Product: Sentrol 2202AU-L.
2.15 MOTION SENSORS – PASSIVE INFRA RED
A. Furnish and install Request-To-Exit PIR with wrap around coverage as shown on the
contract plan and specified herein.
1. Current draw: 0.026A at 12 VDC.
2. Relay Latch Time: Adjustable to 60 seconds.
3. Alarm output: Two (2) form C relay contacts.
4. Coverage Area: 8 feet by 10 feet.
5. Product: Bosch DS 150i.
2.16 EMERGENCY DOOR RELEASE PUSH BUTTON
A. Furnish and install momentary door release push button with 2-inch square exit push
button as shown on the contract plan and specified herein.
1. Operation: Intended for release of magnetic lock from inside the door. When
button is pressed, the lock releases for 30 seconds. If pressed again during 30
second lock release period, the unit will retrigger, starting a new 30 second lock
release period.
2. Button: 2-inch square button, green, labeled ‘PUSH TO EXIT’.
3. Operating Power: 12 Vdc or 24 Vdc.
704618 28 13 70
4. Current draw: 0.0 A at rest, 28 mA at 12 Vdc (38 mA at 24 Vdc).
5. Switching Capacity: 3 A.
6. Product: Assa Abloy Securitron EEB2 or EEB3N.
2.17 SECURITY SOUNDER (DOOR ALARM UNIT)
A. Furnish and install security door sounder unit, with integrated keyswitch.
1. Backbox Size: Two-gang back box, 2.5-inch deep.
2. Input Power: 12-24Vac/Vdc, 200mA.
3. Wiring: 22 AWG, signal and 22 AWG power wires.
4. Keyswitch: Integrated keyswitch unit within assembly.
5. Remote Reset Capability: Units to be capable of remote reset through access
control system workstation.
6. Product: DSI (Designed Security Inc.) ES4300A-K1-T1.
B. Mount at same height and adjacent to card reader.
2.18 GLASS BREAK DETECTORS
A. Not used.
2.19 BADGE COMPUTER STATION
A. Badge Computer Station is existing. No new badge computer station is required.
2.20 GUARD TOUR SYSTEM
A. Not used.
2.21 WIRING
A. Wiring types to be as indicated on the drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount card reader sensors 42 inches above finished floor (or grade, if outside).
B. Card readers, contact modules, terminal cabinets and SCP locations shown are
approximate. Coordinate final locations with the Owner.
C. Coordinate the mounting of status switches, card readers, proximity switches, status
switches and request-to-exit devices with door installer.
704618 28 13 70
A. Perform panel verification, network backbone verification and final acceptance testing in
accordance with the requirements of Division 1 and Section 28 31 50, Life Safety
Systems.
B. Provide photo images of the completed items indicated below for Owner acceptance:
1. Card Reader Doors – Field Devices:
a. Provide photo of the unsecured side of the door. Include all devices in
the picture. (Photo to be taken from ground to include surrounding area
and labeling) (Photo to be taken from 3-8 feet distance).
b. Provide photo of secured side of door. Include all devices in picture.
(Photo to be taken from ground to include surrounding area and labeling)
(Photo to be taken from 3-8 feet distance).
c. Provide photo of lock installation (Mag lock, Door strike, Integrated
lockset)
d. Provide photo of the lock up close with door closed to make sure
everything is adjusted aligned and plumb. (Photo to be taken from 3-8
feet distance).
e. Provide photo of Card Reader. (Photo to be taken from 3-8 feet distance).
f. Provide photo of the door contact. (Photo to be taken from 3-8 feet
distance).
g. Provide Photo of REX device (Motion REX, Pushbutton). (Photo to be
taken from 3-8 feet distance).
h. Provide Photo of the emergency door release. (Photo to be taken from 3-
8 feet distance).
2. Monitored Doors:
a. Provide photo of the door contact. (Photo to be taken from 1-3 feet
distance).
b. Provide photo of the door sounder. (Photo to be taken from 1-3 feet
distance).
c. Provide photo of the unsecured side of the door – include all devices in
the photo. (Photo to be taken from 3-8 feet distance).
d. Provide photo of the secured side of the door – include all devices in the
photo. (Photo to be taken from 3-8 feet distance).
3. Security Panels:
a. Provide photo of panel layout with doors closed and wall location.
b. Provide photo of interior of panel with door open. (Photo to be taken
from 3-8 feet distance).
c. Provide photo of individual Lenel panel components, i.e. (LNL-3300,
1300, 1320, 2220, 1100, 1200) separately. (Photo to be taken from 1-3
feet distance).
d. Provide photo of 12-Vdc power supply with door(s) open. (Photo to be
e. Provide photo of 24-Vdc power supply with door(s) open. (Photo to be
704618 28 13 70
f. Provide photo of incoming 120-Vac circuit breaker location for power.
g. Provide photo of incoming wire entry into S/ACS panel. (Photo to be
h. Provide photo of incoming wire entry into 12-Vdc power supply. (Photo
to be taken from 1-3 feet distance).
i. Provide photo of incoming wire entry into 24-Vdc power supply. (Photo
to be taken from 1-3 feet distance).
C. Provide the following additional Owner-required S/ACS tests indicated below:

1. Access Granted – No Entry:
a. Present a valid card at the reader – do not open door.
b. Validate card reader LED turns green and door unlocks.
c. Validate card reader LED turns red and door relocks.
d. Mark result on testing sheet.
2. Strike Time:
a. Document actual time between door unlock and lock (typically 5
seconds).
3. Access Granted – Valid Entry:
a. Present a valid card at the reader.
b. Validate card reader LED turns green and door unlocks.
c. Turn handle, open door.
d. Validate card reader LED turns red and door relocks.
e. Mark result on testing sheet.
4. Relock On:
a. Open – As soon as the door opens it relocks.
b. Closed – The door remains unlocked until the door closes.
5. Held Open Alarm:
a. Present valid card.
b. Open door and hold open until signal is received.
c. Once confirmed by Security Control, close door.
d. Security Control will validate alarm resets.
e. Mark result on testing sheet.
6. Forced Open Alarm:
a. Use a key or Emergency Door Release button (“EDR”) without a card
read or valid REX.
b. Validate door forced signal is received from Security Control
c. Close door; validate alarm is cleared and door is restored.
d. Mark results on testing sheet.
7. Valid Request to Exit (“REX”) / Exit:
a. Verify no alarm for door forced.
b. If motion REX, repeat from multiple angles.
c. Check to see if door unlocks on REX.
8. Confirming Door set for unlock on REX:
a. Walk up to door.
b. Activate REX device (motion or handle turn).
c. Try to open door.
704618 28 13 70
9. Validate EDR Function:
a. Lift EDR Button cover.
b. Validate sounder annunciates.
c. Press button.
d. Validate door unlocks.
e. Validate signal received by Security Control.
f. The button should reset after approximately 30 seconds.
g. Mark results on testing sheet.
10. Door Closure:
a. Allow door to close unassisted.
b. Verify door closes and latches properly and door remains locked.
11. Reader LED Functional:
a. In a normal locked state, the card reader has a flashing red LED once
every second.
b. Verify new devices are displayed correctly on the OnGuard client
machine in Owner’s corporate control room.
3.3 TRAINING
A. The Contractor shall provide personnel training to Owner staff and documentation
including full operational instructions and maintenance material for the S/ACS.
B. Provide a training schedule acceptable by Owner for training by a factory-trained

representative of the card access system manufacturer. Two sessions of four hours
training shall be provided by the Contractor at the project site for up to twelve persons
and will include all materials.
C. The training shall demonstrate as a minimum the installation, associated O&M manuals,
startup, shutdown, periodic testing, emergency operation, and troubleshooting, etc. Also,
this training plan shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Knowledge transfer process.
2. System administration (access controls management system).
3. System configuration and expansion (adding software license, servers, etc.).
4. System maintenance (diagnostics, tuning, backup and recovery, upgrades,
patches).
5. Producing reports (system, audit, management).
6. Configuration of system parameters.
D. Training outline shall be provided by the contractor for approval by the Owner, one (1)
month prior to commencement of onsite training. In addition to training materials,
Contractor shall provide student workbooks for each trainee. Workbook format and
content shall also require approval by the Owner one (1) month prior to the start of
training sessions.
E. Upon completion of training the Owner to be able to add/delete points and access cards
without equipment supplier's assistance.
704618 28 13 70
WITH BID
28 13 70-01 Provide shop drawings. Per construction schedule
28 13 70-02 Graphic hierarchical organization tree Per construction schedule

showing all graphics and all points.
28 13 70-03 Detailed color conventions proposed for Per construction schedule
graphics and graphic element states.
28 13 70-04 Proposed text for point descriptions, alarms Per construction schedule
and status messages. Text and graphics shall
be approved prior to data entry.
28 13 70-05 S/ACS Installation Photos: Provide photos Per construction schedule
documenting installation and labeling for
Owner’s approval.
END OF SECTION
704618 28 13 70
SECTION 28 13 71
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements to provide a fully operational and complete closed-
circuit television (CCTV) system.
1. Section 14 24 13 Hydraulic Freight Elevators.
2. Section 14 24 23 Hydraulic Passenger Elevators.
3. Section 26 33 53 Static Uninterruptible Power Supply.
4. Section 27 10 10 Basic Communications Materials and Methods.
5. Section 27 10 20 Communications Systems Testing.
6. Section 28 13 70 Security Access and Surveillance.
7. Section 28 31 50 Life Safety System.
A. The CCTV video surveillance system consists of software, hardware, network equipment,
cameras, monitors, video storage power supplies, enclosures , wiring, and raceways for a
fully controllable and selectable video surveillance system.
B. The CCTV system is an expansion of the Owner’s existing (Verint) corporate digital
video system, networked from Boise, ID. This system will be independent from the
existing (Lenel LNVR) analog camera system on-site.
C. New CCTV components will be added in this project, to include, but not be limited to,
the following:
1. Video surveillance display monitors.
2. Surge protection devices
3. Camera units
4. Power supplies.
5. Enclosures, cabinets racks and junction boxes.
6. New software and appropriate software licenses where required.
D. Refer to the Drawings for items designated as provided by Owner. This includes, but is
not limited to, the following:
1. Corporate video network.
2. Video server.
3. Local network video recording equipment.
4. Video workstation.
5. Security network switches.
704618 28 13 71
25 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 Closed Circuit Television System - 1
E. System Operation: The CCTV system shall be capable of performing the following
functions as a minimum:
1. The ability to record and recall emergencies and incidents.
2. The ability to track persons of interest and recall.
3. The ability to monitor and track facility activities.
4. The ability to utilize video as evidence during an investigation.
5. The ability to integrate with the security access control system (S/ACS) provided
in Section 28 13 70 Security Access and Surveillance. An Ethernet port is to be
provided.
F. System Programming: Install and program the CCTV system in coordination with the
Owner:
1. The Owner will provide necessary IP network information for Contractor to
program devices.
2. Temporary access to the Owner’s corporate CCTV system server will be
provided to accomplish programming for the following:
a. All cameras and hardware devices installed as a part of this work.
b. All input of video alarm status messages.
c. Import of mapping displays and program all associated map icons.
d. Input of all other integrated programming requirements of the system
coordinated with Owner’s CCTV system coordinator to provide a fully
functional and operational access control and intrusion detection system.
1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. System Use: The CCTV system shall be used for surveillance of indoor and outdoor areas
against intrusion and for effective visual monitoring and verification of validity of fire
alarms, security alarms and other alert conditions.
B. Multitasking Capability: The CCTV system to have the ability to record video, display
live video and display recorded video simultaneously. No task such as system
administration, search or export of video is to stop the system form recording video.
C. Lenses: CCTV cameras to be equipped with auto-iris lenses, varifocal, or motorized

zoom lenses as shown on drawings.
1. The Contractor to coordinate the selection of the lenses with the Owner to
provide the view required.
2. Prior to ordering, the Security Contractor is to submit a schedule of lens
selections showing the angles of view for every camera in the project.
3. The Contractor will be required to demonstrate to the Owner the typical scene
covered prior to final selection.
D. Remote Capability: The system to have the ability to perform all administrative tasks
either locally or remotely with network connectivity.
E. Video Alarms: Alarms associated with the CCTV System to be recorded and stored
within the database.
1. Stored alarms to include those native to the CCTV System such as motion
alarms, analytics alarms, video loss, network loss or power fail.
704618 28 13 71
2. Alarms to be searchable or able to be sorted by time, date or category of alarm.
3. Reports to be available for export based upon the results of a search or sort.
4. Video clips or still images to be available for export based upon the results of a
search or sort.
F. Integration with S/ACS: The CCTV System is to integrate with the S/ACS to do the
following:
1. Upon a card read attempt the Access Control System to be capable of displaying
the camera view of the door being accessed.
2. Upon receiving an alarm condition, the Access Control System to be capable
automatically displaying a camera scene to a viewing monitor.
3. Upon receiving an alarm condition, the Access Control System to be capable of
triggering a Pan Tilt and Zoom (PTZ) camera to move to a preset position.
4. The Video Surveillance System alarms to be displayed within the Access Control
System software. A list of displayed video alarms includes:
a. Video surveillance communication failure.
b. Loss of video channel.
c. Analytic alarm (motion alarm).
G. System Reporting: The CCTV System to manage reports using an industry approved
report generation tool that to include, but not limited to:
1. System Status: reporting current status as on-screen text or as a configurable print
and in addition as icons.
2. Live “alarm” queue reporting to selected staff.
3. Trend Reports (for example):
a. Number of faults/day.
b. Faults/week.
c. By sub-systems.
d. By device type,
4. Fault report (e.g., down-time for devices).
5. Audit Trails: Who did what and when by operator, workstation, etc.
6. Alarm queue statistics.
7. Ability to selectively search and print specific reports.
H. Preset Motion: The CCTV system to have the ability to command a PTZ camera to a
preset position, based upon any S/ACS alarm inputs.
I. Manual Control: The CCTV system to have the ability to manually control a PTZ
camera.
J. New Presets: The CCTV system to have the ability to program new PTZ preset positions
remotely.
K. Displays: The CCTV system shall display alarms or device status as a continually
updated list or as a graphical map with icons updating in real time.
L. Storage: Store video recordings for 60 days at a minimum of 4 CIF (4 x common

interface format) resolution for all cameras. Capacity to be based on 25 percent alarm or
motion recording for at least 7 images per second, per camera.
704618 28 13 71
M. Wiring: CCTV wiring is to be protected within white conduit or raceways. Where
possible, conduits shall be routed within the interior of the building, concealed from
view.
N. Wiring Integrity: All interconnecting wiring between CCTV components will be

monitored for integrity so that an abnormal condition (wire-to-wire short, wire break, or
wire ground-fault condition) is automatically indicated to the user upon arming the
system.
O. Surge Protection: All Ethernet connections to devices mounted outdoors (cameras,

switches) shall be protected by Ethernet surge protection devices at the network switch
end and equipment end of devices.
P. Grounding: All CCTV components shall be grounded to an approved ground source.
Q. Backup Power: CCTV components to be provided with a seamless backup power source
(4 hours minimum).
1. Backup power sources may include battery units, auxiliary power supplies,
uninterruptible power supply (UPS) units, or generators.
2. The Building Communication Rooms (BCRs) and Satellite Communication
Rooms (SCRs) will be served by a facility UPS, backed by generator power,
serving all equipment in those rooms.
1.4 REFERENCES

1. American National Taper Pipe Thread (NPT)
3. Closed circuit television (CCTV)
4. Emergency control station (ECS)
6. Fiber Optic Distribution Units (FDU)
10. Pan Tilt and Zoom (PTZ)
11. Security, Access Control System (S/ACS)
1.5 SUBMITTALS
for this Section.
704618 28 13 71
A. Electronic Components: Comply with latest applicable standards of Electronics Industry

Association (EIA), standard industry grade, types, and ratings commonly available in
local distributor stock. Nonstandard or specially manufactured components may not be
used.
B. Contractor to employ the services of an approved CCTV system integrator for

programming, calibration, system startup, and testing.
C. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70
D. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by

E. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of
1.7 COORDINATION
A. CCTV equipment to be interfaced with and to be functionally compatible with the site
security system provided in Section 28 13 70 Security Access and Surveillance and per
the Drawings.
B. Installation of CCTV equipment is to be coordinated Section 14 24 13 Hydraulic Freight

Elevators and Section 14 24 23 Hydraulic Passenger Elevators.
A. For 2 months after acceptance, provide a maximum 12-hour response to calls for any
adjustments or repairs required to keep the system fully operational without additional
charge to the Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE SYSTEM INTEGRATORS
A. Aronson Security Group (ASG), Limited.
704618 28 13 71
2.2 SYSTEM SOFTWARE MANUFACTURER
A. Verint, Inc.
2.3 VIDEO MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
A. Verint EdgeVMS software.
2.4 VIDEO SERVER EQUIPMENT
A. Video server is existing.
2.5 VIDEO WORKSTATION EQUIPMENT
A. Video workstation is provided by Owner.
2.6 VIDEO STORAGE EQUIPMENT
A. Video storage specifications must meet or exceed manufacturer’s minimum requirements

and Owner IT standards in all cases. The following performance characteristics are
provided as a suggested minimum standard.
B. Network Video Recorder(s) provided by Owner.
2.7 DESKTOP VIDEO DISPLAY MONITOR
A. The desktop video display monitors are to comply with the following minimum
requirements:
1. Display type: 28-inch ultra-high definition (UHD), black, 16:9 aspect ratio.
2. Brightness (typical): 300 cd/m2.
3. Resolution: 3840 x 2160 pixels.
4. Response: 1ms response time.
5. Connectivity: Two HDMI.
6. Product: Samsung U28H750 UHD monitor.
2.8 INDOOR/OUTDOOR PTZ IP CAMERA
A. Furnish and install indoor/outdoor PTZ IP security camera as specified below.
B. Hardware and System Specifications:

1. Image sensor: 1/2.3 progressive scan CMOS.
2. b. Lens: f=3.9 – 46.8 mm, F1.8 – 2.0 autofocus, automatic day/night, horizontal
field of view: 70.7 degree - 6.2 degree.
3. Minimum illumination: Color - 0.45 lux at 30 IRE F1.8, B/W – 0.03 lux at 30
IRE F1.8.
4. Shutter time: 1/10000 s to 1 s.
5. Pan/tilt/zoom: Pan: 360 degrees endless, 0.05 – 750 degree/s. Tilt: plus 20 to
minus 90 degree, 0.05 – 500 degree/s, 12x optical zoom and 12x digital zoom
total 144 zoom.
704618 28 13 71
6. Resolutions: 3840 x 2160 UltraHD 4fK to 640 x 360.
7. Frame rate: Up to 50/60 fps (60/50 Hz) @1080P. Up to 25/30 fps @4K.
8. Processors and memory: 1GB RAM, 256 MB Flash.
9. Power: High Power over Ethernet, max. 37W, High PoE Midspan 1- port: 100-
240V AV, max. 74 W.
10. Connectors: RJ-45 for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX PoE, IP67-rated RJ- 45
connector kit included.
11. Local storage: SD/SDHC memory card slot (Card is not included).
12. Operating conditions: minus 58 degrees F to 122 degrees F), with 60-W midspan.
13. Manufacturer: AXIS Q6128-E.
2.9 INDOOR FIXED CAMERA
A. Furnish and install indoor fixed IP security camera as specified below.

1. Image sensor: 1/3-inch Progressive scan CMOS.
2. Lens: Varifocal 3.0-10.5 mm: F1.4, horizontal field of view: 92 degree to 34
degree, vertical field of view: 50 degree to 20 degree. Remote focus and zoom,
P-iris control, IR corrected.
3. Minimum illumination with wide dynamic range and Lightfinder: Color: 0.15
lux, B/W: 0.03 lux, F1.4.
5. Resolutions: 1920 x 1080 to 160 x 90.
6. Casing Camera: IP66- and NEMA 4X-rated, IK08 impact-resistant aluminum
enclosure. Color: white NCS S 1002-B.
7. Memory: 512 MB RAM, 256 MB Flash.
8. Power: PoE IEEE 802.3af, Type 1, Class 3, 7.1 W max, typical 4.6 W.
9. Connectors: RJ-45 10Base-T/100Base-TX PoE.
10. Local storage: SD/SDHC memory card slot (card not included).
11. Operating conditions: -40 degrees C to 50 degrees C (minus 40 degrees F to 122
degrees F)
12. Included accessories: Connector kit, installation Guide, Windows decoder 1-user
license. Wall mount bracket, weather shield.
13. Model: AXIS P3225-VE Mk II.
2.10 INDOOR FIXED CAMERA WITH IR
A. Furnish and install indoor fixed IP security camera with infrared illumination as specified
below.

degree, vertical field of view: 50 to 20 degree. Remote focus and zoom, P-iris
control, IR corrected.
lux, B/W: 0.03 lux, F1.4. (0 lux with IR illumination on).
704618 28 13 71
degrees F)
13. Model: AXIS P3225-LV Mk II.
2.11 OUTDOOR FIXED CAMERA WITH IR
A. Furnish and install outdoor fixed IP security camera with infrared illumination as
specified below.

lux, B/W: 0.03 lux, F1.4. (0 lux with IR illumination on).
degrees F)
13. Model: AXIS P3225-LVE Mk II.
2.12 OUTDOOR FIXED CAMERA WITH IR AND TWO-WAY AUDIO
A. Furnish and install outdoor fixed IP security camera with infrared illumination and two-
way audio capabilities as specified below.

2. Lens: Varifocal 3.0-10 mm: F1.4, horizontal field of view: 90 degree to 34
degree, vertical field of view: 50 to 20 degree. Remote focus and zoom, P-iris
control, IR corrected.
704618 28 13 71
lux, B/W: 0.03 lux at 50 IRE, F1.4. (0 lux with IR illumination on).
8. Power: PoE IEEE 802.3af, Type 1, Class 3, 11 W max, typical 5.6 W.
9. Connectors: RJ-45 10Base-T/100Base-TX PoE, I/O: 4-pin 2.5 mm terminal
block for 1 supervised alarm input and 1 output (12 V c output, max load 50
mA). Audio: 4-pin 2.4 mm terminal block for audio in and out.
degrees F)
13. Model: AXIS P3235-LVE.
2.13 INDOOR/OUTDOOR FIXED 180 CAMERA
A. Furnish and install indoor/outdoor fixed IP security camera with 180-degree lens
comprised of 3 lenses as specified below:

1. Image sensor: The camera shall incorporate 3 X 1/1.8-inch progressive scan
CMOS sensors.
2. Lens: 3 x lenses, fixed focus, 5.0 mm, F2.8 combined horizontal angle of view:
180-degree.
3. Day/Night: Automatically removable infrared-cut filter.
4. Minimum Illumination: Color: 0.3 lux, F2.8, B/W: 0.06 lux, F2.8.
5. Video compression: H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) Baseline, Main and High
Profiles Motion JPEG.
6. Resolutions: 3 x (2560 x 1920 to 480 x 270).
7. Frame rate:
a. 3 x Quad HD (2560 x 1440): Up to 25/30 fps with power line frequency
50/60 Hz.
b. 3 x 5 MP: Up to 16/20 fps with power line frequency 50/60 Hz.
8. Video Streaming: Multiple, individually configurable streams in H.264 and
Motion JPEG.
9. Memory: 2.5 GB RAM, 512 MB Flash.
10. Power: Power over Ethernet IEEE 802.3at Type 2 Class 4, max. 25.5 W, typical
18.3 W.
11. Connectors: RJ45 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T.
12. Operating conditions: minus 40 degrees C to 55 degrees C (minus 40 degrees F
to 131 degrees F) Arctic Temperature Control: Startup as low as minus 40
degrees C (minus 40 degrees F) Humidity 10–100 percent RH (condensing).
13. Manufacturer: Axis Q3708-PVE.
704618 28 13 71
2.14 INDOOR/OUTDOOR FIXED 360 CAMERA WITH IR
A. Furnish and install indoor/outdoor fixed IP security camera with 360-degree lens and
infrared illumination as specified below:

1. Image sensor: Progressive scan RGB CMOS 4 x 1/2.8 inch
2. Lens: Varifocal, 3–6 mm, F1.8-2.6 4 x 1080p capture mode: Horizontal field of
view: 96 degree– 49 degree Vertical field of view: 53 degree– 27 degree.
3. 4 x 1920 x 1080p (HDTV 1080p). Adjustable focus and zoom, fixed iris.
4. Minimum Illumination: Color: 0.17 lux at 50 IRE F1.8, 0.04 lux at 50 IRE F1.8,
0 lux with IR illumination on.
5. Resolution: 4 x 1920 x 1080 (1080p) to 160 x 90.
6. Frame rate: 25/30 fps (50/60 Hz).
7. Memory: 1 GB RAM, 512 MB Flash.
8. Power: Power over Ethernet (PoE) IEEE 802.3at Type 2 Class 4, IR illumination
on: Class 4, typical 11.1 W, max 17.0 W. IR illumination off: Class 3, typical 8.6
W, max 11.0 W.
9. Connectors: RJ45 10Base-T/100Base-TX PoE.
10. Operating conditions: minus 40 degrees C to 50 degrees C (minus 22 degrees F
to 112 degrees F) Humidity 10–100 percent RH (condensing).
11. Manufacturer: Axis P3717-PVE.
2.15 CORROSIVE AREA FIXED CAMERA
A. Furnish and install indoor fixed corrosive-resistant IP security camera as specified below.

1. Image sensor: 1/1.8-inch Progressive scan CMOS.
lux, B/W: 0.0 lux with illumination on.
5. Resolutions: 3072 x 1728 (5MP) to 160 x 120.
6. Casing Camera: IP66-, IP67-, IP69- and NEMA 4X-rated, IK10+ impact-
resistant stainless steel enclosure.
7. Memory: 1GB RAM, 512 MB Flash.
degrees F)
13. Model: AXIS Q3517-SLVE.
704618 28 13 71
2.16 EXPLOSION-PROTECTED FIXED CAMERA
A. Furnish and install explosion-protected indoor fixed IP security camera as specified

below.

1. Image sensor: 1/2.9-inch Progressive scan CMOS.
lux, B/W: 0.03 lux, F1.2.
5. Resolutions: 3072 x 1728 (5 MP) to 160 x 90.
6. Housing: Powder-coated aluminum chassis. Color: Red.
7. Certifications:
a. Class I, Division 1 Groups BCD, Type 4X, IP66
b. Class II/III, Division 1 Groups EFG, Type 4X, IP66
8. Memory: 1 GB RAM, 512 MB Flash.
degrees F)
license. Wall mount bracket.
14. Model: AXIS F101-A XF P1367.
2.17 EXPLOSION PROTECTED PTZ IP CAMERA
A. Furnish and install indoor/outdoor explosion-protected PTZ IP security camera as

specified below.

1. Image sensor: 1/2.9 progressive scan CMOS.
2. Lens: f=4.7 – 84.6 mm, F1.6 – 2.8 autofocus, automatic day/night, horizontal
field of view: 59 degree – 4 degree. Vertical field of view: 35 degree – 2 degree.
3. Minimum illumination: Color; 0.5 lux at 30 IRE F1.6, B/W; 0.04 lux at 30 IRE
F1.6.
5. Pan/tilt/zoom: Pan: 360° endless, 0.1 degree – 45 degree/s. Tilt: plus or minus 90
degree, 0.1- 24 degree/s, 18x optical zoom and 12x digital zoom total 216x
zoom.
6. Video compression: H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC), Motion JPEG.
7. Resolutions: 1920 x 1080 HDTV to 160 x 90.
8. Frame rate: Up to 30/25 fps (60/50 Hz)
10. Power: 24V AC, max. 100 W.
11. Local storage: SD/SDHC memory card slot (Card is not included).
704618 28 13 71
12. Housing: SAE 316L stainless steel.
13. Operating conditions: minus 40 degrees F to 158 degrees F.
14. Manufacturer: AXIS XP40-Q1765.
2.18 CAMERA LENSES
A. Provide optimal lens type for each camera field of view. Obtain Owner’s approval, based
on proposed lens. Order and install the appropriate quantity of each type of lens.
2.19 NETWORK EQUIPMENT
A. Ethernet Switch: Furnished, installed and configured by Owner.
B. Router: Furnished, installed and configured by Owner.
2.20 FIBER OPTIC TRANSMISSION EQUIPMENT
A. Fiber Optic Media Converters:

1. General: Furnish and install fiber optic converters to convert Ethernet signal
transmitted over copper conductors to Ethernet signal transmitted over fiber.
2. Single Channel Unit:
a. Characteristics:
1) Environmental: Minus 40 to plus 75 degrees C, 5-95 percent
humidity, non-condensing.
2) Input Power: 12 to 48V dc.
3) Input Signal: 10/100BASE-TX (RJ-45 connectors).
4) Output Signal: 100BASE-FX-1300nMM (ST connectors).
5) Acceptable Manufacturer: Transition Networks, Model
Transition SISTF-1011-211—LRT.
3. Multiple Channel Rack-Mount Unit with Slide-In Modules:
a. Chassis:
1) Environmental: 0 to plus 50 degrees C, 5-95 percent humidity,
non-condensing.
2) Input Power: 100 to 240Vac.
3) Configuration: 19-slot Chassis with (1) AC power supply.
4) Acceptable Manufacturer: Transition Networks, Model ION219-
A.
b. Slide-In Converter Modules:
1) Data Rate: 100Mbps, Layer 1.
2) Input Signal: 100BASE-TX (RJ-45 connectors).
3) Output Signal: 100BASE-FX-1300nMM (ST connectors).
4) Power Consumption: 2.5 Watts, 200 mA at 13.9 Vdc.
5) Acceptable Manufacturer: Transition Networks, Model C2110-
1011.
B. Fiber Optic Patch Panels:

1. General: Furnish and install fiber optic patch panels to provide a secure place to
terminate fiber optic cables.
2. Characteristics:
704618 28 13 71
a. Compartments: Two – one for fiber optic, one for jumpers for individual
equipment.
b. Fiber Guide: Guide to wind slack fiber optic cable, provides controlled
long-radius bends.
c. Connectors 12 ST connectors for entry and exit.
d. Fiber Compatibility: Simplex, 12 fibers, 62.5 micro-meter multimode.
e. Size: Maximum 8 inches by 7 inches by 3 inches.
f. Splice Holder: Includes 6-slot, 4-inch splice holder; accommodates up to
12 heat-shrink splices.
g. Acceptable Manufacturer: Corning Single-Panel Housing (SPH) and
Closet-Connector Housing (CCH) Panel, ST Compatible Adapters.
C. Fiber Optic Distribution Units: FDU: Refer to Section 27 10 10 Basic Communications

Materials and Methods.
2.21 ETHERNET SURGE PROTECTION UNIT – SINGLE PORT
A. Furnish and install Ethernet surge protection for all Ethernet connections to devices
mounted outdoors. Protected devices shall include, but not be limited to IP video
cameras, etc.
B. Point of use surge protector to be installed at the network switch end and equipment end
of devices, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Characteristics:
1. Port: Single port.
2. Service Voltage: 48V.
3. Clamping Voltage: 72V.
4. Protection Modes: Line-ground, line-line.
5. Surge Current Rating: 20,000A per pair.
6. Power Handling: 144 Watts.
7. Data Rate: 1000 Mbps.
8. Connection Method: Shielded RJ45 in/out; compatible with CAT6 cabling.
9. PoE+ compatible.
10. Operating Temperature: Minus 40 degrees C to plus 70 degrees C.
11. Acceptable Manufacturer: DITEK, model DTK-MRJPOES.
2.22 ETHERNET SURGE PROTECTION UNIT – MULTI-PORT
A. Furnish and install Ethernet surge protection for all Ethernet connections to devices
mounted outdoors. Protected devices shall include, but not be limited to IP video
cameras, radar, intercom, etc.
B. Multiport surge protector to be installed at the primary CCTV network switch in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Characteristics:
1. Ports: 12-port.
2. Mounting: 1U rack mount.
704618 28 13 71
3. Service Voltage: 48V.
4. Clamping Voltage: 72V.
5. Protection Modes: Line-ground, line-line.
6. Surge Current Rating: 30,000A per pair.
7. Power Handling: 144 Watts.
8. Data Rate: Gigabit Ethernet.
9. Connection Method: Shielded RJ45 in/out (12 ports); compatible with CAT6
cabling.
10. PoE+ compatible.
11. Operating Temperature: Minus 40 degrees C to plus 70 degrees C.
12. Acceptable Manufacturer: DITEK, model DTK-RM12POE.
2.23 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)
A. By others, as shown on drawings.
B. Refer to Section 26 33 53 Static Uninterruptible Power Supply for components provided

by others.
2.24 CAMERA HOUSINGS AND ENCLOSURES
A. Indoor Dome Enclosure with Integrated Pan/Tilt Drive:

1. Pan Drive Speed: Variable up to 270 degrees per second.
2. Tilt Drive Speed: Variable up to 110 degrees per second.
3. Operating Temperature Range: 35 to 140 degrees F.
4. Operating Humidity Range: 0 percent to 90 percent relative humidity,
noncondensing.
5. Mounting: Optional in-ceiling flush mount or pendant mount via standard
1-inch American National Taper Pipe Thread (NPT) pipe thread.
6. Power Requirements: 24 Vac, 60 Hz.
B. Outdoor Dome Enclosure with Integrated Pan/Tilt Drive: Formed, high-impact cell-cast
acrylic plastic domed housings with black interiors to eliminate possible light reflections.
1. Pan Drive Speed: Variable up to 270 degrees per second.
2. Tilt Drive Speed: Variable up to 110 degrees per second.
3. Operating Temperature Range: minus 40 to 140 degrees F.
4. Operating Humidity Range: 100 percent relative humidity. Heater/blower unit
integral to unit.
5. Wind Resistance: Heavy rain or snow driven by winds up to 80 mph.
6. Mounting: Pendant mount via standard 1-inch NPT pipe thread.
C. Outdoor Environmental Enclosure:

1. Operating Temperature Range: minus 40 to 140 degrees F.
2. Operating Humidity Range: 100 percent relative humidity.
3. Heater/Blower Unit: Integral to unit. Heater activates during temperatures below
68 degrees F.
4. Wind Resistance: Heavy rain or snow driven by winds up to 80 mph.
5. Mounting: Tapped holes provided on bottom of unit for mounting and balancing.
704618 28 13 71
2.25 CONSOLES, CABINETS, AND EQUIPMENT RACKS
A. As shown on drawings.
B. Equipment Cabinets and Racks: Refer to Refer to Section 27 10 10 Basic

Communications Materials and Methods for requirements.
2.26 WIRING
A. Furnish the necessary wiring interconnecting the components of the system as shown on
the drawings.
B. Fiber optic cable installed in underground conduit to be protected using innerduct, and
cables to be rated for outdoor use.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Camera locations shown are approximate. Locate cameras to yield optimum coverage as
approved by the Owner.
B. Ensure all exterior-mounted Ethernet network components, including cameras and

exterior network switches, are protected with Ethernet surge protection, as specified
previously within this section.
C. Utilize PoE midspan power injectors (supplied with cameras) for all cameras exceeding
built-in network switch PoE power capacity, such as PTZ cameras.
D. Cameras to be labeled with device name and MAC address.
A. Clean and touch up components to the satisfaction of Owner.
B. Lenses, equipment enclosures, windows, and monitors to be clean and free from
scratches, mars, etc.
3.3 TESTING
A. Demonstrate to Owner each camera's field of view using proposed lens type. Document
view of each camera by recording and saving a still image.
B. Perform panel verification, network backbone verification and final acceptance testing in
accordance with the requirements of Division 1 and Section 28 31 50 Life Safety
Systems.
704618 28 13 71
C. Fiber optic cable system testing to proceed in accordance with
D. Provide photos as indicated below for Owner acceptance:

1. All CCTV network switch(es) showing switch and port number. (photo to be
2. Image of each camera’s mounting location once installation is complete (photo to
be taken from ground to include surrounding area and labeling) (photo taken
from 3-8 feet distance).
3. Snapshot view of each camera’s image from video management software.
4. Each camera’s cable label (photo to be taken from a distance of 1 to 3 feet).
5. Each camera/video device’s ID label (photo to be taken from a distance of 1 to 3
feet).
6. Each cable’s service loop (photo to be taken from a distance of 3 to 8 feet).
7. Each exterior camera’s wire entrance seal (photo to be taken from a distance of 1
to 3 feet).
8. Each exterior camera’s exterior camera seal (photo to be taken from a distance of
1 to 3 feet).
9. Front view of network video storage unit – photo must show labeling (photo to
be taken from a distance of 1 to 3 feet).
10. Rear view of network video storage unit – photo must show labeling (photo to be
taken from a distance of 1 to 3 feet).
11. Front view of CCTV network patch panel – photo must show labeling (photo to
be taken from a distance of 1 to 3 feet).
12. Rear view of CCTV patch panel – photo must show labeling (photo to be taken
from a distance of 1 to 3 feet).
13. View of each patch cable from CCTV patch panel to PoE network switch – photo
must be a close up in order to see new ID labels and Port number. (photo to be
taken from a distance of 1 to 3 feet).
3.4 TRAINING
A. The Contractor shall provide personnel training to Owner staff and documentation
including full operational instructions and maintenance material for the CCTV system.
B. Provide a training schedule acceptable by Owner for training by a factory-trained

representative of the CCTV system manufacturer. Two sessions of four hours training
shall be provided by the Contractor at the project site for up to twelve people and will
include all materials.
C. The training shall demonstrate as a minimum the installation, associated O&M manuals,
startup, shutdown, periodic testing, emergency operation, and troubleshooting, etc. Also,
this training plan shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Knowledge transfer process.
2. System administration (access controls management system).
3. System configuration and expansion (adding software license, servers, etc.).
4. System maintenance (diagnostics, tuning, backup and recovery, upgrades,
patches).
5. Producing reports (system, audit, management).
704618 28 13 71
6. Configuration of system parameters.
D. Training outline shall be provided by the contractor for approval by the Owner, one
month prior to commencement of onsite training. In addition to training materials,
Contractor shall provide student workbooks for each trainee. Workbook format and
content shall also require approval by the Owner one month prior to the start of training
sessions.
E. Upon completion of training the Owner to be able to add/delete camera preset positions,
add / delete cameras, and make routine minor adjustments without equipment supplier's
assistance.
WITH BID
28 13 71-01 Shop drawings. Per construction schedule
28 13 71-02 Written determination of the following at each Per construction schedule

camera location, considering intended camera
coverage areas, camera fields of view,
ambient lighting levels, and serviceability:
Lens type and focal length.
Mounting and housing recommendations.
Estimate of call up response time for each
camera.
28 13 71-03 Video Storage Calculations: Provide an Per construction schedule
itemized video storage calculation for each
video storage unit indicating duration of video
storage provided. Calculations shall be in MS
Excel format
28 13 71-04 CCTV Installation Photos: Provide photos Per construction schedule
documenting installation and labeling for
Owner’s approval.
END OF SECTION
704618 28 13 71
SECTION 28 31 50
LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL+
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements to furnish and install the following systems:
1. Fire alarm and Emergency Communication System
2. Early warning smoke detection (EWSD).
3. Liquid leak detection.
4. Hazardous production materials and flammable/toxic gas control systems.
5. Security/access control systems (S/ACS).
6. Closed circuit television (CCTV).
1. Section 26 05 01 Basic Electrical Requirements
2. Section 26 05 19 Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
3. Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
4. Section 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems
5. Section 26 05 36 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems
6. Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems
7. Section 28 13 70 Security Access and Surveillance
8. Section 28 13 71 Closed Circuit Television System
9. Section 28 31 51 Fire Alarm System
10. Section 28 31 52 Early Warning Smoke Detection
11. Section 28 31 54 Hazardous Production Material Monitoring and Control System
12. Section 28 31 55 Liquid Leak Detection System
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Intent of Drawings:
1. Life safety plan drawings show only general system’s configuration, locations of
panels, equipment, devices, raceways, and cable trays unless specifically
dimensioned.

1. Providing all permits, labor, equipment, materials, and services to furnish and
install a fully tested functional, code compliant, and complete systems in
accordance with intent of these contract documents.
2. Inspecting the job site and become familiar with the conditions under which the
work will be performed.
3. Scheduling, performing, and documenting required tests required by the AHJ.
4. Coordinating the details of facility equipment and construction for specification
divisions that affect the work covered under this Section.
704618 28 31 50
9 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 Life Safety Systems - 1
that are required by good practice to provide complete functional and code
compliant systems.
6. Supplying adequate hardware to satisfy the design requirements of all work
included under this Section, such that a complete and operational system is
provided.
7. Supplying the Owner with passwords, hardware and software locks required to
modify and adjust software programs as required by the Owner.
8. The Contractor is responsible for the proper routing of raceway and cable tray
and coordinating exact equipment locations.
9. The Contractor completes the startup and commissioning.
10. The Contractor performs the following in addition to what is indicated on the
drawings and specifications.
a. Route and coordinate the depth of underground conduit, including
locating and sizing handholes and manholes, to supplement systems
shown on the drawings.
b. Size and route raceways, pull, and junction boxes not shown or sized on
the drawings. Coordinate with other contractors.
c. Increase raceway sizes as needed based upon the actual size of wire.
d. Provide installation details, wiring details, and control diagrams based
upon the drawings and specifications.
e. Provide life safety panel wiring and panel assembly diagrams meeting
the performance requirements of these contract documents.
f. Provide life safety panel front elevations and footprint dimensions for
panel layout, purchase, and installation.
g. Lay out life safety equipment per National Electric Code (NEC) required
clearances.
h. Provide Input / Output (I/O) assignments and appropriate zoning.
i. Provide the necessary software, including any software licenses,
sufficient for providing the functionality necessary as indicated by the
design and the equipment specified. Provide the manufacturer
recommended software and software revision. The software and
software licenses shall be in the Owner’s name.
j. Perform appropriate programming and software development to meet the
performance requirements of these contract documents.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations, Acronyms, and Definitions:

1. ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
2. AHJ: Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ)
3. Approved: Unless otherwise stated, material, equipment, or submittals approved
by the Authority or AHJ
4. CCTV: Closed circuit television (CCTV)
5. EWSD: Early warning smoke detection (EWSD)
6. EIA: Electronics Industries Association (EIA)
7. FM: Factory Global (Factory Mutual FM)
8. HPM: Hazardous Production Material (HPM)
704618 28 31 50
9. I/O: sInput / Output (I/O)
10. NEC: National Electric Code (NEC)
11. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
12. UL: Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
13. UL Listed: Materials or equipment listed and included in the most recent edition
of the UL equipment listing
1. Life safety systems to conform to the latest version of the following:
a. All applicable Federal, state, and local codes and regulations required by
the authority having jurisdiction.
b. International Code Council: International Building Code (IBC),
International Fire Code (IFC), and International Mechanical Code (IMC)
c. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
d. Factory Mutual (FM) Global
e. U.S. Department of Justice, 28 CFR Part 36, Americans with Disabilities
Act (ADA)
f. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
g. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
h. Electrical Industries Association (EIA)
A. Life safety systems are specialized systems required by law and/or the Owner to provide
protection against injury, loss of life, and property loss due to fire and other hazards.
1. Section 28 13 70 Security Access and Surveillance: Security/access control
restricts, monitors and records vehicle and personnel access into and within
building and site premises, as well as providing security incident signaling. The
equipment and installation to be as specified in Section 28 13 70 Security Access
and Surveillance.
2. Section 28 13 71 Closed Circuit Television Systems: CCTV systems are used to
visually monitor and record designated building and site entry points, critical
locations, and other high-value areas. The equipment and installation to be as
specified in Section 28 13 71 Closed Circuit Television Systems.
3. Section 28 31 51 Fire Alarm System: Automatic fire \ smoke detection and
emergency communication system provide detection of fire and smoke and
provides emergency voice\alarm notification to building occupants. The system
provides evacuation alarms, audible\visual notification, shut down air handlers,
perform elevator recall, operate fire doors, and other fire safety functions. The
system is capable of monitoring/discharging fire sprinkler water or other fire
suppressant agents, if required. The equipment and installation to be as specified
in Section 28 31 51 Fire Alarm System.
4. Section 28 31 52 Early Warning Smoke: Detection Early warning smoke
detection system consists of an incipient smoke detection unit which draws air
through an engineered network of air-sampling pipes to detect incipient smoke.
The equipment and installation to be specified in Section 28 31 52 Early Warning
Smoke Detection.
5. Section 28 31 54 Hazardous Production Material Monitoring and Control
System: Hazardous gas detection, chemical leak detection, and control
704618 28 31 50
equipment is used to monitor for hazardous gas leaks, hazardous liquid leaks, to
shut down gas and chemical distribution equipment and their sources, and to
sound audible-visual notification appliances. The equipment and installation to
be as specified in Section 28 31 54 Hazardous Production Material Monitoring
and Control System.
6. Section 28 31 55 Liquid Leak Detection System: Liquid leak detection is used to
detect the presence of hazardous liquids. The equipment and installation to be as
specified in Section 28 31 55 Liquid Leak Detection System.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall not purchase any equipment for the specified system until the Owner has
approved the project submittals in their entirety and has returned submittal to the Owner.
B. Approved submittal allows the Contractor to proceed with the installation and shall not
be construed to mean that the Contractor has satisfied the requirements of these
specifications.
C. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
D. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements
for this Section.
A. Electronic Components: Comply with latest applicable standards of Electronics Industries

Association (EIA); standard industry grade; types and ratings commonly available in
local distributor stock. Components are listed and/or rated for its intended use.
B. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70 National Electric Code. Where required
by authority having jurisdiction, material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a
nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ.
C. Materials and equipment manufactured shall have an applied UL listing mark or label.
D. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to the AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of
E. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment,
1.7 WARRANTY
A. The commencement of the warranty period specified in Division 01 is to be the

completion date of system acceptance testing by the Owner.
B. A copy of the system manufacturer’s warranty shall be provided with the closeout
documentation and included with the operation and installation manuals.
704618 28 31 50
C. During warranty period, each year the Contractor shall document the detector sensitivity
testing and provide a report to the Owner. If detector’s sensitivity falls outside the
manufacturer’s listed sensitivity window, the Contractor is responsible for the full cost of
the maintenance, labor, and materials required to correct any defect during the warranty
period.
D. Permit the Owner’s qualified technicians to perform temporary bypass and emergency
repairs on the system without voiding the warranty.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. System Supplier:
1. The system supplier has an established reputation and experience for a period of
at least 3 years in the distribution and service of the proposed manufacturer’s
equipment brand.
2. The supplier shall have successfully designed and installed similar life safety
systems. The system supplier is capable of referencing similar installations
rendering satisfactory service.
3. The supplier shall have in-house engineering and project management
capabilities consistent with the requirements of this project. The project shall
have qualified personnel.
4. The supplier shall employ qualified and manufacturer certified system designers
to perform the detailed engineering design, system calculations, for all the system
equipment and programming.
B. Life Safety System Contractor/Installer:

1. Before commencing work, submit evidence showing the life safety system
contractor/installer has successfully designed and installed systems of similar
scope and type as specified.
2. System contractor/installer to possess a journeyman's or master electrician's
license and to be experienced in the installation of life safety systems. The
contractor/installer submit copies of all required Licenses and Bonds as required
in the State having jurisdiction.
3. Life safety system contractor/installer is responsible for retaining qualified and
authorized representatives of the supplier’ proposed manufacturer’s equipment
brand.
4. Life safety system contractor/installer is fully responsible for the detailed system
design and documents, procurement, installation, programming, and operational
acceptance testing of life safety system equipment, raceways, cable trays, and
wiring.
1.9 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Contractor is responsible for receiving, handling, and storage of their material at the job
site.
B. The equipment, hardware, and fittings to be inventoried and stored in secure and
environmentally controlled areas until installed in the Owner’s facility.
704618 28 31 50
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Contractor is responsible for inspecting the job site and become familiar with the
conditions under which the work will be performed.
1.11 STARTUP AND COMMISSIONING
A. Provide written acceptance test plan for testing the system components and operations in
accordance with each life safety systems manufacturer. Refer to Section 1.1B Related
Sections for the specific life safety systems.
B. Performs all testing in occupied facility at times of day that present lowest impact and
disruption to business and activities. Coordinate all testing in occupied buildings with the
building owner’s representative to assure system testing does not interrupt operations.
This testing may require extensive after hours work to perform such testing.
C. All equipment, instruments, tools, and labor required to conduct startup and
commissioning is provided by the installing contractor.
1.12 TRAINING
A. The system supplier shall schedule and present a minimum of eight hours of formal site
specific training for the Owner representative. A minimum of two copies of all training
aids, presentations, and documents are given to the Owner.
1.13 MAINTENANCE
A. Spare Parts
1. Provide a list of manufacturer’s recommended spare parts.
2. Provide a list of installed software with software revision number and date of
installation.
B. Warranty
1. Provide life safety system contractor/installer representative’s name, business
address, website, and telephone number.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. The manufacturer of the life safety systems equipment shall be regularly involved in the
design, manufacture, and distribution of the products.
704618 28 31 50
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The entire system shall be installed in a skillful manner in accordance with Codes, and
Standards and local AHJ requirements.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, manuals, shop drawings,

and wiring diagrams.
B. Final installation, connections, and system calibration to be performed by technicians

certified by the system manufacturer.
C. Coordinate installation of equipment, devices, components, conduit, and conductors with

other trades.
D. Stainless Steel Components:

1. Where stainless steel devices are specified, (for example corrosive-resistant
cameras within corrosive areas), ensure all mounting brackets, fasteners,
washers, straps or all other components that may contact the device are
constructed of a suitable and compatible material (e.g. stainless steel) of the same
rating to prevent galvanic corrosion from occurring.
2. Where stainless steel devices are being installed, use suitable tools that are
designed to be compatible with the product. (e.g. stainless steel screwdrivers).
E. Vandal or Tamper Resistance:

1. Vandal or tamper-resistance screws shall be used on all exposed S/ACS and
CCTV junction boxes, readers and enclosures where the screws are visible.
2. CCTV cameras will be encased in domes for use inside the facility and use the
appropriate outdoor housings for exterior locations.
F. System Cabling and Wiring:

1. Cabling and interconnecting wiring to be as indicated within the drawing set and
to be in accordance with Section 26 05 19 Low-voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables.
2. Conductors not specified or sized on the drawing to be sized by the Contractor
who to coordinate routing and interfacing cables and raceways outside and inside
the building.
3. Underground cables may be drawn into ducts or placed in conduit. They must be
separated from high voltage cables and protected against damage.
4. Exterior Cabling:
a. External cables entering a building through a wall must be brought
through a sleeve set into the wall.
b. The sleeve must slope downwards to the outside and be plugged with a
waterproof, non-hardening compound to prevent infiltration of water into
the building. (This is not necessary if the cable is running from
equipment connected externally to the building. That equipment’s
704618 28 31 50
position and mounting hardware must prevent the infiltration of water
into the building.)
c. Protect exterior cable entries with conduit bushings.
5. Above Ceiling and Suspended Grid Ceiling Installations
a. Where above-ceiling areas are used as a return-air plenum, utilize
appropriate plenum-rated cables for any cabling not installed in conduit.
b. All wire and cable installed over suspended ceilings shall be bundled,
wrapped and supported from the building structure. Do not lay wire and
cable on grid structure.
c. Provide electrical box T-bar type fasteners to mount devices. Do not
mount devices to suspend grid ceiling tile.
d. Replace all ceiling tiles, retaining clips and other hardware associated
with removal of ceiling components to facilitate wire and cable
installation.
6. Connections to external wiring between field panels and system devices to be
made on terminal strips within a terminal box or the equipment enclosure.
Connections may be made either with terminal spade lugs set on the conductors
with a special setting tool or with approved pressure-type terminal blocks. A
terminal cabinet to be installed at each point where a circuit riser originates or at
any point along a circuit where a tap is made.
7. Wiring splices are not permitted.
8. Device circuit wiring to be color coded.
9. Conductors are not to be installed in the same outlet box, junction box, or conduit
with conductors of lighting or power systems.
10. Power and non-power limited wiring to be kept separate.
G. Identification: Equipment, cabling, interconnecting wiring, and raceways to be labeled.

Labels shall be machine generated, handwritten labels will not be accepted. Labels to be
as indicated in the drawing set and in accordance with Section 26 05 53 Identification for
Electrical Systems.
H. System Conduit and Raceways: System raceways to be as indicated within the drawing
set and to be in accordance with Section 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems, and Section 26 05 36 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems. Conduit and raceways
to be sized by the Contractor or as indicated on the drawings. Contractor to coordinate
and route system raceways.
I. Power Connections: Installation of 120-Vac (or greater) supply from panelboard to

control panel and grounding to be in accordance with Section 26 05 01 Basic Electrical
Requirements, and Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
J. Fire Stopping: Provide fire stopping for penetrations through fire rated walls, fire-rate
floor slabs, partitions with fire rated doors, corridor walls, and vertical service shafts in
accordance with the fire stopping provisions of the Contract.
3.3 PROGRAMMING
A. Program the system according to the functional matrix in the drawings. If one is not
provided such as for security systems, program in accordance with Owners instructions.
704618 28 31 50
B. Obtain signed Owner approval of text, message format, and graphics prior to system
programming.
C. Programming to be performed by technicians certified by the manufacturer.
D. All firmware found in products shall be the latest and most up-to-date provided by the
manufacturer, or of a version as specified by Owner to be consistent with their currently
installed system.
E. All equipment requiring users to log on using a password shall be configured with
user/site-specific password/passwords, approved by the Owner. No system/product
default passwords shall be allowed.
3.4 CYBER SECURITY
A. Provide cyber security protection of the life safety Ethernet networks, where used, by
making the following minimum network programming and configuration settings as
described below. Other additional cyber protection enhancements will be considered for
use if proposed during the submittal process.
1. Block unauthorized network devices by completing the following:
a. Binding all approved security IP components to the network by assigning
unique static IP addresses and restricting all other non-approved devices.
b. Binding authorized MAC addresses by scanning for attached IP devices
and enabling them to communicate on specific network switch ports and
restricting all other non-approved devices.
2. Block un-used network services (such as FTP, Telnet, etc.)
3. Ensure intra-site communication is accomplished through a virtual private
network (VPN). Block all access of the network to the public Internet.
4. Ensure all default passwords are changed to user/site-specific passwords of 8
characters or more, using a combination of upper-and-lowercase letters and
numbers. Submit password example(s) to Owner for approval.
A. Life safety systems included in Part 1.1, Work Included, to be tested in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations, NFPA, and the requirements of Section 26 05 01 Basic
Electrical Requirements.
B. The organizing, coordination of personnel, and scheduling of all tests to be the

responsibility of the Contractor. Notification of testing to be submitted to each testing
participants a minimum of 2 weeks prior to the requested testing date.
C. Test programs and procedures to be created by the Contractor. Test procedures to have
signoff spaces for the Owner and the Contractor. Where Owner-furnished test procedures
exist, they are to be used in place of Contractor’s test procedures.
D. Manufacturer's service engineers or technicians to be present for pretests and Owner

acceptance tests.
704618 28 31 50
E. Pretest the system for satisfactory operation prior to Owner system acceptance testing.
Prior to the Owner witnessing any testing, a system printout demonstrating satisfactory
pretest results to be submitted to the Owner 2 days prior to the anticipated test date.
F. Panel Verification Testing: At the completion of panel assembly, each life safety system
panel to be tested by a factory-trained and certified field technician to show the
following:
1. The panel passes a visual inspection and complies with the following:
a. Outer enclosure is labeled appropriately with ID tag.
b. Devices and modules are installed per the drawings.
c. Wiring is gathered with tie-wraps or bundled within wire-mold channels.
d. Wiring, devices and modules are labeled within the panel in accordance
with the drawings.
e. Wiring terminations are adequate and firm, and wiring utilizes the color
code established within the drawings.
f. Wiring cable shields are terminated at one end to power supply ground as
appropriate.
g. Confirm panel, equipment rack and camera poles are grounded to
appropriate grounding source.
2. Jumper and dip switch settings are in accordance with the manufacturer's
requirements.
3. Confirm input voltage (120-Vac) is within appropriate tolerance range, and that
the panel indicates normal operating condition upon 120-Vac power application.
4. The panel to accept downloaded program address and configuration information.
The panel to show a normal standby condition upon completion of download,
including that it is free from grounded or open circuits.
5. The panel indicates a ground or open circuit occurs upon application of ground
fault or open circuit.
6. Confirm power supply output voltages are within appropriate tolerance range,
and that the battery and charger indicate proper charge and operation where
batteries and battery charging systems are used.
7. Simulate power failure and test all components when system is operating on
battery or uninterruptible power supply (UPS). Confirm no loss of functionality
occurs.
8. The communication and device operation within each panel, between each panel
and the head-end controls, and among all panels and the head-end controls as an
entire system is established and verified.
9. The appropriate communication and alarm annunciation are demonstrated upon a
test simulation program being loaded and executed.
10. Defects to be corrected at once and the test re-conducted at no additional cost to
the Owner until the defect has been corrected.
G. Network Backbone Verification Testing: At the completion of assembly and/or

procurement, but before final installation is completed, life safety system panels and
backbone communication wiring to be tested by the Contractor with a factory-trained and
certified field technician to show the following:
1. The system is properly calibrated and adjusted in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
704618 28 31 50
2. The system is free from grounded or open circuits.
3. The control equipment will indicate when a ground or open circuit occurs.
4. Contact-initiating devices are operating normally.
5. Confirm power supply output voltages are within appropriate tolerance range,
and that the battery and charger indicate proper charge and operation where
batteries and battery charging systems are used.
6. Simulate power failure and test all components when system is operating on
battery or uninterruptible power supply (UPS). Confirm no loss of functionality
occurs.
7. Where fiber optic cable is used, use an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer
(OTDR) to document attenuation (optical power loss) in both directions from the
ends of each fiber cable.
8. Confirm all exterior-mounted life safety Ethernet network components (cameras,
exterior network switches) are equipped with appropriate surge protection.
9. Where Ethernet networks are used for life safety systems, document the
following using network testing means such as PSPing or similar software:
a. Network bandwidth throughput - maximum rate at which frames can be
transmitted from the source to the destination with zero lost frames or
errors.
b. Network Latency - the total time it takes for a frame to travel from
source to destination. The minimum, average, and maximum latency
values for each frame size shall be reported.
10. The communication and device operation within each panel, between each panel
and the head-end controls, and among all panels and the head-end controls as an
entire system is established and verified.
11. The appropriate communication and alarm annunciation are demonstrated upon a
test simulation program being loaded and executed.
12. Defects are to be corrected at once and the test re-conducted at no additional cost
to the Owner until the defect has been corrected.
H. Final Acceptance Testing: At the completion of installation of panels and field devices,
each system to be tested by the Contractor with a factory-trained and certified field
technician to show the following:
1. Items 1 through 11 as described in backbone verification testing above.
2. Devices are mechanically fastened properly, securely and firmly on mounting
supports.
3. Where internet protocol (IP) devices are used for life safety systems (cameras,
network switches), record the following:
a. All network device IP addresses, MAC addresses, subnet masks and
default gateway assignments.
b. Record DNS hostname, domain and server assignments.
c. Confirm default passwords have been changed on all devices and provide
an electronic list of all changed device passwords.
4. Correct operation and indication of grounds, shorts, and opens is tested at every
point with the final operating software program.
5. The final acceptance test to be witnessed by Owner, or an authorized
representative of the Owner, the Contractor, and where appropriate, the AHJ.
704618 28 31 50
6. Defects to be corrected at once and the test re-conducted at no additional cost to
the Owner until the defect is corrected.
WITH BID
28 31 50-01 The name and resume of the proposed Life X

Safety Construction Manager, manufacturer’s
certified designers and programmers. Provide
a list of manufacturers’ dates of certification.
28 31 50-02 Two client references (unique companies) for X
the proposed Life Safety Construction
Manager.
28 31 50-03 The planned staffing period for the proposed X
Life Safety Construction Manager and a
listing of other significant responsibilities
assigned, i.e., certified system programmer,
Electrical Coordinator, etc.
28 31 50-04 Provide a construction schedule containing Per construction schedule
the following milestones at a minimum:
 Purchase dates of long-lead items.
 Completion of shop drawings.
 Panel shop assembly periods.
 Panel shop testing periods.
 Delivery dates of:
 Gas detection equipment.
 Head-end controllers.
 Assembled and tested panels.
 Major conduit and cable tray rough-in
periods.
 Point-to-point wiring periods.
 System software programming.
 Contractor testing periods.
 Owner acceptance testing periods.
 Testing by fire marshal or AHJ.
28 31 50-05 Block diagrams showing interconnection of Per construction schedule
major system components and typical intra-
component signal levels.
704618 28 31 50
WITH BID
28 31 50-06 Riser diagrams depicting circuit risers, Per construction schedule

connected devices and associated cable, and
device identification tags.
28 31 50-07 Panel layout drawings indicating panel layout, Per construction schedule
equipment housing dimensions, mounting
requirements, rack arrangement, and internal
point-to-point panel interconnection wiring.
28 31 50-08 Schematic wiring diagrams of field devices, Per construction schedule
showing power, signal, and control wiring.
The diagrams to clearly depict between
manufacturer and field-installed wiring.
Identify terminal numbers and wire color
codes.
28 31 50-09 Plan View drawings depicting: Per construction schedule
 Location of field devices and panels.
 Location of sensors and modules.
 Zone or address identification tags for
each field device, sensor, or module.
 Location and size of raceways.
28 31 50-10 Details for mounting field devices and control Per construction schedule
panels.
28 31 50-11 I/O and/or zone lists depicting each I/O Per construction schedule
address.
28 31 50-12 Battery backup and/or UPS load calculations. Per construction schedule
Provide an itemized load calculation for each
battery and UPS indicating all components
backed up, and their estimated backup
duration. Calculations shall be in MS Excel
format
28 31 50-13 Power supply and amplifier loading Per construction schedule
calculations.
28 31 50-14 Voltage drop calculations for annunciation Per construction schedule
devices.
28 31 50-15 Sound pressure level calculations in decibels Per construction schedule
for speakers.
704618 28 31 50
WITH BID
28 31 50-15 Network Loading: Provide an estimated life Per construction schedule

safety security network bandwidth load
calculation, by site, and provide a network
channel prioritization scheme for allocating
and maximizing available network bandwidth
to accommodate video content and alarm data.
28 31 50-16 System cable datasheets. Per construction schedule
28 31 50-17 Device cut sheets and product datasheets. Per construction schedule
28 31 50-18 Example graphical human machine interface Per construction schedule.
(HMI) screen layout for access control and
video surveillance systems. Indicate proposed
screen hierarchy, navigation, graphical
symbols and colors used.
28 31 50-19 Security Alarm Integration: Provide an Per construction schedule.
example of the proposed integration of alarms
between access control and video surveillance
systems.
28 31 50-20 Network Cyber Security: Provide a detailed Per construction schedule.
description of the network protection steps
proposed to be undertaken to ensure cyber
security, including, but not limited to,
whitelisting authorized IP addresses, blocking
unnecessary network services, eliminating
access to the public Internet, changing default
passwords, etc. Provide specific steps to be
implemented and proposed example
password(s) to be used.
28 31 50-21 Testing procedures for panel verification 2 weeks prior to panel shop
testing. testing
28 31 50-22 Programming matrix depicting associated 4 weeks prior to system
system output response to each input. programming
28 31 50-23 System program, including device address 2 weeks prior to systems
assignment, input descriptors, system output programming
messages and functions, and system graphics
display or output messages.
28 31 50-24 Acceptance test procedures. 2 weeks prior to Owner
acceptance testing
28 31 50-25 Completed and signed off final acceptance Upon completion of Owner
test documents. acceptance testing
704618 28 31 50
WITH BID
28 31 50-26 Provide operation and maintenance manuals Per construction schedule

for each life safety system included in Scope.
Manuals to provide appropriate operation and
maintenance information required for the
system.
The following specific information to be
included in the manuals:
 Overall system description.
 Sequences of operation.
 A hard copy printout and an electronic
copy of the system's software program,
message files, and response files.
 Bill of materials.
 Product catalog cut sheets.
 Document software settings, software
version(s), patches installed.
 Document IP addresses, MAC addresses,
passwords and other network settings for
every life safety network device.
 Document camera frame rate and
compression settings.
 Document network video recording
settings.
 Provide electronic photo of S/ACS and
CCTV components as described within
the technical sections and insert into
O&M manuals.
END OF SECTION
704618 28 31 50
SECTION 28 31 51
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements for fire alarm system and emergency communication
system.
2. Section 28 31 50 Life Safety Systems.
A. System to be a fully functional fire alarm system and emergency communication system
acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) and in accordance with National
Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 72 consisting of the following elements:
1. The fire alarm system supplied is an addressable, intelligent, peer-to-peer, node-
to-node networked fire alarm control units. The system utilizes independently
addressable initiating devices, input/output control modules, audio amplifiers,
visual notification appliances, audible notification appliances, and auxiliary
devices.
2. The emergency communication system provides the command and control to
indicate the existence of an emergency situation and broadcasting information
necessary to facilitate an appropriate response and action.
3. A fiber optic communication network allows data and audio communication
exchange between fire alarm control units and fire alarm operator workstations.
4. Personal computer (PC)-based operator station(s) and software programming,
functioning as the primary operator interface for the fire alarm and emergency
communication system.
5. A fire command center provides the monitoring of the status, disposition of
signals, and control for the fire alarm system and emergency communication
system.
6. Integral emergency voice/alarm communications with voice intelligibility.
B. System should perform the following functions:

1. Manual alarm signal initiation.
2. Automatic alarm signal initiation.
3. Door release service.
4. Activation of fire safety functions.
5. Activation of audible and visual notification appliances.
6. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) system interface.
7. Monitoring of fire protection water flow, tamper switches, post-indicator-valves,
and other related fire protection equipment.
704618 28 31 51
9 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 Fire Alarm System - 1
8. Monitoring of abnormal conditions in fires suppression systems.
9. Activation of fire suppression systems.
10. Elevator recall and shut down.
11. Computer room HVAC system interface.
12. Monitoring and annunciation of early warning smoke detection.
13. Emergency voice/alarm communications.
14. Troubles and alarms.
15. Monitoring of safety shower / eyewash switches.
16. Emergency alarms system.
17. Refrigerant leak detection system and audible / visual notification.
1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. The following criteria to be followed:

1. The fire alarm system and emergency communication system are designed and
installed to support zero network downtime.
2. The data and audio communication network utilize a token ring, peer-to-peer
communications. In the event of failure, the system is capable of forming sub-
networks and remain operational between communicating units from either
primary fire command center and another designated fire command center.
3. A graphical command workstation is integral part of the fire command centers
and serves as the operational and administration functions required for the fire
alarm system and emergency communication system.
4. The fire command center operations provide annunciation and controls for:
sending prerecorded audio messages to any combination of local or remote fire
alarm control panels. Initiating live page messages to any combination of local
or remote fire alarm control panels. Controlling local and/or remote building
functions as describe on the fire alarm functional matrix.
5. Each fire command center and each node are equal, active functional node of the
network, which is capable of making all local decisions and generating network
tasks to other nodes in the event of node failure or communication failure
between nodes.
6. The system shall provide a one-way mulit-channel emergency communication
system for the distribution of emergency messages to building occupants.
7. The emergency communication system annunciates fire alarm events and
visual/audible notification as required by UL 864 and UL 2572.
8. An emergency communication Ethernet TCP/IP network has multiple nodes as
shown on the Drawings.
9. Each addressable loop to have remaining capacity of 20 percent after acceptance
testing.
10. The audio system amplifier spare capacity to be 20 percent after acceptance
testing.
11. The network communications wiring to be style 7. Fiber optic networks to
comply with NFPA 70, Section 770.
12. Addressable initiating device circuits to be 16 American Wire Gauge (AWG),
unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
13. Notification appliance circuits to be 14 AWG, unless otherwise indicated on
drawings.
704618 28 31 51
14. The audio system to be 70 VRMS.
15. In the event of a failure of a single amplifier, the loads supplied by that amplifier
to be supplied by a designated back up amplifier. The failed amplifiers load is
switched to the backup via a relay controlled by the fire alarm software program.
In no circumstances is a back up amplifier to assume the load of more than a
single amplifier.
16. Door holders to be powered by 24 Vdc circuits from the fire alarm panels (FAP).
17. Where 24 Vdc power is being supplied from the fire alarm panels, panel design
to allow deenergization of the panel (for maintenance) without affecting door
holder and smoke damper control circuits.
18. Fire alarm circuits to be installed in dedicated fire alarm only conduit or tray
throughout the facility.
B. System Supervision
1. Performance of fire alarm network communication circuit is Class A, Style 7
type.
2. Performance of signaling line circuit (SLC) is Class A type.
3. Performance of initiating device circuit (IDC) is Class B type.
4. Performance of notification appliance circuit (NAC) is Class B type.
5. Performance of fire alarm digital audio riser is Class B type.
6. Performance of fire alarm auxiliary circuit is Class B type.
1.4 REFERENCES

2. American Disabilities Act (ADA)
6. Edwards Fire Alarm Manufacturer (EST)
7. Fire alarm control unit (FACU)
8. Fire alarm panels (FAP)
9. Fire alarm system (FAS)
10. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
11. Infrared (IR)
13. Mass Notification System (MNS)
16. Nonpower-limited fire-protective (NPLF)
17. Operating system (OS)
19. Power-limited fire-protective (FPL)
23. Ultraviolet / infrared (UV/IR)
704618 28 31 51
1.5 DESIGN CALCULATIONS
A. The Drawings show the intended of coverage and suggested device locations. Final
device quantity, location and AHJ approval are the responsibility of the Contractor.
B. The system shall be designed for interior building audibility of 15 dBA-fast over ambient
condition and intelligibility. Intelligibility shall be designed to ensure Common
Intelligibility Standard (CIS) rating of 0.7 or Sound Transmission Index of 0.5 in all areas
designated on the Drawings. The performance shall comply with NFPA 72.
C. Power Supply Battery Calculations: Provide battery capacity calculations for each power
supply that uses batteries for secondary power. Identify all loads. Identify any loads
shed during alarm operation. Use the manufacturer’s recommended methods and/or
forms.
D. 24 VDC Notification Appliance Circuits: Provide voltage drop calculations using the
manufacturer’s recommended methods and/or forms.
E. Fiber Optic Circuits: Provide an optical fiber loss (budget) calculations per segment of
optical fiber. The fiber loss per segment shall not exceed 80% of equipment
manufacturer’s permitted loss.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
B. Refer to Section 28 31 50 Fire Alarm System and the Submittal Schedule at the end of
PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements for this Section.
C. Manufacturer’s catalog data, to include material description, agency approval, and listing.
D. Shop Drawings shall meet the following requirements:

1. Shop drawings are prepared by trained and certified by the manufacturer of the
submitted equipment in the fire alarm design.
2. Provide device floor plans for all areas served by the fire alarm system. Floor
plans shall indicate accurate locations for all control and peripheral devices.
3. All addressable devices are shown. Coordinate the devices address with the
same device shown on the riser diagram.
4. Identify all notification appliance with a circuit number and item number.
Coordinate the circuit and item number with the same device shown on the riser
diagram.
5. Show all raceways, marked for size, conductor count with type and size, showing
the percentage of allowable NEC fill used.
6. Device riser diagrams, which individually depict all control panels, annunciators,
addressable devices, and notification appliances. Diagrams include specific,
discrete address that corresponds to addresses shown on the floor plans. Drawing
shall provide wire specifications, and wire identification for all conductors
depicted on the riser diagram. All circuits shall have identifiers that correspond
704618 28 31 51
with those required on the control panel and floor plan drawings. End-of-line
resistors and values shall be depicted.
7. Control panel drawings shall show internal component placement and all internal
and field terminations. Provide details indicating where conduit connections
shall be made to avoid conflicts with internally mounted batteries. For each
additional fire alarm panel, a separate drawing which clearly indicated the panel
designation, service and location of the control enclosure.
8. Provide typical device wiring diagrams that show all system components, and the
respective field wiring. Wire type, gauge, and jacket shall be indicated. When
addressable module is used in multiple configuration for monitoring or
controlling equipment, provide a drawing for each application. End-of-line
resistors and value shall be shown.
9. Provide a fire alarm system functional matrix that illustrates alarm input/output
events in association with the initiation devices. Matrix summary shall include
system supervisory and trouble output functions.
10. Provide matrix that illustrate the initiation input address and the control module
output address for the emergency control functions for HVAC systems, elevator
recall and door releasing service.
11. Provide fire alarm system calculations.
12. Provide startup and commissioning forms.
A. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70 (National Electric Code - NEC). Where
required by AHJ, material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally
recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. Edwards, a United Technologies Corporation
B. Product Model Series: EST 3 Network – UL 2572 Listed Mass Notification and UL 864
Listed Fire Alarm
C. Product Model Series: EST FireWorks Incident Management Platform, graphical

command workstation, server, monitor, and operating software.
704618 28 31 51
2.2 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNITS (FACUs)
A. FACU to support fire alarm devices and fire alarm/fire safety functions shown on the
Drawings.
B. FACUs (panels) to be equipped with the following:

1. An incoming ac power disconnect.
2. Separate battery enclosure(s) and backup batteries.
3. Wall-mount enclosures with key-locked doors.
4. Multiplexed audio riser capability.
5. Backup battery and power supply supervisory and fault condition capability.
C. FACU Components
1. EST 3-12/S/S1RG 12 Switches with 12 Green LED Display Module
2. EST 3-12SR 12 Switches with 12 Red LED Display Module
3. EST 3-24R 24 Red LED Display Module
4. EST 3-ASU/4 Audio Source Unit
5. EST 3-BPS/M Booster Power Supply with Monitor
6. EST 3-CPU Central Processing Unit
7. EST 3-FIBMB2 Fiber Optic Communications Interface
8. EST 3-LCD Liquid Crystal Display Module
9. EST 3-LDSM Control Display Module Interface
10. EST 3-MMXVR Multimode Transceiver
11. EST 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply with Monitor
12. EST 3-RS232 RS232 Communication Card
13. EST 3-SDDC1 Dual Signature Device Controller Module
14. EST 3-ZA20B 20W Amplifier Module
15. EST 3-ZA40B 40W Amplifier Module
16. EST MN-ABPM Audio Bridge
17. EST MN-BRKT1 Mass Notification Mounting Bracket
18. EST MN-COM1S Serial Communications / LAN Interface
19. EST MN-FVPN VoIP Encoder / Decoder
20. EST MN-NETSW1 Multimode Fiber Optic Ethernet Switch
21. ESTMN-PASM Preamp Signal Supervisory Booster Module
2.3 ENCLOSURES
A. Example Products:
1. EST BC-1 Battery Cabinet
2. EST CAB-7 1 Chassis Enclosure
5. EST RCC-14 2 Chassis Remote Closet Enclosure
6. EST RCC-21 3 Chassis Remote Closet Enclosure
2.4 POWER SUPPLIES
A. Example Products:
1. EST APS-10 Auxiliary Power Supply
704618 28 31 51
2. EST BPS-10 Remote Booster Power Supply
B. Includes battery cabinet.
2.5 FIRE ALARM MANUFACTURER’S AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT

1. EST SIGA-CC1 Single Input Signal Module
2. EST SIGA-CR Control Relay Module
3. EST SIGA-CT1 Single Input Module
4. EST SIGA-CT2 Dual Input Module
5. EST SIGA-IM Isolator Module
6. EST SIGA-MAB Class A Module (UIO mount)
7. EST SIGA-MCC1 Single Input Signal Module (UIO mount)
8. EST SIGA-MCC1S Synchronization Output Module UIO mount)
9. EST SIGA-MCR Control Relay Module (UIO mount)
10. EST SIGA-MCT2 Dual Input Module (UIO mount)
11. EST SIGA-RM1 24 Vdc Riser Monitor Module
12. EST SIGA-MRM1 24 Vdc Riser Monitor Module (UIO mount)
13. EST SIGA-UIO2R 2 Module Universal Input/Output Module Motherboard
14. EST SIGA-UIO6R 6 Module Universal Input/Output Module Motherboard
15. EST SIGA-UM Class A Module
16. EST MR101 Interposing Relay, SPDT with LED
17. EST MR201 Interposing Relay, DPDT with LED
2.6 INITIATING DEVICES
A. Detector Base and Trim

1. Example Products:
a. EST SIGA-SB Standard Base
b. EST SIGA-IPHSB Trim Skirt/Ring
B. Manual Pull Stations – Addressable:

1. Example Products:
a. EST SIGA-278 Manual Pull Station
b. EST MPSR1-D45W-GE Weatherproof Manual Pull Station
c. EST MPSR1-D45WX-GE Explosion-proof Manual Pull Station
d. STI SS-2000 Emergency Alarm Manual Pull Station
C. Manual Pull Stations -Conventional:

1. Example Product:
a. EST 270-SPO conventional, with weatherproof backbox EST 1291
D. Manual Pull Station – Class 1, Div 2:

1. Federal MPSR1-S45W
E. Manual Pull Station -Weatherproof Cover:

1. Safety Technology Incorporated (STI) STI-3150
2. See Drawings for additional information.
704618 28 31 51
F. Heat Detectors – Addressable:
1. Example Product:
a. EST SIGA-HFS Rate Compensated, Fixed
G. Heat Detectors - Conventional:

1. Example Product:
a. Chemtronix Model 302-ET-135 Fixed, 135 degrees F.
b. Chemtronix Model 302-ET-194 Fixed, 194 degrees F.
H. Smoke Detector - Photoelectric

1. Example Product:
a. EST SIGA-PS Photoelectric Smoke Detector
I. Smoke Detector – Photoelectric, Class 1, Div 2:

1. Example Product:
a. Detector Electronics, Model 30-3003 Pyrotector
J. Multi-Sensor Detector – Photoelectric / Heat / Ionization Smoke:

1. Example Product:
a. EST SIGA-IPHS
K. Flame Detectors – Ultraviolet / Infrared (UV/IR), Class 1, Div 2:

1. Example Product:
a. Fire Sentry SS2-AN UV/IR Detector
L. Duct Mounted Smoke Detector

1. EST SIGA-SD Duct Smoke Detector
2. EST D-PH Protective Housing
3. EST SD-T8 SuperDuct air sample tube 8-inches
11. Refer to Drawings for additional information.
M. Emergency Alarm Notification Manual Push Button Station:

1. Safety Technology Incorporated, STI SS-2011, yellow housing, black lettering,
red push button.
2. Safety Technology Incorporated, STI SS-2061, weatherproof, yellow housing,
black lettering, red push button.
3. Labels “Emergency Alarm Notification”
4. Manual Pull Station Weatherproof Cover, STI-3150
704618 28 31 51
N. Ventilation System Emergency Shutoff Breakglass Manual Pull Station
1. Reliable Security Group (RSG), NC-S1, yellow housing, black lettering
2. Manual Pull Station Weatherproof Cover, STI-3150
2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Emergency Communication System:

1. EST G1F-HDVM Wall Strobe (Fire)
2. EST G1F-HDVM (Amber) Wall Strobe (Freon)
3. EST G1F-HDVM (Red) Wall Strobe (Freon)
4. EST G1F-HDVM (Blue) Wall Strobe (MNS)
5. EST GCF-VM Ceiling Strobe (Fire)
6. EST GCF-VM (Blue) Ceiling Strobe (MNS)
7. EST G4F-S7VM Wall Speaker / Strobe
8. EST G4WN-S7 Wall Speaker
9. EST GCF-S7VM Ceiling Speaker / Strobe
10. EST GCF-S7 Ceiling Speaker
11. EST G4EWF Wall Mount Strobe Expander
12. EST 889D-AW Explosion-proof Horn
13. EST WG4WF-SVMC (Blue) Outdoor Strobe (MNS)
14. EST WG4WF-WS Outdoor Speaker
15. EST WG4WF-SVMC Outdoor Speaker / Strobe
16. Federal Signal SPHX-DVSMR Speaker, Class 1 Div 2
17. Atlas Sound, HLE-1(T) HLE/MLE-30 Speaker, Class 1, Div 2
18. Harrington, HEPS series Strobe, Class 1, Div 2
B. Waterflow Bell – 10 inch:

1. EST 439D-10AW-R Bell, red
2. EST 449 Backbox, weatherproof
C. Refrigerant Leak Detection Horn / Strobe Appliance

1. Edwards Signaling 868STR Series, amber lens, horn, weatherproof.
2. Edwards Signaling 868STR Series, red lens, horn, weatherproof.
3. Label “Refrigerant Leak – Warning”
4. Label “Refrigerant Leak – Alarm”
D. Emergency Alarm – Local Notification Horn / Strobe Appliance

1. Edwards Signaling 868STR Series, red lens, horn, weatherproof.
2. Label “Emergency Alarm”
2.8 AUXILIARY DEVICES
A. Preaction Deluge Releasing Panel

1. EST PDRP-2001 Deluge Releasing Panel
704618 28 31 51
B. Surge Suppression
1. Ditek DTK-2MHLP-B 24 VDC Surge Suppression
2. Ditek DTK-120SR 120 VAC Surge Suppression
C. Magnetic door holders to release self-closing fire and smoke doors automatically. Each
unit to have a holding force of 15 pounds minimum at 85 percent of rated voltage, and
50 pounds maximum at 110 percent of rated voltage per UL requirements. Door holders
to be provided with mounting boxes for floor and surface installations as shown on the
plans.
D. Fault Isolator Device:

1. The fault isolator device to detect and isolate a short-circuited segment of a fault-
tolerant loop.
2. The device to automatically determine a return to normal condition of the loop
and restore the isolated segment.
E. Auxiliary Relays: For control of 120-Volt circuits (air-handling unit shutdown, elevator
shutdown, and beacon light activation), interposing relays to be provided. The relays to
be system interconnected and to be operable by a system control module or manually.
Relays to be fitted with Form C contacts and to be rated at 120 Vac, minimum 3 amps
inductive.
2.9 FIRE ALARM OPERATOR'S WORKSTATION
A. The operator's workstation is to function as a node on the fire alarm network and meet the
requirements of the fire alarm system and emergency communication system
manufacturer.
B. Product:
1. EST Graphical Command Interface “FireWorks.”
2.10 OPERATOR STATION SOFTWARE
A. Operator station software to include as a minimum the operating system (OS), database
manager, communications control, operator interface, trend and history files, report
generator, support utilities, scheduler, and time and event programs.
B. Real-time operating system to provide true multitasking providing concurrent execution

of multiple real-time programs and custom program development. Switching from
foreground applications to background applications where the background applications
are suspended is not acceptable.
C. Database manager to manage data on an integrated and nonredundant basis. It is to allow

additions and deletions to the database without any detriment to the existing data. Provide
cross linkages such that no data required by a software program may be deleted by the
operator until that data has been deleted from its respective program.
D. Provide communications control, scheduler, trend files, reports, operator interface, and
utilities.
704618 28 31 51
E. Product:
1. EST “FireWorks” Software, latest version recommended by manufacturer.
2.11 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE
A. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: As shown on the drawings and as specified in
B. Initiating and Indicating Circuits: As shown on the drawings, building wire as specified
in Section 26 05 19 Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables, nonpower-
limited fire-protective (NPLF) signaling cable, copper conductor, 150-Volt insulation
rated 60 degrees C, power-limited fire-protective (FPL) signaling cable, copper
conductor, 300-Volt insulation rated 105 degrees C, FPLP -power-limited fire-protective
signaling cable classified for fire and smoke characteristics, copper conductor, 300-Volt
insulation rated 105 degrees C, suitable for use in air-handling ducts, hollow spaces used
as ducts, and plenums.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install notification appliances and detectors at mounting heights, locations and spacing
according to NFPA 72 and the drawings.
C. Mount outlet box for electric door holder to withstand 80 pounds pulling force.
D. Connections to Other Systems: Make conduit and wiring connections to door-release

devices, sprinkler-flow switches, sprinkler valve tamper switches, fire suppression system
control panels, HVAC motor starter circuits, electrical shunt trip circuit breakers, and
elevator control panels as indicated on the drawings.
E. Installation of equipment to be such that adequate ventilation is permitted for equipment

operation.
F. Loudspeaker Installation and Adjustment:

1. Speakers to be zoned as shown on the drawings.
2. Coordinate installation of flush-mounted loudspeakers with ceiling system
subcontractor. Provide the required hardware to facilitate loudspeaker mounting
and to maintain ceiling system integrity.
3. Loudspeaker circuits to be adjusted and terminated for optimum impedance
match.
4. Initial tap settings to be as indicated on the drawings. Provide final speaker
adjustment such that voice and tone signals are 15 dB above ambient as
minimum and not excessive in office areas, conference rooms, restrooms, Fab
and lab areas, and corridors.
704618 28 31 51
A. The Contractor to perform electrical and mechanical tests required by the equipment
manufacturer's certification form. In addition, smoke detectors to be tested to the
maximum stable sensitivity setting. This must be performed with the detector at its
operational environmental conditions in the area. Bench settings are not acceptable. A
checkout report to be prepared by the installation technician. The report to include, but
not be limited to:
1. A complete list of equipment installed and wired.
2. Indication that equipment is properly installed and functions and conforms to
these Specifications.
3. Test of individual zones as applicable.
4. Serial numbers, locations by zone, and model number for each installed detector.
5. Voltage (sensitivity) settings for each ionization and photoelectric detector as
measured in place with the HVAC system operating.
6. Duct detector cfm readings with HVAC system operating.
7. Response time on flame detectors.
8. Technician's name, certificate number, and date.
B. Test in accordance with NFPA 72 and local fire department requirements in the presence
of the Owner and under the supervision of the manufacturer’s representative. The
Contractor is responsible for completing documentation for system approval and
acceptance as required in NFPA 72, including the most current certificate of completion
form. Contractor is also responsible for filling out the most current inspection and testing
records forms from NFPA 72. Contractor to submit originals to the Owner for
acceptance.
3.3 TRAINING
A. Provide the Owner a minimum of 8 hours of instruction in the operation of the system,
test equipment, and necessary maintenance of the detection devices.
704618 28 31 51
WITH BID
28 31 51-01 Design Calculations Per construction schedule
28 31 51-02 Shop Drawings Per construction schedule
28 31 51-03 Manufacturer's letter stating that system is Per construction schedule

operational.
END OF SECTION
704618 28 31 51
SECTION 28 31 52
EARLY WARNING SMOKE DETECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install a complete early
warning smoke detection (EWSD) system.
1. Section 28 31 50 Life Safety System.
2. Section 28 31 51 Fire Alarm System.
A. The EWSD system consists of an air sampling pipe distribution network which draws an
air sample which is monitored for smoke conditions at the detector unit. Upon detection
of incipient smoke, the EWSD system indicates an alarm condition that is transmitted to
the building fire alarm system.
B. The EWSD system to include wiring, raceways, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, mounting
boxes, control equipment, detectors, air sampling pipe network, power supply with
backup rechargeable batteries, accessories, and other miscellaneous items required for a
complete functional system providing continuous detection of the desired area.
1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. The EWSD system design, installation, commissioning, and testing is accordance with
applicable Codes, this Section, the manufacturer’s guidelines, and requirements of the
local AHJ.
B. EWSD consists of air-sampling pipe distribution network which includes piping, tubing,
fittings, and fasteners. The piping originates from each detector and extends to the
protected area(s). Air sampling points are placed along the air sampling pipe distribution
network in accordance with this Section and the Drawings. The locations and diameter
of the air sampling points in the protected area(s) are supported the manufacturer’s
computer-based design modeling tool.
C. Supervisory Monitoring: EWSD system to include interface and connections to the

building fire alarm and smoke detection system per Section 28 31 51 Fire Alarm
Systems.
1. Configurable alarm and trouble relays outputs transmit signals to building fire
alarm system and other systems.
704618 28 31 52
23 APRIL 2019 – Rev. 0 Early Warning Smoke Detection - 1
2. Where applicable, a high-level interface may communicate with building fire
alarm system or computer workstation.
D. Each detector incorporates an integral repeater and loop isolator for communications on a
multi-point serial communication network.
E. Alarm Response: Smoke alarm response to be less than 90 seconds from the moment of
smoke injection at furthest sample point to alarm condition reported at controller unit.
F. Continuity: Sampling of air to be continuous for detector sensing. Air flow faults to be
indicated within 60 seconds when the airflow is outside the manufacturer's specified
range.
G. Event Logging: System to automatically record faults, smoke alarms, and setpoint
adjustments into an internal buffer.
H. Threshold Settings: Adjustable threshold settings to be made for day, night, weekend, and
holiday periods.
I. Sample Pipe Network:

1. Layout of the air sampling pipe network to provide area coverage per NFPA72
and per manufacturer’s engineering calculations, isometric air-sampling
drawings, and manufacturer’s installation instructions.
2. Layout of the sampling pipe network to provide for a cross-sectional sampling of
the return airstream. Careful consideration to be given to National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) 72 guidelines to the number of sampling points and spacing
with regard to high ceilings and forced-air ventilation applications.
3. Sample piping length, diameter, material of construction, sample hole size, and
location to be in accordance with manufacturer's engineering calculations,
isometric drawings, installation instructions and to be sized to meet the intended
detection area.
4. Detector shall exhaust into an equal or lessor pressure and in no case shall the Δp
between detector sampling pipes and between sampling pipes and detector
exhaust exceed 100 Pa (0.4 inches of water).
J. For detection of smoke concentration within ceiling void(s), where indicated in the
Drawings or where required by local AHJ.
1. Provide appropriate number of detectors to efficiently and adequately cover the
protected area(s).
2. Air sampling pipe distribution networks is constructed of rigid pipe mounted to
the underside of the structural ceiling.
3. Sampling points are drilled directly into the air sampling pipe distribution
network. Air sampling point is oriented downward and be within four inches
below the underside of the structural ceiling.
4. For structural ceilings that have beams, girders, solid joist or a waffle-like
construction, etc., and that meet the special provisions of NFPA-72, air sampling
pipe distribution networks shall mount to the underside of structural beams with
stanchions extending up into each beam pocket at locations where sampling
points are required.
704618 28 31 52
5. Where the ceiling void is used as an air plenum, sampling points shall be oriented
downward 20 degrees to 45 degrees towards the incoming airflow.
6. Maximum coverage per sampling point shall not exceed 400 sq ft.
7. Sampling points shall be installed in an area on the ceiling that is free from
obstructions for a minimum of 18 inches on all sides.
8. Placement of sampling points nearest to walls shall be greater than 12 inches and
not exceed 7ft.
K. For detection of smoke concentration within open areas, where indicated in the Drawings
or where required by local AHJ.
protected area(s).
2. Air sampling pipe distribution networks shall be constructed using rigid pipe
mounted to the underside of the structural ceiling.
3. Sampling points shall be drilled directly into the air sampling pipe distribution
network, be oriented downward and be within 4 inches below the underside of
the structural ceiling.
4. For structural ceilings that have beams, girders, solid joist or a waffle-like
construction, etc., and that meet the special provisions of NFPA-72, air sampling
pipe distribution networks shall mount to the underside of structural beams with
stanchions having sampling point extend up into each beam pocket at locations
where sampling points are required.
5. Where accessible ceilings are present sampling points shall be remotely mounted
to the underside of the accessible ceiling, be oriented downward and be within 4
inches below the underside of the accessible ceiling. Remote sampling points
shall interconnect with air sampling pipe distribution network located above the
accessible ceiling via use of flexible “capillary” tubing as indicated on Drawing.
6. For efficiency, air sampling pipe distribution networks located above the
accessible ceiling shall have “capillary” tubing running either side of each
sampling pipe run to the corresponding remote sampling point.
7. Maximum coverage per sampling point shall not exceed 400 sq ft exception
being where obstructions such as air supply diffusers would otherwise prevent
this spacing objective from being met, in which case placement shall be just
outside perimeter of obstruction.
8. Sampling points shall be a minimum of 3ft away from air supply diffusers.
9. Sampling points shall be installed in an area on the ceiling that is free from
obstructions for a minimum of 18 inches on all sides.
10. Placement of sampling points nearest to walls shall be greater than 12 inches and
not exceed 7ft.
L. For detection of smoke concentration within accessible floors, where indicated in the
Drawings or where required to meet local AHJ requirements:
protected area(s).
mounted and secured to raised floor support posts as close to the underside of
floor tiles as possible.
704618 28 31 52
network and be oriented downward towards the slab.
4. Where the floor void is used as an air plenum, sampling points shall be oriented
downward 20 degrees to 45 degrees towards the incoming airflow.
5. Maximum coverage per sampling point shall not exceed 200 sq ft.
6. Sampling points shall be free from obstructions for a minimum of 18 inches on
all sides.
7. Placement of sampling points nearest to perimeter walls extending to the slab
shall be greater than 12 inches and not exceed 7ft.
M. For detection of smoke concentration within contained hot aisles, where indicated in the
drawings:
protected area(s).
mounted at a point just before mechanical forced air leaves the contained hot
aisle.
network and be oriented 20 degrees to 40 degrees downward towards the
incoming airflow.
4. Sampling point spacing shall be based upon sampling point distribution of
minimum one sampling point per 6ft (1.8m) of linear distance, not to exceed 36
square feet per sampling point.
5. Each hot aisle shall be served by an individual air sampling pipe zone or sector
(eg. four pipes on a four-zone apparatus with each pipe serving an individual hot
aisle).
N. For detection of smoke concentration at return air paths where indicated in the drawings:
protected area(s).
2. Sampling at return air grilles:
a. Air sampling pipe distribution networks shall be constructed using rigid
pipe mounted to face of return air grilles prior to filtration in accordance
with Manufacturer’s guidelines, this Specification and the drawings.
b. Sampling points shall be drilled directly into the air sampling pipe
distribution network, be oriented downward 20 degrees to 45 degrees
towards the incoming airflow and shall not be placed outside of grille
area.
c. Sample point spacing for return air grille detection shall be based upon
sampling point distribution of a minimum of one sample point per every
four square feet of grille area.
d. Sampling points covering return air grilles shall standoff 3 to 6 inches
from the grille in order to avoid the low or negative pressure point
directly at the grille surface.
e. A means to disconnect the sampling pipe from return air grilles shall be
provided and based on Manufacturer’s guidelines.
f. Mechanical standoff fasteners used to support the sampling pipe network
shall be fit for purpose. Plastic zip ties are not permitted.
704618 28 31 52
3. Sampling within return air chase:
a. A detector serving a return air chase shall be dedicated to the mechanical
air handler unit’s return air chase in which it is monitoring.
b. Air sampling pipe distribution networks shall be constructed using rigid
pipe with sampling to occur within return air chase.
c. The exhaust port of each detector shall be returned within the return air
chase in which it is monitoring so as to maintain an equal pressure across
air sampling point inlet and exhaust port.
d. Sampling port spacing within return air chase shall be spaced in
accordance with Manufacturer’s guidelines and be oriented 20 degrees to
45 degrees towards the incoming airflow.
e. Application shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer’s published in-
duct sampling guidelines.
O. Manufacturer’s specific software modeling tool which uses air sampling pipe distribution
network parameters shall be used to predict performance of pipe network design(s). Each
of the following performance requirements shall be met:
1. Maximum Fire 1 sensitivity at each sample point for detector shall not exceed 1
percent obs/ft (1.5 percent obs/m) and shall be within 30 percent of this target.
2. Smoke transport time shall not exceed 90 seconds measured from the furthest
sampling point (excluding Benchmark Test Point) on each pipe run back to the
detector. A minimum 5 percent buffer shall be maintained to account for field
variations that may occur but in no case shall exceed the 85 seconds objective.
P. Where local codes and standards dictate placement and spacing of sampling points that is
more stringent than those specified herein, local codes and standards shall prevail.
Q. All sampling points shall be marked with the Manufacturer’s standard identification
labels as specified herein.
R. Detector shall be installed in an accessible location and at an accessible height not to

exceed 6ft as indicated in this Specification and on the Drawings.
S. A Benchmark Test Point shall be provided at the furthest end of each pipe run, opposite
end of the detector. Provisions shall be made so that this test point can be located
maximum 6 feet above finished floor. The test point shall be constructed using a
normally closed industrial quick connect fitting with an orifice of nominal 1/8 inch when
open to facilitate benchmark performance verification as indicated in this Specification
and on the Drawings. This remote test point is intended to benchmark system
performance at time of initial commissioning and during routine test and inspection. The
test point shall be labeled documenting benchmark system performance at time of
commissioning using Manufacturer supplied labels intended for this purpose.
Benchmark labels shall be placed just above test points and be positioned so that they are
visible without obstruction.
T. Installation and materials shall be in accordance with Manufacturer’s guidelines, this

Specification and as indicated on the Drawings.
U. System Power Supply and Batteries:
704618 28 31 52
1. Power supply is to be adequate to serve control panel and remote detectors,
including battery-operated emergency power supply with capacity for operating
system in standby mode for 4 hours followed by alarm mode for 5 minutes.
2. Batteries to be sized for operating the system in standby mode for 24 hours in the
absence of an automatic-starting engine-driven generator.
V. Equipment Approvals/Listing:
1. Factory Mutual (FM)-approved.
2. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)-listed.
1.4 REFERENCES

1. AC: Alternating current (AC)
2. AHJ: Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ)
3. DC: Direct current (DC)
4. EWSD: Early warning smoke detection (EWSD)
5. FM: Factory Global (Factory Mutual (FM))
6. HLI: High Level Integration (HLI)
7. NEC: National Electric Code (NEC)
8. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
9. UL: Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Manufacturer’s catalog data, to include material description, agency approval, and listing.
C. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements
for this Section.
D. Shop Drawings:
1. Provide mounting details of detectors, displays, programmers, power supplies
and other boxes to building structure, showing fastener type, sizes, material, and
embedded depth where applicable.
2. Air sampling pipe, fittings and pipe details including pipe routing and support.
3. The following Calculations and Wiring Diagrams shall also be included on the
shop drawings:
a. Provide calculations for the battery stand-by power supply taking into
consideration the power requirements of all auxiliary components under
full load conditions. Include battery size calculations.
b. Show system components, including detectors and cabinets, locations,
quantities, and full schematic of system wiring showing conductor size,
routings, quantities and connection details.
4. Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show ceiling penetrations, ceiling-mounted items, and
method of attaching hangers to building structure.
5. System Performance Calculations:
704618 28 31 52
a. Submit report generated from Manufacturer’s system performance
calculation program illustrating performance criteria such as transport
time to the detector. The system transport time shall not exceed 60
seconds from the furthest sampling point back to the detector.
6. A complete sequence of operation.
E. Permit Approved Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to local codes and
standards, that have been approved by Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Include design
calculations.
F. Maintenance data
G. Warranty information
A. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70 (National Electric Code -NEC.) Where
required by authority having jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be listed
and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable
to the AHJ, in order to provide a basis for approval under the above listed agency.
B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by UL

shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark or label.
E. Contractor Qualifications:
1. All contractors involved with the design and installation of EWSD systems shall
be very experienced with the systems that they are designing / installing per the
occupancy use. A minimum of 5 years experience in the installation of EWSD
systems and a NICET level III fire alarm technician or equivalent on staff to
supervise the design and installation is required.
2. The installing contractor shall have successfully passed advanced certification
training and be listed by the EWSD system Manufacturer as an accredited
contractor, trained and certified to model, design, install, program, test and
maintain the EWSD system and shall be able to produce a certificate stating such
upon request.
F. Testing Technicians Qualifications:

1. Testing technicians of EWSD systems shall be trained and qualified by the
EWSD system Manufacturer in the proper operation of the system per the
occupancy use.
2. System testing technicians or others conducting system programming,
certification, power up, and system commissioning shall have had advanced
certification training, be listed by the EWSD system Manufacturer as an
704618 28 31 52
accredited contractor and shall be able to produce a certificate stating such upon
request.
3. Testing technicians shall be an accredited NICET Level II (or greater) or
equivalent fire alarm technician to perform such work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. Xtralis, Inc.
2.2 DETECTORS
A. VESDA VEP-1P (1-pipe version)
B. VESDA VEP-4P (4-pipe version).
2.3 CONTROL PANEL AND DISPLAYS
A. Provides real-time status indication and zone control:

1. Capable of being mounted remotely or integral to detector.
2. Capable of displaying smoke detection levels for each zone.
3. Operating voltage to by 24 Vdc.
4. Capable of performing reset, test, isolate and silence functions.
5. Capable of being mounted in a 19-inch rack.
2.4 POWER SUPPLY
A. Early warning smoke detection power supplies:

1. Power supply to be by the same manufacturer as the EWSD Controller unit it is
supplying.
2. Input voltage to be 120 Vac supervised.
3. To contain 4-hour battery backup and use an additional battery cabinet, if
required.
4. Power supply and batteries to be mounted in their own lockable enclosure (self-
contained).
5. Output voltage to controller units to be 24 Vdc power limited.
6. To contain fault reporting of a ground fault and/or alternating current (AC) input
loss, low AC input voltage, short circuit of battery leads and short circuit of any
direct current (DC) output.
7. Not to exceed the output limitations as recommended by the manufacturer.
2.5 AIR SAMPLING PIPE, CAPILLARY TUBING, REMOTE SAMPLING POINTS, FITTINGS
AND MOUNTING HARDWARE
A. Material for sampling pipe, capillary tubing, remote sampling points and associated
fittings shall be in accordance with Manufacturer’s guidelines, local codes and standards.
704618 28 31 52
B. Pipe and tubing inside diameter shall be in accordance with Manufacturer’s guidelines
and as specified in air sampling pipe distribution software modeling tool.
C. Pipe and tubing interior shall be smooth bore.
D. Pipe and tubing shall be marked with the listing information and marking requirements as
per local codes and standards.
E. All fittings shall be made with compatible pre-formed elbows, tees, couplings, end caps
and unions.
F. All joints in the sampling pipe must be air tight and made by using compatible solvent
cement, except at entry to the detector.
G. Mechanical pipe fasteners and hangers shall be approved for use with the pipe material in
which it is supporting. Fasteners and hangars shall allow pipe to freely slide in and out to
facilitate expansion and contraction of the material. The sampling pipe to be constructed
with manufacturer-approved pipe and fittings.
2.6 NETWORKED SYSTEMS
A. VESDAnet System:
1. Description: VESDA detectors, display modules, or programmer units linked on
a daisy-chained loop. Allows remote configuration, monitoring, control, and
programming.
2. Network Communication: two-wire fault tolerant closed-loop system. Network
units polled sequentially for alarms, faults, or trouble conditions.
3. High-Level Interface: Integrates VESDAnet networks with host platforms such
fire alarm control panels and computer workstations.
2.7 COMPUTER WORKSTATION
A. VESDA System Management (VSM) software package allows remote configuration and
monitoring from central location via VESDA net communication loop.
2.8 SOFTWARE
A. The latest versions of system configuration, testing and modeling software to be provided
to Owner.
B. Required software and communication hardware for communication, configuration and

testing to the building fire alarm system.
C. Required hardware devices for communication, configuration and testing of system

equipment to be provided to Owner.
704618 28 31 52
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with local codes and standards, and in accordance with the Manufacturer’s
written instructions for installation of EWSD systems.
B. Air Sampling Smoke Detector

1. Detector shall be installed in accordance with this Specification and the
Manufacturer’s written installation and instruction manuals.
2. Detector assembly shall be mounted to a wall in the protected room at a height of
approximately 48 inches to 60 inches to top of detector measured above finished
floor.
3. Mounting location shall be a fully accessible and visible location.
4. Mounting or attachment to site equipment, cable trays, movable walls, other
equipment or equipment supports is not permitted without express written
approval.
5. Piping network insertion into the detector inlet shall not be glued.
6. Flexible tubing for termination of the sampling pipe network into detector inlet is
not permitted.
7. In seismic zones installation techniques shall be in compliance with the
geographical seismic zone requirements per the AHJ.
C. Pipe Mounting
1. The air sampling pipe network shall be mounted in accordance with the
Manufacturer’s written installation and instruction manuals, and local codes and
standards. The hardware used for mounting will depend upon the design and site
requirements.
2. To minimize flexing the pipes shall be secured every 5ft.
3. When installing a pipe network in areas subject to high temperature fluctuations
allow for the contraction and expansion of pipes.
4. Where expansion or contraction of pipes is likely either after installation or on a
continuous basis, do not place pipe clips adjacent to couplings and socket unions
as these may interfere with the movement of the pipe.
5. No bends are permitted within the first 18 inches from the detector inlet.
6. Piping shall be mounted as close to the ceiling as possible.
7. The routing of the piping network shall be coordinated with potential
obstructions, including cable trays, grounding bars, and HVAC ductwork.
8. All changes in direction shall be made with standard elbows or tees.
9. All joints shall be air-tight and made by using solvent cement, except at the entry
to the detector assembly. Refer to ASTM F402-88 standard practice for safe
handling of solvent cements, primers and cleaners used for joining thermoplastic
pipe and fittings.
10. Flexible tubing for termination of the sampling pipe network into detector inlet is
not permitted.
11. All pipes shall be supported by mechanical hangers attached to the structure of
the building. Not more than one foot of pipe shall extend beyond the last hanger
of each sampling pipe. The final installation shall result in no noticeable
deflection in the piping network.
704618 28 31 52
12. Attachment of air sampling pipe networks to cable trays is prohibited.
13. Air sampling pipe network shall be labeled with the detector Manufacturer’s
standard identification marking at least 20ft intervals.
14. Placement of the air sampling pipe network shall take into consideration
appropriate sampling point locations and spacing.
15. All air sampling pipe network penetrations of fire-rated partitions shall be sealed
with a listed and/or approved through-penetration firestop material.
16. Swarf and other debris accumulated in air sampling pipe network during
installation and assembly shall be removed by negative airflow prior to
connection to the detector inlet(s).
D. Capillary Sampling Network:

1. In areas with an accessible ceiling the sampling pipe network shall be installed
above the ceiling with remote sampling points extending through the accessible
ceiling using appropriate lengths of 0.375 inch inside diameter capillary tubing
attached to remote sampling points. Remote sampling point locations shall align
in center of acoustical ceiling tiles where possible provided spacing meets the
requirements of this Specification. Appearance shall be uniform in terms of
sampling point row alignment. Coordinate layout with T-Bar grid.
2. The maximum length of the capillary tube shall be 26ft.
3. An additional 2ft of capillary tubing shall be provided for each drop to permit
future relocation of remote sampling points (not to exceed 26ft limitation).
4. Remote sampling points shall be labeled with the Manufacturer’s standard
identification marking.
5. Capillary tube and attachment to sampling pipe network shall be that required by
the Manufacturer.
E. Locate and install the detector assembly for optimum response time.
F. Install the sampling pipe network in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations. Make necessary adjustments for optimal air sampling.
G. Coordinate the mounting and penetration of sampling pipe with mechanical equipment
installation and structural elements.
H. Clean exterior of exposed sampling pipe of dirt and markings.
3.2 INITIAL COMMISSIONING SETTINGS
A. Initial Commissioning Settings for EWSD system.

1. Alarm threshold settings for air sampling smoke detection apparatuses shall be
configured to achieve target port sensitivities above recorded average ambient
peak level of 0.20 percent obs/ft for Alert, 0.6 percent obs/ft for Action, 1.0
percent obs/ft for Fire 1, and 2.5 percent obs/ft for Fire 2. Data review and
analysis shall consider the normal base line or ambient pollutant level recorded,
as well as all deviations from the established base line as recorded by the
apparatuses event log. The recorded data shall then be used in conjunction with
the following formulas to calculate alarm thresholds:
704618 28 31 52
a. Fire 2 – Divide target sampling port sensitivity of 2.5 percent obs/ft by
number of holes in overall system pipe network then add the recorded
average ambient peak level to derive at the Fire 2 alarm threshold.
b. Fire 1 – Divide target sampling port sensitivity of 1 percent obs/ft by
average ambient peak level to derive at the Fire 1 alarm threshold.
c. Action – Divide target sampling port sensitivity of 0.60 percent obs/ft by
average ambient peak level to derive at the Action threshold.
d. Alert – Divide target sampling port sensitivity of 0.20 percent obs/ft by
average ambient peak level to derive at the Alert threshold.
B. Air sampling detection apparatuses which permit scheduling of sensitivity thresholds by

date and/or time shall be programmed to use the same sensitivity thresholds specified
herein 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
C. Time delays are intended to mitigate nuisance signals as a result of transient conditions.
The following time delays shall be programmed into each detector apparatus:
1. Fire 2: 30 seconds.
2. Fire 1: 15 seconds.
3. Action: 30 seconds.
4. Alert: 30 seconds.
5. Airflow fault delay: 60 seconds.
6. Scan Delay (four zone air sampling detector apparatuses): 15 seconds.
7. Filter Fault: 1825 days.
3.3 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
A. Complete the fire alarm system acceptance testing for EWSD system.
3.4 QUALITY CONTROL
A. The system to be installed, tested, and adjusted under the supervision of the manufacturer
representative.
B. Ten days prior to the test, a data logger is to be installed to monitor background ambient
conditions for each zone. Document tests.
C. At the completion of the installation, the system to be tested in accordance with the
manufacturer's test and commissioning procedures in the presence of the Owner and
under the supervision of the manufacturer’s representative. Testing to include the
following:
1. Verify the completed system is free from grounded or open circuits.
2. Perform airflow, fault, and sensitivity tests on the complete installed system.
Perform time-delay tests for detector response using a data logger. Adjust the
time-delay settings to avoid unwanted alarms. Document tests.
3. Perform tests on system response to verify it is within the specified range.
Expose canned smoke, approved by Owner for use in the area, in the air stream a
704618 28 31 52
minimum of 6 feet upstream from the farthest sampling point and record system
response time and the duration of the canned smoke release to trigger low and
high alarms. Check for sampling pipe integrity and pipe blockage. Correct any
problems and repeat test.
4. During normal operating conditions, should the detector assembly's sensitivity be
exceeded by the contaminants in the air, it is to be replaced with a detector that is
less sensitive.
5. Perform tests to indicate that alarm-initiating devices and supervisory devices are
operating normally and system output signals are tied into the building fire
detection and alarm system.
D. Defects to be corrected at once and the test reconducted at no additional cost to the
Owner.
3.5 TRAINING
A. Provide the Owner a minimum of 4 hours of instruction for six technicians in the
operation and maintenance of the system and test equipment.
704618 28 31 52
WITH BID
28 31 52-01 Engineering calculations that include the Per construction schedule
maximum smoke transport time from the last
sampling point and airflow balance details
from each sampling point.
28 31 52-02 Installation drawings showing details of the Per construction schedule
sampling pipe network proposed layout,
piping isometrics, and sampling hole sizes and
locations.
28 31 52-03 After approval of shop drawings, provide final Per construction schedule
calculations.
28 31 52-04 Manufacturer's letter stating that system is Per construction schedule
operational.
28 31 52-05 Manufacturer's certificate stating that system Per construction schedule
meets or exceeds specified requirements.
28 31 52-06 Completed system checkout field report with Per construction schedule
copies of system response tests.
END OF SECTION
704618 28 31 52

CE-01 Electrical LSS Telecom IFC Specs

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CE-01 Electrical LSS Telecom IFC Specs

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Micron Technology, Inc.

Seal Applies to Civil Design Seal Applies to Process Design

Lic. No. 18256

2019.04.25 09:47:31-07'00' Jacobs

Lic. No. 32531 DONALD EDWARD MARTENS

2019.04.25 09:39:57-07'00' Expires: 12-31-2020

Communications Horizontal Cabling - CP Utilization Cable Schedule Telecommunications 0 4/25/2019

SUMMARY – CE-01 Electrical, LSS, Telecommunications

1.2 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION

Summary – CE-01 Electrical, LSS,

Summary – CE-01 Electrical, LSS,

Summary – CE-01 Electrical, LSS,

1.3 SPECIFICATION CONVENTIONS

1.4 SPECIFICATIONS NOT INCLUDED

Summary – CE-01 Electrical, LSS,

704618 Administrative Requirements

Hoffman Construction Company

2. Duties and responsibilities of the Contractor regarding the Contract Document

704618 Administrative Requirements

F. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials to mean hazardous substances as defined in

G. Substantial Completion: Project, or a specific portion of Project, is constructed and ready

H. Final Completion: Project, or a specific portion of Project, is constructed, Completion

I. Other Common Terms:

1.3 COORDINATION AND PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of various sections of Project Manual to

B. Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible

704618 Administrative Requirements

E. Coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate sections in preparation for

1.4 SURVEYING AND UTILITY LOCATION

A. Employ Land Surveyor registered in Manassas, Virginia.

C. Control datum for survey is that established by Owner provided survey.

D. Verify set-backs and easements; confirm drawing dimensions and elevations.

704618 Administrative Requirements

K. Promptly report to CH2M loss or destruction of reference point or relocation required

1.5 GEOTECHNICAL SERVICES

A. Employ Geotechnical Engineer registered in Manassas, Virginia.

B. Geotechnical Engineering scope items include the following:

1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. Schedule meeting after Notice of Award.

B. Attendance Required: Owner, CH2M, and Contractor.

704618 Administrative Requirements

A. Schedule meeting at Project site prior to Contractor occupancy.

B. Attendance Required: Owner, CH2M, Special Consultants, Contractor, and Contractor’s

1.8 PROGRESS MEETINGS

C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major subcontractors and suppliers, Owner,

704618 Administrative Requirements

1.9 PHYSICAL COORDINATION MEETINGS AND 3D MODELING

C. Conduct Contractor coordination meetings during construction, as outlined in the BIM

1.10 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. When required in individual specification sections, convene pre-installation meetings at

C. Notify CH2M four days in advance of meeting date.

D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:

704618 Administrative Requirements

1.12 CONFLICTS WITH OR WITHIN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1.13 CODES AND STANDARDS

2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

704618 Administrative Requirements

D. See additional product warranty requirements under Section 01 70 00 – Execution and

3.1 WORK LIMITATIONS

B. Provide as little inconvenience as possible to Owner occupants of existing structures.

E. Cameras or use of cameras on the property without permission of Owner is prohibited.

704618 Administrative Requirements

3.2 CONSTRUCTION ENVIRONMENT, HEALTH, AND SAFETY